GRAMMAR 


LATIN    LANGUAGE-}.. 


USE   OF   SCHOOLS   AND   COLLEGES. 


E.   A.  ANDREWS  AND    S.  STODDARD. 

I  I 


The  Fifty-eighth    Edition. 

CAREFULLY    REVISED    AND    CORRECTED, 
BY    E.    A.    ANDREWS,    LL.D. 


BOSTON: 
PUBLISHED    BY    CROCKER   AND    BREWSTER, 

47  WASHINGTON  STREET. 

For  sale  by  the  Booksellers  in  New  York,  Philadelphia, 
Baltimore,  and  other  Cities. 

1856. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1849, 

BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


STEREOTYPED  AT  THE 
BOSTON  TYPE  AND  STEREOTYPE  FOUNDRY 


PREFACE. 


THE  Grarnrnai  here  presented  to  the  public  originated  in  a 
design,  formed  several  years  since,  of  preparing  a  new  edition 
of  Adam's  Latin  Grammar,  with  such  additions  and  corrections 
as  the  existing  state  of  classical  learning  plainly  demanded. 
We  had  not  proceeded  far  in  the  execution  of  this  purpose, 
before  we  were  impressed  with  the  conviction,  which  our  subse- 
quent researches  continually  confirmed,  that  the  defects  in  that 
manual  were  so  numerous,  and  of  so  fundamental  a  character, 
that  they  could  not  be  removed  without  a  radical  change  in  the 
plan  of  the  work. 

Since  the  first  publication  of  that  Grammar,  rapid  advances 
have  been  made  in  the  science  of  philology,  both  in  Great 
Britain  and  upon  the  continent  of  Europe.  In  the  mean  time, 
no  corresponding  change  has  been  made  in  that  work,  and, 
after  the  lapse  of  half  a  century,  it  still  continues,  in  its  origi- 
nal form,  to  occupy  its  place  in  most  of  the  public  and  private 
schools  in  this  country.  For  this  continuance  of  public  favor 
it  has  been  indebted,  partly  to  a  greater  fulness  of  detail  than 
was  found  in  the  small  grammars  which  it  has  superseded,  partly 
to  the  reluctance  so  commonly  felt  to  lay  aside  a  manual  with 
which  all  are  familiar ;  but,  principally,  to  the  acknowledged 
fact,  that  the  grammars  which  have  been  proposed  as  substitutes, 
not  excepting  even  those  translated  from  the  German,  though 
often  replete  with  philosophical  views  of  the  highest  interest, 
have  still  been  destitute  of  many  of  the  essential  requisites  of  a 
complete  introduction  to  the  Latin  language. 

Instead,  therefore,  of  prosecuting  our  original  purpose,  we  at 
length  determined  to  mould  our  materials  into  a  form  corre- 


V  PREFACE. 

spending  with  the  advanced  state  of  Latin  and  Greek  philology. 
With  this  view,  we  have  devoted  much  time  to  a  careful  exami- 
nation of  such  works  as  promised  to  afford  us  the  most  material 
assistance.  From  every  source,  to  which  we  could  gain  access, 
we  have  drawn  whatever  principles  appeared  to  us  most  impor- 
tant. These  we  have  sometimes  expressed  in  the  words  of  the 
author  from  whom  they  were  derived  ;  but,  in  general,  we  have 
preferred  to  exhibit  them  in  our  own  language.  The  whole, 
with  the  exception  of  three  or  four  pages  only,  has  been  sent  to 
the  compositor  in  manuscript. 

The  limits  of  a  preface  will  allow  us  to  notice  but  a  few  of 
the  more  prominent  peculiarities  of  the  following  work. 

To  insure  a  correct  and  uniform  pronunciation  of  the  Latin 
language,  our  experience  had  satisfied  us,  that  rules  more  copi- 
ous and  exact  than  any  now  in  use  were  greatly  needed.  In 
presenting  the  rules  of  orthoepy  contained  in  this  Grammar,  it 
is  not  our  object  to  introduce  innovation,  but  to  produce  uni- 
formity. This  we  have  endeavored  to  effect  by  exhibiting,  in  as 
clear  a  light  as  possible,  the  principles  of  pronunciation  adopted 
in  the  schools  and  universities  of  England,  and  in  the  principal 
colleges  of  this  country.  If  these  rules  are  regarded,  the  stu- 
dent can  seldom  be  at  a  loss  respecting  the  pronunciation  of  any 
Latin  word. 

As  an  incorrect  pronunciation  may  generally  be  referred  to 
the  errors  into  which  the  student  is  permitted  to  fall  while  learn- 
ing the  paradigms  of  the  grammar,  we  have  endeavored  to  pre- 
vent the  possibility  of  mistake  in  these,  by  dividing  the  words 
according  to  their  pronunciation,  and  marking  the  accented 
syllable.  If  the  instructor  will  see  that  the  words  are  at  first 
pronounced  as  they  are  set  down  in  the  paradigms,  he  will  not 
afterwards  be  compelled  to  submit  to  the  mortifying  labor  of 
correcting  bad  habits,  when  they  have  become  nearly  inveterate. 
Wherever  a  Latin  word  is  introduced,  its  quantity  is  carefully 
marked,  except  in  those  cases  in  which  it  may  be  determined 
by  the  general  rules  in  the  thirteenth  section.  As  the  para- 
digms are  divided  and  accented,  it  may  not,  in  general,  be  expe- 


PREFACE.  V 

client  for  the  student  to  learn  the  rules  of  pronunciation  at  his 
entrance  upon  the  study  of  the  Grammar.  It  will  be  sufficient 
for  him,  at  first,  to  understand  the  principles  of  accentuation  in 
the  fourteenth  and  fifteenth  sections.  The  remaining  rules  he 
can  gradually  acquire  as  he  proceeds  in  his  study  of  the  lan- 
guage. 

The  materials  for  the  subsequent  departments  of  the  Gram- 
mar have  been  drawn  from  various  sources,  most  of  which  need 
not  be  particularly  specified.  It  is  proper,  however,  that,  in  this 
place,  we  should,  once  for  all,  acknowledge  our  obligations  to 
the  Grammars  of  Scheller,  Zumpt,  and  Grant,  and  to  the  Dic- 
tionaries of  Gesner  and  Facciolatus. 

The  paradigms  of  Adam's  Grammar,  as  being  generally  known, 
have  been  retained,  excepting  a  few,  which  were  liable  to  valid 
objections.  Penna  was  rejected,  because,  in  the  sense  assigned 
to  it  of  a  pen,  it  is  totally  destitute  of  classical  authority.  In- 
stead of  this,  musa,  which  is  found  in  the  older  grammars,  has 
been  restored.  In  the  third  declension,  several  additional  exam- 
ples have  been  introduced. 

Under  adjectives,  the  different  kinds  of  comparison,  and  the 
mode  of  forming  each,  have  been  explained.  The  terminations 
of  the  comparative  and  superlative  are  referred,  like  every  other 
species  of  inflection,  to  the  root  of  the  word. 

In  treating  of  the  pronouns,  we  have  aimed  so  to  arrange  the 
several  classes,  as  to  exhibit  their  peculiar  characteristics  in  a 
clear  and  intelligible  manner. 

The  compounds  of  sum  are  given  in  connection  with  that 
verb.  In  the  second  conjugation,  moneo  has  been  substituted 
for  doceo,  as  the  latter  is  irregular  in  its  third  root.  In  the 
third  conjugation,  also,  rego  has  been  taken  instead  of  lego,  as 
the  latter  is  irregular  in  its  second  root,  and,  from  its  peculiar 
signification,  cannot  properly  be  used  in  the  first  and  second 
persons  of  the  passive  voice. 

In  every  conjugation  except  the  first,  the  active  and  passive 
voices  have  been  so  arranged  as  to  show  the  relation  of  their 
corresponding  tenses. 


VI  PREFACE. 

The  derivation  of  the  several  parts  of  the  verb  from  the  root 
is  exhibited  in  a  peculiar  manner,  and  such  as  we  have  found 
in  practice  to  render  the  varieties  of  termination,  both  in  regu- 
lar and  irregular  verbs,  peculiarly  easy  to  be  retained  in  memory. 
Every  part  of  the  verb  is  shown  to  be  naturally  derived,  either 
immediately  or  mediately,  from  its  primary  root.  The  mode  of 
forming  the  secondary  roots,  and  the  terminations  to  be  added 
to  them  and  to  the  primary  root  respectively,  in  order  to  form 
the  various  tenses,  are  fully  exhibited. 

In  each  conjugation,  those  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots 
are  either  irregular  or  wanting,  are  arranged  alphabetically,  in 
order  to  render  a  reference  to  them  as  easy  as  possible. 

In  constructing  the  tables  of  verbs,  and  occasionally  in  other 
parts  of  etymology,  we  have  derived  essential  aid  from  Hickie's 
Grammar,  and  we  trust  that  the  information  resulting  from  his 
researches,  in  relation  to  the  parts  of  verbs  in  actual  use,  will 
be  esteemed  not  only  curious  but  important.  To  a  considerable 
extent,  we  have  verified  his  statements  by  our  own  investiga- 
tions ;  in  consequence  of  which,  however,  some  changes  have 
been  made  in  the  parts  of  certain  verbs  as  exhibited  by  him. 

The  rules  of  syntax  contained  in  this  work  result  directly 
from  the  analysis  of  propositions,  and  of  compound  sentences  ; 
and  for  this  reason  the  student  should  make  himself  perfectly 
familiar  with  the  sections  relating  to  subject  and  predicate,  and 
should  be  able  readily  to  analyze  sentences,  whether  simple 
or  compound,  and  to  explain  their  structure  and  connection. 
For  this  purpose,  it  is  generally  expedient  to  begin  with  simple 
English  sentences,  and  to  proceed  gradually  to  such  as  are  more 
complex.  When  in  some  degree  familiar  with  these,  he  will  be 
able  to  enter  upon  the  analysis  of  Latin  sentences.  This 
exercise  should  always  precede  the  more  minute  and  subsidiary 
labor  of  parsing.  If  the  latter  be  conducted,  as  it  often  is, 
independently  of  previous  analysis,  the  principal  advantage  to  be 
derived  from  the  study  of  language,  as  an  intellectual  exercise 
will  inevitably  be  lost.  The  practice  which  we  would  respectfully 
recommend  is  that  which  we  have  presented  at  the  close  of 


PREFACE.  Vll 

Syntax  under  the  head  "Analysis."  When  language  is  studied 
in  this  way,  it  ceases  to  be  a  tiresome  and  mechanical  employ- 
ment, and  not  only  affords  one  of  the  most  perfect  exercises  of 
the  intellectual  faculties,  but,  in  a  short  time,  becomes  a  most 
agreeable  recreation. 

In  the  syntax  of  this  Grammar,  it  is  hoped  that  nothing  essen- 
tial which  is  contained  in  larger  grammars,  has  been  omitted. 
Our  object  has  been  in  this,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  work,  to 
unite  the  comprehensive  views  and  philosophical  arrangement  of 
the  German  philologists  with  the  fulness  and  minuteness  of  the 
English  grammarians.  In  no  German  grammar  that  we  have 
seen,  is  the  language  well  adapted  to  the  capacity  of  the  younger 
classes  of  students,  or  such  as  to  be  conveniently  quoted  in  the 
recitation-room.  These  defects  we  have  endeavored  to  remedy, 
by  expressing  the  rules  of  syntax  in  as  simple  and  precise 
language  as  possible.  In  the  arrangement  of  the  syntax,  we 
have  followed  the  order  of  the  various  cases  and  moods,  so  that 
whatever  relates  to  each  subject  will  be  found  under  its  appro- 
priate head,  and  the  connection  of  different  subjects  is  pointed 
out  by  references  from  one  part  to  another.  In  the  distribution 
of  the  subordinate  parts,  we  have  endeavored  to  exhibit  in  the 
clearest  manner  their  mutual  relation  and  dependence. 

The  sections  relating  to  the  use  of  moods  have  received  par- 
ticular attention,  as  it  is  in  this  part,  perhaps,  more  than  in  any 
other,  that  the  common  grammars  are  deficient.  Upon  this 
subject,  in  addition  to  the  sources  before  enumerated,  we  have 
derived  important  aid  from  Carson's  treatise  on  the  relative,  and 
from  Crombie's  Gymnasium. 

The  foundation  of  the  prosody  which  is  here  presented,  is  to 
be  found  in  the  more  extended  treatises  of  Carey  and  Grant,  and 
in  that  contained  in  Rees's  Cyclopaedia.  From  various  other 
sources,  also,  occasional  assistance  has  been  derived ;  but  in 
this,  as  in  every  other  part  of  the  Grammar,  we  have  given 
to  the  materials  such  a  form  as  seemed  best  adapted  to  our 
purpose. 

Extended    discussions  of   grammatical    principles   we   have 


Vlll  PREFACE. 

every  where  omitted,  as  foreign  to  the  design  of  our  work,  but 
have  endeavored  to  present  the  results  of  such  discussions  in 
the  manner  most  likely  to  serve  the  practical  purposes  of  the 
student. 

A  prominent  object  in  the  composition  of  this  Grammar,  and 
one  which  we  have  endeavored  to  keep  constantly  before  our 
minds,  was  the  introduction  of  greater  precision  in  rules  and 
definitions,  than  is  usually  to  be  found  in  works  of  this  kind. 
To  this  feature  of  our  work  we  would  respectfully  invite  the 
reader's  attention.  It  will  be  found,  if  we  mistake  not,  that,  in 
the  language  of  many  of  the  grammars  in  common  use,  there 
is  such  inaccuracy,  as  well  as  indefiniteness,  that  many  parts,  if 
taken  independently  of  examples,  and  of  the  explanations  of 
the  teacher,  would  be  wholly  unintelligible.  This  is  especially 
the  case  in  the  rules  of  syntax.  Take,  for  example,  the  com- 
mon rule,  "  A  verb  agrees  with  its  nominative  in  number  and 
person/'  Whether  the  nominative  intended  is  that  which,  in 
construction,  precedes,  or  that  which  follows,  the  verb,  or, 
in  other  words,  whether  it  is  the  subject-nominative,  or  the 
predicate-nominative,  is  left  undetermined. 

So  in  the  rule,  "  One  substantive  governs  another  signifying 
a  different  thing  in  the  genitive,"  there  is  no  intimation  that  the 
two  substantives  have  any  relation  whatever  to  each  other ;  it  is 
not  even  required  that  they  shall  stand  in  the  same  proposition. 
The  only  condition  is,  that  they  shall  signify  different  things. 
Any  one  substantive,  therefore,  governs  any  other  substantive 
n  the  genitive,  whenever  and  however  used,  and,  in  its  turn,  is 
governed  in  like  manner  by  that  other,  provided  they  signify 
different  things. 

In  like  manner  the  rule,  "  One  verb  governs  another  in  the 
infinitive/'  contains  no  limitation  or  restriction  of  any  kind. 
The  least  that  the  student  can  be  expected  to  infer  from  it 
is,  that  any  verb  may,  in  certain  circumstances,  govern  an 
infinitive  ;  and  this  inference  we  know  has  actually  been  made 
by  some  respectable  teachers.  One  who  has  formed  such  a 
conclusion  may  well  be  surprised  to  find  that  the  number  of 


PREFACE.  IX 

verbs  followed  by  the  infinitive  without  a  subject-accusative,  is 
very  small,  and  that  no  inconsiderable  portion  of  the  verbs  of 
the  language  cannot,  under  any  circumstances  whatever,  goverr 
an  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  such  accusative. 

Rules  of  this  kind  appear  to  have  been  intended  not  to  lead 
the  student  to  a  knowledge  of  the  structure  of  the  language, 
but  to  be  repeated  by  him  after  the  construction  has  been  fully 
explained  by  his  teacher.  Of  themselves,  therefore,  they  may 
be  said  to  teach  nothing.  Similar  remarks  might  be  made 
respecting  a  very  large  proportion  of  the  common  rules  of 
syntax,  as  will  be  obvious  to  any  one  who  will  take  the  trouble 
of  subjecting  them  to  a  rigid  scrutiny.  As  the  object  of  syntax 
is  to  exhibit  the  relations  of  words  and  propositions,  no  rule 
can  be  considered  as  otherwise  than  imperfect,  which  leaves  the 
nature  and  even  the  existence  of  those  relations  wholly  inde- 
terminate. An  active  verb,  for  example,  may,  in  general,  be 
followed  by  at  least  three  different  cases,  in  order  to  express 
what  are  sometimes  called  its  immediate  and  its  remote  objects, 
and  also  some  attendant  circumstance  of  time,  place,  instru- 
ment, &c.  To  say,  then,  that  "  A  verb  signifying  actively 
governs  the  accusative,"  can  give  no  precise  information,  unless 
we  specify  which  of  its  relations  is  denoted  by  this  case. 

The  fault  to  which  we  have  now  alluded,  seems,  in  many 
cases,  to  have  arisen  from  an  excessive  desire  of  brevity,  and 
to  have  been  perpetuated  by  the  aversion  so  commonly  felt  to 
change  a  form  of  phraseology  to  which,  however  defective  in 
its  original,  custom  has  at  length  attached  a  definite  meaning. 
In  cases  of  this  kind,  we  have  not  scrupled  to  make  such 
changes,  both  in  rules  and  definitions,  as  the  nature  of  the  case 
seemed  to  us  to  demand  ;  but,  in  doing  this,  we  have  not  for- 
gotten the  importance  of  uniting  brevity  with  precision. 

In  regard  to  the  manner  in  which  this  work  was  composed, 
we  would  merely  remark,  that  the  labor  has  been  in  every  re- 
spect a  mutual  one.  The  hand  and  mind  of  each  have  been 
repeatedly  employed  upon  every  part,  until  it  has  at  length 
become  impossible  even  for  ourselves  to  recollect  the  share 


X  PREFACE. 

which  each  has  had  in  bringing  the  work  to  its  present  state. 
Of  each  and  every  part,  therefore,  it  may  be  safely  said  that 
we  are  the  joint  authors  ;  and  hence,  whatever  of  praise  or 
blame  may  attach  to  any  part,  must  be  shared  equally  by  each. 
In  commending  to  the  patronage  of  the  public  a  work  on 
which  so  large  a  portion  of  our  thoughts  has  been  for  several 
years  employed,  we  will  not  pretend  indifference  to  its  fate.  It 
was  begun  under  a  conviction,  derived  from  the  experience  of 
many  years  in  teaching  the  ancient  languages,  that  a  Latin 
grammar,  different  in  many  respects  from  any  with  which  we 
were  acquainted,  was  greatly  needed  in  our  schools  and  colleges 
Had  we  contemplated  the  amount  of  labor  which  its  execution 
would  impose  upon  us,  we  might  probably  have  shrunk  from 
the  attempt,  encumbered  as  we  were  with  other  employments. 
At  every  step,  however,  our  labor  has  been  cheered  by  the 
greater  familiarity  which  we  have  acquired  with  the  best  of  the 
Roman  writers,  and  by  the  hope  that  the  result  might  be  of 
service  to  others  in  forming  an  acquaintance  with  the  same 
immortal  authors.  Should  the  verdict  of  an  enlightened  public 
decide,  that,  in  this  respect,  we  have  been  successful,  we  shall 
feel  ourselves  fully  recompensed  for  our  labor,  in  the  satisfac- 
tion of  having  contributed,  in  however  humble  a  degree,  to 
promote  the  cause  of  classical  literature,  and  consequently  of 
sound  learning,  among  our  countrymen. 

Boston,  April  8,  1836. 

ADVERTISEMENT  TO  THE  FORTY-SIXTH  EDITION. 

THIS  edition  has  been  revised,  and  the  errors  noticed  in  former  editions 
carefully  corrected.  A  few  passages  have  been  remodelled,  and  occasional 
deficiencies  supplied.  The  present  editor,  now  the  sole  surviving  author  of 
the  work,  gladly  avails  himself  of  this  renewed  opportunity  to  express  his 
gratitude  to  the  public  for  the  favor  so  long  and  so  liberally  bestowed  upon 
it,  and  his  hope  that  it  will  continue  hereafter  to  meet  with  similar  indul- 
gence. 

New  Britain,  Conn.,  April,  1854.  E.  A.  A. 


CONTENTS. 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 


Page. 


Division  of  letters 2 

Diphthongs 2 

Punctuation 2 

ORTHOEPY. 

Sounds  of  the  letters 3 

of  the  vowels 3 

of  the  diphthongs 4 

of  the  consonants 5 

Quantity  of  penultimate  and  final 

syllables 6 

Accentuation 7 

Division  of  words  into  syllables. .  8 

ETYMOLOGY. 

NOUNS 10 

Gender 11 

Number 14 

Cases 14 

Declensions 14 

First  declension 16 

Greek  nouns..... 17 

Second  declension 18 

Greek  nouns 21 

Third  declension 21 

Rules  for  the  gender 24 

oblique  cases.  27 

Greek  nouns. . .  • . 36 

Fourth  declension  .  * 37 

Fifth  declension.* 38 

Declension  of  compound  nouns  39 

Irregular  nouns  .«»»• 39 

Variable  nouns* . « 40 

Defective  nouns 41 

Redundant  nouns 47 

Derivation  of  nouns 49 

Composition  >f  nouns 53 

ADJECTIVES 54 

Adjectives  of  the  first  and  sec- 
ond declension 55 

Adjectives  of  the  third  declen- 
sion   57 

Rules  for  the  oblique  cases.  60 

Irregular  adjectives 61 

Defective  adjectives 61 

Redundant  adjectives 62 

Numeral  adjectives 63 

Comparison  of  adjectives  ....  67 


Pag* 

Irregular  comparison 6 

Defective  comparison 70 

Derivation  of  adjectives 72 

Composition  of  adjectives ....  74 

PRONOUNS 75 

Substantive  pronouns 76 

Adjective  pronouns 77 

Demonstrative  pronouns ...  77 

Intensive  pronouns 79 

Relative  pronouns 79 

Interrogative  pronouns  ....  80 

Indefinite  pronouns 82 

Possessive  pronouns 83 

Patrial  pronouns 83 

VERBS 83 

Moods 85 

Tenses 85 

Numbers 87 

Persons 87 

Participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines   83 

Conjugation 89 

Table  of  terminations 91 

Sum 93 

First  conjugation 96 

Second  conjugation 102 

Third  conjugation 105 

Fourth  conjugation Ill 

Deponent  verbs 114 

Remarks  on  the  conjugations  116 
Periphrastic  conjugations...  117 
General  rules  of  conjugation  119 
Formation  of  second  and  third 

roots 120 

First  conjugation 120 

Second  conjugation 124 

Third  conjugation 126 

Fourth  conjugation 133 

Irregular  verbs 135 

Defective  verbs 139 

Impersonal  verbs 141 

Redundant  verbs 143 

Derivation  of  verbs 146 

Composition  of  verbs 147 

ADVERBS 149 

Derivation  of  adverbs 151 

Composition  of  adverbs 153 

Comparison  of  adverbs 154 

PREPOSITIONS 154 

Prepositions  in  composition  .  155 


Xll 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 
CONJUNCTIONS 157 

INTERJECTIONS 159 


SYNTAX. 

Subject 

Predicate 

Sentences 

Apposition 

Adjectives 

Relatives 

Demonstratives,  &c 

Reflexives 

Nominative 

Subject-nominative  ana  verb 

Predicate-nominative 

Genitive 

Genitive  after  nouns 

after  partitives. . . . 

after  adjectives  . . . 

after  verbs 

— of  place 

after  particles 

Dative 

Dative  after  adjectives 

after  verbs 

-  after  particles 


Accusative 

Accusative  after  verbs. 

after  prepositions 

of  time  and  space 

of  place 

after  adverbs  and 

interjections 

Subject-accusative 

Vocative 

Ablative 

Ablative  after  prepositions  . . 

after  certain  nouns, 

adjectives,  and  verbs 

of  cause,  &c 

of  price 

— s of  time 

of  place 

after  comparatives  . 

-  absolute 


Connection  of  tenses 

Indicative  mood 

Subjunctive  mood 

Protasis  and  apodosis 

Subjunctive  after  particles. . 

after  qui 

•  in  indirect  ques- 


tions 


clauses  , 


in   intermediate 


160 
162 
163 
164 
166 
169 
172 
175 
176 
176 
181 
182 
182 
186 
188 
190 
194 
195 
195 
195 
197 
201 
202 
202 
207 
208 
209 

209 
210 
210 
211 
211 

212 
213 
217 
217 

218 
219 
222 
223 
225 
226 
228 
229 
232 

235 
235 


Page. 

Imperative  mood 237 

Infinitive  mood 237 

Participles 243 

Gerunds  and  gerundives 245 

Supines 247 

Adverbs 249 

Conjunctions 250 

Arrangement 251 

Arrangement  of  words 251 

of  clauses 254 

Analysis 254 

PROSODY. 

Quantity 259 

General  rules 259 

Special  rules 262 

First  and  middle  syllables.  262 

Derivative  words 262 

Compound  words 263 

Increment  of  nouns ....  265 

Increment  of  verbs 268 

Penultimate  and  antepe- 
nultimate syllables. . .  270 

Final  syllables 275 

Versification 279 

Feet 279 

Metre 280 

Verses 281 

282 
284 


Arsis  and 

Caesura 285 

Different  kinds  of  metre 286 

Dactylic  metre 286 

Anapaestic  metre 288 

Iambic  metre 289 

Trochaic  metre 290 

Choriambic  metre 291 

Ionic  metre '. 292 

Compound  metres 293 

Combination  of  verses 293 

Horatian  metres 294 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace  . .  296 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical  figures 298 

Tropes  and  figures  of  rhetoric  .  3 

Roman  mode  of  reckoning  time  304 


-money 


306 


Abbreviations 307 

Different  ages  of  Roman  litera- 
ture....?   308 

Writers  of  the  different  ages  . .  308 

INDEX..  .   311 


LATIN    GRAMMAR, 


<§>  1.     LATIN  GRAMMAR  teaches  the  principles  of    the 
Latin  Language. 

These  relate, 

1.  To  its  written  characters; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation  ; 

3.  To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.  To  the  construction  of  its  sentences  ; 

5.  To  the  quantity  of  its  syllables,  and  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography  ;  the  second,  Orthoepy 
the  third,  Etymology;  the  fourth,  Syntax;  and  the  fifth,  Prosody 


ORTHOGRAPHY. 

§  2.  Orthography  treats  of  the  letters,  and  other  char- 
acters of  a  language,  and  the  proper  mode  of  spelling 
words. 

The  letters  of  the  Latin  language  are  twenty-four.  They 
have  the  same  names  as  the  corresponding  characters  in  Eng- 
lish. They  are  A,  a;  B,  b;  C,  c;  D,  d;  E,  e;  F,  f;  G,  g; 
H,  h;  I,  i;  J,j;  L,  1;  M,m;  N,  n;  O,o;  P,  p;  a,  q;  B,,  r; 
S,s;  T,t;  U,u;  V,v;  X,x;  Y,y;  Z,  z. 

7  and  j  were  anciently  but  one  character,  as  were  likewise  u  and  v. 

W  is  not  found  in  Latin  words,  and  the  same  is  true  of  &,  except  at  th«* 
beginning  of  a  few  words  whose  second  letter  is  a;  and,  even  in  these, 
most  writers  make  use  of  c. 

Y  and  z  are  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek. 

H,  though  called  a  letter,  only  denotes  a  breathing,  or  aspiration 
1 


2  DIPHTHONGS.  -  PUNCTUATION.  §  3-5. 

DIVISION  OF  LETTERS. 
§  3.  \  Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants. 

the  vfcwels  are  J  .  ,       •  ............  a,  e,  *,  o,  w,  y,  .  .    6 

'  Liquids,  .........  I,  m,  n,  r,  .....    4 

*    Labials,...  p,  &,/>,) 

Palatics,  .  .  c,  #-,  g>t/,>  ----  10 


The 

divided  into        <  C  Linguals,  .  .  t,d, 

Sibilant,  ........  s,  ..........    1 

Double  letters,  ....  x,  2,  ........    2 

Aspirate,  ........  h,   ..........    1 

24 

X  is  equivalent  to  cs  or  #•$  ;  2  to  ts  or  e?s  ;  and,  except  in 
compound  words,  the  double  letter  is  always  written,  instead 
of  the  letters  which  it  represents. 

DIPHTHONGS. 

<§>  4.  Two  vowels,  in  immediate  succession,  in  the  same 
syllable,  are  called  a  diphthong. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  ai,  au,  ei,  eu,  oe,  oi,  ua,  ue,  uiy  uo, 
uuy  and  yi.  Ae  and  oe  are  frequently  written  together,  CB,  oe. 

PUNCTUATION. 

§  O»  The  only  mark  of  punctuation  used  by  the  ancients  was  a  point, 
which  denoted  pauses  of  different  length,  according  as  it  was  placed  at  the 
top,  the  middle,  or  the  bottom  of  the  line.  The  moderns  use  the  same 
marks,  in  writing  and  printing  Latin,  as  in  their  own  languages,  and  as- 
sign to  them  the  same  power. 

The  following  marks,  also,  are  sometimes  found  in  Latin 
authors,  especially  in  elementary  works  :  — 

w  —  «  The  first  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands 
is  short  ;  the  second,  that  it  is  long  ;  the  third,  that  it  is 
doubtful. 

A  This  is  called  the  circumflex  accent.  It  denotes  a  con- 
traction, and  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  is  always  long 

1  This  is  the  grave  accent,  and  is  sometimes  written  over 
particles,  to  distinguish  them  from  other  words  containing  the 
same  letters  ;  as,  quod,  because  ;  quod,  which. 

••  The  diaerosis  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands 
does  not  form  a  diphthong  with  the  preceding  vowel  ;  as,  aer, 
the  air.  It  is  used  principally  with  ae,  ai,  and  oe. 


6,  7.         ORTHOEPY. SOUNDS    OF    THE    VOWELS.  3 


ORTHOEPY. 

§  6.    Orthoepy  treats  of  the  right  pronunciation  of  words. 

The  ancient  pronunciation  of  the  Latin  language  being  in  a 
great  measure  lost,  the  learned,  in  modern  times,  have  applied  to 
it  those  principles  which  regulate  the  pronunciation  of  their  own 
languages ;  and  hence  has  arisen,  in  different  countries,  a  great 
diversity  of  practice. 

In  the  following  rules  for  dividing  and  pronouncing  the  words 
of  the  Latin  language,  we  have  endeavored  to  conform  to  Eng- 
lish analogy,  and  to  the  settled  principles  of  Latin  accent.  The 
basis  of  this  system  is  that  which  is  exhibited  by  Walker  in  his 
"  Pronunciation  of  Greek  and  Latin  Proper  Names."  To  pro- 
nounce correctly,  according  to  this  method,  a  knowledge  of  the 
following  particulars  is  requisite : — 

1.  Of  the  sounds  of  the  letters  in  all  their  combinations. 

2.  Of  the  quantities  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables. 

3.  Of  the  place  of  the  accent,  both  primary  and  secondary. 

4.  Of  the  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables. 

OF  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 
I.  OF  THE  VOWELS. 

§  7.  1 J  An  accented  vowel,  at  the  end  of  a  syllable, 
has  always  its  long  English  sound  ;  as, 

pa'-ter,  de'-dit,  vi'-vus,  to'-tus,  tu'-ba,  Ty'-rm ;  in  which  the 
accented  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  fatal,  metre,  vital, 
total,  tutor,  tyrant. 

E,  o,  and  u,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  have 
nearly  the  same  sound  as  when  accented,  but  shorter  and 
more  obscure ;  as,  re'-te,  vo'-lo,  ad-u-o. 

A,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  has  the  sound 
of  a  in  father,  or  in  ah ;  as,  mu'-sa,  e-pis'-to-la ;  pronounced 
mu'-sah,  &c. 

/,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  has  always  its  long  sound. 

So  also  in  the  first  syllable  of  a  word,  the  second  of  which  is 
accented,  when  either  the  i  stands  alone  before  a  consonant,  or 
ends  the  syllable  before  a  vowel ;  as,  i~do'-ne-us,  ji-e'-bam 
di-ur'-nus. 


4  SOUNDS    OF    THE    DIPHTHONGS.  §  8,  9. 

In  other  cases,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable  not  final, 
it  has  an  obscure  sound,  like  short  e;  as,  Fa'-bi-us,  phi-los'-6- 
phus  ;  pronounced  Fa'-bc-us,  &c. 

REMARK  1.   The  final  i  of  tib'-i  and  sil'-i  also  sounds  like  short  e 
2.   Y  is  always  pronounced  like  i  in  the  same  situation. 


.    2.  When  a  syllable  ends  with  a  consonant,  its 
vowel  has  the  short  English  sound  ;  as, 

mag'-nus,  reg'-num,  Jiri-go,  hoc,  fus'-tis,  cyg'-nus,  in  which 
the  vowels  are  pronounced  as  in  magnet,  seldom,  Jinish,  copy, 
lustre,  symbol. 

EXCEPTION  I.  A,  when  it  follows  qu  in  an  accented  syllable, 
before  dr  and  rt,  has  the  same  sound  as  in  quadrant  and  quart; 
as,  qua'-dro,  quad'-ra-gin'-ta,  quar'-tus. 

Exc.  2.  Es,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  pronounced  like  the 
English  word  ease  ;  as,  ig'-nes,  au'-des. 

Exc.  3.  Os,  at  the  end  of  plural  cases,  is  pronounced  like  ose 
in  dose;  as,  nos,  il'-los,  dom'-i-nos. 

Exc.  4.  Post  is  pronounced  like  the  same  word  in  English  ; 
so  also  are  its  compounds  ;  as,  post'-quam,  post'-e-a  ;  but  not  its 
derivatives  ;  as,  pos-tre'-mus. 


II.  OF  THE  DIPHTHONGS. 

§  9.  At  and  oe  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be  in  the  same 
situation ;  as,  ce'-tas,  <zs'-tas,  cat'-e-ra,  poe'-na,  (Ks'-trum. 

Ai,  ei,  oi,  and  yi,  usually  have  the  vowels  pronounced  sepa- 
rately. When  they  are  accented,  and  followed  by  another  vowel, 
the  t  is  pronounced  like  initial  y,  and  the  vowel  before  it  has 
its  long  sound ;  as,  Maia,  Pompeius,  Troius,  Harpyia ;  pro- 
nounced Ma'-ya,  Pom-pe'-yus,  Tro'-yus,  Har-py'-ya. 

Ei,  when  a  diphthong,  and  not  followed  by  another  vowel,  is  pronounced 
like  long  i  ;  as  in  hei. 

Au,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  aw ;  as,  laus,  au1- 
rum,  pronounced  laws,  (fee. 

In  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  the  letters  au  are 
pronounced  separately  ;  as,  Men-e-ld'-us. 

Eu,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  long  u ;  as,  lieu, 
Or'-pheus. 

Ua,  ue,  ui,  uo,  uu,  when  diphthongs,  are  pronounced  like  wa, 
we,  &.C. ;  as,  lin'-gua,  que'-ror,  sua'-de-o,  quo'-tus,  e'-quus.  They 


<§>   10,    11.  SOUNDS    OF    THE    CONSONANTS.  5 

are  always  diphthongs  after  q,  and  usually  after  g  and  s.     In 
su'-us,  ar'-gu-o,  and  some  other  words,  they  are  not  diphthongs. 
Ui  in  cui  and  Jiuic  is  pronounced  like  long  ^. 

III.  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 

§  10.     The  consonants  have,  in  general,  the  same  power 
in  Latin  as  in  English  words. 

The  following  cases,  however,  require  particular  attention. 


C. 

C  has  the  sound  of  s  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs 
&  and  03 ;  as,  ce'-do,  Ca'-sar,  Cy'-rus.  In  other  situations,  it 
has  the  sound  of  k ;  as,  Ca'-to,  lac. 

Ch  has  always  the  sound  of  k;  as,  charta,  machina,  pro- 
nounced kar'-ta,  mak'-i-na. 

Exc.  C,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i 
followed  by  a  vowel,  and  also  before  eu,  has  the  sound  of  sh ; 
as,  soda,  caduceus,  pronounced  so'-she-a,  ca-du'-she-us. 

G. 

G  has  its  soft  sound,  likej,  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diph- 
thongs &  and  03 ;  as,  ge'-nus,  re-gl'-na.  In  other  situations,  it 
has  its  hard  sound,  as  in  bag,  go. 

Exc.  When  g,  in  an  accented  syllable,  comes  before  g  soft,  it  coalesces 
with  it  in  sound ;  as,  agger,  exagggro,  pronounced  aj'~er,  &c. 

S. 

$11.     S  has  its  hissing  sound,  as  in  so,  thus. 

Exc.  1.  S,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before 
t  followed  by  a  vowel,  and  before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the 
sound  of  sh;  us,  Persia,  censui,  pronounced  Per'-she-a,  cen'-shu-i. 
But,  in  such  case,  s,  if  preceded  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  of  zh ; 
as,  Aspasia,  Mozsia,  posui,  pronounced  As-pa'-zhe-a,  Moz'-zhe-a, 
pozh'-u-i. 

NOTE.  In  compound  words,  whose  second  part  begins  with  sut  s  retains 
its  hissing  sound  ;  as,  in'-su-per. 

Exc.  2.  S,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  after  e,  ce,  au,  b,  m,  n,  and  r, 
has  the  sound  of  z ;  as,  res,  CBS,  laus,  trabs,  hi'-ems,  lens,  Mars. 

English  analogy  has  also  occasioned  the  s  in  C&'-sar,  cce-suf-ra,  mif-ser, 
tnu'-sa,  re~sid' -u~um,  cau'-sa,  ro'-sa,  and  their  derivatives,  and  in  some 
other  words,  to  take  the  sound  of  z.  C&s-a-re'-a,  and  the  oblique  cases  of 
Ccesar,  retain  the  hissing  sound  ;  so  likewise  the  compounds  of  trans. 


6       QUANTITIES    OF    PENULTIMATE    AND    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

T. 

§  12.  T,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i 
followed  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  of  sli ;  as,  ratio,  Sulpitius, 
pronounced  ra'-she-o,  Sul-pish'-e-us.  But  in  such  case,  t,  if 
preceded  by  5  or  z,  has  the  sound  of  ch  in  child;  as,  miztio, 
Sallustius,  pronounced  miz'-che-o,  Sal-lus'-che-us. 

Exc.  Proper  names  in  tion,  and  old  infinitives  in  er,  preserve  the  hard 
sound  of  t;  as,  ^m-phic'-ty-on^Jlec'-ti-er  forflecti. 

X. 

X,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  z ;  at  the 
end,  that  of  ks;  as  Xenophon,  azis,  pronounced  Zen'-o-phon, 
ak'-sis. 

Exc.  1.  In  words  beginning  with  ex,  followed  by  a  vowel  in 
an  accented  syllable,  z  has  the  sound  of  gz;  as,  examino,  ezcm- 
plum,  pronounced  eg-zam'-i-no,  eg-zcm'-plum. 

Exc.  2.  X,  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i  followed  by 
a  vowel,  and  before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the  power  of  ksh ; 
as,  nozius,  pezui,  pronounced  nok'-she-us,  pek'-shu-i. 

REMARK.  Ch  and  ph,  before  th,  in  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  silent , 
as  Chthonia,  Phthia,  pronounced  Tho'-ni-a,  Thi'-a.  Also  in  the  following 
combinations  of  consonants,  in  the  beginning  of  words  of  Greek  origin, 
the  first  letter  is  not  sounded  : — mne-mon'-l-ca,  gna'-vus,  tme'-sis,  Cte'-si- 
as,  Ptol-e-nuz'-us,  psaL'-lo. 


OF  THE  QUANTITIES  OF  THE  PENULTIMATE  AND 
FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

<§>  13.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occu- 
pied in  pronouncing  it. 

A  short  syllable  requires,  in  pronunciation,  half  the  time  of  a 
long  one. 

The  penultimate  syllable,  or  penult,  is  the  last  syllable  but  one. 
The  antepenult  is  the  last  syllable  but  two. 

The  quantities  of  syllables  are,  in  general,  to  be  learned  from 
the  "  Rules  of  Prosody  ;  "  but  the  following  very  general  rules 
may  be  here  inserted  : — 

A  vowel  before  another  vowel  is  short. 
Diphthongs,  not  beginning  with  u,  are  long. 
A  vowel  before  z,  zj,  or  any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute 
and  liquid,  is  long,  by  position,  as  it  is  called. 


<§>   14,  15.  ACCENTUATION.  7 

A  vowel  before  a  mute  and  a  liquid  is  common,  i.  e.  either 
long  or  short. 

In  this  Grammar,  when  the  quantity  of  a  penult  is  determined  by  one 
of  the  preceding  rules,  it  is  not  marked ;  in  other  cases,  except  in  dis- 
syllables, the  proper  mark  is  written  over  its  vowel. 

To  pronounce  Latin  words  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  the 
quantities  of  their  last  two  syllables  only  ;  and  the  rules  for  the  quantities 
of  final  syllables  would  be  unnecessary,  but  for  the  occasional  addition  of 
enclitics.  As  these  are  generally  monosyllables,  and,  for  the  purpose  of 
accentuation,  are  considered  as  parts  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  an- 
nexed, they  cause  the  final  syllable  of  the  original  word  to  become  the 
penult  of  the  compound.  But  as  the  enclitics  begin  with  a  consonant, 
the  final  vowels  of  all  words  ending  with  a  consonant,  if  previously  short, 
are,  by  the  addition  of  an  enclitic,  made  long  by  position.  It  is  necessary, 
therefore,  to  learn  the  quantities  of  those  final  syllables  only  which  end 
with  a  voicel. 


OF  ACCENTUATION. 

§  14.  Accent  is  a  particular  stress  of  voice  upon  certain 
syllables  of  words.  . 

When  a  word  has  more  than  one  accent,  that  which  is  near- 
est to  the  termination  is  called  the  primary  or  principal  accent. 

The  secondary  accent  is  that  which  next  precedes  the 
primary. 

A  third  and  a  fourth  accent,  in  some  long  words,  precede 
die  secondary,  ana*  are  subject,  in  all  respects,  to  the  same 
rules. 

In  words  of  two  syllables,  the  penult  is  always  accented ; 
as,  pa'-ter,  ma'-ter,  pen'-na. 

In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  if  the  penult  is  long, 
it  is  accented  ;  but  if  it  is  short,  the  accent  is  on  the  ante- 
penult ;  as,  a-mi'-cus,  dom'-i-nus. 

REMARK.  Accent,  as  treated  of  in  §§  14-23,  refers  to  Eng- 
lish pronunciation  alone,  (see  §6,)  and  not  to  the  written 
accents  mentioned  in  §5. 

§  15.  If  the  penult  is  common,  the  accent,  in  prose,  is  upon 
the  antepenult ;  as,  vol'-u-cris,  phar'-e-trat  ib'-i-que :  but  geni- 
tives in  ius,  in  which  i  is  common,  accent  their  penult  in  prose ; 
as,  u-ni'-us,  is-ti'-us. 

The  rules  for  the  accentuation  of  compound  and  simple  words 
are  the  same  ;  as,  se'-cum,  sub'-e-o. 

In  accentuation,  the  enclitics  que,  net  ve,  and  also  those 
which  are  annexed  to  pronouns,*  are  accounted  constituent 

*  These  are  te,  met,  pte,  ce,  tine,  and  dem;  as,  tute,  egdmet,  meapte,  hicce, 
hicclnef  idem. 


8  DIVISION    OF    WORDS. SIMPLE    WORDS.    <§>  16—19. 

parts  of  the  words  to  which  they  are  subjoined ;  as,  i'-ta,  it'-a* 
que;  vi'-rum,  vi-rum'-que. 

If  only  two  syllables  precede  the  primary  accent,  the  secon- 
dary accent  is  on  the  first ;  as,  mod"-e-rd'-tust  tol"-e-rab'-i-lis. 

§16.  If  three  or  four  syllables  stand  before  the  primary 
accent,  the  secondary  accent  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first, 
and  sometimes  on  the  second  syllable ;  as,  de-mon"-stra-ban'-tur9 
ad"-o-les-cen'-ti-a. 

Some  words  which  have  only  four  syllables  before  the  pri- 
mary accent,  and  all  which  have  more  than  four,  have  three 
accents ;  as,  mod'"-e-ra"-ti-d'-ms,  tol'"-e-ra-bil"-i-d'-rem,  ex-er"1- 
ci-ta"-ti-d'-nis.  In  some  combinations  there  are  four  accents  ; 
as,  ex-er""-ti-ta"l-ti-on"-i-bus'-que. 


DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 

VOWELS. 

§  1  ••  1.  Every  Latin  word  is  to  be  divided  into  as  many  syllables 
as  it  has  separate  vowels  and  diphthongs. 

REMARK  1.  In  the  following  rules,  the  term  vowel  includes  not  only 
single  vowels,  but  diphthongs';  and  when  a  particular  vowel  is  mentioned!, 
a  diphthong  ending  with  that  vowel  is  intended  also. 

CONSONANTS. 

REM.  2.  In  the  division  of  words  into  syllables,  cA,  pk,  and  th,  are  con- 
sidered, not  as  separate  letters,  but  as  single  aspirated  mutes,  and  hence 
are  never  separated. 

1.   Simple  Words. 

$18.  A. — A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  be- 
tween two  vowels. 

2.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r  between  the  last 
two  vowels  of  a  word,  or  between  the  vowels  of  any  two  unac- 
cented syllables,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  that  follows  it  ; 
as,  t  mpa'-ter  and  au'-tem  ;  th*  in  ce'-tker ;  cl  in  Hi-er'-o-des  ; 
q  in  a'-qua ;  cr  in  a'-cris  and  vol'-u-cris  ;  chr  *  in  a'-chras ;  r  in 
tol'-e-ra-bil'-i-us  ;  and  gr  in  per'-e-gri-na!-ti-o. 

EXCEPTION  (a.)   Tib'-i  and  sibf-i  are  commonly  excepted. 

<§>  19.  3.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  /  or  r  before 
the  vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  must  be  joined  to  the  ac- 
cented vowel ;  as,  t  in  i-tin'-e-ra ;  tli  *  in  ce-the'-ri-us ;  d  in  Eu- 
di'-des;  gr  in  a-gres'-tis  and  a-gric"-o-la'-ti-o ;  pr  in  ca-pre'-o-lus  ; 
q  in  a-qua'-ri-us  ;  d  in  Ifer"-a-de'-a ;  and  plir  *  in  Eu-plira'-tes. 

*  See  Remark  2d 


<§>  20-23      DIVISION    OF    WORDS. -^-COMPOUND    WORDS.  9 

EXCEPTION  TO  THE  2o  AND  3o  RULES. 

Exc.  (ft.)  GL,  ti,  and  tkl*  between  any  two  vowels,  are  separated;  as, 
gl  in  JEg'-le,  and  Jlg'-lau-ros  ;  tl  in  M'-Las ;  and  tfd  in  ath-lut' -i-cus. 

<§>  20.  4.  A  single  consonant  after  the  vowel  of  any  ac- 
cented syllable,  except  a  penult,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented 
vowel ;  as,  m  in  dom'-i-nus  and  dom/'-i-nd'-tus ;  t  in  pat'-e-ra ; 
th  *  in  Scyth'-i-a ;  and  q  in  aq'-ui-la  and  Aq't-ui-ta'-ni-a,  (pro- 
nounced ak'-we-lah  and  Ak"-we-ta'-ne-ah.) 

Exc.  (c.)  H,  standing  alone  between  two  vowels,  is  always  joined  to  the 
vowel  that  follows  it ;  as,  mi'-hi,  tra'-he-re. 

5.  A  mute  with  /  or  r  after  the  vowel  of  any  accented  syllable,  except  a 
penult,  must  be  separated  ;  as,  cr  in  ac'-rl-ter  ;  tr  in  deti'-rf-men'-tum  ;  pr 
in  cap'-rl-pes;  phi*  in  Paph" -la-go1 -ni-a ;  zudphr*  in  Jlph~ro-disf-i~a. 

EXCEPTIONS  TO  THE  4TH  AND  5TH  RULES. 

Exc.  (d.)  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  (except  gl,  tl,  and 
thl*)  after  an  accented  a,  e,  or  o,  and  before  two  vowels,  the  first  of  which 
is  e,  i,  or  y,  must  be  joined  to  the  syllable  following  the  accent ;  as,  d  in 
ra'-di-us,  sua'-de-o,  tcB'-di-um,  and  m^'-di-a'-tor  ;  r  in  h&'-re-o  and  Ca"-ry- 
a'-tes;  ch*  in  bra'-chi-um;  q  in  ref-qui-es  and  relfqui-es'-co ;  and  fr  m 
pa'-tri-us  and  JE-no'-tri-a. 

Exc.  (e.)  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  after  an  accented 
M,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  that  follows  it ;  as,  r  in  lu'-rt-dus  and  au1- 
re-us  ;  cr  in  Eu'-crf-tus;  and  pi  in  Nau'-pli-us,  du'-pti-co,  and  du^-pli-cai-ti-o. 

REM.  3.  Bl,  after  ut  are  always  separated ;  as,  Pub'-li-us,  Pub-lie1 '-6-la, 
res-pub' -ti-ca. 

<§>£!.  6.  X,  when  alone  between  two  vowels,  in  writing 
syllables  is  united  to  the  vowel  that  precedes  it,  but  in  pronoun- 
cing them  it  is  divided ;  as,  sax'-um,  ax-il'-la,  ex-em'-plum  ;  pro- 
nounced sac'-sum,  ac-sU'-lali,  and  eg-zem'-plum. 

B. — Two  consonants  between  two  vowels. 

7.  Any  two  consonants  (except  a  mute  with  I  or  r  in  the  cases  before 
mentioned!),  when  standing  between  two  vowels,  must  be  separated  ;  as, 
rp  in  cor1 -pus;  rm  in  ger-md'-nus  ;  rv  in  ca-ter'-va;  sc  in  ad"-o-les'-cens ; 
nn  in  an'-nus  ;  and  phth  *  in  aph'-lha. 

§22.     C. — Three  or  four  consonants  between  two  vowels. 

8.  When  three  consonants  stand  between  any  two  vowels,  the  two  last, 
if  a  mute  with  /  or  r,  are  joined  to  the  latter  vowel,  otherwise  the  last 
only;  as,  str  mfe-nes'-tra;  mpL'm  ex-em'-plum;  rthr  *  in  ar-thrl'-tis  ;  and 
mpt  in  emp'-to-res. 

9.  When  four  consonants  come  between  two  vowels,  two  are  joined  to 
each  vowel ;  as,  nstr  in  trans' -trum. 

2.    Compound  Words. 

*§>  2,3.  10.  Compound  and  simple  words  are  divided  into  syllables 
in  the  same  manner ;  as,  def-g-ro,  dW-l-gens,  be-nev'-d-lus,  prcesf-to,  eg'-o- 
met,  res"-o-na'-re. 

Exc.  (/.)  In  dividing  a  compound  word  into  syllables,  a  consonant  or 
consonants,  after  the  last  vowel  in  the  former  part  of  the  compound  word, 
must  not  be  separated  from  such  vowel ;  as,  ab-esr-se,  in'-ersy  cir^-cwm- 
er'-ro,  pot'-est,  su'-pgr-est,  sub'-l-tus,  pra-ter'-e-a,  trans'-k-tur. 

*  See  Remark  2d.  f  See  Rules  2  and  3;  and  Exceptions  (d.)  and  (e.} 


10  ETYMOLOGY. NOUNS.  §  24-26. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  24.  Etymology  treats  of  the  different  classes  of 
words,  their  derivation,  and  various  inflections. 

The  different  classes,  into  which  words  are  divided,  are 
called  Parts  of  Speech. 

The  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  are  eight — Substantive  or 
Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition, 
Conjunction,  and  Interjection. 

The  first  four  are  inflected ;  the  last  four  are  not  inflected, 
except  that  some  adverbs  change  their  termination  to  express 
comparison. 

Substantives  and  adjectives  are  often  included  by  grammarians  under 
the  general  term  nouns  ;  but,  in  this  Grammar,  the  word  noun  is  used  as 
synonymous  with  substantive  only. 

<§>  25.  To  verbs  belong  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines, 
which  partake  of  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  the  inflection 
of  the  noun. 

Infection,  in  Latin  grammar,  signifies  a  change  in  the  ter- 
mination of  a  word.  It  is  of  three  kinds — declension,  conjuga- 
tion, and  comparison. 

Nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines, are  declined ;  verbs  are  conjugated,  and  adjectives  and 
adverbs  are  compared. 

NOUNS. 

«§  26.     A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  an  object 
A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  object ;  as, 

Ccesar ;  Roma,  Rome  ;   Tiberis,  the  Tiber. 

A  common  noun  is  the  name  of  a  class  of  objects,  to 

each  of  which  it  is  applicable  ;  as,  homo,  a  man  ;  avis,  a 

bird  :  quercus,  an  oak  ;  lapis,  a  stone. 

A  collective  noun  is  one  which,  in  the  singular  number, 

denotes  a  collection  of  individuals  ;  as,  populus,  a  people  ; 

exercltus,  an  army. 


§27,28.  GENDER.  11 

An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality,  action,  or 
other  attribute  ;  as,  bonitas,  goodness ;  gaudium,  joy  ; 
festmatio,  haste. 

A  material  noun  is  the  name  of  a  substance  considered 
in  the  gross  ;  as,  lignum,  wood  ;  ferrum,  iron  ;  cibus,  food. 

REMARK.  Proper,  abstract,  and  material  nouns  become  common,  when 
employed  to  denote  one  or  more  of  a  class  of  objects.  A  verb  in  the  in- 
finitive mood  is  often  used  as  an  abstract  noun. 

To  nouns  belong  gender,  number,  and  case. 

GENDER.      I 

§  27.  The  gender  of  a  noun  is  its  distinction  in  regard 
to  sex. 

Nouns  have  three  genders — masculine,  feminine,  and 
neuter. 

The  gender  of  Latin  nouns  is  either  natural  or  grammatical. 

Those  words  are  naturally  masculine  or  feminine,  which  are 
used  to  designate  the  sexes. 

Those  are  grammatically  masculine  or  feminine,  which, 
though  they  denote  objects  that  are  neither  male  nor  female, 
take  adjectives  of  the  form  appropriated  to  nouns  denoting  the 
sexes :  thus,  dommus,  a  lord,  is  naturally  masculine,  because  it 
denotes  a  male;  but  sermo,  speech,  is  grammatically  mascu- 
line, because  it  takes  an  adjective  of  that  form  which  is  an- 
nexed to  nouns  denoting  males. 

The  grammatical  gender  of  Latin  nouns  depends  either  on 
their  signification,  or  on  their  declension  and  termin.ition. 
The  following  are  the  general  rules  of  gender,  in  reference  to 
signification.  Many  exceptions  to  them,  on  account  of  termi- 
nation, occur  :  these  will  be  specified  under  the  several  de- 
clensions. 

§28.  MASCULINES.  1.  Names  and  appellations  of  all 
male  beings  are  masculine  ;  as,  Homerus,  Homer ;  pater,  a 
father ;  consul,  a  consul ;  equus,  a  horse. 

As  proper  names  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the  general 
name  under  which  they  are  comprehended  ;  hence, 

2.  Names  of  rivers,  winds,  and  months,  are  masculine, 
because  flavins,  ventus,  and  mensis,  are  masculine  ;  as,  Tib- 
eris,  the  Tiber ;  Aquilo,  the  north  wind ;  Aprilis,  April. 

3.  Names  of  mountains  are  sometimes  masculine,  because 
mons  is  masculine ;  as,  Othrys,  a  mountain  of  Thessaly ;  but 


12          COMMON  AND  DOUBTFUL  GENDER.   $  29,  30. 

they  usually  follow  the  gender  of  their  termination ;  as,  hie* 
Atlas,  luzc  Ida,  hoc  Soracte. 

§  29.  FEMININES.  1.  Names  and  appellations  of  all 
female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  Helena,  Helen ;  mater,  a 
mother  ;  juvenca,  a  heifer. 

2.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  ships,  islands, 
poems,  and  gems,  are  feminine  ;  because  terra,  urbs,  arbor, 
planta,  navis,  insula,  fabula,  and  gemma,  are  feminine ;  as, 

,  Egypt ;  Corinthus,  Corinth ;  pirus,  a  pear-tree ; 
Sj  spikenard  ;  Centaurus,  the  ship  Centaur ;  Samos,  the 
name  of  an  island ;  Eunuchus,  the  Eunuch,  a  comedy  of 
Terence ;  amethystus,  an  amethyst. 

$  30.  COMMON  AND  DOUBTFUL  GENDER.  Some  words  are 
either  masculine  or  feminine.  These,  if  they  denote  things 
animate,  are  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender  ;  if  things  inani- 
mate, of  the  doubtful  gender. 

Of  the  former  are  parens,  a  parent ;  bos,  an  ox  or  cow :  of 
the  latter,  Jinis,  an  end. 

The  following  nouns  are  of  the  common  gender  : — 

Adolescens,  a  youth.  Dux,  a  leader.  Parens,  a  parent. 

Affinis,  a  relation  by  Exul,  an  exile.  Par,  a  mate. 

marriage.  Hospes,  a  guest,  a  host.  PraBses,  a  president. 

Antistes,  a  chief  priest.  Hostis,  an  enemy.  Praesul,  a  chief  priest. 

Auctor,  an  author.  Infans,  an  infant.  Princeps,    a  prince    or 

Augur,  an  augur.  Interpres,  an  interpreter.  princess. 

Bos,  an  ox  or  cow.  Judex,  a  judge.  Sacerdos,     a   priest  or 

Canis,  a  dog.  Juvenis,  a  youth.  priestess. 

Civis,  a  citizen.  Miles,  a  soldier.  Satelles,  a  life-guard. 

Comes,  a  companion.  Mumceps,  a  burgess.  Sus,  a  swine. 

Conjux,  a  spouse.  Nemo,  nobody.  Testis,  a  witness. 

Censors,  a  consort.  Obses,  a  hostage.  Vates,  a  prophet. 

Con  viva,  a  guest.  Patruelis,  a  cousin.  Verna,  a  slave. 

Custos,  a  keeper.  Palumbes,  a  wood-pigeon.  Vindex,  an  avenger. 

The  following  hexameters  contain  nearly  all  the  above  nouns  : — 
ConjuXj  atque  parens,  princeps,  patruelis,  et  infanSj 
Jlfflnis,  vindex,  judcx,  dux,  miles,  et  hostis, 
Augur,  et  antistes,  juvenis,  convlva,  sacerdos, 
Murit-que-ceps,  vates,  adolescens,  civis,  et  auctor, 
Custos,  nemo,  comes,  testis,  sus,  bos-qae,  canis-quet 
Pro  consorte  tori  par,  prcesul,  verna,  satelles, 
Atque  obses,  consors,  interpres,  et  exul,  et  hospes. 


*  To  distinguish  the  eender  of  Latin  nouns,  grammari 
masculine,  hcec  before  the  feminine,  and  hoc  before  the  neu 


ians  write  Me  ocfore  the 
>re  the  neuter. 


§  31-34.  EPICENES. NEUTERS.  13 

§  31.  "When  nouns  of  the  common  gender  denote  males, 
they  take  a  masculine  adjective  ;  when  they  denote  females,  a 
feminine. 

The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense,  but 
masculine  only  in  grammatical  construction  : — 

Artifex,  an  artist.  Fur,  a  thief.  Opifex,  a  workman. 

Auspex,  a  soothsayer.      Heres,  an  heir.  Pedes,  a  footman. 

Codes,  a  person  having  Homo,  a  man  or  woman.  Pugil,  a  boxer. 

but  one  eye.  Index,  an  informer.          Senex,  an  old  person. 

Eques,  a  horseman.          Latro,  a  robber. 
Exlex,  an  outlaw.  Liberi,  children. 

To  these  may  be  added  personal  appellatives  of  the  first  de- 
clension ;  as,  advena,  a  stranger  ;  auriga,  a  charioteer ;  incola9 
an  inhabitant :  also  some  gentile  nouns  ;  as,  Persa,  a  Persian ; 
Areas,  an  Arcadian. 

§  32.  The  following,  though  masculine  or  feminine  in 
sense,  are  feminine  only  in  construction  : — 

Copiae,  troops.  OpSrss,  laborers.  Vigiliffl,  watchmen. 

Custodies,  guards.  Pi-oles,    )  „  #.      •  „ 

Excubiae,  sentinels.          Soboles,  5  °ffsPnn^' 

Some  nouns,  signifying  persons,  are  neuter,  both  in  their 
termination  and  construction ;  as, 

Acroama,  a  jester.  Mancipium, )       , 

Auxilia,  auxiliary  troops.  Servitium,    $ 

§  33,  EPICENES.  Names  of  animals  which  include  both 
sexes,  but  which  admit  of  an  adjective  of  one  gender  only,  are 
called  epicene.  Such  nouns  commonly  follow  the  gender  of 
their  terminations.  Thus, passer,  a  sparrow,  corvus, a  raven,  are 
masculine;  aquila,  an  eagle,  vulpes,  a  fox,  are  feminine; 
though  each  of  them  is  used  to  denote  both  sexes. 

This  class  includes  the  names  of  animals,  in  which  the  distinction  of 
eex  is  seldom  attended  to.  When  it  is  necessary  to  mark  the  sex,  mas 
oifemina  is  usually  added. 

§  34.  NEUTERS.  Nouns  which  are  neither  masculine 
nor  feminine,  are  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender ;  such 
are, 

1.  All  indeclinable   nouns;    as,  fas,  nefas,   niJiil,  gummi, 
pondo. 

2.  Names  of  letters ;  as,  A,  B,  C,  &c. 

3.  Words  used  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to  their 
meaning  ;  as,  pater  est  dissyllabum ;  pater  is  a  dissyllable. 

4.  All  infinitives,  imperatives,  clauses  of  sentences,  adverbs, 

3 


14  NUMBEll. CASES. DECLENSIONS.        §  35-38. 

and  other  particles,  used  substantively ;  as,  scire  tuum,  your 
knowledge ;  ultimum  vale,  the  last  farewell. 

REMARK.  Words  derived  from  the  Greek  retain  the  same  gender 
which  they  have  in  that  language. 

NUMBER. 

§  35.  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers, — the  singular  and 
the  plural, — which  are  distinguished  by  their  terminations. 

The  singular  number  denotes  one  object;  the  plural, 
more  than  one. 

CASES. 

$  36.  Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  which,  in  English, 
are  denoted  by  prepositions,  are,  in  Latin,  expressed  by  a 
change  of  termination. 

Cases  are  those  terminations  of  nouns,  by  means  of 
which  their  relations  to  other  words  are  denoted.  Latin 
nouns  have  six  cases  ;  viz.  Nominative,  Genitive,  Dative, 
Accusative,  Vocative,  and  Ablative. 

But  though  there  is  this  number  of  cases,  no  noun  has  so 
many  different  terminations  in  each  number. 

§  37.  The  nominative  indicates  the  relation  of  a  subject 
to  a  finite  verb. 

The  genitive  is,  used  to  indicate  origin,  possession,  and  many 
other  relations,  which,  in  English,  are  denoted  by  the  preposi- 
tion of. 

The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or  is 
done. 

The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb,  or  of 
certain  prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

The  vocative  is  the  form  appropriated  to  the  name  of  any 
object  which  is  addressed. 

The  ablative  denotes  privation,  and  many  other  relations, 
especially  those  which  are  usually  expressed  in  English  by  the 
prepositions  with,  from,  in,  or  by. 

All  the  cases,  except  the  nominative,  are  usually  called  06- 
lique  cases. 

DECLENSIONS. 

$  38.  The  change  of  termination,  by  which  the  different 
cases  and  numbers  of  nouns  are  expressed,  is  called  declension. 


<§>  39,  40.  DECLENSIONS. TERMINATIONS. 


15 


There  are,  in  Latin,  five  different  modes  of  declining 
nouns,  called  the  fast,  second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth  de- 
clensions. These  may  be  distinguished  by  the  termination 
of  the  genitive  singular,  which,  in  the  first  declension,  ends 
in  (R,  in  the  second  in  i,  in  the  third  in  is,  in  the  fourth  in 
us,  and  in  the  fifth  in  ei. 

§  39.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  comparative  view  of 
the  five  declensions. 


TERMINATIONS. 

Singular. 

I. 

II. 

III. 

IV. 

V. 

M.        N. 

M.          N. 

M.             N. 

Norn. 

a, 

/^*»^» 
us,er,  um, 

—           — 

us,               u, 

es, 

Gen. 

SB, 

i, 

is, 

us, 

ei, 

Dat. 

SB, 

o, 

i, 

Ul,                     U, 

ei, 

Ace. 

am, 

um, 

em,         — 

um,             u, 

em, 

Voc. 

a, 

e,  er,  um, 

—           — 

us,               u, 

es, 

All. 

a, 

6, 

e,  or  I, 

u, 

e> 

Plural. 

Norn. 

SB, 

i,            a, 

es,       a,  ia, 

us,             ua, 

es, 

Gen. 

arum, 

orum, 

um,  or  ium, 

uum, 

erum, 

Dat. 

is, 

is, 

ibus, 

ibus,  or  iibus, 

ebus, 

Ace. 

as, 

os,          a, 

es,       a,  ia, 

us,             ua, 

es, 

Voc. 

83, 

i,            a, 

es,        a,  ia, 

us,             ua, 

es, 

Abl 

is. 

is. 

ibus. 

ibus,  or  iibus. 

ebus. 

Remarks. 

§  40.     1.  The  terminations  of  the  nominative,  in  the  third  declen- 
sion, are  very  numerous,  and  are  therefore  omitted  in  the  table. 

2.  The  accusative  singular  ends  always  in  m,  except  in  some 
neuters. 

3.  The  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  in  all  Latin 
nouns,  except  those  in  ws  of  the  second  declension. 

4.  The  nominative  and  vocative  plural  end  always  alike. 

5.  The  genitive  plural  ends  always  in  um. 

6.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  always  alike  ; — in  the 
1st  and  2d  declensions,  in  is ;  in  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th,  in  bus 


16          FIRST    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS    IN    GENDER.  §  42. 

7.  The    accusative    plural    ends    always    in  5,    except    in 
neuters. 

8.  Nouns  of  the  neuter   gender   have  the   accusative   and 
vocative  like   the   nominative,   in  both   numbers;    and   these 
cases,  in  the  plural,  end  always  in  a. 

9.  Th«  1st  and  5th  declensions  contain  no  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender 
and  the  4th  and  5th  contain  no  proper  names. 

10.  Every  inflected  word  consists  of  two  parts — a  root,  and 
a  termination.     The  root  is  the  part  which  is  not  changed  by 
inflection.     The  termination  is  the  part  annexed  to  the  root. 
The  preceding  table  exhibits  terminations  only.     In  the  fifth 
declension,  the  e  of  the  final  syllable,  though  unchanged,  is 
considered  as  belonging  to  the  termination. 


FIRST  DECLENSION. 

§  41.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in  «,  e,  as,  or 
es.  Those  in  a  and  e  are  feminine;  those  in  as  and 
65  are  masculine. 

Latin  nouns  of  this  declension  end  only  in  a,  and  are  thus 
declined  :  — 

Singular. 

Nom.  Mu'-sa,  a  muse  ; 

Gen.  mu'-sse,  of  a  muse  ; 
Dot.  mu'-sae,  to  a  muse  ; 
Ace.  mu'-sam,  a  muse  ; 
Voc.  mu'-sa,  O  muse  ; 

Abl.    mu'-sa,     with  a  muse. 


JT  turui. 

Nom.  mu'-saB, 

muses  ; 

Gen.    mu-sa'-rum, 

of  muses  ; 

Dat.   mu'-sis, 

to  muses  ; 

Ace.    mu'-sas, 

muses  ; 

Voc.    mu'-sae, 

O  muses  ; 

Abl.    mu'-sis, 

with  muses 

In  like  manner  decline 


Au'-la,  a  hall. 
Cu'-ra,  care. 
Ga'-le-a,  a  helmet. 
In'-su-la,  an  island. 
Lit'-e'-ra,  a  letter. 


Lus-cin'-i-a,  a  nightin- 

gale. 

Mach'-I-na,  a  machine. 
Pen'-na,  a  quill,  a  wing. 


Sa-git'-ta,  an  arrow. 
Stel'-la,  a  star. 
To'-ga,  a  gown. 
Vi'-a,  a  way. 


EXCEPTIONS  IN  GENDER. 

§  42.  1.  Appellatives  of  men,  and  names  of  rivers  in  a,  are 
masculine,  according  to  §  28,  1  and  2.  But  the  poets  have  used 
the  following  names  of  rivers  as  feminine  :  Albula,  t  A  Ilia,  Dru- 
entia,  Garumna,  Matrona,  Mosella.  Names  of  rivers  in  e  are 
also  feminine  ;  as,  Lethe. 


<§>  43—45.     FIRST    DECLENSION. GREEK    NOUNS.  17 

Ossa  and  (Eta,  names  of  mountains,  are  masculine  or  fem- 
inine. 

2.  Hadria,  the  Adriatic  sea,  is  masculine.  Virgil  uses  dama 
twice  and  talpa  once  as  masculine. 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION. 

§43.  Genitive  singular.  1.  The  poets  sometimes  formed 
the  genitive  singular  in  di ;  as,  aula,  a  hall ;  gen.  aulai. 

2.  Familia,  after  pater,  mater,  Jilius,  orjilia,  usually  forms 
its  genitive  in  as ;  as,  mater-familias,  the  mistress  of  a  family ; 
gen.  mat ris-familias ;  nom.  pluT.matres-familias  orfamilidrum. 
Some  other  words  anciently  formed  their  genitive  in  the  same 
manner. 

Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  contracted 
by  omitting  ar ;  as,  Cceticolum,  for  Ccelicoldrum. 

Dative  and  Ablative  plural.  The  following  nouns  have 
generally  dbus  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  to  distinguish 
them  from  the  same  cases  of  masculines  in  us  of  the  second 
declension  having  the  same  root. 

Dea,  a  goddess.  Equa,  a  mare. 

Filia,  a  daughter.  Mula,  a  she  mule. 

The  use  of  a  similar  termination  in  aritma,  aslna,  domlna,  liberta,  natat 
serva,  conserva,  and  soda,  rests  on  inferior  authority. 

GREEK  NOUNS. 

§  44.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  e,  as,  and  es,  and 
some  also  in  a,  are  Greek.  Greek  nouns  in  a  are  declined  like 
musa,  except  that  they  sometimes  have  an  in  the  accusative 
singular;  as,  Ossa;  ace.  Ossam,  or  Ossan. 

Greek  nouns  in  e,  as,  and  es,  are  thus  declined  in  the  singu- 
lar number : — 


JV.  Pe-nel'-6-pe, 
G.  Pe-nel'-6-pes, 
D.  Pe-nel'-o-pae, 
Ac.  Pe-neP-6-pen, 
V.  Pe-nel'-6-pe, 
Ab.  Pe-nel'-o-pe. 

JV.  ^-ne'-as, 
G.  jE-ne'-se, 
D.  vE-ne'-ee,            * 
Ac.  jE-ne'-am,  or  an, 
V.  JE-ne'-a, 
M.  ^E-ne'-a. 

JV".  An-chl'-ses, 
G.  An-chl'-sae, 
D.  An-chr-sae, 
Ac.  An-chl'-sen, 
V.  An-chl'-se, 
Ab.  An-chl'-se 

§  45.     In  like  manner  decline 

Al;-o-e,  aloes.  Ti-a'-ras,  a  turban. 

E-pit'-o-me,  an  abridgment.  Co-me'-tes,  a  comet. 

This' -be.  Dy-nas'-tes,  a  ruler. 

Bo'-re-as,  the  north  wind.  Pri-amM-des,  a  son  of  Priam. 

Mi'-das.  Py-rl'-tes,  a  kind  of  stone. 

Patronymics  in  des  have  sometimes  em  for  en  in  the  accusative ;  ae; 
Priamldem. 


18 


SECOND    DECLENSION. 


<§,  46,  47. 


Greek  nouns  which  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined  in  that  number  like 
the  plural  of  musa. 

The  Latins  frequently  change  the  terminations  of  Greek  nouns  in  es 
and  e  into  a ;  as,  Atrides,  Atrlda,  a  son  of  Atreus ;  Perscs,  Persa,  a 
Persian  ;  geometry,  geometra,  a  geometrician ;  Circe,  Circa ;  epitome, 
epitoma  ;  grammatlce,  grammaftca,  grammar;  rhetorlce,  rhetorlca,  ora- 
tory. 


SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  46.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in  er,  ir, 
us,  um,  os,  on.  Those  ending  in  urn  and  on  are  neuter  ;  the 
rest  are  masculine. 

Nouns  in  er,  us,  and  urn,  are  thus  declined  : — 

SINGULAR. 


A  lord. 

A  son-in-law. 

Afield. 

A  kingdom. 

N.    DonV-I-nus, 

Ge'-ner, 

A'-ger, 

Reg'-num, 

G.    dom'-i-ni, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg7-ni, 

D.    dom'-i-no, 

gen'-e-ro, 

a'-gro, 

reg'-no, 

Ac.  dom'-i-num, 

gen'-e-rum, 

a'-grum, 

reg'-num, 

V.    dom'-i-ne, 

ge'-ner, 

a'-ger, 

reg'-num, 

Ab.  dom'-i-no. 

gen'-e-ro. 

a'-gro. 

reg;-no. 

N.    dom'-T-ni, 
G.    dom-i-no'-rum, 
D.    dom'-i-nis, 
Ac.  dom'-i-nos, 
V.    dom'-i-ni, 
Ab.  dom'-i-nis. 


PLURAL. 

gen'-e-ri,  a/"grij  reg'-na, 

gen-e-ro'-rum,  a-gro'-rum,     reg-no'-rum, 

gen'-e-ris,  a'-gris,  reg'-nis, 

gen'-e-ros,  a'-gros,  reg'-na, 

gen'-e-ri,  a'-gri,  regx-na, 

gen'-e-ris.  a'-gris.  reg'-nis. 


Like  dommus  decline 

Fo^-cus,  a  hearth. 
Gla'-di-us,  a  sword, 
Lu'-cus,  a  grove. 


Nu'-mS-rus,  a  number. 
O-ce;-a-nus,  the  ocean. 
Tro'-chus,  a  top. 


An'-I-mus,  the  mind. 
Clyp'-e-us,  a  shield. 
Cor'-vus,  a  raven. 

$  47.  Some  nouns  in  er,  like  gener,  add  the  terminations 
to  the  nominative  singular,  as  a  root.  They  are  the  compounds 
ofgero  and  fero;  as,  armiger,-eri,  an  armor-bearer;  Lucifer, 
•eri,  the  morning  star ;  and  the  following : — 

A-dul'-ter,  Sri,  an  adid-  I'-ber,  eri,  a  Spaniard.  So'-cer,  Sri,  afather-in- 

tercr.  Li'-ber,  £ri,  Bacchus.  law. 

Cel'-tl-ber,  gri,  a  Celti-  Pu^-er,  6ri,  a  boy.  Ves^-per,  Sri,  the  even 
benan.  ing. 

Mulclber,  Vulcan,  sometimes  has  this  form 


§   50.  SECOND    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS    IN    GENDER.       19 

$  48.  All  other  nouns  in  er .  reject  the  e,  in  adding  the 
terminations,  and  are  declined  like  ager ;  thus, 

A'-per,  a  wild  boar.  Libber,  a  book.  Al-ex-an'-der. 

Aus'-ter,  the  south  wind.        Ma-gis'-ter,  a  master.         Teu'-cer. 
Fa'-ber,  a  workman.  On'-a-ger,  a  wild  ass.         Is'-ter. 

Vir,  a  man,  and  its  compounds,  (the  only  nouns  in  «>,)  are 
declined  like  gener. 

Like  regnum  decline 

An  -trum,  a  cave.  Ne-go'-ti-um,*  a  busi-  Prjfi-sid'-i-um,  a  defence. 

A'-tri-um,  a  hall.  ness.  SaxMim,  a  rock. 

BelMum,  war.  Ni'-trum,  nitre.  Scep'-trum,  a  sceptre. 

Ex-em'-plum,«n  example. 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  GENDER. 

<§>  49.     1.  The  following  nouns  in  us  are  feminine  : — 

Abyssus,  a  bottomless  Carbasus,  a  sail.  Miltus,  vermilion. 

pit.  Dialectus,  a  dialect.  Pharus,  a  watch-tower. 

Alvus,  the  belly.  Domus,  a  house.  Plinthus,   the  foot  of  a 

Antidotus,  an  antidote.  Eremus,  a  desert.  pillar. 

Arctus,    the  Northern  Humus,  the  ground.  Vannus,  a  sieve. 

Bear.  Lec^thus,  a  cruise. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  phthongus,  odus,  and  metros,  are  likewise 
feminine ;  as,  diphlhongus,  a  diphthong;  synodus,  an  assembly ; 
diametros,  a  diameter. 

^  50.  3.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  &c.  are 
feminine,  according  to  §  29,  2. 

Yet  the  following  names  of  plants  are  masculine  : — 

Acanthus,  bear's-foot.  Dumus,  a  thicket.  Raphanus,  a  radish. 

Asparagus,  asparagus.  Helleborus,  hellebore.  Rhamnus,  black-thorn. 

Calamus,  a  reed.  Intybus,  endive.  Rubus,  a  bramble. 

Carduus,  a  thistle.  Juncus,  a  bulrush.  Tribulus,  a  thistle. 

And  sometimes 

Amar&cus,  marjoram.  CytTsus,  hadder. 

Cupressus,  cypress.  Lotos,  a  lote-tree. 

Names  of  trees  in  aster  are  also  masculine ;  as,  oleaster,  a 
wild  olive. 

The  following  names  of  gems  are  also  masculine: — 
Beryllus,  a  beryl.  Chrysoprasus,    chryso-  Pyropus,  pyrope. 

Carbunctilus,  a  carbun-  prase.  Smaragdus,  an  emerald. 

cle.  Opalus,  opal. 

Cbrysolithus,  chryso- 

lite. 

*  Pronouoced  ne-go'-she-um.    See  $  12. 


20          SECOND  DECLENSION.  -  EXCEPTIONS.  §  51—53. 

Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  urn  are  generally  neuter. 

These  names  of  countries  and  towns  are  masculine  :  Canopus, 
JPontus,  and  all  plurals  in  i.  Abydus  and  Lesbos  are  either 
masculine  or  feminine,  llion  is  either  neuter  or  feminine. 

Names  of  towns  ending  in  um,  or,  if  plural,  in  a,  are  neuter. 


4.  The  following  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently 
masculine  :  — 

Balanus,  a  date.  Grossus,  a  green  fig.  Phaselus,  a  little  skip. 

Barbitus,  a  harp.          Pamplnus,  a  vine-leaf. 

At6mus,  an  atom,  and  coins,  a  distaff,  are  doubtful,  but  more  frequently 
feminine. 

5.  Peldgus,  the  sea,  and  virus,  poison,  are  neuter. 
Vulgus,  the  common  people,  is  generally  neuter,  but  some- 
times masculine. 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION. 

§52.  Genitive  singular.  When  the  genitive  singular  ends 
in  ii,  the  poets  sometimes  contract  it  into  i  ;  as,  ingeni,  for 
ingenii. 

Vocative  singular.  The  vocative  of  nouns  in  us  is  some- 
times like  the  nominative,  especially  in  poetry  ,*  as,  fluvius, 
Latinut,  in  Virgil.  So,  audi  tu,  populus  ;  Liv. 

Proper  names  in  ius  omit  e  in  the  vocative  ;  as,  Horatius, 
Hordti  ;  Virgilius,  Virgili. 

Filiu-s,  a  son,  and  genius,  a  guardian  angel,  make  also  fli  and  geni. 
Other  nouns  in  ius,  including1  patnals  and  possessives  derived  from  proper 
name|,  form  their  vocative  regularly  in  e;  as,  Delius,  Delie;  Tirynthius, 
Tirynthie;  Laertius,  Laertie. 

§53.  Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  some  words, 
especially  of  those  which  denote  money,  measure,  and  weight, 
is  commonly  formed  in  urn,  instead  of  drum. 

Such  are  particularly  nummum,  sestcrti&m,  denarium,  medimnum, 
juggrum,  modium,  talentiim.  The  same  form  occurs  in  other  words,  es- 
pecially in  poetry  ;  as,  de&m,  libZrum,  Danaum,  <fcc. 

Deiis,  a  god,  is  thus  declined  :  — 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.    De'-us,  N.    Di^i,  Di,  or  De;-i, 

G.    De'-i,  G.    De-o'-rum, 

D.    De'-o,  D.    Di'-is,  Dis,  or  De;-is, 

Ac.  De'-um,  Ac.  De'-os, 

F.    De'-us,  F.     Di'-i,  Di,  or  De'-i, 

Ab.  Dey-o.  Ab.  Di  -is,  Dis,  or  De;-is. 

Jesus,  the  name  of  the  Savior,  has  um  in  the  accusative,  and  u  in  aL 
the  other  oblique  cases. 


UNIVERSITY 

56        QF"  '          THIRD   DECLENSION. 


GREEK  NOUNS. 
§54.  Os  and  on,  in  the  second  declension,  are  Greek 
terminations,  and  are  often  changed,  in  Latin,  into  us  and  urn  ; 
as,  Alpheos,  Alpheus  ;  flion,  Ilium.  Those  in  ros  are  gen- 
erally changed  into  er  ;  as,  Alexandras,  Alexander  ;  Teucros, 
Teucer. 

Greek  nouns  are  thus  declined  :  — 

Barblton,  a  lyre. 


Singular. 

N.  De'-los,  An-dro'-ge-os, 

G.  De'-li,  An-dro'-ge-o,  or  i, 

D.  DeMo,  An-dro'-ge-o, 

Ac  De'-lon,  An-dro'-ge-o,  or  on, 

V.  De'-le,  An-dro'-ge-os, 

" .  De'-lo.  An-dro'-ge-o. 


Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  bar'-bi-ton,  bar'-bi-ta, 

G.  bar'-bi-ti,  bar'-bi-ton, 

D.  bar'-bi-to,  bar'-bi-tis, 

Ac.  bar'-bi-ton,  bar'-bi-ta, 

V.  bar'-bi-ton,  bar'-bi-ta, 

M.  bar'-bi-to.  bar'-bi-tis. 


Anciently,  some  nouns  in  os  had  the  genitive  in  u  ;  as,  Menandru.  Ter. 

Greek  proper  names  in  eus  are  generally  declined  like  aomlnus,  except 
in  the  vocative,  which  ends  in  eu :  in  this  case,  and  sometimes  in  the 
genitive,  dative,  and  accusative,  they  retain  the  Greek  form,  and  are  of 
the  third  declension.  See  §  86. 

Panthu  occurs  in  Virgil  as  the  vocative  of  Panthus 


THIRD  DECLENSION. 

<§»  55.  The  number  of  final  letters,  in  this  declension,  is 
twelve.  Five  are  vowels— a,  e,$,o,y /and  seven  are  conso- 
nants— c,  I,  n,  r,  s9 t,  x.  The  number  of  its  final  syllables 
exceeds  fifty. 

Mode  of  declining  Nouns  of  the  TJiird  Declension. 
In  this  declension  the  oblique  cases  cannot  always  be  determined  from 
the  nominative,  nor,  on  the  other  hand,  the  nominative  from  the  oblique 
cases.  To  decline  a  word  properly,  in  this  declension,  it  is  necessary  to 
know  its  gender,  its  nominative  singular,  and  one  of  its  oblique  cases ; 
since  the  root  of  the  cases  is  not  always  found  entire  and  unchanged  in 
the  nominative.  The  case  usually  selected  for  this  purpose  is  the  geni- 
tive singular.  The  formation  of  the  accusative  singular,  and  of  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  depends  upon  the  gender : 
if  it  is  masculine  or  feminine,  these  cases  have  one  form ;  if  neuter,  another. 

§  OO»  The  student  should  first  fix  well  in  his  memory  the  terminations 
of  one  of  these  forms.  He  should  next  learn  the  nominative  and  genitive 
singular  of  the  word  which  is  to  be  declined.  If  is  is  removed  from  the 
genitive,  the  remainder  will  always  be  the  root  of  the  oblique  cases,  and 
by  annexing  their  terminations  to  this  root,  the  word  is  declined  ;  thus, 
rvpes,  genitive  (found  in  the  dictionary)  rupis,  root  rup,  dative  rupi,  &c.  ; 
so  ars,  gen  artis,  root  art,  dat.  arti,  &c. ;  opus,  gen.  operis,  root  oper, 
dat.  operi,  &c. 

Where  two  forms  are  used  in  the  same  case,  recourse  must  be  had  to 
the  rules  for  the  different  cases,  §  79 — 85. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


57. 


The  following   are  the  two  forms  of  termination    in   this 
declension  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  and  Fern.     Neut. 

N.          *  * 

G.          is, 

D.          i, 

Ac.  em,  or  im, 

F.  * 

Ab.     e,  or  i.     e,  or  i. 


Masc.  and  Fern.  Neut 

N.          es,  a,  or  ia, 

G.  um,  or  ium,  um,  or  ium, 

D.        ibus,  ibus, 

-4c.        es,  a,  or  ia, 

F.          es,  a,  or  ia, 

Ab.      ibus.  ibus. 

The  asterisk  stands  for  the  nominative,  and  for  those  cases 
which  are  like  it. 


is, 
*' 


§  57.  The  following  are  examples  of  the  most  common 
forms  of  nouns  of  this  declension,  declined  through  all  their 
cases. 


Honor,  honor  ;  masc. 

Sermo,  speech  ;  masc, 

Singular.         Plural. 

Singular.              Plural. 

N.  ho  -nor,        ho-no'-res, 

N.   ser'-mo           ser-mo'-nes, 

G.  ho-no'-ris,    ho-no'-rum, 

G.   ser-mo  -nis,    ser-mo'-num, 

D.  ho-no'-ri,     ho-nor'-i-bus, 

D.  ser-mo  -ni,      ser-mon'-i-bus, 

Ac.  ho-no'-rem,  ho-no'-res, 

Ac.  ser-mo'-nem,  ser-mo'-nes, 

F.   ho  -nor,        ho-no'-res, 

F.  ser'-mo,          ser-mo'-nes, 

Ab.  ho-iio'-re.     ho-nor'-i-bus. 

Ab.  ser-mo'-ne.     ser-mon'-i-bus. 

Rupes,  a  rock;  fern. 

Turris,  a  tower;  fern. 

Singular.         Plural. 

Singular.               Plural. 

N.  ru-pes,        ru'-pes, 

N.   tur'-ris,           tur'-res, 

G.  ru-pis,         ru'-pi-um, 

G.  tur'-ris,           tur'-ri-um, 

D.  ru-pi,           ru'-pi-bus, 

D.  tur'-ri,             tur'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  ru  -pern,       ru'-pes, 

Ac.  tur'-rem,  rim.  tur'-res, 

F.  ru'-pes,        ru'-pes, 

F.   tur'-ris,           tur'-res, 

Ab.  ru  -pe.          ru'-pi-bus. 

Ab.  tur'-re,  or  ri.  tur'-ri-bus. 

Ars,  art  ;  fern. 

Nox,  night  ;  fern. 

Singular.         Plural. 

Singular.              Plural. 

N.   ars,              ar'-tes, 

N.   nox,                noc'-tes, 

G.   ar-tis,          ar'-ti-um,* 

G.   noc'-tis,           noc'-ti-um,* 

I).  ar'-ti,            ar'-ti-bus, 

D.   noc'-ti,            noc'-tl-bus, 

Ac.  ar  -tern,        ar'-tes, 

Ac.  noc'-tem,         noc'-tes, 

F.   ars,               ar'-tes, 

F.    nox,                noc'-tes, 

Ab.  ar'-te.           ar'-ti-bus. 

Ab.  noc'-te.            noc'-ti-bus. 

Pronounced  ar'-she-um,  noc'-&\e-um.    Seo  ^  12, 


$57. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


23 


Miles,  a  soldier;  com.  gen. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  mi'-les,  mil'-i-tes, 

6r.  miF-T-tis,  mil'-i-tum, 

D.  mil'-i-ti,  mi-lit'-i-bus, 

Ac.  mij'-i-tem,  mil'-i-tes, 

V.  mi'-les,  mil'-i-tes, 

Ab.  mil'-i-te.  mi-lit'-i-bus. 

Pater,  a  father;  masc. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  pa'-ter,  pa'-tres, 

G    pa'-tris,  pa'-trum, 

D.  pa'-tri,  pat'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  pa'-trem,  pa'-tres,* 

V.  pa'-ter,  pa'-tres, * 

Ab.  pa'-tre.  pat'-ri-bus. 

Sedile,  a  seat ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  se-dl'-le,  se-dil'-i-a, 

G.   se-di'-lis,  se-dil'-i-um, 

D.  se-di'-li,  se-dil'-i-bus, 

Ac.  se-dF-le,  se-dil'-i-a, 

V.   se-dF-le,  se-dil'-i-a, 

Ab.  se-dl'-li.  se-dil'-i-bus. 

Carmen,  a  verse ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  car'-men,  car'-mT-na, 

G.   car'-mi-nis,  car'-mi-num, 

D.  car'-mT-ni,  car-min'-i-bus, 

Ac.  car^men,  carMm-na, 

V.  car'-men,  car'-mi-na, 

Ab.  car'-mi-ne.  car-min'-i-bus. 

Iter,  a  journey ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  i'-ter,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

G.  i-tin'-e-ris,  i-tin'-e-rum, 

D.  i-tin'-e-ri,  it-i-ner'-i-bus, 

Ac.  i'-ter,,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

V.  i'-ter,  i-tin'-e-ra, 

Ab.  i-tm'-e-re.  it-i-ner'-i-bus. 


Lapis,  a  stone ;  masc. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   la'-pis,  lap'-i-des, 

G.   lap;-i-dis,  lap'-i-dum, 

D.  lap'-i-di,  la-pid'-i-bus, 

Ac.  lap'-i-dem,  lap'-i-des, 

V.   la'-pis,  lap'-i-des, 

Ab.  lap'-i-de.  la-pid'-i-bus. 

Virgo,  a  virgin ;  fem. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   virago,  vir'-gi-nes, 

G.    vir'-gi-nis,  vir'-gi-num, 

D.  vir'-gi-ni,  vir-gin'-i-bus, 

Ac.  vir'-gi-nem,  vir'-gi-nes, 

V.    vir;-go,  vir'-gi-nes, 

Ab.  vir'-gi-ne.  vir-gin'-i-bus. 

Animal,  an  animal ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.    an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

G.    an-i-ma'-lis,  an-i-ma'-li-um, 

D.  an-i-ma'-li,  an-i-mar-i-bus 

Ac.  an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

V.    an'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-li-a, 

Ab.  an-i-ma'-li.  an-i-mal'-i-bus 

Opus,  a  work ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.   o'-pus,       \  op'-e-ra, 

G.   op'-e-ris,  op'-e-rum, 

D.  op'-e-ri,  o-per'-i-bus, 

Ac.  o'-pus,  op'-e-ra, 

V.   o'-pus,  op'-e-ra, 

Ab.  op'-e-re.  o-per'-i-bus. 

Caput,  a  head ;  neut. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.    ca'-put,  cap'-i-ta, 

G.   cap'-i-tis,  cap'-T-tum, 

D.  cap'-T-ti,  ca-pit'-I-bus, 

Ac.  ca'-put,  cap'-T-ta, 

V.    ca'-put,  cap'-i-ta, 

Ab.  cap'-i-te.  ca-pit'-i-bus. 


24  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER.  §  58—60. 

Poema,  a  poem ;  neut. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  po-e'-ma,  po-em'-a-ta, 

G.   po-em'-a-tis,  po-em'-a-tum, 

D.  po-em'-a-ti,  po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis, 

Ac.  po-e'-ma,  po-em'-a-ta, 

F.   po-e'-ma,  po-em'-a-ta, 

Ab.  po-em'-a-te.  po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis. 

RULES  FOR  THE  GENDER  OF  NOUNS  OF  THE  THIRD 
DECLENSION. 

§  58.  Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  signi- 
fication, according  to  the  general  rules,  §28 — 34,  are  not 
included  in  the  following  rules  and  exceptions. 

MASCULINES. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  er,  or,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive, 
and  05,  are  masculine  ;  as, 

sermo,  speech  ;  dolor,  pain ;  flos,  a  flower  ;  career,  a  prison  ; 
pes,  a  foot. 

Exceptions  in  O. 

§  59*  1.  Nouns  in  io  are  feminine,  when  they  signify 
things  incorporeal ;  as,  ratio,  reason. 

2.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  are  femi- 
nine ;  as,  arundo,  a  reed  ;  imago,  an  image.     So  also  grando, 
hail.     But  comedo,   a  glutton;    unedo,  a  kind    of  fruit;    and 
harpago,  a  hook,  are  masculine. 

Margo,  the  brink  of  a  river,  is  either  masculine  or  feminine. 
desire,  is  often  masculine  in  poetry,  but  in  prose  is  always  feminine. 

3.  Caro,  flesh,  and  Greek  nouns  in  o,  are   feminine;   as,   echo,  an 
echo.     SulmOj  the  name  of  a  river,  is  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  ER. 

§60.  1.  Tuber,  the  tuber-tree,  is  feminine;  but  when  it  denotes 
the  fruit,  it  is  masculine.  Linter,  a  boat,  and  laver,  water-cresses,  are 
feminine;*  siser,  a  carrot,  is  neuter.* 

2.  The  following,  in  er,  are  neuter  : — 

Acer,  a  maple-tree.  Papaver,  a  poppy.          Tuber,  a  swelling. 

Cadaver,  a  dead  body.  Piper,  pepper.  Uber,  a  teat. 

Cicer,  a  vetch.  Siler,  an  osier.  Ver,  the  spring. 

Iter,  a  journey.  Spinther,  a  clasp.          Verber,  a  scourge. 

Laser,  benzoin.  Suber,  a  cork-trw.         Zinglber,  ginger 

Rarely  masculine. 


$61-63.  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER.  25 

Exceptions  in  OR. 

$  6 1  •  Arbor,  a  tree,  is  feminine  :  ador,  fine  wheat ',  aquor,  the  sea ; 
marmort  marble ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  ES  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 

Compes,  a  fetter.  Quies,  and  Requies,  rest.  Teges,  a  mat. 

Merces,  a  reward.  Inquies,  want  of  rest. 

Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.          Seges,  growing  corn. 

2.  Ales,  a  bird  ;  comes,  a  companion  ;  heres,  an  heir ;  hospes,  a  guest ; 
interpres,  an  interpreter  ;  miles,  a  soldier  ;  obses,  a  hostage  ;  and  satelles, 
a  life-guard,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  JEs,  brass,  is  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  OS. 

Arbos,  a  tree ;  cos,  a  whetstone ;  dos,  a  dowry ;  and  eos,  the  morning, 
are  feminine  :  os,  the  mouth,  and  05,  a  bone,  are  neuter;  as  are  also  the 
Greek  words  epos,  epic  poetry ;  and  melos,  melody. 

FEMININES. 

§  6£*  Nouns  ending  in  as,  es  not  increasing  in  the 
genitive,  is,  ys,  s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  x,  are 
feminine  ;  as, 

das,  age ;  nubes,  a  cloud ;  avis,  a  bird  ;  cJilamys,  a  cloak  ; 
trabs,  a  beam  ;  pax,  peace, 

Exceptions  in  AS. 

1,  As,  a  piece  of  money,  or  any  thing  divisible  into  twelve  parts,  is 
masculine.     Greek  nouns  in  as,  antis,  are  also  masculine  j  as,  addmas, 
adamant. 

2.  Vas,  a  vessel,  and  Greek  nouns  in  as,  atis,  are  neuter ;  as,  artocreas, 
a  pie  ;  bucgras,  a  species  of  herb. 

Exceptions  in  ES  not  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

Acindces,  a  cimeter,  and  coles,  a  stalk,  are  masculine.  Antistes,  palum- 
les,  rates,  and  vepres,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  Cacotthes,  hippomanc^ 
nepenttes,  and  panaces,  Greek  words,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  IS. 
<§»  63.     I.   Latin  nouns  in  nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful. 

Masculine. 
Crinis,  hair.     Ignis,  fire.     Panis,  bread.     Manes  (plur.),  departed  spirits* 

Masculine  or  Feminine. 

Amnis,  a  river.  Clunis,  the  haunch.  Funis,  a  rope 

Cinis,  ashes,  pi.  m.  Finis,  an  end.  Canis,  a  dog. 

Fines,  (plur.),  boundaries,  is  always  masculine. 
3 


26  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER.  §  64,  65. 

2.  The  following  also  are  masculine  or  feminine : — 
Anguis,  a  snake.  Corbis,  a  basket.        Tigris,  a  tiger. 
Canalis,  a  conduit  pipe.        Pulvis,  dust,  Torquis,  a  cliain. 
Cenchris,  a  serpent.             Scrobis,  a  ditch.         Pollis,  fine  flour 

3.  The  following  are  masculine  : — 

Axis,  an  axletree.  Ensis,  a  sword.  Postis,  a  post. 

Aqualis,  a  water-pot.  Fascis,  a  bundle.  Sanguis,  blood. 

Call  is,  a  path. a  Follis,  a  pair  of  bellows.  Semis,  a  half. 

Cassis,  a  net.  Fustis,  a  club.  Sentis,  a  brier.  * 

Caulis,  or  )       .  7,  Glis,  a  dormouse.  Sodalis,  a  companion. 

Colis,          5a     Uli'  Lapis,  a  stone.  •  Torris,  a  firebrand. 

Centussis,  a  compound  Lemures,  pi.,  spectres.     Unguis,  a  nail. 

of  as.  Mensis,  a  month.  Vectis,  a  lever. 

Collis,  a  hill.  Mugilis,  a  mullet*  Verrais,  a  worm. 

Cossis,  a  worm.  Orbis,  a  circle.  Vomis,  a  ploughshare. 

Cucumis,  a  cucumber.  Piscis,  a  fish. 
Decussis,  a  compound 

of  as. 

Exceptions  in  S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

*§>  O4«  1.  Dens,  a  tooth  ;  fons,  a  fountain ;  mons,  a  mountain  ;  and 
pons,  a  bridge,  are  masculine.  So  also  are  chalybs,  steel ;  ellops,  a  kind 
of  fish  ;  epops,  a  lapwing ;  gryps,  a  griffin  ;  hydrops,  the  dropsy  ;  merops, 
a  woodpecker,  and  rudens,  a  cable. a 

2.  Some  nouns  in  ns,  originally  participles,  and  the  compounds  of  denst 
which  are  properly  adjectives,  are  masculine  ;  as,  confluens,  a  confluence  ; 
occlde.ns,  the  west;  oriens,  the  east;   torrens,  a  torrent;  bidens,  a  two- 
pronged  hoe ;  but  bidens,  a  sheep,  and  profiuens,  a  stream,  are  feminine 
To  these  add  sextans,  quadrans,  triens,  dodrans,  dcxtans,  parts  of  as. 

3.  The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  : — 
Adeps,  fatness.  Seps,  a  kind  of  serpent.       Serpens,  a  serpent. 
Forceps,  pincers.         Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Stirps,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Jlnimans,  an  animal,  is  feminine  or  neuter,  and  sometimes  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  X. 

<§>  OO.  1.  AX.  Corax,  a  raven ;  cordax,  a  kind  of  dance ;  dropax^n 
ointment ;  styrax,  a  kind  of  tree ;  and  thorax,  a  breastplate,  are  masculine  ; 
Umax,  a  snail,  is  masculine  or  feminine. 

2.  EX.  Nouns  in  ex  are  masculine,  except  fax,  dregs,  forfex,  scissors, 
lex,  a  law,  ncx,  death,  prex,  (obs.)  prayer,  and  supellex,  furniture,  which 
are  feminine,  and  atrlplex,  golden-herb,  which  is  neuter. 

Cortex,  bark ;  imbrex,  a  gutter-tile  ;  obex,  a  bolt ;  rumex,  sorrel ;  and 
silex,  a  flint,  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  :  grex,  a  herd,  and  pumex 
pumice-stone,  are  very  rarely  found  feminine. 

3.  IX.  Calix,  a  cup ;  fornix,  an  arch;   phoenix,  a  kind  of  bird ;  anr 
spadix,  a  palm-branch,  are  masculine  :  larix,  the  larch-tree,  is  masc.  or  fern 

Perdix,  a  partridge,  and  varix,  a  swollen  vein,  are  masculine  or  feminine 

4.  OX.  Box  and  esox,  names  of  marine  animals,  are  masculine. 

5.  UX.  Tradux,  a  vine-branch,  is  masculine. 

_.  .    .  •  ; 

«  Rarely  feminine. 


<§>  66-68.  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  27 

6.  YX.     Bombyx,  a  silk- worm ;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower ;  coccyxt  a 
cuckoo  ;  and  oryx,  a  wild  goat,  are  masculine.    Onyx  and  sarddnyx,  names 
of  stones  ;  also,  calx,  the  heel,  and  calx,  lime  ;  lynx,  a  lynx,  and  sandyx, 
a  kind  of  color,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

NOTE.     Bombyx,  when  it  signifies  silk,  is  feminine. 

7.  Quincunx,  septunx,  decunx,  deunx,  parts  of  as,  are  masculine. 

NEUTERS. 

<§>  66.  Nouns  ending  in  a,  e,  i,  y,  c,  I,  n,  t,  ar,  ur,  and 
us,  are  neuter  ;  as, 

diadema,  a  crown  ;  rete,  a  net ;  hydromeli,  mead  ;  lac,  milk ; 
vectlgal,  revenue ;  flumen  a  river ;  caput,  the  head ;  calcar^  a 
spur  ;  guttur,  the  throat,  and  pectus,  the  breast. 

Exceptions  in  L  and  E. 

Mugil,  a  mullet,  and  sol,  the  sun,  are  masculine.  Sal,  salt,  is  masculine 
or  neuter,  in  the  singular ;  but,  in  the  plural,  it  is  always  masculine.  Caere 
and  Prceneste  are  neuter  or  feminine. 

Exceptions  in  N. 

Nouns  in  n,  except  those  in  men,  are  masculine ;  as,  canon, 
a  rule. 

But  four  in  on  are  feminine — aedon,  a  nightingale ;  halcyon,  a  king- 
fisher; icon,  an  image;  sindon,  fine  linen:  and  four  in  en  are  neuter— 
gluten,  glue  ;  inguen,  the  groin ;  pollen,  fine  flour ;  and  unguen,  ointment. 

Exceptions  in  AR  and  UR. 

*§>  6T»  Furfur,  bran ;  solar,  a  trout;  turtur,  a  turtle  dove;  and 
vultur,  a  vulture,  are  masculine.  Baccar  and  robur,  names  of  plants,  are 
neuter.  §  29.  Tibur,  a  city,  is  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  US. 

Lepus,  a  hare;  and  Greek  nouns  in  pus  (novg),  are  masculine;  as,  tri- 
pus,  a  tripod ;  but  lagopus,  a  white  partridge,  is  feminine. 

Nouns  in  us,  having  iitu,  or  udis,  in  the  genitive,  are  femi- 
nine; &s,juventus,  youth;  incus,  an  anvil. 

Pecus,  -udis,  a  brute  animal ;  tellus,  the  earth ;  fraus,  fraud  ;  and  laus, 
praise,  are  feminine.  Pesslnus,  -untis,  is  feminine,  and  rarely  masculine. 

Grus,  a  crane,  mus,  a  mouse,  and  sus,  a  swine,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

Rhus,  sumach,  is  masculine,  and  rarely  feminine. 

RULES  FOR  THE  OBLIQUE  CASES  OF  NOUNS  OF  THE 
THIRD  DECLENSION. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

A. 

§  68.  Nouns  in  a  form  their  genitive  in  dtis  ;  as,  di-a-de1- 
ma,  di-a-dem'-a-tis,  a  crown  ;  dog' -ma,  dog'-ma-tis,  an  opinion 


28  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.          <§>  69,  70. 

E. 

Nouns  in  e  change  e  into  is ;  as,  re'-te,  re'-tis,  a  net ;  se-di'-ley 
se-dl  -Us,  a  seat. 

I. 

Nouns  in  *  are  of  Greek  origin,  and  are  generally  indeclina- 
ble ;  but  hy-drom'-e-li,  mead,  has  hyd-ro-mel'-i-tis  in  the  geni- 
tive. 

O. 

§  69.  Nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  onis ;  as,  ser'-mo, 
ssr-md'-nis,  speech  ;  pa'-vo,  pa-vd'-nis,  a  peacock. 

REMARK.  Patrials  in  o  have  6nis  ;  as,  Macgdo,-8nis;  except  Eburones, 
Lacones,  tones,  Nasamones,  Suessones,  &c.  See  p.  267,  Exc.  Incr.  in  O,  3. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
form  their  genitive  in  mis ;  as,  a-run'-do,  a-run'-di-nis,  a  reed ; 
i-md-go,  i-mag'-i-nis,  an  image. 

But  r.om$dot  a  glutton ;  unedo,  a  kind  of  fruit ;  and  harpago,  a  hook, 
have  onis. 

Cardo,  a  hinge ;  ordo,  order ;  grando,  hail ;  virgo,  a  virgin ;  and  margo, 
the  brink  of  a  river,  also  have  Inis  in  the  genitive. 

Exc  2.  The  following,  also,  have  Inis: — Apollo;  homo,  a  man;  nemo, 
nobody  ;  and  turbo,  a  whirlwind. 

Caro,  flesh,  has,  by  syncope,  carnis.  Anio,  the  name  of  a  river,  has 
Anienis ;  JVcrio,  the  wire  of  Mars,  Neritnis ;  from  the  old  nominatives, 
Anien^  Nerien. 

Exc.  3.-  Some  Greek  nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  &s,  and  their 
other  cases  singular,  in  o;  as,  Dido,  gen.  Didtis,  dat.  Dido,  &c. ; 
Argo,  -tis  ;  but  uiey  are  sometimes  declined  regularly ;  as,  Dido,  Didonisf 

c. 

<5>  70.  The  only  nouns  in  c  are  ha'-lec,  ha-U'-cis,  a  pickle, 
and  lac,  lac'-ti*,  milk. 

L.  N.  R. 

Nouns  in  I,  n,  and  r,  form  their  genitive  by  adding  is ;  as, 
con'-sul,  con'-su~lis,  a  consul ;  ca'-non,  can'-o-nis,  a  rule  ;  ho' -nor > 
ho-nd'-ris,  honor. 
So,  An'-i-mal,  an-i-ma'-lis,  an  animal.      Cal'-car,  cal-ca'-ris,  a  spur. 

Vi'-gil,  vig'-i-lis,  a  watchman.  Car'-cer,  car'-c6-ris,  a  prison. 

Ti'-fun,  Ti-ta'-nis,  Titan.  Gut'-tur,  gut'-ta-ris,  the  throat. 

Si'-ren,  si-re'-nis,  a  siren.  Mar'-tyr,  inarMf-ris,  a  martyr. 

Del'-phin,  del-phl'-nis,  a  dolphin. 

Exceptions  in  L, 

Fel,  gall  and  met,  honey,  double  I  before  is;  as,/eZZw,  mettis. 


§71-73.  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  29 

Exceptions  in  N. 

§71.  1.  Neuters  in  en  form  their  genitive  in  inis;  as, 
Jlu'-men,jlu'-mi-nis,  a  river;  glu'-ten,  glu'-ti-nis,  glue. 

The  following,  also,  form  their  genitive  in  Inis  : — oscen,  a  bird  which 
foreboded  by  singing ;  pecten,  a  comb }  tibiccn,  a  piper ;  and  tublcen,  a 
trumpeter. 

2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  on  form  their  genitive  in  ontis  ;  as,  Laomedon, 
Laomedontis.  Some  in  yn  have  ynis,  or  ynos;  as,  Trachyn,  Trachynos. 

Exceptions  in  R. 

1.  Nouns  in  ter  drop  e  in  the  genitive  ;  a.s,pa'-ter,  pa'-tris,  a 
father.  So  also  imber,  a  shower,  and  names  of  months  in  her  ; 
as,  October,  Octobris. 

But  crater,  a  cup ;  soter,  a  savior ;  and  later,  a  tile,  retain  e  in  the  genitive. 

2.  Far,  corn,  has  f arris;   hepar,  the  liver,  hepdtis;   iter,  a  journey, 
itineris  ;  Jupiter,  Jovis  ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  cordis. 

3.  These  four  in  ur  have  oris  in  the  genitive  : — ebur,  rvory ;  femur,  the 
thigh ;  jecur,  the  liver ;  robur,  strength. 

Jecur  has  alsojecinoris,  and  jocinoris. 

AS. 

§  72.  Nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  in  dtis  ;  as,  a'-tas, 
a-td'-tis,  age ;  pi'-e-tas,  pi-e-td'-tis,  piety. 

Exc.  1.  As  has  assis;  rmas,  a  male,  maris;  vas,  a  surety,  vadis ;  and 
Ttf5,  a  vessel,  ?;a^5.  Anas,  a  duck,  has  anatis. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  according  to  their 
gender ;  the  masculines  in  antis,  the  feminines  in  ddis  or  ados,  and  the 
neuters  in  dtis;  as,  addmas,  -antis,  adamant;  lampas,  -ddis,  a  lamp  ;  buce- 
ras,  -dtis,  a  species  of  herb.  Areas,  an  Arcadian,  and  Nomas,  a  Numidian, 
which  are  of  the  common  gender,  form  their  genitive  in  ddis.  Melas,  the 
name  of  a  river,  has  Meldnis. 

ES. 

$  73.  Nouns  in  es  form  their  genitive  by  changing  es  into 
is,itis,  or  etis;  as,  ru'-pes,  ru'-pis,  a  rock;  mi'-les,  mil'-i-tis,  a 
soldier ;  se'-ges,  seg'-e-tis,  growing  corn. 

A  few  Greek  proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  form  their  geni- 
tive in  i,  after  the  second  declension  ;  as,  Achilles,  -is,  or  ~i. 

Those  which  make  ttis  are, 

Ales,  a  bird.  Gurges,  a  whirlpool.        Poples,  the  ham. 

Ames,  a  fowler's  staff.     Hospes,  a  guest.  Satelles,  a  lifeguard. 

Antistes,  a  priest.  Limes,  a  limit.  Stipes,  the  stock  of  a  tree. 

Cespes,  a  turf.  Merges,  a  sheaf  of  corn.  Termes,  an  olive  bough. 

Comes,  a  companion.       Miles,  a  soldier.  Trames,  a  path. 

Eques,  a  horseman.          Palmes,  a  vine-branch.     Tudes,a«  hammer,   [dier 
Fomes, /weL  Pedes,  a  footman.  Veles,  a  light  armed  sol- 

The  following  have  etis : — abies,  a  fir-tree ;  aries,  a  ram ;  indlges,  a  man 
deified ;  interpres,  an  interpreter ;  paries,  a  wall ;  seges*  growing  corn  • 
und  teges  a  mat 

3  (a)  is  or  Kis. 


30  THIRD    DECLENSION.- — GENITIVE.  $  74,  75. 

The  following  have  etis :—  Ores,  a  Cretan  ;  lebes,  a  caldron ;  magnes,  a 
loadstone;  quies  and  requies,  rest;  and  tapes,  tapestry.  But  requies  is 
sometimes  of  the  fifth  declension. 

Some  Greek  proper  names  have  either  Mis  or  is  in  the  genitive ;  as, 
Chrejti.es,  -etis,  or  -is.  Dares,  -e~tis,  or  -is. 

Exc.  1.     Obses,  a  hostage,  and  presses,  a  president,  have  Idis. 

Exc .  2.  Heres,  an  heir,  and  merces,  a  reward,  have  edis ;  j?e5,  a  foot, 
and  its  compounds,  have  £dis. 

Exc.  3.  Cere?  has  Cer£ris;  bcs,  lessis;  and  jpr#5,  a  surety,  pradis. 
JEs,  brass,  has  aris. 

IS. 

<§>  74.  Nouns  in  is  have  their  genitive  the  same  as  the 
nominative ;  as,  au'-ris,  au'-ris,  the  ear ;  a'-vis,  a'-visy  a 
bird. 

Exc .  1 .  The  following  have  the  genitive  in  tris : — tints,  ashes  ;  cucumis, 
a  cucumber;  pulvis,  dust;  vomis  or  vomer,  a  ploughshare. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  have  tdis : — capis,  a  cup;  cassis,  a  helmet; 
cuspis,  the  point  of  a  spear;  lapis,  a  stone  ;  and  promulsis,  an  antepast. 

Exc.  3.     Two  have  Inis : — pollis,  fine  flour,  and  sanguis,  blood. 

Exc.  4.  Four  have  itis : — Dis,  Pluto ;  lis,  strife ;  Quiris,  a  Roman ;  and 
Samnis,  a  Samnite. 

Exc.  5.     Glis,  a  dormouse,  has  gliris ;  semis,  a  half,  semissis. 
Greek  nouns  in  is  form  their  genitive, 


1.  in  is,  or  eos  ;  as, 
Basis,  the  foot  of  a  pillar. 
Haeresis,  heresy. 
Metropolis,  a  chief  city. 
Phrasis,  a  phrase. 
Phthisis,  a  consumption. 
Poesis,  poetry. 


2.  in  Idis,  or  Idos ;  as, 

,  a  shield. 

s,  the  JEndd. 
Aspis,  an  asp. 
Ephemeris,  a  day-book. 
Iris,  the  rainbow. 
Nereis,  a  Nereid. 


3.  in  -111/5;  as, 
Delphis  or 
Delphin. 
Salamis. 

4.  inew*t5;  a», 
SimSia. 


Pyramis,  a  pyramid. 

Tigris,  a  tiger. 

Tyrannis,  tyranny. 
Tigris  has  sometimes  the  genitive  like  the  nominative. 
Charis,  one  of  the  Graces,nas  itis. 

OS. 

§  75.     Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  in  oris  or  6fr*5  ;  as, 
osjjlo'-ris,  a  flower;  ne'-pos,  ne-pd'-tis,  a  grandchild. 
The  following  have  oris : — 

Flos,  a  flower.  Labos  or  labor,  labor.  Os,  the  mouth. 

Glos,  a  husband's  sister.         Lepos  orlepor,  wit.     Ros,  dew. 

Honos  or  honor,  honor.          Mos,  a  custom. 
Jlrbos  or  arbor,  a  tree,  has  oris. 
The  following  have  Otis : — 

Cos,  a  whetstone.      Monocgros,  a  unicorn.        Nepos,  a  grandchild. 

Dos,  a  dowry.  Rhinoceros,  a  rhinoceros.    Sacerdos,  a  priest. 


4  76,  77.         THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  31 

r          i 

I 

Exc.  1.  Gustos,  a  keeper,  has  custodis  ;  bos,  an  ox,  lovis  ;  and  ost  a 
bone,  ossis. 

Exc.  2.  Some  Greek  substantives  in  os  have  dis  in  the  genitive;  as, 
keros,  a  hero;  Minos;  Tros,  a  Trojan. 

US. 

$  76.     Nouns  in  us  form  their  genitive  in  eris  or  oris  ;  as, 
ge'-nus,  gen'-e-riSy  a  kind  ;  tern' -pus,  tern'-po-ris,  time. 
Those  which  make  Sris  are, 

Corpus,  a  body.  Lepus,  a  hare.  Pectus,  the  breast. 

Decus,  honor.  Littus,  a  shore.  Pignus,  a  pledge. 

Dedgcus,  disgrace.  Nemus,  a  grove.  Stercus,  dung. 

Facmus,  an  exploit.          Pecus,  cattle.  Tempus,  time. 

Fcenus,  interest.  Penus,  provisions.  Tergus,  a  hide. 

Frigus,  cold. 

Exc.  1.    These  three  have  udis : — incus.,  an  anvil;  palus,  a  morass; 
and  subscus,  a  dove-tail.    Pecus,  a  brute  animal,  has  pecudis. 
Rhus,  sumach,  has  rhois,  and  rarely  roris. 

Exc.  2.  These  five  have  Otis : — juventus,  youth ;  solus,  safety ;  senectus, 
old  age  ;  servltus,  slavery  ;  virtus,  virtue. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllables  in  us  have  uris ;  as,  crus,  the  leg;  jus,  right; 
mus,  a  mouse  ;  pus,  matter ;  rus,  the  country ;  thus,  frankincense  ;  except 
grus,  a  crane,  and  sus,  a  swine,  which  have  gruis,  and  suis. 

Tellus,  the  earth,  has  teUuris  ;  and  Ligus  or  ur,  a  Ligurian,  has  Liguris. 
Exc.  4.     Fraus,  fraud,  and  laus,  praise,  h&vefraudis,  laudis. 
Exc.  5.     Greek  nouns  in  pus  (novg)  have  odis ;  as,  tripus,  tripodis,  a 
tripod ;  (EdXpus,  -odis,  which  is  sometimes  of  the  second  declension. 

Exc.  6.  Some  Greek  names  of  cities  in  us  have  untis ;  as,  Trapezus, 
Trapezuntis  ;  Opus,  -untis  ;  Pesslnus,  -untis. 

Exc.  7.  Nouns  ending  in  eus  are  all  proper  names,  and  have  their  gen- 
itive in  eos;  as,  Orpheus,  -eos.  But  these  nouns  are  found  also  in  the 
second  declension ;  as,  Orpheus,  -ei  or  -t. 

YS. 

§  77.  Nouns  in  ys  are  Greek,  and,  in  the  genitive,  some 
have  yis  or  yos,  some  ydis  or  ydos ;  as, 

Caf-pys,  Caf-py-is  or  -os,  chla^mys,  chiam'-y-dis  or  -dos,  a  cloak. 

S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

Nouns  in  s,  with  a  consonant  before  it,  form  their  genitive 
by  changing  s  into  is  or  tis ;  as,  trabs,  tra'-bis,  a  beam  ;  hi1 -ems, 
hi'-e-mis,  winter  ;  pars,  parf-tis,  a  part ;  frons,  fron'-tis,  the 
forehead. 

Those  in  6s,  ms,  and  ps,  change  s  into  is ;  except  gryps,  a 
griffin,  which  has  gryphis. 

REMARK.  Those  in  eps  also  change  e  into  i;  ^princeps,princ\pist  a 
prince.  But  seps  has  sepis,  and  auceps,  aucupis. 

Those  in  /s,  ns,  and  rs,  change  s  into  ti&. 


32        THIKD    DECLENSION. DATIVE    AND    ACCUSATIVE. 

Exc.  1.    The  following  in  ns  change  s  into  dis:—frons,  a  leaf;  glans, 
an  acorn ;  juglans,  a  walnut ;  lens,  a  nit ;  and  libripens,  a  weigher. 
Exc.  2.     Tiryns,  a  Greek  proper  name,  has  Tirynthis  in  the  genitive. 

T. 

$  78.  Nouns  in  t  form  their  genitive  in  itis.  They  are, 
caput,  the  head,  gen.  cap'-i-tis;  and  its  compounds,  occiput 
and  sinciput. 

X. 

Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  changing  x  into  cis  or  gis ; 
as,  vox,  vo'-cis,  the  voice ;  con'-jux,  con'-ju-gis,  a  spouse. 

So,  for'-nax,  for-na'-cis,  a  furnace ;  ca'-lix,  cal'-l-cis,  a  cup ;  cer'-vix, 
cer-vl'-cis,  the  neck. 

Those  which  make  j^'s  are,  conjux,  a  spouse ;  grex,  a  flock ;  Zez,  a  law  ; 
remex,  -igis,  a  rower ;  rex,  a  king. 

Also  the  following : — 
Allobrox,-ogis,  a7i.#W0-   Dumnorix, -igis.  Phalanx,  -gis,  a  phalanx. 

brogian.  Eporedorix, -igis.  Phryx,-gis,a  Phrygian. 

Ambidrix,  -igis.  Exlex,  -egis,  an  outlaw.  Sphinx,  -gis,  a  sphinx. 

Aquilex,  -egis,  a  spring  Frux,  -gis,  fruit.  Strix,  -gis,  a  screech-owl. 

hunter.  lapyx,  -Jgis,  the  north-  Styx,  -gis,  the  river  Styx. 

Biturix,  -igis,  a  Bituri-         west  wind.  Syrinx,  -gis,  Syrinx. 

gian.  Orgetorix,  -igis.  Vercingetorix,  -Igis. 

Coccyx,  -ygis,  a  cuckoo.  Oryx,  -ygis,  a  wild  goat. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  ex,  of  more  than  one  syllable,  form  their 
genitive  in  ids  ;  as,  pottex,  -ids,  the  thumb. 

Except  f&nisex,  a  mower }  narthex,  a  shrub ;  resex,  a  vine-branch ; 
xervex,  a  wether  ;  and  aqutiex,  exlex,  and  remex. 

Exc.  2.  Supellex,  furniture,  has  supellecttlis  ;  senext  an  old  man,  senis  ; 
obex,  a  bolt,  obicis,  or  objicis.  Nix,  snow,  has  nivis ;  and  nox,  night,  noctis. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  ax  form  their  genitive  in  actis  ; 
as,  Astijanax,  actis.  So  Hylax,  Bibrax,  Demonax. 

Exc.  4.  Onyx  and  sardonyx  have  ychis  in  the  genitive;  as,  o-nyx, 
onflchis. 

DATIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  T9.  The  dative  singular  ends  in  i;  as,  sermo,  dat.  sermoni. 
Anciently  it  also  ended  in  e;  as,  morte  datus.  Varr.  apud 
Gell. 

ACCUSATIVE    SINGULAR. 

The  accusative  singular,  with  the  exception  of  neuters,  ends 
in  em.  Yet  some  Latin  words  in  is,  which  do  not  increase  in 
the  genitive,  have  im,  and  some  Greek  words  have  im,  in,  or  a. 

1.  Many  proper  names  in  is,  denoting  places,  rivers,  or  gods,  have  the 
accusative  singular  in  im ;  as,  Hispdiis,  Tiberis,  Aniibis ;  so  also  J2lbis, 
dthcsis,  Bo3tis,  Jlrdris,  Bilbltis,  Jipis,  Osiris,  Syrtis,  &c.  These  some- 
times, also,  make  th*  accusative  in  in  ;  as,  Mbin. 


§80.  THIRD    DECLENSION. ACCUSATIVE.  33 

2.  The  following  also  have  the  accusative  in  im : — 
Amussis,  a  mason's  rule.       Mephitis,  foul  air.       Sitis,  thirst. 
Buris,  a  plough-tail.  Ravis,  hoarseness.       Tussis,  a  cough. 
Cannkbis,  hemp.  Sinapis,  mustard.        Vis,  strength. 
Cucumis,  a  cucumber. 

3.  These  have  im,  and  sometimes  em  : — 

Febris,  a  fever.  Restis,  a  rope.  Turris,  a  tower. 

Puppis,  the  stern.  Secaris,  an  axe. 

But  these  have  em,  and  rarely  im : — 

Bipennis,  a  battle-axe.         Navis,  a  ship.  Praesepis,  a  stall. 

Clavis,  a  key.  Ovis,  a  sheep.  Sementis,  a  sowing 

Messis,  a  Jiarvest.  Pelvis,  a  basin.  Strigilis,  a  flesh-brush. 

Crates,  a  hurdle,  and  lens,  a  lentil,  have  also  sometimes  im,  as  if  from 
trails  and  lentis. 
The  ancients  formed  the  accusative  of  some  other  nouns  in  im. 

Accusative  of  Greek  Nouns. 

<§>  80.  The  accusative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  sometimes 
retains  the  Greek  terminations  in  and  «,  but  often  ends,  as  in 
Latin,  in  em  or  im. 

I.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os,  impure,  that  is, 
with  a  consonant  going  before,  have  their  accusative  in  em  or  a  ;  as,  lampas 
(lampadis  or  -dos),  lampdda  ;  chlamys,  chlamijdem,  or  -ijda  ;  pyramis,  py- 
ramidem. 

In  like  manner  these  three,  which  have  is  pure  in  the  genitive-—  Tros, 
Trois,  Troem,  and  Troa,  a  Trojan ;  heros,  a  hero ;  and  Minos,  a  king  of 
Crete. 

Aer,  the  air ;  other,  the  sky ;  delphin,  a  dolphin ;  and  p&an,  a  hymn, 
have  usually  a;  as,  aera,  athZra,  delphlna,  p&ana.  Pan,  a  god,  has 
only  a. 

Exc.  1.  Masculines  in  is,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os  impure, 
have  their  accusative  in  im  or  in  ;  sometimes  in  idem  ;  Paris,  Parldis  or 
Paridos  ;  Parim,  Parin  or  Parldem. 

Exc.  2.  Feminines  in  is,  increasing  impurely  in  the  genitive,  though 
they  usually  follow  the  rule,  have  sometimes  im  or  in  ;  as,  Elis,  Elidis  ; 
Elidem,  seldom  Elin. 

So  Tigris,  signifying  a  river  or  a  beast,  has  tigrldem  or  tigrim;  signify- 
ing a  beast,  it  has  tigrin  also. 

II.  Greek  nouns  in  is  and  ys,  having  is  or  os  pure  in  the  genitive,  form 
their  accusative  by  changing  the  s  of  the  nominative  into  m  or  n;  as, 
Charybdis,  (gen.  Lat.  -is,  Gr.  -ecu?  or  -sog,)  ace.  Charybdim  or  -in  ;  Halys, 
-yis  or  -yos,  Halym  or  -yn. 

III.  Nouns  ending  in  the  diphthong  eus  have  the  accusative  in  ea  ;  as, 
Theseus,  Thesea;  Tydeus,  Tydca.     See  §  54. 

Demosthenes  and  Ganymedes,  have  sometimes  in  the  accusative,  besides 
em,  the  terminative  ea.  Diomede  is  contracted  from  -ea,  Virg. 

IV.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  es,  whose  genitive  is  in  is,  have  in 
Latin,  along  with  the  accusative  in  em,  the  termination  en,  as  if  of  the 


34  THIRD  DECLENSION. VOCATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE.  $81,82. 

first  declension ;  as,  Jlchillcs,  Achillen ;  Xerxes,  Xerxen ;  Sophdcles,  So- 
phoclen.  Some  also,  which  have  either  etis  or  is  in  the  genitive,  have, 
besides  etem,  eta,  or  em,  the  termination  en;  as,  Cremes,  Tholes. 

VOCATIVE    SINGULAR. 

$  81.     The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 
Many  Greek  nouns,  however,  particularly  proper  names,  drop  s  of  the 
nominative  to  form  the  vocative ;  as,  Daphnis,  Daphni ;  Tethys,  Tethy ; 
Melampus,  Melampu  ;    Orpheus,  Orpheu.     Proper   names  in  es  (gen.  is) 
sometimes  have  their  vocative  in  e  ;  as,  Socrates,  Socrate. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

$  82.     The  ablative  singular  ends  in  e. 

Exc.  1.  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar,  have  the  ablative  in  i ; 
as,  sedile,  sedlli;  animal,  animdli;  calcar,  calcdri. 

But  names  of  towns  in  e,  and  the  following  neuters  in  ar,  have  e  in  the 
ablative ;  viz.  bacchar,  an  herb  ;  far,  corn  ;  hepar,  the  liver ;  jubar,  a  sun- 
beam ;  nectar,  nectar ;  par,  a  pair ;  sal,  salt.  Rete,  a  net,  has  either  e  or  i  ; 
and  mare,  the  sea,  has  in  poetry  mare  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  Nouns  which  have  im  or  in  in  the  accusative,  and 
names  of  months  in  er  or  is,  have  i  in  the  ablative ;  as,  vis,  vim, 
vi ;  December,  Decembri  ;  Aprllis,  Aprlli. 

But  Batis,  cannabis,  and  tigris,  have  e  or  i. 

Exc.  3.  Nouns  which  have  em  or  im  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  in  e  or  * ;  as,  turris,  turre  or  turri. 

But  restis,  and  Greek  nouns  which  have  idis  in  the  genitive,  have  e 
only  ;  as,  Paris,  -Idis,  -tde. 

Exc.  4.  Adjectives  in  is,  used  as  nouns,  have  commonly  * 
in  the  ablative,  but  sometimes  e ;  as,  familidris,  a  friend ; 
natdlis,  a  birthday ;  soddlis,  a  companion  ;  triremis,  a  trireme. 
When  such  adjectives  become  proper  names,  they  always  have  e ;  as, 
Jixcenalis,  Juvendle.  Also,  affinis  and  cedilis  have  generally  e  ;  as  have 
always  juvenis,  a  youth  ;  rudis,  a  rod  ;  and  volucris,  a  bird. 

Exc.  5.  The  following,  though  they  have  only  em  in  the  accusative, 
have  e  or  i  in  the  ablative,  but  oftener  e : — 

Amnis,  Classis,  Ignis,  Pars,  Supellex, 

Anguis,  Collis,  Imber,  Postis,  Tridens, 

Avis,  Finis,  Mu^ilis,  Pugil>  Unguis, 

Civis,  Fustis,  Orbis,  Sors,  Vectis. 

Occiput,  rus,  and  vesper  have  also  e  or  i. 

So  also  names  of  towns,  denoting  the  place  where  any  thing  is  said  to 
be,  or  to  be  done,  have  sometimes  the  ablative  in  i;  as,  Carthaglni,  at 
Carthage  ;  and,  in  the  most  ancient  writers,  many  other  nouns  occur  with 
this  termination  in  the  ablative.  Canalis  has  i,  and  very  rarely  e. 

Exc.  6.  Nouns  in  ys,  which  have  ym  or  yn  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  in  ye  or  y  ;  as,  Mys,  Jltye,  or  My. 


§  83,  84       THIRD    DECLENSION. PLURAL    CASES.  35 

NOMINATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  83.  The  nominative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines 
ends  in  es  ;  as,  sermones,  rupes  ; — but  neuters  have  a,  and  those 
whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  i  have  ia ;  as,  caput,  capita ; 
sedlle,  sedilia.  Aplustre  has  both  a  and  ia. 

Some  Greek  neuters  have  e  in  the  nominative  plural  j  as,  melos;  nom. 
plural,  mele.  So  Tempe. 

GENITIVE    PLURAL. 
The  genitive  plural  commonly  ends  in  urn ;  sometimes  in  ium. 

1.  Nouns  which,  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  i  only,  or  e 
and  i,  make  the  genitive  plural  in  ium ;  as,  sedlle,  sedili,  sedil- 
ium ;  turris,  turre  or  turri,  turrium. 

2.  Nouns  in  es  and  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  genitive 
singular,  have  ium;  as,  nubes,  nubium  ;  hostis,  hostium. 

Exc.  Canis,  juvenis,  mugllis,  proles,  strues,  vates,  have  um  ;  so  oftener 
have  apis,  strigilis,  volucris  ;  less  frequently  mensis,  panis*  sedes,  and,  in 
the  poets  only,  cades,  dades,  ambages,  ccilestes,'di\&iheadjectivesviridis 
and  agrestis. 

3.  Monosyllables  ending  in  two  consonants  have  ium  in  the 
genitive  plural ;  as,  urbs,  urbium;  gens,  gentium;  arx,  arcium. 

Exc.     Lynx  and  ops  (obsolete)  have  um. 

The  following,  also,  have  ium  : — as,  mas,  glis,  Us,  os  (ossis),  faux,  nix, 
nox,  strix,  dos,  generally  fraus  and  mus,  and.  sometimes  tar. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  ns  or  rs,  and  name*? 
of  nations  in  as,  have  commonly  ium ;  as,  cliens,  clientium « 
Arplnas,  Arpinatium. 

Other  nouns  in  as  have  sometimes  ium;  as,  atas,  cBtatium.  PendU* 
and  optimates  have  usually  ium. 

5.  The  following  have  ium  : — caro,  linter,  imber,  uter,  venter,  Samnis 
Quiris,  and  usually  Insuber.     Fornax,  lar,  and  palus,  have  sometimes  ium 

6.  Greek  nouns  have  generally  um  ;  as,  Thrax,  Tkracum  ; — but  a  few, 
used  as  titles  of  books,  have  sometimes  6n ;  as,  Epigramma,  epigramma- 
tdn;  Metamorjjhosis,  -edn. 

REMARK  1.     Bos  has  bourn  in  the  genitive  plural. 

REMARK  2.  Nouns  which  want  the  singular,  form  the  genitive  plural 
as  if  they  were  complete;  as,  manes,  mnnium;  ccclltes,  ccB&tum;  as  if 
from  manis  and  cobles.  So  also  names  of  feasts  in  alia ;  as,  Saturnalia^ 
Saturnalium  ;  but  these  have  sometimes  drum  after  the  second  declension. 
Ales  has  sometimes,  by  epenthesis,  alituum.  See  §  §  322,  333. 

DATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE  PLURAL. 

§  84.     The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  in  ibus. 

Exc.  1.  Bos  has  bobus  and  bubus,  by  contraction  for  bombus ;  sus  has 
subus  for  suibus 


36        THIRD    DECLENSION. ACCUSATIVE    PLURAL.   §85,  86. 


Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  ma  have  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  more 
frequently  in  is  than  in  tbus  ;  as,  poe~ma,  poematis,  or  poemattbus. 

The  poets  sometimes  form  the  dative  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  that  in- 
crease in  the  genitive,  in  si,  and,  before  a  vowel,  in  sin  ;  as,  herois,  herol,- 
disj  heroisi)  or  herolsin.  So  in  Quintilian,  Metamorphostsi. 

ACCUSATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  85.  The  accusative  plural  ends,  like  the  nominative,  in 
es,  a,  or  ia. 

Exc.  1.  Masculine  and  feminine  nouns  which  have  ium  in  the  genitive 
plural,  have  sometimes  in  the  accusative  plural  eis,  or  is,  instead  of  es ; 
as,  paries,  gen.  partium,  ace.  partes,  parteis  or  partis. 

Exc.  2.  When  the  accusative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  not  neuter  ends 
in  a,  the  accusative  plural  ends  in  &s ;  as,  lampas,  lamp&da,  lampadas. 
So,  also,  in  some  barbarian  names  of  nations  ',  as,  Brigantas. 


Jupiter,  and  vis,  strength,  are  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 
N.   Ju'-pi-ter, 
G.   Jo'-vis, 
Z>,  Jo'-vi, 
Ac.  Jo'-vem, 
F.    Ju'-pi-ter, 
Ab.  Jo'-ve. 

<§>  86.     The  following  table  exhibits  the  principal  forms  of 
Greek  nouns  of  the  third  declension  :•*— 


Singular. 

Plural 

N.   vis, 

vi'-res, 

G.   vis, 

vir'-i-um, 

D.  — 

vir'-i-bus, 

Ac.  vim, 

vix-res, 

F.    vis, 

vi'-res, 

Ab.  vi. 

vir'-i-bus. 

Norn. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Ace. 

Voe. 

AbL 

8. 

Lampas, 

(-adis,      > 
(  -ados,      > 

-adi, 

(-adem,  > 
Kada,    $ 

-as, 

-ade. 

PI 

-ades, 

-adum, 

-adibus, 

(-ades,  > 
(-adas,  ) 

-ades, 

-adibus. 

S. 

Heros, 

-ois, 

-oi, 

(-oem,   > 
<-6a,      $ 

-OS, 

-6e. 

PL 

-oes, 

-oum, 

-oibus, 

c-6es,     > 
I  -6  as,     > 

-oes, 

-oibus. 

Chelys, 

s-yis,     j 

<-yos,      J 

fa 

$-ym,    \ 

J-yn,      5 

rJi 

-ye  or  y 

Poesis, 

(-is,  -ios,  > 
t    -eos,    $ 

-i, 

(-im,      ) 
(  -in,       ) 

-i, 

-i. 

Achilles, 

<-is,-ei,-i> 
(-eos,       > 

-i, 

c-em,     ) 
^-ea,-en) 

-cs,-e, 

-e  or-i. 

Orpheus, 

-eos, 

-ei, 

-ea, 

-eu, 

See  §  54. 

Aer, 

-eris, 

-eri, 

-era, 

-er, 

-ere. 

Dido, 

-us, 

-o, 

-o> 

-o, 

-0. 

87—89.  FOURTH    DECLENSION.  37 


FOURTH    DECLENSION. 

$  87.  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  us  and  u. 
Those  in  us  are  masculine;  those  in  u  are  neuter,  and 
indeclinable  in  the  singular  number,  except  in  the  genitive. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  are  thus  declined  : — 


Fructus,  fruit. 
Singular.  Plural. 

N.  fruc'-tus,  fruc'-tus, 

G.  fruc'-tus,  fruc'-tu-um,* 

D.  fruc'-tu-i,*  fruc'-ti-bus, 

Ac.  fruc'-tum,  fruc'-tus, 

V.   fruc'-tus,  fruc'-tus, 

Ab.  fruc'-tu.  fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu,  a  horn. 

Singular.          Plural. 

N.    cor'-nu,  cor'-nu-a, 

6r.    cor'-nus,  cor'-nu-um, 

D.   cor'-nu,  cor'-ni-bus, 

Ac.  cor'-nu,  cor'-nu-a, 

V.    cor'-nu,  cor'-nu-a, 

Ab.  cor'-nu.  cor'-ni-bus. 


In  like  manner  decline 

Can'-tus,  a  song.  Fluc'-tus,  a  wave.         Se-na'-tus,  the  senate. 

Cur'-rus,  a  chariot.  Luc'-tus,  grief.  GeMu,  ice. 

Ex-er'-ci-tus,  an  army.        Mo'-tus,  motion.  Ve'tru,  a  spit. 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  GENDER. 

§  88.     1.  The  following  are  feminine  : — 

Acus,  a  needle.  ~Ficus,aJig.  Porticus,  a  gallery. 

Domus,  a  house.  Manus,  a  hand.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

The  plurals  quinqudtrus,  a  feast  of  Minerva,  and  idus,  the  ides,  are 
also  feminine.     So  also  noctu,  by  night,  found  only  in  the  abl.  sing. 

Penus,  a  store  of  provisions,  when  of  the  fourth  declension,  is  masculine 
or  feminine.     Sccus,  sex,  is  neuter ;  see  §  94. 
Specus,  a  den,  is  very  rarely  feminine  or  neuter. 

2.  Some  personal  appellatives,  and  names  of  trees,  are  femi- 
nine by  signification.     See  §  29,  1  and  2. 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION. 

$  89.     1.  Domus,  a  house,  is  partly  of  the  fourth  declension, 
and  partly  of  the  second.     It  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

JV.   Do'-mus,  do'-nms, 

G.  do'-mus,  or  do'-mi,  dom'-u-um,  or  do-mo'-rum, 

D.  dom'-u-i,  or  do'-mo,  dom'-l-bus, 

Ac.  do'-mum,  do'-mus,  or  do'-mos, 

V.   do'-mus,  do'-mus, 

Alt.  do'-mo.  dom'-I-bus. 

*  Pronounced/rwci'-ytt-i,  orfruc'-tehu-i,  &c.    $  20.  Exc.  (c.) 


38  FIFTH    DECLENSION.  §  90. 

Domus,  in  the  genitive,  signifies,  of  a  house  ;  domi  commonly  signifies, 
at  home.  The  ablative  domu  IB  found  in  Plautus,  in  some  copies  of  Livy, 
and  in  ancient  inscriptions. 

Cornus,  a  cornel-  tree;  jicus,  a  fig-tree;  laurus,  a  laurel  ;  and  myrtus  a 
myrtle,  are  sometimes  of  the  second  declension.  Penus  is  sometimes 
of  the  third. 

Some  nouns  in  u  have  also  forms  in  us  and  urn  ;  as,  cornu,  cornus,  or 
cornum.  Adjectives,  compounds  ofmanus,  are  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions. 

REMARK.  Nouns  of  this  declension  anciently  belonged  to  the  third, 
and  were  formed  by  contraction,  thus  :  -- 

Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  Fructus,  fructues,  -us, 

G.   fructuis,  -us,  fructuum,  -urn, 

D.  fructui,  -u,  fructulbus,  -ubus,  or  -Ibus, 

Ac.  fructuem,  -um,  fructues,  -us, 

V    fructus,  fructues,  -us, 

M.  fructue,  -u.  fructuibus,  -ubus,  or  -Ibus. 

2.  The  genitive  singular  in  is  is  sometimes  found  in  ancient  authors. 
A  genitive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension,  also  occurs;  as,  senatus, 
senati  ;  tumultus,  tumulti. 

3.  The  contracted  form  of  the  dative  in  u  is  not  often  used  ;  yet  it 
sometimes  occurs,  especially  in  Caesar,  and  in  the  poets. 

4.  The  contrac^;  d  form  of  the  genitive  plural  in  um  rarely  occurs. 

5.  The  following  nouns  have  ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural  :  — 

Acus,  a  needle.  Lacus,  a  lake.  Specus,  a  den. 

Arcus,  a  low.  Partus,  a  birth.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

Artus,  a  joint.        .          }?  ecu,  a  flock. 


a  knee  ;  portus,  a  harbor  ;  tonitrus,  thunder  ;  and  wru,  a  spit, 
have  Ibus  or  ubus. 


FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

§  90.     Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  es,  and  are 
of  the  feminine  gender. 

They  are  thus  declined  • — 

Res,  a  thing.  Dies,  a  day. 


Singular.  Plural. 

N.   res,  res, 

G.   re'-i,  re'-rum, 

D.  re'-i,  re'-bus, 

Ac.  rem,  res, 

V.   res,  res, 

Ab.  re.  re'-bus. 


Singular.         Plural 

N.    di'-es,  di'-es, 

G.   di-e'-i,  di-e'-rum, 

D.  di-e'-i,  di-e'-bus, 

Ac.  di'-em,  di'-es, 

V.  di'-es,  di'-es, 

Ab.  di'-e.  di-e'-bus. 


§91,  92.   COMPOUND  NOUNS. IRREGULAR  NOUNS.      39 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  GENDER. 

Dies,  a  day,  is  masculine  or  feminine  in  the  singular,  and 
always  masculine  in  the  plural ;  meridies,  mid-day,  is  mascu- 
line only 

EXCEPTIONS  IN  DECLENSION. 

The  genitive  and  dative  singular  sometimes  end  in  e ;  as,  die  for  diet. 
The  genitive  is  sometimes  also  found  in  es  ;  as,  rabies,  gen.  rabies,  Lucr., 
and  the  genitive  and  dative  in  i  ;  as,  gen.  dii,  Virg. ;  dat.  pernidi,  Nep. 

REMARK  1.  There  are  only  about  eighty  nouns  of  this  declension,  and 
of  these  only  two,  res  and  dies,  are  complete  in  the  plural.  Ades,  effigies, 
eluvies,  fades,  glades,  progenies,  series,  spedes,  spes,  want  the  genitive, 
dative,  and  ablative  plural,  and  the  rest  want  the  plural  altogether. 

2.  All  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  ies,  except  four— -fides,  frith , 
reSj  a  thing ;  spes,  hope  ;  and  plebes,  the  common  people ; — and  all  nouns 
in  ies  are  of  this  declension,  except  abies,  aries,  paries,  and  quies,  which 
are  of  the  third  declension,  and  requies,  which  is  of  the  third  and  fifth. 

DECLENSION  OF  COMPOUND  NOUNS. 

<§>  91.  When  a  compound  noun  consists  of  two  nomina- 
tives, both  parts  are  declined ;  but  when  one  part  is  a.  nomina- 
tive, and  the  other  an  oblique  case,  the  nominative  only  is 
declined.  Of  the  former  kind  are  respublica,  a  commonwealth, 
and  jusjurandum,  an  oath ;  of  the  latter,  mater-familias9  a 
mistress  of  a  family. 

Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  res-pub'-li-ca,  res-pub'-li-cw, 

G.  re-i-pub'-li-cae,  re-rum- pub-li-ca'-rum, 

D.  re-i-pub'-li'-cse,  re-bus-pubMi-cis, 

Ac.  rem-pub'-li-cam,  res-pubMi-cas, 

V.  res-pub'-H-ca,  res-pub Ml-ce», 

Ah.  re-pub'-li-ca.  re-bus-pub'-li-cis. 


Singular.  •  Plural. 

JV.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,      ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 


G.  ju-ris-ju-ran  -di, 
/).   iu-ri-ju-ran'-do, 

At*     •iiic.in.rnTi'-H  nm 


Ac.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 
V.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran^da. 
Ab.  ju-re-ju-ran'-do.  _____ 


Singular. 

JV".  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
G.  ma-tris-fa-mil'-i-as, 
D.  ma-tri-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ac.  ma-trem-fa-mil'-i-as, 
V.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ab.  ma-tre-fa-mil'-i-as,  &c. 


NOTE.    The  preceding  compounds  are  divided  and  pronounced  like  the 
simple  words  of  which  they  are  compounded. 


IRREGULAR  NOUNS. 

$  92.      Irregular  nouns    are  divided  into  three  classes— 
Variable,  Defective,  and  Redundant. 


40  VARIABLE    NOUNS.  $  93. 

I.    VARIABLE    NOUNS. 

Nouns  are  variable  either  in  gender  or  declension,  or  in  both. 
Those  which  vary  in  gender  are  called  heterogeneous ;  those 
which  vary  in  declension  are  called  heteroclites. 

Heterogeneous  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  such 
are, 

Avernus,  Ismarus,  Maenalus,  Tartarus, 

Dindymus,  Massicus,  Pangaeus,  Taygetus. 

Plural,  jQverna,  &c. 

2.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the 
plural ;  as,  jocus,  a  jest ;  plur.  joci,  or  joca ; — locus,  a  place  ; 
plur.  loci,  passages  in  books,  topics,  places;  loca,  places;  sib- 
ilus,  a  hissing  ;   plur.  sibila,  rarely  sibili. 

3.  Feminine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;   as, 
carbdsus,  a  species  of  flax ;  plur.  carbasa,  very  rarely  carbasos, 
sails,  &c.,  made  of  it ; — Hierosolyma,  -a,  Jerusalem ;   plur. 
Hierosolyma,  -drum. 

4.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  in  the  plural ;    as, 
cesium,  heaven;  plur.  cadi; — Elysium;  plur. Elysii ; — Argos ; 
plur.  Argi.     So  siser,  n.,  plur.  siseres,  m. 

5.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the 
plural ;  as,  frenum,  a  bridle  ;  plur.  freni  or  frena ; — rastrum, 
a  rake;  plur.  rastri,  or  rastra; — pugillar,  a  writing  tablet; 
plur.  pugilldres,  or  pugillaria. 

6.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ;   as, 
epulum,  a  feast ;  plur.  epulcB  ; — balneum,  a  bath ;  plur.  balnea, 
rarely  balnea  ; — nundinum,  a  market-day ;  plur.  nundina,  a  fair. 

7.  Feminine  or  neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the 
plural ;  as,  delicia  or  delicium,  delight ;  plur.  delicicB. 

Heteroclites. 

<§>  93.  1.  Second  or  third  declension  in  the  singular,  and 
third  in  the  plural ;  as,  jugerum,  an  acre  ;  gen.  jugeri,  or 
jugeris  ;  abl.jugere;  plur.,  nom.,  and  zcc.jugera;  gen.  juge- 
rum ;  abl.  jugeris  and  jugeribus,  from  the  obsolete  jugus  or 
juger. 

2.  Third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  second  in  the  plural ; 


§94. 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


41 


as,  vas,  a  vessel ;  plur.  vasa,  drum.    Anclle,  a  shield,  has  some- 
times ancilidrum,  in  the  genitive  plural. 

NOTE.  Variable  nouns  seem  anciently  to  have  been  redundant,  and  to 
have  retained  a  part  of  each  of  their  original  forms.  Thus,  vasa,  -drum, 
properly  comes  from  vasum,  -i,  but  the  latter,  together  with  the  plural  of 
vas,  vasis,  became  obsolete. 


II.    DEFECTIVE   NOUNS. 
§  94.     Nouns  are  defective  either  in  case  or  number. 

1.  Nouns  defective  in  case  may  want  either  one  or  more 
cases.  Some  are  altogether  indeclinable,  and  are  called  aptntes. 

Such  are  pondo,  pounds,  used  only  in  the  plural  :  most  nouns  in  i : 
foreign  words  :  semis,  a  half:  git,  a  seed:  cepe,  an  onion  :  the  singular  of 
mille,  a  thousand  :  words  put  for  nouns  ;  as,  velle  suum,  for  sua  voluntas, 
his  own  inclination  :  and  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 

A  noun  which  is  found  in  one  case  only,  is  called  a  Monop- 
tote  ;  if  found  in  two  cases,  a  Diptote  ;  if  in  three,  a  Triptote  ; 
if  in  four,  a  Tetraptote ;  and  if  in  five,  a  Pcntaptote. 

The  following  list  contains  most  nouns  defective  in  case : — 


Abactus,  ace.  pi. ;  a  driving  away. 
Accitu,  abl. ;  a  calling  for. 
Admissu,  abl. ;  admission. 
Admomtu,  all. ;  admonition. 


s,  not  used  in  gen.  pi. 
Satu,  all. ;    an  addrt 
affatus,  -ibus.  Condiscipulatu,    abl.  ; 


Afiatu,  abl. ;    an  addressing  ;— pi. 


Algus,  nom. ;  algum,  ace. ;  algu,  or 

-o,  abl.  ;  cold. 
Ambage,  abl.;  a  winding  story; — 

pi.  entire. 

Amissum,  ace. ;  a  loss. 
Aplustre,  nom.  arid  ace.;  the  flag  of     Datu,  all.  ;  a  giving. 

a  ship;— ^Z.aplustria,  oraplustra.     Derisui,   dat. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ; 

ridicule. 

Despicatui,  dat. ;  contempt. 
Dica,   nom. ;    dicam,   ace. ;  a  legal 


Coalite,  abl. ;  pi.  entire ,  inhabitants 
of  heaven. 

Commutatum,  ace. ;  an  alteration. 

Compedis,  gen.  ;  compete,  abl.  ;  a 
fetter  ; — pi.  compedes,-i  urn, -ibus. 

Concessu,  abl. ;  permission. 

01  adiscipulatu,  abl. ;  companion- 
ship at  school. 

Cratim,  or  -em,  ace. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  hur- 
dle ; — pi.  crates,  -ium,  -ibus. 

Daps,  nom.,  scarcely  used;  dapis, 
gen.  &c.;  a  feast. 


Arbitratus,  nom.  ;  -um,  ace.  ;  -u, 

abl.;  judgment. 
Arcessitu,  abl.  ;  a  sending  for. 
Astu,  nom.j  ace. ;  a  city. 


process  ; — dicas,  ace.  pi. 


Astus,  nom.  ;  astu,  abl.  ;  craft ; —     Dicis,   gen. ;    as,   dicis   gratia,  for 


astus,  ace.  pi, 
Cacoethes,  nom.,  ace.  ;  an  evil  cus- 

tom ;— cacogthe,   nom.  pi.;   -e, 

and  -es,  ace.  pi. 
Cetos,  ace.;  a  whale; — cete,  nom. 

and  ace.  pi. 

Chaos,  nom.,  ace.   chao,  abl. ;  chaos  ; 
Cassem,  ace.;  ca.sse,abl.;  a  net;  _ 

pi.  entire,          [looking  around.    Ejectus,  nom.;  a  throwing  out. 
Circumspectus,  nom. ;  -um;  -u  ;  a    Epos,  ace.;  an  epic  poem. 
Coactu,  abl. ;  constraint. 
4* 


forin's  sake. 
Ditionis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat .  ;  -em,  ace. ; 

-e,  abl.;  power. 
Diu,  abl. ;  in  the  day  time. 
Divisui,  dat. ;  a  dividing. 
Ebur,  ivory  ; — not  used  in  the  gen., 

dot.,  and  all.  pi. 
Efflagitatu,  abl. ;  importunity. 


Ergo,  abl. ;  for  the  sake. 


42 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


94 


Evectus,  nom.  ;  a  conveyance. 

Faex,  dregs,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Far,  corny  not   used  in    the    gen., 

dat.,  and  abl.pl. 
Fas,  nom.,  ace. ;  right. 
Fauce,  abl.  ;  the  throat;-  plural, en- 
tire. 

Fax,  a  torch,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Feminis,gen.  ;  -i,  dat. ;  -e,  abl. ;  the 

thigh  ; — pi.  femina,  -ibus. 
Flictu,  abl. ;  a  striking. 
Foris,  nom.   and  gen.;  -em,  ace., 

-e,  abl.;  a  door  ; — pi.  entire. 
Fors,  nom. ;  -tis,  gen. ;  -tern,  ace. ; 

-te,  abl. ;  chance. 
Frustratui,  abl.  ;  a  deceiving. 
Frux,  fruit,  nom.,  scarcely  used; — 

frugis,  gen.,  &c. 
Gausape,  nom.,  ace.,  abl.;  a  rough 

garment ; — gausapa,  ace.  pi. 
Glos,  nom.,  voc. ;  a  husband's  sister. 
Grates,  ace.  pi. ;  —  gratibus,   abl.; 

thanks. 
Hiems,  winter,  not  used   in  gen., 

dat.,  and  abl.  pi. 
Hippomanes,  nom. 
Hir,  nom.  and  ace. ;  the  palm  of  the 

hand. 
Hortatu,    abl. ;    an   exhorting; — pi. 

hortatibus". 
Impetis,  gen. ;  -e,  abl.;  a  shock; — pi. 

impetibus. 

Inconsultu,  abl. ;   icithout  advice. 
Incitas,  or  -a,  ace.  pi. ;  as,  ad  incitas 

redactus,  reduced  to  a  strait. 
Indultu,  abl. ;  indulgence. 
InferisB,  nom.  pi. ;  -as,  ace. ;  sacrifices 

to  the  dead. 
fnficias,  acc.pl.;   a  denial;  as,  ire 

inficias,  to  deny. 
Ingratiis,    abl.    pi. ;   against    one's 

will. 

Injussu,  abl.  ;  without  leave. 
Inquies,  nom. ;  disquiet. 
Instar,  nom.,  ace.  ;  a  likeness. 
Interdiu,  abl.  •  in  the  day  time. 
Jnvitatu,  abl.;  an  invitation. 
Jovis,  nom.,  rarely  used  ; — pi.  Joves. 
Irrisui,   dat.;  -um,  ace.;   -u,   abl. ; 

derision. 
Jugeris,  gen. ;  -e,  abl. ;  an  ucre  ; — pi. 

jugera,  -um,  -ibus. 
Jassu,  abl. ;  command. 
Labes,  a  spot,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Lucu,  abl.;  light. 
Ludificatui,  dat.  ;  a  mockery. 


Lux,  light,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 
Mandatu,  abl. ;  a  command. 
Mane,  nom.,  ace. ;  mane,  or  -i,  abl. , 

morning. 
Mel,  honey,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Melos,  ace.;  melody; — mele,  nom., 

ace.  pi. 
Metus,/mr,  not  used  in  gen.,  dat., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Missu,  abl.;  despatch ;— pi.  missus, 

-ibus. 
Momtu,  abl.; admonition;— pi.  mon- 

itus. 

Natu,  abl. ;  by  birth. 
Nauci,  gen. ;  as,  res  nauci,  a  thing 

of  no  value,. 

Nefas,  nom,.,  ace.  ;  wickedness. 
Nemo,  nobody,  wants  the  voc.  and 

the  pi. 

Nepentnes,  nom. ;  an  herb. 
Nex,  death,  wants  the  voc.  ; — neces, 

nom.,  ace.  pi. 
Nihil,  or  nihilum,  nom.  and  ace.  ; 

-i,  gen.  ;  -o,  abl. ;  nothing. 
Noctu,  abl. ;  by  night. 
Nuptui,   dat.  ;  -um,  ace.  ;  -u,  abl.  ; 

marriage. 
Obex,  nom. ;   -icem,  ace. ;  -ice,  or 

-jice,  abl. ;   a  bolt; — pi.  obices, 

-jicibus. 

Objectum,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ;   an  inter- 
position ; — pi.  objectus. 
Obtentui,  dat. ;  -u,  abl.  ;  a  pretext. 
Opis,  gen.  ;  opem,  ace.  ;  ope,  abl. ; 

help  ; — pi.  entire. 
Oppositu,  abl. ;   an   opposing; — />£. 

oppositus. 

Opus,  nom. ,  ace.  ;  need. 
Os,  the  mouth,  wants  the  gen.  pi. 
Panaces,  nom.  ;  an  herb. 
Pax,  peace,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Peccatu,  abl. ;  sinning. 
Pecudis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. , 

-e,  abl.  ; — pi.  entire. 
Pelage,  nom.t  ace.  pi.  of  pelagus ; 

the  sea.  [promptu. 

Permissu,  abl. ;  permission.    so 

Piscatus,  nom.  ;  -i,  gen.  ;  -um,  ace.  , 

-u,  abl.  ;  a  fishing, 
fix,  pitch,  wants  gen.pl. 
Pondo,  abl. ;  in  weight. 
Preci,  dat. ;    -em,   ace. ;    -e,  abl.  \ 

prayer  ; — pi.  entire. 
Procerem,  ace. ;  a  peer  ; — pi.  entire. 
Proles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 


$95. 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


43 


Relatu,  all. ;  a  relation.  Thus  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and  all.  pi. 

Repetundarum,  gen.  pi. ;    -is,  all.;     Venui  and   -o,  dat.;  um,  ace. ;  -o, 

extortion. 

Rogatu,  abl. ;  a  request. 
Rus,  the  country,  wants  gen.,  ddt., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Satias,  nom. ;  -atem,  ace. ;  -ate,  all. ; 

satiety. 

Secus,  nom.,  ace.;  sex. 
Situs,  nom.;  -um,  ace.;  -u,  abl. ; 

situation  ; — situs,  nom.  and  ace. 

pi. ;  -ibus,  abl. 
Situs,  nom. ;  -us,  gen. ;  -um,  acc.f 

-u,  abl.  ;  rust ; — situs,  ace.  pi. 
Soboles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sol,  the  sun,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sordis,  £-671.  ;    -em,  ace.  ;  -e,  abl.  ;     Virus,  nom. ,  -i,  gen. ;  us,  ace. ;  -o, 

filth  ;—pl.  sordes,  -ium,  &c.  abl.  ;  poison. 

Spontis,  gen.  ;  -e,  abl. ;  of  one's  own     Vis,  strength,  wants  the  dat  sing.; — 

accord.  pi-  vires,  -ium,  &c.     See  §  85 

Suppetiae,  nom.  pi.  ;  -as,  ace. ;  sup-     Viscus,  nom. ;  -6ris,  gen. ;  -ere,  abl. ; 

plies.  an  internal  organ,  pi.  viscSra,  &e 

Tabum,  nom.;   -i,   gen. ;   -o,  abl. ;     Vocatu,  abl. ;  a  calling; — vocatus, 


abl.,  sale. 
Veprem,  ace.  ;  -e,  all.  ;  a  Irier;  —  pi. 

entire. 
Verberis,  gen.  ;  -e,  all.  ;  a  stripe  ;  — 

pi.  verbera,  um,  -Ibus. 
Vesper,  nom.  ;   -e  or  -i,  all.  ;  the 

evening. 
Vespgra,  nom.;  -an^  ace;  -6r£,  all.; 

the  evening. 
Vesperus,ri0m.  ;  -o,  dat.;  -um,  ace. 

-o,  all.  ;  the  evening. 
Vicis,  gen.  ;  -i,  dat.  ;  -em,  ace.  ,  -e, 

abl.  ;  change  ;  —  pi.  entire,  except 

gen. 


gore. 


ace.  pi. 


Tempe,  nom.,  ace.,  voc.  pi.  ;   a  vale     Volupe,  or  volup',  nom.,  ace. ;  pleas- 
in  Thessaly.  ure. 

To  these  may  be  added  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  which  either 
want  the  plural,  as  most  of  them  are  abstract  nouns,  or  have  in  that  num- 
ber only  the  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative.  Res  and  dies,  how- 
ever, have  the  plural  entire. 

For  the  use  of  the  vocative,  also,  of  many  words,  no  classical  authority 
can  be  found. 

$  95.  2.  Nouns  defective  in  number,  want  either  the  plural 
or  the  singular. 

(a.)  iMany  nouns  want  the  plural  from  the  nature  of  the  things 
which  they  express.  Such  are  names  of  persons,  most  names 
of  places  (except  those  which  have  only  the  plural),  the  names 
of  virtues,  vices,  arts,  herbs,  metals,  minerals,  liquors,  and  corn, 
most  abstract  nouns,  and  many  others.  * 

The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  which  want  the 
plural,  and  also  some,  marked  p,  which  are  included  in  the 
above  classes,  but  are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural. 


Aconltum,  wolfslane,  p. 
Adorea,  corn. 
ACr,  the  air,  p. 
iEs,  brass,  money,  p. 
JEther,  the  sky. 
^Evum,  an  age,  p. 
Album,  an  album. 
Allium,  garlic,  p. 
Amicitia.,  friendship,  p. 

Argilla,  white  clay. 
A  vena,  oats,  p. 
Balsamum,  balsam,  p. 
Balaustium,   the  flower 
of  a  pomegranate. 
Barathrum,  a  gulf. 
Callum,     hardness    of 
skin,  p 
Calor,  heat,  p. 

Carduus,  a  thistle. 
Caro,  flesh,  p. 
Cera,  wax,  p. 
Cestus,    the  girdle    of 
Venus. 
CicQta,  hemlock,  p. 
Coenum,  mud. 
Contagium,    a     canto* 

44 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


96. 


Crocum,  saffron. 
Crocus,  saffron,  p. 
Cruor,  blood,  p. 
Cutis,  the  skin,  p. 
Diluculura,  the  dawn. 
Ebur,  irory,  p. 
Electrum,  amber,  p. 
Far,  c->rn,  p. 
Fel,  gall. 
Fervor,  heat,  p. 
Fides,  faith. 
Firnus,  dung. 
Fuga.,  flight,  p. 
Furnus,  smoke,  p. 
Furor,  madness,  p. 
Galla,  an  oak  apple. 
Gel\i,  frost. 
Glarea,  gravel. 
Gloria,  glory,  p. 
Glastum,  woad. 
Gluten,  or 
Glutmum,  glue. 
Gypsum,  white  plaster. 
Hepar,  the  liver. 
Hesperus,   the   evening 

star. 
Hilum,  the  black  speck 

of  a  bean. 

Hordeum,  barley,  p. 
Humus,  the  ground. 
Indoles,  the  disposition. 
Ira,  anger,  p. 
fubar,  a  sunbeam. 
Jus,  justice,  law,  p.  \tion. 
Justitium,  a  law  vaca- 
Lac,  milk. 
Laetitia,J07/,  p. 
Languor,  faintncss,  p. 
Lardum,  bacon,  p. 
.Latex,  liquor,  p. 


Letum,  death. 

Lignum,  wood,  p. 

Limus,  mud. 

Liquor,  liquor,  p. 

Lues,  a  plague. 

Lutum,  day. 

Lux,  light 9  p. 

Macellum,  the  shambles. 

Mane,  the  morning. 

Marmor,  marble,  p. 

Mel,  honey,  p. 

Meridies,  mid-day. 

Mors,  death,  p. 

Munditia,  neatness,  p. 

Mundus,  female  orna- 
ments. 

Muscus,  moss. 

Nectar,  nectar. 

Nemo,  no  man. 

Nequitia,  wickedness,  p. 

Nihil,  nil,  nihilum,  no- 
thing. 

Nitrum,  nitre. 

Oblivio,forgetfulness,  p. 

Omasum,  fat  tripe. 

Opium,  opium. 

Palea,  chaff,  p. 

Pax,  peace,  p. 

Penum,  and 

Penus,  provisions. 

Piper,  pepper. 

Pix,  pitch,  p. 

Pontus,  the  sea. 

Prolubium,  desire. 

Pubes,  the  youth. 

Pulvis,  dust,  p. 

Purpura,  purple,  p. 

Quies,  rest,  p. 

Ros,  dew,  p. 

Rubor,  redness,  p. 


Sabulo,  gravel. 
Sabulum,  sand. 
Sal  (neut),  salt;  — 

(masc  ),  p. 
Salum,  the  sea. 
Salus,  safety. 
Sol,  the  sun,  a  day,  p 
Sanguis,  blood. 
Scrupulum,  a  scruple.p. 
Senium,  old  age. 
Siler,  an  osier. 
Sinapi,  mustard. 
Siser,  a  carrot,  p. 
Sitis,  thirst. 
Sopor,  sleep,  p. 
Specimen,  an  example. 
Spuma,/0a7«,  p. 
Sulphur,  sulphur,  p. 
Supellex,  furniture. 
Tabes,  a  consumption. 
Tabum,  gore. 
Tellus,the  earth. 
Terror,  terror,  p 
Thymum,  thyme,  p. 
Tribulus,  a  thistle,  p. 
Tristitia,  sadness,  p. 
Ver,  spring. 
Verbena,  vervain,  p. 
Vespera,  the  evening. 
Veternum,  and 
Veternus,  lethargy. 
Vigor,  strength,  p. 
Vinum,  wine,  p. 
Virus,  poison. 
Viscum,  and 
Viscus,  birdlime. 
Vitrum,  icoacL 
Vulgus,     the     common 

people. 
Zingiber,  ginger. 


§96.  (b.)  The  names  of  festivals  and  games,  and  several 
names  of  places  and  books,  want  the  singular ;  as,  Baccha- 
nalia, a  festival  of  Bacchus;  Otympia,  the  Olympic  games; 
Bucolica,  a  book  of  pastorals;  and  the  following  names  of 
places  : — 


Acroceraunia, 
Arnyclse, 
Artaxata, 
Athenae, 


Ceraunia, 


Ecbatana, 

EsquilioB, 

Fundi, 

Gabii, 

Gades, 


GemoniflB  seal®, 

Locri, 

Parish', 

Philippi, 

Puteoli, 


Susa, 

Syracusae, 

Iriermopylfie, 

Veii, 

Venetiee. 


Those  in  i  more  properly  signify  the  people 


96. 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


45 


The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  which  want  the 
singular,  and  also  some,  marked  s,  which  are  rarely  used  in 
that  number  : — 


Acta,  acts. 

Adversaria,  a  memo- 
randum-book. 

Estiva,  sc.  castra,  sum- 
mer quarters. 

Alpes,  the  Alps,  s. 

Annales,  annals,  s. 

Antse,  doorposts,  s. 

Antes,  fore  ranks. 

AntioB,  a  forelock. 

Apmae,  trifles. 

Argutiae,  witticisms,  a. 

Arma,  arms. 

Artus,  the  joints,  s. 

Bellaria,  sweetmeats. 

Bigae,  a  two-horse  cliar- 
iot,  s. 

Braccae,  breeches. 

Branchiae,  the  gills  of  a 
fish. 

Brevia,  shallow  places. 

Calendae,  Calends. 

Cancelli,  balustrades. 

Cani,  gray  hairs. 

Casses,  a  hunter's  net,  s. 

Caulae,  sheep-folds* 

Celeres,  light  horse. 

Ccelites,  the  gods,  s. 

Cjbaria,  victuals. 

ClitellfE,  panniers. 

Codicilli,  writings. 

Crepundia,  bawbies. 

Cunabulaj  and 

Cunae,  a  cradle. 

Cyclades,  the  Cycladian 
islands,  s. 

Decimae,  tithes,  s. 

DirsB,  the  Furies,  s. 

Divitise,  riches. 

DruTdes,  the  Druids. 

Dryades,  the  Dryads,  s. 

Epulae,  a  banquet,  a. 

Eumenides,  the  Fu- 
ries, s. 

Excubise,  watches. 

Exequiae ,  funeral  rites. 

Exta,  entrails. 

Exuviae,  spoils. 

Face ti  83,  pleasant  say- 
ings, s. 


Feriae,  holidays. 

Fides,  a  stringed  in- 
strument, s. 

Flabra,  blasts. 

Fraga,  strawberries,  a. 

Fraces,  the  lees  of  oil. 

Gemini,  twins,  s. 

Genae,  cheeks,  s. 

Gerrae,  trifles. 

Grates,  thanlts. 

Habense,  reins,  s. 

Hyades,  the  Hyades,  s. 

Hyberna,  sc.  castra, 
winter  quarters. 

Idus,  the  ides  of  a  month. 

Ilia,  the  flank. 

Incunabula,  a  cradle. 

Indutiae,  a  truce. 

Induviae,  clothes. 

Ineptiae,  silly  loit,  s. 

Inferi,  the  gods  below. 

Infer  iae.  sacrifices  to  the 
dead. 

Insecta,  insects. 

Insidice,  snares. 

Justa,  funeral  rites. 

Lactes,  small  entrails. 

Lamenta,  lamentations. 

Lapicidmae,  a  stone- 
quarry. 

Latebrae ,  lurking  places, 
s. 

Laurices,  young  rabbits. 

Lautia,  presents  to  for- 
eign ambassadors. 

Lemures,  hobgoblins. 

Lendea,  nits. 

Liberi,  children,  s. 

Luceres,  a  tribe  of  the 
Romans. 

Magalia,  cottages. 

Majores,  ancestors,  a. 

Manes,  the  shades,  s. 

Manubias,  spoils  of  war. 

Mapalia,  huts,  s. 

Minacise,  and 

Minae,  threats. 

Minores,  successors. 

Moenia,  the  walls  of  a 
city. 


Multitia,  garmentsjine' 

ly  wrought. 
Munia,  offices. 
Naiades,  fountain 

nymphs,  a. 

Nares,  the  nostrils,  B. 
Natales,  parentage. 
Nates,  the  haunches,  s. 
Nomae,  corroding  sores, 

s. 
Nonae,  the  nones  of  a 

month. 

Nugae,  trifles. 
Nundinae,    a   fair,     a 

mart. 

Nuptice,  a  marriage. 
Qbliviviiforgetfulness,  9 
Offuciae,  cheats,  a. 
Optimates,  nobles,  B. 
Pandect®,  pandects. 
Palearia,  the  dewlap,  e. 
Pariet!ns3,  old  walls. 
Partes,  a  party. 
Pascua,  pastures,  a. 
Penates,      household 

gods,  a. 

PhalgroB,  trappings,  s. 
Philtra,  love  potions. 
Pleiades,      the     seven 

stars,  a. 

Posteri,  posterity. 
Praebia,  an  amulet. 
Praecordia,     the    parts 

about  the  heart. 
Primitiae,  first  fruits. 
Procures,  rtobles,  s. 
Pugillaria,  or  -ares,  a 

note-book,  s. 
Quadrigae,  a  four  horse 

chariot,  a. 
Quirites,     citizens    of 

Rome,  a. 

Quisquilice,  refuse. 
Reliquiae ,  a  remainder, 

a. 
Salebrae,  rugged  places, 

a. 

Salinas,  a  salt  pit. 
Scalae,  a  ladder,  a. 
Scatebrae,  a  spring  a. 


46 


DEFECTIVE    NOUNS. 


<§,  97,  98. 


Scopas,  a  broom. 
Scruta,  old  clothes. 
Sentes,  thorns,  s. 
Sponsalia,  espousals. 
Stativa,   sc.    castra,    a 

pifched  camp. 
Superij  the  gods  above. 
Talana,  winged  shoes. 

§  97.     The  following  differ  in  meaning   in   the  different 
numbers : — 


Tenebrse,  darkness. 
Tesqua,  rough  places. 
Thermae,  hot  baths. 
Tormina,  colic  pains. 
Transtra,  seats  for  row- 
ers, s. 
Tricse,  trifles,  toys. 


Utensilia,  utensils. 
Valv  ae,  folding  doors. 
Vepres,  brambles,  s. 
Vergiliae,  the  seven  stars. 
VindicisB,   a    claim   of 

liberty. 
Virgulta,  bushes. 


j(Edes,  -is,  a  temple. 
jEdes,  -him,  a  house. 
Auxilium,  aid. 
Auxifia,     auxiliary 

troops. 

Bonum,  a  good  thing. 
Bona,  property. 
Career,  a  prison. 
Carceres,  a  goal. 
Castrum,  a  castle. 
Castra,  a  camp. 
Comit.hun,  a  part  of  the 

Romanforum. 
Comitia,   an    assembly 

for  election. 
Cupedia,  -SB,  daintiness. 
Cupedi®,  -arum,  and 
Cupedia,  -orUm,  dain- 

ties. 

Copia,  plenty. 
Copies,  forces. 
Facultas,  ability. 
Facilitates,  wealth. 


Ludus,  pastime. 
Ludi,  public  games. 
Fastus,  -us,  pride. 
Fastus,  -uum,  and 
Fasti,  -orum,  a  calendar. 
Natalis,  a  birthday. 
Natales,  birth,  lineage. 
Fortuna,  Fortune. 
Fortunes,  wealth. 
Furfur,  bran. 
Furfures,  dandruff. 
Gratia,  favor.. 
Gratiae,  thanks. 
Impedimentum,  a  hin- 

derance. 

Impedimenta,  baggage. 
Litera,  a  letter  of  the 

alphabet. 

Litgree,  an  epistle. 
Lustrum,  a  space  of  Jive 

years. 
Lustra,    dens  of  wild 

beasts. 


Mos,  custom. 

Mores,  manners. 

Opis,  gen.  help. 

Opes,  -um,  powert 
wealth. 

Opera,  labor.    . 

Operse,  workmen. 

Plaga,  a  climate. 

Plagse,  nets,  toils. 

Prmcipium,  a  begin- 
ning. 

Principia,  the  general's 
quarters. 

Rostrum,  a  beak. 

Rostra,  a  pulpit  or  tri" 
bunal. 

Rus,  the  country. 

RWKL,  fields. 

Sal,  salt. 

Sales,  witticisms. 

Torus,  a  bed,  a  cord. 

Tori,  brawny  muscles. 


§  98.     The  following  plurals  are  sometimes  used  in  poe- 
try for  the  singular  : — 


Alta,  the  sea. 

Guttura,  the  throat. 

Ortus,  a  rising,  the  east. 

Anlmi,  courage. 

Hymenosi,  marriage. 

Otia,  ease,  leisure. 

Aurse,  the  air. 

Jejuma.,fasting. 

Pectora,  the  breast. 

Carlnse,  a  keel. 

Ignes,  love. 

Rictus,  the  jaws. 

Cervices,  the  neck. 

Inguina,  the  groin. 

Robora,  oak,  strength. 

Coll  a,  the  neck. 

Jubse,  a  mane. 

Silentia,  silence. 

Coma?,  the  hair. 

Limina,  a  threshold. 

Sinus,   the   breast  of  a 

Connubia,  marriage. 

Litora,  a  shore. 

Roman  garment. 

Corda,  the  heart. 

Mensoe,    a    service    or 

Taedse,  a  torch. 

Corpora,  a  body. 

course  of  dishes. 

Tempora,  time. 

Crepuscula,  twilight. 
Currus,  a  chariot. 

Nnenise,  a  funeral  dirge. 
Numlna,  the  divinity. 

Thalami,  marriage,  or 
rnarriage-bed. 

Exilia,  banishment. 

Odia,  hatred. 

Thura,  frankincense. 

Frigora,  cold. 

Ora,     the    mouth,    the 

Tori,  a  bed,  a  couch. 

Gaudia,  joy. 

countenance. 

Visa,  a  journey. 

Gramma,  grass. 

Or  83,  confines. 

Vultus,  the  countenance 

$99. 


REDUNDANT    NOUNS. 


47 


III.    REDUNDANT   NOUNS. 

§  99.     Nouns    are   redundant  either    in   termination,    in 
declension,  in  gender,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

1.  In  termination:  (a.)  of  the  nominative;    as,  arbor,  and 
arbos,  a  tree  :  (b.)  of  the  oblique  cases;  &$,tigris;  gen.  tigris, 
or  -idis ;  a  tiger. 

2.  In  declension ;  as,  laurus ;  gen.  -£,  or  -us  ;  a  laurel. 

3.  In   gender ;    as,  vulgus,   masc.   or   neut. ;    the   common 
people. 

4.  In  termination  and  declension  ;  as,  senecta,  -ce,  and  senec- 
tus,  -utis  ;  old  age. 

5.  In  termination  and  gender ;  as,  pileus,  masc.,  and  pileum, 
neut. ;  a  hat. 

6.  In  declension  and  gender  ;  as,  penus,  -i  or  -us,  masc.  or 
fern.,  and  penus,  -oris,  neut. ;  a  store  of  provisions.     Specus, 
-us  or  -e,  rnasc.,  fern.,  or  neut. 

7.  In  termination,  declension,   and  gender ;  as,  menda,  -a, 
'em.,  and  mendum,  -it  neut. ;  a  fault. 

The  following  list  contains  most  Redundant  Nouns  of  the 
above  classes : — 


Abusio,  and  -us,  -us,  an  abuse. 

Acinus,  and  -um,  a  grape-stone. 

Adagium,  and  -io,  a  proverb. 

Admonitio,  and  -us,  -its,  an  advising. 

yEthra,  and  ^Ether,  the  clear  sky. 

Affectio,  and  -us,  -iis}  affection. 

Agamemno,  and  -on,  Agamemnon. 

Alabaster,  -tri,  and  -trum,  an  alabas- 
ter box. 

Alimonia,  and  -um,  aliment. 

Alluvio,  and  -es,  a  flood. 

Alvearium,  and  -are,  a  lee-hive. 

Amaracus,  and  -urn,  sweet  majyoram. 

Anfractum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  winding. 

Angiportum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  narrow 
way. 

Antidotus,  and  -um,  an  antidote. 

\ranea,  and  -us,  a  spider. 

Arar,  and  -aris,  the  river  Arar. 

Arbor,  and  -os,  a  tree. 

Architectus,  and  -on,  an  architect. 

Attagena,  and  -gen,  a  woodcock. 

Avaritia,  and  -ies,  avarice. 

Augmentum,  and  -men,  increase. 

Baccar,  and  -aris,  a  hind  of  herb. 

Baculus,  and  -urn,  a  staff. 

Balteus,  and  -urn,  a  belt. 


Barbaria,  and  -ies,  barbarism. 

Barbitus,  and  -on,  a  harp. 

Batillus,  and  -um,  afire  shovel. 

Blanditia,  and  -ies,  flattery. 

Buccina,  and  -um,  a  trumpet. 

Bura,  and  -is,  a  plough-tail. 

Buxus,  and  -um,  the  box-tree. 

Calamister,  -tri,  and  -trum,  a  crisp- 
ing-pin. 

Callus,  and  -um,  hardness  of  the  skin. 

Cancer,  -Iri,  or  -eris,  a  crab. 

Canitia,  and  -ies,  hoariness. 

Capus,  and  Capo,  a  capon. 

Cassida,  and  Cassis,  a  helmet. 

Catlnus,  and  -um,  a  platter. 

Cepa,  and  -e,  an  onion. 

Chirographus,  and  -um,  a  hand  writ- 
ing. 

Cingula,  -us,  and  -um,  a  girdle. 

Clypeus,  and  -um,  a  shield. 

Cochlearium,  -ar,  and  -are,  a  spoon. 

Colluvio,  and  -ies,  filth. 

Commentarius,  and  -um,  a  journal, 

Cornpages,  and  -o,  a  joining. 

Conatum,  and  -us,  -us,  an  attempt. 

Concinnitas,  and  -tado,  neatness. 

Consortium,  and  -io,  partnership. 


49 


REDUNDANT    NOUNS. 


<§>   99. 


Contagium,  -io,  and  -es,  contact. 
Cornus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  cornel-tree. 
Costus,  and  -um,  a  kind  of  shrub. 
Crocus,  and  -urn,  saffron. 
Crystallus,  and  -um,  crystal. 
Cubltus,  and  -um,  a  cubit. 
Cupiditas,  and  -pido,  desire. 
Cupressus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  cypress-tree 
Culeus,  and  -um,  a  leathern  lag. 
Deiicia,  and  -um,  a  delight. 
Delphmus,  and  Delphin,  a  dolphin. 
Desidia,  and  -es,  sloth. 
Dictanmus,  and  -um,  dittany. 
Diluvium,  and  -ies,  a  deluge. 
Domus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  house. 
Dorsus,  and  -um,  the  back. 
Duritia,  and  -ies,  hardness. 
EbSnus,  and  -um,  ebony. 
Effigia,  and  -ies,  an  image. 
Elegeia,  and  -us,  an  elegy. 
Elephantus,  and  -phas,  an  elephant. 
Esseda,  and  -um,  a  chariot. 
Evander,  -dri,  and  -drus,  Evander. 
Eventurn,  and  -us,  -us,  an  event. 
Exemplar,  and  -are,  a  copy. 
Ficus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  Jig-tree. 
Fimus,  and  -um,  dung. 
Fretum,  and  -us,  -{is,  a  strait. 
Fulgetra,  and  -um,  lightning. 
Galerus,  and  -um,  a  hat. 
Ganea,   and   -um,  a  subterraneous 

room.  „ 

Gibba,  -us,  and  -er,  -eri,  a  bunch. 
Glooms,  -i,  or  -eris,aball  of  thread. 
Glutmum,  and  -ten, glue. 
Gobius,  and  -io,  a  gudgeon. 
Gruis,  and  Grus,  a  crane. 
Hebdomada,  and  -mas,  a  week. 
Helleborus,  and  -um,  hellebore. 
Honor,  and  -os,  honor. 
Hyssopus.  and  -um,  hyssop. 
Jlios,  and  -on,  Troy. 
Incesturn,  and  -us,  -us,  incest. 
Jntubus,  and  -um,  endive. 
Jugulus,  and  -um,  the  throat. 
Juventa,  -us,  and  -as,  youth. 
Labor,  and  -os,  labor. 
Lacerta,  and  -us,  a  lizard. 
JLaurus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  laurel. 
Lepor,  and  -os,  wit. 
Libraria,  and  -um,  a  book-case. 
Ligur,  and  -us,  -uris,  a  Ligurian. 
Lupin  us,  and  -um,  a  lupine. 
Luxuria,  and  -ies,  luxury. 
Maeander,  -dri,  and  -drus,  Maunder. 


Materia,  and  -ies,  materials. 
Medimnus,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Menda,  and  -um,  a  fault. 
Milliarium,  and  -are,  a  mz7e. 
Modius,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Mollitia,  and  -ies,  softness. 
Momentum,  «»d  -men,  motion. 
Mugil,  and  -ilis,  a  'mullet. 
Mulciber,  -eri,  or  -eris,  Vulcan. 
Mulctra,  and  -urn,  a  milk-pail. 
Munditia,  and  -ies,  neatness. 
Muria,  and  -ies,  6rine  or  pickle. 
Myrtus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  myrtle. 
Nardus,  and  -um,  spikenard. 
Nasus,  and  -um,  the  nose. 
Necessltas,  and  -udo,  necessity. 
Nequitia,  and  -ies,  wickedness. 
Notitia,  and  -ies,  knowledge. 
Oblivium,  and  -io,forgetfulness. 
Obsidium,  and  -io,  a  siege. 
tEdipus,  -i,  or  -odis,  (Edipus. 
Orpheus,  -ei,  or  -eos,  Orpheus. 
Palatus,  and  -um,  the  palate. 
Falumba,  -es,  and  -us,  -us,  a  pigeon. 
Papyrus,  and  -um,  papyrus. 
Paupertas,  and  -ies,  poverty. 
Pavus,  and  -o,  a  peacock. 
Penus,    -or is, -i,  or  -us,  and  Penum, 

provisions. 

Peplus,  and  -um,  a  veil. 
Perseus,  -ei,  or  -eos,  Perseus. 
Piletis,  and  -um,  a  hat. 
Pinus,  -i,  or  -us,  a  pine-tree. 
Pistrina,  and  -um.  a  bake-house. 
Planitia,  and  -ies,  a  plain. 
Plato,  and  -on,  Plato. 
Plebs,  and  Plebes,  -ei,  the  common 

people. 

Postulatum,  and  -io,  a  request. 
Prsesepes,  -is,  and  -e,  a  staole. 
Proetextum,  and  -us,  -us,  a  pretext. 
Prosapia,  and  -ies,  lineage. 
Rapa,  and  -um,  a  turnip. 
Requies,  -etis,  or  -c4',  rest. 
Rete,  and  -is,  a  net. 
Reticulus,  and  -um,  a  small  net. 
Rictum,  and  -us,  -us,  the  mouth. 
RUJSCUS,  and  -um,  butcher's  broom 
Saevitia,  and  -ies,  cruelty. 
Sagus,  and  -um,  a  soldier's  cloak. 
Sanguis,  and  -guen,  blood. 
Satrapes,  and  Satraps,  a  satrap. 
Scabritia,  and  -ies,  roughness. 
Scobis,  and  Scobs,  sawdust. 
Scorpius,  and  -io,  a  scorpion 


§   100.  DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS.  49 

Scrobis,  and  Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Tabus,  and  -um,  gore. 

Segmentum,  and  -men,  a  piece.  Tapetum,  -ete,  and  -es,  tapestry. 

Segnitia,  and  -ies,  sloth.  Teneritas,  and  -tudo,  softness. 

Senecta,  and  -us,  old  age.  Tiara,  and  -as,  a  turban. 

Sensum,  and  -us,  -us,  sense.  Tignus,  and  -um,  «  plank. 

Sequester,  -tri,  or  -tris,  an  umpire.  Tigris,  -is,  or  -Idis,  a  tiger. 

Sesama,  and  -um,  sesame.  Titanus,  and  Titan,  Titan. 

Sibilus,  and  -um,  a  hissing.  Tonitruum,  and  -trus,  thunder. 

Sinapi,  and  -is,  mustard.  Torale,  and  -al,  a  led  covering. 

Sinus,  and  -um,  a  milk-pail.  Trabes,  and  Trabs,  a  beam. 

Sparus,  and  -um,  a  spear.  Tribula,  and  -um,  a  threshing  ma- 
Spurcitia,  and  -ieSjJilthiness.  chine. 

Squalitudo,  and  Sqaalor,/^/tme55.  Vespera,  -perus,  and  -per,  the  even* 
Stramentum,  and  -men,  straw.  ing. 

Suffimentum,  and  -men,  a  perfume.  Vinaeeus,  and  -um,  a  grape-stone. 

Suggestus,  and  -um,  a  pulpit.  Viscus,  and  -um,  birdlime. 

Supparus,  and  -um,  a  veil.  Vulgus,  masc.andneut.,£Ae  common 
Supplicium,  and  -icatio,  a  suppli-          people, 
cation. 

To  these  may  be  added  some  other  verbals  in  us  and  io,  and  Greek 
nouns  in  o  and  on;  as,  Dio  and  Dion;  also  some  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
e,  which  have  Latin  forms  in  a  ;  as,  Atrldes  and  Atrlda.  See  §  45. 

Some  proper  names  of  places  also  are  redundant  in  number;  as,  Argos 
and  Argi ;  Cuma  and  CumcR  ;  Fidtna  and  Fidence  ;  Thebe  and  TJiebce. 

The  different  forms  of  most  words  in  the  above  list  are  not  equally 
common,  and  some  are  rarely  used,  or  only  in  particular  cases. 


DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 

§  100.  Nouns  are  derived  from  other  nouns,  from  adjec- 
tives, and  from  verbs. 

I.  From  nouns  are  derived  the  following  classes  : — 
1.  A  patronymic  is  the  name  of  a  person,  derived  from  that 
of  his  father  or  other  ancestor,  or  of  the  founder  of  his  nation. 

Patronymics  are  properly  Greek  nouns,  and  have  been  borrowed  from 
that  language  by  the  Latin  poets. 

MoBt  masculine  patronymics  end  in  ides ;  as,  Priamides,  a 
son  of  Priam ;  Romulida,  the  Romans,  from  their  first  king, 
Romulus.  Those  from  nouns  in  cus  usually  contract  eides  into 
ides ;  as,  Atrides,  from  Atreus.  Those  from  nouns  in  as  and 
es,  of  the  first  declension,  end  in  ddes ;  as,  ^Eneades,  from 
JEneas ;  but  some,  from  nouns  of  this  and  of  other  declensions, 
end  in  iddes ;  as,  Anchisiddes,  from  Anchises  ,  Abantiddes,  from 
Abas. 

To  masculine  patronymics  in  ides,  eidesy   ades,  and  iddes , 

correspond  feminines  in  is,  eis,  as,  and  ias ;  as,  Tyndaris,  the 

daughter  of  Tyndarus;  Nereis,  the  daughter  ofNereus  ;    Thes- 

tiast  the  daughter  of  Thestius ;  ^Eetias,  the  daughter  of  JEetes. 

o 


50  DERIVATION    OF    NOUNS.  <§>   100. 

A  feminine  in  ine  is  also  found ;  as,  Nerlne,  from  Nereus. 

Patronymics  in  des  and  ne  are  of  the  first  declension ;  those  in  is  and  as, 
of  the  third. 

2.  A  patrial  or  gentile  noun  is  derived  from  the  name  of  a 
country,  and  denotes  an  inhabitant  of  that  country ;  as,  Tros,  a 
Trojan  man ;    Troas,  a  Trojan  woman ;  Macedo,  a  Macedo- 
nian; Samnis,  a  Samnite;  from  Troja,  Macedonia,  and  Sam- 
nium. 

Most  patrials  are  properly  adjectives,  relating  to  a  noun  understood ; 
as,  homo,  civis,  &c. 

3.  A  diminutive  signifies  a  small  thing  of  the  kind  denoted 
by  the  primitive. 

Diminutives  generally  end  in  lus,  la,  or  lum,  according  as  the 
primitive  is  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter.  These  terminations 
are  usually  added  either  to  the  nominative  or  to  the  root  of  the 
primitive:  commonly  u  or  cu  is  inserted  before  them;  as,  ado- 
lesccntulus,  a  very  young  man,  from  adolescens,  a  youth;  arula, 
a  little  altar,  from  ara;  scutulum,  a  little  shield,  from  scutum; 
fraterculus,  mulicrcula,  opusculum,  fromfrater,  mulier,  and  opus. 

In  some,  6  is  inserted  instead  of  u;  &s,Jilidlus,  fromjilius. 

A  few  diminutives  end  in  leus ;  as,  equuleus,  from  equus,  a 
horse. 

Sometimes  the  root  of  the  primitive  is  variously  modified ; 
as,  homunculus,  asellus,  libellus,  from  homo,  asinus,  and  liber. 

Some  diminutives  differ  in  gender  from  their  primitives ;  as, 
ranunculus,  scamillus,  from  rana  and  scamnum. 

4.  Amplificatives  are  personal  appellations,  denoting  an  ex- 
cess of  what  is  expressed  by  their  primitives ;  as,  capita,  one 
who  has  a  large  head,  from  caput,  the  head;  naso,  one  who  has 
a  large  nose,  from  nasus,  the  nose. 

5.  The  termination  iwn  or  itium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun, 
indicates  an  assemblage  of  the  individuals  denoted  by  the  prim- 
itive, or  their  office  or  employment;  as,  collegium,  an  assembly 
of  colleagues ;  servitium,  a  collection  of  servants ;  sacerdotium, 
the  priesthood ;  ministcrium,  a  ministry  ;  from  collega,  servus, 
sacerdos,  and  minister. 

6.  The  termination  imonium  is  added  to  the  root  of  a  few 
nouns,  denoting  that  which  gives  to  the  primitives  their  char- 
acter ;    as,   testimonium,   testimony ;    vadimonium,   obligation ; 
from  testis  and  vas  (vadis). 

7.  The   termination   etum,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of 
plants,  denotes  a  place  where  they  grow  in  abundance;  as, 
quercetum,  lauretum,  from  quercus,  an  oak,  and  laurus,  a  laurel. 


<§>  101,   102.  DERIVATION    OP    NOUNS.  *        51 

But  some  are  irregular  ;   as,  arbustum,  salictum;  from  arbos,  a 
tree,  and  salix,  a  willow. 

8.  The  termination  arium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  de- 
notes the  place  where  the  things  signified  by  the  primitive  are 
kept ;  as,  aviarium,  plantarium ;  from  avis,  a  bird,  and  planta, 
a  plant. 

9.  The  termination  He,  also,  added  to  the  root  of  words  de- 
noting animals,  marks  the  place  where  they  are  kept ;  as,  60- 
vlle,  caprlle,  ovile ;  from  bos,  an  ox,  caper,  a  goat,  and  ovis,  a 
sheep. 

This  and  the  preceding  class  are  properly  neuter  adjectives. 

<§>  101.  II.  From  adjectives  are  derived  the  following  forms 
of  abstract  nouns.  See  §  26. 

1.  The  terminations  itas,  ia,  itudo,  and  edo,  are  added  to 
the  root  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  cupiditas,  desire ;  audacia,  bold- 
ness ;  magnitude,  greatness ;  albedo,  whiteness ;  from  cupidus, 
audax,  magnus,  and  albus. 

So  atrocltas,  crudeUtas,  from  atrox  and  crudelis  ;  concordidjperjidia,  from 
concors  and  perfldus ;  similitudo,  longitudo,  from  simllis  andlongus;  did- 
cedo,  pingmdo,  from  dulcis  smdpinguis. 

When  the  root  ends  in  i,  the  abstract  is  formed  in  etas ;  as, 
pietas,  piety  ;  anxietas,  anxiety ;  from  plus  and  anxius. 

Libertas,  liberty,  is  contracted  from  liberitas.  So  juventas, 
pauper  £  as  ;  and  difficult  as,  difficulty,  from  difficifttas. 

A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  itus  or  tus,  instead  of  itas ; 
as,  scrvitus,  slavery;  juventus,  youth  ;  from  servus  andjuvenis. 

Instead  of  ia,  some  adjectives  in  us  and  is  add  itia,  or  ities, 
to  the  root ;  as,  avaritia,  avarice ;  justitia,  justice ;  from  avd- 
rus  and  Justus  ; — durities,  hardness ;  scevities,  cruelty  ;  from 
durus  and  scevus ;  segnitia  and  segnities,  from  segnis. 

Consuetudo,  desuetudo,  mansuetudo,  and  sollicitudo,  omit  it 
in  the  termination,  as  their  root  ends  in  t. 

2.  A  few  adjectives  form  abstracts  in  imonia ;  as,  acrimonia, 
tartness  ;  sanctimonia,  sanctity  ;  from  acer  and  sanctus. 

Abstracts  are  sometimes  formed  from  the  same  adjective  with 
different  terminations  ;  as,  claritas  and  claritudo,  from  clarus. 

Adjectives,  as  distinguished  from  the  abstracts  which  are 
formed  from  them,  are  called  concretes. 

§  102.  III.  Nouns  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal 
nouns. 

The  following  are  the  principal  classes  : — 

1.  The  termination  or,  added  to  the  first  root  of  a  verb,  espe- 


52  DERIVATION    OF     NOUNS.  §    102. 

cially  of  a  neuter  verb,  denotes  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb 
abstractly;  as,  amor,  love ;  favor,  favor;  m&ror,  grief;  splen- 
dor, brightness  ;  from  amo,faveo,  m&reo,  and  splendeo. 

2.  From  many  verbs  abstracts  are   formed  by  adding  turn  to 
the  first  root ;  as,  colloquium,  a  conference ;  gaudium,  joy  ;  ex- 
ordium,  a  beginning ;  from  colloquor,  gaudco,  and  exordior. 

Some  words  of  this  class  are  formed  by  changing  final  u,  in 
the  third  root  of  the  verb,  into  ium ;  as,  exitium,  destruction  ; 
solatium,  consolation ;  from  exeo  (exitu)  and  solor  (soldtu). 

3.  Some  verbal  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  ela,  imonia,  or 
imonium,  to   the  first   root  of  the  verb  ;    as  loquela,  speech ; 
querela,  a  complaint;  suadela,  persuasion  ;  from  loquor,  queror, 
and  suadeo ; — alimonia  and  atimonium,  nutriment,  from  alo  ; — 
querimonia,  a  complaint,  from  queror. 

4.  The  termination  mentum,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  generally  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denotes  a  means  for 
the  performance  of  the  action  of  the  verb;  as,  documentum,  a 
means  of  teaching  ;  from  doceo.     So  blandimentum,  experimen- 
tum,  etc. ;  and  so  fomcntum,  momentum^  for  fovimentum,  etc., 
from  foveO)  etc. 

The  termination  men  has  sometimes  a  similar  signification ; 
as,  tegmen,  a  covering ;  from  tego. 

Some  words  of  this  class  have  no  primitive  verb  in  use ;  as, 
air  amentum,  capillamentum,  &/c. 

5.  The  terminations  ulum,  bulum,  and  culum,  added  to  the 
first  root  of  a  verb,  the  two  last  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denote 
a  means  or  instrument;  as,  cingulum,  a  girdle ;  jaculum,  a  jave- 
lin ;    vehiculum,  a  vehicle ;  venabulum,  a  hunting-spear ;  from 
cingo,  jacio,  veho,  and  venor. 

Some  words  of  this  kind  are  formed  from  nouns  ;  as,  acetab- 
ulum,  a  vinegar  cruet ;  thuribulum,  a  censer ;  from  acetum  and 
thus. 

6.  Nouns  formed  by  changing  final  u,  in  the  third  root  of  the 
verb,  into  or  and  rix,  denote  respectively  the  male  and  female 
agent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb ;  as,  adjutor,  adjutrix, 
an  assistant;  fautor,  fautrix,  a  favorer  ;  victor,  victrix,  a  con- 
queror ;  from  adjuvo  (adjutu),faveo  (fautu),  vinco  (victu). 

The  feminine  form  is  less  common  than  the  masculine. 

Some  nouns  in  tor  are  formed  immediately  from  other  nouns ; 
as,  viator,  a  traveller  ;  janitor,  a  door-keeper ;  from  via  and 
janua.  In  meretrix  from  mereo,  i  of  the  third  root  becomes  e. 

7.  Many  abstract  nouns  are  formed   by  changing  final  u,  in 
the  third  root  of  a  verb,  into  io  and  us;  as,  actio,  an  action; 


<§>   103.  COMPOSITION    OF    NOUNS.  53 

cautio,  caution;  lectio,  reading;  from  ago  (actu),  caveo  (cau- 
tu),  lego  (lectu)  ; — cantus,  singing;  visus,  sight;  ususy  use; 
from  cano  (cantu),  video  (visu),  utor  (usu). 

Nouns  of  both  forms,  and  of  the  same  signification,  are  fre- 
quently derived  from  the  same  verb ;  as,  concursio  and  concur- 
sus,  a  running  together ;  motio  and  motus,  &-c. 

The  termination  ra,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  some- 
times has  the  same  signification  as  io  and  us,  and  sometimes 
denotes  the  result  of  an  action  ;  as,  positura,  position ;  vinctu- 
ra,  a  binding  together;  from pono  (positu),  and  vincio  (vinctu) ; 
— conjectura,  a  conjecture ;  pictura,  a  picture ;  from  conjicio 
(conjectu)  andpingo  (pictu). 

One  of  the  forms  in  io,  us,  and  ura,  is  generally  used  to  the  exclusion 
of  the  others,  and  when  two  or  more  are  found,  they  are  usually  employ- 
ed in  somewhat  different  senses. 

8.  The  termination  orium,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb, 
after  u  is  removed,  denotes  the  place  where  the  action  of  the 
verb  is  performed ;  as,  auditorium,  a  lecture-room  ;  conditorium, 
a  repository ;  from  audio  and  condo. 


COMPOSITION   OF   NOUNS. 

<§>  103.     Compound  nouns  are  formed  variously  : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  rupicapra,  a  wild  goat,  of  rupes  and 
copra.     In  some  words,  compounded  of  two  nouns,  the  former 
is  a  genitive  ;  as,  senatusconsuttum,  a  decree  of  the  senate ;  ju- 
risconsultusj  a  lawyer.     In  others,  both  parts  are  declined  ;  as, 
respublica,  jusjurandum.     See  §  91. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;   as,  artifex,  an  artist,  of  ars  and 
fado ;  Jidicen,  a  harper,  of  Jidis   and   cano ;  agricola,  a  hus- 
bandman, of  ager  and  colo ;  patriclda,  a  patricide,  of  pater  and 
c&do. 

3.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun  ;  as,  aquinoctium,  the  equinox, 
of  <zquus  and  nox  ;  millepeda,  a  millepede,  of  mille  and  pes. 

In  duumvir,  triumvir,  decemvir,  centumvir,  the  numeral  adjec- 
tive is  in  the  genitive  plural. 

REMARK.  When  the  former  part  of  the  compound  is  a  noun 
or  an  adjective,  it  usually  ends  in  i.  If  the  second  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place;  as,  quinquennium,  of  quin- 
que  and  annus. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun  ;  as,  nefas,  wickedness ;  nemo, 
nobody  ;  o£ne,fas,  and  homo.     So  biduum,  of  bis  and  dies. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun;  a.s,incuria,  want  of  care,  of 

r»  * 


54  DECLENSION    OF    ADJECTIVES.        §   104,  105. 

in  and  cura.     So  intcrvallum,  the  space  between  the  ramparts 
pracordia,  the  vitals ;  proverbium,  a  proverb ;  subsellium,  a  seat  j 
superficies,  a  surface. 

When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is 
sometimes  changed,  to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it :  as, 
immortatttas,  imprudentia.  See  §  196. 


ADJECTIVES. 

<§>  104.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  qualifies  or  limits 
the  meaning  of  a  substantive. 

Adjectives  may  be  divided,  according  to  their  signification, 
into  various  classes  ;  as  denoting, 

1.  Quality ;  as,  bonus,  good  ;  albus,  white. 

2.  Quantity  ;  as,  magnus,  great ;  totus,  the  whole. 

3.  Matter ;  as,  abiegnus,  made  of  fir ;  aureus,  golden. 

4.  Time;  as,  annuus,  yearly  ;  hesternus,  of  yesterday. 

5.  Place ;  as,  altus,  high ;  vicinus,  near. 

6.  Relation  ;  as,  amlcus,  friendly ;  aptus,  fit. 

7.  Number;  as,  unus,  one;  secundus,  second.      These  are 
called  numerals. 

8.  Possession ;  as,  herilis,  a  master's ;  paternits,  of  a  father. 
These  are  called  possessives. 

9.  Country ;  as,  Romdnus,  Roman ;  Arplnas,  of  Arplnum 
These  are  called  patrials. 

10.  Part ;  as,  ullus,  any  one ;  alter,  another.    These  are  call- 
ed partitives. 

11.  Interrogation;  as,  quantus,  how  great?  qualis,  of  what 
kind  ?     These  are  called  interrogatives  ;  when  not  used  inter- 
rogatively, they  are  called  indefinites. 

12.  Diminution  ;  as,  parvulus,  from  parvus,  small ;  misellus, 
from  miser,  miserable.     These  are  called  diminutives. 

13.  Amplification;  as,  vinosus  and  vinolentus,  much  given 
to  wine ;  aurltus,  having  long  ears      These  are  called  amplifi* 
catives. 

DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  105.  Adjectives  are  declined  like  substantives,  and  are 
either  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  or  of  the  third  only. 


§105.  ADJECTIVES — 'FIRST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSION. 


55 


ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    FIRST    AND    SECOND 
DECLENSION. 

The  masculine  of  adjectives  that  belong  to  the  first  and  second 
declension,  ends  either  in  us  or  er.  Those  in  Ms-change  us  into 
a  for  the  feminine,  and  into  urn  for  the  neuter.  Those  in  er 
add  a  for  the  feminine,  and  urn  for  the  neuter.  The  masculine 
in  us  is  declined  like  dominus ;  that  in  er  like  gener,  or  ager ; 
the  feminine  always  like  musa ;  and  the  neuter  like  regnum. 

REMARK.  One  adjective,  satur,  -ura,  -urum,  full,  ends  in  ur,  and  the 
masculine  is  declined  like  gener. 


1.  Bonus,  good. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

bo'-nus, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-num, 

G. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-nse, 

bo'-ni, 

D. 

bo-no, 

bo'-nse, 

bo'-no, 

Ac. 

bo'-num, 

bo'-nam, 

bo'-num, 

V. 

bo'-ne, 

bo'-na, 

bo'-num, 

Ab. 

bo'-no. 

bo'-na. 

bo'-no. 

Plural 

M* 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-na3, 

bo-na, 

G. 

bo-no'-rum, 

bo-na'-rum, 

bo-no'-rum. 

D. 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

bo'-nis, 

Ac. 

bo'-nos, 

bo;-nas, 

bo'-na, 

V. 

bo'-ni, 

bo'-nse, 

bo'-na, 

Ab. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

bo'-nis. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-tus,  high.  YV-duL9,  faithful.  Lon-'-gus,  long. 

A-va^rus,  covetous.         Im'-pro-bus,  wicked.        Ple'-iius,/^W. 
Be-nig'-nus,  kind.  In-I'-quus,  unjust.  Tac'-i-tus,  silent. 

Like  bonus  are  also  declined  all  participles  in  us. 


2.  Tener,  tender. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Went. 

N. 

te'-ner, 

ten'-e-ra, 

ten'-e-rum, 

G. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rse, 

ten'-e-ri, 

D. 

ten'-e-ro, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ro, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-rum, 

ten'-e-ram, 

ten'-e-rum, 

V. 

te'-ner, 

ten;-e-ra, 

ten'-e-rum, 

Ab. 

ten'-e-ro 

ten'-e-ra. 

ten'-e-ro 

56         ADJECTIVES FIRST    AND    SECOND    DECLENSION.  §106. 

Plural 


N.      ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ra, 

G.      ten-e-ro'-rum, 

ten-e-ra'-rum, 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

D.     ten'-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ris, 

ten'-e-ris, 

Ac.    ten'-e-ros, 

ten'-e-ras, 

ten'-e-ra, 

V.      ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rse, 

ten'-e-ra, 

Ab.    ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

In  like  manner  are  declined 

As'-per,  rough.         Gib'-ber,  crook-backed.      Mi'-ser,  wretched. 
Ex'-ter,  foreign.       La'-cer,  torn.  Pros'-per,  prosperous. 

Li'-ber,/ree.  Sa'4ur,/^Z. 

So  also  sem/lfer,  and  the  compounds  of  gero  and  fcro;  as,  lariiger, 
bearing  wool ;  optfer,  bringing  help. 

NOTE.      Exter  is  scarcely  used   in   the   nominative  singular   mascu- 
line. 

<§>  106.     The  other  adjectives  in  cr  (except  alter)  drop  the 
e  in  declension. 


Piger,  slothful. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grum, 

G. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gri, 

D. 

pi'-gro, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gro, 

Ac. 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-gram, 

pi'-grum, 

V. 

pi'-ger, 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grum, 

Ab. 

pi'-gro. 

pi'-gra. 

pi'-gro. 

Plural. 

N. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gra, 

G. 

pi-gro'-rum, 

pi-gra'-rum, 

pi-gro'-rum 

D. 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gris, 

pi'-gris, 

Ac. 

pi'-gros, 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-gra, 

V. 

pi'-gri, 

pi'-grae, 

pi'-gra, 

Ab. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

pi'-gris. 

In  like  manner  decline 

JE'-ger,  sick.  Ma'-cer,  lean. 

A'-ter,  Hack. 
Cre'-ber,  frequent. 
Glauber,  smooth. 
In'-t6-ger,  entire. 


Ni'-ger,  Hack. 
il'-cl 


Pul'-cher,/atr. 
Rubber,  red. 
Sa'-cer,  sacred. 


Sca'-ber.  rough. 
Si-nisiUer,  left. 
Tester,  foul. 
Va'-fer,  crafty. 


Dexter,  right,  has  -tra,  -trumt  or  -ttra,  -terum. 


§  107,  108.     ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLENSION.  57 

§  107.  Six  adjectives  in  us,  and  three  in  cr,  have  their 
genitive  singular  in  ius,  and  the  dative  in  «,  in  all  the  genders  : — 

Alms,  another.         Totus,  whole.          Alter,  -tSra,  -tfirum,  the  other. 
Nullus,  no  one.        Ullus,  any.  Uter,  -tra,  -trum,  which  of  the  two. 

Solus,  alone.  Unus,  one.  Neuter,  -tra,  -trum,  neither. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  other  compounds  of  uter, — namely,  uterque, 
each ;  utercumque,  uterllbet,  and  utervis,  which  of  the  two  you  please  ;  gen. 
utriusque,  <&c  ; — also,  alteruter,  one  of  two ;  gen.  alterutrius,  and  sometimes 
alterius  utrius ;  dat.  alterutri.  So  alteruterque. 

EXAMPLE. 


Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Went. 

N. 

u'-nus, 

u'-na, 

u'-num, 

G. 

u-ni'-us,* 

u-ni'-us, 

u-ni'-us, 

D. 

u'-ni, 

u'-ni,  -  - 

u'-ni, 

Ac. 

u'-num, 

u'-nam, 

u'-num, 

V. 

u'-ne, 

u'-na^ 

u'-num, 

Ab. 

u'-no. 

u'-na. 

u'-no. 

The  plural  is  regular,  like  that  of  bonus. 

REMARK  1.  Alius  has  aliud  in  the  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  neuter,  and 
in  the  genitive  all ws,  contracted  for  aliius, 

2.  Some  of  these  adjectives,  in  ancient  authors,  form  their  genitive  aud 
dative  regularly,  like  lornis,  tener,  or  piger. 


ADJECTIVES    OF  THE   THIRD   DECLENSION. 

§  108.  Some  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  three 
terminations  in  the  nominative  singular  ;  some  two ;  and  others 
only  one. 

I.  Those  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  masc. ;  is,  fern  ; 
and  e,  n$ut ;  and  ar$  thus  declined  :-— 


Acer,  sharp. 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N.  - 

a'-cer, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

O. 

a'-eris, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cris, 

D. 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri, 

Ac. 

a'-crem          a'-crem, 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer, 

a'-cris, 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

58 


ADJECTIVES  -  THIRD    DECLENSION.  $  109,  110. 


Plural. 

N.  a'-cres,  a'-cres,  a'-cri-a, 

G.  a'-o-ri-um,  a'-cri-um,  a'-cri-um, 

D.  ac'-ri-bus,  ac'-ri-bus,  ac'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  a'-cres,  a'-cres,  a'-cri-a, 

F.  a'-cres,  a'-cres,  a'-cri-a, 

Ab.  ac'-ri-bus.  ac'-ri-bus.  ac'-ri-bus. 

In  like  manner  are  declined  the  following  only  :  — 
Al'-a-cer,  cheerful.  Pa-lus'-ter,  marshy.        Sil-ves'-ter,  woody. 

Cam-pes'-ter,  of  a  plain.    Pe-des'-ter,  on  foot.        Ter-res'-ter,  terrestrial. 
Cel'-d-ber,  famous.  Puter,  rotten.  Vol'-u-eer,  winged. 

E-ques'-ter,  equestrian.      Sa-lu'-ber,  wholesome. 

Celer,  swift,  has  celSris,  celtre;  gen.  ceUris,  &c. 

REMARK  1.  The  nominative  singular  masculine  sometimes  ends  in 
is,  like  the  feminine  ;  as,  saluber,  or  salubris. 

2.  Volftcer  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural.     See  §  114. 

<§>  109.  II.  Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  is  for  the 
masculine  and  feminine,  and  e  for  the  neuter,  except  compar- 
atives, which  end  in  or  and  us. 

Those  in  is,  e,  are  thus  declined  :  — 

Mitis,  mild. 


Singular. 


M.fyF. 
N.    mi'-tis, 
G.    mi'-tis, 
D.    mi-ti, 
Ac.  mi'-tem, 
F.    mi'-tis, 
Ab.  mi'-ti. 


JV. 

mi'-te, 

mi'-tis, 

mi'-ti, 

mi7-te, 

mi'-te, 

mi'-ti. 


Plural. 
M.fyF.  JV. 

^V.    mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a,* 

G.    mit'-i-um,*  mit'-i-um, 

D.    mit'-i-bus,  mit'-i-bus, 

Ac.  mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

F.     mi'-tes,  mit'-i-a, 

Ab.  mit'-i-bus.  rait'-i-bus. 


Ag'-l-lis,  active. 
Bre'-vis,  short. 
Cru-de'-lis,  cruel. 


In  like  manner  decline 
Dul'-cis,  sweet.  In-col'-u-mis,  safe. 

For'-tis,  brave.  Mi-rab'-i-lis,  wonderful. 

Gra'-vis,  heavy.  Om'-nis,  all. 


§  1  10. 

clined  :  — 


sj  three,  is  declined  like  the  plural  ofmitis. 
All  comparatives  except  plus,  more,  are  thus  de- 


Mitior,* milder. 

Singular. 

M.fy  F. 

JV. 

N. 

mit'-i-or, 

mit'-i-us, 

G. 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

D. 

mit-i-o'-ri, 

niit-i-o'-ri, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-rem, 

mit'-i-us, 

V. 

mit'-i-or, 

mit'-i-us, 

Ab. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  ri. 

mit-i-6-re,  or  ri. 

*  Pronounced  mish'-e-um,  &c.    See  $  12. 


<§>  111. 


ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLENSION. 


59 


Plural. 
M.  fy  F. 

N.      mit-i-o'-res, 
G.       mit-i-o'-rum, 
D.      mit-i-or'-i-bus, 
Ac.     mit-i-o'-res, 
V.       mit-i-o'-res, 
Ab.     mit-i-or'-i-bus. 


Jjfi 

mit-i-6'-ra, 
mit-i-6'-rum, 
mit-i-or'-i-bus, 
mit-i-o'-ra, 
mit-i-o'-ra, 
mit-i-or'-i-bus. 
In  like  manner  decline 

Pru-den'-ti-or,  more  pru- 
dent. 
U-be'-ri-or,  more  fertile. 


Fe-lie'-i-or,  happier. 
For'-ti-or,  braver. 
Gra'-vi-or,  heavier. 


Al'-ti-or,  higher. 
Bre'-vi-or,  shorter. 
Cru-deMi-or,  more  cruel. 
Dul'-ci-or,  sweeter. 

Plus,  more,  is  thus  declined  :  — 
Singular.  Plural. 

JV.  M  .  4--  F. 

JV.    plus,  JV.  plu^res, 

G.    plu'-ris,  6r.  plu'-ri-um, 

D.    -  ;  D.  plu'-ri-bus, 

plus,  Ac.  plu'-res, 


Ac. 
fib. 


JV. 

plu'-ra,  rarely  pluria, 
plu'-ri-um, 
plu'-ri-bus, 
plu'-ra, 


*  •      "          """"»  > 

Ab.  plu'-ri-bus.         plu'-ri-bu 


So, in  the  plural  number  only^complures,  a  great  many. 

§111.     III.  Other  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have 
but  one  termination  in  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders, 
and  they  all  increase  in  the  genitive.* 
They  are  thus  declined  : — 

Felix,  happy. 
Singular. 

M.  fy  F.  A: 

N.  fe'-lix,  fe'-lix, 

G.  fe-H'-cis,  fe-l^-cis, 

D.  fe-H'-ci,  fe-lF-ci, 

Ac.  fe-li'-cem,  feMix, 

V.  feMix,  fe'-lix, 

Ab.  fe-lP-ce,  or  ci.  fe-lF-ce,  or  ci. 

Plural 

N.  fe-ll;-ces,  fe-lic-i-a,t 

G.  fe-lic'-i-um^  fe-lic'-i-um, 

D.  fe-lic-i-bus,  fe-lic'-i-bus, 

Ac.  fe-li-ces,  fe-lic'-i-a, 

V.  fe-li'-ces,  fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ab.  fe-lic'-i-bus.  fe-lic'-i-bus. 

*  Senex,  senis,  old,  had  anciently  sentcis  or  senZcis. 

t  Pronounced  fe-lish'-e-um,  &c.     See  §§  10,  Exc.;  and  7 

t  The  ablative  plure  is  obsolete. 


60  ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE  CASES.       §  112. 

Prsesens,  present. 

Singular. 
M.  fy  F.  JV. 

N.      prae'-sens,  prae'-sens, 

G.      prae-sen'-tis,  prae-sen'-tis, 

D.      prae-sen'-ti,  prae-sen'-ti, 

Ac.     prae-sen'-tem,  prae'-sens, 

V.      prae'-sens,  prse'-sens, 

Ab.    prae-sen'-te,  or  ti.  prae-sen'-te,  or  ti. 

Plural 

N.  prae-sen'-tes,  prae-sen'-ti-a,* 

G.  prae-sen'-ti-um,  prae-sen'-ti-um, 

D.  pras-sen'-ti-bus,  prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

Ac.  prre-sen'-tes,  prae-sen'-ti-a, 

V.  prae-sen'-tes,  prae-sen'-ti-a, 

Ab.  prae-sen'-ti-bus.  prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Au'-dax,  -a£is,  bold.  Par'-ti-ceps,  -ipis,  par-  Sos'-pes,  -ttis,  safe. 

Com' ^-pos,-6tis,  master  of.  ticipant.  Sup'-plex,  -icis,  sup- 

Fe'-rox,  -ocis,  fierce.  Prce'-pes,  -etis,  swift.  pliant. 

In'-gens,  -tis,  huge.  SoMers,  -tis,  shrewd. 

All  present  participles  are  declined  like  prasens. 

RULES  FOR  THK  OBLIQUE  CASES  OF  AJDJECTJVES  OF  THE 
THIRD  DECLENSION* 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

$  1 1 2.     Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  their 
genitive  singular  like  nouns  of  the  same  termination. 

The  following  may  here  be  specified : — 
Of  those  in  es,  (compare  §  7o) 

Some  have  ctis  ;  as,  hebes,  dull ;  perpes,  perpetual  j  prcepes,  swift ;  and 

teres,  slender  ; — (Locuples,  rich,  has  etis;} — 

Some  Uis ;   as,  dives,  rich ;  sospes,  safe  ;   and  super stes,  surviving  ;— 

Some  Idis ;  as,  doses,  slothful ;  and  reses,  sluggish.  \beris» 

Bipes,  two- footed,  and  tripes,  three-footed,  have  pedis. Pubes,  has  vu- 

Compos,  master  of,  and  impos,  unable,  have  oti$.  (§  75) 

Pernox,  lasting  all  night,  has  noctis.  (§  78,  Exc.  2)  [§  76,  Exc.  2) 

Calebs,  unmarried,  has  Ibis;  intercus,  intercutaneous,  utis.      (§77   and 

Those  in  ceps,  compounds  of  caput,  have  cipUis;  as,  anceps,  doubtful  J 

pr&ceps,  headlong.  (§  78)  [(§  71,  Exc.  2) 

Those  in  cors,  compounds  of  cor,  have  cordis  ;    as,    concors,    agreeing. 

*  Pronounced  pre-een'-she-a,  &c. 


§  113—115.  IRREGULAR   ADJECTIVES.  61 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

§113,  1.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension,  of  two  or 
three  terminations,  except  comparatives  in  or,  have  always  t  in 
the  ablative. 

2.  Comparatives,  and  participles  in  ns  used  as  participles, 
have  rather  e  than  i ;  and  such  participles  in  the  ablative  abso- 
lute have  always  e. 

3.  Adjectives  of  one  termination  have  e  or  t  in  the  ablative. 

NOMINATIVE    AND    GENITIVE    PLURAL. 

The  neuter  of  the  nominative  plural  ends  in  ia,  and  the  gen- 
itive plural  of  all  genders  in  ium;  but  comparatives  in  or,  with 
vetus,  old,  and  uber,  fertile,  have -a,  and  urn. 

Exceptions  in  the  Ablative  Singular  and  Genitive  Plural. 

<§>  114.  1.  The  following  adjectives  have  e  in  the  ablative 
singular,  and  um  in  the  genitive  plural : — 

Bicorpor,  two-bodied.  Impubes,  leardless.  Sospes,  safe. 

Bipes,  two-footed.  JuvSnis,  young.  Superstes,  surviving. 

Cselebs,  unmarried.  Pauper,  poor.  Tricorpor,  three-bodied. 

Compos,  master  of.  Princeps,  chief.  Tricuspis,  three-forked. 

Discolor,  particolored.  Puber,  or  -es,  full-grown.  Tripes,  three-footed. 

Impos,  unable.  Senex,  old. 

2.  The  following,  which  have  e  or  i  in  the  ablative  singular, 
have  um  in  the  genitive  plural  : — 

Ales,  winged.  Dives,  rich.  Quadruplex,/<rar/b/rf. 

Arttfex,  skilful.  DegSner,  degenerate.          Supplex,  suppliant. 

Cicur,  tame.  Impar,  unequal.  Triceps,  three-headed. 

Compar,  equal.  Inops,  poor.  Vigil,  watchful. 

Dispar,  unequal.  Praepes,  swift. 

To  these  may  be  added  locfoples,  rich ;  sons,  guilty ;  and  insons,  inno- 
cent ;  which  have  um  or  ium  in  the  genitive  plural.  Volucer,  winged, 
though  its  ablative  is  in  i,  has  um  in  the  genitive  plural. 

3.  Memor,  mindful ;  immemor,  unmindful ;  par,  equal ;  and  uber,  fertile, 
have  i  only  in  the  ablative ;  but  all,  except  par,  have  um  in  the  genitive 
plural :  dist  ditis,  rich,  has  i  in  the  abl.  and  um  or  ium  in  the  gen.  plural. 

NOTE.  The  ACCUSATIVE  PLURAL  of  adjectives  of  the  third  declension, 
as  of  nouns,  sometimes  ends  in  eis,  ist  or  as,  instead  of  es.  See  §  85. 

IRREGULAR   ADJECTIVES. 
§   115,     Some  adjectives  are  defective,  others  redundant. 

DEFECTIVE    ADJECTIVES. 

1  Many  adjectives,  denoting  personal  qualities  or  attributes, 
want  the  neuter  gender,  unless  when  occasionally  joined  to  a 
neuter  substantiye  used  figuratively.  Such  are  the  following : — 


REDUNDANT    ADJECTIVES. 


116. 


Redux, 
Senex, 
Sons, 


Supplex, 

Tricorpor, 

Vigil. 


Bicorpor,  Deggner,  Inops,  Memor, 

Bipes,  Dives,  Jnsons,  Pauper, 

Caelebs,  Impos,  Invltus,  Particeps, 

Censors,  Impubes,  Juvfinis,  Princeps, 

Compos,  Industrius,  Locuples,  Puber,  or  -es,  Superstes, 

Victrix  and  ultrix  are  feminine  in  the  singular,  seldom  neuter ;  in  the 
plural,  they  are  feminine  and  neuter.  Such  verbals  partake  of  the  nature 
of  substantives  and  adjectives.  They  correspond  to  masculines  in  tor. 
See  §  102,  6. 

2.  The   following  want  the  genitive  plural,  and  are  rarely 
used  in  the  neuter  gender  : — 

Concolor,  deses,  hebes,  perpes,  reses,  teres,  versicolor. 

3.  Some  adjectives  are  wholly  indeclinable. 

Such  are  frugi,  temperate ;  nequam,  worthless ;  sat  or  satis,  sufficient 
semis,  half;  the  plurals  aliquot,  tot,  quot,  totidem,  quotquot ;  and  the  card] 
nal  numbers  from  quatuor  to  centum  inclusive,  and  also  mille. 

4.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  only  in  certain  cases: — 

Bilicem,  ace.  ;  doubly-tissued.  — pi.  plures,  -a,  nom.,  ace. ;  -ium 

Cetera,  ceterum,  the  rest,  wants  the  gen.  ;  ibus,  dat.,  abl.     §  110. 

nom.  sing.  masc.  Potis,  nom.  sing,  and  pi.,  ail   gen- 

Decemplicem,  ace. ;  tenfold.  ders ;  able. 


Exspes,  nom. ;  hopeless. 

Inquies,  nom.;  -etem,  ace.  ;  -6te,  abl.  ; 

restless. 
Mactus,  and  macte,  nom.;  macte, 

ace.  ;     increased  ; — macti,    and 

mactsB,  nom.  pi. 
Necesse,  and  necessum,  worn.,  ace.; 

necessary. 
Plus,  nom.,  ace. ;  pluris,  gen. ;  more  ; 


Pote,  now.  sing., for  potest ;  possible. 
Septemplicis,  gen. ;  -ce ,  abl. ;  seven- 

fold. 
Siremps,  nom. ;   sirempse,  abl. ;  a- 

like. 
Tantundem,  nom.,  ace.;   tantldem, 

gen. ;  so  much. 
Trill cem,  ace.;   trebly-tissued;  tri 

llces,  ace.  pi. 


REDUNDANT    ADJECTIVES. 

<§>  116.     The  following  adjectives  are  redundant  in  termi- 
nation and  declension.     Those  marked  r  are  more  rarely  used. 


Accllvis,  and  -us,  r,  ascending. 
Auxiliaris,  and  -ius,  auxiliary. 
Bijugis,  and  -us,  two-yoked. 
Dec\lvis,and  -us,  r,  descending. 
Exam  mis,  and  -us,  r,  lifeless. 
Hilaris,  and  -us,  cheerful. 
Imbecillis,  r,  and  -us,  weak.      [less. 
Impubes,  and  -is,  -is  or  -Zris,  beard- 
Inermis,  and  -us,  unarmed. 
Infrenis,  and  -us,  unbridled. 
Inquies,  and  -etus,  restless. 
Jocularis,  and  -ius,  r,  laughable. 
Multijuges,  r,  and  -i   (plur.),  many- 


Opulens,  and  -lentus,  rich. 

Prsecox,  -coquis,  and  -coquus,  early 
ripe. 

Procllvis,  and  -us,  r,  inclined  down- 
wards. 

Quadrijugis,  and  -us,  four-yoked. 

Serniammis,  and  -us,  half-alive. 

Semiermis,  and  -us,  half-armed. 

Semisomnis,  and  -us,  half-asleep. 

Singularis,  and  -ius,  single. 

Subllmis,  and  -us,  r,  high. 

Unanlmis,  r,  and  -us,  unanimo*is. 

Violens,  r,  and  -lentus,  violent. 


yoked. 

To  the  above  may  be  added  some  adjectives  in  er  and  is ;  as,  saluber  and 
-brisf  celeb  er  and  -bris. 


117. 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


63 


NUMERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


§117.      Numeral   adjectives   are   divided   into   three 
principal  classes — Cardinal,  Ordinal,  and  Distributive 

I.  Cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  answer  the  question 
'  EIow  many?1     They  are, 


Unus, 

one. 

I. 

Duo, 

two. 

11. 

Trers, 

three. 

III. 

Quatuor, 

four. 

1111.  or  IV. 

Quinque, 

jive. 

V. 

Sex, 

six. 

VI. 

Septem, 

seven. 

VII. 

Octo, 

eight. 

VIII. 

Novem, 

nine. 

V1II1.  or  JX. 

Decem, 

ten. 

X. 

Undecim, 

eleven. 

XI. 

Duodecim, 

twelve. 

XII. 

Tredecim, 

thirteen. 

XIII. 

Quatuor  dgcim, 

fourteen. 

XI1I1  or  XIV. 

Quindecim, 

fifteen. 

XV. 

Sedecim,  or  sexdecim, 

sixteen. 

XVI. 

Septendecim, 

seventeen. 

XVII. 

Octodecim, 

eighteen. 

XVIII. 

Novendecim, 

nineteen. 

XV1I1L  or  XIX. 

Viginti, 

twenty. 

XX. 

Viginti  unus,  or     > 
unus  et  viginti,  ) 

twenty-one. 

XXI. 

Viginti  duo,  or         > 
duo  et  viginti,  &c.  ) 

twenty-two. 

XXII. 

Triginta, 

thirty. 

XXX. 

Quadraginta, 

forty. 

XXXX.  or  XL. 

Quinquaginta, 

fifty. 

L. 

Sexaginta, 

sixty. 

LX. 

Septuaginta, 

seventy. 

LXX. 

Octoginta, 

eighty. 

LXXX 

Nonaginta, 

ninety. 

LXXXX.  or  XC. 

Centum, 

a  hundred. 

C. 

Centum  unus,  or          ) 
centum  et  unus,  &e.  ) 

a  hundred  and  one. 

Cl. 

Ducenti,  -ee,  -a, 

two  hundred. 

CC. 

Trecenti, 

three  hundred. 

CCC. 

Quadringenti, 

four  hundred. 

CCCC,  or  CD. 

Quingenti, 

jive  hundred. 

ID,  or  D. 

Sexcenti, 

six  hundred. 

IOC,  or  DC. 

Septingenti, 

seven  hundred. 

IOCC,  or  DCC. 

Octingenti, 

eight  hundred. 

IOCCC,  or  DCCC. 

Nongenti. 

nine  hundred. 

10CCCC,  or  DCCCC. 

Mille 

a  thousand. 

CIO,  or  M. 

64  NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES.  §   118. 


Duo  millia,  or  > 
bis  mille,      5 
Quinque  millia,  or  >  * 
quinquies  mille,  5 
Decera  millia,  or  > 
decies  mille,      $ 
Quinquaginta  millia, 
or  quinquagies  mille, 
Centum  millia,  or  > 
centies  mille,     j 

two  thousand, 
jive  thousand. 
ten  thousand. 
>  fifty  thousand. 
a  hundred  thousand. 

CIOCIO,  or  MM. 
100. 
CCIOD. 
1000. 
CCCIOOO. 

Remarks. 

§  118.     1.  The  first  three  cardinal  numbers  are  declined; 
those  from  four  to  a  hundred  inclusive  are  indeclinable ;  those 
denoting  hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 
For  the  declension  of  unus  and  tres,  see  §§  107  and  109. 
Duo  is  thus  declined : — 

Plural. 

M.  F.  JV. 

JV.    du'-o,  du'-se,  du'-o, 

G.    du-o'-rum,  du-a'-rum,     du-o'-rum, 

D.    du-o'-bus,  du-a'-bus,       du-o'-bus, 

M.    du'-os,  or  du'-o,     du'-as,  du'-o, 

V.      du'-o,  du'-sD,  du'-o, 

Ab.    du-o'-bus.  du-a'-bus.       du-o'-bus. 

Dudrum,  duarum,  are   often  contracted  into  duum,  especially  when 
joined  with  mil  Hum. 
Ambo,  both,  is  declined  like  duo. 

2.  The  cardinal  numbers,  except  unus  and  mille,  are  used  in 
the  plural  only. 

The  plural  of  unus  is  used  with  nouns  which  have  no  singular,  or 
whose  singular  has  a  different  sense  from  the  plural ;  as,  una  castra,  oae 
camp  ,  una  cedes,  one  house.  So  also  with  nouns  denoting  several  things 
considered  as  one  whole ;  as,  una  veetimentttj  one  suit  of  clothes. 

3.  Thirteen,  sixteen,  seventeen,  and  eighteen,  are  often  expressed  by- 
two  numbers  united  by  et ;  thus,  decem  et  tres,  decent  et  sex,  decem  et  sep- 
tem,  decem  et  octo  ;  in  which  the  larger  number  usually  precedes. 

From  twenty  to  a  hundred,  the  smaller  number  with  et  is  put  first,  or 
the  larger  generally  without  et;  as,  unus  et  viginti,or  viginti  unus.  Above 
one  hundred,  the  larger  precedes,  with  or  without  et;  as,  centum  et  unus, 
or  centum,  unus  ;  trecenti  sexaginta  sex,  or  trecenti  et  sexaginta  sex.  Et  is 
never  twice  used. 

4.  For  eighteen,  twenty-eight,  &c.,  and  for  nineteen,  twenty-nine,  &G. 
(excepting  sixty -eight  and  sixty-nine),  a  subtract!  ve  expression   is  more 
frequent  than   the  additive  form  ;  as,  duodeviginti,  two  from  twenty  ;  un- 
demginti.,  one  from  twenty;  duodetriginta,  undetriginta,  &c.     Neither  un 
(unus)  nor  duo  can  be  declined  in  these  expressions. 

5.  The  poets  sometimes  make  use  of  numeral  adverbs  in  expressing 
small  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  Us  sex,  for  duodecim  ;  bis  centum, 


§   119.  NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES.  65 

Numbers  above  a  hundred  thousand  are  always  expressed  in  this  way  ; 
as,  decies  centum  millia  ;  but  the  cardinal  numbers  after  the  adverbs  are 
sometimes  omitted ;  as,  decies  centena,  i.  e.  millia ;  decies ,  i.  e.  centum, 
millia. 

6.  Mille  is  used  either  as  a  substantive  or  an  adjective. 

When  taken  substaritively,  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular  number, 
and,  in  the  plural,  has  millia,  millium,  millllus,  &c.  ;  as,  mille  homlnum,  a 
thousand  men ;  duo  millia  homlnum,  two  thousand  men,  &c.  When 
mille  is  declined  in  the  plural,  the  things  numbered  are  put  in  the  geni- 
tive, as  in  the  preceding  examples,  unless  a  declined  numeral  comes 
between ;  as,  habuit  tria  millia  trecentos  miUtes. 

As  an  adjective,  mille  is  plural  only,  and  indeclinable  ;  as,  mille  homines, 
a  thousand  men ;  bis  mille  hominlbus,  with  two  thousand  men. 

7.  Capitals  were  used  by  the  Romans  to  mark  numbers.     The  let- 
ters employed  for  this  purpose  ^  were  C.  I.  L.  V.  X.,  which  are,  there- 
fore, called  Numeral  Letters.    I.  denotes  one;  V.five;  X.  ten;  L.  fifty;  and 
C.  a  hundred.     By  the  various  combinations  of  these  five  letters,  all  the 
different  numbers  are  expressed. 

The  repetition  of  a  numeral  letter  repeats  its  value.  Thus,  II.  signi- 
fies two;  III.  three;  XX.  twenty  ;  XXX.  thirty ;  CC.  two  hundred,  &c. 
But  V.  and  L.  are  never  repeated. 

When  a  letter  of  a  less  value  is  'placed  before  a  letter  of  a  greater,  the 
less  takes  away  what  it  stands  for  ^from  the  greater  ;  but  being  placed 
after,  it  adds  what  it  stands  for  to  the-greater ;  thus, 

IV.   Four.  V.  Five.  VI.   Six. 

IX.   Nine.  X.  Ten.  XI.  Eleven. 

XL.  Forty.  L.  Fifty.  LX.  Sixty. 

XC.  Ninety.  C.  A  hundred.  CX.  A  hundred  and  ten. 

A.thousand  was  marked  thus,  CIO,  which,  in  later  times,  was  contracted 
into  M.  Five  hundred  is  marked  thus,  ID,  or,  by  contraction,  D. 

The  annexing  of  0  to  ID  makes  its  value  ten  times  greater ;  thus,  JOD 
marks  five  thousand;  and  IDOD,  fifty  thousand. 

The  prefixing  of  C,  together  with  the  annexing  ofO,  to  the  number 
CIO,  makes  its  value  ten  times  greater;  thus,  CC1OO  denotes  ten  thou- 
sand; and  CCCIOOO,  a  hundred  thousand.  The  Romans,  according 
to  Pliny,  proceeded  no  further  in  this  method  of  notation.  If  they  had 
occasion  to  express  a  larger  number,  they  did  it  by  repetition  ;  thus, 
CCCIOOO,  CCCIOOO,  signified  two  hundred  thousand,  &c. 

We  sometimes  find  thousands  expressed  by  a  straight  line  drawn  over 
the  top  of  the  numeral  letters.  Thus,  III.  denotes  three  thousand;  X., 
ten  thousand. 

§119.  II.  Ordinal  numbers  are  such  as  denote  order  or 
rank.  They  all  end  in  us,  and  are  declined  like  bonus ;  as, 
primus,  first;  secundus,  second. 

III.  Distributive  numbers  are  those  which  indicate  an  equal 
division  among  several  persons  or  things ;  as,  singuli,  one  by 
one,  or  each ;  bini,  two  by  two,  or  two  to  each,  &,c.  They  are 
declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus,  except  that  they  usually  have 
urn  for  orum  in  the  genitive  plural. 

The  following  table  contains  the  ordinal  and  distributive 
numbers,  and  the  corresponding  numeral  adverbs : — 


66 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


120. 


Ordinal. 

Distributive. 

Numeral  Adverbs, 

1.     Primus,  first. 

SingGli. 

Semel,  once. 

2.     Secundus,  second,  &c. 

Bini. 

Bis,  twice. 

3.     Tertius. 

Terni,  or  trini. 

Ter,  thrice. 

4.     Quartus. 

Quaterni. 

Quater  .four  times. 

5.    Quintus. 

Quini. 

Quinquies,  &c. 

6.     Sextus. 

Seni. 

Sexies. 

7.    Septimus. 

Septeni. 

Septies. 

8.    Octavus. 

Octoni. 

Octies. 

9.    Nonus. 

Noveni. 

Novies. 

10.    Decimus. 

Deni. 

Decies. 

11.     Undecimus. 

Undeni. 

Undecies. 

12.    Duodecimus. 

Duodeni. 

Duodecies. 

13.     Tertius  decimus. 

Terni  deni. 

Terdecies. 

14.     Quartus  decimus. 

Quaterni  deni. 

Quatuordecies. 

15.     Quintus  decimus. 

Quini  deni. 

Quindecies. 

16.     Sextus  decimus. 

Seni  deni. 

Sedecies. 

17.     Septimus  decimus. 

Septeni  deni. 

Decies  et  septies. 

18.    Octavus  decimus. 

Octoni  deni. 

Duodevicies. 

19.     Nonus  decimus. 

Noveni  deni. 

Undevicies. 

2~  C  Vicesimus,  or  7 
'  \      vigesimus.   ) 

Viceni. 

Vicies. 

21.     Vicesimus  primus. 
22.     Vicesimus  secundus. 

Viceni  singiili. 
Viceni  bini. 

Semel  et  vicies. 
Bis  et  vicies  &* 

o~  C  Tricesimus,  or  7 
0      \      trigesimus.    5 

Triceni. 

Tricies. 

40.     Quadragesimus. 

Quadrageni. 

Quadragies. 

rO.     Quinquagesimus. 
t)0.     Sexagesimus. 

Quinquaggni. 
Sexageni. 

Quinquagies. 
Sexagies. 

70.    Septuagesimus. 

Septuageni. 

Septuagies. 

80.     Octogesimus. 

Octogeni. 

Octogies. 

90      Nonagesimus. 

Nonageni. 

Nonagies. 

100.     Centesimus. 

Centeni. 

Centies. 

200.     Ducentesimus. 

Duceni. 

Ducenties. 

300.    Trecentesimus. 

Treceni,  or  trecenteni. 

C  Trecenties,  or  7 

400.     Quadringentesimus.   5 

Quadringeni,  or     ~) 
quadringenteni.  5 

£     tricenties.     $ 
Quadringenties. 

500.     Quingentesimus. 

Quingeni. 

Quingenties. 

600.     Sexcentesimus. 

Sexceni,  or  sexcenteni 

.    Sexcenties. 

700.     Septingentesimus. 

Septmgeni. 

Septingenties 

800.     Octingentesimus. 
900.     Nongentesimus. 

Octingeni. 
Nongeni. 

Octingenties. 
Noningenties. 

1000.    Millesimus.                  J 

Milleni,  or           7 
singula  millia.  ) 

Millies. 

2000.    Bis  millesX™"*             < 

Bis  milleni,  or  7 
bina  millia.   \ 

Bis  millies. 

Remarks. 

§  1 20.  1.  Instead  of  primus^  prior  is  used,  if  two  only  are  spoken 
of.  Alter  is  often  used  for  secundus. 

2.  From  thirteenth  to  nineteenth,  the  smaller  number  is  usually  put  first, 
without  et ;  as,  tertius  decimus  — sometimes  the  larger,  with  or  without  et ; 
as,  decimus  et  tertius,  or  decimus  tertius. 

Twenty-first,  thirty- first,  &c.,  are  often  expressed  by  umts  et  viceslmus 


<§>  121,  122.  ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON.  67 

units  et  triceslmuSj  &c.;  and  twenty-second,  &c.,by  duo,  or  alter  etvicest- 
mus,  &c.,  in  which  duo  is  not  changed.  In  the  other  compound  numbers, 
the  larger  precedes  without  et,  or  the  smaller  with  et ;  as,  viceslmus  quar- 
tus,  or  quartus  et  viceslmus. 

For  eighteenth,  &c.,  to  fifty-eighth,  and  for  nineteenth,  <fcc.,  to  fifty- 
ninth,  duodeviceslmus,  &c.,  and  undemceslmus,  &c.,  are  often  used. 

3.  In  the  distributives,  eighteen,  thirty-eight,  forty-eight,  and  nineteen 
and  twenty-nine,  are  often  expressed  by  duodeviceni,  &c.,  and  undeviceni, 

&C. 

4.  Distributives  are  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  for  cardinal  numbers ; 
as,  Una  spicula,  two  darts.     So  likewise  in  prose,  with  nouns  that  want  the 
singular ;  as,  bincenuptice,  two  weddings. 

The  singular  of  some  distributives  is  used  in  the  sense  of  a  multiplica- 
tive ;  as,  binus,  twofold.  So  ternus,  quinus,  septenus. 

5.  For  twenty-eight  times  and  thirty-nine  times,  duodetricies  and  unde- 
quadragies  are  found. 

§121.  To  the  preceding  classes  maybe  added  the  fol- 
lowing : — 

1.  Multiplicatives,  which  denote  how  many  fold.     They  all 
end  mplex,  and  are  declined  likefelix;  as, 

Simplex,  single.  Quadruples,  fourfold. 

Duplex,  twofold,  or  double.  Quinciiplex,  jivrfold. 

Triplex,  threefold.  Centuplex,  a  hundredfold. 

2.  Proportionals,  which  denote  how  many  times  one  thing  is 
greater  than  another ;  as,  duplus,  twice  as  great ;  triplus,  quad- 
ruplus,  octuplus,  decuplus.     They  are  declined  like  bonus.  - 

3.  Temporals,  which  denote  time ;  as,  bimus,  two  years  old ; 
trimus,  three  years  old ;  quadrimus,  &/c.     Also,  biennis,  of  two 
years'  continuance;  quadriennis,  quinquennis,  &,c.    So  bimestris, 
of  two  months'  continuance;  trimestris,  &LG.,  biduus,  &c. 

4.  Those  which  denote  how  many  parts  a  thing  contains ;  as, 
binarius,  of  two  parts  ;  ternarius,  &c. 

5.  Interrogatives ;  as,  quot ,  how  many  ?  quotus,  of  what  num- 
ber ?  quoteni,  how  many  each  ?  quoties,  how  many  times  ?  Their 
correlatives  are,  tot,  totidem,  so  many ;  aliquot,  some ;  which, 
with  quot,  are  indeclinable ;  toties,  so  often ;  aliquoties,  several 
times. 

COMPARISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

<§>  122.  Adjectives  may  be  divided  into  two  classes — those 
which  denote  a  variable,  and  those  which  denote  an  invariable, 
quality  or  limitation. 

Thus,  bonus,  good,  altus,  high,  and  opacus,  dark,  denote  variable  attri- 
butes ;  but  teneus,  brazen,  triplex,  threefold,  and  diurrius,  daily,  do  not 
admit  of  different  degrees  in  their  signification. 


68  ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON.  <§>    123. 

The  relations  of  inferiority,  equality,  or  superiority,  which 
different  objects  bear  to  each  other,  in  regard  to  variable  quali- 
ties, are  expressed  in  Latin  in  different  ways. 

Inferiority  may  be  denoted  by  prefixing  to  an  adjective  the 
adverbs  minus,  less,  and  minwie,  least ;  as,  jucwidus,  pleasant ; 
minus  jucundus,  less  pleasant;  minime  jucundus,  least  pleasant. 

A  small  degree  of  a  quality  is  indicated  by  sub  prefixed  to 
an  adjective ;  as,  difficilis,  difficult ;  subdifficilis,  somewhat 
difficult. 

Equality  may  be  denoted  by  tarn  followed  by  qudm ;  ceque 
followed  by  «c,  &c. ;  as,  hebes  ceque  ac  pecus,  as  stupid  as  a 
brute. 

<§>  123.  The  relation  of  superiority,  to  which  alone  the 
name  of  comparison  is  commonly  applied,  is  denoted  either  by 
prefixing  to  an  adjective  certain  adverbs  or  prepositions,  or  by 
peculiar  terminations.  Various  degrees  of  superiority  are  de- 
noted with  different  degrees  of  precision,  by  the  prepositions 
per  and  prte  prefixed  to  adjectives,  and  by  different  adverbs,  and 
other  qualifying  clauses.  The  terminational  comparison,  and 
its  equivalent  form,  expressed  by  the  adverbs  magis,  more,  and 
maxime,  most,  prefixed  to  the  adjective,  denote  not  a  precise, 
but  only  a  relative,  degree  of  superiority. 

That  form  of  an  adjective  which  simply  denotes  a  quality, 
without  reference  to  other  degrees  of  the  same  quality,  is 
called  the  positive  degree  ;  as,  altus,  high  ;  mitis,  mild. 

The  degrees  of  relative  superiority  are  two — the  com- 
parative and  the  superlative. 

The  comparative  denotes  that  the  quality  belongs  to  one 
of  two  objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to 
the  other ;  as,  altior,  higher  ;  mitior,  milder. 

The  superlative  denotes  that  the  quality  belongs  to  one 
object,  or  set  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  any  of 
the  rest ;  as,  altissimus,  highest ;  mitissimus,  mildest 

Remarks. 

1.  The  comparative  is  also  used  to  denote  that,  at  different  times,  or  in 
different  circumstances,  a  quality  belongs  to  the  same  object  in  different 
degrees ;  as,  est  sapientior  quam  olim  fuitt  he  is  wiser  than  lie  was  for- 
merly. 

2.  The  comparative  sometimes  expresses  the  proportion  between  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object ;  as,  est  doctior  qu&m  sapientior,  he  is  more 
learned  than  wise  ;  that  is,  his  learning  is  greater  than  his  wisdom. 


$   125.         ADJECTIVES. IRREGULAR    COMPARISON.  69 

Masc.       Fern.      Neut 
§  1 24.     The  terminational  ) 

comparative  ends  in 
the  terminational  superlative  in  issimus,  isstma,  issimum. 

These  terminations  are  added  to  the  root  of  the  positive ;  as, 
altus,    aftior,    aftissimus ;     high,    higher,    highest. 
mitis,    mitior,   w^issimus;     mild,    milder,    mildest. 

felix,gen.felicis,feticior,felicissimus;  happy,  happier,  happiest 

In  like  manner  compare 

Arc'-tus,  strait.          Ca'-rus,  dear.          C\e(-mens,gen.  -tis,  merciful. 
Ca'-pax,  capacious.    Cru-de'-lis,  cruel.    Infers,  gen.  -tis,  sluggish.     §  23. 

IRREGULAR   COMPARISON. 

<§>  125.  1.  Adjectives  in  er  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
rwms  to  that  termination ;  as,  acer,  active ;  gen.  acris ;  compar- 
ative, acrior ;  superlative,  acerrimus. 

In  like  manner  pauper,  pauperrimus.  Vetus  has  a  similar  superlative, 
veterrlmus,  as  if  from  veter. 

2.  Seven  adjectives  in  Us  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
Umus  to  the  root : — 


Facilis, 
DifRcilis, 

facilior, 
difficilior, 

facillimus, 
dimcillimus, 

difficult 

Gracilis, 

gracilior, 

gracillimus, 

slender 

Humilis, 

humilior, 

humillimus, 

low. 

Imbecillis, 

imbecillior, 

imbecillimus, 

weak. 

Sirailis, 

similior, 

simillimus, 

like. 

Dissimilis, 

dissimilior, 

dissimillimus, 

unlike. 

3.  Five  adjectives  in  fwus  derive  their  comparatives  and 
superlatives  from  obsolete  adjectives  in  ens : — 

Beneflcus,  beneficentior,  beneficentissimus,  beneficent. 

Honorificus,  honorificentior,  honorificentissimus,  honorable. 

Magnii'icus,  magnificentior,  magnificentisslmus,  splendid. 

Munificus,  munificentior,  munificentissimus,  liberal. 

Maleflcus,  rnaleficentissimus,  hurtful. 

Adjectives  in  dicens  and  volcns  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives 
regularly ;  but  instead  of  those  positives,  forms  in  dicus  and  volus  are 
more  common ;  as, 

Benevolens,  or  benevolus,   benevolentior,  benevolent? s^imus,   benevolent. 

4.  These  five  have  regular  comparatives,  but  irregular  super- 
latives : — 

Dexter,  dexterior,         dextimus,  right. 

Extera,  (fern.)     exterior,  extimus,  or  extremus,        outward 


70        ADJECTIVES. DEFECTIVE  COMPARISON.    $  126. 

PostSra,  (/cm.)     posterior,          postremus,  0£  postumus,        hind. 
Inffcrus,  inferior,  inf  Imus,  or  iraus,  low. 

Supfirus,  superior,  supremus,  or  summus,  high. 

The  nominative  singular  of  postera  does  not  occur  in  the  masculine, 
and  that  of  extera  wants  good  authority. 

5.  The  following  are  very  irregular  in  comparison  : — 


Bonus, 
Malus, 

melior, 
pejor, 

optimus, 
pessimus, 

good,      letter, 
bad,        worse, 

best, 
worst. 

Magnus, 
Parvus, 

major, 
minor, 

maximus, 
minimus, 

great,     greater, 
little,      less, 

greatest, 
least. 

Multus, 

plurimus,    } 

Multa, 

plurima,      > 

much,     more, 

most. 

Multum, 

plus,* 

plurlmum,  ) 

Nequam, 
Frugi, 

nequior, 
frugalior, 

nequissirnus, 
frugal  issimus, 

worthless, 
frugal. 

All  these  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  from  obsolete  adjec- 
tives, except  magnus,  whose  regular  forms  are  contracted. 

DEFECTIVE   COMPARISON 

§  126*     1.  Seven  adjectives  want  the  positive  :— 

Citerior,  citimus,  nearer.  Prior,  primus,  former* 

Deterior,  detemmus,  worse.  Propior,  proximus,  nearer. 

Interior,  intimus,  inner.  Ulterior,  ultimus,/«r£Aer. 
Oclor,  ocissimus,  swifter. 

2.  Eight  want  the  terminational  comparative  : — 

Consultus,  consultissimus,  skilful.  Par,  parissimus,  equal. 

Falsus,  falsissimus,/a/5e.  Persuasus,  persuasissimum     (nen- 
Inclytus,  inclytisshnus,  renowned.  ter),  persuaded. 

Invictus,  invictissimus,  invincible.  Sacer,  sacemmus,  sacred. 
Meritus,  meritissimus  (rarely  used), 
deserting. 

3.  Eight  have  very  rarely  the  terminational  comparative  : — 

Aprtcus,  apricissimus,  sunny.  Fidus,  fidissimus,  faithful. 

Bellus,  bellissimuSj./me.  Invltus,  invitissimus,  unwilling. 

Comis,  comissimus,  courteous.  Novus,  novissimus,  new. 

Diversus,  diversissimus,  different.  Vetus,  veterrimus,  old. 

4.  The  following  want  the  terminational  superlative  : — 

Adolescens,   adolescentior,  7  ff     Ingens,  ingentior,  great. 

Juvenis,  junior,                      )  ° '     Licens,  licentior,  extravagant. 

Alacer,  alacrior,  active.  Longinquus,  longinquior,  distant. 

COBCUS,  coBcior.  Hind.  Opimus,  opimior,  rich. 

Diuturnus,  diuturnior,  lasting  Procllvis,  proclivior,  >  inclined 

Jejunus,  jejumor,  fasting.  Pronus,  pronior,         )  downwards. 

Iniimtus,  infinitior,  unlimited.  sequior,  worse. 

*  See  §110 


§   127.  ADJECTIVES. COMPARISON.  71 

Fropinquus,   propinquior,  neighbor'  Senex,  senior,  old. 

ing.  Silvester,  or  silvestris,  silvestrior, 
Salutaris,  salutarior,  salutary.  woody. 

Satis,  sufficient ;  satius,  preferable.  Sinister,  sinisterior,  left. 

Satur,  saturior,/ttM.  Suplnus,  supinior,  lying  on  the  lack. 

The  superlative  of  juvSnis  and  adolescens  is  supplied  by  minimus  natu, 
youngest ;  and  that  of  senex  by  maxlmus  natu,  oldest.  The  comparatives 
minor  natu  and  major  natu  sometimes  also  occur. 

Most  adjectives  also  in  ills,  alis,  and  bills,  and  many  in  anus,  ivis,  and 
inquus,  have  no  terminational  superlative. 

5.  Many  adjectives  have  no  terminational  comparative  or  su- 
perlative. Such  are, 

(a.)  Adjectives  in  bundus,  imus,  inus  (except  divlnus),  orus,  most  in 
ivus,  and  in  us  pure  (except  quus).  Yet  arduus,  assiduus,  egregius,  exig- 
uus,  industrius,  perpetuus,  plus,  strenuus,  and  vacuus,  have  sometimes  a 
terminational  comparison.  So,  dropping  £,  noxior,  innoxior,  sobrior. 

(b.)  The  following — aimus,  calvus,  canus,  cicur,  claudus,  degener,  dellrus, 
dispar,  egenus,  impar,  invldus,  lacer,  memor,  minis,  prtzdltus,  jwcecox,  ru- 
dis,  salvus,  sospes,  vulgdris,  implger,  superstes,  nudus,  and  some  others. 

<§>  127.  The  comparative  and  superlative  may  also  be 
formed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive  the  adverbs  magis,  more,  and 
maxime,  most;  as,  idoneus,  fit;  magis  idoneus,  maxwie  idoneus. 

Valde,  imprimis,  apprime,  admodum,  &c.,  and  the  prepositions 
pros  and  per,  and  sometimes  perquam,  prefixed  to  an  adjective, 
denote  a  high  degree  of  the  quality. 

The  force  of  the  comparative  is  increased  by  prefixing  etiam, 
even,  or  yet ;  and  that  of  both  comparative  and  superlative,  by 
prefixing  longe,  or  multo,  much,  far ;  as,  longe  nobilissimus, 
longe  melior ;  iter  mulio  facilius ,  multo  maxima  pars. 

Qudm  before  the  superlative  renders  it  more  emphatic;  as, 
qudmdoctissimus,  extremely  learned ;  qudm  cdemmc,  as  speedily 
as  possible. 

All  adjectives  whose  signification  admits  of  different  degrees, 
if  they  have  no  terminational  comparison,  may  be  compared  by 
means  of  adverbs. 

Instead  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  the  posi- 
tive, with  the  prepositions  pra,  ante,  prater,  or  supra,  is  some- 
times used;  as,  pra  nobis  beatus  (Cic.),  happier  than  we;  ante 
alias  pulchritudlne  insignis  (Liv.),  most  beautiful.  Sometimes 
the  preposition  is  used  in  connection  with  the  superlative ;  as, 
ante  olios  pulchemmus  omnes  (Virg.) 

Among  adjectives  which  denote  an  invariable  quality  or 
limitation,  and  which,  therefore,  cannot  be  compared,  are  those 
denoting  matter,  time,  number,  possession,  country,  part,  inter- 
rogation ;  also  compounds  ofjtigum,  somnus,  gero,  and/ero,  and 
many  others. 


72  ADJECTIVES. DERIVATION.  $   128. 


DERIVATION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

Derivative    adjectives    are   formed    chiefly   from 
nouns,  from  other  adjectives,  and  from  verbs. 

I.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  called 
denominatives.  The  following  are  the  principal  classes : — 

1.  The  termination  eus,  added  to  the  root,  denotes  the  ma- 
terial of  which  a  thing  is  made ;  as,  aureus,  golden ;  argenteus, 
of  silver ;    ligneus,  wooden ;    vitreus,  of  glass ;    from  aurum, 
argentum,  &/c. 

The  termination  inus  has  sometimes  the  same  meaning  ;  as, 
adamantinus,  of  adamant ;  cedrinus,  of  cedar ;  from  addmas 
and  cedrus.  So  enus  ;  as,  terrenus,  of  earth,  from  terra. 

The  termination  eus  is  found  only  in  possessives  of  Greek 
origin;  as,  Acnilleus,  of  Achilles;  Sophodeus,  &,c. 

2.  The  terminations  dlis,  dris,  elis,  His,  atilis,  icius,  icus,  iust 
eus,  and  mus,  denote  belonging  or  relating  to;  as,  capitdlis,  relat- 
ing to  the  life ;  from  caput. 

So  comitidlis,  regdlis  ;  Apollinaris,  consul  dris,  populdris;  civllis,  hostilis, 
juvenilis;  aquattlis,jluviaVllis;  tribunicius,  pairicius  ;  belUcus,civicv.s,  Ger- 
manlcus ;  accusatorius,  imperatorius,  rcgius  ;  canlnus,  equlnus,  Jerinus ; 
from  comitidj  rex,  Apollo,  consul,  populus,  civis,  &c. 

The  termination  His  sometimes  expresses  character;  as, 
hostilis,  hostile ;  puerllis,  boyish  ;  from  hostis  and  puer. 

3.  The  termination  arius  generally  denotes  profession  or  oc- 
cupation ;    as,  argentarius,   a  silversmith ;   from    argentum ; — 
coriariuSj  statuarius;  from  corium  arid  statua.     When  added  to 
numeral   adjectives,  it  denotes  how  many  parts  a  thing  con- 
tains.    See  §  121,  4. 

Some  of  this  class  are  properly  substantives. 

4.  The  terminations  osus  and  lentus  denote  abundance,  ful- 
ness; as,  ammdtuSj  full  of  courage ;  frau dulentus,  given  to  fraud; 
from   animus  and  fraus.      So  lapiddsus,  vinosus,  turbulentus, 
violentus.     Before  lentus,  a  connecting  vowel  is  inserted,  which 
is  commonly  u. 

Adjectives  of  this  class  are  called  amplificatives.     See  §  104,  13. 

5.  From  adjectives  are  formed  diminutives  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  from  nouns ;  as,  dulciculus,  sweetish ;  duriusculusy  some- 
what hard  ;  from  dulcis  and  durus.     So  lentulus,  misellus,  par- 
vulus,  &c.     See  §  100,  3,  and  §  104,  12. 

6.  From  the  names  of  places,  and  especially  of  towns,  are 
derived  adjectives  in  ensis,  inus,  as,  and  anus,  denoting  of  or 
belonging  to  such  places 


<§>   129.  ADJECTIVES.  -  DERIVATION.  73 

Thus  from  AtklncR,  is  formed  Aiheniensis^  Athenian  ;  from  Canna,  Can- 
nensis.  In  like  manner,  from  castra  and  circus  come  castrensis,  circensis. 

Those  in  inus  are  formed  from  names  of  places  ending  in  ia  and  ium  ; 
&a,JlriciatJlriclnus;  Caudium,  Caudlnus  ;  Capitolium,  Capitollnus  ;  /Mtium, 
Latinus.  Some  names  of  towns,  of  Greek  origin,  with  other  terminations, 
also  form  adjectives  in  inus  ;  as,  Tarentum,  Tarentlnus. 

Most  of  those  in  as  are  formed  from  nouns  in  um  ;  some  from  nouns  in 
a  ;  as,  Arplnum,  Arpinas  ;  CapgTia,  Capinas. 

Those  in  anus  are  formed  from  names  of  towns  of  the  first  declension, 
or  from  certain  common  nouns;  as,  Alba,  Albanus  ;  Roma,  Rorndnus; 
Cumce,  Cumanus  ;  Theba,  Thebanus  ;—  -fans,  fontanus;  mons,  montanus; 
urbs,  urbdnus  ;  oppldum,  oppiddnus. 

Adjectives  with  the  terminations  anus  and  inus  are  also  formed 
from  names  of  men  ;  as,  Sulla,  Sulldnus  ;  Juguriha,  Jugurthmus. 

Names  of  towns  in  polls  form  adjectives  in  politdnus  ;  as, 
Neapolls,  Neapolltdnus. 

Greek  names  of  towns  generally  form  adjectives  in  ius  ;  as, 
Rhodus,  Rhodius  ;  Laced&mon,  Lacedamonlus  ;  —  but  those  in 
a  form  them  in  aus  ;  as,  Larlssa,  LarisscBus  ;  Smyrna,  Smyr- 
naus. 

7.  A  large  class  of  derivative  adjectives,  though  formed  from 
nouns,  have  the  terminations  of  perfect  participles.  They 
generally  signify  wearing  or  furnished  with  ;  as, 

aldtus,  winged  ;  barbdtus,  bearded  ;  galeatus,  helmeted  ;  aurltuSj  long- 
eared  ;  turrltus,  turreted  ;  cornutus,  horned  ;  from  alat  barba,  galea, 
auriSj  &c. 

§  129.  II.  Adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal 
adjectives.  Such  are  the  following  classes  :  — 

1.  The  termination  bundus,   added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  with  a  connecting  vowel,  which  is  commonly  that  of  the 
verb,  has  the  general  meaning  of  the  present  participle  ;  as, 

errabunduSj  moribundus,  from  crro,  morior,  and  equivalent  to  errans, 
moriens.  In  many  the  meaning  is  somewhat  strengthened  ;  as,  gratvla- 
bundus,  full  of  congratulations  ;  lacrimabundus,  weeping  profusely. 

Most  verbals  in  bundus  are  from  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  a  few 
from  those  of  the  third,  and  but  one  from  the  second  and  fourth  re- 
spectively. 

Some  verbal  adjectives  in  cundus  have  a  similar  sense  ;  as,  rubicundus, 
verecundus,  from  rubeo  and  vereor. 

2.  The  termination  idust  added  to  the  root,  especially  of 
neuter  verbs,  denotes  the  quality  or  state   expressed   by  the 
verb  ;  as, 

algldus,  cold;  catidus,  warm;  madtdus,  moist;  rapldus,  rapid;  from 
j  caleOf  madeo,  rapio. 


3.  The  termination  bills,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  with 

its  connecting  vowel,  denotes  passively,  capability,  or  desert  ;  as, 

amabllis,  worthy  to  be  loved  ;  credibUis,  deserving  credit  ;  placabllis, 

easy  to  be  appeased  ;  from  amo,  credo,  placo.    It  is  rarely  active  ;  as,  a£r 

meabllis,  Plin. 

7 

. 


74  ADJECTIVES. COMPOSITION.          §    130,  131. 

In  adjectives  of  this  form,  derived  from  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation, 
the  connecting  yowel  is  i  ;  sometimes  also  in  those  from  verbs  of  the  second 
conjugation,  i  is  used  instead  of  e;  as,  horribllis,  terribllis,  from  horreo 
and  terreo. 

This  termination  is  sometimes  added  to  the  third  root,  with  a  change  of 
u  into  i;  afl,jf«uft&f,  coctililis,  sensibllis,  fromflecto  (flexu),  &c. 

4.  The  termination  ilis,  added  either  to  the  first  root  of  a 
verb,  or  to  the  third  root,  after  u  is  removed,  has  usually  a  pas- 
sive, but  sometimes  an  active  sense ;  as, 

agllis,  active  ;  fcx>ilis,  easy  to  be  bent ;  ducttlis,  ductile  ;  sutllis,  sewed ; 
coctllis,  baked  ;  ferftlis,  fertile  ;  from  ago,  <fcc. 

5.  The  termination  icius  or  itius,  added  to  the  third  root  of 
the  verb,  after  u  is  removed,  has  a  passive  sense,  as  Jictitius, 
feigned  ;  conductitius,  to  be  hired ;  supposititius,  substituted, 
from  Jingo  (JictM),  &c. 

6.  The  termination  ax,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  an 
inclination,  often  one  that  is  faulty ;  as,  audax,  audacious ;   lo- 
quax,  talkative  ;  rapax,  rapacious  ;  from  audeo,  loquor,  rapio. 

$  130.  III.  Adjectives  derived  from  participles,  and  re- 
taining their  form,  are  called  participials ;  as,  amans,  fond 
of;  doctus,  learned. 

IV.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  adverbs,  and  are  called 
advet  bials  ;  as,  crastmus,  of  to-morrow  ;  hodiernus,  of  this  day ; 
from  eras  and  hodie. 

V.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  prepositions,  and  may 
be  called prepositionals ;  as,  contrarius,  contrary,  from  contra; 
posterus,  subsequent,  from  post. 


COMPOSITION    OF    ADJECTIVES. 

$131*     Compound  adjectives  are  formed  variously: — 

1.  Of  two  nouns ;    as,  capripes,  goat- footed — of  caper  and 
pes  ;  ignicomuSj  having  fiery  hair — of  ignis  and  coma. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  an  adjective  ;  as,  noctivagus,  wandering  in 
the  night — of  nox  and  vagus. 

3.  Of  a  noun   and  a  verb ;  as,  cornigcr,  bearing  horns — of 
cornu  and  gero ;  letifer,   bringing  death — of  letum   and  fero. 
So  carnivorus,  causidicus,  ignivomus,  lucifugus,  particeps. 

4.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun  ;  as,  (Equavus,  of  the  same 
age — of  aquus  and  avum ;  celeripes,  swift-footed — of  celer  and 
pes.     So  centimanus,  decennis,  magnanimus,  misericors,  unan~ 
imis. 

5.  Of  two    adjectives ;    as,  centumgeminus,  having  a  hun- 
dred arms ;  multicavus,  having  many  cavities. 


<§>  132.  PRONOUNS.  75 

6.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb ;  as,  breviloquens,  speaking 
briefly — of  brevis  and  loquor;  magnificus,  magnificent — of  mag- 
nus  and  facio. 

7.  Of  an   adjective   and   a  termination ;    as,   qualiscunque, 
quotcunque,  uterque. 

REMARK.  When  the  former  part  of  the  compound  is  a  noun 
or  adjective,  it  usually  adds  i  to  its  root.  If  the  second  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place;  as,  magnanimus—- of  mag- 
nus  and  animus. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  bicorpor,  two-bodied — of  bis 
and  corpus. 

9.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective  ;  as,  malefidus,  unfaith- 
ful ;  malesdnus,  insane. 

10.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  beneficus,  beneficent — of 
bene  and  facio;  malevolus,  malevolent — of  male  and  volo. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun  ;  as,  amens,  mad — of  a  and 
mens.     So  consors,  decolor,  deformis,  implumis,  inermis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective  ;  as,  concavus,  con- 
cave ;  infldus,  unfaithful.     So  improvidus,  percdrus9  prcedwes, 
subalbidus. 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  continuus,  continual— of 
con  and  teneo;  inscius,  ignorant — of  in  and  scio.     So  pracipuus, 
promiscuus,  superstes. 

REMARK.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is 
sometimes  changed,  to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it ;  as,  imprftdens— 
of  in  and  prudens.  See  §  196. 

PRONOUNS. 

§  132.  A  pronoun  is  a  word  which  supplies  the  place 
of  a  noun. 

There  are  eighteen  simple  pronouns : — 

Ego,  /.                                   Hie,  this  or  he.  Suus,  his,  hers,  its,  &c. 

Tu,  thou.                               Is,  that  or  he.  Cujus  ?  whose  ? 

Sui,  of  himself,  &c.             Quis  ?  who  ?  Noster,  our. 

Ille,  that  or  he.                      Qui,  who.  Vester,  your. 

Ipse,  himself.                        Me  us,  my.  Nostras,  of  our  country. 

Iste,  that  or  he.                     Tuus,  thy.  Cujas  ?  of  what  country  ? 

Three  of  these — ego,  tu,  and  sui — are  substantives  ;  the  re- 
maining fifteen,  and  all  the  compound  pronouns,  are  adjectives. 

Ego  and  tu  are  a  species  of  appellatives  of  general  application.  Ego  is 
used  by  a  speaker,  to  designate  himself;  tu,to  designate  the  person  wliom 
he  addresses.  Ego  is  of  the  first  person,  tu  of  the  second. 


76 


SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


$  133. 


Sui  is  also  a  general  appellative,  of  the  third  person,  and  has  always  a 
reflexive  signification.  The  oblique  cases  of  ego  and  t  u  are  also  used  re- 
fiexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second 
person. 

The  remaining  pronouns  are  adjectives,  as  they  serve  to  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  substantives  ;  and  they  are  pronouns,  because,  like  substantive 
pronouns,  they  may  designate  any  object  in  certain  situations  or  circum- 
stances. 

Meus,  tuuSy  suus,  noster,  vester,  and  nostras,  have  the  same  extent  of  sig- 
nification as  the  substantive  pronouns  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  are 
equivalent  to  the  genitive  cases  of  those  pronouns. 

Pronouns,  like  substantives  and  adjectives,  are  declined  ;  but 
they  all  want  the  vocative,  except  tut  mcus,  noster,  and  nostras. 
Sui  also,  from  the  nature  of  its  signification,  wants  the  nomina- 
tive in  both  numbers. 

The  substantive  pronouns  take  the  gender  of  the  objects  which 
they  denote.  The  adjective  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  have 
three  genders. 


SUBSTANTIVE   PRONOUNS. 

§  133.     The  substantive  pronouns  are  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 

N.  e'-go,  /.  tu,  t hou. 

G.  me;-i,  of  me.        tu'-i,  of 

D.  mi'-hi,  to  me.        tib'-i,*  to  thee. 
Ac.  me,  me.  te,  thee. 

V.   tu,  O  thou. 

te,  with  thee. 


sib'-i*  to  himself  ,&,c. 
se,  himself,  &c. 


Ab.  me,  with  me. 


N.  nos,  we. 
,-,  (nos'-trum  >    /• 
G-|ornos'-tri,K 
D.  no'-bis,  to  us. 
Ac.  nos,  us. 
V.   -  . 


us- 


Plural. 
vos,  ye  or  you. 
ves'-trum  or)^ 
ves'-tri,  \° 
vo'-bis,  to  you. 
vos,  you. 
vos,  O  ye  or  you. 


se,  with  himself  9  &c. 


,-     r  .-,         7 
*"'*,<*  themselves. 

sib'-i,  to  themselves. 
se,  themselves. 


Ab.  no'-bis,  with  us.    vo'-bis,  with  you.        se,  with  themselves. 
Remarks. 

1.  MP,  and  mi  are  ancient  forms  for  mihi.     So  miV  for  mihinc,  Pers. 

2.  The  syllable  met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  substantive  pronouns, 
in  an  intensive  sense,  either  with  or  without  ipse  ;  as,  egtimet,  1  myself; 


*  See  §  18,  2. 


134. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


77 


mihimet  ipsi,  for  myself.  It  is  not  annexed,  however,  to  the  genitives  plural, 
nor  to  tu  in  the  nominative  or  vocative.  In  these  cases  of  tuy  tute  or 
internet  is  used.  In  the  accusative  and  ablative,  tete  in  the  singular,  and 
sese  in  both  numbers,  are  employed  intensively.  Mepte,  med,  and  ted,  for 
me  and  te,  and  tis  for  tui,  occur  in  the  comic  writers. 

3.  Nostrum  and  vestr&m  are  contracted  from  nostrSrum,  npstrdrum,  and 
vestrorumj  vestrdrum. 

4.  The  preposition  cum  is  affixed  to  the  ablatives  of  these  pronouns  in 
both  numbers ;  as,  mecum,  nobiscum,  &c. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  134.  Adjective  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  the 
following  classes  : — demonstrative,  intensive,  relative,  inter- 
rogative, indefinite,  possessive,  and  patrial. 

NOTE.    Some  pronouns  belong  to  two  of  these  classes. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  are  such  as  specify  what  object 
is  meant. 

They  are  iUe,  iste,  hie,  and  is,  and  their  compounds,  and  are 
thus  declined  :  — 


N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 

Ab. 

M. 

il'-le, 
il-H'-us 
il'-li, 
il'-lum, 

Singular. 

F. 

il'-Ia, 
,*  il-li'-us, 
il'-li, 
il'-lam, 

JV. 
il'-lud, 
il-li'-us, 
iMi, 
il'-lud, 

M. 

il'-li, 
il-lo'-rum, 
il'-lis, 
il'-los, 

Plural. 

F. 

il'-la3, 
il-la'-rum, 
il'-lis, 
il'-las, 

il'-la, 
il-16'-rum, 
il'-lis, 
il'-la, 

il'-lo. 

il'-la. 

il'-lo. 

il'-lis. 

il'-lis. 

il'-lis. 

Iste  is  declined  like  ilk. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

AT. 

M. 

F. 

JV. 

N. 

hie, 

haec, 

hoc, 

hi, 

hae, 

haec, 

G. 

hu'-jus, 

hu'-jus, 

hu'-jus, 

ho'-rum, 

ha'-rum, 

ho'-rum, 

D. 

huicf, 

huic, 

huic, 

his, 

his, 

his, 

Ac. 

hunc, 

hanc, 

hoc, 

hos, 

has, 

hacc, 

Ab. 

hoc. 

hac. 

hoc. 

his. 

his. 

his. 

See  $  15. 

f  Pronounced  hike.    See  $  9 

7* 

78 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


134. 


Singular. 
M.        F.        JV* 
N.    is,        e'-a,     id, 
G.    e'-jus,  e'-jus,  e'-jus, 
D.    e'-i,      e'-i,      e'-i, 
Ac.  e'-um,  e'-am,  id, 

Ah  e'-o.      e'-a      e'-o. 


M. 

i'-i, 
e-6'-rum, 
i'-is  or  e'-is, 
e'-os, 

Plural 
F. 

e'-*, 
e-a'-rum, 
i'-is  or  e'-is, 
e'-as, 

JV. 
e'-a, 
e-6'-rum, 
i'-is  or  e'-is, 
e'-a, 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

Remarks. 

1.  Instead  of  iMe,  0Z£u5  was  anciently  used;  whence  olli  in  Virgil.     Ilia 
fern.,  for  t7/iws  and  iZfo",  is  found  in  Lucretius  and  Cato,  as  also  tuec  for  ha>. 
in  Plautus  and  Terence.    EH  for  ct,  im  for  et*w,  and  ifos  and  ilbus  for  it*, 
occur  in  Plautus ;  and  ece,  fern.,  for  eit  and  cd6us  for  its,  in  Cato. 

2.  From  ecce,lo!  and  the  accusative  ofille,  fete,  and  is,  are  formed  ccciZ- 
lum,  cccttlam,  eccillud,  cccum,  eccam,  &c.,  in  both  numbers.     Eccillum  is 
sometimes  contracted  into  Mum.     Ecca,  nom.  fern.,  also  occurs. 

3.  Istic  and  iUie  are  compounded  of  iste  hie,  and  itte  hie.     The  former 
sometimes  retains  the  aspirate,  as  isthic.    They  are  more  emphatic  than  itte 
and  iste. 

Istic  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 
M.  F.  JV.  M. 

JV.  ist'-ic,  ist'-8BC,  ist'-oc,  or  ist'-uc,  JV. 
Ac.  ist'-unc,  ist'-anc,  ist'-oc,  or  ist'-uc.  Ac. 
Alt.  ist'-oc.  ist'-ac.  ist'-oc. 

Illic  is  declined  in  the  same  manner. 

4.  Ce,  intensive,  is  sometimes  added  to  the  several  cases  of  hie,  and 
rarely  to  some  cases  of  the  other  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as,  hujusce, 
hosce,  hasce,  hisce  ;  illdce,  istdce,  ejusce,  istcecce,  iisce  :  in  gen.  pi.  horunce 
or  horunCi  &c.   When  TIC,  interrogative,  is  also  annexed,  ce  becomes  ci;  as, 
hcecclne,  hosclne,  hisclne  ;  istucclne,  istacclne,  istoscine  ;  illicdnc,  illancctne. 

5.  To  the  genitives  singular  of  the  demonstrative  and  relative  pronouns, 
modi,  the  genitive  of  modus,  is  often  annexed,  either  with  or  without  an 
intervening  particle ;  as,  hujusmddit  or  hujuscemddi,  of  this  sort ;  cujus- 
mddi,  <&c. 

6.  Dem  is  annexed  to  is,  forming  idem,  the  same,  which  is 
thus  declined  : — 


Plural. 
F.  JV. 

ist'-«BC. 


Singular. 

M. 

F. 

JV. 

JV.    i'-dem, 

ef-a-dem, 

i'-dem, 

G.    e-jus  -dem, 
D.    e-I'-dem, 

e-jus'-dem, 
e-i'-dem, 

e-jus'-den 
e-r'-dem, 

Ac.  e-un'-dem, 

e-an'-dem 

i'-dem, 

M.  e-O'-dem. 

e-af-dem. 

e-^-dcm. 

§  136,          INTENSIVE    AND    RELATIVE    PRONOUNS.  79 


M. 

JV.      i-I'-dem, 
G.      e-o-nm'-dem, 
y>    C  e-is'-dem,  or  > 
*   £     i-is'-dem,  5 
Jlc.     e-os'-dem, 
V 

Plural. 
F. 
e-ae'-dem, 
e-a-run'-dem, 
C  e-is'-dem,  or  ) 
\     i-is'-dem,   ) 
e-as'-dem, 

JV. 
e'-a-dem, 
e-o-run'-dem, 
C  e-is'-dem,  or 
)      i-is'-dem, 
e'-a-dem, 

a,    C  e-is'-dem,  or  ) 
\     i-is'-dem.  5 

C  e-is'-dem,  or  ) 
\     i-is'-dem.   $ 

C  e-is'-dem,  or 
(      i-is'-dem. 

NOTE.    In  compound  pronouns,  m  before  d  is  changed  into  ft;  as, ett*- 
cfon,  &c. 

INTENSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  1 35.     Intensive  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  render 
an  object  emphatic. 

To  this   class   belong   ipse,   and   the   intensive  compounds 
already  mentioned.     §§  133,  2,  and  134,  4. 
Ipse  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural 

M.          F.  JV.  M.  F.  JV. 


N.  ip'-se,     ip-sa,     ip'-sum, 

G.  ip-si'-us,  ip-si'-us,  ip-si'-us, 

D.  ip'-si,      ip;-si,      ip'-si, 

Ac  ip'-sum,  ip^sam,  ip'-sum, 

Ab.  ip'-so.     ip'-sa.     ip7-so. 


ip'-si,          ip;-sa3,        ip'-sa, 
ip-so'-rum,  ip-sa'-rum,  ip-so'-rum, 
ip7-sis,        ip'-sis,        ip'-sis, 
ip'-sos,       ip'-sas,       ip'-sa, 

ip'-sis.        ipx-sis.        ip'-sis. 


Remarks. 

1.  Ipse  is  commonly  subjoined  to  nouns  or  pronouns ;  as,  Jupiter  ipse, 
tu  ipse,  Jupiter  himself,  &c. 

2.  A  nominative  ipsus,  and  a  superlative  ipsissimus,  his  very  self,  are 
found  in  comic  writers. 

3.  The  compounds  eapse,  eampse,  and  reapse,  are  contracted  for  ed,  ipsAt 
earn  ipsam,  and  re  ipsd. 

RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

<§»  136.  Relative  pronouns  are  such  as  relate  to  a  pre- 
ceding noun,  or  pronoun. 

They  are  qui,  who,  and  the  compounds  quicunque  and  quis- 
quist  whoever. 

In  a  general  sense,  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  often  relatives ;  but 
the  name  is  commonly  appropriated  to  those  above  specified.  They  serve 


80  INTERROGATIVE     PRONOUNS  §    137. 

to  introduce  a  proposition,  limiting  or  explaining  a  preceding  noun  or  pro- 
noun, to  which  they  relate,  and  which  is  called  the  antecedent. 

Qui  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.          JV.  M.  F.  JV. 


N.   qui,  quae,  quod, 

G.   cu'-jus,  cu'-jus,  cu'-jus, 

J).  cui,*  cui,  cui, 

Ac.  quern,  quam,  quod, 

Ab.  quo.  qua.  quo. 


qui,  quae,  quse, 

quo'-rum,  qua'-rum,  quo'-rum, 

qui'-bus,  qui'-bus,  qui'-bus, 

quos,  quas,  quse, 


qui'-bus.      qui'-bus.      qui'-bus. 


Remarks. 

1.  Qui  is  sometimes  used  for  the  ablative  singular,  in  all  genders,  and 
rarely  for  the  ablative  plural.     To  the  ablatives  quo,  qud,  and  qui,  cum,  is 
sometimes  annexed  ;  but  it  is  usually  placed  before  the  ablative  plural. 

2.  Queis  and  quis  are  sometimes  used  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural 
for  quibus.     Cujus  and  cui  were  anciently  written  quojus  and  quoi. 

Quicunque,  or  quicumque,  is  declined  like  qui. 

Qui  is  sometimes  separated  from  cunque,  by  the  interposition  of  one  or 
more  words. 

Quisquis  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

M.  F.  JV.  M. 


JV.    quis'-quis,         quis'-quis,     quid'-quid, 

J0c.  quem'-quem, quid'-quid, 

Ab.  quo'-quo.  qua'-qud.       quo'-quo. 


qui'-qui, 
D.  qui-bus'-qui-bus. 


NOTE.     Quicquid  is  sometimes  used  for  quidquid.     Quiqui  for  quisquu 
occurs  in  Plautus. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

<5>  137.     Interrogative  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to 
inquire  which  of  a  number  of  objects  is  intended. 
They  are 

S '        ?l  who  1  what  1        Ecquis  ?          *)  Cujus  ?  whose  1 

Qui  ?  Ecquisnam  ?  >  is  any  one  ?       Cujas  ?  of  what 

Q  ?    >  which  1  what  1     Numquis  ?      )  country  ? 

1.   Quis  is  commonly  used  substantively ;    quit  adjectively. 
Qui  is  declined  like  qui  the  relative. 

*  Pronounced  ki     See  $9. 


37. 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


81 


<; 

N. 
G. 
D. 

Ac. 
V. 
Ab. 

\uis  is  thus  declined  :  — 
Singular. 
M.           F.            JV. 
quis,        quse,         quid, 
cu'-jus,    cu'-jus,    cu'-jus, 
cui,          cui,          cui, 
quern,      quam,      quid, 

M. 
qui, 
quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quos, 

Plural 
F. 

quae, 
qua'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quas, 

quae, 
quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
qua$, 

quo.         qusu         quo. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

Remarks  on  QUIS  and  QUI. 

(a.)  Quis  is  sometimes  used  by  comic  writers  in  the  feminine,  and  even 
in  the  neuter.  So  also  quisnam,  quisque  and  quisquam occur  as  feminine. 

(b.)  Qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  quis^  in  all  genders,  as  it  is  for" 
that  of  the  relative  qui. 

(c.)  Quis  and  qui  have  sometimes  the  signification  of  indefinite  pronouns 
(some  one,  any  one),  especially  after  ec,  si,  ne,  neu,nisi,num, quo,  quanta, 
quum,  and  ubi.  Sometimes  they  are  used  in  the  sense  of  qualis  ?  what  sort  ? 

2.  The  compounds  quisnam  and  quinam  have  the  signification 
and  declension  of  quis  and  qui  respectively. 

3.  Ecquis  and  numquis,  or  nunquis,  are  declined  and  used 
like  quis. 

But  ecqua  is  sometimes  found  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine ;  and 
the  neuter  plural  of  nunquis  is  nunqua. 

Ecqui  and  nunqui  also  occur,  declined  like  the  interrogative  qui,  and, 
like  that,  used  adjectively. 

4.  Ecquisnam  is  declined  like  ecquis ;  but  it  is  found  only  in 
the  singular  ; — in  the  nominative  in  all  genders,  and  in  the  abla- 
tive masculine. 

5.  Cujus  is  also  defective: — 


Singular. 

F. 

cu'-ja, 

cu'-jam, 

cu'-ja. 


JV. 
cu'-jum, 


Plural. 

F. 

JV.   cu  -jae, 
Ac.  cu'-jas. 


6.  Cujas  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  termination ; 
cujas,  cujatis.  It  is  found  in  the  genitive  and  accusative  sin- 
gular, and  the  nominative  plural. 

NOTE.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  sometimes  used,  in  dependent 
clauses,  when  there  is  no  question.  They  are  then  called  indefinites  ;  ag, 
nescio  quis  sit,  I  know  not  who  he  is.  Qui,  in  this  sense,  is  found  for 
quis;  as,  qui  sit  aperit,  he  discloses  who  he  is. 


INDEFINITE     PRONOUNS. 


$138. 


INDEFINITE    PRONOUNS. 


$  138.  Indefinite  pronouns  are  such  as  denote  an  ob- 
ject, in  a  general  manner,  without  indicating  a  particular 
individual.  They  are 


Aliquis,  some  one.  Quisquam,  any  one. 

Siquis,  if  any.  Quispiam,  some  one. 

Nequis,  lest  any.  Unusquisque,  each. 

Quisque,  every  one.  Aliquipiam,  any,  some. 

1.  Aliquis  is  thus  declined  : — 

Singular. 


Quidam,  a  certain  one. 
Quillbet,  >  any  one  you 
Quivis,  5  please. 


M. 

F. 

JV. 

JV. 

al'-I-quis, 

al'-i-qua, 

al'-i-quod,  or  quid, 

G. 
D. 

al-i-cu'-jus, 
al'-I-cui, 

al-i-cu'-jus, 
al'-i-cui, 

al-i-cu  -jus, 
al'-i-cui, 

Ac. 
V. 

al'-i-quem, 

al'-i-quam, 

al'-i-quod,  or  quid, 

al'-i-quo.  alf-!-qua.  al'-I-quo. 


JV. 
G. 
D. 
Ac. 
V. 
Ab. 


M. 

al'-i-qui, 
al-i-quo'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus,  * 
al'-I-quos, 


Plural. 

F. 

al'-i-qusB, 
al-i-qua'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus, 
al'-i-quas, 


jr. 

al'-i-qua, 
al-i-quo'-rum, 
a-liq'-u!-bus, 
al'-I-qua, 


a-liq'-ui-bus.        a-liq'-ui-bus.        a-liq'-ui-bus. 

2.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  declined  in  the  same  manner. 

But  they  sometimes  have  qua  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine. 

./2/i^Mi,  siqui,  and  nequi,  are  found  for  aliquis,  &c.,  and  the  ablatives  atiqui 
and  siqui  also  occur. 

Aliquid,  siquid,  and  nequid,  like  quid,  are  used  substantively ;  aliquod, 
&c.,  like  quod,  are  used  adjectively. 

3.  Quisque,  quisquam,  and  quispiam,  are  declined  like  quis. 
But  in  the  neuter  singular,  quisque  has  quodque,  quidque,  or  quicque ; 

quisquam  has  quidquam  or  quicquam;  and  quispiam  has  quodpiam,  quid- 
piam,  or  quippiam. 

Quisquam  wants  the  plural,  and  quispiam  is  scarcely  used  in  that  num- 
ber, except  in  the  nominative  feminine,  quapiam. 

4.  Unusquisque  is  compounded  of  unus  and  quisque,  and  both 
words  are  declined. 

Thus  unusquisque,  uniuscujusque,  unicuique,  unumquemque,  &c.  The 
neuter  is  unumquodque,  or  unumquidque.  It  has  no  plural. 

5.  Quidam,  quilibet,  and  quivis,  are  declined  like  qui,  except 
that  they  have  quod,  or  quid,  in  the  neuter. 

Quidam  has  usually  n  before  d  in  the  accusative  singular  and  genitive 
plural ',  as,  quendam,  quorundam,  &c. 

*  Pronounced  a-lik'-we-bus.     See  §$9,  ana  19,  4. 


<§>  139-141.  VERBS.  83 

POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  1 39.  The  possessive  are  derived  from  the  substantive 
pronouns,  and  from  quis,  and  designate  something  belong- 
ing to  their  primitives. 

They  are  meust  tuus,  suits,  noster,  vester,  and  cujus.  Jlfeus, 
tuus,  and  suus,  are  declined  like  bonus.  (§  105.)  Meus  has  in 
the  vocative  singular  masculine  mi,  and  very  rarely  meus. 

Cujus  is  also  declined  like  bonus ;  but  it  is  defective.  See 
$  137,  5. 

Noster  and  vester  are  declined  like  piger.     See  §  106. 

Remarks. 

1.  The  termination  pte  intensive  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  ablative 
singular  of  the  possessive  pronouns ;  as,  suopte  pondere,  by  its  own  weight ; 
suapte  manu,  b_y  his  own  hand. 

2.  Suus,  like  its  primitive  sui,  has  always  a  reflexive  signification.    These 
pronouns  are  hence  called  reflexive.     Meus,  tuus,  noster,  and  vester,  are  also 
used  reflexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or 
second  person.     See  §  132.    Met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  meus,  &c. 

PATRIAL    PRONOUNS. 

These  are  nostras  and  cujas.  See  §  137,  6.  They  are  de- 
clined likt  adjectives  of  one  termination ;  as,  nostras,  nostrdtis. 


VERBS 

>§>  140.  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  something  is  af- 
firmed of  a  person  or  thing. 

That  of  which  any  thing  is  affirmed  is  called  the  subject 
of  the  verb. 

A  verb  either  expresses  an  action  or  state  ;  as,  puer  legit,  the 
boy  reads ;  virtus  lauddtur,  virtue  is  praised ;  equus  currit,  the 
horse  runs  ;  aqua  calet,  the  water  is  warm  ; — or  it  connects  an 
attribute  with  a  subject ;  as,  terra  est  rotunda,  the  earth  is  round. 
All  verbs  belong  to  the  former  of  these  classes,  except  sum,  1  am,  the 
most  common  use  of  which  is,  to  connect  an  attribute  with  a  subject. 
When  so  used,  it  is  called  a  copula. 

§  141.     Verbs  are  either  active  or  neuter. 

I.  An  active  verb  expresses  such  an  action  as  requires 
the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete  the  sense  ;  as,  amo  tey 
I  love  thee ;  sequitur  consulem,  he  follows  the  consul. 

Most  active  verbs  may  express  action  in  two  ways,  and,  for 


84  VERBS.  $  142. 

this  purpose,  have  two  forms,  which  are  called  the  active  and 
pcu,sive  voices. 

1.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  represents  the  agent  as  acting 
upon  some  person  or  thing,  called  the  object ;  as,  puer  legit 
librum,  the  boy  is  reading  a  book. 

2.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice   represents    the    object    as 
acted  upon  by  the  agent ;  as,  liber  legitur  a  puero,  a  book  is 
read  by  the  boy. 

REMARK.  By  comparing  the  two  preceding  examples,  it  will  be  seen 
that  they  have  the  same  meaning.  The  passive  voice  may  thus  be  sub- 
stituted at  pleasure  for  the  active,  by  making  the  object  of  the  active  the 
subject  of  the  passive,  and  placing  the  subject  of  the  active  in  the  ablative 
case,  with  or  without  the  preposition  a  or  ab,  according  as  it  is  a  voluntary 
or  involuntary  agent.  The  active  form  is  used  to  direct  the  attention 
especially  to  the  agent  as  acting ;  the  passive,  chiefly  to  exhibit  the  object 
as  acted  upon.  Jii  the  one  case  the  object,  in  the  other  the  agent,  is  fre- 
quently omitted,  and  left  indefinite ;  as,  puer  legit,  the  boy  is  reading,  i.  e. 
librum,  Ultras,  &c.,  a  book,  a  letter,  &c. ;  virtus  lauddtur,  virtue  is  praised, 
i.  e.  ab  hominlbus,  by  men. 

The  two  voices  are  distinguished  from  each  other  by  peculiar 
terminations. 

<§>  142.  II.  A  neuter  verb  expresses  such  an  action  or 
state,  as  does  not  require  the  addition  of  an  object  to  com- 
plete the  sense ;  as,  equus  currit,  the  horse  runs ;  ego  sedeo, 
I  sit. 

Many  verbs,  in  Latin,  are  considered  as  neuter,  which  are  usually 
translated  by  an  active  verb  in  English.  Thus  indulgeo,  I  indulge,  noceo, 
I  hurt,  pareo,  I  obey,  are  reckoned  among  neuter  verbs.  In  strictness, 
such  verbs  denote  rather  a  state  than  an  action,  and  their  sense  would  be  more 
exactly  expressed  by  the  verb  to  be  with  an  adjective  ;  as,  "  I  am  indul- 
gent, I  am  hurtful,"  &c.  Some  verbs  in  Latin,  which  do  not  usually  take 
an  object  after  them,  are  yet  active,  since  the  object  is  omitted  by  an  ellip- 
sis. Thus  credo  properly  signifies  to  intrust,  and,  in  this  sense,  admits  an 
object;  as,  credo  tibi  salutcm  meant,  I  intrust  my  safety  to  you;  but  it 
usually  means  to  believe  ;  as,  crede  mihi,  believe  me. 

REMARK  1.  Neuter  verbs  have,  in  general,  only  the  form  of 
the  active  voice.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  used  imper- 
sonally in  the  passive  voice. 

2.  The  neuter  verbs  audeo,  I  dare,  fido,  I  trust,  gaudeo,  I  rejoice,  and 
soleo,  I  am  wont,  have  the  passive  form  in  the  perfect  and  its  cognate 
tenses  ;  as,  ausus  sum,  I  dared.     These  verbs  are  called  neuter  passives. 

3.  The  neuter  verbs  vapulo,  I  am  beaten,  and  veneo,  1  am  sold,  have  an 
active  form,  but  a  passive  meaning,  and  are  called  neutral  passives. 

4.  Some  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  have  only  the  form 
of  the  passive  voice.     These  are  called  deponent  verbs,  from  de- 
pono,  to  lay  aside,  as  having  laid  aside  their  active  form,  and 
their  passive  signification  ;  as,  sequor,  I  follow ;  morior,  I  die. 

NOTE.    Verbs  are  sometimes  said  to  be  transitive  and  intransitive,  rather 


§  143,  144.      VERBS. MOODS  ;  TENSES.  85 

than  active  or  neuter ;  and  verbs  of  motion  are  by  some  divided  into 
active-transitive  and  active-intransitive,  according  as  they  require,  or  do  not 
require,  an  object  after  them. 

To  verbs,  besides  voices,  belong  moods,  tenses,  numbers, 
and  persons. 

MOODS. 

$  143.  Moods  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
manner  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb.  There 
are  in  Latin  four  moods — the  indicative,  the  subjunctive,  the 
imperative,  and  the  infinitive. 

1.  The  indicative  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  in  independent  and  absolute  assertions ;  as,  amo,  I 
love ;  amdbo,  I  shall  love. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  to  express  an  action  or  state  simply  as  conceived 
by  the  mind ;  as,  si  me  obsecret,  redlbo ;  if  he  entreat  me, 
I  will  return. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  in  commanding,  exhorting,  or  entreating;  as,  ama, 
love  thou. 

4.  The  infinitive  mood  is  that  form  of  the  verb  which 
is  used  to  denote  an  action  or  state  indefinitely,  without 
limiting  it  to  any  person  or  thing  as  its  subject ;  as,  aware, 
to  love. 

TENSES. 

§  144.  Tenses  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
times  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb. 

1.  Time  admits  of  a  threefold  division,  into  present,  past,  and 
future  ;  and,  in  each  of  these  times,  an  action  may  be  repre- 
sented either  as  going  on,  or  as  completed.      From  these  two 
divisions  arise  the  six  tenses  of  a  Latin  verb,  each  of  which  is 
distinguished  by  its  peculiar  terminations. 

2.  They  are  called  the  present,  imperfect,  future,  perfect  9 
pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  tenses. 

Present  C    action   }  amo,  I  love,  or  am  loving  ;  Present  tense. 
Past       <  not  com-  >  amdbam,  I  was  loving ;  Imperfect  tejise. 
Future  £  pleted;  )  amdbo ,  I  shall  love,  or  be  loving ;  Future  tense. 

Present  C    action    ^  amavi,  I  have  loved ;  Perfect  tense. 
Past         *     com-     >  amaveram,  I  had  loved ;  Pluperfect  tense. 
Future  £  pleted  j   )  amavtro,  I  shall  have  loved ;  Future  perfect  tens 6. 
8 


86  VERBS. TENSES.  §   145. 

3.  There  is  the  same  number  of  tenses  in  the  passive  voice, 
in  which  actions  not  completed  are  represented  by  simple  forms 
of  the  verb,  and  those  which  are  completed  by  compound  forms. 

Present  C    action    ^  amor,  I  am  loved ;  Present  tense.  * 

Past       <  not  com-  >  amdbar,  I  was  loved  ;  Imperfect  tense. 
Future  (  pleted ;   )  amdbor,  I  shall  be  loved  j  Future  tmse. 

Present  C  action  }  amdtus  sum,  or/m,  I  have  been  loved ;  Perfect  tense. 
Past  <  com-  >  amdtus  eram,  orfuZram,  I  had  been  loved  ;  Pluperfect. 
Future  f  pleted  ;  S  amdtus  ero,  oifuero,  I  shall  have  been  loved ;  Future 

[Perfect. 

<§>  145.  I.  The  present  tense  represents  an  action  as 
now  going  on,  and  not  completed ;  as,  amo,  I  love,  or  am 
loving. 

1.  Any  existing  custom,  or  "general  truth,  may  be  expressed  by  this 
tense ;  as,  apud  Farthos,  signum  datur  tymp&no  ;  among  the  Parthians, 
the  signal  is  given  by  a  drum.     A  general  truth  is  sometimes  also  ex- 
pressed by  the  perfect. 

2.  The  present  tense  may  also  denote  an  action  which  has  existed  for 
some  time,  and  which  still  exists;  as,  tot annos bella  gero  ;  for  so  many 
years  I  have  waged,  and  am  still  waging  war. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  often  in  narration  used  for  the  perfect.     It  is 
then  called  the  historical  present;  as,  desiliunt  ex  equis,  provolant  in  pri~ 
mum  ;  they  dismount,  they  fly  forward  to  the  front. 

II.  The  imperfect  tense  represents  an  action  as  going  on 
at  some  past  time,  but  riot  then  completed ;  as,  amabam, 
I  was  loving. 

1.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  repeated  or  customary 
past  action ;  as,  legebam,  I  was  wont  to  read. 

2.  It  may  also  denote  an  action  which  had  existed  for  some  time,  and 
which  was  still  existing  at  a  certain  past  time  ;  as,  audiebat  jamdudum 
veiba  ;  he  had  long  heard,  and  was  still  hearing  the  words. 

3.  This  tense  is  sometimes  used  for  the  present,  in  letters,  with  refer- 
ence to  the  time  of  their  being  read ;  as,  expectdbam,  I  was  expecting, 
(when  I  wrote). 

4.  The  imperfect  also  sometimes  denotes  the  intending,  preparing,  or 
attempting  to  act  at  a  definite  past  time. 

III.  The  future  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will  be  going 
on  hereafter,  without  reference  to  its  completion;  amabo, 
I  shall  love  or  be  loving. 

IV.  The  perfect  tense  represents  an  action  either  as  just 
completed,  or  as  completed  in  some   indefinite  past  time ; 
as,  amavi,  I  have  loved,  or  I  loved. 

In  the  former  sense,  it  is  called  the  perfect  definite;  in  the 
latter,  it  is  called  the  historical  perfect  or  perfect  indefinite. 


§  146,  147.   VERBS. NUMBERS  ;  PERSONS.  87 

V.  The  pluperfect  tense  represents  a  past  action  as  com- 
pleted, at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  past  action  or 
event ;  as,  littircr.s  scripseram,   antequam  nuncius  venit ;  1 
had  written  the  letter,  before  the  messenger  arrived. 

VI.  The  future  perfect  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will 
be  completed,  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future 
action  or  event ;  as,  cum  coenavero,  projiciscar ;  when  Ishallr 
have  supped,  I  will  go. 

This  tense  is  often,  but  improperly,  called  the  future  subjunctive.  It  has 
the  signification  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  corresponds  to  the  second  fu- 
ture'm  English. 

NOTE.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  passive,  in  English 
do  not  express  the  exact  sense  of  those  tenses  in  Latin,  as  denoting  an  ac- 
tion which  is,  was,  or  will  be,  going  on  at  a  certain  time.  Thus  laudor 
signifies,  not  "  I  am  praised,"  but  "  I  am  in  the  act  of  being  praised,"  or, 
if  such  an  expression  is  admissible,  "  I  am  being  praised." 

REMARK  1.  The  six  tenses  above  enumerated  are  found  only 
in  the  indicative  mood. 

2.  The  subjunctive  mood  has  the  present  and  past,  but  no 
future  tenses. 

The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  have  less  definiteness  of  meaning, 
in  regard  to  time,  than  those  of  the  indicative.  Thus  the  present  and  per- 
fect, besides  their  common  signs,  may  or  can,  may  have  or  can  have,  must, 
in  certain  connections,  be  translated  by  might,  could,  would,  or  should ; 
might  have,  could  have,  &c.  The  tenses  of  this  mood  must  often,  also,  be 
translated  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative.  For  a  more  full 
account  of  the  signification  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood, 
see  §  260. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  has  but  one  tense,  which  is  called 
the  present,  but  which,  from  its  nature,  has  a  reference  to  the 
future. 

4.  The  infinitive  mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  perfect, 
and  future  ;  the  first  of  which  denotes  an  incomplete,the  second 
a   completed    action,  and  the  last  an  action  to  be  performed. 

NUMBERS. 

§  146.  Numbers  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the 
unity  or  plurality  of  its  subject.  Verbs,  like  nouns,  have 
two  numbers — the  singular  and  the  plural. 

PERSONS. 

§  147.  Persons  are  forms  of  the  verb,  appropriated  to 
the  deferent  persons  of  the  subjeo*  and  accordingly  called 
the  first,  second,  and  third  persons. 


88         VERBS. PARTICIPLES,    GERUNDS,    AND    SUPINES. 

1.  As  the  imperative  mood  expresses  the  action  which  a  second 
or  third  person   is  required  to  perform,  it  has  terminations  cor- 
responding to  those  persons  only. 

2.  The  signification  of  the  infinitive  mood  not  being  limited  to 
any  subject,  it  admits  no  change  to  express  either  number  or 
person. 

3.  The  following  are  the  terminations  of  the  different  persons 
of  each  number,  in  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods  in  both 
voices : — 

Active.  Passive. 

Person.       1.        2.     3.  1.          2.          3. 

Singular.   —         s,      t ;  r,          ris,        tur ; 

Plural,     mus,     tis,     nt.        mur,     mini,     ntur. 
These  may  be  called  personal  terminations. 

REMARK  1.  The  first  person  singular,  in  the  active  voice,  ends  either  in 
m  or  in  a  vowel. 

2.  The  perfect  indicative  active  is  irregular  in  the  second  person  singu- 
lar, and  in  one  of  the  forms  of  the  third  person  plural. 

3.  The  passive  form  above  given  applies  to  the  simple  tenses  only. 

4.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons  are  seldom  expressed 
in  Latin  as  subjects  of  a  finite  verb,  the  several  persons  being  sufficiently 
distinguished  by  the  terminations  of  the  verb. 

PARTICIPLES,   GERUNDS,  AND  SUPINES. 

§  148.  1.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb, 
and  partaking  of  its  meaning,  but  having  the  form  of  an 
adjective. 

Like  a  verb,  it  has  different  voices  and  tenses ;  like  an  adjec- 
tive, it  has  declension*  and  gender;  and  like  both,  it  has  two 
numbers. 

Active  verbs  have  usually  four  participles — two  in  the  active 
voice,  a  present  and  a  future;  as,  amans,  loving;  amaturus,  about 
to  love ; — and  two  in  the  passive  voice,  a  perfect  and  a  future ; 
as,  amdtus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved ;  amandus,  to  be  loved. 

Neuter  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the  active 
voice. 

Deponent  verbs,  both  active  and  neuter,  may  have  the  partici 
pies  of  both  voices. 

2.  Gerunds  are  verbal  nouns,  used  only  in  the  oblique  cases, 
and  expressing  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb.  Like  other  ab- 

*  See  $$  105  and  111. 


<§>   149,    150.  VERBS. CONJUGATION.  89 

stract  nouns,  they  are  found  only  in  the  singular  number ;  as, 
amandi,  of  loving,  &c. 

3.  Supines  also  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  in 
the  accusative  and  ablative  singular ;  as,  arndtum,  to  love ;  amatu, 
to  be  loved.  The  supine  in  urn  is  called  the  former  supine ;  that 
in  u,  the  latter.  The  former  is  commonly  used  in  an  active,  the 
latter  in  a  passive  sense. 


CONJUGATION. 

§  149.  The  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  forma- 
tion and  arrangement  of  its  several  parts,  according  to  their 
voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

There  are  four  conjugations,  which  are  characterized  by 
the  vowel  before  re  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active. 
In  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  d  long ; 

In  the  second, e  long  ; 

In  the  third, e  short: 

In  the  fourth, i  long. 

NOTE.  Do,  dare,  to  give,  and  such  of  its  compounds  as  are  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  a  short  before  re. 

§  150.  A  verb  consists  of  two  parts — the  root,  and  the 
verbal  termination. 

1.  The  root  of  a  verb  consists  of  those  letters  which  are  not 
changed  by   inflection;  as,  am  in  amo,    a.mdbam,  umaverim, 
amatas.     This  may  be  called  the  general  root. 

2.  There   are  three  special  roots,  from  which,    by  the  ad- 
dition of  certain  terminations,   all  the  parts  of  the  verb  are 
readily  formed.     The  first  of  these  roots  is  found  in  the  present 
of  the  indicative,  and  is  the  same  as  the  general  root ;  the  sec- 
ond is  found  in  the  perfect ;  and  the  third  in  the  supine,  or  per- 
fect participle. 

3.  In  regular  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjuga- 
tions, the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding,  respectively,  dv,  ev, 
and  iv,  to  the  general  root ;  and  the  third  root  by  a  similar  ad- 
dition of  at,  it,  and  it. 

Many  verbs,  however,  in  these  three  conjugations,  form  their 
second  and  third  roots  irregularly,  as  do  almost  all  in  the  sec- 
ond, a  great  part  adding  u  and  it,  instead  of  ev  and  et. 

4.  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  second  root  either  is  the 
same  as  the  first,  or  is  formed  from  it  by  adding  s ;  the  third 
root  is  formed  by  adding  t.     See  §  171. 

8* 


90  VERBS. CONJUGATION.  §   151,  152. 

NOTE.  In  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  e  and  i  before  o  are 
considered  as  belonging  not  to  the  root,  but  to  the  termination.  In  verbs 
whose  second  or  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  general  root  often 
undergoes  some  change  in  the  parts  derived  from  them. 

5.  The  vowel  which  unites  the  general  root  with  the  remain- 
ing letters  of  the  verb,  is  called  the  connecting  vowel.  Each 
conjugation,  except  the  third,  is,  in  a  great  degree,  distinguished 
by  a  peculiar  connecting  vowel,  which  is  the  same  as  character- 
izes the  infinitives.  See  §  149. 

In  the  third  conjugation,  the  connecting  vowel  is  generally  e  or  i.  In 
the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  verbs  in  io  of  the  third,  a  sec- 
ond connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  added  to  that  which  characterizes  the 
conjugation  ;  as,  a  in  doceant,  u  in  capiunt,  &c. 

In  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  con- 
necting vowel  often  disappears,  or  is  changed  in  the  parts  derived  from 
those  roots ;  but  it  is  almost  always  found  in  the  parts  derived  from  the 
first  root. 

§  151.  1.  From  ihejirst  root  are  derived,  in  each  voice, 
the  present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative ;  the  present  and 
imperfect  subjunctive,  the  imperative,  and  the  present  infinitive 
From  this  root  are  derived  also  the  present  participle,  the  gerund, 
arid  the  future  participle  passive. 

2.  From  the  second  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative;  the  perfect 
and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 

3.  From  the  third  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
supine  in  urn,  and  the  future  participle,  the  latter  of  which,  with 
the  verb  esse,  constitutes  the  future  infinitive. 

From  this  root  are  derived,  in  the  passive  voice,  the  supine  in 
w,  and  the  perfect  participle,  from  the  latter  of  which,  with  the 
verb  sum,  are  formed  all  the  tenses  which  in  the  active  are  de- 
rived from  the  second  root.  The  future  infinitive  passive  is 
formed  from  the  supine  in  urn,  and  iriy  the  present  infinitive 
passive  of  the  verb  eoy  to  go. 

4.  The  present  and  perfect  indicative,  the  supine  in  um*  and 
the  present  infinitive,  are  called  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb, 
because  from  the  first  three  the  several  roots  are  ascertained, 
and  from  the  last,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation. 
In  the  passive  voice,  the  principal  parts  are  the  present  indica- 
tive and  infinitive,  and  the  perfect  participle. 

§  152.  The  following  table  exhibits  a  connected  view  of  the 
verbal  terminations,  in  all  the  conjugations.  By  annexing  these 
to  the  several  roots,  all  the  parts  of  a  verb  may  be  formed. 

*  As  the  supine  in  urn  is  wanting  in  most  verbs,  the  third  root  must  often  be  deter- 
mined from  the  perfect  participle,  or  the  future  participle  active. 


152. 


VERBS.  -  TERMINATIONS. 


"fiu  ml 

;§;fs~C 

f£jf 

SiiS 


IHUI 

gft(    ..-••. 


*s~sV~ 

' 


o 

k 

a 
gj 

S 

05 


i! 


P^ 

8 

s 

y 


^ 

p 

o 

^f 


H.       ^ 


"1      2 


8 
s 


b  b  fa  s        >H  t->  ...  ••» 

•^•J*"*'*'JiflS  ^j^jjjjj 


e5  ^   O  •<-«  w   4U  w  .S 

•s   •«    »,  SMM.?!*  £M          * 

V   Q)   0)   &*  trtwJirtJQ  WXUaT2J 

rtS^A  'f'f'f^  'f'ff^ 

i.2.J.gjii|  ii.»i 

«?'?*>'?  l'?^^  *zl 

-»f-^SSg«3J  Soo^^r 
ifeSfeo  ft^rfjjo'S  ^^^^eS 
1  9  <?  ?••?  ?YftJt  g  "??  •?••? 


H 
Q 

S 

a 

fc 


.s*.a".2"-3       »*  «f     - 

^  s  ^  «5      22  «r.2 

•§•§  S.-a 


mi 

sill 


•g£-g~H 

S  c  5  S 


ur, 
ur, 


ii§i 

w  o>  «« .S 


•if  13 

KU    0>    «S  .S 

»5~»S" 

ill! 

«l?i 

sfs.r 


VERBS.- 


rERMINATIONS. 


152. 


Illl 


gg 


11*1 

a  i  iJ§ 


H  .  •:« 

•a-a-jhf   gl    * 

mi  ^  i 


-1  S  5  g 
£  a)  oo    «?  «  <?-2 

M    lS  }f4    IM 

1       '       '       '      r^C 


s  s  a 

KU    <U    ip    , 


222| 
S  ID  Ml  £j 

Q)    4)    O    ?) 

?'?)?'T 


g  g  g 


I 

g 

.9 


-2 


-§g 


W 


~  03  H-j 

05     D  taJ 

5.1  M 

,3,3  ,1 


w  S'C 

<U  «    0> 

03  02     O3 

P  P     P 


A 


S  .2 

.2  S£ 

w  o>    , 


II  ? 


«  a  o 
«  &  « 

??? 
S 


»  9 


w- 


g  2        £ 

S  ,f  H 

H    v.  O 

<  2  •  .  S  •- 

2 11*  5s§ 
5  2  g-fi  we  g 

w   .^^xu   g^.2 


P-i 
P 

02 


5.2  oi  S         5.S 


S  'M  'C 
>S  a)  « 


Sg-T< 


§      .^Sl     1.1  ES 

W  III  I       I      ^r        ' 


CI|fE2figlf 

•     •     •     i     M  C  M  E    _ " 


S5 


<§>   153.  VERBS. SUM.  93 

In  analyzing  a  verb,  the  voice,  person,  and  number,  are  ascertained  by  the 
personal  terminations.  See  §  147,  3.  The  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
are,  in  general,  determined  by  the  letter  or  letters  which  intervene  between 
the  root  of  the  verb  and  those  terminations.  Thus  in  amabamus,  mus  de- 
notes that  the  verb  is  of  the  active  voice,  plural  number,  and  first  person ; 
ba  denotes  that  it  is  of  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  the  con- 
necting vowel  a  determines  it  to  be  of  the  first  conjugation.  So  in  ama- 
rem/lni,  mini  denotes  the  passive  voice,  plural  number,  and  second  person ; 
re,  the  subjunctive  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  a,  as  before,  the  first  conju- 
gation. 

Sometimes,  the  part  between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal  ter- 
mination, does  not  precisely  determine  the  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
but  only  within  certain  limits.  In  such  cases,  the  conjugation  may  be 
learned,  by  finding  the  present  tense  in  the  dictionary,  and  if  two  forma 
are  alike  in  the  same  conjugation,  they  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the 
sense.  Thus  amemus  and  docemus  have  the  same  termination ;  but,  as 
amo  is  of  the  first,  and  doceo  of  the  second  conjugation,  the  former  is  de- 
termined to  be  the  subjunctive,  the  latter  the  indicative,  present.  Regar 
may  be  either  future  indicative,  or  present  subjunctive—  leglmus  either 
present  or  perfect  indicative. 

§  153.  SUM,  I  am,  is  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  because  it 
is  used,  in  conjunction  with  participles,  to  supply  the  want  of 
simple  forms  in  other  verbs.  From  its  denoting  existence,  it 
is  sometimes  called  the  substantive  verb.  It  is  very  irregular 
in  those  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are  formed  from  the  first 
root.  Its  imperfect  and  future  tenses  seem  to  have  been 
formed  from  the  second  root  of  some  now  obsolete  verb,  and 
to  have  been,  not,  as  now,  an  imperfect  and  future,  but  a  plu- 
perfect and  future  perfect.  It  is  thus  conjugated : — 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  In/in.      Perf.  Indie.       Fut.  Part. 
Sum,  es'-se,  fu'-i,  fu-tu'-rus 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present  Tense. 

Singular.  Plural. 

i§  C  1.  sum,  /  am,  su'-mus,  we  are, 

g  <  2.  es,  t hou  art,*  es'-tis,  ye\  are, 

(Jj  (  3.  est,  he  is  ;  sunt,  they  are 

Imperfect. 

1.  e'-ram,  I  was,  e-ra'-mus,  we  were, 

2.  e'-ras,  thou  wast,  e-ra'-tis,  ye  were, 

3.  e'-rat,  he  was ;  e'-rant,  thty  were. 

*  In  the  second  person  singular  in  English,  the  plural  form  you  is  commonly  used, 
except  in  solemn  discourse  ;  as,  tu  es,  you  are. 

f  The  plural  pronoun  of  the  second  person  is  either  ye  or  you. 


94  VERBS. SUM.  $   153 

Future,     shall,  or  will. 

1.  e'-ro,  1  shall  be,  er'-I-mus,  we  shall  be, 

2.  e'-ns,  thou  wilt  be,  er'-l-tis,  ye  will  be, 

3.  e'-rit,  he  will  be ;  e'-runt,  they  will  be. 

Perfect,     have  been,  or  was. 

1.  fuM,  /  have  been,  fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been, 

2.  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  been,  fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been, 

3.  fu'-it,  he  has  been  ;  fu-e'-runt  or  -re,  they  have  been. 

Pluperfect. 

1.  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  been,  fu-e-ra/-mus,  we  had  been, 

2.  fu'-6-ras,  thou  hadst  been,  fu-e-ra/-tis,  ye  had  been, 

3.  fu'-6-rat,  he  had  been  ;  fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been. 

Future  Perfect,     shall  or  will  have. 

1.  fu'-6-ro,  /  shall  have  been,  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been. 

2.  fu'-6-ris,  thou  wUt  have  been,       fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rit,  he  loill  have  been;          fu'-S-rint,  they  will  have  been. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 
Present,     may,  or  can. 

1.  sim,  7  may  be,  si'-mus,  we  may  be, 

2.  sis,  thou  mayst  be,  si'-tis,  ye  may  be, 

3.  sit,  he  may  be  ;  sint,  they  may  be. 

Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

1.  e^-sem,  I  would  be,  es-se'-mus,  we  would  be, 

2.  es'-ses,  thou  wouldst  be,  es-se/-tis,  ye  would  be, 

3.  es'-set,  he  would  be ;  es'-sent,  they  would  be. 

Perfect. 

1.  fu^-rim,  I  may  have  been,          fu-er'-i-mus,  we  may  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  been,    fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  been, 

3.  fu'  -t-rit,  he  may  have  been  ;         fV-e-rint,  they  may  have  been. 

Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

1.  fu-is'-sem,  /  woidd  have  been,      fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  been, 

2.  fu-ip'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been,  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been, 

3.  fu-is'-set,  he  loould  have  been ;     fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been. 


154.  VERBS.  -  SUM.  95 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

2.  es,  or  es'-to,  be  thou,  es'-te,  or  es-to'-te,  be  ye, 

3.  es'-to,  let  him  be;  sun'-to,  let  them  be. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  es'-se,  to  be. 

Perfect,    fu-is'-se,  to  have  been. 

Future,    fu-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  be. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Future,    fu-tu'-rus,  about  to  be. 

Remarks. 

V  Io4«  1.  A  present  participle  ens  seems  to  have  been  anciently 
used,  and  is  now  found  in  the  compounds  absens,  prasens,  and  potens. 

2.  The  perfect  fui,  and  its  derivative  tenses,  are  formed  from  an  obsolete 
fuo,  whence  come  also  the  participle  futurus,  and  an  old  subjunctive 
present  fuam,fuas,fuat;  -  ,  -  ,fuant. 

3.  From  /i/o  are  also  derived  the  following  :  — 

3ulj.  imperf.  fo'-rem,  fo'-res,  fo'-ret;  -  ,  -  ,  fo'-rent. 
Inf.pres.         fo'-re. 

These  forms  seem  to  have  been  contracted  from  fuerern, 
<&c.,  and  fuere.  For  em  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to  essem,  but 
fore  has,  in  most  cases,  acquired  a  future  signification,  equiva- 
lent to  futurus  esse. 

4.  Siem,  sies,  siet,  for  sim,  sis,  sit,  are  found  in  ancient  writers,  as  are 
also  escit  foreriZ,  escunt  for  erunt,  tandfuverint  forfuZrint. 

5.  Like  sum  are  conjugated  its  compounds,  except  possum  , 
buiprosum  has  d  after  pro,  when  the  simple  verb  begins  with 
e;  as, 

Ind.pres.      pro'-sum,  prod'-es,  prod'-est,  &c. 
-  imperf.  prod'-e'-ram,  prod'-6-ras,  &c. 

6.  Possum  is  compounded  of  potis,  able,  and  sum.      They 
are  sometimes  written  separately,  and  then  potis  is  the  same  in 
all  genders  and  numbers.     In   composition,  is  is  omitted  in 
potis,  and  t,  as  in  other  cases,  coming  before  s,  is  changed  into 
s.     In  the  infinitive,  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  es  of  the  simple 
verb  is  dropped,  and  f  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  root. 
In  every  other   respect,  possum  is  conjugated  like  sum,  wher- 
ever it  is  found;  but  the  imperative,  and  parts  derived  from  the 
third  root,  are  wanting. 


96  VERBS.  -  FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE.         §  155. 

Pres.  Ind.        Pros.  Inf.      Perf.  Ind. 

Pos'-sum,          pos'-se,          pot'-u-i,          lean,  or  lam  able. 

INDICATIVE.  SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres  $  ^'  Pos  •sum>Pot''es>  pot'-est,  Pres.      poa'-sim,  &c. 

'  $  P.  pos'-stt-mus,  pot-es'-tis,  pos'-sunt.  Imperf.  pos'-sem,  &c. 

Imperj.      pot'-6-ram,  &c.  Perf.      pot-u'-S-rim,  &c. 

Fut.          pot'-6-ro,  &c.  Plup.     pot-u-is'-sem,  &c. 
Perf.          Pot'-u-i,&c.  INFINITIVE. 


The  following  forms  are  also  found  ;—-<potessim  and  possiem,  &c.,  for 
,  &c.  ;  potesse  for  posse;  potestur  for  potest;a.nd  possitur  for  possit. 


.    FIRST    CONJUGATION. 
ACTIVE    VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 

Pres.  liuf.        Pres.  /»/.        Per/.  Jnef.          Supine. 
A'-mo,  a-ma'-re,  a-ma'-vi,         a-ma^tum. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

Sing,  a'-mo,  Hove, 

a'-mas,  t hou  lovest, 

a'-mat,  he  loves ; 

Plur.  a-ma'-mus,  we  love,^  * 

a-ma'-tis,  ye  love, 

a'-mant,  they  love. 

Imperfect. 

Sing.   a-ma/-bam,  I  teas  loving, 

a-ma/-bas,  thou  wast  loving, 

a-ma'-bat,  he  was  loving  ; 

Plur    am-a-ba'-mus,  we  were  loving, 

am-a-ba^tis,  ye  were  loving, 

a-ma'-bant,  they  were  loving. 

Future,     shall,  or  will. 

Sing.   a-ma/-bo,  /  shall  love, 

a-ma'-bis,  thou  wilt  love% 

a-ma'-bit,  he  will  love  ; 

Plur.   a-mab'-i-mus,  we  shall  love, 

a-mab'-i-tis,  ye  will  love, 

a-ma'-bunt,  they  will  love. 


155.         VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE.  97 


Perfect,     loved,  or  have  loved. 

Sing,   a-ma'-vi, 

/  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-ti, 

thou  hast  loved, 

a-ma'-vit, 

he  has  loved; 

Plur.   a-mav'-i-mus, 

we  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-tis, 

ye  have  loved, 

am-a-ve'-runt  or  -re, 

they  have  loved. 

Pluperfect. 

Sing,   a-mav'-e-ram, 

I  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ras, 

thou  hadst  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rat, 

he  had  loved; 

Plur.   am-a-ve-ra'-mus, 

we  had  loved, 

am-a-ve-ra'-tis, 

ye  had  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rant, 

they  had  loved. 

Future  Perfect,     shall 

or  will  have. 

Sing,   a-mav'-e-ro, 

I  shall  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-ris, 

thou  wilt  have  loved. 

a-mav'-e-rit, 

he  will  have  loved; 

Plur.   am-a-ver'^i-mus, 

we  shall  have  loved, 

am-a-ver'-I-tis, 

ye  will  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rint, 

they  will  have  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  may,  or  can. 

Sing,   a'-mem,  I  may  love, 

a'-mes,  thou  mayst  love, 

a'-met,  he  may  love  ; 

Plur.    a-me^mus,  we  may  love, 

a-me'-tis,  ye  may  love, 

a'-ment,  they  may  love. 

Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

Sing,   a-ma'-rem,  /  would  love, 

a-ma'-res,  thou  wmddst  love, 

a-ma'-ret,  he  would  love  ; 

Plur.   am-a-re'-mus,  we  would  love, 

am-a-re'-tis,  ye  would  love, 

a-ma'-rent,  they  would  love. 
9 


98  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    ACTIVE.        §   155, 

Perfect. 

Sing,    a-mav'-e-rim,  I  may  have  loved, 

a-rnav'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rit,  he  may  have  loved; 

Plur.   am-a-ver'-i-mus,  we  may  have  loved, 

am-a-ver '-i-tis,  ye  may  have  loved, 

a-mav'-e-rint,  they  may  have  loved. 

Pluperfect,     mighty  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

Sing,   am-a-vis'-sem,  /  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-set,  he  would  have  loved; 

Plur.   am-a-vis-se'-mus,  we  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  loved, 

am-a-vis'-sent,  they  would  have  loved. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Sing,    a'-ma,  or  a-ma'-to,  love  thou, 

a-ma'-to,  let  him  love  ; 

Plur.    a-ma'-te,  or  am-a-to'-te,  love  ye, 

a-man'-to,  let  them  love. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present.  a-ma/-re,       •  to  love. 

Perfect,  am-a-vis'-se,  to  have  loved. 

Future,    am-a-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  love. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present,  a'-mans,  loving. 

Future,    am-a-tu'-rus,  about  to  love. 

GERUND. 

G.  a-man'-di,  of  loving, 

D.  a-man'-do,  to  or  for  loving, 

Ac.  a-man'-dum,  loving, 

Ab.  a-man'-do,  by  loving. 

SUPINE. 
Former,   a-ma'-tum,  to  love. 


156.        VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE.  99 

$156.  PASSIVE    VOICE 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 

Pres.  Indie.       Pres.  Infin.       Perf.  Part 
A'-mor,  a-ma'-ri,  a-ma'-tus. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

Present. 

a'-mor,  T  am  loved, 

a-ma'-ris  or  -re,  thou  art  loved, 

a-ma/-tur,  he  is  loved; 

Plur.  a-ma'-mur,  we  are  loved, 

a-mam'-i-ni,  ye  are  loved, 

a-man'-tur,  they  are  loved. 

Imperfect. 

Sing,  a-ma'-bar,  I  was  loved, 

am-a-ba'-ris  or  -re,  thou  wast  loved, 

am-a-ba'-tur,  he  was  loved; 

Plur.  am-a-ba'-mur,  we  were  loved, 

am-a-bam'-i-ni,  ye  were  loved, 

am-a-ban'-tur,  they  were  loved. 

Future,     shall  or  will  be. 

Sing.   a-ma'-bor,  /  shall  be  loved, 

a-mab'-e-ris  or  -re,  thou  wilt  be  loved, 

a-mab'-I-tur,  he  will  be  loved; 

Plur.  a-mab'-i-mur,  we  shall  be  loved* 

am-a-bim'-t-ni,  ye  will  be  loved, 

am-a-bun'-tur,  they  will  be  loved. 

Perfect,     have  been,  or  was. 

Sing.  a-ma/-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  /  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti,  thou  hast  been  loved, 

a-nia/-tus  est  or  fu7-it,  he  has  been  loved  ; 

Plur.  a-ma/-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been  loved, 

a-ma/-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis^  ye  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re,  they  have  been  loved. 


100  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE.       •§>   156. 

Pluperfect. 

&  a-ma'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras,  ihou  hadst  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  loved; 

P.  a-ma-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis,  ye  had  been  loved, 

a-ma/-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been  loved. 

Future  Perfect,     shall  have  been. 

S.  a-ma'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,  I  shall  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  loved  ; 

P.  a-ma/-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  e'-runtor  fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been  loved. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present,    may  or  can  be. 

Sing,  a'-mer,  /  may  be  loved, 

a-me'-ris  or  -re,  thou  mayst  be  loved, 

a-me'-tur,  he  may  be  loved ; 

Plur.  a-me'-mur,  we  may  be  loved, 

a-mem'-i-ni,  ye  may  be  loved, 

a-men'-tur,  they  may  be  loved. 

Imperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  be. 

Sing,  a-ma'-rer,  I  would  be  loved, 

am-a-re'-ris  or  -re,  thou  wouldst  be  loved, 

am-a-re'-tur,  he  would  be  loved; 

Plur.  am-a-re^mur,  we  would  be  loved, 

am-a-rem'-i-ni,  ye  would  be  loved, 

am-a-ren'-tur,  they  would  be  loved. 

Perfect. 

8.  a-ma'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  I  may  have  been  loved, 

a-maMus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris,  thou  mayst  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  been  loved; 

P.  a-ma'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  may  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been  loved. 


156.        VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,    PASSIVE. 


101 


Pluperfect,     might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  been. 


S.  a-ma/-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
a-ma'-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
a-ma'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set, 

P.  a-ma'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
a-ma'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
a-ma'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent,      ,    - 


/  would  have 
thou  wouldst  have 
he  would  have 
:weyuoul(l  have* 
have 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Sing,  a-ma'-re,  or  a-ma'-tor, 

a-ma'-tor, 
Plur.  a-mam'-i-ni, 

a-man'-tor, 


be  thou  loved, 
let  him  be  loved  ; 
be  ye  loved, 
let  them  be  loved. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-ri,  to  be  loved. 

Perfect.  a-ma/~tus  es'-se  or  fu-is^se,       to  have  been  loved. 
Future.  a-ma/-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect,  a-ma'-tus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved. 

Puture.  a-man'-dus,  to  be  loved. 


SUPINE. 
Latter,  a-ma'-tu, 


to  be  loved. 


FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES. 


derived 

Active. 

2nd.  pres.       amo, 
—  imperf.  amdbam, 
— —  fut.         amdbo, 
Subj.  pres.     aim-m, 

•  imperf.  amdrem, 
Imperat.         anid, 
Inf.  pres.        am  7  re, 
Part.  pres.     amana, 

-  ""•  fut. 
Gerund.         sanandi. 

9* 


am,  are 

From  the  second  root, 

From  the  third 

arnaVj  are  derived 

root,  amat,  are 

derived 

Passive. 

Active. 

Passive. 

am0r, 

Ind.  perf.          amavi, 

amatus  sum,  &c. 

amaAar, 

—  —  plup.         amaveram, 

amatws  eram,  &c. 

amaAor, 

'  fut.  perf.  amavZro, 

amatws  ero;  &c. 

amer, 

Subj.  perf.        amav$rim, 

amatt*s  sim,  &c. 

amarer, 

•  plup.       amavissem, 

amatws  essem,  &<x. 

&.mdref 

Inf.  perf.         amavisse, 

amatws  esse,  &c. 

aman, 

From  the  third  root, 

amandus. 

Inf.  fut.     amnt/irus  esse, 
Part.  fut.  nmaiuriis, 

amatum  iri. 

perf. 

am  at  MS 

Form.  Sup.  ainatwm. 

Lat.  Sup.  amain. 

102 


VERBS. SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


157. 


157.     SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


ACTIVE  'VOICE.  PASSIVE    VOICE. 

'<*  '    J  * '"  "  :  •        PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Mo'-ne-o, 

Pres.  Inf.  mo-ne'-re, 

Perf.  Ind.  mon'-u-i, 

Supine.  mon'-i-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  mo'-ne-or, 
Pres.  Inf.  mo-ne'-ri, 
Perf.  Part.  mon'-I-tus. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present. 


/  advise. 

Sing,  mo'-ne-o, 
mo'-nes, 
mo'-net; 

Plur.  mo-ne-mus, 
mo-ne-tis, 
mo'-nent. 


lam  advised. 


Sing.  mo;-ne-or, 

mo-ne^ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne'-tur ; 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mur, 
mo-nem'-i-ni, 
mo-nen'-tur. 


/  was  advising. 

8.  mo-ne'-bam, 
mo-ne'-bas, 
mo-ne'-bat ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mus, 
mon-e-ba'-tis, 
mone'-bant. 


Imperfect. 


I  was  advised. 


S.  mo-ne'-bar, 

mon-e-ba'-ris  or  -ref 
mon-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mur, 
mon-e-bam^i-ni, 
mon-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 
I  shall  or  will  advise.  I  shall  or  will  be  advised. 


S.  mo-ne;-bo, 
mo-ne'-bis, 
mone'-bit; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mus, 
mo-neb'-l-tis, 
mo-ne'-bunt. 


S.  mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-neb'-e-ris  or  -re, 
mo-neb'-I-tur ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mur, 
mon-e-bim-i-ni, 
moa-e-bun'-tur 


157. 


VERBS.  -  SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


103 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


Perfect. 


I  advised,  or  have  advised. 

S.  mon'-u-i, 

mon-u-is'-ti, 

mon'-u-it ; 
P.  mo-nu'-i-mus, 

mon-u-is'-tis, 

mon-u-e'-runt  or  -re. 


1  was  or  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
mon'-i-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
mon'-i-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-I-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 


/  had  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ram, 
mo-nu'-e-ras, 
mo-nu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon-u-e-ra/-mus, 
mon-u-e-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rant. 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
mon^i-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  e-ra/-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra/-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  ex-rant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


Future  Perfect. 


I  shall  have  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ro, 
mo-nu'-e-ris, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 
mon-u-er'-l-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


/  shall  have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ro  or  fu7-e-ro, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  e^rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  er'-i-musorfu-er'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 


I  may  or  can  advise. 

S.  mo'-ne-am, 
mo'-ne-as, 
mo'-ne-at ; 

P.  mo-ne-a'-mus, 
mo-ne-a'-tis, 
mo'-ne-ant. 


I  may  or  can  be  advised. 

S.  mo'-ne-ar, 

mo-ne-a'-ris  or  -re, 

mo-ne-a/-tur ; 
P.  mo-ne-a'-mur, 

mo-ne-am'-T-ni, 

mo-ne-an'-tur 


104 


VERBS. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


157. 


ACTIVE. 

Imperfect. 

Imight,  could,  would,  or 

should  advise. 
8.  mo-rie'-rem, 
mo-ne'-res, 
mo-ne'-ret ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-mus, 
mon-e-re'-tis, 
mo-ne'-rent. 


PASSIVE. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  be  advised. 
S.  mo-ne'-rer, 

mon-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-re'-tur ; 
JP.  mon-e-re'-mur, 
mon-e-rem'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ren'-tur. 


I  may  have  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nu'-e-ris, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 

P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 
nion-u-er'-i-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


Imight,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  advised. 

8.  mon-u-is'-sem, 
mon-u-is'-ses, 
mon-u-is'-set ; 

P.  mon-u-is-se'-mus, 
mon-u-is-se'-tis, 
mon-u-is'-sent. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  advised. 

8.  mon'-i-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
mon'-T-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  s-i'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
mon'-I-ti  sint  or  fu;-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

Imight,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  advised. 

S.  mon'-i-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is^sem, 
mon'-i-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
mon'-T-tus  es;-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 

P.  mon'-i-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se^tis, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-serit  or  fu-is;-sent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


advise  thou. 
S.  mo7-ne,  or  mo-ne'-to, 

mo-ne'-to ; 
P.  mone'-te,  or  mon-e-to'-te, 

raonen'-to. 


be  thou  advised. 
8  mo-ne'-re,  or  mo-ne'-tor, 

mo-ne'-tor ; 
P.  mo-nem^T-ni, 

mo-nen'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  mone'-re,  to  advise. 

Perf.  mon-u-is'-se,  to  have  ad- 
vised. 

Put.  mon-i-tQ'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 
about  to  advise 


Pres.  mo-ne'-ri,  to  be  advised. 

Perf.  mon'-i-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'- 

1  se,  to  have  been  advised. 

Put.   ^on'-i-tum    i'-ri,    to    be 

about  to  be  advised 


<§>  158. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


105 


ACTIVE. 


PARTICIPLES. 


PASSIVE. 


Pres.  mo'-nens,  advising. 
Put.    mon-i-tu'-rus,    about  to 
advise. 


Perf.  mon'-i-tus,  advised. 
Put.    mo-rien'-dus,  to  be  ad- 
vised. 


GERUND. 

G.    mo-nen'-di,  of  advising, 
D.   mo-nen'-do,  &,c. 
Ac.  mo-nen'-dum, 
Ab.  mo-nen'do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  mon'-i-tum,  to  advise.  \  Latter,  mon'-i-tu,  to  be  advised. 

FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES. 


From  the  first  root,  mow,  are 
derived, 


Ind.  pres. 

imperf. 

fut- 

Subj.  pres. 
— •  imperf. 
Imperat. 
Inf.  pres. 
Part.  pres. 

fut. 

Gerund. 


Active. 

moneo, 

monebam, 

monebo, 

moneam, 

monerem, 

moiie, 

monere, 

monens, 

monendi. 


Passive. 

mon«or, 

monebar, 

monlbor, 

monear, 

monerer, 

mon^rr, 

monen, 

monendus. 


From  the  second     From  the  third  root, 
root,  monu,  are  montt,  are 

derived,  derived, 

Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.         moniu,         moult  ws  sum,  &e. 
•  plup.        moiiu<?ram?  monJtws  eram,  &c. 

fut.  perf.  monu£ro,     monTtus  ero,  &c. 
Subj.  perf.       monu^m/i,   momtws  sim,  &e. 

"  plup.      monuissem,  monltus  essem.  «fec. 
Inf.  perf.         monuisse,    monltus  esse,  <fcc. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.     moniturus  esse,        monltum  in, 
Part.  fut.  moniturus, 
—  />«^  monfttw, 

Fomt.  Sup.  morilium.        Lot.  Sup.  monittt. 


THIRD  CONJUGATION. 
PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Re;-go, 

Pres.  Inf.  reg'-e-re, 

Perf.  Ind.  rex'-i, 

Supine.  rec7-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.      re'-gor, 
Pres.  Inf.      re'-gi, 
Perf.  Part.   rec7-tus. 


I  rule. 

Sing  re'-go, 
re'-gis, 
re'-git ; 

Plur.  reg'-i-mus^ 
reg'-T-tis, 
re'-gunt. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 

I  am  ruled. 
Sing.  re7-gor, 

reg'-e-ris  or  -re, 
reg'-i-tur ; 
Plur.  reg'-i-mur, 
re-gim'-i-ni, 
re-gun'-tur. 


106 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


158. 


ACTIVE. 

I  was  ruling. 
S.  re-ge'-bam, 

re-ge'-bas, 

re-ge'-bat ; 
P.  reg-e-ba'-mus, 

reg-e-ba'-tis, 

re-ge'-bant. 

I  shall  or  will  rule. 
S.  re'-gam, 

re'-ges, 

re'-get  ; 
P.  re-ge'-mus, 

re-ge'-tis, 

re'-gent. 

I  ruled  or  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-i, 

rex-is'-ti, 

rex'-it ; 
P.  rex'-i-mus, 

rex-is'-tis, 

rex-e'-runt  or  -re. 


I  had  ruled. 

8.  rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat ; 

P.  rex-e-ra -mus, 
rex-e-ra'-tis, 
rex'-e-rant. 


PASSIVE. 

Imperfect 

/  was  ruled. 
S.  re-ge'-bar, 

reg-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-ba'-tur ; 
P.  reg-e-ba'-mur, 
reg-e-bam;-i-ni, 
reg-e-ban7-tur. 
Future. 

/  shall  or  will  be  rukd. 
S.  re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ge'-tur ; 
P.  re-ge'-mur, 
re-gem'-i-ni, 
re-genx-tur. 

Perfect. 

/  was  or  have  been  ruled. 
&.  rec'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
rec'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
rec'-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 
P.  rec'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 

Pluperfect. 

/  had  been  ruled. 
S.  rec'-tus  e^ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
rec7-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
rec'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 
P.  rec'-ti  e-rax-mus  or  fu-e-ra -mus, 
rec'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
rec'-ti  errant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


Future  Perfect. 
/  shall  have  ruled.  I  shall  have  been  ruled. 


S.  rex'-c-ro, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex7-e-rit ; 

P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-I-tis, 
rex'-S-rint. 


S.  rec;-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, " 
rec'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 

P.  rec'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  er'rT-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec/-ti  e' -runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


<§>  158. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


107 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


I  may  or  can  rule. 
S.  re'-gam, 

re'-gas, 

re'-gat ; 
P.  re-ga'-mus, 

re-ga'-tis, 

re'-gant. 


I  may  or  can  be  ruled. 
S.  re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris  or  -re, 

re-ga'-tur ; 
P.  re-ga'-mur, 

re-gam'-i-ni, 

re-gan'-tur. 


I  mighty  could,  would,  or 

should  rule. 
S.  reg'-e-rem, 
reg'-e-res, 
reg'-e-ret ; 
P.  reg-e-re'-mus, 
reg-e-re'-tis, 
reg'-e-rent. 


1  may  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-ris, 
rex'-e-rit ; 

P.  rex-er'4-mus, 
rex-er'-i-tis, 
rex'-e-rint. 


I  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  ruled. 
S.  rex-is^sem, 

rex-is'-ses, 

rex-is'-set ; 
P.  rex-is-se'-mus, 

rex-is-se'-tis, 

rex-is'-sent. 


Imperfect. 

/  might,  could,  would,  or 

should  be  ruled. 
S.  reg^e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-ris  or  -/e, 

reg-e-re'-tur  ; 
P.  reg-e-re'-mur, 

reg-e-rem'-i-ni, 

reg-e-ren'-tur. 

Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sim   or  fu'-e-rim, 
rec;-tus   sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 
rec'-tus   sit   or  fu'-e-rit; 

P.  rec'-ti  si7-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  si'-tis  or   fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-ti  sint   or   fu'-e-rint. 

Pluperfect. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  ruled. 

S.  rec -tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
recx-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set ; 

P.  rec'-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
rec'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se^tis, 
rec'-ti  es-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


108 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


158. 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


rule  thou. 
&.  re'-ge,  or  reg'-i-to, 

reg'-i-to ; 
P.  reg'-i-te,  or  reg-i-to'-te, 

re-gun'-to. 


be  thou  ruled. 

S.  reg'-e-re,  or  reg'-i-tor, 

reg'-T-tor ; 
P.  re-gim'-i-ni, 

re-gun'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  reg'-e-re,  to  rule. 
Perf.  rex-is'-se,  to  have  ruled. 
Put,    rec-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 
about  to  rule. 


Pres.  re'-gi,  to  be  ruled. 
Perf.  rec'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se, 

to  have  been  ruled. 
Put.    rec'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about 

to  be  ruled. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  re'-gens,  ruling.  I  Perf.  rec'-tus,  ruled. 

Put.   rec-tu'-rus,  about  to  rule.  \  Put.   re-gen'-dus,  to  be  ruled. 


GERUND. 


G.  re-gen'-di,  of  ruling, 
D.   re-gen'-do,  & 
Ac.  re-gen'-dum, 
Ab.  re-gen'-do. 


SUPINES. 
Former,  rec'-tum,  to  rule.     \     Latter,  rec'-tu,  to  be  ruled. 

FORMATION  OP  THE  TENSES. 


From  the  first  root,  reg,  are 
derived, 

Active.      Passive. 
Ind.  pres.        rego,           reg<?r, 
imperf.     regebam,     regebar, 
fut.           regam,        regar, 
Subj.  pres.      regam,        regar, 
—  -  imperf.  reg&rem,     reg£rer; 
Imperat.          regc,            reg£re, 
Inf.  pres.        reglre,        regi, 
Part.  pres.      regens, 
i          fut.                            Tegendus. 
Gerund.          regendi. 

From  the  second  root,   From  the  third 
rex,  are  derived,         root,  reef,  are 
derived, 
Active.            Passive. 
Ind.  perf.         rexi,           rectws  sum,  &e. 
—  plup.         rex£ram,    rectws  eram,  &c. 
—  fut.  perf.  rex^ro,       lecius  ero,  &.C. 
iSiAft/.  perf.        rex£n"wi,     rectws  sim,  dtc. 
plup.       Texissem,   recite  essem,  &C. 
Inf.  perf.          lexisse.      Tectus  esse,  d&c. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.     rectwrMS  esse,  rectum  in, 
Part.  fut.  lecturus, 
perf.                        rectw*, 
Form.  Sup.  rectum.         Lot.  Sup.  rectti. 

159.  VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION.  109 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


$159. 

Pres.  Ind.  Ca'-pi-o,  to  take, 
Pres.  Inf.  cap'-e-re, 
Perf.  Ind.  ce'-pi, 
Supine.       c  ap'-tum . 


PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind. 


ca'-pi-or,  to  be 

taken, 
Pres.  Inf.     ca'-pi, 
Perf.  Part,  cap'-tus. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


&  ca'-pi-o, 
ca'-pis, 
ca'-pit ; 

P.  cap'-i-mus, 
cap'-i-tis, 
ca'-pi-unt. 


S.  ca'-pi-or, 

cap'-e-ris  or  -re, 

cap'-i-tur ; 
jP.  cap^i-mur, 

ca-pim^i-ni, 

ca-pi-un7-tur. 


Imperfect. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bam, 
ca-pi-e'-bas, 
ca-pi-e'-bat ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba^mus, 
ca~pi-e-ba/-tis, 
ca-pi-e'-bant. 


S.  ca-pi-e7-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba^ris  or  -re, 
ca-pi-e-ba/-tur ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba/-mur, 
ca-pi-e-bam^i-ni, 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-es, 
caA-pi-et ; 

P.  ca-pi-e'-mus, 
ca-pi-e'-tis, 
ca;-pi-ent. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-e'-ris  or  -re, 

ca-pi-ex-tur ; 
P.  ca-pi-e'-mur, 

ca-pi-em'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-en7-tur. 


The  parts  formed  from  the  second  and  third  roots  being  en- 
tirely regular,  only  a  synopsis  of  them  is  given. 


Perf.         ce;-pi. 
Plup.         cep^e-ram. 
Fut.perf.  cep'-e-ro. 
10 


Perf.         cap'-tus  sum  or  nY-i. 
Plup.         cap'-tus  ex-ram  or  fu'-" 
Put.  perf.  cap'-tus  e^ro  or  f' 


110  VERBS.  -  THIRD    CONJUGATION.  $  159. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


8.  ca'-pi-am 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at ; 

P.  ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 
ca'-pi-ant. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a/-ris  or  -re, 

ca-pi-a'-tur  j 
JP.  ca-pi-a/-mur, 

ca-pi-am'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-an'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


8.  cap'-e-rem, 
cap'-e-res, 
cap'-e-ret ; 

P.  cap-e-re^mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cap'-e-rent. 


S.  cap'-e-rer, 

cap-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
cap-e-re'-tur ; 

P.  cap-e-re^mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-e-renx-tur. 


Ptrf.  cep'-e-rim. 
Plup.  ce-pis'-sem. 


Perf.  cap'-tus  sim  or  fu;-e-rim. 
Plup.  cap'-tus  es^sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


8.  ca7-pe,  or  cap'-i-to, 

cap'-i-to ; 
P.  cap'-i-te,  or  cap-i-t6;-te, 

ca-pi-un'-to. 


S.  cap'-e-re,  or  cap'-i-tor, 

cap'-i-tor ; 
P.  ca-pim'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-un'-tor. 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  cap'-e-re. 
Perf.  ce-pis'-se. 
Put.  cap-tu'-rus  es'-se. 


Pres.  ca'-pi. 

Perf.  cap^tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se 

Fut.    cap'-tum  i'-ri. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  ca'-pi-ens. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-rus. 


Perf.  cap'-tus. 
Fut.    ca-pi-en'-dus 


GERUND. 


i-pi-en'-di,  &,c.        | 


SUPINES. 

|  Latter,  cap'-tu. 


160.  VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 


Ill 


$160.     FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  Au'-di-o, 
Pres.  Inf.  au-di'-re, 
Perf.  Ind.  au-di'-vi, 
Supine.  au-di'-tum. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-or, 
Pres  Inf.  au-di'-ri, 
Perf.  Part.  au-dl'-tus 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
Present. 


I  hear. 

S.  au'-di-o, 
au'-dis, 
au'-dit  ; 

P.  au-di'-mus, 
au-di'-tis, 
au'-di-unt. 


I  am  heard. 
S.  au'-di-or, 

au-dl'-ris  or  -re, 

au-dl'-tur ; 
P.  au-dl'-mur, 

au-dim'-i-ni, 

au-di-un'-tur. 


Imperfect. 


I  was  hearing. 

S.  au-di-e'-bam, 
au-di-e'-bas, 
au-di-er-bat  ; 

P;  au-di-e-ba/-mus, 
au-di-e-ba'-tis, 
au-di-e'-bant. 


I  was  heard. 

S.  au-di-e'-bar, 

au-di-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-e-ba/-tur ; 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mur, 
au-di-e-bam'-i-ni, 
au-d  i-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


I  shall  or  will  hear. 
S.   aiF-di-am, 

au'-di-es, 

au'-di-et ; 
P.  au-di-e'-mus, 

au-di-e^tis, 

au'-di-ent 


/  shall  or  will  be  heard, 
S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-e'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-e'-mur, 
au-di-em'-i-ni, 
au-di-en'-tur 


112 


VERBS.  -  FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


160. 


ACTIVE. 


I  heard  or  have  heard. 

S.  au-dF-vi, 

au-di-vis'-ti, 

au-dl'-vit ; 
P.  au-div'-i-mus, 

au-di-vis'-tis, 

au-di-ve'-runt  or  -re. 


1  had  heard. 

&  Im-div'-e-ram, 
au-div'-e-ras, 
au-div'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-di-ve-ra/-mus, 
au-di-ve-ra/-tis, 
au-div'-e-rant. 


PASSIVE. 


Periect. 


/  shall  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-ro, 
au-div'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


I  have  been  or  was  heard. 

S.   au-dF-tus  sum  or  fux-i, 
au-dF-tus  es  or  fu-is7-ti, 
au-dF-tus  est  or  fu  -it ; 

P.  au-di'-ti  su^mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
au-di'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
au-dr7-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re 


Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  heard. 

S.   au-dF-tus  e'-ram  or  fV-e-ram, 
au-dF-tus  e'-ras  or  fV-e-ras, 
au-dF-tus  e;-rat  or  fu7-e-rat ; 

P.  au-dF-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra/-mus, 
au-dF-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra/-tis, 
au-dF-ti  errant  or  fu'-e-rant. 


Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  heard. 

S.  au-dF-tus  e -ro  or  ftF-e-ro, 
au-dF-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-di  -tus  e;-rit  or  fu;-e-rit ; 

P.  au-dF-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
au-dF-ti  er^i-tis  or  fu-er^i-tis, 
au-dF-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint. 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 


Present. 


1  may  or  can  hear. 

S.  au'-di-am, 
au-di-as, 
au'-di-at ; 

P.  au-di-a'-mus, 
au-di-a'-tis, 
au'-di-ant. 


I  may  or  can  be  heard 
S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-a'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-a/-tur; 
P.  au-di-a'-mur, 

au-di-am'-i-ni, 

au-di-an;-tur 


160. 


VERBS.  -  FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


113 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


1  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  hear. 
S.  au-dF-rem, 
au-dF-res, 
au-dF-ret ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mus, 
au-di-re'-tis, 
au-dF-rent. 


Imperfect. 

I 


might,   could,   would,  or 

should  be  heard. 
S.  au-dF-rer, 

au-di-re'-ris  or  -re, 

au-di-re'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mur, 

au-di-rem'-i-ni, 

au-di-ren'-tur. 


'I may  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-rim, 
au-div'-e-ris, 
au-div'-e-rit ; 

jP.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-ver'-i-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


Perfect. 

I  may  have  been  heard. 

S.  au-dF-tus  sim   or   fu'-e-rim, 
au-dF-tus   sis    or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-dF-tus   sit   or  fu;-e-rit ; 

P.  au-dF-ti  si'-mus   or  fu-er'-l-mus, 
au-dF-ti  six-tis   or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
au-dF-ti    sint   or  fiF-e-rint. 


I  might,  could,  would, 
or  should  have  heard. 
S.  au-di-vis'-sem, 
au-di-vis'-ses, 
au-di-vis'-set ; 
P.  au-di-vis-se'-mus, 
au-di-vis-se'-tis, 
au-di-vis'-sent. 


Pluperfect. 

I  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
have  been  heard. 

S.  au-dF-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
au-dF-tus  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
au-dF-tus  es'-set  or  fil-is'-set ; 

jP.  au-dF-ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
au-dF-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
au-dF-ti  es;-sent  or  fu-is'-sent. 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


hear  thou. 
S.  au;-di,  or  au-dF-to, 

au-dF-to  ; 

P.  au-dF-te,  or  au-di-to'-te, 
au-di-un'-to. 
10* 


be  thou  heard. 
S.  au-dF-re,  or  au-dF-tor, 

au-dF-tor ; 
P.  au-dim'-i-ni, 

au-di-un'-tor 


114 


VERBS. FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


$161. 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  au-di'-re,  to  hear. 
Perf.  au-di-vis'-se,      to     have 

heard. 
Put.    au-di-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be 

about  to  hear. 


Pres.  au-di'-ri,  to  be  heard. 
Perf.  au-di'-tus  es'-se  or  fu  is'- 

se,  to  have  been  heard. 
Put.    au-di'-tum  i'-ri,     to     be 

about  to  be  heard. 


PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  au'-di-ens,  hearing.  \Perf.  au-di'-tus,  heard. 

Put.  au-di-tu'-rus,  about  to  hear.  I  Put.    au-di-en'-dus,  to  be  heat  d. 

GERUND. 

G.    au-di-en'-di,  of  hearing, 
D.    au-di-en'-do,  &c. 
Ac.  au-di-en'-dum, 
Ab.  au-di-en'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  au-di'-tum,  to  hear.   \  Latter,  au-dl'-tu,  to  be  heard. 

FORMATION  OF  THE  TENSES. 


From  the  first  root,  and,  are     From  the  second  root, 

From   the    third 

derived, 

audiv,  are  derived, 

root,    audit,    are 

derived, 

Active.    Passive. 

Active. 

Passive. 

Ind.  pres.       audio,        audior, 

Ind.  perf.         audlvi, 

audlius  sum,  &c. 

—  —  imperf.    audiebam,  audiebar, 

i    plup.         audiv  &ram, 

auditz*s  eram,  &c. 

-—  fut.          audiam,     audzar, 
Subj.  pres.      audiam,     audiar, 

fut.  perf.  audiv£ror 
Subj.  perf.       audiv£rz77t; 

auditras  ero;  &c. 
audittis  sim,  &c. 

—  —  imperf.  audirem,    audirer, 

plup.       audivissem, 

auditus  essem,  &c. 

Jmperot.          audi,          audire, 

Inf.  perf.          audivisse. 

auditus  esse,  &c. 

Inf.  pres.        audire,      audm, 
Part.  pres.      audiens 

From  the  third  root, 

—  —  —  fut.                         audiendus. 

Inf.  fut.      auditurus  esse 

,  audlium  iri, 

Onrund*          audiendi. 

Part.  fut.    auditurus, 

perf. 
Form.  Sup.  audlium. 

audltws, 
Lot.  Sup.  audltw. 

DEPONENT  VERBS. 

Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  passive 
voice,  and  have  also  all  the  participles  and  participial  forma- 
tions of  the  active  voice.  Neuter  deponent  verbs,  however, 


§   161.  DEPONENT    VLRBS.  115 

want  the  future  passive  participle,  except  that  the  neuter  in 
dum  is  sometimes  used  impersonally. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  active  deponent  verb  of 
the  first  conjugation  : — 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 
Mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ri,  mi-ra'-tus,  to  admire. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mirror,  mi-ra'-ris,  &c.  /  admire,  &c. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-bar,  &,c.  I  was  admiring. 

Put.  mi-ra'-bor,  /  shall  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra/-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  I  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  admired. 

Fut.  perf.  mi-ra/-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,        /  shall  have  admired 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.      mi'-rer,  mi-re'-ris,  &,c.  /  may  admire,  &c. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-rer,  /  would  admire. 

Perf.     mi-ra/-tus  sim  or  nY-e-rim,  I  may  have  admired. 

Plup.     mi-ra'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  /  would  have  admired 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 
mi-ra/-re,  or  mi-raptor,  admire  thou,  &c. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  mi-ra/-ri,  to  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra/-tus  esse  or  fu-is'-se,  to  have  admired. 

Fut.  act.  mir-a-tu'-rus  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  pass,  mi-ra'-tum  ix-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  admired. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Pres.  mi^rans,  admiring. 

Perf.  mi-ra/-tus,  having  admired. 

Fut.  act.  mir-a-tu'-rus,  about  to  admire. 

Fut.  pass,  mi-ran'-dus,  to  be  admired. 

GERUND. 
G.  mi-ran'-di,  of  admiring,  &,c. 

SUPINES. 
Farmer,  mi-ra'-tum,  to  admire.  — Latter,  mi-ra'-tu,  to  be  admired 


116  VERBS. REMARKS    ON    THE    CONJUGATIONS.       §162. 


REMARKS  ON  THE   CONJUGATIONS. 
Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  First  Root. 

§  1G2*  1.  A  few  words  in  the  present  subjunctive  of  the  first  and 
third  conjugations,  in  the  earlier  writers,  end  in.  im ;  as,  edim  for  edam, 
duim  for  dem  (from  an  old  form,  duo},  creduim  and  perduim  for  credam  and 
perdam.  This  was  retained  as  the  regular  form  in  sim  and  velim,  from 
sum  and  volo,  and  in  their  compounds. 

2.  The  imperfect  indicative  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  sometimes,  espe- 
cially in  the  more  ancient  writers,  ends  in  ibam  and  ibar,  for  iebam  and 
iebar,  and  the  future  in  ibo  and  ibor,  for  iam  and  iar  ;  as,  vestlbam,  larglbar, 
for  vestiebam,  largi&bar ;  scibo,  opperibor,  for  sciam,  opperiar.     Ibam  and 
iZu>r  were  retaineid  as  the  regular  forms  of  eo,  ^weo,  and  nequeo    §  182. 

3.  The  termination  re,  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  passive 
voice,  is  rare  in  the  present,  but  common  in  the  other  simple  tenses. 

4.  The  imperatives  of  dico,  duco,  facto,  and/ero,  are  usually  written  die, 
due,  faCj  and  fer  ;  in  like   manner  their  compounds,  except  those  com- 
pounds offacio  which  change  a  into  i.     Scio  has  not  sci,  but  scito. 

5.  In  the  second  person  of  the  imperative  passive,  an  ancient  form  in 
mino  in  the  singular,  and  minor  in  the  plural,  is  very  rarely  found ;  as, 
famtno  for  fare,  progredimlnor  for  progredimlni. 

G.  The  syllable  er  was  often  addec  to  the  present  infinitive  passive  by 
the  early  poets ;  as,  amarier  for  ar/ulri,  dicier  for  did. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Second  Root. 

7.  "W  hen  the  second  root  ends  in  v,  a  syncopation  often  occurs  in  the 
tenses  formed  from  it,  by  omitting  v,  with  the  first  vowel  of  the  termina- 
tion, when  followed,  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  by  s,  and  in  the  other 
conjugations,  by  s  or  r ;  as,  audissem  for  audivissem,  amdsti  for  amavisti, 
impitrunt  for  impleverunt,  noram  and  ntissefor  noveram  and  novisse. 

When  the  second  root  ends  in  iv,  v  alone  is  often  omitted :  as,  audiero 
for  audivero  ;  audiisse  for  audimsse. 

When  this  root  ends  in  s  or  x,  the  syllables  is,  iss,  and  sis,  are 
sometimes  omitted  in  the  termination  of  tenses  derived  from  it ;  as,  evasti 
for  evasisti,  extinxti  for  extinxisti,  divisse  for  divisisse  ;  extinxem  for  extinx- 
issem,  vurrexe  for  surrexisse  ;  accestis  for  accessistis,  justi  for  jussisti.  So 
frjLtm  for  (facsissem,)  fccissem. 

S.  In  the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  form  in 
Ire  is  less  common  than  that  in  erunt,  especially  in  prose. 

9.  Ancient  forms  of  a  future  perfect  in  so,  and  a  perfect  subjunctive  in 
sim,  sometimes  occur.  They  may,  in  general,  be  formed  by  adding  these 
terminations  to  the  second  root  of  the  verb ;  as,  recepso,  emissim.  But 
when  the  root  ends  in  x,  and  frequently  when  it  ends  in  s,  only  o  and  im 
are  added;  as,  jusso,  dixis.  F,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  is  changed  into  s; 
as,  levasso,  locassim.  U,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  is  changed  into  esso;  as, 
habesso.  Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  present  is  retained  in  these  forms, 
though  changed  in  the  other  parts  derived  from  the  second  root;  as, 
capso,  faxo  (facso) ,  faxim  (facsim). 

NOTE.  Faxo  and  faxim,  sometimes  have  the  meaning  of  the  future 
tense. 


<§>   162.    VERBS. REMARKS    ON    THE    CONJUGATIONS.  117 

10.  A  future  infinitive  in  sSre  is  also  sometimes  found,  which  is  formed 
by  adding  that  termination  to  the  second  root,  changing,  aa  before,  v  into  5; 
as,  impetrassere  for  impetraturus  esse. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Third  Root. 

11.  The  supine  in  tim,  though  called  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the 
verb,  belongs  in  fact  to  very  few  verbs,  the  whole  number  which  have  su- 
pines not  amounting  to  three  hundred.     The  part  called  in  dictionaries  the 
supine  in  urn  must  therefore,  in  most  cases,  be  considered  as  the  neuter 
gender  of  the  perfect  participle. 

12.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods, 
the  participle  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  but  it  is  used  in  both  num- 
bers, and  in  all  genders,  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  gender  of  the 
subject  of  the  verb ;  as,  amatus,  -a,  -wra,  est ;  amdti,  -#,  -a,  suntj  &c. 

Fui,  fueram,  fuerim,  and  fuissem,  are  seldom  used  in  the  compound 
tenses  of  deponent  verbs,  ana  not  so  often  as  sum,  &c.,  in  those  of  other 
verbs,  but  they  express  more  emphatically  than  the  latter  the  completion 
of  the  action.  Tn  the  pluperfect  subjunctive,/orera,  fyc.t  for  essem,  <^c.,  are 
sometimes  found. 

13.  The  participles  in  the  perfect  and  future  infinitive,  are  used  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative,  but  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers  j  as, 
amatus,  -at  -urn,  esse  or  fuisse  ;  amatum,  -am,  -Mm,  esse  or  fuisse  ;  amati, 
-ff,  -a,  esse  or  fuisse;  amdtos,  -as,  -a,  esse  01  fuisse  ;  and  so  of  the  others. 

But  these  participles  in  this  combination  with  esse,  are  sometimes  used 
as  indeclinable  ;  as,  cohortes  ad  me  missum  facias.  Cic. 

Periphrastic  Conjugations. 

14.  The  participle  in  rus,  joined  to  the  tenses  of  the  verb  sum, 
denotes  intention,  or  being  upon  the  point  of  doing  something. 
Hence  arises  what  is  called  the  periphrastic  conjugation. 

INDICATIVE. 

amaturus  sum,  J  am  about  to  love. 

amaturus  eram,  /  was  about  to  love. 

amaturus  ero,  /  shall  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fui,  /  was  or  have  been  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fueram,  /  had  been  about  to  love. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

amaturus  sim,  /  may  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  essem,  I  would  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuerim,  /  may  have  been  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuissem,  I  would  have  been  about  to  love 

INFINITIVE. 

amaturus  esse,  to  be  about  to  love. 

amaturus  fuisse,        to  have  been  about  to  love. 


118  VERBS. REMARKS    ON    THE    CONJUGATIONS.  §  162. 

Fwtro  is  not  found  joined  with  the  participle  in  rus. 

15.  The  participle  in  dus,  with  the  verb  sum,  expresses  neces- 
sity or  propriety ;  as,  amandus  sum,  I  must  be  loved,  or  deserve 
to  be  loved.  With  the  various  moods  and  tenses  of  sum,  it  forms 
a  second  periphrastic  conjugation  ; — thus  : 


amandus  sum, 
amandus  eram, 
amandus  ero, 
amandus  fui, 
amandus  fueram, 
amandus  fuero. 


amandus  sim, 
amandus  essem, 
amandus  fuerim, 
amandus  fuissem, 
amandus  esse, 
amandus  fuisse. 


Participles. 

16.  Neuter  verbs,  as  they  want  the  passive  voice,  have  usually  only  the 
participles  of  the  active.     Some  of  them,  however,  have  perfect  participles, 
of  which  a  part  are  to  be  translated  passively,  others  by  past  participles  of 
English  neuter  verbs.     Such  are  adultus,  cessdtus,  clamdtus,  coalUus,  con- 
crttus,  defectus,  dejlagrdtus,  emersus,  errdtus,  interUus,  obUus,  occdsus,  pla- 
cltus,  redunddtuSj  regndtuSj  requisites,  suddtus,  suetus,  triumphdtus,  ululdtus} 
vigildtus. 

The  following  perfect  participles,  from  verbs  which  are  sometimes  active, 
are  also  translated  by  active  participles : — c&ndtus,  having  supped ;  potus, 
having  drunk ;  pransus,  having  dined  5  and  sometimes  jurdtus,  having 
sworn. 

Some  neuter  verbs,  also,  have  future  passive  participles ;  as,  dormiendus, 
errandus,  regnandus,  vigilandus,  &c. 

NOTE.  Most  passive  participles  of  neuter  verbs  are  indicated  in  the  lists 
which  follow. 

For  the  active  meaning  of  osus  and  its  compounds,  see  §  183, 1. 

17.  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponent  verbs  have  both  an  active 
and  a  passive  sense ;  as,  adeptus  libertdtem,  having  obtained  liberty,  or 
adeptd  libertdte,  liberty  having  been  obtained. 

So  abominatus,  comitdtus,  commentdtus,  complexus,  confessus,  contestdtus, 
detestdtus,  digndtus,  dimensus,  emensus,  ementltus,  emeritus,  expertus,  exse- 
crdtus,  interpretdtus,  largltus,  machindtus,  meditdtus,  mercdtus,  metdtus, 
oblltus,  orsus,  pactus,  partltus,  perfunctus,  pollicitus,  testdtus,  venerdtus, 
ultus.  The  participle  in  dus,  of  dep.  verbs  is  commonly  passive. 

13.  The  participles  of  neuter  passive  verbs  have  the  signification  of  the 
active  voice ;  as,  gavlsus,  having  rejoiced.  (See  in  lists.) 

But  ausus  is  used  both  in  an  active  and  passive  sense  ;  as,  ausi  omnes 
immdne  nefas,  ausoque  potlti.  Virg. 

19.  The  genitive  plural  of  participles  in  rm  is  seldom,  used,  except  that 
offuturus.     Venturorum  is  found  in  Ovid,  Met.  15,  835. 

20.  In  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  the  future  passive  participle 
sometimes  ends  in  undus,  especially  when  i  precedes.    Potior  has  usually 
potiundus.    In  these  conjugations  the  gerund  also  has  sometimes  undit  &c. 

21.  Many  present  and  perfect  participles  are  compounded  with  in,  sig- 


<§>   163.  VERBS. RULES    OF    CONJUGATION.  119 

nifying  not,  whose  verbs  do  not  admit  of  such  composition ;  they  thus  be- 
come adjectives  ;  as,  insciens,  ignorant ;  imparatus,  unprepared. 

22.  Participles,  when  they  do  not  express  distinctions  of  time,  become 
adjectives,  and  as  such  are  compared  ;  as,  amans,  loving ;  amantior,  aman- 
tisslmus.  In  some  instances,  they  become  substantives ;  as,  prafectus,  a 
commander. 

NOTE.  Many  words  derived  from  substantives,  with  the  terminations 
of  participles,  atus,  itits,  and  utus,  are  yet  adjectives ;  as,  alatus,  winged  • 
turrltus,  turreted,  &c.  See  §  128,  7. 

GENERAL  RULES  OF  CONJUGATION. 

§  163.  1.  Verbs  which  have  a  in  the  first  root  have  it 
also  in  the  third,  though  it  be  changed  in  the  second  ;  as,  fa- 
cio,  factum  ;  habeo,  habitum. 

2.  The  connecting  vowel  is  often  omitted  in  the  second  root, 
and  in  such  cases,  if  v  follows,  it  is  changed  into  u.     This 
happens  in  most  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

REMARK.  Some  verbs  prefix  to  the  second  root  their  initial 
consonant,  with  the  vowel  which  follows  it,  or  with  e;  as,  curro, 
cucurri ;  folio,  fefelli.  This  prefix  is  called  a  reduplication. 
Spondeo  and  sto  lose  s  in  the  second  syllable,  making  spopondi 
and  steti.  For  the  verbs  that  take  a  reduplication,  see  §§  165, 
168,  and  171,  Exc.  1,  (b.) 

3.  Verbs  which  want  the  second  root  want  also  the  third. 

4.  Compound  verbs  form  their  second  and  third  roots  like 
the  simple  verbs  of  which  they  are  compounded;  as,  audio , 
audivi,  auditum ;  exaudio,  exaudwi,  exauditum. 

Some  compound  verbs,  however,  are  defective,  whose  simples  are  com- 
plete, and  some  are  complete,  whose  simples  are  defective. 

Exc.  1.  Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication;  but  the 
compounds  of  do,  sto,  disco,  posco,  and  some  of  those  of  curro, 
retain  it. 

Exc.  2.  Verbs  which,  in  composition,  change  a  into  e  in  the 
first  root,  (see  §  189,  2,)  retain  e  in  the  second  and  third  roots 
of  the  compound ;  as,  scando,  scandi,  scansum ;  descendo,  de- 
scendi,  descensum. 

Exc.  3.  When  a,  &,  or  e,  in  the  first  root  of  the  simple  verb, 
is  changed  in  the  compound  into  i,  the  same  is  retained  in  the 
second  and  third  roots,  in  case  the  third  root  of  the  simple  is  a 
dissyllable;  as,  habco,  habui,  habitum;  prohibeo, prohibui, pro- 
hibitum. 

But  if  the  third  root  is  a  monosyllable,  the  second  root  of  the 
compound  has  usually  the  same  vowel  as  that  of  the  simple, 


120 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.     [1  CONJ. 


but  sometimes  changes  a  or  e  into  i,  and  the  third  root  has  e ;  as, 
facio,  fed,  factum  ;  conficio,  confeci,  confectum  ;  teneo,  tenui, 
tentum ;  retineo,  rctinui,  retentum ;  rapio,  abripio,  -rip,  -rept. 

NOTE.     The  compounds  of  cado,  ago,  frango,  pango,  and  tango,  retain 
a,  and  those  of  salio  retain  u,  in  the  third  root. 

Exc.  4.  Compounds  of  pario,  and  some  of  do  and  culo,  are  of  different 
conjugations  from  their  simple  verbs. 

A  few  other  exceptions  will  be  noticed  in  the  following  lists. 

FORMATION  OF  SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


FIRST   CONJUGATION. 

§  164.  In  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  the  second 
root  ends  in  dv,  and  the  third  in  at;  as,  amo,  amav/,  amatwm. 
The  following  list  contains  such  regular  verbs  of  this  conjuga- 
tion as  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence. 

NOTE.  In  this  and  the  subsequent  lists,  those  verbs  which  are  marked 
*  are  said  to  have  no  perfect  participle ;  those  marked  t  to  have  no  pres- 
ent participle.  A  dash  ( — )  after  the  present,  denotes  that  there  is  no  sec- 
ond root.  The  participles  in  rus  and  dus,  and  the  supines  in  um  and  u 
which  are  in  use,  are  indicated  respectively  by  the  letters  r.,  d.y  m.,  and  w. 
Abundo,  for  example,  has  no  perfect  participle,  no  supine,  no  participle  in 
dus;  but  it  has  a  present  participle,  and  a  participle  in  rus. 

In  the  lists  of  irregular  verbs,  those  compounds  only  are  given,  whose 
conjugation  differs  from  that  of  their  simples. 

When  p.  is  subjoined  to  a  deponent  verb,  it  denotes  that  some  of  the 
parts  which  have  commonly  an  active  meaning,  are  used  either  actively  and 
passively,  or  passively  alone.  Such  verbs  are  by  some  grammarians  call- 
ed common. 


*Abundo,  r.  to  overflow. 

Accuso,  m.  r.  d.  to  ac- 
cuse. 

t  Adumbro,  to  delineate. 

,/EdifIco,  r.  d.  to  build. 

/Equo  r.  d.  to  level. 

jEstimo,  r.  d.  to  value. 

*Ambulo,  m.  d.  to  walk. 

Amo,  r.  d.  to  love. 

tAmplio,  d.  to  enlarge. 

Appello,  d.  to  call. 

Apto,  d.  to  fit. 

Aro,  r.  d.  to  plough. 

*t  Ausculto,  to  listen. 

*t  Autumo,  to  suppose. 

tBasio,  — ,  d.  to  kiss. 

*Bello,  m.  r.  d.  to  wage 
war. 

tBeo,  to  bless. 

*Boo,  to  bellow. 


tBrevio,  to  shorten. 

tCaeco,  to  blind. 

tCselo,  to  carve. 

tCalceo,  d.  to  shoe. 

*tCalcitro,  to  kick. 

Canto,  m.  to  sing. 

Capto,  m.  r.  d.  tosieze. 

tCastlgo,  m.  d.  to  chas- 
tise. 

Celebro,  d.  to  celebrate. 

Celo,  d.  to  conceal. 

Gesso,  d.  to  cease. 

Certo,  r.  d.  to  strive. 

Clamo,  to  shout. 

Cogito,  d.  to  think. 

Compare,  d.  to  compare. 

Concilio,  r.  d.  to  recon- 
cile. 

Considgro,  r.  d.  to  con- 


demo,  d.  to  burn. 
concre"mo,  r. 

tCreo,  r.  d.  to  create. 

Crucio,  d.  to  torment. 

Culpo,  r.  d.  to  blame. 

tCuneo,  d.  to  wedge. 

Curo,  r.  d.  to  care. 

Damno,  m.  r.  d.  to  con 
demn. 

Decoro,  d.  to  adorn. 

*tDelineo,  to  delineate 

Desidero,    r.  d.  to  de- 
sire. 

Destine,  d.  to  design. 

Dico,  m.  r.  d.  to  dedi- 
cate. 

Dicto,  to  dictate. 

IDolo,  to  hew. 

Dono,  r.  d.  to  bestow. 

Duplico  r.  d.  to  double* 


I   CONJ.]        VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


121 


Duro,  r.  to  harden. 

tEffigio,  to  portray. 

Equito,  to  ride. 

tEnucleo,  to  explain. 

Erro,  to  wander. 

ExistmiOjU.r.d.  to  think. 

Explore,  m.  d.  to  search. 

Exulo,  m.  r.  to  be  ban- 
ished. 

Fabrico,  d.  to  frame. 

tFatlgo,  r.  d.  to  weary. 

Festlno,  r.  to  hasten. 

Firmo,r.d.to  strengthen. 

Flagito,m.d.  to  demand. 

*Flagro,  r.  to  be  on  fire. 
conflagro,  r. 
deflagro. 

Flo,  d.  to  blow. 

Formo,  r.  d.  to  form. 

Foro,  d.  to  bore. 

tFrseno,  to  bridle. 

tFraudo,  d.  to  defraud. 

tFrio,  — ,  to  crumble. 

Fugo,  r.  d.  to   put  to 
flight. 

1  Fun  do,  r.  to  found. 

tFurio,  — ,  to  madden. 

\  Galeo,  — ,  to  put  on  a 
helmet. 

Gesto,  d.  to  bear. 

Glacio,  — ,  to  congeal. 

Gravo,    d.    to    weigh 
down. 

Gusto,  d.  to  taste. 

Hablto,  m.  d.  to  dwell. 

*Halo,  — ,  to  breathe. 

Hiemo,  m.  to  winter. 

*Hio,  d.  to  gape. 

tHumo,  r.  d.  to  bury. 

Jacto,  r.  d.  to  throw. 

[gnoro,  r.  d.  to  be  igno- 
rant. 

Impero,  r.  d.    to   com- 
mand. 

tlmpetro,  r.  d.  to  obtain. 

Inchoo,  r.  to  begin. 
_ndago,  r.  d.  to   trace 
out. 

.  ndico,  m.  r.  d.  to  show. 

tlnebrio,  — ,  to  inebri- 
ate. 

Initio,  to  initiate. 

Inqumo,  to  pollute. 

Instauro,  d.  to  renew. 

Intro,  r.  d.  to  enter. 

Invlto,  d.  to  invite. 

Irrlto,  r.  d.  to  irritate. 
11 


Itero,  u.  d.  to  do  again. 
Judlco,  r.  d.  to  judge. 
Jugo,  d.  to  couple. 
Jugulo,  m.  d.  to  butcher. 
Juro,  d.  to  swear. 
Laboro,  r.  d.  to  labor. 
Lacero,  d.  to  tear. 
*Lacto,  to  suckle. 
tLanio,  d.  to  butcher. 
Latro,  to  bark. 
Laudo,  r.  d.  to  praise. 
Laxo,  d.  to  loose. 
tLego,  to  depute. 
Levo,  r.  d.  to  lighten. 
Libero,  r.  d.  to  free. 
Libo,  d.  to  pour  out. 
Ligo,  to  bind. 
tLiquo,  d.  to  melt. 
Lito,  to  appease. 
Loco,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Lustro,  d.  to  survey. 
Luxurio,  to  abound. 
Mac  to,  d.  to  slay. 
Maculo,  to  stain. 
Mando,r.d.to  command. 
Mandaco,  to  chew. 
*Mano,  to  flow. 
Maturo,  d.  to  ripen. 
Memoro,  u.  d.  to  tell. 
*Meo,  to  go. 
*Migro,u.  r.  d.  to  depart. 
*Milito,  m.  r.  to  serve  in 

war. 

tMinio,  d.  to  paint  red. 
Ministro,  d.  to  serve. 
Mitigo,  d.  to  pacify. 
Monstro,  r.  to  show. 

tdemonstro,  d. 
Muto,  r.  d.  to  change. 
Narro,  r.  d.  to  tell. 
Nato,  m.  r.  to  swim. 
tNavigo,  r.  d.  to  sail. 
Navo,  r.  d.  to  perform. 
*Nauseo,  to  loathe. 
Nego,  m.  r.  d.  to  deny. 
*No,  to  swim. 
Nommo,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Noto,  d.  to  mark. 
Novo,  r.  d.  to  renew. 
Nudo,  d.  to  make  bare. 
Nuncupo,  r.  d.  to  name. 
Nuntio,  m.  r.  to  tell. 

renuntio,  d. 
*Nuto,  r.  to  nod. 
Obsecro,m.  r.  d.  to  beseech. 
Obtrunco,  r.  to  kill. 
Onero,  r.  d.  to  load. 


Opto,  d.  to  wish. 

tOrbo,  r.  to  deprive, 

Orno,  r.  d.  to  adorn. 

Oro,  m.  r.  d.  to  beg. 

Paco,  d.  to  subdue. 

Paro,  r.  d.  to  prepare. 

Patro,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

*Pecco,  r.  d.  to  sin. 

tPio,  d.  to  propitiate. 

Placo,  r.  d.  to  appease. 

Ploro,  m.  d.  to  bewail. 

Porto,  u.  r.  d.  to  carry. 

Postulo,  m.  r.  d.  to  de- 
mand. 

Privo,  d.  to  deprive. 

Probo,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ap- 
prove. 
comprobo,  m. 

Profllgo,  d.  to  rout. 

Propero,  d.  to  hasten. 

*tPropino,  to  drink  to. 

Propitio,  d.  to  appease. 

Pugno,  r.  d.  to  fight. 

Pulso,  d.  to  beat. 

Purgo,  u.r.  d.  to  cleanse 

Puto,  d.  to  think. 

Quasso,  d.  to  shake. 

Radio,  to  emit  rays. 

Rapto,  d.  to  drag. 

Recupgro,  m.  r.  d.   to 
recover. 

Recuso,  r.  d.  to  refuse. 

Redundo,  to  overflow. 

Regno,  r.  d.  to  rule. 

tRepudio,  r.  d.  to  reject. 

Resero,  d.  to  unlock. 

*tRetalio,  — ,  to  retali- 
ate. 

Rigo,  to  water. 

Rogo,  m.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Roto,  to  whirl. 

Sacrifico,m.j'o  sacrifice. 

Sacro,  d.  to  consecrate. 

tSaglno,  d.  to  fatten. 

Salto,  r.  to  dance. 

Saluto,  m.  r.  d.  to  salute* 

Sano,  r.  d.  to  heal. 

Satio,  to  satiate. 

tSatiiro,  to  fill. 

Saucio,  d.  to  wound. 

*Secundo,  to  prosper. 

Sedo,  m.  d.  to  allay. 

Servo,  r.  d.  to  keep. 

*tSib!lo,  to  hiss 

Sicco,  d.  to  dry. 

Signo,  r.  d.  to  mark  out. 
assigno,  m. 


122 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.   [1  CONJ. 


Simulo,  r.  d.  to  pretend. 

Socio,  d.  to  associate. 

*Somnio,  to  dream. 

Specto,  m.  r.  d.  to  be- 
hold. 

Spero,  r.  d.  to  hope. 

*Spiro,  to  breathe. 
conspire, 
exsplro,  r. 
susplro,  d. 

Spolio,  m.  d.  to  rob. 

Spumo,  to  foam. 

.Stillo,  to  drop. 

Stimulo,  to  goad. 

Stipo,  to  stuff. 

Sudo,  to  sweat. 

Suffoco,  to  strangle. 

Sugillo,  d.  to  taunt. 

Supero,  r.  d.   to   over- 
come. 

Suppedito,  to  afford. 


"SupplTco,  m.  to   sup- 
plicate. 

*Susurro,  to  whisper. 

Tardo,  to  delay. 

Taxo,  d.  to  rate. 

Terngro,  d.  to  defile. 

Tempero,  r.  d.  to  tem- 
per. 
obtempgro,  r.  to  obey. 

Tento,  m.  r.  d.  to  try. 

Terebro,  to  bore. 

Termino,  r.  d.  to  limit. 

Titubo,  to  stagger. 

TolSro,  u.  r.  d.  to  bear. 

Tracto,  u.  d.  to  handle. 

*tTripudio,  to  dance. 

Triumpho,    r.    to    tri- 
umph. 

Trucido,  r.  d.  to  kill. 

Turbo,  d.  to  disturb. 

*Vaco,  to  be  at  leisure. 


*Vapulo,  m.  d.  to  be 
beaten. 

Vario,  to  diversify. 

Vasto,  d.  to  lay  waste. 

Vellico,  to  pluck. 

Verbero,  r.  d.  to  beat. 

*  Vestigo,  to  search  for. 

Vexo,  d.  to  tease. 

Vibro,  d.  to  brandish. 

Vigilo,  d.  to  watch. 

Violo,  m.  r.  d.  to  vio- 
late. 

Vitio,  d.  to  vitiate. 

Vito,  u.  d.  to  shun. 

Ululojto  howl. 

Umbro,  r.  to  shade. 

Voco,  r.  d.  to  call. 

*Volo,  tojly. 

Voro,  r.  to  devour. 

Vulgo,  r.  d.  to  publish. 

Vulngro,  d.  to  wound. 


<§>  165.     The  following  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  are 
.rregular  or  defective  in  their  second  and  third  roots  : — 


*Crepo,  crepui,  to  make  a  noise. 
*discrSpo,  -ui  or  -avi. 
mcrepo,  -ui  or  -avi,  -itum.  or  atum, 
*fpercrepo,  — . 
*trecr£po,  — . 

"Cubo,  cubui,  cubitum  (sup.),  to  re- 
cline. 

incubo,  -ui  or  -avi,  d. 
Ttiose  compounds  of  cubo  which  take 
m  before  b,  are  of  the  third  con- 
jugation. 

Do,  dedi,  datum,  m.  r.  d.  to  give. 
So  circumdo,  pessumdo,  satisdo, 
and  venuindo ;  the  other  com- 
pounds of  do  are  of  the  third 
conjugation. 

Domo,  domui,  domitum,  r.d.  to  tame. 
Frico,  fricui,   frictum  or  fricatum, 

d.  to  rub. 

confrico,  — ,  -atum. 
infrico,  — ,  -atum. 
Juvo,  juvi,  jutum,  r.  d.,  also  juvatQ- 

rus,  to  help. 

So  adjuvo,  -juvi,  -jutum,  m.  r.  d. 
*Labo,  — ,  to  totter. 
Lavo,  lavi,  lavatum,  lautum  or  lo- 
tum ;  (sup.)  lautum  or  lava- 
turn,  lavatdrus,  d.  to  wash. 
Lavo  is  also  sometimes  of  the 

third  conjugation. 
•Mico,  micui,  to  glitter. 


dimico,  -avi  or  -ui,  r.  (-aturus). 
*emico,  -ui,  r.  (-aturus). 
*intermico,  — . 
*prornico, — ,  d. 
Neco,  necavi  or  necui,  necatum,  r.  d. 

to  kill. 
eneco,   -avi   or    -ui,    -atum,   or 

-turn,  d. 

tinterneco,  — ,  -atum. 
*tNexo,  — ,  to  tie. 
Plico, — ,  plicatum,  to  fold. 
duplico,  -avi,  -atum,  r.  d. 
multiplico  and  replico  have  -avi, 

-atum. 

*supplico,  -avi,  m.  r. 
applico,   -avi   or  -ui,   -atum   or 

-itum,  -iturus.  So  implico. 
complico,  -ui,  -Itum  or  -atum. 
expllco,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum  or 

-Hum,  r.  r. 
Poto,  potavi,  potatum  or  potum,  r.  r. 

m.  m.  d.  to  drink. 
tepoto,  -avi,  -um. 
*perpoto,  -avi. 
Seco,  secui,  sectum,   secatdrus    d 

to  cut. 

*circumsSco,  — . 
*inters6co,  — ,  d. 
*pers£co,  -ui 
praeseco,  -ui,  -turn  or  -atum.     So 

resgco,  d. 


1  CONJ.]    VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


123 


*Sono,  sonui,  -atarus,  d.  to  sound. 
*consono,  -ui.     So  ex-,  in-,  per-, 

prae-sono. 
*resono,  -avi. 
*assono,  — .  So  circurnsono  and 

dissono. 
*Sto,  steti,  staturus,  to  stand. 

*antesto,  -stSti.     So   circumsto, 

intersto,  supersto. 
*consto,    -stiti,    -staturus.       So 

exto,  insto,  obsto,  persto. 


*praesto,  -stiti,  -staturus,  d. 

*adsto,  -stiti,  -stiturus. 

*prosto,  -stiti.     So  resto.  [persto. 

*disto, — .     So   substo   and    su- 
*Tono,  tonui,  to  thunder.      So  cir- 
cumtono. 

attono,  -ui,  -itum. 

intono,  -ui,  -atum. 

*retono,  — . 
Veto,  vetui,or  avi,vetitum,£o  forbid. 


<§>  166.     All  deponent  verbs,  of  the  first  conjugation,  are 
regular,  and  are  conjugated  like  miror ;  as, 


Abommor,  d.  to  abhor. 
Adulor,  d.  to  flatter. 
-^Emulor,  d.  to  rival. 
*AprIcor,  to  bask  in  the 

sun. 

Arbitror,  r.  d.  to  think. 
Aspernor,  d.  p.  to  de- 


Auciipor,  r.  p.  to  hunt 
after. 

Auxilior,  p.  to  help. 

Aversor,  d.  to  dislike. 

Calumnior,  to  calumni- 
ate. 

Causor,  to  allege. 

*Comissor,  m.  to  revel. 

Comitor,  p.   to  accom- 
pany. 

Concionor,£o  harangue. 

*Confabulor,  m.  to  dis- 
course. 

Conor,  d.  to  endeavor. 

tConspicor,  to  see. 

Contemplor,    d.  p.    to 
view. 

Crimlnor,   m.   p.    to 
blame. 

Cunctor,  d.  p.  to  delay. 

Deprecor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to 
deprecate. 

*tDigladior,  to  fence. 

Dignor,  d.  p.   to  think 
worthy. 

Domlnor,  to  rule. 

Epulor,  r.  d.  to  feast. 

*Famulor,  m.  to  wait  on. 

Fatur,  (defect.)  u.  d.  to 
speak.  See  §  183,  6. 

tFerior,  r.  to  keep  holi- 


*Frumentor,  m.  to  for- 
age. 

Furor,  m.  to  steal. 

Glorior,  r.  d.  to  boast. 

Gratulor,  m.  d.  to  con- 
gratulate. 

Hortor,  d.  to  encourage. 

Imitor,  u.  r.  d.  to  imi- 
tate. 

Indignor,  d.  to  disdain. 

Infitior,  d.  to  deny. 

Insector,  to  pursue. 

Insidior,  r.  d.  to  lie  in 
wait. 

Jaculor,  p.  to  dart. 

Jocor,  to  jest. 

Lcetor,  r.  d.  p.  to  rejoice. 

Lamentor,  d.  p.  to  be- 
wail. 

*tLignor,  m.  to  gather 
fuel. 

Luctor,  d.  to  wrestle. 

MedTcor,  r.  d.  p.  to  heal. 

Meditor,  p.  to  meditate. 

Mercor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to 
buy. 

Minor,  to  threaten. 

Miror,  u.  r.  d.  to  admire. 

Misgror,  d.  to  pity. 

Moderor,  u.  d.  to  rule. 

Modulor,  d.  p.  to  mod- 
ulate. 

Moror,  r.  d.  to  delay. 

tMutuor,  p.  to  borrow. 

Negotior,  r.  to  traffic. 

*tNugor,  to  trifle. 

Obtestor,  p.  to  beseech. 

Operor,  to  work. 

Oplnor,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 

Opitulor,  m.  to  help. 


Opsonor,  m.  to  cater. 

tOtior,  to  be  at  leisure. 

Pabulor,  m.  d.  to  graze. 

Palor,  to  wander. 

Percenter ,m.  to  inquire. 

Periclitor,  d.  p.  to  try. 

tPiscor,  m.  to  fish. 

Populor,  r.  d.  p.  to  lay 
waste. 

Prasdor,  m.  to  plunder. 

Proelior,  to  fight. 

Precor,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to 
pray. 

Recorder,  d.  to  remem- 
ber. 

Rimor,  d.  to  search. 

Rixor,  to  scold. 

*Rusticor,  to  live  in  the 
country. 

Sciscitor,  m.  p.  to  in- 
quire. 

*Scitor,  m.  to  ask. 

Scrutor,  p.  to  search. 

Solor,  d.  to  comfort. 

Spatior,  to  walk  about. 

Speculor,  m.  r.  d.  to 
view. 

tStipulor,  p.  to  stipu- 
late. 

tSuavior,  d.  to  kiss. 

Suspicor,  to  suspect. 

Testor,  d.  p.  to  witness. 
So  detestor. 

Tutor,  d.  to  defend. 

Vagor,  to  wander. 

Veneror,  d.  p.  to  wor- 
ship. 

Venor,  m.  to  hunt. 

Versor,  to  be  employed. 

Vociferor,  to  bawl. 


124 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS.         [2  CONJ 


SECOND    CONJUGATION. 

§  16*7.  Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  eo.  The 
second  and  third  roots,  instead  of  ev  and  et,  commonly  end  in 
u  and  it;  as,  moneo,  monm',  momtz/m. 

The  following  list  contains  most  verbs  so  conjugated,  and 
also  some  which  want  the  second  and  third  roots  : — 


*Aceo,  to  be  sour. 
*Albeo,  — ,  to  be  white. 
*Arceo,  d.  to  drive  away. 

coerceo,   d.   to    re- 
strain. 

exerceo,r.  d.to exer- 
cise. 

*Areo,  to  be  dry. 
*Aveo,  — ,  to  covet. 
*Caleo,  r.  to  be  warm. 
*Calleo,  — ,  to  be  hard. 

*percalleo,  to    be 

hardened. 

*Calveo,  — ,  to  be  bald. 
*Candeo,  to  be  white. 
*Caneo,  to  be  hoary. 
*Careo,  r.  d.  to  want. 
*Ceveo,  — ,  to  fawn. 
*Clareo,  to  be  bright. 
*Clueo,  — ,  to  be  famous. 
*Denseo,  — ,  to  thicken. 
*Diribeo,  — ,  to  distri- 
bute. 

*Doleo,  r.  d.  to  grieve. 
*Egeo,  r.  to  want. 
*Emineo,  to  rise  above. 
*Flacceo,  to  icither. 
*Flaveo,  — ,to  be  yellow. 
*Floreo,  to  flourish. 
*Fceteo,  — ,  to  be  fetid. 
*Frigeo,  — ,  to  be  cold. 
*Frondeo,  — ,  to  bear 

leaves. 
Habeo,  r.  d.  to  have. 

So  ad-,  ex-,  pro-hi- 
beo. 

cohibeo,   d.   to    re- 
strain. 


inhibeo,  d.  to  hinder. 

*tperhibeo,  d.  to  re- 
port. 

tposthabeo,  to  post- 
pone. 

praebeo,  r.  d.  to  af- 
ford. 

debeo,  r.  d.  to  owe. 
*Hebeo,  — ,  to  be  dull. 
*Horreo,  d.  to  be  rough. 
*Humeo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 
*Jaceo,  r.  to  lie. 
*Lacteo,  — ,  to  suck. 
*Langueo,  to  languish. 
*Lateo,  to  lie  hid. 
*Lenteo,  — ,  to  be  slow. 
*Liceo,  to  be  valued. 
*Liveo,  — ,  to  be  livid. 
*Maceo,  — ,  to  be  lean. 
*Madeo,  to  be  wet. 
Mereo,  r.  to  deserve. 

tcommereo,   to   de- 
serve. 

tdemereo,d.  to  earn. 

temereo,  to  merit. 

*tpermereo,  to  serve 
in  war. 

promereo,  to  deserve. 
*Mcereo,  • — ,  to  grieve. 
Moneo,  r.  d.  to  advise. 

admoneo,  m.  r.  d.  to 
admonish. 

commoneo,  to  warn. 

prsemoneo,  to  fore- 
warn. 
*Muceo,    — ,    to    be 

mouldy. 
*Nigreo,  to  be  black. 


*Niteo,  to  shine. 

Noceo,  m.  r.  to  hurt. 

*Oleo,  to  smell. 

*Palleo,  to  be  pale. 

*Pareo,  m.  r.  d.  to  obey. 

*Pateo,  to  be  open. 

Placeo,  to  please. 

*Polleo,  — ,  to  be  able. 

*Puteo,  to  be  nauseous 

*Putreo,  to  be  putrid. 

*Renideo,  — ,  to  glitter. 

*Rigeo,  to  be  stiff. 

*Rubeo,  to  be  red. 

*Scateo,  — ,  to  overflow. 

*Sileo,  d.  to  be  silent. 

*Sordeo,  to  be  fllthy. 

*Splendeo,  — ,  to  shine. 

*Squaleo,  to  be  foul. 

*Strideo,  — ,  to  creak. 

*Studeo,  d.  to  study. 

*Stupeo,  to  be  amazed. 

Taceo,  r.  d.  to  be  silent. 

*Tepeo,  to  be  warm. 

Terreo,  d.  to  terrify. 
So  deterreo,  to  deter. 
tabsterreo,  to  deter. 
tconterreo,  ^      to 
texterreo,    >fright- 
tperterreo,  }      en. 

*Timeo,  d.  to  fear. 

*Torpeo,  to  be  torpid. 

*Tumeo,  to  swell. 

*Valeo,  r.  to  be  able. 

*  Vegeo, — ,  to  be  strong. 

*Vieo,  — ,  to  bind. 

*Vigeo?  to  be  strong. 

*Vireo,  to  be  green. 

*Uveo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 


§  168.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the  sec- 
ond conjugation  which  do  not  form  their  second  and  third  roots 
in  u  and  it,  including  those  which  form  them  regularly  in  ev 
and  et. 

NOTE.     Some  verbs  of  this  conjugation  are  irregular  in  the  second  and 
third  roots,  in  consequence  of  imitating  the  common  forms  of  the 
conjugation. 


.  2  CONJ.]      VERBS. SECOND   AJMD  THIRD    ROOTS.      125 


Aboleo,  -evi,  -Hum,  r.  d.  to  efface. 

"Algeo,  alsi,  to  be  cold. 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  r.  to  burn. 

Audeo,  ausus  sum,  (ausi,rare,  whence 
ausim,  §  183,  R.  1,)  r.  d.  to  dare. 

Augeo,  auxi,  auctum,  r.  d.  to  in- 
crease, [ware. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum,  m.  d.  to  be- 

Censeo,  censui,  censum,  d.  to  think. 
recenseo,  -ui,  -urn  or  -I turn. 
*percenseo,  -ui. 
*suceenseo,  -ui,  d. 

Cieo,  civi,  cituin,  to  excite.  The  per- 
fect civi  seems  to  come  from  cio, 
of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

Compleo,  -evi,  -etum,  to  Jill.  So 
the  other  compounds  of  pleo. 

*Conniveo,  -nivi,  to  wink  at. 

Deleo,  -evi,  -etum,  d.  to  blot  out. 

Doceo,  docui,  doctum,  d.  to  teach. 

*Faveo,  favi,  fautQrus,  to  favor. 

"Ferveo,  ferbui,  to  boil.  It  is  some- 
times of  the  third  conjugation. 

Fleo,  flevi,  fletum,  r.  d.  to  weep. 

Foveo,  fovi,  fotum,  d.  to  cherish. 

Frendeo,  — ,  fressum  or  fresum,  to 
gnash. 

*Fulgeo,  fulsij  to  shine. 

Fulgo,  of  the  third  conjugation, 
is  also  in  use. 

Gaudeo,  gavisus  sum,  r.  to  rejoice. 

*Hrereo,  hsesi,  haesurus,  to  stick. 

Indulgeo,  indulsi,  indultum,  r.  d.  to 
indulge. 

Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum,  r.  d.  to  order. 

*Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine. 

polluceo,  -luxi,  -luctum. 

*Lugeo,  luxi,  d.  to  mourn. 

*Maneo,  mansi,  mansum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
remain. 


Misceo,  miscui,  mistum  or  mixtum, 

misturus,  d.  to  mix. 
Mordeo,  momordi,  morsum,   d.   to 

bite. — Remordeo,  -di,  -morsum,  r. 
Moveo,  movi,  motum,  r.  d.  to  move. 
Mulceo,  mulsi,  mulsum,  d.  to  soothe. 
*Mulgeo,  mulsi  or  mulxi,  to  milk. 
Neo,  nevi,  netum,  to  spin. 
*Paveo,  pavi,  d.  to  fear.         [deo, — . 
*Pendeo,  pependi,  to  hang.  *impen- 

propendeo,  — ,  propensum. 
Pleo,  (obsolete.)     See  compleo. 
Prandeo,  prandi,  pransum,  r.  to  dine. 
Rideo,  risi,  risum,  m.  r.  d.  to  laugh. 
*Sedeo,  sedi,  sessum,  m.  r.  to  sit. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 

*dissideo,  -sedi.     So  praesideo. 
*Seneo,  senui,  to  be  old. 
Soleo,  solitus  sum  or  solui,  to  be  ac- 
customed. 
*Sorbeo,  sorbui,  to  suck  in. 

*absorbeo,  -sorbui  or  -sorpsi. 
Spondeo,    spopondi,    sponsum,    to 

promise. 

Suadeo,  suasi,  suasum,  r.d.  to  advise. 
Teneo,  tenui,  tentum,  r.  d.  to  hold. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 

*attineo,  -tinui.     So  pertineo. 
Tergeo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe. 

Tergo,  of  the  third  conjugation, 

is  also  in  use. 
Tondeo,  — ,  tonsum,  to  shear.     The 

compounds  have  the  perfect  tondi. 
Torque©,  torsi,  tortum,  d.  to  twist. 
Torreo,  torrui,  tostum,  to  roast. 
*Turgeo,  tursi,  to  swell. 
*Urgeo  or  urgueo,  ursi,  d.  to  urge. 
Video,  vidi,  visum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  see. 
Voveo,  vovi,  voturn,  d.  to  vow. 


<§>  169.     Impersonal  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Decet,  decuit,  it  becomes. 

Libet,  libuit  or  libitum  est,  it 
pleases. 

Licet,  licuit  or  licitum  est,  it  is  law- 
ful. 

Liquet,  liquit,  it  is  clear. 

Miseret,  miseruit  or  miseritum  est, 
it  pities. 

Oportet,  oportuit,  it  behoves. 

NOTE.    Lubet,  &c.,  are  sometimes 
the  comic  writers. 

11* 


Piget,    piguit    or    pigi turn  est,  d.it 

grieves. 
Poenitet,  pcenituit,  pceniturus,  d.  it 

repents. 
Pudet,  puduit  or  puditum  est,  d.  it 

shames. 
Teedet,  tseduit  or  taesum  est,  it 

wearies. 

So  pertsedet. 

written  for  libet,  &c.,  especially  in 


126 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ 


<§>  1 70.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 

Fateor,  fassus,  r.  d.  to  confess.  *Medeor,  d.  to  cure. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  i.  Mereor,  meritus,  to  deserve. 

confiteor,  confessus,  d.  p.  to  ac-  Misereor,  miseritus  or  misertus,  tt 

knoioledge.  pity. 

*tdiffiteor,  to  deny.  Polliceor,  pollicitus,  p.  to  promise. 

profiteer,  professus,  d.  p.  to  de-  Reor,  ratus,  to  think. 

dare.  Tueor,  tuitus,  d.  p.  to  protect. 

Liceor,  licitus,  to  bid  a  price.  Vereor,  veritus,  d.  to  fear. 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

§  171.  In  the  third  conjugation,  when  the  first  root  ends 
with  a  consonant,  the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding  s  ;  when 
it  ends  with  a  vowel,  the  first  and  second  roots  are  the  same  : 
the  third  root  is  formed  by  adding  t  ;  as,  carpo,  carpsz,  carp- 
turn  ;  arguo,  argw,  argutww. 

In  annexing  s  and   t,  certain  changes  occur  in  the  final  consonant  of 
the  root  :  — 

1.  C,  g,  hj  and  qu,  at  the  end  of  the  root,  form  with  s  the  double  letter 
x  in  the  2d  root  ;  m  the  3d  root,  c  remains,  and  the  others  are  changed 
into  c  before  t;  as,  rego  (regsi),  rexi,  rectum;  veho,  vexi,  vectum  ; 
j  coxij  coctum. 


NOTE.  InfiuOjfluxij  and  struo,  struxi,  h  seems  to  have  been  lost  in  the 
root  of  the  verb. 

2.  B  is  changed  into  p  before  5  and  t  ;  as,  scribo,  scripsi,  scriptum. 

3.  D  and  «,  before  s,  are  either  dropped,  or  changed  into  3  ;  as,  claudo, 
clausi  ;  cedo,  cessi.     After  m,  p  is  sometimes  inserted  before  s  and  t  ;  as, 
sumo,  sumpsi.     R  is  changed  to  s  before  s  and  t  in  gero  and  uro. 

Some  other  consonants  are  dropped,  or  changed  into  s,  in  certain  verbs 

Exc.  1.  Many  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  do  not  add  5 
to  form  the  second  root. 

(#.)  Of  these,  some  have  the  second  root  the  same  as  the  first  ;  as, 
Bibo,        Excudo,      Ico,  Mando,         Scabo,          Solvo,         Verro, 

Edo,          Fodio,          Lambo,      Prehendo,     Scando,        Strido,        Verto, 
Emo,        Fugio,         Lego,         Psallo,  Sido,  Tollo,          Volvo; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  cando,fendo,  and  nuo. 

(b.)  Some  make  a  change  in  the  first  root.  Of  these,  some  change  a 
vowel,  some  drop  a  consonant,  some  prefix  a  reduplication,  others  admit 
two  or  more  of  these  changes  ;  as, 

Ago,        Facio,          Frango,          Jacio,  Rumpo,      Scindo, 

Capio,      Findo,          Fundo,  Linquo,         Sisto,          Vinco. 

Those  which  have  a  reduplication  are 

Cado,  Curro,  Parco,  Pendo,  Tango, 

Caedo,  Disco,  Pario,  Posco,  Tendo, 

Cano,  Fallo,  Pello,  Pungo,  Tundo. 


3  CONJ.]    VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.       127 

Exc.  2.    Some  add  u  to  the  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 
Alo,  Consulo,        Gemo,  Rapio,          Tremo, 

Colo,  Depso,  Geno,  (obs.)        Strepo,         Volo, 

Compesco,         Fremo,  Molo,  Texo,  Vomo. 

Meto  and  pono  add  SM,  with  a  change  in  the  root. 

Exc.  3.    The  following  add  iv  :— 

Arcesso,       Cupio,         Lacesso,      Rudo, 

Capesso,       Incesso,      Peto,  Qusero,  with  a  change  of  r  into  s. 

Exc.  4.  The  following  add  t?,  with  a  change  in  the  root;  those  in  sco 
dropping  sc : — 

Cresco,        Pasco,  Scisco,         Lino,         Sino,  Sterno, 

Nosco,          Quiesco,        Cerno,          Sero,          Sperno,         Tero. 

Exc.  5.  The  3d  roots  of  verbs  whose  root  ends  in  d  or  £,  add  s,  in- 
stead of  tj  to  the  root,  either  dropping  those  letters,  or  changing  them 
into  s;  as,  claudo,  clausum ;  defendo,  defensum;  ccdo,  cessum.  But  the 
compounds  of  do  add  it. 

The  following,  also,  add    s,    with  a  change  of  the  root : — 

Excello,  Fallo,  Pello,  Spargo,          Verro. 

Percello,  Mergo,  Premo,  Velio, 

Exc.  6.    The  following  add    £,    with  a  change  of  the  root : — 
Cerno,      Fingo,         Gero,          Sero,       Sperno,       Stringo,     Uro, 
Colo,        Frango,      Rumpo,      Sisto,      Sterno,       Tero,         Vinco; 

to  which  add  those  in  sco,  with  the  2d  root  in  v  ;  these  drop  sc  before  £, 

except  pascOy  which  drops  c  only. 

Exc.  7.     The  following  have  It  :— 

Bibo,  Molo,  Pono,  with  a  change  of  n  into  s. 

Geno,  (obs.)  Vomo, 

The  following  have  it : — 

Arcesso,  Cupio,  Peto, 

Facesso,  ijacesso,  Qusero,  with  a  change  of  r  into  a. 

Some  other  irregularities  occur  in  this  conjugation. 

§  172.  The  following  list  contains  both  the  regular  and 
irregular  formations  of  the  second  and  third  roots  in  the  third 
conjugation : — 

Acuo,  acui,  acutum,  d.  to  sharpen.  *Batuo,  batui,  d.  to  beat. 

Ago,  egi,  actum,  r.  d.  to  drive.  Bibo,  bibi,  bibitum,  d.  to  drink. 

So  circumago,  cogo,  and  perago.  *Cado,  cecidi,  casurus,  to  fall.    The 
*amb!go, — ,  to  doubt.    Sosatago.  compounds   change  a  into  i, 

The  other  compounds  change  and  drop  the  reduplication. 

a  into  i.     See  §  189.  2.  occido,  -cidi,  -casum,  r.  to  set. 

*prodlgo,  -6gi,  to  squander.  Caedo,  cecidi,  ceesum,  r.  d.  to  cut. 
Alo,  alui,  alitum  or  altum,  d.  to  The  compounds  change  SB  into 

nourish.  I,    and  drop    the    reduplica- 

*Ango,  anxi,  to  strangle.  tion. 

Arguo,  argui,  argutum,  d.  to  convict.  From  candeo,  of  the  second  con- 

Arcesso,  -cesslvi,  -cessltum,  r.  d.  to  jugation,  is  formed 

callfrr.     Pass.  inf.  arcesslri   or  accendo,  -cendi,  -censunr>  d.  to 

arcessi. 


128 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ. 


kindle.       So    the  other  com- 


*Cano,  cecini,  d.  to  sing.     The  com- 
pounds change  a  into  i. 

*concino,  -cinui.  So  occino, 
prseclno. 

*accino,  — .  -So  incino,  intercino, 

succino,  recino. 

*Capesso,  -Ivi,  r.  d.  to  undertake. 
Capio,  cepi,  captum,  r.  d.  to  take. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  i. 
Carpo,  carpsi,  carptum,  d.  to  pluck. 

The  compounds  change  n.into  e. 
Cedo,  cessi,  cessum,  r.  to  yield. 
Cello,  (obsolete.) 

excello,  -cellui,  -celsum,  to  excel. 

*antecello,  — ,  Sopraecello,  re- 
cello. 

percello,  -ciili,  -culsum,  to  strike. 
Cerno,  crevi,  cretum,  d.  to  decree. 

Cerno,  to  see,  has  no  second  or 

third  root. 

Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum,  d.  to  gird. 
*Clango,  — ,  to  clang. 
Claudo,  clausi,  clausum,  r.  d.  to  shut. 

The  compounds  change  au  into  u. 
*tClepo,  clepsi,  or  clepi,  to  steal. 
Colo,colui,  cultum,  d.  to  till. 

tocculo,  -cului,  -cultum, d.  to  hide. 
Como,  compsi,  comptum,  to  deck. 
*Compesco,  -pescui,  to  restrain. 
Consulo,  -sului,  -sultum,  m.  r.  d.  to 

consult. 

Coquo,  coxi,  coctum,  m.  d.  to  cook. 
Credo,  credidi,  creditum,  r.  d.  to  be- 
lieve. 
*Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow. 

concresco,  -crevi,  -cretum. 
Cubo  is  of  the  first  conjugation. 

*accumbo,   -cubui,   to  lie  down. 

So  the  other  compounds  which 

*Cudo,  — ,  to  forge.  [insert  m. 

excudo,-cudi,-cusum,  d.  to  stamp. 
Cupio,  cuplvi,  cupltum,  d.  to  desire. 
*Curro,  cucurri,  cursurus,  to  run. 

Concurro,  circumcurro,  succur- 
ro,  and  transcurro,  drop  the 
reduplication;  the  other  com- 
pounds sometimes  drop,  and 
sometimes  retain  it. 

decurro,  decurri,  decursum. 
*Dego,  degi,  d.  to  live,     [take  away. 
Demo,  dempsi,  demptum,  r.   d.  to 
rDepso,  depsui,  depstum,  to  knead. 
Dico,  dixi,  dictum,  u.  r.  d.  to  say. 
*Disco,  didici,  disciturus,  d.  to  learn. 


*Dispesco,  — ,  to  separate. 

Divldo,  divlsijdivisum,  r.d.to  divide. 

Do  is  of  the  first  conjugation. 

abdo,  -didi,  -ditum,  d.  to  hide.   So 

condo,  indo. 

addo,  -didi,  -ditum,  r.  d.  to  add. 
So  dedo,  edo,  prodo,  reddo, 

trado,  vendo. 
tdido,  -didi,  -ditum,  to  di'cide.   So 

abdo,  subdo. 

perdo,  -didi,  -ditum,  m.  r.  d.  ab- 
scondo,  -di  or  -didi,  -ditum  or  -sum. 
Duco,  duxi,  ductum,  m.  r.  d.  to  lead. 
Edo,  edi,  esum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  eat. 
Exuo,  exui,  exiltum,  d.  to  strip  off. 
Emo,  emi,  emptum,  r.  d.  to  buy. 
Facesso,  -cessi,  -cessltum,  to  execute. 
Faci©,  feci,  factum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  do. 
Compounded  with  a  preposition 
it  changes  a  into  i,  and  has  a 
regular  passive.     Compound- 
ed with  other  words,  it  returns 
a  when  of  this   conjugation, 
and  has  the  passive,  fio,  fac- 
tus.     See  §  180. 
Fallo,  fefelli,  falsum,  d.  to  deceive. 

*refello,  -felli,  d.  to  refute. 
Fendo,  (obsolete.) 

defendo,  -fendi,  -fensum,  m.  u.  r. 

d.  to  defend. 
offendo,   -fendi,   -fensum,   d.  to 

offend. 

Fero,  tuli,  latum,  r.  d.  to  bear.     See 
§  179.  A  perfect  tetuli  is  rare. 
*suffero,  — . 

Fido,— ,fisus,  to  trust.  See  §  16^,  18. 
confldo,coriflsus  sum  or  coiifidi, 

to  rely  on. 

diffido,  diffisus  sum,  to  distrust. 
Figo,  fixi,  fixum,  r.  to  fix. 
Findo,  fidi,  fissum,  d.  to  cleave. 
Fingo,  finxi,  fictum,  d.  to  feign. 
Flecto,  flexi,  flexum,  r.  d.  to  bend. 
*Fligo,  flixi,  to  dash.     So  confligro. 
affllgo,  -flixi,  -flicturn,  to  afflict. 

So  infllgo. 

profligo  is  of  the  first  conjugation. 
Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum,  r.  tofiow. 
Fodio,  fodi,  fossum,  d.  to  dig. 
Frango,  fregi,  fractum,  r.  d.  to  break. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  L 
*Fremo,  fremui,  d.  to  roar. 
Frendo,  — ,  fresum  or  fressum,  to 


Frigo,  frixi,  frictum  or  frixum,  to 
roast. 


3  CONJ.]   VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


129 


*Fugio,  fugi,  fugiturus,  d.  to  flee. 
Fundo,  fudi,  fusum,  r.  d.  to  pour 
*Furo,  — ,  to  rage. 
*Gemo,  gemui,  d.  to  groan. 
Gigno,  (obsolete  geno,)  genui,  geni- 

tum,  r.  d.  to  beget. 
*Glisco,  — ,  to  grow. 
*Glubo,  — ,  to  peel. 

deglubo,  — ,  -gluptum. 
Gruo,  (obsolete.)  [ingruo. 

*congruo,   -grui,   to  agree.      So 
Gero,  gessi,  gestum,  r.  d.  to  bear. 
Jacio,  jeci,  jactum,  d.  to  cast.      The 

compounds  change  a  into  i. 
Ico,  ici,  ictum,  r.  to  strike. 
Imbuo,  imbui,  imbutum,  d.  to  imbue. 
^Incesso,  -cesslvi,  or  -cessi  to  attack. 
tlnduo,  indui,  indatum,  to  put  on. 
Jungojunxi,  junctum,  r.  d.  to  join. 
Lacesso,  -cesslvi,  -cessltum,  r.  d.  to 

provoke. 

Lacio,   (obsolete.)      The  compounds 
change  a  into  i. 

allicio,  -iexi,  -lectum,  d.  to  allure. 
So  illicio,  pellicio. 

elicio,-licui,-licitum,  to  draw  out. 
Lsedo,  laesi,  laesum,  m.  r.  to  hurt.  The 

compounds  cftange  ae  into  i. 
*Lambo,  Iambi,  to  lick. 
Lego,  legi,  lectum,  r.  d.  to  read.     So 
allego,  perlfigo,  praelego,  rele*- 
go,   sublego,   and  translego; 
the  other  compounds  change  e 
into  i. 

diligo,  -Iexi,  -lectum,  to  love. 

intelligo,  -Iexi,  -lectum,  u.  r.  d.  to 
understand. 

negligo,  -Iexi,  -lectum,  r.  d.   to 

neglect. 
Lingo,  — ,  linctum,  d.  to  lick. 

*delingo,  — . 

Lino,  livi  or  levi,  litum,  d.  to  daub. 
''Linquo,  liqui,  d.  to  leave. 

relinquo,  -liqui,  -lictum,  r.  d. 

delinquo,    -liqui,    -lictum.        So 

derelinquo. 

Ludo,  lusi,  lusum,  m.  r.  to  play. 
*Luo,  lui,  luiturus,  d.  to  atone. 

abluo,  -lui,  -lutum,  r.  d. 

diluo,  -lui,  -lutum,  d.     So  eluo. 
Mando,  mandi,  mansuia,  d.  to  chew. 
Mergo,  mersi,  mersum,  r.  d.  to  dip. 
Meto,  messui,  messum,  d.  to  reap. 
Metuo,  metui,  metutum,  d.  to  fear. 
*Mingo,  minxi,  mictum,   (sup.)   to 

make  water. 
Minuo  minui,  mmtitum,d.  to  lessen. 


Mitto,  rnisi,  missum,  r.  d.  to  send. 

Molo,  molui,  molitum,  to  grind. 

Mungo,  (obsolete.)  [wipe. 

emungo,  -rnunxi,  -munctum,  to 

Necto,  nexi,  nexum,  d.  to  knit. 
mnecto,     -nexui,    -nexum.     So 
annecto,  connecto. 

*Nmgo  or  -guo,  ninxi,  to  snow. 

Nosco,  novi,  notum,  d  to  learn. 
agnosco,    -novi,    -nltum,    d.    to 

recognize. 
cognosce,  -novi,  -nlturn,  u.  r.  d. 

to  know. 

*dignosco,  — .     So  praenosco. 
ignosco,    -novi,    -notum,    d.    to 
pardon.  [m.  r.  to  marry. 

Nubo,  nupsi,  or  nupta  sum,  nuptum, 

Nuo,  (obsolete.) 

*abnuo,  -nui,  -nuiturus,  d.  to  re- 

fuse. 
*annuo,  -imi.     So  innuo,  renuo. 

Pando,  — ,  passum   or  pansum,  to 

open.     So  expando. 
dispando,  — ,  -pansum 

Pago,  (obs.)  pepigi,  pactum,  to  bar- 
gain. 

Pango,panxi,  pactum,  pancturus,  d. 

to  drive  in. 
compin^o,   -pegi,  -pactum.      So 

impingo. 
*oppango,  -pegi. 

*depango,  — .     So  repango,  sup- 
pingo. 

*Parco,  peperci  or  parsi,  parsarus, 
to  spare. 

Pario,  pepgri,  partum,  pariturus,  d. 
to  bring  forth.  Ttie  compounds 
are  of  t/ie  fourth  conjugation. 

Pasco,  pavi,  pastum,  m.  r.  d.  to  feed 

Pec  to,  — ,  pexuin,  and  pectitum,  d. 
to  comb. 

Pello,  peptili,  pulsum,  d.  to  drive. 
Compounds  not  reduplicated. 

Pendo,  pependi,  pensum,  r.  to  weigh. 
The  compounds  drop  the  redupli- 
cation. 

Peto,petlvi,  petltum,  m.u.r.  d.  to  ask. 

Pingo,  pinxi,  pictum,  to  paint. 

Pinso,  pinsi,  pinsitum,  pinsum  or 
pistum,  to  grind. 

*Plango,  planxi,  planctarus,  to  la- 
ment. 

Plaudo,  plausi,  plausum,  d.  to  ap- 
plaud.  So  applaudo.  The  other 
compounds  change  au  into  o. 

Plecto,  — ,  plexum,  d.  to  twine. 

*Pluo,  plui  or  pluvi,  to  rain 


130 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.    [3  CONJ* 


Pono,  posui,  positum,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Pono,  and  its  compounds,  ancient- 

ly had  poslvi  in  the  perfect. 
*Posco,  poposci,  d.  to  demand. 


Premo,pressi,pressum,  r.  d.  to  press. 

The  compounds  change  e  into  i. 
Promo,  prompsi,  promptum,  r.  d.  to 

bring  out. 
*Psallo,  psalli,  to  play  on  an  instru- 

ment. 

Pungo,  pupugi,  punctum,  to  prick. 
compungo,     -punxi,    -punctum. 

So  dispungo,  expungo. 
interpungo,  —  ,  -punctum. 
*repungo,  —  . 

Quaero,  quaeslvi,  quoBsitum,  m.  r.  d. 
to  seek.  The  compounds  change 
se  into  i. 

Quatio,  —  ,  quassum,  to  shake.  The 
compounds  change  qua  into 
cu;  as, 

concutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  d. 
discutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  r.  d. 
Quiesco,  quievi,  quietum,r.  d.  to  rest. 
Kado,  rasi,  rasum,  d.  to  shave. 
Rapio,  rapui,  raptum,  r.  d.  to  snatch. 
The  compounds  change  a  in- 
to i. 
diripio,  -ripui,  -reptum,  m.  r.  So 

eripio  and  praeripio. 
Rego,   rexi,   rectum,  r.  d.   to  rule. 
Tlie  compounds  change  e  in- 
to i. 
*pergo  (for  perrigo),  perrexi,  r. 

to  go  forward. 
surgo  (for  surrigo),surrexi,  sur- 

rectum,  r.  d.  to  rise. 
*Repo,  repsi,  to  creep. 
Rodo,  rosi,  rosum,  r.  to  gnaw. 

ab-,  ar-,  e-,  ob-,  prse-rdde    want 

the  perfect. 

*Rudo,  rudlvi,  to  bray. 
Rumpo,  rupi,  ruptuin,  r.  d.  to  break. 
Ruo,  rui,  rutum,  ruiturus,  to  fail. 
diruo,  -rui,  -rutum,  d.    So  obruo. 
*corruo,  -rui.     So  irruo. 
**Sapio,  saplvi,to  be  wise.     Tlie  com- 

pounds change  a  into  i. 
resipio,  -siplvi  or  -sipui. 
*tScabo,  scabi,  to  scratch.       [grave. 
Scalpo,    scalpsi,    scalpturn,   to   en- 
Salo  or  sallo,  —  salsum,  to  salt. 
*Scando,  —  ,  d.  to  climb.     The  com- 

pounds change  a  into  e  ;  as, 
ascendo,  ascendi,  ascensum,  r.  d. 


Scindo,  scidi,  scissum,  d.  to  cut. 
Scisco,  scivi,  scitum,  d.  to  ordain. 
Scribo,   scrips!,   scriptum,   r.  d.    to 

write. 

Sculpo,sculpsi,sculptum,  d.  to  carve. 
Sero,  sevi,  satum,  r.  d.  to  sow. 

consero,  -sevi,  -situm.     So  ins& 

ro,  r.,  and  obsero. 

Sero,  — ,  sertum,  to  knit.  Its  com 
pounds  have  serui ;  as, 

assero,  -serui,  -sertum,  r.  d. 
*Serpo,  serpsi,  to  creep. 
*Sido,  sidi,  to  settle.    Its  compounds 

have  generally  sedi,  sessum,/r0w 

sedeo. 
*Sino,  sivi,  siturus,  to  permit. 

desino,  desivi,  desitum,  r. 
Sisto,  stiti,  statum,  to  stop. 

*absisto,  -stiti.  So  the  other  com- 
pounds; but  circumsisto  wants 
the  perfect. 

Solvo,  solvi,  solutum,  r.  d.  to  loose. 
Spar  go,   sparsi,    sparsurn,   r.   d.    to 

spread.     The  compounds  change 

a  into  e. 

Specie,  (obsolete.)  The  compounds 
change  e  into  i',  as, 

aspicio,  aspexi,  aspectum,  d.  to 
look  at. 

inspicio,  inspexi,  inspectum,  r.  d. 
Sperno,  sprevi,  spretum,d.  to  despise. 
*tSpuo,  spui,  to  spit. 

*respuo,  respui,  d. 
Statuo,  statui,  statutum,  d.  to  place. 

The  compounds  change  a  into  i. 
Sterno,  stravi,  stratum,  d.  to  strew. 
*Sternuo,  sternui,  to  sneeze. 
*Sterto,  — ,  to  snore. 

*tdesterto,  destertui. 
*Stinguo,  — ,  to  extinguish. 

distinguo,    distinxi,   distinctum. 

So  extinguo,  r.  d. 
*Strepo,  strepui,  to  make  a  noise. 
*Strido,  stridi,  to  creak. 
Stringo,  strinxi,  stricturn,  r.  d.  to  tie 

hard. 

Struo,  struxi,  structum,  d.  to  build. 
Sugo,  suxi,  suctum,  to  suck. 
Sumo,sumpsi,sumptum,  r.  d.  to  take. 
Suo,  — ,  sutum,  d.  to  sew.  So  consuo, 
dissuo. 

insuo,  -sui,  sutum 

*assuo,  — . 

Tango,  tetigi,  tactum,  r.  d.  to  touch. 
The  compounds  change  a  into 
i,  and  drop  the  reduplication. 

contingo,  contigi,  contantum.  r. 


3  CONJ.]   VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


131 


Tego,  texi,  tectum,  r.  d.  to  cover. 
*Ternno,  — ,  d.  to  despise. 

contemno,  -tempsi,  -teinptum,  d. 
Tendo,  tetendi,  tensum  or  tcntum,  to 
stretch.     The  compounds  drop 
the  reduplication;  as, 
extendo,  -tendi,  -tensum  or  -ten- 
turn.     So  in-,  os-  and  re -ten- 
do, 
detendo  has  tensum.      The  other 

compounds  have  tentum. 
*tTergo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe.   Ter- 
geo,  of  the  second  conjugation,  has 
the  same  second  and  third  roots. 
Tero,  trivi,  trituin,  d.  to  rub. 
Texo,  texui,  textum,  d.  to  weave. 
Tingo  or  tinguo,  tinxi,  tinctum,  r.  d. 

to  tinge. 
*Tollo,  tolli,  d.  to  raise. 

sustollo,  sustuli,  sublatum,  r.  to 

take  away. 

*attollo,  — .     So  extollo. 
Traho,  traxi,  tractum,  r.  d.  to  draw. 
*Trerno,  tremui,  d.  to  tremble. 
Tribuo,    tribui,   tributum,   r.   d.   to 

ascribe. 
Trudo,  trusi,  trusum,  to  thrust. 


Tundo,  tutudi,  tunsum  or  tusum,  to 
beat.  The  compounds  drop  the 
reduplication,  and  have  tusum. 
Yet  detunsum,  obtunsum,  and 
re  tunsum,  are  also  found. 

Ungo,  unxi,  unctum,  d.  to  anoint. 

Uro,  ussi,  ustum,  d.  to  burn. 

*Vado,  — ,  to  go.   So  supervado.    The 
other  compounds  have  vasij  as, 
*evado,  evasi,  r.     So  pervado; 
also  invado,  r.  d. 

Veho,  vexi,  vectum,  r.  to  carry. 

Velio,  velli  or  vulsi,  vu\s\im,d.toputt. 
So  avello,  d.,  divello,  evello,  d., 

revello,  revelli,  revulsum. 
The  other  compounds  have  velli 
only,  except  intervello,  which 
has  vulsi. 

*Vergo,  versi,  to  incline. 

Verro,  —  versum,  d.  to  brush. 

Verto,  verti,  versurn,  r.  d.  to  turn. 
See  §  174,  NOTE. 

Vinco,  vici,  victum,  r.  d.  to  conquer. 

*Viso,  — ,  d.  to  visit. 

*Vivo,  vixi,  victQrus,  d.  to  live. 

Volvo,  volvi,  volutum,  d.  to  roll. 

Vomo,vomui,vomitum,  r.  d.  to  vomit. 


Inceptive  Verbs. 

§  173.  Inceptive  verbs  in  general  want  the  third  root, 
and  their  second  root,  when  used,  is  the  same  as  that  of  their 
primitives.  Of  those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  some 
want  the  second  root,  and  some  form  it  by  adding  u  to  the  root  of 
the  primitive.  See  $  187,  II.  2. 

In  the  following  list,  those  verbs  to  which  s  is  added,  have  a  simple  verb 
in  use  from  which  they  are  formed  :  — 


"Acesco,  acui,  s.  to  grow  sour. 

*JE,gre^co,to'grow  sick. 

*Albesco,  — ,  s.  to  grate  ichite. 

*Alesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow. 

coalesco,  -alui,  -alitum,  to  grow 
together. 

*Ardesco,  arsi,  s.  to  take  fire. 

*Aresco,  — ,  a.  to  grow  dry. 

*exaresco,  -arui.      So  inaresco, 
peraresco. 

*Augesco,  auxi,  s.  to  increase. 

*Calesco,  calui,  a.  to  groio  warm. 

*Calvesco,  — ,  a.  to  become  bald. 

"Candesco,  candui,  s.  to  grow  white. 

*Canesco,  canui,  s.  to  become  hoa- 
ry. 


*Claresco,  clarui,  s.  to  become  bright. 
*Condormisco,  -dormivi,  s.  to  go  to 

sleep. 

*Conticesco,  -ticui,  to  become  silent. 
*Crebresco,  -crebui  and  crebrui,  to 

increase. 

*Crudesco,  crudui,  to  become  raw. 
*Ditesco,  —  ,  to  grow  rich. 
*Dulcesco,  —  ,  to  grow  sweet. 
*Duresco,  durui,  to  grow  hard. 
*Evilesco,  evilui,  to  become  worth- 

less. 

*Extimesco,  -timui,  to  be  afraid. 
*Fatisco,  —  ,  to  gape. 
*Flaccesco,    flaccui,     a.    to    grow 

weak 


132 


VERBS. SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS.   [3  CONJ 


*Fervesco,  ferbui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 

*Floresco,  fiorui,  s.  to  begin  to  flour- 
ish. 

*Fracesco,  fracui,  to  grow  mouldy. 

*Frigesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  cold. 

*perfrigesco,    -frixi.      So    refri- 
gesco. 

"Frondesco, — ,  s.  to  put  forth  leaves. 

"Fruticesco,  — ,  to  put  forth  fruit. 

*Gelasco,  — ,  s.  to  freeze. 

*congelasco,  -avi,  s.  to  congeal. 

*Gemisco,  — ,  s.  to  groan. 

*Gemmasco,  — ,  to  bud. 

*Generasco,  — ,  s.  to  be  produced. 

*Grandesco,  — ,  to  grow  large. 

*Gravesco,  — ,  to  grow  heavy. 

*Hseresco,  hsesi,  s.  to  adhere. 

*Hebesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dull. 

*Horresco,  horrui,  s.  to  grow  rough. 

*Humesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  moist. 

*lgnesco,  — ,  to  take  fire. 

*Indolesco,  -dolui,  d.  to  be  grieved. 

*Insolesco,  — ,  to  become  haughty. 

*Integrasco,  — ,  to  be  renewed. 

*Juvenesco,  — ,  to  grow  young. 

*Languesco,  langui,  s.  to  grow  lan- 


*Lapidesco,  — ,  to  become  stone. 
*Latesco,  — ,  to  grow  broad. 
*Latesco,  latui,  to  be  concealed,  s.  So 

delitesco,  -litui ;  obiitesco,  -litui. 
*Lentesco,  — ,  to  become  soft. 
*Liquesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  liquid. 

*deliquesco,  -licui. 
*Lucesco,  luxi,  s.  to  grow  light. 
*Lutesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  muddy. 
*Macesco,  — ,  s.  >  , 
*Macresco,-,    ]*>  grow  lean. 

*remacresco,  -macrui. 

*Madesco,  madui,  s.  to  grow  moist. 

*Marcesco,  marcui,  s.  to  pine  away. 

*Maturesco,  maturui,  to  ripen. 

*Miseresco,  raiserui,  s.  to  pity. 
'*Mitesco,  — ,  to  grow  mild. 

*Mollesco,  — ,  to  grow  soft. 

*Mutesco,  — ,  to  become  silent. 
*obmutesco,  obmutui. 

*Nigresco,  nigrui,  s.  to  grow  Hack. 

*Nitesco,  nitui,  s.  to  grow  bright. 

*Notesco,  notui,  to  become  known. 

*Obbrutesco,  — ,  to  become  brutish. 

*Obcallesco,   -callui,  to  become  cal- 
lous. 

"Obdormisco,   -dormlvi,   s.   to  fall 
asleep. 

*Obsurdesco,  -surdui,  to  grow  deaf. 

*Ole8co  (scarcely  used.} 


abolesco,   -olevi,  -olitum,   s.  to 

cease. 
adolesco,    -olevi,  -ultum,  s.    to 

grow  up. 
exolesco,  -olevi,  -oletum,  to  grow 

old.     So  obsolesco. 
*inolesco,  -olevi,  d.  to  increase. 
*Pallesco,  pallui,  s.  to  grow  pale. 
*Patesco,  patui,  s.  to  be  open. 
*Pavesco,  pavi,  s.  to  grow  fearful. 
*Pertimesco,     -timui,     d.    to  fear 

greatly. 

*Pinguesco,  — ,  to  grow  fat. 
*Pubesco,  — ,  to  come  to  maturity, 
*Puerasco,  — ,  to  become  a  boy. 
*Putesco,  putui,  s.     )  to  become  pu- 
*Putresco,  putrui,  s.  5         trid. 
*Raresco,  — ,  to  become  thin. 
*Rig«sco,  rigui,  s.  to  grow  cold. 
*Rubesco,  rubui,  s.  to  grow  red. 

*erubesco,  -rubui,  d. 
*Resipisco,  -sipui,  s.  to  recover  wis- 
dom. 
*Sanesco,  — ,  to  become  sound. 

*consanesco,  -sanui, 
*Senesco,  senui,  s.d.  to  grow  old.  So 

consenesco. 

*Sentisco,  sensi,  s.  to  perceive. 
*Siccesco,  — ,  to  become  dry. 
*Sileseo,  silui,  s.  to  grow  silent. 
*Solidesco,  — ,  to  become  solid. 
*Sordesco,  sordui,  s.  to  become  filthy. 
*Splendesco,  splendui,  s.  to  become 

bright. 

*Spurnesco,  — ,  to  foam. 
*Sterilesco,  — ,  to  become  barren. 
*Stupesco,   stupui,  s.   to  be  aston- 
ished. 
Suesco,  suevi,  suetum,  s.  to  become* 

accustomed. 

*Tabesco,  tabui,  s.  to  waste  away. 
*Teneresco  and    -asco,    to    become 

tender. 

*Tepesco,  tepui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 
*Torpesco,  torpui,  s.  to  grow  torpid 
*Tremisco,  tremui,   s.   to  begin  to 

tremble. 

*Tumesco,  tumui,  s.  to  be  inflated. 
*Turgesco,  tursi,  s.  to  swell. 
*Valesco,  valui,  s.  to  become  strong. 
*Vanesco,  — ,  to  vanish. 

*evanesco,  evanui. 
*Veterasco,  veteravi,  to  grow  old. 
*Viresco,  virui,  s.  to  grow  green. 
*Vivesco,  vixi,  s  to  come  to  life. 

*revivisco,  -vixi. 
*Uvesco,  — ,  to  become  moist 


4  CONJ.]    VERBS SECOND  AND  THIRD  ROOTS. 


133 


174.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 


Apiscor,  aptus,  to  get.     The  com- 
pounds change  a  into  i. 
adipiscor,  adeptus.  So  indipiscor. 

Expergiscor,  experrectus,  to  awake. 

Fatiscor,  i.     The  compounds  change 
a  into  e.  [d.  to  enjoy. 

Fruor,  fruitus  or  fructus,  fruiturus, 

Fungor,  functus,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

Gradior,  gressus,  to  proceed.  The 
compounds  change  a  into  e  j 
#s,  aggredior,  aggressus,  r.  d. 

*Irascor,  to  be  angry. 

Labor,  lapsus,  r.  to  fall. 

"Liquor,  to  melt ,  flow. 

Loquor,  locutus,  r.  d.  to  speak. 

Miniscor,  (obsolete.} 

comminiscor,  commentus,  p.  to 

invent. 
*reminiscor,  to  remember. 

Morior,  (raori,  rarely  moriri,)  nior- 
tuus,  moriturus,  d.  to  die. 

Nanciscor,  nactus  or  nanctus  to  ob- 
tain. 


Nascor,  natus,  nasciturus,  u.  to  bs, 

born. 
Nitor,  nixus  or  nisus,  nisurus,  to 

lean  upon. 

Obliviscor,  oblltus,  d.  to  forget 
Paciscor,    pactus,    d.    to    bargain. 

Compound  depeciscor. 
Patior,  passus,  r.  d.  to  suffer. 

perpetior,  -pessus. 

From  plecto,  to  twine, 

amplector,   amplexus,    d.  p.   to 
embrace. 

compleetor,  complexus,  p.      So 

circumplector. 

Proficiscor,  profectus,  r.  to  depart. 
Queror,   questus,  m.  u.  d.   to   com- 
plain. 

*Ringor,  to  grin. 
Sequor,  secutus,  r.  d.  to  follow. 
Tuor,  tutus,  to  protect. 
*Vescor,  d.  to  eat. 
Ulciscor,  ultus,  m.  d.  p.  to  avenge. 
Utor,  usus,  r.  d  to  use. 


NOTE.  Devertor,  prcBvertor,  revertor,  compounds  of  verto,  are  used  as 
deponents  in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses ;  revertor  also,  sometimes, 
in  the  perfect. 


FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

<§>  175.  Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  regularly  form 
their  second  root  in  ivt  and  the  third  in  It ;  as,  audz'0,  audm, 
auditww. 

The  following  list  contains  most  regular  verbs  of  this  conju- 
gation : — 


Audio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  hear. 
*Cio,  civi,  to  excite. 
Condio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  season. 
Custodio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  keep. 
*Dorario,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  t 


•11,  in. 

Erudio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  instruct. 
Expedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  disentangle. 
Finio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  finish. 
*Gestio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  desire. 
Impedio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  entangle. 
Insanio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  be  mad. 
Irretio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  ensnare. 
Lenio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  mitigate. 
Mollio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  soften. 
*Mugio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  bellow. 


Munio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fortify. 
Mutio,  -Ivi,  to  mi/tter. 
Nutrio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,d.  to  nourish. 
Partio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  divide. 
Polio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  polish. 
Punio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  punish. 
Redimio,  -Ivi,  to  crown. 
Sarrio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  weed. 
Scio,  -ivi,  u.  r.  to  know. 
Servio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  serve. 
Sopio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  lull  asleep. 
Stabilio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  establish. 
Tinnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  tinklf. 
Vestio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  clothe. 


134 


VERBS.— SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS.       [4    CONJ. 


§  176.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the 
fourth  conjugation  which  form  their  second  and  third  roots 
irregularly,  and  those  which  want  either  or  both  of  them : — 


Amicio,  — ,  amictum,  d.  to  clothe. 

*Balbutio,  — ,  to  stammer. 

Bullio,  — ,  to  boil. 

*Ceecutio,  — ,  to  be  dim-sighted. 

*Cambio,  — ,  to  exchange. 

*Dementio,  — ,  to  be  mad. 

Effutio,  — ,  to  speak  foolishly. 

Eo,  ivi  or  ii,  itumfr.d.togo.  The  com- 
pounds have  only  ii  in  the  perfect, 
except  obeo,  prseeo,  and  subeo, 
which  have  Ivi  or  ii.  Ml  the 
compounds  want  the  supine  and 
perfect  participles,  except  adeo, 
ambiOjineo,  obeo,  praetereo, sub- 
eo, circumeo,  redeo,  and  transeo. 

Farcio,  farsi,  farctum,  to  cram. 

Fastidio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  disdain. 

*Ferio,  — ,  d.  to  strike. 

*Ferocio,  — ,  to  be  farce. 

Fulcio,  fulsi,  fultum,  d.  to  prop. 

*Gannio,  — ,  to  yelp. 

*Glocio,  — ,  to  cluck. 

*Glutio,  glutii,  to  swallow. 

*Grunmo,  grunnii,  to  grunt. 

Haurio,  hausi,  haustum,  hausturus, 
hausurus,  d.  to  draw. 

*Hinnio,  — ,  to  neigh. 

*Ineptio,  — ,  to  trifle. 

*Lascivio,  lascivii,  to  be  wanton. 

*Ligurio,  ligurii,  to  feed  delicately. 

*Lippio,  — ,  r.  to  be  blear-eyed. 

*Obedio,  obedii,  r.  to  obey. 

Pario  is  of  the  third  conjugation, 
but  its  compounds  are  of  the 
fourth. 


aperio,  aperui,  apertum,  r.  d.  to 
open.     So  operio,  d. 

comperio,  comperi,  compertum, 
to  find  out.    So  reperio,  r.  d. 
Pavio,  — ,  to  beat. 
*Prurio,  — ,  to  itch. 
Queo,  quivi  or  quii,  to  be  able.    So 

nequeo. 

*Rugio,  — ,  to  roar. 
Saevio,  ssevii,  Itum,r.  to  rage. 
*Sagio,  — ,  to  foresee. 
*Salio,  salui  or  salii,  to  leap.     The 
compounds  change  a  into  i. 

*absilio,  — .     So  circumsilio. 

*assilio,  -ui.     So  dissilio,  insilio. 

Mesilio,  -ui  or  -ii.     So  exsilio,  re- 
silio,  subsilio. 

*transilio,  -ui  or  -Ivi,  d.     So  pro- 

silio. 
Sancio,  sanxi,  sanci turn  or  sanctum, 

d.  to  ratify. 

Sarcip,  sarsi,  sartum,  d.  to  patch. 
*Scaturio,  — ,  to  gush  out. 
Sentio,  sensi,  seasum,  r.  to  feel. 
Sepelio,  sepellvi  or  -ii,  sepultum,  r. 

d.  to  bury. 

Sepio,  sepsi,  septum,  d.  to  hedge  in. 
*Singultio,  — ,  to  sob. 
*Sitio,  sitii,  to  thirst. 
Suffio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  fumigate. 
*Tussio,  — ,  to  cough.     , 
*Vagio,  vagii,  to  cry. 
*fVeneo,  venii,  r.  to  be  sold. 
Venio,  veni,  ventum,  r.  to  come. 
Vincio,  vinxi,  vinctum,  r.  d.  to  bind. 


NOTE.    Desiderative  verbs  want  both  the  second  and  third  roots,  ex- 
cept these  three  ; — esurio,  -ivi,  r.  to  desire  to  eat ;  *nupturio}  -ivi,  to  desire 
to  marry;  *parturio,  -ivi,  to  be  in  travail.     See  §  187,  II.  3. 
a  This  is  the  neuter  gender  of  the  perfect  participle. 


177.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 


Assentior,  assensus,  r.  d.  p.  to  assent. 
Blandior,  blandltus,  tofiatter. 
Experior,  expertus,  r.  d.  to  try. 
Largior,  largltus,  p.  to  lavish. 
Mentior,  mentltus,  r.  to  lie. 
Metior,  mensus,  d.  to  measure. 
Molior,  molltus,  d.  to  move  a  mass. 


Opperior,  oppertus  or  opperitua,  d. 

to  wait  for. 

Ordior,  orsus,  d.  p.  to  begin. 
Orior,  ortus,  oriturus,  d.  to  spring  up. 

Except  in  the  present  infinitive, 

this  verb  seems  to  be  of  the  third 

conjugation. 


$  178.  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  135 

Partior,  partltus,  d.  to  divide.  subjunctive  are  sometimes  of  the 

Potior,  potitus,  r.  d.  to  obtain.     The          third  conjugation  in  the  poets, 
present  indicative  and  imperfect     Sortior,  sortitus,  r.  to  cast  lots. 


IRREGULAR  VERBS. 

<§>  178.  Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  deviate  from  the 
common  forms  in  some  of  the  parts  derived  from  the  first 
root. 

They  are  sum,  volo,fero,  edo,jio,  eo,  quco,  and  their  compounds. 

Sum  and  its  compounds  have  already  been  conjugated.  See  §  153.  In 
the  conjugation  of  the  rest,  the  parts  which  are  irregular  are  fully 
exhibited,  and  a  synopsis  of  the  other  parts  is,  in  general,  given.  Some 
parts  of  volo  and  its  compounds  are  wanting. 

1.  VOLO  is  irregular  only  in  the  present  indicative  and  infini- 
tive, and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  subjunctive.  %.. 

It  is  made  irregular  partly  by  syncope,  and  partly  by  a  change  in  the 
owel  of  the  root.     In  the  present  infiniti 
after  e  was  dropped,  r  was  changed  into  I. 


Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  In/in.      Perf.  Indie. 

Vc/-lo,  vel'-le,  vol'-u-i,      to  be  willing,  to  wish. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.  S.  vo'-lo,  vis,  vult  ;  Perf.        vol'-u-L 

P.  vol'-u-mus,  vul'-tis,  vo'-lunt  Plup.       vo-lu'-g-ram. 

Imperf.     vo-le'-bam.  Fut.  perf.  vo-lu'-e'-ro. 

Fut.         vo'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.      S.  ve'-lim,  ve'-lis,  ve'-lit  ;  Perf.  vo-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ve-li'-mus,  ve-li'-tis,  ve'-lint.  Plup.  vol-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf  S.  vel'-lem,  vel'-les,  vel'-let  ; 

P.  vel-le'-mus,  vel-le'-tis,  velMent 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  vel'-le.  Pres.  vo'-lens. 

Perf.  vol-u-is'-se. 

NOTE.     Volt  and  voltis,  for  vult  and  vultis,  are  found  in  Plautus  and 
other  ancient  authors. 

2.  NOLO  is  compounded  of  non  and  volo.     Non  drops  its 
final  ft,  and  volo  its  v9  and  the  vowels  (o  o)  are  contracted  into  dL 


136  IRREGULAR    VERBS. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  In/in.      Perf.  Indie. 
Nc/-lo,  noF-le, 


[4  CONJ. 
nol'-u-i,        to  be  unwilling. 


INDICATIVE. 
Pres.  S.  noMo,  non'-vis,  non'-vult ; 

P.  nol'-ti-mus,  non-vul'-tis,  no'-lunt. 
Jmptrf.     no-le'-bam. 
Fut.         no'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.     S.  noMim,  noMis,  no'-lit ; 

P.  no-li'-mus,  noli'-tis,  noMint. 
Imperf.  S.  nol'-lem,  nol'-les,  nol'-let ; 

P.  nol-le'-mus,  nol-le'-tis,  nol'-lent 


Perf.        nol'-u-L 
Plup.       no-lu'-S-ram. 
Fut.  perf.  no-lu'-S-ro. 


Perf.  no-lu'-£-rim. 
Plup.  nol-u-is'-sem. 


IMPERATIVE. 
S.  2.  no'-li,  or  no-li'-to ;  P.  2.  no-li'-te,  or  nol-i-to'-te. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  noF-le.  Pres.  no'-lens. 

Perf.  nol-u-is'-se. 

NOTE.    Nevis  and  nevclt,  for  nonms  and  nonvult,  occur  in  Piautus. 

3.  MALO  is  compounded  of  magis  and  volo.  In  composition, 
magis  drops  its  final  syllable,  and  volo  its  v.  The  vowels  (a  o) 
are  then  contracted  into  a. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Perf.  Indie. 

Ma'-lo,  mal'-le,  mal'-u-i,       to  be  more  uniting. 


INDICATIVE. 
Pres.   S.  ma'-lo,  ma'-vis,  ma'-vult ; 

P.  mal'-u-mus,  ma-vuF-tis,  ma'-lunt. 
Imperf.     ma-le'-bam. 
Fid.          ma'-lam. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.    S.  ma'-lim,  ma'-lis,  ma' -lit; 

P.  ma-li'-mus,  ma-li'-tis,  ma'-lint. 
Imperf.  S.  maP-lem,  maP-les,  mal'-let; 

P.  mal-le'-mus,  mal-le'-tis,  maF-lent 


Perf.        maF-u-i. 
Plup.       ma-lur-e-ram. 
Fut.  perf.  ma-lu'-g-ro. 


Perf.   ma-lu'-^-rim. 
Plup.  mal-u-is'-sem. 


INFINITIVE. 


Pres.  mal'-le. 


Perf.  mal-u-is'-se. 


NOTE.    Mavolo,  mavtilam,  mavtlim,  and  mavellem,  for  malo,  malam. 
&c.,  occur  in  Piautus. 


179,  180. 


IRREGULAR    VERBS. 


137 


$  179.  FERO  is  irregular  in  two  respects  : — 1.  its  second 
and  third  roots  are  not  derived  from  the  first : — 2.  in  the 
present  infinitive  active,  and  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and 
certain  parts  of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative,  of  both 
voices,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted.  In  the  present  infini- 
tive passive,  r  is  doubled. 


ACTIVE    VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie.  Fe'-ro,  (to  bear.) 
Pres.  Infin.  fer'-re, 
Perf.  Indie,   tu'-li, 
Supine.          la'-tum. 


PASSIVE    VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ror,  (to  be  borne.) 
Pres*  Infin.  fer'-ri, 
Per/.  Par*,  la'-tus. 


Pres.   S.  fe'-ro, 

fers, 

fert; 
P.  fer'-i-mus, 

fer'-tis, 

fe'-runt. 

Imperf.     fe-re'-bam. 
Fut.          fe'-ram. 
Per/.        tu'-li. 
Plup.       tu'-ie-ram. 
Fut.perf.  tu'-lg-ro. 

Pres.      fe'-ram. 
Imperf.  fer'-rem. 
Per/.      tu'-lg-rim. 
Plup.     tu-lis'-sem. 


S.  fer,  or  fer'-to, 

fer'-to ; 
P.  fer'-te,  or  fer-to'-te, 

fe-run'-to. 


Pres.  fer'-re. 

Perf  tu-lis'-se. 

Fut     la-ta'-rus  es'-se. 


INDICATIVE. 

Pres.     S.  fe'-ror, 

fer'-ris  or  -re, 

fer'-tur ; 
P.   fer'-i-mur, 

fe-rim'-i-ni, 

fe-run7-tur. 
Imperf.       fe-re'-bar. 
Fut.  fe'-rar. 

Per/.  la'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 

Plup.         la'-tus  ex-ram  or  fu'-6-rani. 
Fut.  perf.  la'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-6-ro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      fe'-rar. 

Imperf.  fer'-rer. 

Perf.      la'-tus  sim  or  fu'-S-rim. 

Plup.     la'-tus  es  -sem  or  fu-is'sem. 

IMPERATIVE. 

5.  fer'-re,  or  fer'- tor, 

fer'-tor, 
P.  fe-rim'-i-ni, 

fe-run'-tor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  fer'-ri. 

Perf.  la'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

Fut.     la'-tum  i'-ri. 


Pres.  fe'-rena. 
Fut.     la-ta'-rus. 

GERUND, 
fe-ren'-di,  &c. 

Former,  la'-tum. 


PARTICIPLES. 


I 
SUPINES. 

I 


Per/,   la'-tus. 
Fut.    fe-ren'-dus. 


Latter,  la'-tu. 


^  180.     Fio  has  the  meaning  of  the  passive  voice,  though 
the  parts  formed  from  the  /£rs£  root,  except  the  pre.sent  infinitive 
12* 


138  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  $  181,  182. 

and  the  participle  in  dus,  have  the  terminations  of  the  active. 
In  its  other  parts,  it  has  passive  terminations.  It  is  used  as 
the  passive  voice  of  facio,  which  has  no  regular  passive. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Perf.  Part. 

Fi'-o,  fi'-g-ri,  fac'-tus,        to  be  made  or  to  become 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fi'-o,  fis,  fit  ;  Perf.        fac'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 

P.  fi'-mus,  fi'-tis,  fi'-unt.  Plup.       fac'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-£-ram. 

Imperf.     fi-e'-bam.  Fut.  perf.  fac'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-£-ro. 
Put.         fi'-am. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.   fi'-am.  Plup.  fac'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is/- 

Imp.    fi'-g-rem.  sem. 

Perf.  fac'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

5.  fi  or  fi'-to,  fi'-to  ;  Pres.  fi'-6-ri. 

P.  fi'-te  or  fi-to'-te,  fi-un'-to.         Perf.  fac'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se, 

Fut.    fac'-tum  i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES.  SUPINE. 

Perf.  fac'-tus.  Latter,  fac'-tu. 

Fut.    fa-ci-en'-dus. 

NOTE.  The  compounds  of  facio  which  retain  a,  have  also  fio  in  the 
passive  ;  as,  calefacio,  to  warm  ;  passive,  caleflo  ;  but  those  which  change 
a  into  i  form  the  passive  regularly.  Yet  confit.  defit,  and  infU.  occur. 
See  §  183,  12,  13,  14. 

<$>  181.  EDO,  to  eat,  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  third  con- 
jugation ;  but  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  imperative,  and 
infinitive  moods,  and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive, 
it  resembles,  in  some  of  its  persons,  the  same  tenses  of  sum  •  — 
Thus, 

Tnd.  pres.  -  ,     -  ,     est  ;        -  ,  -  ,  -  . 

Subj.  imperf.     -  ,     es'-ses,  es'-set  ;  es-se'-mus,  -  ,  -  . 

Imperat.  ^     -  ;  es'-te, 


Inf.  pres.  es'-se. 

Ind.  pres.  pass.  -  ,     -  ,  es'-tur. 

NOTE.    In  the  present  subjunctive,  edim,  edis,  &c.,are  found, 
adas,  &c. 
In  the  compounds  of  edo,  also,  forms  resembling  those  of  sum  occur. 

$  182.     Eo  is  irregular  in  the  parts  which,  in  other  verbs, 
are  formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  imperfect  subjunctive, 


<$>    183.  DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  139 

and  the  present  infinitive.  In  these,  and  in  the  parts  formed 
from  the  second  and  third  roots,  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the 
fourth  conjugation. 

NOTE.    Eo  has  no  first  root,  and  the  parts  usually  derived  from  that 
root,  consist,  in  this  verb,  of  terminations  only. 

Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Perf.  Indie.       Perf.  Part. 

E'-o,  i'-re,  i'-vi,  i'-tum,         to  go. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.    S.  e'-o,  is,  it ;  Put.    S.  i'-bo,  i'-bis,  i'-bit ; 

P.  i'-mus,  i'-tis,  e^-unt  P.  iV-i-mus,  ib'-t-tis,  i'-bunt 

Imperf.  S.  i'-bam,  i'-bas,  i'-bat ;       Perf.       i'-vi. 

P.  i-ba'-mus,    i-ba'-tis,       Plup.       iv'-e-ram. 
i'-bant  Fut.perf.  iv'-6-ro. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.     S.  e'-am,  e'-as,  e'-at ;  Perf.   iv'-e'-rim. 

P.  e-a'-mus,  e-a'-tis,  e'-ant  Plup.  i-vis'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  i'-rem,  i'-res,  i'-ret ; 

P.  i-re'-mus,  i-re'-tis,  i'-rent 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

S.  i  or  i'-to,  i'-to ;  Pres.  i'-re. 

P.  i'-te  or  i-to'-te,  e-un'-to.  Perf.  i-vis'-se. 

Put.   i-tu'-rus  esK-se. 

PARTICIPLES.  GERUND. 

Pres.  i'-ens,  (gen.  e-un'-tis.)  e-uiy-di,  &-C. 


Put.     i-tu'-rus. 


Remarks. 


1.  7am,  ieSy  iet,  are  sometimes  found  in  the  future.    Istis,issemj  and  isse, 
are  formed  by  contraction  for  ivistis,  ivissem,  and  imsse.     See  §  162,  7. 

2.  In  the  passive  voice  are  found  the  infinitive  iri,  and  the  third  persons 
singular  itur,  ibatur, ibltur,  itum  estt  &c. ;  eatur,  iretur,   eundum   est,    &c., 
which  are  used  impersonally. 

3.  The  compounds  of  eo,  including  veneo,  are  conjugated  like  the  sim- 
ple verb,  but  most  of  them  have  ii  in  the  perfect  rather  than  ivi.     §  176. 
Adeo,  anteeo,  ineo,  prcetereo,  subeo,  and  transeo,  being  used  actively,  are 
found  in  the  passive  voice.     Iniztur  occurs  as  a  future  passive  of  ineo 
Ambio  is  regular,  like  audio,  but  has  either  amblbat  or  ambiebat. 

Queo  and  nequeo  are  conjugated  like  eo,  but  they  want  the  imperative 
mood  and  the  gerund,  and  their  participles  rarely  occur.  They  are  some 
times  found  in  the  passive  voice,  before  an  infinitive  passive. 

DEFECTIVE  VERBS. 

§  183.  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  used 
in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  persons. 


140  DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  §   183. 

There  are  many  verbs  which  are  not  found  in  all  the  tenses,  numbers, 
and  persons,  exhibited  in  the  paradigms.  Some,  not  originally  defective, 
are  considered  so,  because  they  do  not  occur  in  the  classics  now  extant. 
Others  are  in  their  nature  defective.  Thus,  the  first  and  second  persons 
of  many  verbs  in  the  passive  voice  must  be  wanting,  from  the  nature  of 
their  signification. 

The  following  list  contains  such  verbs  as  are  remarkable  for 
wanting  many  of  their  parts  : — 

1    Odi,  I  hate.  7.  Quseso,  I  pray.  12.  Confit,  it  is  done. 

2.  Cojpi,  I  have  begun.        8.  Ave,    >  ,    7  13.  Defit,  it  is  wanting. 

3.  Memini,  / remember.       9.  Salve,  $M  14.  Infit,  he  begins. 

4.  Aio,         )  j  10.  Apage,  begone.  15.  Ovat,  he  rejoices. 

5.  Inquam,  $    sa^'  11.  Cedo,  tell,  or  give 

6.  Fan,  to  speak.  me. 

1.  Odi,  c&pi,  and  memzni,  are  used  chiefly  in  the  perfect  and 
in  the  other  parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  and  are  thence 
called  preteritive  verbs  : — Thus, 

IxD.perf.  o'-di  or  p'-sus  sum ;  plup.  od'-g-ram ;  fut.  perf.  od'-g-ro. 
SUBJ.  perf.  od'-e'-rim ;  plup.  o-dis'-sem.        INF.  perf.  o-dis'-se. 
PART.  fut.  o-su'-rus ;  perf.  o'-sus. 

NOTE.  Exosus  and  perosus,  like  osus,  are  used  actively.  Odlvit,  for 
odit,  occurs  in  Cicero. 

2.  IND.  perf.  cre'-pi ;  plup.  ccep'-e'-ram ;  fut.  perf.  coep'-€-ro. 

SUBJ.  perf.  ccep'-S-rim ;  plup.  cce-pis'-sem.        INF.  perf.  co3-pis'-se. 

FART.  fut.  crep-tu'-rus ;  perf.  coBp'-tus. 

NOTE.  In  Plautus  are  found  a  present,  co2jrio,  present  subjunctive, 
cozpiam,  and  infinitive  compere.  Before  an  infinitive  passive,  cceptus  esty 
&c.,  rather  than  ccepi,  &c.,  are  commonly  used. 

3.  INDUCT/,  mem'-i-ni ;  plup.  me-min'-e'-ram ;  fut.  perf.  me-min'-e'-ro. 
SUBJ.  perf.  me-min'-g-rim ;   plup.   mem-i-nis'-sem. 

INF.  perf.  mem-i-nis'-se. 

IMPERAT.  2pers.  me-men'-to,  mem-en-to'-te. 

NOTE.  Odi  and  memtni  have,  in  the  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  present, 
and,  in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  imperfect  and 
future.  In  this  respect,  novi,  I  know,  the  perfect  ofnosco,  to  learn,  agrees 
with  odi  and  memlni.  So  also,  consuevi,  I  am  wont. 

4.  IND.  pres.   ai'-o,*  a'-is,t  a'-it ;  , ,  ai'-unt.* 

imp.   ai-e'-bam,  ai-e'-bas,  ai-e'-bat ;  ,  ai-e-ba'-tis,  ai-g'-bant. 

SUBJ.  pres. ,  ai'-as,  ai'-at;  ,  • ,  ai'-ant. 

IMPERAT.    a'-i.        PART.  pres.  ai'-ens. 

5.  IND.  pres.  in'-quam  or  m'-qm-o,in'-quis,in'-qmt;m'-qii!-mufl,  in'-qul- 

tis,  m7-qui-unt. 

imp.  , ,  in-qui-e'-bat ;  , , . 

fut.     ,  in'-qui-es,  inf-qui-et ;  ,  — ,  — . 

perf-  ,  in-quis'-ti,  in'-quit;  , , . 

SUBJ.  pres. , ,  in'-qui-at ;  ,  — — , . 

IMPERAT.     in'-que,  in'-qui-to. 

•  Pronounced  a  -yo,  x'-yunt,  &c.   See  $  9.  t  ais  with  ne  is  contracted  to  am' 


$   184.  IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  141 

6.  IND.  pres. , ,  fa'-tur  ;  fat.  fa'-bor, ,  fab'-Mur. 

IMPERAT.  fa'-re.       PART.  pres.  fans  ;  perf.  fa'-tus ;  fat.  fan'-dus. 
INFIN.  pres.  fa'-ri.     GERUND,  gen.  fan'-di ;  all.  fan'-do.    SUPINE,  fa'-tu. 

In  like  manner  the  compounds  ajfari,  ejfdri,  and  profari. 

7.  IND.  pres.  quae'-so, ,  quee'-sit;  quses'-u-mus, ,  — . 

INF.  pres.  quces'-e-re. 

8.  IMPERAT.  a'-ve,  a-ve'-to;  a-ve'-te.        INF.  a-ve'-re. 

9.  IND.  pres.  sal'-ve-o.  fat.  sal-ve'-bis.        INF.  pres.  sal-ve'-re. 
IMPERAT.  sal'-ve,  sal-ve'-to ;  sal-ve'-te. 

10.  IMPERAT.  ap'-a-ge. 

11.  IMPERAT.  sing,  and^for.  cef-do;  pi.  cet'-te/or  ced'-i-te. 

12.  IND.  pres.  con'-fit;  fat.  con-fi'-et. 

SUBJ.  pres.  con-fl'-at ;  imperf.  con-fi'-e-ret.        INF.  pres.  con-fi'-6-ri. 

13.  Ixv.prcs.  de'-fit;  pi.  de-fl'-unt.       SUBJ.  pres.  de-fl'-at. 
INF.  pres.  de-fi'-e-ri. 

14.  IND.  pres.  in'-fit ;  pi.  in-fl;-unt. 

15.  IND. pres.  o'-vat.         SUBJ. pres.  o'- vet;  imperf.  o-va'-ret. 
PART.  pres.  o'-vans ;  pcrf.  o-va'-tus.         GERUND,  o-van'-di. 

REMARK  1.  Among  defective  verbs  are  sometimes,  also,  included  the 
following- — Forem,  fores,  &c.,  fore,  (see  §154,3.)  Ansim,  ausit;  ausint. 
Faxo  a.nafaxim,faxis,faxit1faxlmus}ifaxttis,faxint.  Faxem.  The  form 
in  o  is  an  old  future  perfect ;  that  in  im  a  perfect,  and  that  in  em  a  plu- 
perfect, subjunctive.  See  §  162,  9. 

2.  In  the  present  tense,  the  first  person  singular,  faro,  to  be  mad,  and 
dor  and  der,  from  do,  to  give,  are  not  used. 

3.  A  few  words,  sometimes  classed  with  defectives,  are  formed  by  con- 
traction from  a  verb  and  the  conjunction  si ;  as,  sis  for  si  vis,  sultis  for  si 
mdtis,  sodes  for  si  audes. 


IMPERSONAL  VERBS. 

<§>  184.  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used  only 
in  the  third  person  singular,  and  do  not  admit  of  a  per- 
sonal subject. 

1.  Their  English  is  generally  preceded  by  the  pronoun  it, 
especially  in  the  active  voice  ;  as,  delcctat,  it  delights ;  decet,  it 
becomes  ;  contingity  it  happens ;  evenit,  it  happens  ;  scribltur, 
it  is  written,  &/c. 

They  are  thus  conjugated  : — 

IND. 


1st  Conj. 

2d  Conj. 

3d  Conj. 

4tk  Conj. 

Pres.         delectat, 

decet, 

contingit, 

evgnit, 

Imp.          delectabat, 

decebat, 

contingebat, 

eveniebat, 

Fut.           delectabit, 
Perf.          delectavit, 

decebit, 
decuit, 

continget, 
contigit, 

eveniet, 
evenit, 

Plup.         delectaverat, 

decugrat, 

contiggrat, 

evengrat, 

Fut.  perf.  delectaverit. 

decuerit. 

contiggrit. 

evengrit. 

142 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


•§.184. 


SUB.  Pres 
Imp. 
Per/. 
Plup. 

1st  Conj. 

delectet, 
delectaret, 
delectavSrit, 
delectavisset. 

2d  Conj. 
deceat, 
deceret, 
decuerit, 
decuisset. 

U  Conj. 
contingat, 
contingeret, 
contigerit, 
contigisset. 

4th  Conj. 
eveniat, 
evenlret, 
evenerit, 
evenisset. 

INF.  Pres. 
Per/. 

delectare, 
delectavisse 

decere, 
decuisse. 

contingere, 
contigisse. 

e  venire, 
evenisse. 

2.  As  the  passive  voice  of  an  active  verb  may  be  substituted 
for  the  active,  (see  §  141,  REM.)  so  that  of  a  neuter  verb  may 
be  used  in  the  third  person  singular,  instead  of  the  active  form, 
the  personal  subject  of  the  latter  being  put  in  the  ablative  with 
the  preposition  a  or  ab ;  as,  faveo  tibi,  I  favor  thee,  or  favetur 
tibi  a  me,  thou  art  favored  by  me. 


INDICATIVE 

MOOD. 

Pres.  pugnatur, 

favetur, 

curritur, 

venitur, 

Imp.    pugnabatur, 

favebatur, 

currebatur, 

veniebatur, 

Fut.     pugnabitur, 

favebitur, 

curretur, 

venietur, 

Perf.   pugnatum  est 

fautum  est  or 

cursum  est  or 

ventum  est  or 

or  fuit, 

fuit, 

fuit, 

fuit, 

Plup.  pugnatum    erat 

fautum  erat  or 

cursum   erat 

ventum  erat  or 

or  fugrat, 

fugrat, 

or  fugrat, 

fuerat, 

Fvt.p.  pugnatum    erit 

fautum  erit  or 

cursum  erit  or 

ventum  erit  or 

or  fugrit. 

fuerit. 

fugrit. 

fugrit. 

SUBJUNCTIVE 

MOOD. 

Pres.  pugngtur, 

faveatur, 

curratur, 

veniatur, 

Imp.    pugnargtur, 

favergtur, 

curreretur, 

veniretur, 

Perf.  pugnatum  sit  or 

fautum  sit  or 

cursum  sit  or 

ventum  sit  or 

fugrit, 

fugrit, 

fugrit, 

fuerit, 

Plup.  pugnatum  esset 

fautum  esset 

cursum    esset 

ventum    esset 

or  fuisset. 

or  fuisset. 

or  fuisset. 

or  fuisset. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.  pugnari, 

faveri, 

curri, 

veniri, 

Perf.  pugnatum   esse 

fautum    esse 

cursum  esse 

ventum  esse  or 

or  fuisse, 

or  fuisse, 

or  fuisse, 

fuisse, 

Fut.    pugnatum  iri. 

fautum  iri. 

cursum  iri. 

ventum  iri. 

In  like  manner  the  neuter  gender  of  the  participle  in  dus, 
formed  from  neuter  verbs,  is  used  impersonally  with  est,  &c., 
in  the  periphrastic  conjugation  ;  as,  moriendum  est  omnibus,  all 
must  die.  See  §  162,  15. 

Remarks. 

1.  Grammarians  usually  reckon  only  ten  real  impersonal  verbs,  all  of 
which  are  of  the  second  conjugation.  (See  §  169.)  There  seems,  how- 
ever, to  be  no  good  reason  for  distinguishing  those  from  other  impersonal 
verbs.  The  following  are  such  other  verbs  as  are  most  commonlv  used 
impersonally  • — 


§    185.  REDUNDANT    VERBS.  143 

(a.)  In  the  first  conjugation ; — 

Constat,  it  is  evident.         Spectat,  it  concerns.  Certatur,  it  is  contend- 
Juvat,  it  delights.               Stat,  it  is  resolved.  ed. 

Prsestat,  it  is  better.  Vacat,  there  is  leisure.  Peccatur,  a  fault  is 

Restat,  it  remains.  committed. 

(b.)  In  the  second  conjugation ; — 

Apparet,  it  appears.  Solet,  it  is  usual. 

Attinet,  it  belongs  to.         Nocet,  it  is  hurtful.  Fletur,  there  is  weep- 
Debet,  it  ought.                  Patet,  it  is  plain.  ing. 

Displicet,  it  displeases.     Pertinet,  it  pertains.  Persuadetur.       (See 
Dolet,  it  grieves.                Placet,  it  pleases.  above,  2.) 

(c.)  In  the  third  conjugation  ; — 

Aocidit,  it  happens.  Creditur,  it  is  believed.      Mittitur,  it  is  sent. 

Incipit,  it  begins.  Desinitur,  there  is  an     Scribitur,  it  is  written. 

Sufficit,  it  suffices.  end. 

(d  )  In  the  fourth  conjugation  ; — 

Convenit,  it  is  agreed  on.  Aperltur,  it  is  opened. 

Expedit,  it  is  expedient.  Sentitur,  it  is  meant. 

(e  )  Among  irregular  verbs  ; — 

Abeundum  est,  it  is  ne-     Fit,  it  happens.  Prodest,  it  avails. 

cessary  to  depart.          Interest,  it  concerns.  Refert,  it  concerns. 

Adltur.  (See  above,  2.)       Obest,  it  is  hurtful.  Superest,  it  remains. 

(/.)  To  these  may  be  added  verbs  signifying  the  state  of  the  weather,  or 
the  operations  of  nature  3  as, 

Fulgurat,  it  lightens.          LapTdat,  it  rains  stones.      Regelat,  it  thaws. 
Fulminat,  it  thunders.        Lucescit,  it  grows  light.      Tonat,  it  thunders. 
Gelat,  it  freezes.  Ningit,  it  snows.  Vesperascit,    it    ap- 

(jrandinat,  it  hails.  Pluit,  it  rains.  proaches  evening. 

2.  Impersonal  verbs,  not  being  used  in  the  imperative,  take  the  sub- 
junctive in  its  stead ;  as,  delectet,  let  it  delight.     In  the  passive  voice,  their 
perfect  participles  are  used  only  in  the  neuter. 

3.  Most  of  the  impersonal  verbs  want  participles,  gerunds  and  supines ; 
but  p&rittet  has  a  present  participle,  futures  in  rus  and  dus,  and  the  gerund. 
Pudet  and  piget  have  also  the  gerund  and  future  passive  participle. 

4.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  also  used  personally,  but  frequently  in  a 
somewhat  different  sense ;   as,  ut  TibSris  inter  eos  et  pons  interesset,  so 
that  the  Tiber  and  bridge  were  between  them. 


REDUNDANT   VERBS. 

§  185.  Redundant  verbs  are  those  which  have  differ- 
ent forms  to  express  the  same  sense. 

Verbs  may  be  redundant  in  termination ;  as,  fdbrico  and 
fabrtcor,  to  frame ; — in  conjugation  ;  as,  lavo,  -are,  and  lavo, 
-ere,  to  wash ; — or  in  certain  tenses  ;  as,  odi  and  osus  sum,  I 
hate. 


144 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 


186. 


1.  The  following  deponent  verbs,  besides  their  passive  form, 
have  an  active  in  0,  of  the  same  meaning.  The  latter,  how- 
ever, is,  in  general,  rarely  used. 

Cunctor,  to  delay.  Medicor,  to  heal. 

Depascor,  to  feed  upon.      Mereor,  to  deserve. 
Elucubror,  to  elaborate.      Metor,  to  measure. 
Fabricor,  to  frame. 
Frustror,  to  disappoint. 
Fruticor,  to  sprout. 
Impertior,  to  impart. 
Lachry  mor,  to  weep. 
Ludif  icor,  to  ridicule. 


A  dolor,  to  flatter. 
Altercor,  to  dispute. 
Amplexor,  to  embrace. 
Assentior,  to  assent. 
Aucupor,  to  hunt  after. 
Auguror,  to  foretell. 
Cachinnor,     to     laugh 

aloud. 
Com! tor,  to  accompany. 


Palpor,  to  caress. 
Populor,  to  lay  waste. 
Ruminor,  to  ruminate. 
Velif  Icor,  to  set  sail. 
Vociferor,  to  bawl. 
Urlnor,  to  dive. 


2.  The  following  verbs  are  redundant  in  conjugation : — 

Cieo,-ere,    \tnprritp  Fulgeo, -ere,   >     to  Strideo, -ere,  >     to 

Cio,  -Ire,  r.  5  w  Fulgo,  -ere,  r.  5  shine.        Strido,  -ere,    S  creak. 

Denso,  -are,      >      to  Lavo,  -are,     )  , 

Denseo,-ere,r.  5  thicken.  LavoJ  -ere,  r.  5  to  wash" 

Ferveo,  -ere,    )    to  Lino,  -ere,      >      to 

Fervo,  -ere,  r.  )  boil.  Linio,  -Ire,  r.  J  anoint. 

Fodio, -ere,      >       , .  Scateo, -ere,  )       to 


Fodio,  -ire,  r. 


[  to  dig. 


Those  marked 
Scato,  -ere,  r.  j  abound.  rarely  used. 


Morior,  orior,  and  potior,  also,  are  redundant  in  conjugation  in  certain 
parts.     See  in  lists  §  §  174  and  177. 

§  186.  1.  Some  verbs,  also,  are  spelled  alike,  or  nearly 
alike,  but  differ  in  conjugation,  quantity,  pronunciation,  or 
signification,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

Such  are  the  following  : — 

Abdico,  -are,   to  abdi-      Caneo,  -£re,to  be  white, 
cate.  Careo,  -ere,  to  want. 

Caro,  -Sre,  to  card  wool. 
Celo,  -are,  to  conceal. 
Caelo,  -are,  to  carve. 


Abdico,  -Sre,  to  refuse. 
Accido,  -ere,  to  hap- 
pen, 


Accido,     -ere,    to    cut     Censeo,  -ere,  to  think. 


short. 
Addo,  -ere,  to  add. 
Adeo,  -Ire,  to  go  to. 


Sentio,  -Ire,  to  feel. 
Claudo,  -ere,  to  shut. 


Consterno,  -are,  to  ter- 
rify. 

Consterno,  -ere,  to 
strew  over. 

Decido,  -ere,  to  fall 
down. 

Decido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 

Decipio,-ere,  to  deceive. 


Claudo,  -ere*,  to  be  lame.      Desipio,  -e"re,  to  dote. 


Aggero,   -are,   to  heap     CollTgo,    -are,    to     tie     Deligo,  -are,  to  tie  up. 


up. 


together. 


Deligo,  -gre,  to  choose 


Aggero,   -ere,   to  heap      Colligo,  -ere,  to  collect.      Diligo,  -ere,  to  love. 


upon. 

Allege,  -are,  to  depute. 
Allego,  -ere,  to  choose. 
Appello,  -are,  to  call. 


Colo,  -are,  to  strain. 
Colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate. 


Dlco,  -ere,  to  say. 
DTco,  -are,  to  dedicate. 


Compello,  -are,  to  ac-      Edo,  -ere,  to  eat. 


cost. 


Edo,  -6re,  to  publish. 


Appello, -ere,   to  drive     Compello,  -&re,  to  force.      Educo,  -are,  to  educate. 


to. 

Cado,  -ere,  to  fall. 
Coedo,  -ere,  to  cut. 
Cedo,  -ere,  to  yield. 
Caleo,  -ere,  to  be  hot. 


Concldo,  -ere,  to  chop      Educo,  -6re,   to   draw 


off- 

Concido,  -ere,  to  fall. 
Conscendo,    -ere,    to 

climb. 


out. 
Effero,   -are,  to    make 

wild. 
Effero,  -re,  to  carry  out. 


Calleo,  -ere,  to  be  hard.      Conscindo,  -gre    to  cut     Excido,  -gre,  to  fallout. 
Cano,  -Sre,  to  sing.  in  pieces.  Excido,  -ere,  to  cut  ojff. 


186. 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 


145 


Feno,  -Ire,  to  strike. 
Fero,  -re,  to  bear. 
Ferior,  -ari,  to  keep  hol- 

iday. 

Frigeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold. 
Frigo,  -ere,  to  fry. 
Fugo,   -are,  to  put  to 

flight. 

Fugio,  -Sre,  to  fly. 
Fundo,  -are,  to  found. 
Fundo,  -ere,  to  pour  out. 
Incido,  -ere,  tofallinto. 
Incldo,  -ere,  to  cut. 
Indico,  -are,  to  show. 
Indleo,    -ere,    to    pro- 

claim. 

Inficio,  -ere,  to  infect. 
Infitior,  -ari,  to  deny. 
Intercido,  -ere,  to  hap- 

pen. 
Tntercido,   -e"re,   to  cut 

asunder. 

Jaceo,  -ere,  to  lie  down. 
Jacio,  -gre,  to  throw. 
Labo,  -are,  to  totter. 
Labor,  -i,  to  glide. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  suckle. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  deceive. 
Lego,  -are,  to  send. 
Lego,  -8re,  to  read. 
Liceo,  -ere,  to  be  lawful. 
Liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  for. 
Liquo,  -are,  to  melt. 
Liqueo,  -ere,  to  be  man- 

ifest. 

Liquor,  -i,  to  melt. 
Mano,  -are,  to  flow. 


M&neo,  -ere,  to  stay. 
Mando,  -are,  to  command. 
Mando,  -gre,  to  eat. 
Meto,  -ere,  to  reap. 
Metor,  -ari,  to  measure. 
Metior,  -Iri,  to  measure. 
Metuo,  -ere,  to  fear. 
Miseror,  -ari,  to  pity. 
Misereor,  -eri,  to  pity. 
Moror,  -ari,  to  delay. 
Morior,  -i,  to  die. 
Niteo,  -ere,  to  glitter. 
Nitor,  -i,  to  strive. 
Obsero,  -are,  to  lock  up. 
Obsero,  -ere,  to  sow. 
Occldo,  -Sre,  to  fall. 
Occldo,  -ere,  to  kill. 
Operio,  -Sre,  to  cover. 
Operor,  -ari,  to  work. 
Opperior,  -Iri,  to   wait 

for. 

Pando,  -are,  to  bend. 
Pando,  -ere,  to  open. 
Paro,  -are,  to  prepare. 
Pareo,  -ere,  to  appear. 
Pario,    -ere,    to   bring 

forth. 

Pario,  -are,  to  balance. 
Pendeo,  -ere,  to  liang. 
Pendo,  -Sre,  to  weigh. 
Percolo,  -are,  to  filter. 
Percolo,  -ere,  to  adorn. 
Permaneo,  -ere,  to  re- 

main. 
Permano,  -are,  to  flow 

over. 
Prsedico,  -are,  to  publish. 


Prcedlco,  -Sre,  to  fore- 

tell. 

Prodo,  -gre,  to  betray. 
Prodeo,    -Ire,    to  com* 

forth. 

Recede,  -£re,  to  retire. 
Recldo,    -ere,    to  fait 

back. 

Recldo,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Reddo,  -ere,  to  restore. 
Redeo,  -ire,  to  return. 
Refero,    -re,    to   bring 

back. 
Referio,  -Ire,  to  strike 

back. 

Relego,  -are,  to  remove. 
Relego,  -ere,   to    read 

over. 

Sedo,  -are,  to  allay. 
Sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit. 
Sldo,  -ere,  to  si?ik. 
Sero,  -ere,  to  sow. 
Sero,  -ere,  to  knit. 
Succido,  -ere,  to  fall 

down. 
Succido,    -ere,    to   cut 

down. 

Vado,  -ere,  to  go. 
Vador,  -ari,  to  give  bail. 
Veneo,  -Ire,  to  be  sold, 
Venio,  -Ire,  to  come. 
Venor,  -ari,  to  hunt. 
Vincio,  -Ire,  to  bind. 
Vinco,  -ere,  to  conquer. 
Volo,  -are,  to  fly. 
Volo,  velle,  to  be  will- 

ing. 


2.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes  the  same  perfect ;  as, 


Aceo,  acui,  to  be  sour. 
Acuo,  acui,  to  sharpen. 
Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow. 
Cerno,  crevi,  to  decree. 
Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine. 
Fulcio,  fulsi,  to  prop. 


Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine. 
Luffeo,  luxi,  to  mourn. 
Mulceo,     mulsi,      to 

soothe. 

Mulgeo,  mulsi,  to  milk. 
Paveo,  pavi,  to  fear. 


Pasco,  pavi,  to  feed. 
Pendeo,     pependi,     to 

hang. 
Pendo,      pependi,     to 

weigh. 


To  these  add  some  of  the  compounds  of  sto  and  sisto. 

3.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes,  also,  the  same  supine  or 
perfect  participle  ;  as, 


Frico,  frictum,  to  rub. 
Frigo,  frictum,  to  roast. 
Maneo,  mansum,  to  remain. 
Mando,  mansum,  to  chew. 
Pango,  pactum,  to  drive  in. 
Paciscor,  pactus,  to  bargain. 

13 


Pando,  passum,  to  open. 
Patior,  passus,  to  suffer. 
Teneo,  tentum,  to  hold. 
Tendo,  tentum,  to  stretch. 
Verro,  versum,  to  brush. 
Verto,  versum,  to  turn. 


146  DERIVATION    OF    VERBS.  ^    187. 


DERIVATION  OF  VERBS. 

<§»  187.     Verbs  are  derived  either  from  nouns,  adjectives,  or 
other  verbs 

1.  Verbs  derived   from   nouns    or    adjectives     are  called 
denominatives. 

I.  Those  which  are  active  are  generally  of  the  first  conjuga- 
tion ;  those  which  are  neuter  of  the  second.     They  are  usually 
formed  by  adding  o  or  eo  to  the  root ;  as, 

Actives  from  Nouns.  Neuters  from  Nouns. 

Armo,  to  arm,  (ar«na.)  Floreo,  to  bloom,  (tios.) 

Fraudo,  to  defraud,  (fraus.)  Frondeo,  to  produce  leaves,  (frona 

Noinino,  to  name,  (ixomen.)  Luceo,  to  shine,  (lux.) 

Numfiro,  to  number ,  (numerus.)  Vireo,  to  flourish,  (vis.) 

From  Adjectives. 

Albo,  to  whiten,  (albus.)  Albeo,  to  be  white,  (albus.) 

Celebro,  to  celebrate,  (celgber.)  Calveo,  to  be  bald,  (calvus.) 

LibSro,  to  free,  (liber.)  Flaveo,  to  be  yellow,  (flavus.) 

Sometimes  a  preposition  is  prefixed  in  forming  the  derive 
tive ;  as, 

Coacervo,  to  heap   together,  (acer-     Extirpo,  to  extirpate,  (stirps.) 

vus.)  Illaqueo,  to  insnare,  (laqueus.) 

Excavo,  to  excavate,  (cavus.) 

2.  Many  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation,  derived  from  nouns,  express 
the  exercise  of  the  character,  ofiice^  &c.  denoted  b}  Vie  primitive  ;  a? , 
architector,  to  build  ;  com/ltor,  to  accompany  ;  furor,  to  steal ;  from  archi- 
tectus,  comes,  said  fur. 

3.  Such  as  denote  resemblance  or  imitation  are  c;  lied  imitatives;  as, 
cormcor,  to  imitate  a  crow,  from  comix;  Gracor,tcs  imitate  the  Greeks. 
Some  of  these  end  in  isso  ;  as,  patrisso,  to  imitate  a  father. 

II.  Verbs  derived  from  other  verbs  are  ehhwfrequentatives, 
inceptives,  desideratives,  diminutives,  or  intenstves. 

1.    Frequentatives   express    the    frequent   repetition   of   the 
action  denoted  by  the  primitive. 

They  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  formed  from  the 
third  root.  In  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  dtu  is  changed 
into  itOj  and  rarely  u  intoo;  as,  clamo,  to  cry,  (clamdtu,)  clamito, 
to  cry  frequently  ;  no,  to  swim,  (natu,)  nato.  In  verbs  of  the 
other  three  conjugations,  u  is  changed  into  o,  rarely  into  ito 
as,  curro,  to  run,  (cursu,)  cur  so,  or  curslto,  to  run  frequently. 

Some  are  derived  from  the  present,  or  perhaps  from  an  obsolete  third 
root  •  as,  ago,  (agltu,)  aglto. 


§   188.  COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS.  147 

Some  frequentatives  are  deponent ;  as,  wmUpr,  from  minor  (mindtu)  ] 
Terser,  from  verto  (wersu).  So  sector,  loqititor,  from  sequor  and  loquor. 

Verbs  of  this  class  do  not  always  express  frequency  of  action,  but  have 
sometimes  nearly  the  same  meaning  as  their  primitives. 

2.  Inceptives,,  or  inchoatives,  mark  the  beginning,  or  increased 
degree  of  the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  primitive. 

They  all  end  in  sco,  and  are  formed  by  adding  that  termina- 
tion to  the  root  of  the  primitive,  with  its  connecting  vowel 
which,  in  the  third  conjugation,  is  t ;  as,  caleo,  to  be  hot ; 
calesco,  to  grow  hot. 

So  labo,  tabasco;  ingemo,  ingemisco ;  obdormio,  obdormisco.  Hisco  is 
contracted  forkiasco,  from  hio. 

Most  inceptives  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Some  inceptives  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives,  by  adding  asco 
or  esco  to  the  root ;  as,  puerasco,  from  puer  ;  juvenesco,  t'romjuvenis. 

Some  inceptives  have  the  same  meaning  as  their  primitives;  as,  adhair 
resco. 

NOTE.    Inceptives  are  all  neuter,  and  of  the  third  conjugation.  See  §  173 

Some  verbs  in  sco  which  are  not  inceptives  are  active  ;  as,  disco,  posco. 

3.  Desideratives  express  a  desire  of  doing  the  act  denoted  by 
the  primitive. 

They  are  formed  from  the  third  root,  by  adding  urio ;  as, 
c&no,  to  sup,  (candt,)  ccenaturio,  to  desire  to  sup. 

Desideratives  are  all  of  the  fourth  conjugation.     See  §  176,  NOTE. 
Verbs  in  urio,  having  u  long,  are  not  desideratives  ;  as,  prurio,  decurio. 

4.  Diminutives  denote  a  feeble  or  trifling  action.     They  are 
formed  by  adding  illo  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  cantillo, 
to  sing  a  little — from  canto. 

They  are  few  in  number,  and  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation. 

5.  Intensives  denote  eager  action.     They  are  usually  formed 
by  adding  so,  esso,  or  isso  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as, 
facesso,  to  act  earnestly — from  facio. 

So  capesso,  inccsso,  from  co.pio  and  incedo.  Concupisco,  to  desire  greatly, 
is  also  an  intensive 


COMPOSITION  OF  VERBS. 

§  188.     Verbs  are  compounded  variously  : — 

1.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb;  as,  cedifico,  bettigero,  lucrifado. 

2.  Of  an  adjective  and   a  verb;  as,  amplifico,  multiplied, 
vilipendo. 

3.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  calefacio,  madefacio,  patefado. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb  ;  as,  benefado,  maledico,  satago, 
nolo,  negligo. 


148  COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS.  §   189 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  adduce,  excolo,  prodo, 
subrepo,  discerno,  sejungo. 

6.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun  ;  as,  pernocto,  irretio. 

§  189.  In  composition,  certain  changes  often  occur  in  the 
radical  letters  of  the  simple  verb. 

1.  The  following  simple  verbs  in  composition  change  a  into  e : 

Arceo,  Carpo,  Farcio,  Jacto,  Pario,  Patro,  Spargo, 
Candeo,  Damno,  Fatiscor,  Lacto,  Partio,  Sacro,  Tracto. 
Capto,  Fallo,  Gradior,  Mando,  Patior,  Scando, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  amando,  pramando,  desacro,  and  retracto ;  prcs 
damno  and  pertracto  sometimes  also  occur.  A  is  also  changed  into  e  in 
depeciscor  from  paciscor,  occento  from  canto,  and  anhelo  from  halo  ;  com- 
pereo  also  is  found. 

2.  The  following  change  a,  cet  and  e,  into  i : 

Ago,  Capio,  Habeo,  Pango,  Rego,  Statno, 

Apiscor,  Egeo,  Jacio,  Placeo,  Salio,  (to  leap,)  Taceo, 

Cado,  Emo,  Lacio,  Premo,  Sapio,  Tango, 

Csedo,  Fateor,  Lsedo,  Qusero,  Sedeo,  Teneo. 

Cano,  Frango,  Lateo,  Rapio,  Specio, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  circumdgo,  per  ago,  satago  ;  antehabeo,  posthabeo, 
depango,  repango  ;  complaceo  and  perplaceo.  Occano  and  recdno  also  some- 
times occur.  E  is  retained  in  coemo,  circumsedeo,  and  supersedeo.  Ante- 
capio  and  anticlpo  are  both  used ;  so  also  are  superjacio  and  superjicio. 

Cogo  and  dego  are  formed,  by  contraction,  from  con,  de,  and  ago  ;  demo, 
promo,  and  sumo,  from  de,  pro,  sub,  and  emo  ;  pr&beo,  and  perhaps  dcbeo, 
from  pra,  de,  and  habeo ;  pergo  and  surgo,  from  per,  sub,  and  rego. 

NOTE  1.  Facio,  compounded  with  a  preposition,  changes  a  into  i ;  as, 
cgicio.  Some  compounds  of  j ado  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  change  a 
into  i,  and  also  drop  i  before  o,  and  are  of  the  first  conjugation  ;  as,  signi- 
flco,  lcetiflco,inagniflco.  Specio  forms  some  compounds  in  the  same  man- 
ner ;  as,  consplcor  and  susplcor. 

NOTE  2.  Lego,  compounded  with  con,  de,  di,  e,  inter,  nee,  and  se,  changes 
t  into  i;  as,  colligo,  neghgo,  &c. ;  but  with  ad,  pra,  per,  re,  sub,  and  trans, 
it  retains  e  ;  as,  all  ego. 

NOTE  3.  Calco  and  salto,  in  composition,  change  a  into  u;  as,  inculco, 
insulto.  Plaudo  changes  au  into  o  ;  as,  explodo  ;  except  applaudo.  Audio 
changes  au  into  e  in  obedio.  Causo,  claudo,  and  quatio,  drop  a  j  as,  accuso, 
recludo,  percutio.  Juro  changes  u  into  e  in  dejero  and  pejero. 

NOTE  4.  The  simple  verbs  with  which  the  following  are 
compounded  are  not  used  : — 

Defendo,  Impedio,  ConfQto,  Instlgo,  Conniveo, 

Offendo,  Imbuo,  Refuto,  Impleo,  Percello, 

Experior,  Compello,  (-are,)  Ingruo,  Compleo,  Jnduo,        and  some 

Expedio,  Appello,  (-are,)  Coxigruo,  Renideo,  Exuo,  others. 

For  the  changes  produced  in  prepositions  by  composition  with  verb* 
see  §  196, 1. 


190,   191. 


IVERSITY 


ADVERBS. 


149 


PARTICLES. 


§  1  90.  The  parts  of  speech  which  are  not  inflected,  are 
called  by  the  general  name  of  particles.  They  are  adverbs, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections.  A  word  may 
sometimes  belong  to  two  or  more  of  these  classes,  according  to 
its  connection. 


ADVERBS. 

An  adverb  is  a  particle  used  to  modify  or  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another  adverb ;  as,  bene  et 
sapienter  dixit,  he  spoke  well  and  wisely ;  egregie  fidelis, 
remarkably  faithful ;  valde  bene,  very  well. 

REMARK.  The  modifications  of  adjectives  and  verbs  which  are  effected 
by  adverbs,  may  also  generally  be  made  by  means  of  the  oblique  cases  of 
nouns  and  adjectives ;  and  many  modifications  may  be  denoted  by  these, 
for  expressing  which  no  adverbs  are  in  use.  In  general,  those  modifica- 
tions which  *  re  most  common  are  expressed  by  adverbs.  Thus,  for  mm 
sapientid,  sapienter  is  used ;  Me,  for  in  hoc  loco;  bent,  for  in  bono  modo ; 
nunCj  for  hoc  tempore,  &c. 

Adverbs  are  divided  into  various  classes,  according  to  the 
nature  of  the  modification  denoted  by  them;  as  adverbs  of 
place,  time,  manner ,  &c. 

§  191.  The  following  lists  contain  a  great  part  of  the  more 
common  adverbs,  except  those  which  are  formed,  with  certain 
regular  terminations,  from  nouns,  adjectives,  and  participles. 
These  will  be  noticed  subsequently. 

I.  Adverbs  of  Place  and  Order. 


Alia,  by  another  way. 

Alibi,  elsewhere. 

Aliciibi,  somewhere. 

Alicunde,  from  some 
place. 

Alio,  to  another  place. 

All  quo,  to  someplace. 

Aliunde,    from    else- 
where. 

Dehinc,  henceforth. 

Deinceps,  successively. 

Deinde,  after  that. 

Deriique,  finally. 

Denuo,  again. 

Deorsum,  doionward. 

Dextrorsum,   towards 
the  right. 

£a.  thai  way. 

13* 


E6,  to  that  place. 
Eodem,  to    the    same 

place. 

Exmde,  after  that. 
Foras,  out  of  doors. 
Foris,  without. 
Hac,  this  way. 
Hie,  here. 
Hinc,  hence. 
Hue,  hither. 
Horsum,  hitherward. 
Ibi,  there.  [place. 

IbTdern,  in   the   same 
Hike,  that  way. 
Jllic,  there. 
Illinc,  thence. 
lllorsum,  thithenoard. 
1116,  thither. 


Illuc,  thither. 
Inde,  then,  thence. 
Indidem,  from  the  same 
place. 


Intus,  within. 
Istac,  that  way. 
Istic,  there. 
Istinc,  thence. 
Isto, 


Necubi,  lest  any  where. 
JXeutro,  neither  way. 
Nusquam,  no  where. 
Porro,  moreover. 
Prorsum,  forward. 
Qua  ?  by  which  way  ? 


150 


ADVERBS. 


191. 


Quo?  whither  f 
Quorsum'?  whitherward  f 
Retro,  ) 

Retrorsum,  >  backward. 
Rursum,      ) 
Sicubi,  if  any  where. 
Sicunde,  if  from  any 
place. 


Sinistrorsum,  towards     Uspiam,  ) 
Usquam,  } 


the  left. 

Sursum,  upward. 
Ubi  ?  where  ? 
Ublque,  every  where. 
Ubi  vis,  any  where. 
Unde?  whence  f 


y  where. 

Utrinque,  on  both  sides. 
Utro  ?  which  way  f 
Utrobi  ?  in  which  place? 
Utroblque,    in    both 
places. 


Undique,  from  all  sides.  Utroque,  each  way. 

REMARK  1.  Most  adverbs  of  place  which  answer  the  ques- 
tions where  ?  whence  1  whither  ?  by  which  way?  and  whither- 
ward? have  a  mutual  relation  and  resemblance:  —  Thus, 

Quorsum  ? 
Horsum, 
llknsum, 
Istorsum, 


Ubi? 

Unde  ? 

Quo? 

Qua  ? 

Hie, 

Hinc, 

Hue, 

Hac, 

Illie, 

lllinc, 

lllue, 

lilac, 

Ist\e, 

Istinc, 

Istue, 

Istac. 

Ibi, 

Inde, 

E6, 

Ea, 

Ibidem, 

Indidem, 

Eodem, 

Eadem, 

Alibi, 
Alicubi, 

Aliunde, 
Alicunde, 

Alio, 
Aliquo, 

Alia, 
Aliqua, 

Aliorsum, 
Aliquoversum. 

REM.  2.     Hie,  hinc,  hue,  refer  to  the  place  of  the  speaker  ; 
istinc,  istuc,  to  the  place  of  the  person  addressed;  and 
illic,  illinc,  illuc,  to  that  of  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 

II.  Adverbs  of  Time. 


Aliquando,  sometimes. 
Aliquoties,    several 

times. 

Bis,  (see  §  119,)  twice. 
Cras,  to-morrow. 
Cum,  when. 
Demum,  at  length. 
Diu,  long. 
Dudum,  heretofore. 
Heri,  yesterday. 
Hodie,  to-day. 
Identldem,  now  and 

then. 

Illico,  immediately. 
Interdum,  sometimes. 
Interim,  in  the  mean 

time. 

Iterum,  again. 
Jam,  now. 


Jamjam,  presently.  Quater,/0wr  times. 

Jamprldem,  long  since.      Quondam,  formerly. 

Quotidie,  dally. 

Quoties  ?  how  often  ? 

Raro,  seldom. 

Rursus,  again. 

Saepe,  often. 

Semel,  once. 

Semper,  always. 

Statim,  immediately. 

Subinde,  now  and  then, 
frequently. 

Tamdiu,  so  long. 

Tandem,  at  length. 

Ter,  thrice. 


Mox,  immediately. 

Nondum,  not  yet. 

Nonnunquam,  some- 
times. 

Nudius  tertius,   three 
days  ago. 

JSunc,  now. 

Nunquam,  never. 

Nuper,  lately. 

Olim ,  formerly. 

Parumper,  a  little  while. 

Perendie,    two  days 
hence. 

Postridie,  the  day  after. 

Pridem,  heretofore. 

Pridie,  the  day  before. 

Protmus,  instantly. 


Toties,  so  often. 
Turn,  " 


Vicissim,  by  turns. 

Jamdiu,        7?  Quamdiu  ?  how  loner?        Unquam,  ever. 

JamdudumJ^ a£°'      Qwndo?  when? 

REM.  3.  Some  adverbs  are  used  to  denote  either  place,  time,  or  order 
according  to  the  connection  : — Thus, 

Ubi  may  signify  either  where  or  when ;  inde,  from  that  place  or  time ; 
hactenusj  hitherto,  in  regard  to  place  or  time. 

REM.  4..  The  interrogative  adverbs,  like  the  interrogative  pronouns, 
are  often  used  indefinitely ;  as,  nescio  ubi  sit,  I  know  not  where  he  is. 
(See  §  137,  NOTE.)  They  are  made  general  by  adding  vis,  libet,  or  que; 


<$,  192. 


DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS. 


151 


as,  ubtvis,  ublqve,  every  where ;  undelibet,  from  every  where.  The  ter- 
mination cunque  is  equivalent  to  the  English  soever  ;  as,  ubicunque,  where- 
soever. The  repetition  of  an  adverb  has  sometimes  the  same  effect;  as, 
yuoquo,  whithersoever ;  ubiubi,  wheresoever. 


III.     Adverbs  of 

Adeo,  so,  to  such  a  pass. 
Admodum,  very  much. 
Aliter,  otherwise. 
Certe,  certainly. 
Ceu,  as,  like  as. 
Cur?  why? 
•Duntaxat,  only,  at  least. 
Htiam,  truly,  yes. 
Fere,  almost. 
Ferme,  almost,  nearly. 
Fortasse,  perhaps. 
Frustra,  in  vain. 
Gratis,  freely. 
Haud,  not. 
Irnino,  yes,  truly. 
Ita,  so. 

Itldem,  in  like  manner. 
Juxta,  alike. 
Magis,  more. 
Modo,  only. 
Nae,  verily. 
Ne,  not. 

Nedum,  much  less. 
Nempe,  to  wit,  truly. 
Nequaquam,  )   by  no 
,   5 


Manner,  Quality,  &c. 

Nimium,  too  much. 
Non,  not. 
Num?  whether? 
Omnlno,  altogether,  only. 
Palam,  openly. 
Pariter,  equally. 
Parum,  little. 
Paula  tim,  by  degrees. 


Neutiquam, 
Nimlrum,  certainly. 
Nimis,  too  much. 


Paene,  almost. 
Penitus,  within,  wholly. 
Perquam,  very  much. 
Plerumque,  for.    the 

most  part. 
Potius,  rather. 
Preesertim,  especially. 
Profectd,  truly. 
Prope,  almost,  near. 
Propemodum,  almost. 
Prorsus,  wholly. 
Quam,  as. 
Quamobrem,    where- 

fore. 
Quar6?  why?  where- 

fore? 

Quasi,  as  if,  almost. 
Quemadmodum,  as. 


Quomodo?  how?  in 

what  manner  1 
Sane,  truly. 
Satis,  enough. 
Satius,  rather. 
Scilicet,  truly. 
Secus,  otherwise. 
Seorsum,  separately. 
Sic,  so. 
Sicut,  ) 


Sigillatim,  one  by  one. 
Simul,  together. 
Soluin,  only. 
Tam,  so. 
Tanquam,  as  if. 
Tantum,  >      , 

TantummSdo,  5  oniy' 
Una,  together. 
Ut,  as. 
Uti,  as. 

Utique,  therefore,  verily. 
Utpote,  as,  inasmuch  as. 
Valde,  very  muck. 


Videlicet,  certainly. 
Vix,  scarcely. 


REM.  5.  Adverbs  denoting  quality,  manner,  &c.,  are  sometimes  di- 
vided into  those  of,  1.  Quality ;  as,  bent,  matt.  2.  Certainty  ;  as,  cert&9 
vlanb.  3.  Contingence;  as,/or^.  4.  Negation;  as,  haud,  non.  5.  Prohi- 
bition; as,  ne.  6.  Swearing;  as,  hercle.  7.  Explaining;  as,  videlicet, 
utpdte.  8.  Separation ;  as,  seorsum.  9.  Joining  together ;  as,  simult 
una.  10.  Interrogation  ;  as,  cur  1  quart  ?  11.  Quantity  or  degree  ;  as, 
satis,  aded.  12.  Excess;  as,  vald&,  maxlm&.  13.  Defect;  as,  parum, 
pane.  14.  Preference ;  as,  potiiis,  satius.  15.  Likeness ;  as,  ita,  sic. 
16.  Unlikeness ;  as,  alUer.  17.  Exclusion ;  as,  tantum,  solum. 


DERIVATION   OF  ADVERBS. 

$  192*     Adverbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns, and  participles. 

I.  From  nouns. 

1.  Of  these  a  few  end  in  im,  and  denote  manner ;  as, 

gregatim,  in  herds  ;  membratim,  limb  by  limb;  gartim,  by  parts;  vicis- 
Jiiit,  by  turns  /  from  grex,  membrum,  pars,  and  vicis. 


152  DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS.  $   192. 

2.  Some  end  in  itus,  and  denote  manner  or  origin  ;  as, 

cadltus,  from  heaven  ;  fundltus,  from  the  bottom  ;  radi&tus,  by  the 
roots;  from  cesium,  fundus,  and  radix. 

3.  Some  are  ablative  cases  of  nouns  used  adverbially  ;    as, 
modb,  only  ;  vulgo,  commonly. 

II.  From  adjectives. 

1.  Those  which  are  derived  from  adjectives  of  the  first  and 
second  declension,  are  generally  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  root  ; 
as, 


£,  scarcely  ;  ati&,  high  ;  libgrt,  freely  ;  longb,  far  ;  miser  b,  miserably  ; 
plenb,  fully  ;  from  ager,  altus,  liber  ,  longus,  miser,  and  plenus.  Bcn&,  well, 
is  from  bonus,  or  an  older  form  benus. 

A  few  end  in  iter,  itus,  and  im  ;  as, 

navlter,  actively;  allter,  otherwise;  antiqultus,  anciently;  divinltus, 
divinely  ;  privatim,  privately  ;  singulatim,  severally  ;  from  navus,  alius, 
antlquus,  divlnus,  privdtus,  and  singuli. 

Some  adverbs  are  formed  with  two  or  more  of  the  above  terminations 
with  the  same  meaning  ;  as,  durb  and  durfter,  harshly  :  so  cautk,  and  can 
tim  ;  humdn&,  humaritter,  and  humarittus  ;  public^  said  publicltus. 

2.  Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  adverbs  by  adding 
iter  to  the  root,  except  when  it  ends  in  t,  in  which  case  er  only 
is  added  ;  as, 

acrlter,  sharply  ;  feliciter,  happily  ;  turplter,  basely  ;  —  deganter,  ele- 
gantly ;  prudenter,  prudently  ;  from  acer,  felix,  turpis,  elegans,  and  pru- 
dens.  From  audax,  comes  by  syncope  audacter  :  fromfortis  comes  fortlter. 

From  omnis  is  formed  omnlno  ;  and  from  nequam,  nequiier. 

3.  From  the  cardinal  numerals  are  formed  numeral  adverbs 
in  ies  ;  as, 

quinquieSj  decies,  from  quinque  and  decem.  So  toties  and  quoties,  from 
tot  and  quot.  See  §  119. 

4.  Some   adverbs    are   merely  certain   cases   of  adjectives. 
Such  are, 

(a.)  Ablatives  in  o  or  a  ;  as,  cito,  quickly  ;  continud,  immediately  ;  falso, 
falsely  ;  rectd,  straight  on  ;  und,  together.  In  like  manner,  repent&,  sud- 
denly, from  rep  ens. 

(b.)  Nominatives  or  accusatives  neuter,  in  the  singular,  and  sometimes 
in  the  plural  ;  as,  solum,  only;  perfldum,  perfidiously  ;  sublimb,  on  high; 
facllb,  easily  ;  multa,  much  ;  tristia,  sadly. 

(c.)  From  some  adjectives  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  chiefly 
ordinal  adjectives,  forms  both  in  um  and  o  are  used;  as,  primum  and 
primd,  first;  postrgmiim  and  postremo,  finally. 

NOTE  1.  These  adverbs  are  properly  adjectives  agreeing  with  some 
noun  understood,  either  definite,  as,  rectd,  sc.  vid,  or  indefinite.  Those 
in  o  are  the  most  numerous.  The  plural  forms  occur  chiefly  in  poetry. 

NOTE  2.  Some  adjectives,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification,  have 
no  corresponding  adverbs  Of  some  others,  also,  none  occur  in  the 
classics. 


<§>   193.  COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS.  153 

III.  From    the    adjective   pronouns  are  derived  adverbs  of 
place,  &c.     (See  §  191,  REM.  1.) 

The  ablative  in  o  is  used  to  denote  a  place  whither,  instead  of  the  accu- 
sative with  a  preposition  ;  as,  ed  for  ad  eum  locum  ;  and  the  ablative  in  a, 
to  denote  by  or  through  a  place ;  as,  ed  ;  vid  or  parte  being  understood. 

IV.  From  participles  are  derived   adverbs  denoting  manner. 
Those  from  present  participles  are  formed  by  adding  er  to  the 
root ;  those  from  perfects  by  adding  e,  and  sometimes  im ;  as, 

amanter,  lovingly  ;  proper  anter,  hastily;  from  amans  and  proplrans  ; — 
doct&,  learnedly ;  orndt&,  elegantly;  raptim,  by  rapine;  strictim,  closely ; 
from  doctus,  orndtus,  raptus,  and  strictus. 

The  ablative  in  o  of  some  perfect  participles,  like  that  of  adjectives, 
is  used  adverbially;  as,  auspicato,  auspiciously;  consult^,  designedly. 

NOTE.  A  few  adverbs  are  derived  from  prepositions;  as,  clanculum, 
privately ;  from  clam  ; — subtus,  beneath ;  from  sub. 


COMPOSITION  OF  ADVERBS. 

§  193.      Adverbs  are  compounded  variously  : — 

1.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun ;  as,  postridie,  magnop&re,  summopSrc, 
multimodis,  quotannis — of  postlro  die,  magno  op&re,  summo  opgre,  muUis 
modis,  quot  annis. 

2.  Of  a  pronoun  and  a  noun ;  as,  hodie,  quart,  quomddb — of  hoc  die, 
qud  re,  &c. 

3.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun ;  as,  nudius,  scepenumSro — of  nunc  dies, 
&x;. 

4.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  comlnus,  eminus,  illico,  obviam, 
postmodo,  propediem — of  con,  e,  and  manus;  in  and  loco  ;  ob  and  oiam,  &c. 

5.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun;  SLS,aUdqui,ceterdqui—oFalius,ceterus, 
and  qui. 

6.  Of  a  pronoun  and  an  adverb  ;  as,  aliquandiu,  alicubi — ofaliquis,  diu, 
and  ulti  ;  nequaquam—of  ne  and  quisquam. 

7.  Of  two  verbs  ;   as,  ilicet,  scilicet,  videlicet — of*  ire,  scire,  videre,  and 
licet. 

8.  Of  a  verb  and  an  adverb ;  as,  quotibet,  ufams,  undelibet.     So  dein- 
ceps — from  dein  and  capio. 

9.  Of  a  participle  with  various  parts  of  speech;  as,  deorsum^  dextrorsum, 
horsum,  retrorsum,  sursum — of  de,  dexter,  hie,  retro,  super,  and  vorsus  or 
versus. 

10.  Of  two  adverbs ;  as,  jamdudum,  quousque,  sicut. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective;  as,  denuo,  imprimis — of  de  novo, 
in  primis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun ;  as,  quapropter,  postea,  intere.a,  pra- 
tcrea — of  propter  qua,  post  ea,  &c.  •    * 

13.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adverb ;  as,  abhinc,  adhuc,  derepente,  per- 
scBpe. 


154  COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. PREPOSITIONS.     §   195. 

14.  Of  two   or   three   prepositions ;    as,   insuper,  protlnus,  inde,  dein, 
deinde,  perinde. 

15.  Of  a  conjunction  and  an  adverb     as,  necubi,  sicubi — of  ne,  si,  and 
alicubi. 

16.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  termination  scarcely  used  except  in  composition ; 
as,  ibidem,  parumper,  quandocunque^ublque,  utcunque. 

17.  Of  three  different  parts  of  speech ;    as,  forsltan — of  fors,  sit,  an  , 
quemadmddum,  quamobrem,  &c. 


COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  1 94.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  with  the  termina- 
tions e  and  ter,  and  most  of  those  in  0,  are  compared  like  their 
primitives.  The  comparative,  like  the  neuter  comparative  of 
the  adjective,  ends  in  ius ;  the  superlative  is  formed  from  the 
superlative  of  the  adjective  by  changing  us  into  e;  as, 

dur&j  duriiis,  durisslmb  ;  facil^^facilius^facilllm^;  acrlter,  acriiis,  accr- 
rlmb  ;  ran),  rariiis,  rarissimb  ;  matur&,  maturing,  maturisslmb  or  maturrlmk. 

Some  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  o  or  um  ;  as,  meritisstmd,  plurlmiim, 
primd  or  primiim,  potisslmiim. 

If  the  comparison  of  the  adjective  is  irregular  or  defective, 
that  of  the  adverb  is  so  likewise  ;  as, 

bene,  meliiis,  optlmb  ;  mal&,  pejits,  pesslmk  ;  parum,  minus,  minimi  ; 
multo  or  multum,  plus,  plurlmiim  ;  — ,  prius,  primd  or  primiim  ;  — ,  ocius, 
vcisslmb  ;  merfcd,  — ,  meritisslmd  ;  satis,  satiiis,  — .  Magis,  maxtmbj 
(from  magnus,)  has  no  positive;  nuper,nuperrim&,h&s  no  comparative. 
Prope,  propius,  proxlme  ;  the  adjective  propior  has  no  positive. 

Diu  and  scepe,  though  not  derived  from  adjectives,  are  yet  compared ; — 
diu,  diutius,  diutisslme  ;  sape,  s&pius,  scepissime.  A  comparative  tempe- 
rius,  from  temperi  or  tempori^  also  sometimes  occurs.  So  secus,  secius. 

Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  are  sometimes  compared  by  prefix- 
ing magis  and  maxime  ;  as,  magis  aperte,  maxime  accommodate. 


PREPOSITIONS. 

$•195.  A  preposition  is  a  particle  which  expresses  the 
relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  preceding 
word. 

Twenty-six  prepositions  have  an  accusative  after  them  : — 
Ad,  tc,  <it,for,  before.         Circa,      )  around,  Erga,  towards, opposite. 

Advers  s,   )  against,          Circum,  )      about.  Extra,  without,  beyond^ 

Advem-m,  5  towards.        t^irciter,  about,  near.  besides. 

Ante,  before.  Cis,     >  on  this  side.  Infra,  under,  beneath. 

Apud,  at,  with,  among,     Citra,  )      without.  Inter,  between,  among, 

before.  Contra,  against,  opposite.        at,  in  time  of. 


$   196.  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  155 

Intra,  within.  Post,   after ',    since,   be-  Secundum,    according 

Juxta,  near.  hind.                                    to,  along,    next    to, 

Ob,  for,  on  account  of,  Preeter,  beyond,  except,          for. 

before.  contrary  to,  before.  Supra,  above. 

Penes,  in  the  power  of.  Prope,  nigh,  by,  beside.  Trans,  over,  beyond. 

Per,  through, by,  during.  P  ropier,  for,  on  account  Ultra.,  beyond. 

Pone,  behind.  of,  near. 

Eleven  prepositions  have  an  ablative  after  them : — 
A,    ^  Cum,  with.  Proe,  before,  for,  on  ac- 

Ab,  >from,  by,  after.        De,    of,    concerning,  countof,incompar- 

Abs,)  from,  after,  for.  isonof, 


Absque,  without,   but  E,    )  from,  of,  out  of,  Pro,  for,  before,  consid- 

for.  Ex, )        by,  for,  since.  ering,  according  to. 

Coram,  before,  in  pres-  Palam,  before,  with  the  Sine,  without. 

ence  of.                                knowledge  of.  Tenus,  as  far  as,  up  to. 

Five  prepositions  take  after  them  sometimes  an  accusative, 
and  sometimes  an  ablative : — 

In,  in,  into.     Sub,  under,  near.     Super,  above.      Subter,  under,  bmeath. 

Clam,  without  the  knowledge  of. 

REMARK  1.  Prepositions  are  so  called,  because  they  are  generally 
placed  before  the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  relation  they  express.  They 
sometimes,  however,  stand  after  it. 

REM.  2.  A  is  used  only  before  consonants ;  ah  before  vowels,  and 
sometimes  before  consonants ;  abs  before  q  and  t. 

E  is  prefixed  only  to  consonants,  ex  both  to  vowels  and  consonants. 

REM.  3.  Versus,  usque,  and  exadversus  (-um)  sometimes  take  an  accu- 
sative, simul  and  procul,  an  ablative,  and  are  then  by  some  called  prep- 
ositions. Sccus,  with  an  accusative,  occurs  in  Pliny  and  Cato. 

PREPOSITIONS  IN  COMPOSITION. 

§196.  Prepositions  are  compounded  with  various  parts  of 
speech.  In  composition,  they  may  be  considered  either  in 
reference  to  their  form,  or  their  force. 

1.  Prepositions  in  composition  sometimes  retain  their  final 
consonants,  and  sometimes  change  them,  to  adapt  them  to  the 
sounds  of  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they 
are  compounded.  In  some  words,  both  forms  are  in  use ;  in 
others,  the  final  consonant  or  consonants  are  omitted. 

1.  A,  in  composition,  is  used  only  before  m  and  v ;  as,  amoveo,  avello. 
Ab  is  used  before  vowels,  and  before  d,f,  h,j,  I,  n,  r,  and  s;  as,  abjuro, 
abrogo,  &c.     Jibs  occurs  only  before  c,  q,  and  t ;   as,  abscondo,   absque, 
abstineo.     In  asporto,  b  is  dropped  ;  in  auflro  and  aufugio,  it  is  changed 
into  u, 

2.  Jld  often  changes  d  into  c,  f,  g,  I,  n,  p,  r,  s,  t,  before  those  letters 
respectively  ;  as,  accedo,  affero,  agcrredior,  alligo,  annltor,  appono,  arrtgOj 
assZquor,  attollo.    D  is  usually  omitted  before  s  followed  by  a  consonant, 


156  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  $   196. 

•    ' 

and   before  gn ;  as,  aspergo,  aspicio,  agnosco,  agndtus.     Before  q,   d  is 
changed  into  c;  as,  acqulro. 

3.  Circiim  usually  omits  m  before  a  vowel ;  as,  circueo,  circuitus.    It 
sometimes  changes  m  into  n  before  d  ;  as,  circundo. 

4.  Cum  (in  composition,  com)  retains  m  before  b,  m,  p  ;  as,  comblbo, 
committo,  compono :   before  I,  n,  r,  its  m  is  changed  into  those  letters 
respectively ;   as,  colllgo,  connltor,  corripio :  before  other  consonants,  it 
becomes  n ;  as,  conduce,  conjungo,  &c.     Before  a  vowel,  gn  or  h,  m  ia 
commonly  omitted;  as,  cogo,  coopto,  cogo  (com  ago),  cognosce,  cohablto  ; 
but  it  is  sometimes  retained ;  as,  comgdo,  comes,  comltor.     In  combiiro,  b 
is  inserted. 

5.  Ex  is  prefixed  to  vowels,  and  to  c,  h,  p,  q,  s,  t ;  as,  cxeo,  exigo,  ex- 
curro,  exhikeo,  expedio,  <fec.     Before  /,  x  is  changed  into  /;  as,  effero : 
s  after  x  is    often  omitted  ;  as,  exequor.     E  is  prefixed  to  the  other  con- 
sonants; as,  ebibo,  edico,  &c.     These,  with  the  exception  of  n  and  r,  are 
also  very  rarely  preceded  by  ex  ;  as,  exmoveo.     P  is  sometimes  preceded 
by  c  ;  as,  cpoto. 

6.  In,  before  b,  m,  p,  changes  n  into  m  ;  as,  imbuo,  immitto,  impono  : 
before  I  and  r,  it  changes  n  into  those  letters  respectively ;  as,  illlgo, 
irretio :  before  gn,  n  is  omitted ;  as,  ignarus.     In  some  compounds,  in 
retains  d  before  a  vowel,  from  an  ancient  form  endu  or  indu  ;  as,  inddgo, 
indigeo,  indolesco.     So  anciently  enduperator,  or  induperdtor. 

7.  Ob  changes  b  into  c,  /,  g,  p,  before  those  letters  respectively ;  as, 
occurro,  ojjicio,  ogganio,  oppZto.     In  omitto,  b  is  dropped. 

8.  Per  changes  r  into  I  in  pellicio  and  pelluceo. 

9.  Pro  sometimes  takes  d  before  a  vowel;  &s,prodeo,prodesse. 

10.  Sub  sometimes  changes  b  into  c,  /,  g,  m,  p,  r,  before  those  letters 
respectively ;  as,  succedo,  suffero,  suggero,  summoveo,  supptico,  surripio. 
Before  c,  p,  and  t,  b  is  sometimes  changed  into  s;  as,  suscipio,  sv-spcndo, 
sustollo  :  it  is  omitted  before  s,  followed  by  a  consonant ;  as,  suspicio. 

11.  Trans  omits  s  before  s  ;  as,  transcendo  :  before  other  consonants,  it 
often  omits  ns;  as,  trajicio,  tramitto,  trano,  &c. 

The   following   words    are    called    inseparable  prepositions, 
because  they  are  found  only  in  composition  : — 

Amb,  around,  about.  Red  or  re,  again,  back.  Ve,  not. 

Dis  or  di,  asunder.  Se,  apart,  aside. 

12.  Jlmb  before  a  vowel  is  unchanged ;  as,  ambarvalis,  ambio,  ambustus  : 
before  consonants,  b  is  omitted,  and  m,  except  before  p,  is  changed  into  n ; 
as,  anfractus,  anqulro,  amputo. 

13.  Dis  is  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  c, p,  q,  s,  t;  as,  discutio, 
dispono,  disqulro,   dissero,  distendo  :   before  /,  s  is  changed  into  /;  as, 
diffe.ro  :   in  dirlmo,  s  becomes  r.     Di  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants, 
and  to  s  when  followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  diduco,  dimitto,  distinguo^ 
dispicio.     But  both  dis  and  di  are  used  before  j  and  r  ;  as,  disjungo,  diju- 
dlco,  disrumpo  or  dirumpo. 

14.  Red  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  h  ;  re  before  a  consonant ;  as,rcrfamo, 
redea,  redhibeo,  redlgo,  redoleo,  redundo  ; — rejicio,  repono,  revertor.     But 
red  is  used  before  do  ;  as,  reddo. 

15.  Se  and  ve  are  prefixed  without  change ;  as,  sccedo,  securus  ;  vegran- 
dis,  vecors. 


§  197,  198.  CONJUNCTIONS.  157 

§  197.  II.  Prepositions  in  composition  usually  add  their 
own  signification  to  that  of  the  word  with  which  they  are 
united;  but  sometimes  they  give  to  the  compound  a  meaning 
different  from  that  of  its  simples.  The  following  are  their  most 
common  significations  : — 

1.  A,  or  ab,  away,  from,  down;  entirely;  un-.     It  sometimes  denotes 
privation. 

2.  Ad,  to,  toward ;  at,  by.    It  is  sometimes  augmentative,  rarely  incho- 
ative. 

3.  Ambi,  around,  about,  on  both  sides. 

4.  Circum,  around,  about,  on  all  sides. 

5.  Contra,  against,  opposite. 

6.  De,  off,  away,  through,  over,  down;  entirely,  completely;  very,  ex- 
tremely.   It  denotes  also  the  cessation  or  removal  of  the  fundamental  idea, 
and  hence  negation. 

7.  Dis,  asunder,  apart,  in  pieces,  in  two;  dis-,  un-;  very,  greatly. 

8.  E,  or  ex,  out,  forth,  away,  upward ;  utterly,  completely,  very.    It  some- 
times denotes  a  negation  of  the  principal  idea. 

9.  In,  in,  on,  at ;  into,  against.    With  adjectives,  un-,  in-,  not.     Some  of 
its  compounds  have  contrary  significations,  according  as  they  are  partici- 
ples or  adjectives. 

10.  Inter,  between,  among,  at  intervals. 

11.  Ob,  toward,  against,  at,  before;  around. 

12.  Per,  through,  thoroughly,  perfectly,  quite,  much,  very. 

13.  Post,  after,  behind. 

14.  Prop,,  before.    With  adjectives,  very,  extremely. 

15.  Prceter,  past,  by,  beyond,  besides. 

16.  Pro,  before,  forward,  forth  ;  for. 

17.  Re,  again,  against,  back,  re-,  un-;  greatly. 

18.  Se,  without,  aside. 

19.  Sub,  under,  from  beneath,  from  below  upwards ;  secretly,  clandes- 
tinely ;  somewhat,  a  little,  rather. 

20.  Subter,  beneath,  under,  from  under,  secretly,  privately. 

21.  Super,  above,  over,  left  over,  remaining. 

22.  Trans,  over,  across,  through ;  beyond. 

23.  Ve,  not ;  very. 

REMARK.  Prepositions  in  composition  seem  often  to  add  nothing  to  the 
signification  of  the  words  with  which  they  are  compounded. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  108.      A    conjunction    is    a    particle   which    connects 
words  or  propositions. 
14 


158 


CONJUNCTIONS. 


198 


The  most  usual  conjunctions  are, 


Ac,  and,  as,  than. 
An,  whether. 
Anne,  whether. 
Annon,  whether  or  not. 
At,  ast,  but. 
Atque,  and,  as,  than. 
Atqui,  but. 
Attamen,  yet. 
Aut,  either,  or. 
A  u tern,  but. 
Ceterum,  but,  however. 
Cum,  quura,  since. 
Cum... turn,  both.. .and. 
Duin,  provided,  while. 
Dummodo,  so  that. 
Enim,/or. 
Equidem,  indeed. 
Ergo,  therefore. 
Et,  and. 

Et...et,  both. ..and. 
Etiarn,  also. 
Etiarnsi,  although. 
Etsi,  though. 
Idcirco,  therefore. 


Ideo,  therefore. 
Igitur,  therefore. 
Itaque,  therefore. 
Licet,  though. 
Modo,  provided. 
Nam,  namque,/or. 
Ne,  lest. 
-Ne,  whether. 
Nee,  neither,  nor. 
Nec...neque,  neither... nor. 
Necne,  or  not. 
Neque,  neither,  nor. 
Neu,  neither,  nor,  and  not. 
Neu...neve,  neither... nor. 
Ni,  nisi,  unless. 
Num,  whether. 
Quam,  than. 
Quamvis,  although. 
Quando,       quandoqui- 
dem,  whereas,  since. 
Quanquarn,  although. 
Que...-qae,  both. ..and. 
Quia,  because. 
Quin,  but  that. 


Quippe,  because. 

Quo,  in  order  that. 

Quod,  because. 

Quoniam,  since. 

Quoque,  also. 

Sed,  but. 

Seu  or  sive,  or. 

Seu...sive,  whether. ..or. 

Si,  if.—- Quasi,  as  if. 

Sin,  but  if. 

Siquidem,  if  indeed^ 
since. 

Tamen,  however. 

Tametsi,  although. 

Turn.. .turn,  both.. .and. 

Ut,  that. 

Uti,  that,  to  the  end  that 

Utruin,  whether. 

-Ve,  either,  or. 

Vel,  either,  or. 

Vero,  truly. 

Verum,  but. 

Veruntamen,  notwith- 
standing. 


Conjunctions,  according  to  their  different  significations,  may 
be  divided  into  the  following  classes  : — 

1.  COPULATIVES,  or  such  as  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered 
jointly ;    as,  acy  atque,  et,  etiam,  que,  quoque,  and  the  negative   nee  or 
neque. 

2.  DISJUNCTIVES,  or  such  as  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered 
separately ;  as,  aut,  seu,  sive,  ve,  vel,  and  the  negative  neve  or  neu. 

3.  CONCESSIVES,  or  such   as  express  a  concession  5    as,  etsi,  etiamsi, 
tametsi,  licet,  quanquam,  quamvis. 

4.  ADVERSATIVES,  or  such  as  express  opposition ;  as,  at,  atqui,  aut  em, 
ceteriim,  sed,  tamen,  attamen,  veruntamen,  vero,  verum,  sin. 

5.  CAUSALS,  or  such  as  express  a  cause  or  reason;  as,  entm,  etenim, 
nam,  namque,  quando,  quandoquldem,  quia,  quippe,  quod,  quoniam,  quuin 
or  cum,  siquldcm. 

6.  ILLATIVES,  or  such  as  express  an  inference  ;  as,  ergo,  idcirco,  ideo} 
igltur,  itaque,  proinde,  quapropter,  quart,  quamobrem,  quocirca. 

7.  FINALS,  or  such  as  denote  a  purpose,  object,  or  result ;  as,  ne,  quin, 
qud,  quominus,  ut,  uti. 

8  CONDITIONALS,  or  such  as  express  a  condition ;  as,  si,  sin,  nisi  or  m, 
dummodo,  or  separately  either  dum  or  modo. 

9.  SUSPENSIVES,  or  such  as  express  doubt;  as,  an,  anne,  annon,  -nc, 
necne,  num,  utrum. 

REMARK  1.  Ac  rarely  stands  before  vowels  or  h;  atque  chiefly  before 
vowels,  but  also  before  consonants. 


<§>   199.  INTERJECTIONS.  159 

REM.  2.  The  conjunctions  -we,  -que,  -ve,  are  not  used  alone,  but  arc 
always  annexed  to  some  other  word.  They  are  called  enclitics. 

REM.  3.  Some  words  here  classed  with  conjunctions  are  also  used  as 
adverbs,  and  many  classed  as  adverbs  are  likewise  conjunctions;  that  is, 
they  at  the  same  time  qualify  verbs,  &c.,  and  connect  propositions ;  as, 
Cateris  in  rebus,  cum  venit  calamltas,  turn  detrimentum accipltur  ;  In  other 
concerns,  when  misfortune  comes,  then  damage  is  received. 

REM.  4.  Conjunctions,  like  adverbs,  are  variously  compounded  with 
other  parts  of  speech,  and  with  each  other;  as,  atque,  idcirco,  ideo, 
namque. 

In  some,  compounded  of  an  adverb  and  a  conjunction,  each  of  the  sim- 
ples retains  its  meaning,  and  properly  belongs  to  its  own  class ;  as,  etiam 
(etjam),  and  now  ;  itaque,  and  so;  neque  or  nee,  and  not. 


INTERJECTIONS. 

§  199.     An  interjection  is  a  particle  used  in  exclama- 
tion, and  expressing  some  emotion  of  the  mind. 
The  most  usual  interjections  are, 

Ah!  ah!  alas!  Euge  !  well  done!  lo \huzza! 

Atat !  ha  !  indeed  !  Evax  !  )  ,          ,  O  !  oh  ! 

Au  !  hush  !  whist !  Evoe  !  5  AMS  Oh  !   oh  !  alas  ! 

Ecce  !  lo !  behold !  Ha  !  ha !  he  !   ha!  ha !  Ohe  !  ho !  hold ! 

Ehem !  0  strange  !  Hei !  wo  !  alas  !  Oi !  hoy  !  alas  ! 

Eheu!  alas!  Hem  !  ho!  hold!  how!  Papse  !  O  strange! 

Eho  !  ehodum  !  soho  !  lo  !  bravo  !  Proh  !  oh  !  alas  ! 

Ejalon/  lieu  \  wo!  alas!  St!  hush! 

En  !  lo  !  behold  !  Ileus  !  ho  there !  mark  !  V®  !  wo! 

Eu  !  bravo  !  Hui !  away  !  ho  !  Vah  !  ha  !  alas  !  bravo ' 

REMARK  1.  An  interjection  sometimes  denotes  several  different  emo- 
tions. Thus,  vah  is  used  to  express  wonder,  grief,  joy,  and  anger. 

REM.  2.  Other  parts  of  speech  may  sometimes  be  regarded  as  inter- 
jections ;  as,  pax  !  be  still !  So  indignum,  infandum,  miserumt  miserablle, 
nefaSy  when  used  as  expressions  of  grief  or  horror. 


160  SYNTAX.  §200,201 


SYNTAX. 

§  200.  Syntax  treats  of  the  construction  of  proposi- 
tions, their  connection  and  dependence. 

A  proposition  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words.  It  con- 
sists of  a  subject  and  a  predicate. 

The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  that  of  which  something 
is  affirmed. 

The  predicate  is  that  which  is  affirmed  of  the  subject. 

Thus,  in  the  proposition,  Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs,  equus 
is  the  subject,  and  currit  is  the  predicate. 

NOTE.  The  word  affirm,  as  used  by  grammarians,  must  be  understood 
to  include  all  the  various  significations  of  the  verb,  as  expressed  in  the 
different  moods. 

SUBJECT. 

§  201.     I.  The  subject  is  either  grammatical  or  logical. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  either  a  noun,  or  some  word 
standing  for  a  noun.  The  logical  subject  consists  of  the  gram- 
matical subject,  with  its  modifications. 

Thus,  Conscientia  bene  act®  vitse  est  jucundisslma,  The  consciousness  of 
a  well-sjtent  life  is  very  pleasant.  Here  conscientia  is  the  grammatical, 
and  conscientia  ben&  actce  vita  the  logical,  subject. 

NOTE.  If  the  grammatical  subject  is  not  modified,  it  is  the  same  as  the 
logical  subject. 

II.  The  subject  is  also  either  simple  or  compound. 

A  simple  subject  is  a  single  noun  or  word  standing  for  a  noun, 
either  alone  or  variously-modified  ;  as, 

Vita  brevis  est,  Life  is  short.  Longissima  hominis  vita  brevis  estt  The 
longest  life  of  man  is  short.  Fugaces  labuntur  anni. 

A  compound  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  subjects, 
to  which  one  predicate  belongs ;  as, 

Luna  et  Btell&fulgebant,  The  moon  and  stars  were  shining.  Grammatice 
ac  musiuejunctafuerunt,  Grammar  and  music  were  united. 

REMARK.  Words  are  said  to  modify  or  limit  others,  when 
they  serve  to  explain,  describe,  enlarge,  restrict,  or  otherwise 
qualify  their  meaning. 


SYNTAX.  -  SUBJECT.  161 


Modified  Subject. 

III.  A  grammatical  subject  may  be  modified  or  limited  in 
different  ways  :  — 

1.  By  a  noun  in  the  same  case,  annexed  to  it  for  the  sake  of 
explanation  or  description  ;  as, 

Nos  consules  desumus,  We  consuls  are  remiss.  Mucius  augur  multa 
narravit,  Mucius  the  augur  related  many  things. 

2.  By  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  to  which  the 
subject  has  some  relation  ;  as, 

rfmor  multitudmis  commovetur,  The  love  of  the  multitude  is  excited, 
De  victoria  Csesaris  fama  perfertur,  A  report  of  the  victory  of  Caxar 
is  brought.  Oppida  sine  prcesidio,  Towns  without  a  garrison. 

3.  By  an  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle  ;  as, 

Fugit  invid&cetas,  Envious  time  flies.  Ducit  agmlna  Penthesilea  furens, 
Penthesilea  raging  leads  on  her  troops. 

4.  By  the  relative  qui  and  the  words  connected  with  it  ;  as, 
Lcve  Jit  quod  bene  fertur  onus,  The  burden  which  is  well  borne  becomes 

light.      Litera,  quas  scripsisti,  acccpta  sunt. 

REMARK  1.  A  noun  or  pronoun,  in  any  case,  may  be  modi- 
fied in  either  of  the  ways  above  mentioned. 

REM.  2.  An  adjective  modifying  a  noun  may  itself  be 
modified  :  — 

(1.)  By  an  adverb;  as, 

Erat  expectatio  valde  magna,  There  was  very  great  expectation. 
(2.)  By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case;  as, 

Major  pietate,  Superior  in  piety.  Contentions  cupidus,  Fond  of  conten- 
tion. 

(3.)  By  a  relative  or  other  dependent  clause  ;  as, 
Videtur,  qui  impgret,  dignus  ;  He  seems  worthy  to  command. 
(4.)  By  an  infinitive  mood,  a  gerund,  or  a  supine  ;  as, 
Insultus  vera  audlre,  Unused  to  hear  the  truth.    'Promptus  ad  agendum, 
Ready  to  act.    MiraMle  dictu,  Wonderful  to  be  spoken. 

REM.  3.  A  participle  may  be  modified  like  a  verb.  See 
5  202,  III. 

REM.  4.     An  adverb  may  be  modified  :  — 

(1.)  By  another  adverb;  as, 

Magis  apertb,  More  openly.    Valde  zchementer,  Very  vehemently. 

(2.)  By  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  adjective,  in  an  oblique  case  ;  as, 

Congruenter  naturce,  Agreeably  to  nature.    Opt\tnk  omnium,  Beat  of  all. 

REM.  5.  A  preposition  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  or  by 
a  noun  in  an  oblique  case  ;  as, 

Longe  ultra,  Far  beyond.    Multo  ante  noctem,  Long  before   night* 
Sexennio  post  Vevos  captos. 
14* 


162  SYNTAX. PREDICATE.  $  202. 

REM.  6.  A  modified  grammatical  subject,  considered  as  one 
complex  idea,  may  itself  be  modified ;  as, 

Omni  a  tua  consilia,  ML  thy  counsels.  Here  omnia  modifies,  not  consilia, 
but  the  complex  idea  tua  consilia.  So  Omnia  tua  prava  consilia. 

IV.  1.  An  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  the  words  connected 
with  it,  and  also  an  entire  clause,  may  be  the  logical  subject  of 
a  proposition ;  as, 

Mentiri  est  turpe,  To  lie  is  base.  Virtus  est  vitium  fuggre,  To  shun  vice 
is  a  virtue.  E  ccdo  descendit,  "  Nosce  te  ipsum."  JEquum  est  ut  hoc  facias. 

In  such  cases,  the  verb,  or,  if  that  be  esse,  the  verb  with  its 
predicate  noun  or  adjective,  may  be  considered  as  the  gram- 
matical subject;  as, 

Orator  em  irasci  non  decet.     JYon  satis  est,  pulchra  esse  pogmdta. 

2.  In  consequence  of  the  various  modifications  of  the  gram- 
matical subject  of  a  proposition,  the  logical  subject  may  be 
greatly  extended. 

3.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  a  proposition, 
is  put  in  the  nominative  case,  except  that,  when  the  verb  of  the 
predicate  is  an  infinitive  mood,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative. 

NOTE.  In  the  following  pages,  when  the  term  subject  alone  is  used, 
the  grammatical  subject  is  intended. 


PREDICATE. 

§  202.  I.  The  predicate,  like  the  subject,  is  either  gram- 
matical or  logical. 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  either  a  verb  alone,  or  the  cop- 
ula sum  with  a  noun,  adjective,  or  adverb.  The  logical  predi- 
cate consists  of  the  grammatical  predicate  with  its  modifications. 

Thus,  Scipio  fudit  Annibalis  copias,  Scipio  routed  the  forces  of  Hanni- 
bal. Here  fudit  is  the  grammatical,  and  fudit  Annibalis  copias  the  logical, 
predicate.  Romulus  Roman®  conditor  urbis  erat. 

NOTE.  If  the  grammatical  predicate  is  not  modified,  it  is  the  same  as 
the  logical  predicate. 

II.  The  predicate  also,  like  the  subject,  is  either  simple  or 
compound. 

A  simple  predicate  is  one  which  contains  a  single  finite* 
verb;  as, 

Brevis  est  voluptas,  Pleasure  is  brief.  Mors  venit,  Death  comes. 
Mors  sequo  pulsat  pede  pauperum  tabernas,  regumque  turres. 

A  compound  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  predi- 
cates belonging  to  the  same  subject ;  as, 

Probltas  laudatur  et  alget,  Honesty  is  praised  and  neglected. 

*  A  verb  in  airy  mood  except  the  infinitive,  is  called  a  Jmite  verb 


<§>  203.  SYNTAX. SENTENCES.  163 

Modified  Predicate. 

III.  A  grammatical  predicate  may  be  modified  or  limited  in 
different  ways : — 

1.  By  a  noun  or  adjective  in  the  same  case   as  the  subject. 
This  occurs  after  certain  neuter  verbs,  and  verbs  passive  of 
naming,  calling,  &c.  (see  §  210,  REM.  3) ;  as, 

Incedo  reglna,  I  walk  queen.    Aristldes  Justus  est  appdlatus. 

2.  By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case  ;  as, 

Deus  regit  mundum,  God  rules  the  world.  Ago  tibi  gratias.  Ex  volun- 
tate/eczf.  Spe  mvimus.  Venit  ad  urbem. 

3.  By  adverbs ;  as, 

Saepe  venit.  He  often  came.     Litlra  faci!6  discuntur. 

4.  By  an  infinitive  mood, or  other  dependent  clause;  as, 
Cupit  discgre,  He  desires  to  learn.  Vereorne  reprehendar.  Fac  cogites 

REM.  1.  An  infinitive  may  be  modified  like  the  verb  of  a 
predicate. 

REM.  2.  All  other  words  used  to  modify  verbs,  may  them- 
selves also  be  modified  in  the  ways  mentioned  under  the  article 
Modified  Subject,  §  201,  III. 

SENTENCES. 

§  203.  1.  A  sentence  may  consist  either  of  one  proposi- 
tion, or  of  two  or  more  propositions  connected  together. 

A  sentence  consisting  of  one  proposition  is  called  a  simple 
sentence. 

A  sentence  consisting  of  two  or  more  propositions,  is  called  a 
compound  sentence,  and  the  propositions  of  which  it  is  com- 
posed are  called  members,  or  clauses. 

2.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  are  either  inde- 
pendent or  dependent. 

An  independent  clause  is  one  which  makes  complete  sense 
by  itself.  A  dependent  clause  is  one  which  makes  complete 
sense  only  in  connection  with  another  clause. 

Thus,  Phocionfmt  perpetud  pauper,  cum  dtiisslmus  esse  posset;  Phocion 
was  always  poor,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich.  Here  the  former 
clause  is  independent,  the  latter  dependent. 

3.  That  member  of  a  compound  sentence  on  which  the  other 
members  depend,  is  called  the  leading  clause;  its  subject,  the 
leading  subject ;  and  its  verb,  the  leading  verb. 


164  SYNTAX. APPOSITION.  $  204. 

The  leading  verb  is  usually  either  in  the  indicative  or  imper- 
ative mood,  but  sometimes  in  the  subjunctive. 

4.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  may  be  connected 
by  relative  words,  conjunctions,  or  adverbs. 

An  infinitive  with  its  subject  may  be  united  with  another 
clause  without  a  connective. 

5.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  a  conjunction, 
a  noun  and  participle,  or  two  nouns,  sometimes  stand  as  an 
abridged  proposition  ;  as, 

Bello  confecto,  discessit,  i.  e.  quum  bellum  confectum  esset,  discessit; 
The  war  being  finished,  or  when  the  war  was  finished,  he  departed.  Nil 
dcsperandum,  Teucro  duce.  Hor. 

6.  Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  another 
in  gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

7.  A  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when  it  requires  it  to  be 
put  in  a  certain  case  or  mood. 

8.  A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another,  when  its  case,  gen- 
der, number,  mood,  tense,  or  person,  is  determined  by  that  word. 

9.  A  word  is  said  to  follow  another,  when  it  depends  upon  it 
in  construction,  whatever  may  be  its  position  in  the  sentence. 


APPOSITION. 

§  204.  A  noun,  annexed  to  another  noun  or  to  a  pro- 
noun, and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the 
same  case ;  as, 

Urbs  Roma,  The  city  Rome.  Nos  consules,  We  consuls.  So  ApuA 
Heroddtum,  patrem  historic,  sunt  innumerabllesfabulcR;  In  Herodotus,  the 
father  of  history,  &c.  Cic.  Lapldes  silices,  flint  stones.  Liv.  Fons  cui 
nomen  Arethusa  est.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  A  noun,  thus  annexed  to  another,  is  said  to  be  in  apposi- 
tion to  it.  It  is  generally  added  for  the  sake  of  explanation  or  description , 
sometimes  it  denotes  character  or  purpose ;  as,  Ejus  fugcc,  comitem  me 
adjunxi,  I  added  myself,  as  a  companion  of  his  flight ;  and  sometimes  the 
time,  cause,  reason,  &c.,  of  an  action  ;  as,  Alexander  puer,  when  a  boy. 
Both  nouns  must  belong  to  the  same  part  of  the  sentence,  either  subject  or 
predicate.  In  cases  of  apposition,  there  seems  to  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  ancient 
participle  ens,  being  ;  qui  est,  who  is  ;  qui  vocdtur,  who  is  called  ;  or  the  like. 

REM.  2.  If  the  annexed  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the 
other  noun,  it  takes  that  form  ;  as,  Usus  magister  egregius.  Plin.  Pkiloso- 
phia  magistra  vitce.  Cic. ;  and  if  a  noun  of  the  common  gender,  it  agrees 
in  gender  with  the  preceding  noun ;  as,  Laurus  fidissima  custos. 

REM.  3.  The  annexed  noun  sometimes  differs  from  the  other  in  gender ; 
as,  Duo  fulmina  belli ^  Scipiadas  ;  The  Scipios,  two  thunderbolts  in  war 
(Cic.); — sometimes  in  number;  as,  Tullidla,  delicioe  nostrcB  (Cic.)  ; — and 
sometimes  in  both  ;  as,  JYate,  mcce  vires.  Virg. 

REM.  4.    The  substantive  pronoun  is  sometimes   omitted  before  the 


§  204.  SYNTAX. APPOSITION.  165 

word  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Consul  rfm*,sc.  ego ;  (I)  the  consul  said.  In- 
stead of  the  substantive  pronoun,  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun  is  some- 
times used;  as,  Tua  domus,  talis  viri.  Cic.  See  §  211,  R.  2 

REM.  5.  A  noun  in  apposition  to  two  or  more  nouns,  is  usually  put  in 
the  plural;  as,  M.  Jlntonius,  C.  Cassius,  tribuni  plebis ;  M.  Antony,  C. 
Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people.  COBS.  Publius  et  Servius  Sulla.  Sail. 

So  when  the  nouns  are  connected  by  cum,  the  annexed  noun  taking  the 
case  of  the  former ;  as,  JDiccearchum  verd  cum  Aristoxlno,  doctos  san£  hom- 
ines, omittdmus.  Cic. 

If  the  nouns  are  proper  names  of  different  genders,  a  masculine  is  an- 
nexed rather  than  a  feminine,  when  both  forms  exist ;  as,  Ad,  Ptolemaum 
Cleopatramque  reges  legdti  missi.  Liv. 

REM.  6.  The  annexed  noun  is  sometimes  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Urbs 
Patavii ;  The  city  of  Patavium.  Virg.  Amnis  Erid&ni.  Id.  Arbor  fici. 
Cic.  No-men  Mercurii  est  mihi.  Plaut.  Rupili  et  Pers?  par.  Hor. 

REM.  7.  The  name  of  a  town  in  the  genitive  occurs  with  an  ablative 
in  apposition  to  it ;  as,  Corinthi  Achaice,  urbe  ;  At  Corinth,  a  city  of 
Achaia.  Tac.  See  §  §  221  and  254,  REM.  3. 

REM.  8.  A  proper  name,  after  nomen  or  cognomen,  with  a  verb  followed 
by  a  dative,  is  sometimes  put  in  apposition  to  the  dative,  rather  than  to 
nomen  or  cognomen ;  as,  Nomen  Arcturo  est  mihi,  I  have  the  name 
Arcturus.  Plaut.  Cui  nunc  cognomen  lulo  addttur.  Virg.  Cui  Egerio 
inditum  nomen.  Liv. 

REM.  9.  A  clause  may  supply  the  place  of  one  of  the  nouns ;  as,  Cogltet 
oratorem  institui — rem  arduam  ;  Let  him  reflect  that  an  orator  is  training — 
a  difficult  thing.  Quinct. 

REM.  10.  Sometimes  the  former  noun  denotes  a  whole,  and  its  parts 
are  expressed  by  the  nouns  in  apposition  with  it ;  as,  OneraricRj  pars  max- 
ima ad  JEgimurumj — alias  adversus  urbein  ipsam  deldtce  sunt ;  The  ships  of 
burden  were  carried,  the  greatest  part,  to  ^Ggimurus, — others  opposite 
to  the  city  itself.  Liv.  Pictores  et  poeta  suum  quisque  opus  a  vulgo  con- 
siderdri  vult.  Cic.  In  the  following  example,  quisque  is  in  the  nomina- 
tive, though  the  word  with  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  ablative  : — 
Multis  sibi  quisque  imperium  petenttbus.  Sail. 

To  this  rule  may  be  subjoined  that  which  relates  to  the  agreement  of 
interrogative  and  responsive  words. 

REM.  11.  The  principal  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  answer  to 
a  question,  must  be  in  the  same  case  with  the  corresponding  in- 
terrogative word ;  as, 

Quis  herus  est  tibi  f  Amphitruo,  sc.  est.  Who  is  your  master  ?  Amphit- 
ruo  (is.)  Plaut.  Quid  quceris?  Librum,  sc.  qu&ro.  What  are  you 
looking  for  ?  A  book.  Quota  hord  venisti?  Sexta.  At  what  hour  did  you 
come  ?  At  the  sixth. 

NOTE  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive  pronoun,  the  corre- 
sponding possessive  pronoun  is  often  used,  agreeing  with  its  noun  ;  as, 
Cujus  est  liber  1  M^us,  (not  Mei.)  (See  §  211 ,  KEM.  3.)  So  cujum  for  gen. 
cujus  ;  Cujum  pecus  ?  an  Mdibmi  1  Nun  ;  verum  JEgonis.  Virg. 

NOTE  2.  Sometimes  the  rules  of  syntax  require  the  responsive  to  be 
in  a  different  case  from  that  of  the  interrogative ;  as,  Quanti  cmistt  ? 
Viorinti  minis.  Damnatusne  es  furti ?  Imd  olio  crimine.  See  §  §  252 
and  217. 


166  SYNTAX. AD/ECTIVES.  <§>  205. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  205.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
agree  with  their  nouns,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Bonus  vir,  A  good  man.  Bonos  viros,  Good  men. 

Benigna  mater,  A  kind  mother.         Vanes,  leges,  Useless  laws. 
Triste  bellum,  A  sad  war.  Minacia  verba,  Threatening  words. 

Spe  amissd,  Hope  being  lost.  H&c  res,  This  thing. 

NOTE  1.  An  adjective,  participle,  or  pronoun,  may  either  modify  a  noun, 
or,  with  the  verb  sum,  constitute  a  predicate.  The  rule  for  their  agree- 
ment, in  both  cases,  is,  in  general,  the  same. 

NOTE  2.  In  the  following  remarks,  the  word  adjective  is  to  be  consid- 
ered as  including  participles  and  adjective  pronouns,  unless  the  contrary 
is  intimated. 

REMARK  1.  An  adjective  also  agrees  with  a  substantive  pronoun, 
taking  its  gender  from  that  of  the  noun  for  which  the  pronoun  stands ; 
as,  Jpse  capellas  asger  ago,  sc.  ego,  Melibaeus  ;  (I)  myself,  sick,  am  driving 
my  goats.  Virg.  Ut  se  totum  ei  traderet.  Nep.  O  me  mistrum  (spoken 
by  a  man),  miser  am  me  (by  a  woman).  So  salvi  sumus,  salva  sumus,  sc. 
nos,  masculine  or  feminine. 

In  general  propositions  which  include  both  sexes,  the  pronouns  are 
considered  masculine ;  as,  Nosfruges  consumer e  nati.  Hor. 

REM.  2.  An  adjective,  belonging  to  two  or  more  nouns,  is 
put  in  the  plural ;  as, 

Lupus  et  agnus  siti  compulsi,  A  wolf  and  a  lamb,  constrained  by  thirst. 
Phsed.  Sicilia  Sardiniaque  amissse.  Liv. 

When  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders, 

(1.)  If  they  denote  living  things,  the  adjective  is  masculine 
rather  than  feminine ;  as, 

Pater  mild  et  mater  mortui  sunt,  My  father  and  mother  are  dead.  Ter. 
So  uterque  in  the  sing.  Procumbit  uterque,  sc.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha.  Ovid. 

(2.)  If  they  denote  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  gen- 
erally neuter ;  as, 

His  genus,  (Etas,  eloquentiaprope&qua\\a.fuere;  Their  family,  age,  and  el- 
oquence, were  nearly  equal.  Sail.  Regna,  imperia,  nobilitates,  honores,  divi- 
ticB  in  casu  sita  sunt.  Cic.  Huic  bella,  rapines,  discordia  civllis,  grata  fuere 
Sail.  Jlnlma  atque  animus,  quamvis  integra  recens  in  corpus  eunt.  Lucr. 

NOTE.  When  nouns  denoting  things  without  life  are  of  the  same  gen- 
der (either  masculine  or  feminine),  but  of  different  numbers,  the  adjective 
is  sometimes  neuter ;  as,  Crc&so  et  vita  et  patrimonii  partes,  et  urbs  Barce 
concessa  sunt.  Just. ;  sometimes  also  when  both  nouns  are  in  the  singu- 
lar number  ;  as,  Velocltas  et  regio  ignara  tutata  sunt.  Sail. 

(3.)  If  one  of  the  nouns  denotes  an  animate,  and  another  an 
inanimate  thing,  the  adjective  is  sometimes  neuter,  and  some- 
times it  takes  the  gender  of  that  which  has  life  ;  as, 

Naves  et  captivos  quae  ad  Ckium  capta  erant,  The  ships  and  captives 
"which  were  taken  at  Chios.  Liv.  Numidce  atque  signa  miiitaria  obscurati 
sunt.  Sail.  Regem  regnumque  sua  futura  sciunt.  Liv. 


§  205.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  167 

Exc.  to  REM.  2.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  nearest 
noun,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest ;  as, 

Sociis  et  rege  -ecepto,  Our  companions  and  king  having  been  recovered. 
Virg.  Salutem,  liber  os,  f amain,  'fortunas,  esse  carissimas.  Cic. 

NOTE.  A  noun  in  the  singular,  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum,  has 
sometimes  a  plural  adjective  ;  as,  Filiam  cumfilio  accitos.  Liv.  Ilia  cum 
Lauso  de  Numitore  sati.  Ovid. 

REM.  3.  An  adjective  qualifying  a  collective  noun,  is  often 
put  in  the  plural,  taking  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  the 
noun  denotes ;  as, 

Pars  certare  parati,  A  part  prepared  to  contend.  Virg.  Pars  -per 
agros  dilapsi.  ....  suam  quisque  spem  exsequentes.  Liv.  Supplex  turba 
erant  sinejudice  tuti.  Ovid.  This  construction  always  occurs  whei*  the 
collective  noun  is  the  subject  of  a  plural  verb. 

Sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  adjective  in  the  singular  takes  the  gender 
of  the  individuals;  as,  Pars  arduus  altis  pulverulentus  equisfurit.  Virg. 

Some  other  nouns  have  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender  from  their 
own,  referring  to  the  words  which  they  include ;  as,  Latium  Capuaque 
agro  mulctati ;  Latium  and  Capua  were  deprived  of  their  land.  Liv. 
Capita  conjuratidtds  virgis  caesi.  Id. 

REM  4.  Two  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  sometimes  joined  to  a  plu- 
ral noun ;  as,  Maria  Tyrrhenum  atque  Adriaticum,  The  Tuscan  and 
Adriatic  seas.  Liv.  In  comic  writers,  an  adjective  or  participle  in  the 
singular  is  sometimes  used  with  a  plural  pronoun ;  as,  Nobis  prcesente. 
Plaut.  Absents  nobis.  Ter. 

REM.  5.  A  participle  which  should  regularly  agree  with  the  subject  of 
a  proposition,  when  placed  after  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  sometimes 
takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  latter ;  as,  JYVm  omnis  error  stultitia 
est  dicenda ;  Not  every  error  is  to  be  called  folly.  Cic.  Gens  universa 
yc/neti  appellati.  Liv. 

REM.  6.  When  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  is  omitted  after  a  dative  of 
the  same  signification,  an  adjective  in  the  predicate,  belonging  to  that  sub- 
ject, is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative  ;  as,  Mihi  negligent!  esse  non  licuit, 
i.  e.  me  negligentein  esse  mild  non  licuit.  Cic.  Da  mihi  justo  sancto^e 
videri.  Hor.  A  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  adjective ;  as, 
Vobis  necessc  est  fortlbus  esse  viris.  Liv.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with 
the  omitted  subject ;  as,  Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  sc.  vos.  Ter.  Si  civi 
Romano  licet  esse  Gaditanum.  Cic. 

REM.  7.  (1.)  An  adjective  is  often  used  alone,  especially  in 
the  plural,  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees,  being  understood  ;  as, 

Boni  sunt  rari,  sc.  homines  ;  Good  (men)  are  rare.  CcEsar  suos  misit, 
sc.  millies ;  Csesar  sent  his  (soldiers).  Dextra,  sc.  manus ;  The  right 
(hand).  Plnguisque  ferlnae,  sc.  carnis.  Immortelles,  sc.  Dii.  Amantium^ 
sc.  homlnum.  Ilium  indignanti  similem,  similemqiie  minanti  aspiceres,  sc. 
homlni.  Virg.  Tibi  prirnas  defero,  sc.  partes.  Cic.  Resplce  pra^teritum, 
sc  tcmpus,  which  is  often  omitted.  Cognovi  ex  meorum  omnium  literis^ 
sc.  amicorum.  Cic.  So  patrial  adjectives ;  as,  Missi  ad  Parthum  Arme- 
niumque  Icgdti,  sc.  regem.  In  Tusculano,  sc.  prcedio. 

/NOTE  1.     The  noun  to  be  supplied  with  masculine  adjectives  is  commonly 
Jiomlnes,  but  when  they  are  possessives,  it  is  oftencr  amici,  milltes,  cives. 

NOTE  2.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  is  often  contained  in  a  preceding 
clause. 


168  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  $  205. 

(2.)  An  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender,  without  a  noun,  is  often  used 
substantively,  where,  in  English,  the  word  thing  or  things  is  to  be  sup- 
plied; as, 

Triste  lupus  stabulis  ;  The  wolf,  a  grievous  (thing)  to  the  folds.  Virg. 
Labor  omnia  vincit;  Labor  overcomes  all  (things).  Id.  Plerlque  vana 
mirantur.  Tac.  Quce  cum  ita  sint.  Cic. 

NOTE.  Instead  of  thing  or  things,  other  words  may  sometimes  be  sup- 
plied, as  the  sense  requires.  With  a  preposition,  neuter  adjectives  form 
adverbial  phrases ;  as,  A  primo,  At  first.  Plaut.  Per  mutua.  Mutually. 
Virg.  Ad  hoc,  or  Ad  hcec.  Moreover,  besides. 

(3.)  Adjectives  used  without  nouns  often  have  adjectives  agreeing  with 
them  ;  as,  Mia  omnia,  All  other  (things).  Plin.  Familiaris  meus.  Cic. 
Iniquus  noster.  Id.  Justa  funebria.  Liv.  x  Jovis  omnia  plena.  Virg. 
See.§  201,  III.  HEM.  6. 

REM.  8.  Imperatives,  infinitives,  adverbs,  clauses,  and  words  consid- 
ered merely  as  such,  may  be  used  substantively,  and  take  a  neuter  adjec- 
tive; as,  Supremum  vale  dixit,  He  pronounced  a  last  farewell.  Ovid. 
Velle  suum  cuique  est.  Pers.  Cras  istud  quando  venit  1  Mart.  JExcepto 
quod  non  simul  esses,  cetera  Icptus.  Hor. 

REM.  9.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  instead  of  agreeing  with 
their  nouns,  are  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  a  partitive 
signification,  and  their  nouns  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Multum  temporis,  for 
multum  temp  us ;  much  time.  Id  rei,  for  ea  res;  that  thing.  So  pi  as 
eloqucntia,  the  other  form  not  being  admissible  with  plus.  (See  §  110.) 
Neuter  adjectives  are  used  in  like  manner  in  the  plural ;  as,  Vana  rerum 
for  vana  res.  Hor.  Pleraque  humandrum  rerum.  Sail.  But  in  some  such 
examples,  the  adjective  seems  to  be  used  as  noticed  in  REM.  7,  (2.) ;  as, 
Acuta  belli.  Hor.  Telluris  operta.  Virg. 

The  adjectives  thus  used  in  the  singular,  for  the  most  part,  signify 
quantity.  See  §  212,  REM.  3,  NOTE  1. 

REM.  10.  A  neuter  adjective  is  sometimes  used  adverbially  in  the 
nominative  or  accusative,  both  singular  and  plural ;  as,  Magnum  stridens. 
Virg.  Armn  horrendum  sonuere.  Id.  Multa  deos  venerati  sunt.  Cic. 
See  §  192,  II.  4,  (b.) 

REM.  11.  A  noun  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Incola  turba 
vacant.  Ovid.  Nemo  miles  Romanus.  Liv. 

An  adverb  is  also  sometimes  used  as  an  adjectiye ;  as,  Heri  semper 
lenltas,  for  sempiterna.  Ter. 

REM.  12.  An  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  used  partitively,  stands 
alone,  and  commonly  takes  the  gender  of  the  genitive  plural,  which 
depends  upon  it;  but  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  noun  of  a  different 
gender,  to  which  it  refers,  it  usually  takes  that  gender,  but  sometimea 
that  of  the  genitive ;  as,  Elephanto  belluarum  nulla  est  prudentior,  No 
beast  is  wiser  than  the  elephant.  Cic.  Indus,  qui  est  omnium  jlumlnum 
maximus.  Cic.  Velocissimum  omnium  animalium  est  delphlnus.  Plin. 
See  §  212,  REM.  2. 

When  a  collective  noun  follows  in  the  genitive  singular,  the  adjective 
takes  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it;  as,  Vir  fortissimus 
nostrcR  civitdtis,  The  bravest  man  of  our  state.  Cic.  Maximus  stirpis.  Liv. 

REM.  13.  When  a  possessive  pronoun  or  adjective  is  used  instead  of 
the  genitive  of  its  primitive  or  of  its  corresponding  noun  (see  §  211,  REM. 
3  and  4),  an  adjective  agreeing  with  that  genitive  is  sometimes  joined  with 


§  206.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  J    RELATIVES.  169 

such  possessive;  as,  Soli  us  meumpeccatumcorrfgi  nonpotest,  The  fault  of 
me  alone  cannot  be  corrected.  Cic.  Noster  duorum  eventus.  Liv.  Tuura 
ipsius  sludium.  Cic.  Pugna  Romana  stabllis  suo  pondere  incumbentium 
in  hostem.  Liv. 

Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  is  expressed,  in  apposition  to  the 
substantive  pronoun  for  which  the  possessive  stands;  as,  Pectus  tuum, 
hominis  simpllcis.  Cic. 

REM.  14.  An  adjective,  properly  belonging  to  the  genitive,  is  some- 
times made  to  agree  with  the  noun  on  which  the  genitive  depends,  and 
vice  versd;  as,  JEdificationis  tuas  consilium  for  tuum,  Your  design  of 
building.  Cic.  Accusantes  violati  hospitii  f&dus,  for  violdtum.  Liv.  Ad 
majora  initia  rerum  ducentlbus  fatis,  for  majorum.  Id.  lis  nominlbas  civi- 
tdtum,  quibus  ex  civitattbus,  &c.,  for  earum  civitatum.  Cses. 

REM.  15.  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  noun  is  sometimes  u;*ed,  in- 
stead of  an  adverb  qualifying  a  verb,  especially  in  poetry ;  as,  Ecce  venit 
Teldmon  properus ;  Lo,  Telamon  comes  in  haste.  Ovid.  Laeti  pac ,;m  agi- 
tabdmus,  for  ltet&.  Sail.  JEneas  se  matutlnus  agebat,  for  mane.  V;rg. 

So  nullus  is  used  for  omnlno  non ;  as,  Mem/ini  tametsi  nullus  iicneas, 
Though  you  do  not  suggest  it.  Ter.  Prior, ^primus,  propior,  prix  mus, 
solus,  unus,  ulttmus,  muitus,  totus,  princeps,  and  some  others,  are  vsrd  in- 
stead of  their  neuters,  adverbially  ;  as,  Priori  Remo  augurium  veni  's^  fer- 
tur.  Liv.  This  is  sometimes  done,  for  want  of  an  adverb  of  appiopriate 
meaning  ;  as,  Pronus  cecidit.  Ovid.  Frequentes  convenerant.  Sail. 

In  such  expressions,  tu,  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  takes  an  {;djec- 
five  in  the  vocative,  and  vice  versd;  as,  Sic  venias  hodierne.  Tib  all, 
Salve,  primus  omnium  par  ens  patriot  appellate.  Plin. 

REM.  16.  When  several  adjectives,  each  independently  of  the  other, 
qualify  a  noun,  if  they  precede  it,  they  are  almost  always  connected  by  one 
or  more  conjunctions  ;  as,  Multd  et  varid  et  copiosd  oratione.  Cic.  If  they 
follow  it,  the  conjunction  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted ; 
as,  Vir  altus  et  excellens.  Cic.  Actio,  varia,  vehemens,  plena  'ceritatis.  Id. 

But  when  one  of  the  adjectives  qualifies  the  noun,  and  another  the 
complex  idea  formed  by  the  first  with  the  noun  the  conjunction  is  always 
omitted  ;  as,  Periculosissimum  civile  bellum,  A  most  dangerous  civil 
war.  Cic.  Malam  domestlcam  disciphnam.  Id.  So  with  three  or  more 
adjectives ;  Externos  multos  claros  viros  nomindrem.  Cic.  See  §  201 , 
III.,  REM.  6. 

REM.  17.  The  adjectives  primus,  medius,  ultimus,  extremus, 
intimus,  ijifimus,  imus,  summus,  supremus,  rcHquus,  and  cetera, 
often  signify  thejirst  part,  the  middle  part,  &c.  of  a  thing  ;  as, 

Media  nox,  The  middle  of  the  night.  Summa  arbor,  The  highest  part  of 
a  tree.  Supremos  monies,  The  tops  of  the  mountains.  But  these  adjec- 
tives frequently  occur  without  this  signification  ;  as,  Jib  extremo  complexu, 
From  the  last  embrace.  Cic.  Inflmo  loco,  Of  the  lowest  rank.  Id. 

REM.  18.  The  participle  of  the  compound  tenses  of  verbs,  used  imper 
sonally  in  the  passive  voice,  is  neuter  ;  as,  Ventum  est.  Cic.  Itum  est  in 
viscera  terrce.  Ovid. 

RELATIVES. 

$  206.  REM.  19.  Relatives  agree  with  their  antece- 
dents in  gender  and  number,  but  their  case  depends  on  the 
construction  of  the  clause  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

Puer  qui  legit,  The  boy  who  reads.    Arilmal  quod  currit,  The  animal 
15 


170  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    RELATIVES. 

which  runs.  Liter  CB  quas  dedi,  The  letter  which  I  gave.  Non  sum  qualia 
cram,  I  am  not  such  as  I  was.  So  Deus  cujus  munere  vivlmus,  cui  nulius 
est  similis,  quern  cotimus,  a  quo  facto,  sunt  omnia,  est  ccternus.  Addictus 
HermippOj  et  ab  hoc  ductus  est.  Jlqullo,  qu&ntus  frangit  ilices.  Hor. 

NOTE.  This  rule  includes  all  adjectives,  participles,  and  adjective  pro- 
nouns which  relate  to  a  noun  in  a  preceding  clause.  Its  more  common 
application,  however,  is  to  the  construction  of  the  relative  qui. 

The  relative  may  be  considered  as  placed  between  two  cases 
of  the  same  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  with  the  for- 
mer of  which  it  agrees  in  gender  and  number,  and  with  the  lat- 
ter in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

( 1 . )  Sometimes  both  nouns  are  expressed  }*  as, 

Erant  omnino  duo  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  domo  exlre  possent ;  There 

were   only  two   routes,  by  which   routes  they  could  leave  home.    Cues. 

Crudelissimo  bello,  quale  bellum  nulla  unquam  barlaria  gessit.  Cic. 

(2.)  Usually  the  antecedent  only  is  expressed  ;  as, 
Anlmum  rege,  qui,  nisi  par  et,  imperat ;    Govern  your  passions,  which 
rule  unless  they  obey.  Hor.    Tantce  multitudmis,  quantam  capit  urbs  nostrat 
concursus  est  ad  mefactus.  Cic.     Quot  capltum  mount,  totldem  studiOrum 
millia.  Hor. 

(3.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  generally 
when  the  relative  clause  precedes  that  of  the  antecedent ;  as, 

Quibus  de  rebus  ad  me  scripsisti,  coram  videblmus ;  In  regard  to  the 
things  of  which  you  wrote  to  me,  we  will  consider  when  we  meet.  Cic. 
In  quern  primum  egressi  sunt  locum,  Troja  vocdtur.  Liv.  Quanta  vi  ezpe- 
tunl,  tantd  defcndunt.  Qualesgwe  visus  eram  vidisse  viros,  ex  online  tides 
aspicio.  Ovid. 

To  this  head  may  be  referred  such  examples  as  the  following  : — Qui  meus 
amor  in  te  est,  i.  e.  pro  meo  amore  qui  in  te  est ;  Such  is  my  love  for  you. 
Cic.  Quce  tua  est  virtus,  expugndbis,  i.  e.  pro  tua  virtute,  &c. 

(a.)  The  place  of  the  antecedent  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  demonstra- 
tive pronoun,  especially  when  the  cases  are  different ;  as,  J3d  quas  res 
aptisslmi  erimus,  in  iis  jjotisslmum  claborablmus.  Cic.  Sobyibi.  Sail. 

(i.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  even  when  the  relative 
clause  does  not  precede  ;  as,  Quis  non  maldrum  quas  amor  curas  kabet, 
hfEc  inter  obliviscltur  ?  Hor. 

(4.)  Sometimes  neither  noun  is  expressed ;  this  happens 
especially  when  the  antecedent  is  designedly  left  indefinite,  or 
when  it  is  a  substantive  pronoun ;  as, 

Qui  bene  latuit,  bene  vixit,  sc.  homo  ;  (He)  who  has  well  escaped  notice, 
has  lived  well.  Ovid.  Sunt  quos  curricula  pulverem  Olymplcum  col- 
legisse  juvat,  sc.  homines;  There  are  whom  it  delights,  &c.  Hor.  Non 
habeo  quod  te  accusem,  sc.  id  proptcr  quod.  Cic.  Non  solum  sapiens 
videris  qui  hinc  absis,  sed  etiam  bcdtus,  sc.  tu.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  relative  is  sometimes  either  entirely  omitted  ;  as,  Vrbs  antlqua 
fitit ;  Tyrii  tenuere  coloni,  sc.  quam  or  cam;  There  was  an  ancient  city 
(which)  Tyrian  colonists  possessed  (Virg.);  or,  if  once  expressed,  is  after- 
wards omitted,  even  when,  if  supplied,  its  case  would  be  different ;  as, 
Bacchus  cum  peditlbus,  quos  filius  ejus  adduxerat,  neque  in  priore  pugnd 
adfuerant,  Romdnos  invadunt,  for  et  qui  non  in  priore9  &c.  Sail. 


jocos,  quos  inconditos  jaciunt,  foijocos  incondltos,  quos,  &c. ;  Amidst  the 
rude  jests  which  they  utter.  Liv.     Verbis,  quae  magna  volant, 
lore,  quern  multum  Iiabet.  Cic. 


<§>  206.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    RELATIVES.  171 

(6.)  (a.)  The  relative  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  in- 
stead of  its  own  proper  case ;  as,  Cum,  scribas  et  aliquid  agas  eorum,  quo- 
rum consuSsti,  for  qua.  Cic.  Raptim  quibus  quisque  poterat  eldtis,  exibant, 
for  iis,  qucB  quisque  ejf'erre  potgrat,  eldtis.  Liv. 

(b.)  The  antecedent  likewise  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  relative  ; 
a;*,  Urbem,  quam  statuo  vestra  est,  for  urbs.  Virg.  Naucratem,  quern  con- 
venire  volui,  in  navi  non  erat.  Plaut.  Sed  istum,  quern  quceris,  e&o 
sum.  Id. 

These  constructions  are  said  to  occur  by  attraction. 

(7.)  An  adjective,  which  properly  belongs  to  the  antecedent,  is  some- 
times placed  in  the  relative  clause,  and  agrees  with  the  relative  ;  as,  Inter 
;., : j^__  -•_„•..„.  *—  _• ; jv.._  _  *-_  .  Amidst  the 

Virg.     Ca- 

This  is  the  common  position  of  the  adjective,  when  it  is  a  numeral,  a 
comparative,  or  a  superlative  ;  as,  Nocte  quam  in  terris  ultimam  egit,  The 
last  night  which  he  spent  upon  earth.  JEsculapius,  qui  primus  vulnus  ob- 
ligamsse  dicltur.  Cic.  Consiliis  pare,  quae  nunc  pulchemma  Nautes  dot 
senior.  Virg.  Some  instances  occur  in  which  an  adjective  belonging  to 
the  relative  clause, is  placed  in  that  of  the  antecedent;  as,  Cum  venissent 
ad  vada  Volaterrana,  quse  nominantur.  Cic. 

(8.)  When  to  the  relative  is  joined  a  noun,  explanatory  of  the 
antecedent,  but  of  a  different  gender  or  number,  the  relative 
agrees  with  that  noun  ;  as, 

Santdnes  non  longb  a  Tolosatiumfirtlbus  absunt,  quae  civitas  est  in  provin- 
cid,  The  Santones  are  not  far  distant  from  the  borders  of  ths  Tolosates, 
which  state  is  in  the  province.  Cses.  Ante  comitia,  quod  tempus  ftaud  longk 
aberat.  Sail. 

(9.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  one  of  two  nouns,  denoting  the 
same  object,  but  of  different  genders,  it  agrees  with  either  ;  as, 

FLumen  est  Arar  quod  in  Rhodanum  influit.  CSBS.  Adflumen  Oxum  per- 
ventum  cst,  qui  turbldus  semper  est.  Curt. 

(10.)  When,  in  a  relative  clause  containing  the  verb  sum  or  a 
verb  of  naming,  esteeming,  &,c.,  a  noun  occurs  of  a  different 
gender  from  the  antecedent,  the  relative  agrees  with  either ;  as, 

Naturce  vultus  quern  dixere  Chaos,  The  appearance  of  nature  which  they 
called  chaos.  Ovid.  Genus  hominum  quod  Helotes  vocdtur.  Nep.  Animal, 
quern  vocamus  hominem  j  The  animal  whom  we  call  man.  Cic.  Locus  in 
carcere,  quod  Tullianum  appellatur.  Sail.  Pecunidrum  conquisitio ;  eos 
esse  belli  civllis  nervos  dictttans  Mucidnus.  Tac. 

(11.)  The  relative  sometimes  agrees  with  a  noun,  either  equi- 
valent in  sense  to  the  antecedent,  or  only  implied  in  the  preced- 
ing clause ;  as, 

Alundantia  edrum  rerum,  quse  mortdles  pnma  putant,  An  abundance 
of  those  things,  which  mortals  esteem  most  important.  Sail.  Fatdle  mon- 
strum,  quse,  &c.,  sc.  Cleopatra.  Hor. 

(a)  A  relative  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  referring  to  a  collective  noun, 
or  to  a  noun  which  only  in  a  figurative  sense  denotes  a  human  being,  some- 
times takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun  de- 
notes ,  as,  Equitatum,  quos.  Sail.  Genus,  qui  premuntur.  Cic. — Senatus 
— ii.  Sail.  Monslrum,  qui.  Cic. 


172        SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    DEMONSTRATIVES,    &C. 

(12.)  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun;  as, 
Omnes  lauddre  fortunas  meas,  qui  natum  tali  ingenio  prcedltum  haberem  ; 
sc.  met ;  All  were  extolling  my  fortune,  who  had  a  son  endowed  with 
such  a  disposition.  Ter.  Nostrum  consilium  laudandum  est,  qui,  etc. 
Cic. ;  or  in  a  possessive  adjective ;  as,  Servili  tumultu,  quos.  Cses. 

(13.)  Sometimes  the  antecedent  is  a  proposition,  and  then  the  relative 
is  commonly  neuter ;  as,  Postremo,  quod  difficilllmum  inter  mortales,  glorid 
invidiam  vidsti ;  Finally,  you  have  overcome  envy  with  glory,  which, 
among  men,  is  very  difficult.  Sail.  Equtdemexspectabamjamtuasliteras, 
idque  cum  multis.  Cic. 

In  such  instances,  id  is  sometimes  placed  before  the  relative  pronoun 
referring  to  the  idea  in  the  antecedent  clause ;  as,   Sive,  id  quod  constat, 
Platonis  studiosus  audiendi  fuit.  Cic.     Diem  consumi  volebant,  id  quod* 
fecerunt.  Id. 

Sometimes  a  relative  referring  to  a  clause,  agrees  with  a  noun  following; 
as,  Idem  velle  atque  nolle,  ea  demum  firma  amicitia  est.  Sail. 

(14.)  Quod,  relating  to  a  preceding  statement,  and  serving  the  purpose 
of  transition,  is  often  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  after  a  period. 
It  is  thus  used  especially  before  si  and  nisi,  and  sometimes  before  utlnam. 
ut,  ne,  ubi,  cum,  contra,  and  nunc  ;  as,  Quod  si  mundum  efficere  potest  con- 
cursus  atomorum,  cur  porttcum,  cur  templum,  cur  domum,  cur  urbem  non 
potest?  In  regard  to  which,  if  the  concourse  of  atoms  can  produce  a  world, 
why,  &c.  Cic.  Quod  te  per  genium  obsecro,  vita  me  redde  priori.  Hor 
Quod  utlnam  ilium,  cujus  impio  facindre  in  has  miserias  projectus  sum9 
eadem  hcec  simulantem  videam.  Sail. 

Quod,  in  such  examples,  seems  to  be  an  accusative,  with  propter  or  aa 
understood. 

(15.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  two  or  more  nouns  of  different  genders, 
its  gender  will  be  determined  by  HEM.  2 ;  as,  Ninus  et  Semiramis,  qui 
Babylona  condiderant ;  Ninus  and  Semiramis,  who  had  founded  Babylon. 
Veil.  Crebro  funali  et  tibicine,  <quse  sibi  sumpserat.  Cic.  Ex  summd 
latitid  atque  lascitid,  quaB  diuturna  quies  pepererat.  Sail. 

(16.)  The  relative  adjectives  quot,  quantus,  qualis,  are  construed  like  the 
relative  qui.  They  have  generally,  in  the  antecedent  clause,  the  corre 
spending  words,  tot,  tantus,  talis  ;  but  these  are  often  omitted. 

(17.)  Qui,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  is  often  translated  like  a*de 
monstrative ;  as,  Quse  cum  ita  sint,  Since  these  (things)  are  so.  Cic. 


DEMONSTRATIVES,    INDEFINITES,   &c. 

§  SOT.  REM.  20.  The  adjective  pronouns  often  agree  with  a 
noun  expressed,  instead  of  another  noun  understood ;  as,  Nee  solos 
tangit  Atrldas  iste  dolor,  Nor  does  that  grief  (i.  e.  grief  on  that  account) 
affect  the  sons  of  A tre us  alone.  Virg. 

REM.  21.  The  demonstrative  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  where  a 
Corresponding  word  in  English  is  unnecessary;  as,  Quern  neque fides, neque 
jusjura:idum,  neque  ilium  misericordia,  repressit ;  Whom  neither  fidelity, 
nor  an  oath,  nor  pity,  has  restrained.  Ter. 

RE  vi.  22.  The  neuters  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  are  sometimes 
used  in  apposition  with  a  dependent  clause;  as,  Hoc  tibi persuadeas  velim, 
me  niki',  omisisse;  I  wish  you  to  be  persuaded  of  this — that  I  have  omitted 
nothing.  So  also  the  demonstrative  adverbs  sic  and  ita. 

REM.  23.  Hie  refers  to  what  is  near,  ille  to  what  is  remote.  Hence 
of  two  things  mentioned  before,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  latter,  ille  to 


SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ,    DEMONSTRATIVES,    &C.       173 

the  former ;  as,  Ignama  corpus  Ueletat,  labor  firmat;  ilia  maturam  scnect®- 
lem,  hie  longam  adolescentiam  reddit:  Sloth  enervates  the  body,  labor 
strengthens  it ;  the  former  produces  premature  old  age,  the  latter  protract- 
ed youth.  Cels. 

Yet  this  rule  is  not  always  observed  ;  as,  Sic  deus  et  virgo  est ;  hie  spe 
celer,  ilia  timore.  Ovid.  Sometimes  hie. ..hie  are  used  instead  of  hie. ..ille. 
So  ille...ille  sometimes  denote  "  the  one. ..the  other." 

When  more  than  two  persons  or  things  are  spoken  of,  ille  refers  to  the 
most  remote,  iste  to  a  nearer,  and  hie  to  the  nearest  object.  Hence,  in  let- 
ters, hie  and  its  derivatives  are  used  of  the  writer;  iste  and  its  derivatives 
of  the  person  addressed ;  ille,  &c..  of  some  other  person  or  thing.  See 
§  J91,  REM.  2. 
""•  REM.  24.  Hie  is  used  to  denote  that  which  is  of  general  notoriety  ;  as, 

tgno  illi  Alexandra  similllmus,  Very  like  Alexander  the  Great.    Veil. 
dea  ilia.  Cic.     Ille  is  sometimes  translated  this ;  as,  Unum  illud  dico, 
This  only  I  say.  Cic. 

REM.  25.  Iste  often  denote,  contempt;  as,  Impediebantur  ed  lege,  quam 
idem  iste  tuttrat....t\ie  same  wretch.  Cic.  Sometimes,  on  the  contrary,  it 
means  so  great ;  as,  dim  ista  sis  auctoritdte,  Since  you  are  of  so  great 
authority.  Cic. 

REM.  26.  Is  does  not,  like  hie,  ille,  and  iste,  denote  the  place  or  order  of 
the  object  to  which  it  relates,  but  refers  to  something  already  mentioned 
or  to  be  denned  by  the  relative  qui.  Hie,  is,  or  ille,  may  be  used  in  this  way 
before  the  relative,  but  only  hie  or  is  after  it ;  as,  Qui  docet,  is  discit,  or  hie 
discit,  but  not  ille  discit,  unless  some  individual  is  referred  to. 

Is  has  sometimes  the  sense  of  talis,  such ;  as,  Neque  enim  tu  is  es,  qui 
quid  sis  nescias ;  Nor  are  you  such  a  person  as  to  be  ignorant  what  you 
are.  Cic. ;  sometimes  of  idem;  as,  vos  -ii.  Cic.  Manil.  12. 

Is  with  et  or  que  is  emphatic, equivalent  to  the  English  "and  that  too;" 
as,  Priodtas  causas,  et  eas  tenues  aglmus  ;  We  manage  private  causes,  and 
those  unimportant.  Cic.  Erant  in  Torqudto  plurlmce  litercz  nee  ese  vulga- 
res.  Id.  So  without  et;  Urbdna  plebes,  ea  vero  prceceps  iSrat.  Sail. 

REM.  27.  Idem,  as  denoting  a  subject  which  stands  in  equal  relations  to 
two  different  predicates,  often  supplies  the  place  of  item  or  etiam,  also,  or  of 
tamen,  yet,  if  the  things  are  apparently  inconsistent;  as,  Muslci,  qui  er ant 
quondam  iidem  poetce ;  Musicians,  who  formerly  were  poets  also.  Cic. 
Euphrates  et  Tigris  magno  aqudrum  divortio  iter  percurrunt ;  iidem  (and 
yet)  pauldtim  in  arctlus  co&unt. 

Idem  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the  sense  of  "  at  once,"  denoting  the 
union  of  qualities  which  might  be  thought  incompatible  ;  as,  Fuere  quidam 
qui  iidem  ornatb  iidem  versutb  dicere?it,  There  have  been  some  who  could 
speak  at  once  elegantly  and  artfully.  Cic. 

"  The  same  as"  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  by  idem  with  qui,  ac  or 
atque,  quasi  or  ut ;  as,  Verres  idem  est  cpiifuit  semper,  Verres  is  the  same 
as  he  has  always  been.  Cic.  Vita  est  eftdem  ac  fu.it.  Liv.  Disjmtationcm 
expontmus  iisdem/ere  verbis  ut  actum  est.  Cic. 

REM.  28.  Ipse,  when  used  with  a  substantive  pronoun  taken  reflexively, 
agrees  either  with  such  pronoun  or  with  the  subject  of  the  proposition, 
according  as  either  is  emphatic ;  as,  Agam  per  Trie  ipse,  I  will  do  it  myself. 
Cic.  Medici  ipsi  se  curare  non  possunt.  Sulpic.  Se  ipsos  omnes  naturd 
diligunt. 

Ipse  is  sometimes  used  as  reflexive  without  sui ,  as,  Omnes  boni,  quan 
turn  in  ipsisfuit,  Casarem  occiderunt.  Cic. 

Ipse,  with  nouns  denoting  time  or  number,  expresses  exactness;   as, 
15* 


174       SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  J    DEMONSTRATIVES,  &C. 

Cum  ipsis  nonis  Sextllis,  Exactly  on  the  fifth  of  August.  Cic.  Triginta 
dies  erant  ipsi,  Thirty  whole  days  had  elapsed.  Id. 

REM.  29.  The  relative  quicunque  is  sometimes  used  as  equivalent  to 
omnis  or  quivis  ;  as,  QUCR  sandri  poterunt  quacunque  ratione  sanabo,  What 
can  be  cured  I  will  cure  by  every  possible  means.  Cic.  Yet  possum  is 
rather  to  be  supplied  ; — "  in  whatever  way  I  can."  So  quisquis  is  occa- 
sionally used,  not  as  a  relative,  but  as  an  indefinite  pronoun. 

REM.  30.  Mlquis  and  quispiam  are  particular,  corresponding  to  the 
English  some  one;  as,  Heredttas  est  pecunia,  qua  morte  alicujus  ad  quem- 
piam  pervenit  jure  ;  An  inheritance  is  property  which,  at  the  death  of  some 
one,  falls  to  some  (other)  one  by  law.  Cic.  Multi  sine  doctrlnd  aliquid 
omnium  generum  et  artium  consequuntur.  Id. 

REM.  31.  Quisquam,  any  one,  and  ullus,  any,  are  universal:  they  are 
used  in  propositions  which  involve  a  universal  negative,  or  which  exprSs 
an  interrogation  with  a  negative  force,  or  a  condition  (usually  with  si  or 
quasi) ;  also,  after  comparatives,  after  the  adverb  viz,  and  the  preposition 
sine;  as,  Neque  ex  castris  Catillna  quisquam  omnium  discesserat,  Nor  had 
any  one  departed  from  the  camp  of  Catiline.  Sail.  JVec  ullo  casu  potest 
contingcre,  ut  ulla  intermissio  fiat  qfficii.  Cic.  An  quisquam  potest  sine 
perturbatione  mentis  irasci  ?  Id.  Tetrior  hie  tyrannus  Syracusdnis  fuit, 
quam  quisquam  superiorum.  Id.  Vix  quidquam  spei  est.  Sen. 

Ullus  is  properly  an  adjective,  but  it  may  be  used,  like  any  other  adjec- 
tive, with  a  noun  understood.  Quisquam  is  commonly  used  without  a  noun, 
except  it  is  a  word  denoting  a  person  ;  as,  Cuiquam  civi,  To  any  citizen. 
Cujusquam  oratoris  eloqucntiam.  Nemo  is  often  used  for  nullus  ;  as,  nemo 
pictor,  nemo  adolesc&ns,  and  even  homo  nemo.  Cic. 

REM.  32.  Mius,  like  ullus,  though  properly  an  adjective,  is  sometimes 
used  like  a  pronoun.  It  is  often  repeated,  or  joined  with  an  adverb  deriv- 
ed from  it,  in  the  same  proposition,  which  may  be  translated  by  two  sepa- 
rate propositions,  commencing  respectively  with  "  one. ...another ;"  as, 
Aliud  aliis  mdetur  optimum,  One  thing  seems  be«t  to  one,  another  to  ano- 
ther. Cic.  Aliis  aliunde  periculum  est,  Dange/  threatens  one  from  one 
source,  another  from  another ;  or,  Danger  threatens  different  persons  from 
different  sources.  Ter.  Dionysium  aliter  cum  aliis  de  nobis  locutum  audiu- 
bam.  Cic. 

Alter  is  commonly  used  when  two  persons  are  spoken  of;  as,  Uterque 
numerus  alter  altera  de  causa  hdbctur.  Cic. 

dlius,  repeated  in  different  propositions,  is  also  translated  "  one. ...an- 
other ;"  as,  Aliud  agltur,  aliud  simuldtur,  One  thing  is  done,  another  pre- 
tended. Cic. 

REM.  33.  Quidam  differs  from  aliquis  by  implying  that  a  person  or 
thing,  though  indefinitely  described,  is  definitely  known  ;  as,  Quidam  de 
collegis  nostriSj  A  certain  one  of  our  colleagues.  Cic.  Scis  me  quodain 
tempore  Metapontum  venisse  tecum.  Id. 

Quidam  is  sometimes  used  for  some,  as  opposed  to  the  whole,  or  to 
others  ;  as,  Excesserunt  urbe  quidam,  alii  mortem  sibi  consciverunt ;  Some 
departed  from  the  citv^,  others  destroyed  themselves.  Liv.  Hence  it  is 
used  as  a  limitation  ;  as,  Milvo  est  quoddam  bellum  naturale  cum  corvo, .... 
a  kind  of  warfare.  Cic. 

REM.  34.  Quivis  and  quitibet,  any  one  you  please,  are  universal ;  as, 
Omnia  sunt  ejusmodi  quivis  ut  perspicere  possit,  All  are  of  such  a  nature 
that  any  one  can  perceive.  Cic.  Hie  apud  major cs  nostros  adhibebatur 
perltus,  nunc  quilibet.  Id.  A  negative  joined  with  them  denies  only  the 
universality  which  they  imply  ;  as,  JVbn  cuivis  homlni  contingit  adlre  Co 


<§>  208.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES  ;    REFLEXIVES.  175 

vinthum,  i.  e.  not  to  every  man  without  distinction.  Hor.     Cuiquam  would 
have  made  the  negadon  universal. 

REM.  35.  Qi<i*</re  signifies  each,  every  one,  and  generally  stands  with 
cut  a  noun  ;  as,  Quad  cuique  obtlgit,id  quisque  teneat ;  Let  each  one  keep 
what  has  fallen  to  each.  Cic. 

It  is  often  used  with  two  superlatives ;  as,  Optimum  quidque  rarisslmum 
sst,  The  best  things  are  the  rarest.  Cic.  Ut  quisque  optime  dicit,  ita 
maxime  diccndi  dijjicultdtem  timet.  Id. 

With  primus,  it  denotes  the  first  possible ;  as,  Primo  quoque  tempore, 
As  soon  as  possible.  Cic. 

REM.  36.  The  possessives  meus,  tuus,  noster,  vester,  and  suus,  are  joined 
to  nouns,  to  indicate  an  action  or  possession  of  the  persons  denoted  by 
their  primitives ;  as,  Tutus  amor  meus  est  tibi,  My  love  is  secure  to  you. 
Ovid.  Tuam  vicem  dolere  soleo.  Cic. 

But  these  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  when  the  persons  to  which 
they  refer  are  the  objects  of  an  action,  feeling,  &c. ;  as,  JVara  neque  tua 
negligentia,  neque  odio  id  fecit  tuo,  For  he  did  it  neither  through  neglect 
nor  hatred  of  you.  Ter.  See  §  211,  Rem.  3. 

These  pronouns,  especially  when  used  as  reflexives,  are  often  omitted; 
as,  Quo  revertarf  in  patriam?  sc.  meam ;  Whither  shall  I  return ?  to 
(my)  country?  Ovid.  Dextrd  munera porrezit,  sc.sud.  Id. 

REFLEXIVES. 

§  208.  REM.  37.  Sui  and  suus  properly  refer  to  the  sub- 
ject of  the  proposition  in  which  they  stand  ;  as, 

Oppidani/adfofcs  in  se  ac  suosf&dum  consciscunt,  The  citizens  decide 
on  a  foul  crime  against  themselves  and  their  friends.  Liv. 

They  continue  to  be  used  in  successive  clauses,  if  the  subject  remains 
the  same ;  as,  Ipse  se  quisque  diligit,  non  ut  aliquant  a  se  ipse  mercedem 
exigat  caritdtis  suce,  sed  quod  per  se  sibi  quisque  earns  est.  Cic. 

(1.)  In  dependent  clauses,  in  which  the  subject  does  not  remain  the 
same,  the  reflexives  commonly  refer  to  the  leading  subject,  when  the 
thoughts,  language,  purposes,  &c.,  of  that  subject  are  stated;  as,  Ariovis 
tus  prcedicdvit,  non  sese  Gallis,  sed  Gallos  sibi  bellum  intulisse  ;  Ariovistus 
declared  that  he  had  not  made  war  upon  the  Gauls,  but  the  Gauls  upon 
him.  Caes.  Homerum  Colophonii  civem  esse  dicunt  suum,  The  Colopho- 
iiians  say  that  Homer  is  their  citizen.  Cic.  Tyrannus  petivit  ut  se  ad 
amicitiam  tertium  ascriberent.  Id. 

(2.)  If,  however,  the  leading  subject,  whose  thoughts,  &c.,  are  expressed, 
is  indefinite,  the  reflexives  relate  to  the  subject  of  a  dependent  clause  ;  as, 
Medeam  prcedlcant  (sc.  homines)  infug&fratris  sui  membra  in  Us  locis, 
qud  se  parens  persequeretur,  .  dissipamsse.  Cic.  Ipsum  regem  tradunt 
operdtum  his  sacris  se  abdidisse.  Liv. 

(3.)  When  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice ^fc?  reflexive  often 
refers  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  that  which  would  be  its  subject  in  the 
active  voice  ;  as,  A  Caesdre  invltor  ut  sim  sibi  legdtus,  i.  e.  Cccsar  me  in 
vltat ;  I  am  invited  by  Caesar  to  become  his  lieutenant.  Cic. 

So  when  the  subject  is  a  thing  without  life,  the  reflexive  may  relate  to 
some  other  word  in  the  sentence,  which  denotes  a  thing  with  life  ;  as? 
Canum  tarn  fida  custodia  quid  significat  aliud,  nisi  se  ad  homlnum  com- 
moditdtcs  esse  gcnerdtos?  Cic. 

(4.)  Instead  of  sui  and  suus,  whether  referring  to  a  leading  or  a  subor 


176  SYNTAX. NOMINATIVE.  §  209. 

dinate  subject,«z/>se  is  sometimes  used,  to  avoid  ambiguity  from  the  simi- 
larity of  both  numbers  of  sui,  and  to  mark  more  emphatically  than  suits, 
the  person  to  which  it  relates  ;  as,  Jugurtha  legdtos  misit  qui  ipsi  liberisque 
vitam  peter ent,  Jugurtha  sent  ambassadors  to  ask  life  for  himself  and 
his  children.  Sail.  Ea  molestisslmt  ferre  homines  debent,  qua  ipsorum 
culpd  contracta  sunt. 

(5.)  In  the  plural  number,  with  inter,  se  only  is  used,  if  the  person  or 
thing  referred  to  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative ;  se  or  ipse,  if  in  any 
other  case  ;  as,  Fratres  inter  se  cumformd,  turn  morlbus  similes  ;  Brothers 
resembling  each  other  both  in  person  and  character.  Cic.  Feras  inter 
sese  conciliat  natura.  Cic.  Incldunt  aViqua  a  doctis  etiam  inter  ipsos 
mututi  reprehensa.  Quinct. 

(6.)  When  reference  is  made  not  to  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  but  to 
some  other  person  or  thing,  hie,  is,  or  ^7/e,  is  generally  used,  except  in  the 
cases  above  specified;  as,  Themistocles  sermtm  ad  Xerxem misit, ut ei  nun- 
tiaret,  suis  verbis,  adversaries  ejus  in  fugA  esse ;  Themistocles  sent  his 
servant  to  Xerxes,  to  inform  him  (Xerxes'),  in  his  (Themistocles')  name, 
that  his  (Xerxes')  enemies  were  upon  the  point  of  flight.  Nep.  But 
when  no  ambiguity  would  arise,  and  especially  when  the  verb  is  of  the 
first  or  second  person,  sui  and  suus  sometimes  take  the  place  of  the  de- 
monstrative pronouns  ;  as,  Suam  rem  sibi  salvam  sistam,  I  will  restore  his 
property  entire  to  him.  Plaut. 

On  the  contrary,  the  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  for  the  reflex- 
ives ;  as,  Helvetii  pcrsuadent  Rauracis,  ut  una  cum  iis  proficiscantur  ;  The 
Helvetii  persuade  the  Rauraci  to  go  with  them.  Gees.  In  some  instances, 
a  reflexive  and  a  demonstrative  are  used  in  reference  to  the  same  person ; 
as,  ltd  se  gessit  (sc.  Ligarius)  ut  ei  pacem  esse  expedlret.  Cic.  Sometimes 
the  reflexives  refer  to  different  subjects  in  the  same  sentence  ;  as,  Ariovis- 
tus  respondit,  nemlnem  secum  sine  su£  pernicie  contendisse  (Caes.) ;  where 
se  refers  to  Ariovistus,  and  sud  to  nemlnem. 

(7.)  Suus  oilen  refers  to  a  word  in  the  predicate  of  a  sentence,  and  is 
then  usually  placed  after  it ;  as,  Hunc  cives  sui  ex  urbe  ejecerunt,  Him  hia 
citizens  banished  from  the  city.  Cic.  Titurius  quum  procul  Ambiorlgem, 
suos  cohvrtantem.  conspexisset.  Cses. 

Suus,  and  not  hujus,  &c.,  is  used  when  a  noun  is  omitted  ;  as,  Octavium, 
quern  sui  (si;,  ainici)  Casarem  salutdbant ;  Octavius,  whom  his  followers 
saluted  as  Caesar. 

Suus  is  also  commonly  used  when  two  nouns  are  coupled  by  cum,  but 
not  when  they  are  connected  by  a  conjunction ;  as,  Ptolemaus  amlcos 
Dcmetrii  cum  suis  rebus  dimlsit;  Ptolemy  dismissed  the  friends  of  Deme- 
trius with  their  effects.  Just. 

(8.)  Suus  sometimes  denotes  fit,  favorable  ;  as,  Sunt  el  sun.  dona  parenti, 
There  are  likewise  for  my  father  suitable  presents.  Virg.  Alphenusutebd- 
tur  populo  sank  suo.  Cic.  Sometimes  it  signifies  peculiar  ;  as,  Molles  sua 
thura  Sabcci,  sc.  mittunt,  i.  e.  the  frankincense  for  which  their  country  waa 
famous.  Virg.  jjfessos  sopor  suus  occupat  artus,  Id. 

NOMINATIVE. 
Sl/BJECT-NOMINATIVE    AND    VERB. 

§  209.  A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nominative,  in 
number  and  person  ;  as, 


§  209.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  177 

Ego  lego,  I  read.  Nos  leglmus,  We  read. 

Tu  scribis,  Thou  writest.  Vos  scribltis,  You  write. 

Equus  currif,  The  horse  runs.  Equi  currunt,  Horses  run. 

NOTE.     The  imperative  singular  is  sometimes  used  in  addressing  several 
persons ;  as,  Hue  naias  adjice  septem.  Ovid.  Met.  6, 182.  So  adde,  Liv.  26, 41 
REMARK  1.     The  nominatives  ego,  tu,  nos,  vos,  are  seldom  expressed, 
the  termination  of  the  verb  sufficiently  marking  the  person ;  as,  cupio,  I 
desire  ;  vivis,  thou  livest;  haltemus,  we  have.     See  §  147,  3. 

But  when  emphasis  or  distinction  is  intended,  they  are  expressed  ;  as, 
Ego  reges  ejeci,  vos  tyrannos  introducttis  ;  I  banished  kings,  you  introduce 
tyrants.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Nos,  nos,  dico  apertb,  consults  desumus.  Cic. 
Tu  cs  patrOnus,  tu  pater.  Ter. 

REM.  2.  The  nominative  of  the  third  person  is  often  omit- 
ted : — 

( 1. )  When  it  has  been  expressed  in  a  preceding  proposition : — 

(a.)  As  nominative ;  as,  Mosa  profluit  ex  monte  Vosego,  et  in  ocednum 

inftuit  (Gees.);  or  (6.)  in  an 'oblique  case;  as,  Cursor  em  misirunt,  ut  id 

nuntidret,  sc.  cursor.  Nep. :  or  (c.)  in  a  possessive  adjective.  Virg.  ^Cn.  1.672. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  for  person  or  thing  taken 
indefinitely. 

Thus  homines  is  often  omitted  before  aiunt,  dicunt,  ferunt,  &c. ;  as,  Ut 
aiunt,  As  they  say.  Cic.  Maxlmb  admirantur  eum,  qui  pecunid  non  move'- 
tur.  Id. 

This  omission  of  the  nominative  is  common  in  the  clause  preceding  a 
relative  ;  as,  Qui  Barium  non  odit,  amet  tua  carmina,  Maevi,  sc.  homo ;  May 
(he)  who  hates  not  Bavius,  like  your  verses,  Maevius.  Virg.  Vastatur  agri 
quod  inter  urbtm  ac  Fidenas  est,  sc.  id  spatium.  Liv.  Sunt  quos  jurat. ...sc. 
homines;  There  are  (those)  whom  it  delights.  Hor.  Est  qui  nee  veteris 
pocula  Massici  spemit,  sc.  homo.  Hor.  Here  sunt  quos  and  est  qui  are 
equivalent  to  quidam,  allquis,  or  attqui.  So,  Est  quod  gaudeas,  There  is 
(reason)  why  you  should  rejoice.  Cic.  Neque  erat  curfaUere  vellent.  Ovid. 
Est  ubi  id,  valeat.  Cic.  Est,  cum  non  est  satius,  &c.  Auct.  ad  Her.  In 
the  latter  cases,  the  adverbs  are  equivalent  to  in  quo,  sc.  loco,  tcmpdre. 

REM.  3.     The  nominative  is  often  wanting :  — 

(1.)  Before  verbs  denoting  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  the 
operations  of  nature ;  as,  Fulgurat,  It  lightens.  Plin.  Ningit, 
It  snows.  Virg. 

(2.)  Before  the  third  person  singular  of  the  passive  of  neuter 
verbs,  and  of  active  verbs  used  impersonally ;  as, 

Favetur  tibi  a  ma,  Thou  art  favored  by  me.  Ejus  orationi  vehementer 
ab  omnibus  reclani&tum  est.  Cic.  See  §  184,  2.  Return  estde  imperio. 

A  nominative,  however,  is  expressed  before  the  passivetbf  some  neuter 
verbs,  which,  in  the  active  voice,  are  followed  by  an^iccusative  ;  as, 


Pugna  pugnata  c.st.    Cic.     See  §  232,  (I.) 

(3.)  Before  the  neuter  of  the  future  passive  participle  with 
est;  as, 

Dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi,  You  yourself  must  first  grieve.    Hor 
Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  corpore  sano.   Juv. 


178  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  §  209. 

(4.)  Before  the  impersonal  verbs  miser  et,  pcemtet,  pudet, 
tcedet,  and  piget ;  as, 

Eos  ineptidrum  pcenltet,  They  repent  of  their  follies.  Cic.  Miseret  te 
aliorum,  tui  te  nee  miser et  necpudet.  Plaut.  Me  civitdtis  morum  piget  ttedet- 
que.  Sail.  In  such  examples,  the  sense  will  sometimes  permit  us  to  supply 
fortuna,  conditio,  memoria,  &c.  So  in  the  expression  Venit  m  mentem, 
It  came  into  mind ;  as,  In  mentem  venit  de  specula,  sc.  cogitatio,  &c. 
Plaut. 

An  infinitive  or  clause  sometimes  forms  the  subject  of  these  verbs ;  as, 
Te  id  nullo  modo  puduit  facgre,  To  do  that  by  no  means  shamed  you.  Ter. 
Non  pcenltet  me,  quantum  profecerim.  Cic. 

(5.)  When  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive  or  partici- 
ple (either  alone  or  with  other  words),  one  or  more  propositions, 
or  an  adverb.  (See  §  201,  IV.  1.)  The  verb  is  then  in  the 
third  person  singular ;  as, 

Vacare  culpa  magnum  est  solatium,  To  be  free  from  fault  is  a  great  con- 
solation. Neque  est  te  fallere  quidquam,  To  deceive  you  in  any  thing  is 
not  (possible.)  Virg.  Mentlri  non  est  meum.  Plaut.  Te  non  istud  audi- 
visse  mirum  est,  That  you  have  not  heard  that  is  wonderful.  Cic.  "  Sum- 
mum  jus,  summa  injuria,"/actawi  est  jam  tritum  sermone  proverlium.  Id. 
JY*i  degeneratum  in  aliis  huic  quoque  decori  offecisset.  Liv.  Sin  est  ut  velis 
manere  illam  apud  te.  Ter.  JYec  profuit  Hydra  crescere  per  damnum, 
geminasque  resumfire  vires.  Ovid.  Die  mihi,  eras  istud,  Postume,  quando 
venit  ?  Tell  me,  Postumus,  when  does  that  to-morrow  come  ?  Mart. 
Paruntme  campis  atque  Neptuno  super  fusum  est  Latlni  sangulnis  ?  Hor. 

This  construction  is  especially  common  with  impersonal  verbs;  as, 
Oratorem  irasci  non  dccet ;  That  an  orator  should  be  angry,  is  not  be- 
coming. Cic.  Hoc  fiSri  et  oportet  et  opus  est.  Id.  Me  pedibus  delectat 
claudere  verba.  Hor.  Interest  omnium  recte  faeere.  Cic.  Casu  accidit, 
ut,  id  quod  Romse  audierat,  primus  nuntiaret.  Id.  Sometimes  a  neuter 
pronoun  is  interposed  between  a  proposition  and  its  verb  ;  as,  Facere  qua 
libet,  id  est  regem  esse.  Sail. 

(6.)  Before  potest,  ccepit  or  cceptumest,  incipit,  desmit,  debet, 
solct,  and  videtur,  when  followed  by  the  infinitive  of  an  imper- 
sonal verb ;  as, 

Pigere  eum  facti  coepit,  It  began  to  repent  him  (i.e.  he  began  to  repent) 
of  his  conduct.  Just.  Sapientia  est  una,  qud  pr&ceptrlce,  in  tranquiilitdte 
vim  potest.  Cic.  Tcefare  solet  avdros  impendii.  Quinct. 

REM.  4.  The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as, 
Di  meliora  piis,  sc.  dent;  May  the  gods  grant  better  things  to  the  pious. 
Virg.  Verkm  hcec  hactlnus,  sc.  diximus.  Cic.  This  omission  is  most 
common  with  the  verb  sum  ;  as,  JVam  Polydorus  ego,  sc.  sum  ;  For  I  am 
Polydorus.  Vittk  Omnia  prcecldra  rara,  sc.  sunt.  Cic.  So  in  compound 
tenses  ;  as,  Ajjpfmulctdti,  sc.  sunt.  Liv. 

REM.  5.  The  nominative  is  sometimes  found  with  the  pres- 
ent infinitive ;  as, 

Interim  quotidie,  C&sar  JEduos  frumentum  flagitare,  Meanwhile  Ceesai 
was  daily  demanding  corn  of  the  ^Edui.  Caes.  Nos  pa-cldi  trepidare  metu. 
Virg.  Id  horrendum  ferri.  Id.  In  such  cases,  caepit  or  cceperunt  is  gene- 
rally supposed  to  be  understood  "}  sometimes  other  verbs  may  be  supplied, 


<§>  209.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  179 

but  often  the  infinitive  seems  to  be  used  instead  of  the  imperfect  indic- 
ative. 

REM.  6.  The  relative  qui  may  refer  to  an  antecedent  either 
of  the  first,  second,  or  third  person  ;  and  its  verb  takes  the  per- 
son of  the  antecedent ;  as, 

Ego  qui  lego,  I  who  read.  Tu  qui  scribis,  Thou  who  writest.  Equus  qui 
currit,  The  horse  which  runs. 

REM.  7.  Verbs  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  second 
person  singular,  are  sometimes  used  to  express  general  truths ; 
as, 

Quam  multa  fartmus  causd  amicorum !  How  many  things  we  do  (i.  e. 
men  do)  for  the  sake  of  friends  !  Cic.  Si  vis  me  flere,  dolendum  est  ipsi 
tibi,  Whoever  wishes  me,  &c.  Hor. 

REM.  8.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  nominative  by  at- 
traction. See  §  206,  (6.)  (b  ) 

REM.  9.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the  predicate  nominative, 
especially  if  it  precedes  the  verb  ;  as,  Jbmantium  irce  amoris  integratio  est, 
The  quarrels  of  lovers  are  a  renewal  of  love.  Ter. ;  and  sometimes  with 
the  nearest  subject  of  a  subordinate  sentence.  Sail.  Cat.  25. 

REM.  10.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees,  not  with  the  principal  nomina- 
tive, but  with  a  nearer  noun  in  apposition  to  it ;  as,  TungrijCi vitas  Gallic, 
fontcm  habet  insigncm  ;  The  Tungri,  a  state  of  Gaul,  has  a  remarkable 
fountain.  Plin. 

REM.  11.  A  collective  noun  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb  , 
as, 

Pars  epulis  ongrant  mensas.  Part  load  the  tables  with  food.  Virg. 
Turba  ruunt.  Ovid.  Pars  utrdque  avldi  erant.  Liv.  Mria  turba  tenent ', 
veniunt  leve  vulgus  euntque.  Ovid. 

(1.)  A  plural  verb,  joined  to  a  collective  noun,  usually  expresses  the  ac- 
tion, &c.,  of  the  individuals  which  that  noun  denotes.  In  Cicero  and 
Livy,  this  construction  scarcely  occurs  in  simple  sentences  ;  but  it  is  often 
used,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  not  expressed  in  its  own,  but  in  a 
preceding  clause ;  as,  Hoc  idem  genSri  humano  evenit,  quod  in  terrd  col- 
loeati  sint.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  two  or  more  clauses  have  the  same  collective  noun  as  their 
subject,  the  verb  is  frequently  singular  in  one,  and  plural  in  another;  as, 
Jam  ne  node,  quidem  turba  ex  eo  loco  dilabebatur,  refracturosque  carc£rem 
minabantur.  Liv.  Gens  eadem,  quce  te  crudeli  Daunia  bello  insequitur, 
nos  si  pellant,  nihil  abfore  credunt.  Virg. 

(3.)  Tantum,  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb, 
like  a  collective  noun,  as,  Quid  hue  tantum  komlnum  incedunt?  Why 
are  so  many  men  corning  hither  ?  Plaut. 

(4.)  A  plural  verb  is  often  used  after  uterque  and  quisque,  pars. ...pars, 
and  alias.... alium,  or  alter.. ..alt&rum,  on  account  of  the  idea  of  plurality 
which  they  involve  ;  as,  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum  educunt,  Each 
of  them  leads  his  army  from  the  camp.  Cses.  Intlmus  quisque  libertorum 
vincti  abreptlflwe  (sunt.)  Tac.  Alius  alium,  ut  prozlium  incipiant,  circum- 
'Spectant.  Liv. 

This  construction  may  be  explained  by  the  following  passage,  where 


180  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE.  §  209. 

the  plural  is  placed  first,  and  then  the  singular,  denoting  its  parts  ;  Cct8ri, 
suo  quisque  tempore,  aderunt.  Liv.     See  §  204,  REM.  10. 

REM.  12.  Two  or  more  nominatives  singular,  not  in  appo- 
sition, generally  have  a  plural  verb ;  as, 

Furor  ir&que  mentem  prascipitant,  Fury  and  rage  hurry  on  (my)  mind. 
Virg.  Dum  cetos,  metus,  magister,  prohibebant  Ter. 

(1 .)  If  the  predicate  belongs  to  the  several  nominatives  jointly,  the  verb 
is  always  plural;  as,  Grammatice  quondam  ac  musice  junctae  fuerunt. 
Quint. 

(2.)  A  singular  verb  is  often  used  after  several  nominatives 
singular,  especially  if  they  denote  things  without  life ;  as, 

Mzns  enim,  et  ratio  et  consilium  in  seriibus  est.  Cic.  Beneficentia,  lib- 
eralltas,  bonUas,jvstitiafundUus  tollitur.  Id.  This  construction  sometimes 
occurs  with  nam<  s  of  persons ;  as,  Gorgias,  Thrasymfahus,  Protagoras, 
Prodicu,  Hippias  in  honore  fuit.  Cic.  Cur  Lysias  et  Hyperides  amatur  ? 
Id. 

(3  )  When  one  of  the  nouns  is  plural,  the  verb  is  generally  so ;  but 
sometimes  it  is  singular,  when  the  plural  noun  does  not  immediately  pre- 
cede it ;  as,  Dii  te  pendtes  patriique,  et  patris  imago,  et  domus  regla,  et  in, 
domo  regale  solium,  et  nomen  Tarquinium  creat  voc&lque  regem.  Liv. 

(4.)  When  each  of  the  nomine tives  is  preceded  by  ct  or  turn,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  last ;  as,  Hoc  et  ratio  doctis,  et  necessita*  barbaris.  et  mos 
ventllus,  etferis  natura  ipsa  prsescripsit;  This,  reason  has  dictated  to  the 
learned,  and  necessity  to  barbarians ,  and  custom  to  nations,  and  nature 
itself  to  wild  beasts.  Cic.  Et  ego,  et  Cicero  meus  fiagitabit.  Id.  Turn 
aetas  vires^c,  turn  avlta  gloria  anlmum  stimulabat.  Liv.  So  when  the 
subject  consists  of  two  infinitives ;  as,  Et  facere,  et  pati  fortia,  Romanum 
est.  Cic.  With  sen — sen,  and  tan>, — quam  the  verb  is  plural. 

Unus  et  alter  always  takes  a  singular  verb ;  as,  Dicit  unus  ct  alter 
Irevltei,  Two  in  succession  speak  briefly.  Cic.  Un  is  et  alter  assuitur 
pannus.  Hor.  So  also  senatus  populusque  Romanus. 

(5.)  When  the  nominatives  are  connected  by  aut,  sometimes 
the  plural,  but  commonly  the  singular,  is  used  ;  as, 

Sz  Socrates  aut  Antisthenes  diceret,  If  Socrates  or  Antisthenes  should 
say.  Cic.  Ut  quosque  studium  privdtim  aut  gratia  occupaverunt.  Liv. 

The  plural  is  necessary  with  disjunctives,  if  the  subject  includes  the 
first  or  second  person ;  as,  Quod  in  Decemmris  neqve  ego  neque  Ccesar 
habiti  essemus.  Cic. 

(6.)  A  nominative  singular,  joined  to  an  ablative  by  the  preposition  cnm, 
sometimes  has  a  plural  verb  ;  as,  Bocchus,  cum  peditlbus,  postremam 
Romanorumaciem'mvSidunt;  Bocchus,  with  his  foot  soldiers,  attacks  the 
rear  of  the  Roman  army.  Sail.  Jpse  dux,  cum  atiquot  principibus,  ca- 
piuntur.  Liv. 

(7.)  If  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  first  person  rather  than  the  second,  and  with 
the  second  rather  than  the  third  ;  as, 

Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus ;  If  you  and  Tullia  are 
well,  Cicero  and  I  are  well.  Cic.  Hcec  neque  ego  nequc  tu  fecimus.  Ter 
Ego  populusque  Romanus  bellum  judico  facioque.  Liv. 

Yet  sometimes  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person  with  the  nearest 


<§>  210.  SYNTAX. PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE.  18 A 

nominative,  and  is  understood  with  the  other;  as,  Vos  ipsi  et  senatus 
frequens  restitit.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  action  of  the  verb  is 
qualified  with  reference  to  each  nominative  separately  j  as,  Ego  miser&t 
tufeliciter  vims. 

REM.  13.  The  interjections  en,  ecce,  and  0,  are  sometimes 
followed  by  the  nominative  ;  as, 

En  Priamus !  Lo  Priam !  Virg.  Ecce  homo  Catienus !  Cic.  O  vir 
fortis  atque  amlcus!  Ter. 

P  RE  DIG  ATE -NOMINATIVE. 

§210.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  after  a  verb  neuter 
or  passive,  is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it 
denotes  the  same  person  or  thing ;  as, 

Ira,  furor  brcvis  cst,  Anger  is  a  short  madness.  Hor.  Ego  vocor  Lycon- 
Tdes,  1  am  called  Lyconides.  Plaut.  Ego  incedo  regina,  I  walk  a  queen. 
Virg.  Caius  et  Lucius  fratres  fucrunt.  Cic. 

So  when  the  subject  is  in  the  accusative  ;  JudTcem  me  esse  volo.    Cic 

Sometimes  a  dative,  denoting  the  same  object,  both  precedes  and  follows 
a  verb  neuter  or  passive.  See  §  227,  NOTE  1. 

If  the  predicate  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  subject,  it 
takes  that  form  ,  as,  Liccntia  corruptrix  est  morum. 

REMARK  1.  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
standing  in  the  predicate,  after  verbs  neuter  or  passive,  and 
relating  to  the  subject,  agree  with  it  in  case. 

The  gender  and  number  of  such  adjectives,  &c.  are  determined  by  §  205. 

REM.  2.  The  noun  in  the  predicate  is  sometimes  in  a  different  number 
from  the  subject ;  as,  Sanguis  erant  lachrymce,  Her  tears  were  blood.  Ovid, 

So  when  a  subject  in  the  singular  is  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum 
as,  Exsules  esse  jubet  L.  Tarquimum  cum  conjuge  et  liberis.  Liv. 

REM.  3.  The  verbs  which  most  frequently  have  a  noun,  &c.,  in  the 
predicate  agreeing  in  case  with  their  subject,  are, 

(1.)  The  substantive  verb  sum;  as,  Ego  Jovis  sum  films.  Plaut.  Disce 
esse  pater.  Ter.  The  predicate  with  sum  may  be  an  adverb  of  place, 
manner,  &c.;  or  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case  ;  as,  Numen  sine  ture  est.  Ovid. 

(2.)  Certain  neuter  verbs,  denoting  position  or  motion;  as,  cado,  eo, 
evado,  existo,  fugio,  iricedo,  jaceo,  maneo,  sedeo,  sto,  venio,  &c.  Thus, 
Rex  circulbat  pedes,  The  king  went  round  on  foot.  Plin.  Quos  judicabat 
non  posse  oratdres  evad^re.  Cic.  Ego  huic  causa,  patronus  exstl'i.  Cic 

(3.)  The  passive  of  verbs  denoting 

(a.)  To  name  or  call ;  as,  appellor,  dicor,  nomlnor,  nunctipor,  perhibeor^ 
salutor,  vocor.  Thus,  Cognomlne  Justus  est  appelldtus,  He  was  called  by 
the  surname  Just.  Nep.  Aristce.us  olivce  dicitur  inventor.  Cic. 

(b.)  To  choose,  render,  or  constitute  ;  as,  constituor,  creor,  declaror, 
designor,  cllgor,  fio,  reddor,  renuncior.  Thus,  Dux  a  Romanis  electus  est 
Q.  Fabius.  Postquam  ephebus  factus  est.  Nep. 

(c.)  To  esteem  or  reckon  ;  as,  censeor,  credor,  deprchcndor,  existtmor, 
feror,  kabeor,  judlcor,  memdror,  numeror,  putor,  rcperior,  vidcor.  Thus, 
*Credebar  sangitinis  auctor  ego.  Ovid.  Malim  videri  timidui?  qudm  pa- 
rum  prudens.  Cic. 

16 


182  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER   NOUNS. 

JNoTE  1.  With  several  passives  of  the  last  class,  when  followed  by  a 
predicate-nominative,  &c.,  an  infinitive  of  sum  is  expressed  or  understood ; 
as,  Amens  mild  fuisse  videor.  Cic.  Atilius  prudens  esse  putabatur.  Id. 
So  with  dicor  (to  be  said),  and  perhibeor ;  as,  Verus  patma  diceris  esse 
pater.  Mart.  Hoc  ne  locutus  sine  merce.de  existlmer.  Phaed. 

NOTE  2.  Audio  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets  like  appellor ;  as,  Tu 
lexque  paterae  audisti  coram.  Hor. 

REM.  4.  A  predicate-nominative  is  used  after  many  other  verbs,  to 
denote  a  purpose,  time,  or  circumstance  of  the  action  ;  as,  Comes  addttus 
JEolides,  JSolides  was  added  as  a  companion.  Virg.  Lupus  obambulat 
nocturnus.  Id.  Apparet  liquldo  sublimis  in  cethere  Nisus.  Id.  So  with 
an  active  verb ;  Audlvi  hoc  puer.  Cic.  Sapiens  nil  fecit  invltus.  Id. 
Rempublicam  defendi  adolescens.  Id. 

REM.  5.  The  noun  opus,  signifying  need,  is  often  used  as  a  predicate 
after  sum.  It  is,  in  such  cases,  translated  by  the  adjectives  needful,  neces- 
sary, &c. ;  as,  Dux  nobis  et  auctor  opus  est.  Cic.  Multi  opus  sunt  boves. 
Varr.-  (Dixit)  aurum  et  ancillas  opus  esse.  Ter. 

REM.  6.  When  the  pronoun,  which  is  the  subject  of  an  infinitive,  is 
omitted,  the  case  of  the  predicate  is  sometimes,  in  the  poets,  attracted  into 
that  of  the  subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depends  ;  as,  Uxor 
invicti  Jovis  esse  nescis,  i.  e.  te  esse  uxorem.  Hor.  Retulit  Ajax  esse  Jovis 
pronepos.  Ovid.  The  dative  of  the  end  often  takes  the  place  of  the  pred- 
icate-nominative. See  §  227. 

GENITIVE. 
GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

$  SI  I.  A  noun  which  limits  the  meaning  of  another 
noun,  denoting  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the 
genitive  ;  as, 

Amor  gloria,  Love  of  glory.  Vitium  irce,  The  vice  of  anger. 

Arma  Achillis,  The  arms  of  Achilles.   Nemorum  custos,  The  guardian  of  the 
Pater  patrice,   The   father     of    the         groves. 

country.  Amor  habendi,  Love  of  possessing. 

In  the  first  example,  amor  denotes  love  in  general ;  gloria  limits  the 
affection  to  the  particular  object,  glory.  Such  universally  is  the  effect  of 
the  genitive,  depending  upon  a  noun.  See  §  201,  III. 

REMARK  1.  The  genitive  denotes  various  relations,  the  most  common 
of  which  are  those  of  SOURCE  ;  as,  Radii  solis,  The  rays  of  the  sun;— 
CAUSE  ;  as,  Dolor  podagra,  The  pain  of  the  gout ; — EFFECT;  as,  Artifcx 
mundi,  The  Creator  of  the  world; — POSSESSION  ;  as,  Domus  C&saris,  The 
house  of  Caesar  ; — OBJECT  ;  as,  Cogi.tatio  alicujus  rei,  A  thought  of  some- 
thing ; — PURPOSE  ;  as,  Apparatus  triumphi,  Preparation  for  a  triumph  ; — 
A  WHOLE  ;  as,  Pars  hojnmum,  A  part  of  men  ; — CHARACTER  ;  as,  Adoles- 
cens summce  audacia,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness  ; — MATERIAL  or 
COMPONENT  PARTS;  as,  Montes  auri,  Mountains  of  gold;  Acervus  scuto- 
rum,  A  heap  of  shields; — TIME  ;  as,  Frumentum  dierum  dccem.  Sail. 

REM.  2.  The  genitive  is  called  subjective,  when  it  denotes 
the  subject  of  the  action,  feeling,  &c.,  implied  in  the  noun 


§  211.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  183 

which  it  limits.  It  is  called  objective,  when  it  denotes  the 
object  of  such  action,  &c. ;  as, 

Subjective.  Objective. 

Facia  virorum,  Deeds  of  men.  Odium  vitii,  Hatred  of  vice. 

Dolor  anlmi,  Grief  of  mind.  Amor  virtiitis,  Love  of  virtue. 

Junonis  ira,  The  anger  of  Juno.         Desiderium  otiit  Desire  of  leisure. 

Whether  a  genitive  is  subjective  or  objective,  is  to  be  determined  by 
the  meaning  of  the  words,  and  by  their  connection.  Thus,  providentia 
Dei  signifies  the  providence  of  God,  or  that  exercised  by  him  ;  timor  Dei, 
fear  of  God,  or  that  exercised  towards  him.  The  same  or  similar  words, 
in  different  connections,  may  express  both  significations.  Thus,  metus 
hostium,  fear  of  the  enemy,  may  mean  that  felt  either  by  themselves  or  by 
their  opponents.  So  vulnus  Ulyssis  (Virg.)  denotes  the  wound  whicn 
Ulysses  had  given ;  vulnus  JEnea,  (Id.)  that  which  iEneas  had  received. 

When  ambiguity  would  arise,  instead  of  the  objective  genitive,  a  prep- 
osition, with  an  accusative  or  ablative,  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Amor  in 
rempubUcam,  for  reipublica  ;  Love  to  the  state.  Cic.  Odium  erga  Romanes, 
for  Romanorum.  Nep.  Cura  de  salute  patrice,  for  salutis.  Cic.  Praddtor 
ex  sociisj  for  sociorum.  Sail. 

REM.  3.  A  substantive  pronoun,  which  limits  the  meaning 
of  a  noun,  is  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as, 

Cura  meij  Care  for  me.  Ovid.  Pars  tui,  Part  of  thee.  Id.  Nostri  nun- 
ciusj  Our  messenger.  Virg.  Magna  mei  imago.  Id. 

Instead  of  the  subjective  or  possessive  genitive  of  a  substan- 
tive pronoun,  the  corresponding  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly 
used  ;  as, 

Cura  mea,  My  care,  i.  e.  the  care  exercised  by  me.  Yet  the  genitive 
sometimes  occurs ;  as,  Tui  unius  studio.  By  the  zeal  of  yourself  alone.  Cic. 

Sometimes,  also,  an  adjective  pronoun  occurs  instead  of  the  objective 
genitive  ;  as,  Mea  injuria.  Injury  to  me.  Sail. 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  noun,  also,  a  possessive  adjective  is 
often  used;  as,  Causa  regia,  for  causa  regis.  Cic.  lleritiBjUix*,  for  Am 
filius.  Id.  Evandrius  ensis,  for  Evandri.  Virg.  Herculeus  labor ,  for 
Herculis.  Hor.  Civilis/wror,  for  civium.  Hor.  Metus  hostllis,  Sail. 

REM.  5.  The  dative  is  sometimes  used  like  the  objective 
genitive ;  as, 

Exitium  pecori,  A  destruction  to  the  flock.  Virg.  Presidium  reis,  A 
defence  to  the  accused.  Hor.  Decus  amlcis.  Id.  Erft  ille  mihi  semper 
Deus.  Virg.  Dicor  tibi  frater.  Mart,  factor  fid  senatui.  Cic.  Huic 
causae  patronus  exstlli.  Id.  Qucm  exltum  tantis  malis  sperdrent.  Sail. 
Romaiiis  impcrdtor.  Id.  Mur&na  legdtus  Lucullo  fuit.  Cic. 

In  these  cases,  the  noun  which  is  limited  by  the  dative,  denotes  a  char- 
acter, feeling,  &c.,  and  the  dative  the  object  towards  which  that  character, 
&c.,  is  exhibited  or  exercised.  This  construction  sometimes  occurs  with 
verbal  nouns,  whose  primitives  are  followed  by  the  dative  ;  as,  Obtempe- 
ratio  leglbus,  Obedience  to  laws.  Cic.  Traditio  alteri.  Id.  In  some 
instances,  also,  an  accusative  follows  a  verbal  noun ;  as,  Quid  tibi  hanc 
curatio  est  rem  ?  Plaut. 

1.  Instead  of  the  possessive  and  subjective  genitive,  also,  a  dative  is  some- 
times used,  as  the  remote  object  of  a  verb ;  as,  Sese  omnes  flentes  Csesari 
ad  pedcs  projeccrunt ;  They  all,  weeping,  cast  themselves  at  the  feet  of 
Caesar.  Caes.  Cui  corpus  porrigltur,  For  whom  the  body  is  extended, 
t.  e  whose  body  is  extended.  Virg.  Transfigltur  scutum  Pulfioni.  Cses. 


184  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  $  211. 

REM.  6.  When  the  limiting  noun  denotes  a  property, 
character,  or  quality,  it  has  an  adjective  agreeing  with  it,  arid 
is  put  either  in  the  genitive  or  ablative  ;  as, 

Vir  exempli  recti,  A  man  of  correct  example.  Liv.  Adolescens  summa 
audacicB,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness.  Sail.  Fossa  pedum  viginti,  A 
ditch  of  twenty  feet.  Ctes.  Pulchritudine  eximid  femina,  A  woman  of 
exquisite  beauty.  Cic.  Maximo  uatu  Jilius,  The  eldest  son.  Nep.  So 
Quinqun.ginta  annorum  imperium.  Id.  Iter  unius  diei.  Cic.  Galba 
tribus  et  septuagi?ita  annis.  Tac.  Fossam  sex  cubUis  altam.  Liv. 

Sometimes  both  constructions  occur  in  the  same  proposition.;  as,  Len- 
tulum  nostrum,  eximiu  spe,  suinmae  virtu tis  adolescentem.  Cic.  Scrobis 
lotus  pedum  duorurn,  altus  dupondio  et  dodrante.  Plin. 

(1.)  A  genitive  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  adjective;  and  the 
noun  denoting  the  property,  &c.,  is  then  always  put  in  the  ablative ;  as, 
Est  bos  cervi  figura,  ....of  the  form  of  a  stag.  Cses.  Uri  specie  et  colore 
tauri.  Id. 

(2.)  The  genitive,  in  this  sense,  sometimes  occurs  without  an  adjective ; 
as,  Homlnem  non  nauci.  Plaut.  Homo  nihlli.  Varr.  So,  Frutex  palmi 
altitudlne.  Plin.  Clam  digiti  pollicis  crassitudlne.  Cses.  In  which 
examples  unius  may  be  understood  with  the  genitives. 

Whether  the  genitive  or  ablative  is  preferable  in  particular  cases,  can 
only  be  determined  by  reference  to  classical  authority. 

NOTE.  Nouns  denoting  extent  of  time  or  space,  after  other  nouns, 
are  oflen  put  in  the  accusative.  See  §  236. 

REM.  7.  The  noun  limited  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  0  misera  sortis .' 
sc.  homines;  O  (men)  of  wretched  fortune  I  Lucan.  Ad  Diana,  sc. 
ffidem.  Ter.  Hectdris  Andromache,  sc.  uxor.  Virg.  Suspicionis  vitandte, 
sc.  causa.  Tac.  Sofilius  OTJilia;  as  Hannibal  Gisgonis. 

The  omitted  noun  may  sometimes  be  supplied  from  the  preceding 
words;  as,  Cujumpecus?  an  Melibcei?  Non;  verum  JEgonis,  sc.  pecus. 
Virg.  An  adjective  is  often  expressed  referring  to  the  noun  omitted; 
as,  Null  am  virtus  aliam  mercedem  desiderat,  prater  hanc  (sc.  mercedem) 
laudis.  Cic. 

REM.  8.     The  noun  limited  is  often  wanting  in  the  predicate 
of  a  sentence  after  sum.     This  usually  happens, 
(1.)  When  it  has  been  previously  expressed  ;  as, 
H&c  domus  est  Ccosaris,  This  house  is  Caesar's.     Nomen  aura  tarn  scepe 
Tocatum  csse  putans  Nymphfe.  Ovid.     Naves  oner  arias,  quarum  minor  null  a 
erat  duum  milliuin  ampkorum,  i.  e.  quarum  minor  nulla  erat  quam  navis 
duilm,  &c.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  a  person,  an  animal, 
&c. ;  as, 

Thucydldes,  qui  ejusdem  cKtdtisfuit,  sc.  homo  ;  Thucydides,  who  was  of 
the  same  age.  Nep.  Multum  ei  detraxit,  quod  alientB  erat  eimtdtis,  se. 
homo  or  civis.  Id.  Summi  ut  sint  laboris  efficiunt,  sc.  animalia.  Cass. 
(Claudius)  somni  bremsslmi  erat.  Suet.  Mira  sum  alacritate.  Cic.  Vulgus 
in(fe?iio  moblli  erat.  Sail.  Non  est  juris  sui.  Lucan.  Potestdtis  sua  esse. 
Liv.  Suarumque  rerum  erant.  id. 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  thing,  for  which  the 
words  part ,  property,  duty,  office,  characteristic,  &,c.,  are  com- 
monly supplied  ;  as, 

TemefUas  est  florentis  wt.atis,  prudentia  senectutis,  Rashness  is  fthe  chad'- 


$  211.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  185 

acteristic)  of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age.  Cic.  Est  hoc  Galhca  consuetu- 
dlnis.  Caes.  Oinnia  hostium  erant.  A  panels  emi,  quod  multorum  esset 
Sail.  This  happens  especially  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive 
rnood,  or  an  entire  clause  ;  as,  Adolescentis  est  majores  natu  revereri,  It  is 
(the  duty)  of  a  youth  to  reverence  the  aged.  Ovid.  Cujusvis  homlnis  est 
errdre,  nullius  nisi  insipientis,  in  errdre  perseverdre.  Cic.  Pauperis  est 
numerdre  pecus  Ovid.  Negdvit  moris  esse  Gr&corum,  ut  in  convivio  viro- 
rum  accumb&rent  mulieres.  Cic.  Mhil  tarn  aquanda  libertdtis  esse.  Liv. 
So  when  the  veib  is  omitted ;  Tamen  qfficii  duxit,  exordre  patrem,  sc. 
ess».  Suet. 

(4.)  The  same  construction  sometimes  occurs  after  facio,  and  some  other 
verbs  ;  as,  Asia,  Romanorum  facta  est,  Asia  became  (a  possession)  of  the 
Romans.  Just.  Primum  stipendium  meruit  annorum  decem  septemque. 
Nep.  Agrum  suce  ditionis  fecisse.  Liv. 

(5.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  wanting,  when  it  is  a  general  word, 
though  not  in  the  predicate  after  sum  ;  as,  Magni  formica  laboris,  sc.  ani- 
mal ;  The  ant  (an  animal)  of  great  labor.  Hor.  So  Ei  venit  in  mentem 
potestdtis  tiuB,  sc.  memoria,  or  the  like.  Cic. 

(6.)  The  limited  noun  is  wanting  also,  when,  instead  of  the  genitive,  a 
possessive  adjective  or  pronoun  is  used  ;  as,  Humdnum  est  errdre,  To  err 
is  human.  Ter.  Hce  partes  fuerunt  tuce.  Cic.  Non  est  mentlri  meum.  Ter. 
Bee  §  211,  REM.  3,  and  4. 

NOTE.  Grammarians  differ  in  regard  to  the  manner  of  supplying  the 
word  which  is  wanting,  when  it  denotes  a  thing.  Some  suppose  that 
negotium  is  understood ;  others  supply  officium,  munus,  opus,  res,  causa,  &c. 
It  seems,  however,  rather  to  be  an  instance  of  a  construction  common  in 
Latin,  to  omit  a  noun  when  a  general  or  indefinite  idea  is  intended.  See 
§  205,  REM.  7,  (2.)  The  words  to  be  supplied  in  English  are  various, 
according  to  the  connection. 

REM.  9.  The  limiting  noun  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Tria  millia, 
sc.  passuum.  In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  an  adjective,  adjective  pronoun, 
or  participle,  is  expressed  in  the  genitive. 

REM.  10.  Two  genitives  sometimes  limit  the  same  noun,  one  of  which 
is  commonly  possessive  or  subjective,  and  the  other  objective ;  as,  Aga- 
memnonis  belli  gloria,  Agamemnon's  glory  in  war.  Nep.  Illius  adminis- 
tratio  provincisB.  Cic.  Eorum  dierurn  consuetudlne  itineris  nostri  ezercl- 
tus  perspectd.  Goes. 

REM.  11.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  rarely  limited  by  a  gen- 
itive ;  as,  Argenti  opus  fuit,  There  was  need  of  money.  Liv.  Ad  consi- 
lium  pensandum  temporis  opus  esse.  Id.  Prooemii  non  semper  usus  est. 
Quinct.  Si  quo  operas  eorum  usus  est.  Liv.  In  a  few  instances,  they  are 
limited  by  an  accusative  ;  as,  Pulro  opus  est  ciburn  (Plaut.)  ;  Usus  est 
hominem  astutum  (Id.) ;  but  in  general  they  are  limited  by  an  ablative. 
Bee  §  243. 

REM.  12. v  The  relation  denoted  by  the  genitive  in  Latin,  is,  in  English 
generally  expressed  by  of,  or  by  the  possessive  case.  The  objective  gen- 
.tive  may  often  be  rendered  by  some  other  preposition ;  as,  Remedium 
doloris,  A  remedy  for  pain.  Injuria  patris,  Injury  to  a  father.  Descensus 
Averni,  The  descent  to  Avernus.  Ira  belli,  Anger  on  account  of  the 
nrar.  Potestas  rei,  Power  in  or  over  a  thing. 

NOTE.     Certain  limitations  of  nouns  are  made  by  the  accusative  with  a 
preposition,  and  by  the  ablative,  either  with  or  without  a  preposition 
16* 


186  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTITIVES         $  212. 


GENITIVE     AFTER    PARTITIVES. 

§  212.  Nouns,  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  ad- 
verbs, denoting  a  part,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting 
the  whole ;  as, 

Pars  civitdtis,  A  part  of  the  state.  Nulla  sororum,  No  one  of  the  sis- 
ters. Jlhquis  philosopkorum,  Some  one  of  the  philosophers.  Quis  morta- 
lium  ?  Who  of  mortals  ?  Major  jwcenum,  The  elder  of  the  youths.  Doc- 
tissimus  Romandrum,  The  most  learned  of  the  Romans.  Multum  pecunw, 
Much  (of)  money.  Satis  eloquential,  Enough  of  eloquence.  Ullnam 
gentium  sumus  ?  Where  on  earth  are  we  ? 

NOTE.  The  genitive  thus  governed  denotes  either  a  number,  of  which 
the  partitive  designates  one  or  more  individuals ;  or  a  whole,  of  which 
the  partitive  designates  a  portion.  In  the  latter  sense,  it  commonly  fol- 
lows neuter  adjectives  arid  adjective  pronouns,  and  adverbs. 

REMARK  1.  The  nouns  which  denote  a  part  are  pars,  nemo, 
nihil,  &,c. ;  as, 

Nemo  nostrum,  No  one  of  us.  Omnium  rerum  nihil  est  agricultural  me- 
lius.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  denoting  a 
part  of  a  number,  including  partitives  and  words  used  parti- 
tively,  comparatives,  superlatives,  and  numerals,  are  followed 
by  the  genitive  plural,  or  by  the  genitive  singular  of  a  collec- 
tive noun.  For  the  gender  of  the  adjectives,  See  §  205,  R.  12. 

(1.)  Partitives;  &s,utlus,  nullus,  solus,  alias,  uter,  uterque,  utercunque, 
utervis,  utertibet,  neuter,  alter,  alteruter,  aliquis,  quidam,  quispiam,  quisquis,, 
quisque,  quisquam,  quicunque,  unusquisque,  quis  ?  qui  ?  quot?  quotus  ?  quo- 
tusquisque  ?  tot,  aliquot,  nonnulli.,  plerlque,  muiti,  pauci,  medius.  Thus, 
Quisquis  deorum,  Whoever  of  the  gods.  Ovid.  Consulum  alter,  One  of 
the  consuls.  Liv.  Multi  homtnum,  Many  men.  Plin.  Medius  omnium.  Liv. 

(2.)  Words  used  partitively ;  as,  Expedlti  mitltum,  The  light-armed 
soldiers.  Liv.  Superi  deorum,  The  gods  above.  Hor.  Sancte  deorum. 
Virg.  Degeneres  canum.  Plin.  Piscium  femlnce.  Id. 

(3.)  Comparatives  and  superlatives ;  as,  Doctior  juvenum.  Oratorum 
prcBstantisslmus . 

(4.)  Numerals,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal ;  also  the  distributive  singuli, 
as,  Equitum  centum  quinquaginta  interfecti,  A  hundred  and  fifty  of  the 
horsemen  were  killed.  Curt.  Supientum  octdvus.  Hor.  Singulos  vestrum. 
Curt. 

NOTE  1.  The  comparative  with  the  genitive  denotes  one  of  two  in- 
dividuals or  classes ;  the  superlative  denotes  a  part  of  a  nutnber  greater 
than  two  ;  as,  Major  fratrum,  The  elder  of  two  brothers;  Maxlmus  fra- 
trum,  The  eldest  of  three  or  more. 

In  like  manner,  utcr,  alter,  and  neuter,  generally  refer  to  two ;  quis,  alius, 
and  nullus,  to  more  than  two ;  as,  Uter  nostrum  ?  Which  of  us  (two  ?) 
Quis  vestrum  ?  Which  of  you  (three  or  more  ?) 

NOTE  2.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  after  partitives,  &c.,  in 
preference  to  nostri  and  vestri.  So  also  when  joined  with  omnium. 

NOTE  3.  The  partitive  word  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Fies  nobilium 
tu  quoquejontium,  sc.  unus.  Hoi.  Gentics  sestertwm,  sc,  eentena  mttlia 


$  212.        SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTEK    PARTITIVES.  187 

NOTE  4.  The  noun  denoting  the  whole,  after  a  partitive  word,  is  often 
put  in  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  e,  ex,  or  in,  or  in  the  accusa- 
tive, with  apud  or  inter  ;  as,  JVerao  de  iis.  Alter  ex  censoribus.  Liv.  Unus 
ex  rrmltis.  Cic.  Acerrlmas  ex  senslbus.  Id.  Primus  inter  omnes.  Virg. 
Croesus  inter  reges  opulentisslmus.  Sen.  Apud  Helve tios  nobilisslmus. 

NOTE  5.  Thei  whole  and  its  parts  are  frequently  placed  in  apposition, 
distributively  ;  as,  Interfectores,  pars  in  forum,  pars  Syracusas  pergunt 
Liv.  See  §  204,  REM.  10. 

JJ^OTE  6.  Cuncti  and  omnes,  like  partitives,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a 
genitive  plural ;  as,  Attains  Macedonum  fere  omnibus  persuasit,  Attalus 
persuaded  almost  all  the  Macedonians.  Liv.  Cunctos  hominum.  Ovid. 
Cunctas  provinciarum.  Plin. 

In  the  following  passage,  the  genitive  singular  seems  to  be  used  like  that 
of  a  collective  noun  :  Totius  outturn  injustitiae  nulla  capitalior  est,  &/c.  Cic. 
Off.  1,  13.  The  phrase  Rein  nullo  modo  probabllem  omnium  (Cic.  Nat. 
Deor.  1,  27,)  seems  to  be  used  for  Rem  nullo  omnium  modorum  probabllem. 

REM.  3.  The  genitive  denoting  a  whole,  may  depend  on  a 
neuter  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  With  these  the  genitive 
singular  is  commonly  used  ;  as, 

Plus  eloquent^,  More  (of)  eloquence.  Tantum  fidei,  So  much  fidelity. 
Id  temporis,  That  time.  Ad  hoc  (etdtis.  Sometimes  the  plural ;  as,  Id 
miser idrum.  Ter.  Armorum  quantum.  Caes. 

NOTE  1.  Most  neuter  adjectives,  thus  used,  denote  quantity ;  as,  tantum, 
quantum,  aliquantum,  plus,  minus,  dimidium,  multum,  nimium,  plurimum, 
rdlquum  ;  to  which  add  medium,  summum,  ulflmum,  aliud,  &c.  The  pro- 
nouns thus  used  are  hoc,  id,  illud,  istud,  quod,  and  quid,  with  its  com- 
pounds. 

Most  of  these  may  either  agree  with  their  nouns,  or  take  a  genitive  ; 
but  the  latter  is  more  common.  Tantum,  quantum,  aliquantum,  and  plus, 
when  they  denote  quantity,  are  used  with  a  genitive  only,  as  are  also  quid 
and  its  compounds,  when  they  denote  a  part,  sort,  &c.,  and  quod  in  the 
sense  of  quantum.  Thus,  Quantum  crevit  Nilus,  tantum  spei  in  annum 
cst.  Sen.  Quid  mulieris  uxorem  hales?  What  kind  of  a  woman....  Ter. 
Allquid  formaa.  Cic.  Quid  hoc  rei  est  1  What  does  this  mean  ?  Ter. 
Quod  auri,  quod  argenti,  quod  ornamentorum/^^,  id  Verres  abstulit. 

NOTE  2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns  are  scarcely  used  with  a  gen- 
itive, except  in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

NOTE  3.  Sometimes  the  genitive  after  these  adjectives  and  pronouns 
is  a  neuter  adjective,  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  without  a  noun ; 
as,  Tantum  boni,  So  much  good.  Si  quid  habes  novi,  If  you  have  any 
thing  new.  Cic.  Quid  rellqui  est  ?  Ter.  Nihil  is  also  used  with  such  a 
genitive  ;  as,  Mhil  sinceri,  No  sincerity.  Cic.  This  construction  some- 
times, though  rarely,  occurs  with  an  adjective  of  the  third  declension ;  as, 
Si  quidquam  non  dico  civllis  sed  humani  esset.  Liv. 

NOTE  4.  Neuter  adjectives  in  the  plural  number  are  sometimes 
followed  by  a  genitive,  either  singular  or  plural,  with  a  partitive  significa- 
tion ;  as,  Extrema  imperil,  The  frontiers  of  the  empire.  Tac.  Ponies  ct 
viarum  angusta,  The  bridges  and  the  narrow  parts  of  the  roads.  Id. 
Opaca  locorum.  Virg.  Antlqua  fccderum.  Liv.  Cuncta  cainporum.  Tac. 
Exerccnt  coUes,atque  horum  asperrlma  pascunt.  Virg.  See  §  205,  REM.  9. 

REM.  4,     The  adverbs  sat,  satis,  parum,  nimis,  abunde,  largi- 


SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.       §  213. 

ter,  affatim,  and  partim,  used  partitively,  are  often  followed  by  a 
genitive;  as, 

Sat  ratidnis,  Enough  of  reason.  Virg.  Satis  eloquentice,parum  sapientice ; 
Enough  of  eloquence,  yet  but  little  wisdom.  Sail.  Nimis  insidiarum.  Cic. 
Terrorisetfraudisabundeest.  Virg.  Jiuri  et  argenti  largUer.  Plaut.  Co- 
pidrum  affdtim.  Liv.  Cum  partim  illorum  mihi  familiarisslmi  essent.  Cic. 

NOTE  1.  The  above  words,  though  generally  adverbs,  seem,  in  this  use, 
rather  to  be  nouns  or  adjectives. 

NOTE  2.  The  genitives  gentium,  terrdrum,  loci,  and  locorum,  are  used 
after  adverbs  of  place  ;  as,  Usquam  gentium,  Any  where.  Plaut.  Ubi  ter- 
rdrum sumus  1  Where  in  the  world  are  we  ?  Cic.  Mire  qud  terrdrum 
possent.  Liv.  Ubi  sit  loci.  Plin.  Eo  loci,  In  that  place.  Tac.  Eodem 
loci  res  est.  Cic.  Nesclre  quo  loci  esset.  Id.  But  the  last  three  examples 
might  perhaps  more  properly  be  referred  to  REM.  3. 

The  adverbs  of  place  thus  used  are  ubi,  ublnam,  ubicunque,  ubiubi, 
ublvis,  usquam,  nusqvsim,  qud,  quovis,  quoqud,  allqud,  ed,  eddem.  Loci 
also  occurs  after  ibi  and  ibidem;  gentium  after  long&  ;  as,  Ibi  loci,  In  that 
place.  Plin.  Jibes  longb  gentium.  Cic.  Vicinia  is  used  in  the  genitive 
after  hie  and  hue  by  the  comic  writers ;  as,  Hie  proximo;  vicini(£.  Plaut. 
Hue  vicinia.  Ter. 

NOTE  3.  Hue,  ed,  qud,  take  also  a  genitive  in  the  sense  of  degree;  as, 
Ed  insolentise  furoris^we  processit,  He  advanced  to  such  a  degree  of  inso- 
lence and  madness.  Plin.  Hue  enim  malorum  ventum  cst.  Curt.  Hucclnt, 
rerum  venimus?  Pers.  Ed  miseriarum.  Sail.  Qud  amentias  progressi 
sitis.  Liv. 

NOTE  4.  Loci,  locorum,  and  tempdris,  are  used  after  the  adverbs  adhuc, 
inde,  interea,  postea^  turn,  and  tune,  in  expressions  denoting  time ;  as, 
Adhuc  locorum,  Till  now.  Plaut.  Inde  loci,  After  that.  Lucr.  Interea 
loci,  In  the  mean  time.  Ter.  Postea  loci,  Afterwards.  Sail.  Turn  tem- 
pdris. Just.  Tune  tempdris.  Id.  Locorum  also  occurs  after  id,  denoting 
time  ;  as,  JJd  id  locorum,  Up  to  that  time.  Sail. 

NOTE  5.  The  genitive  ejus  sometimes  occurs  after  quoad,  in  such  con- 
nections as  the  following  :  Quoad  ejus  fieri  possit,  As  far  as  may  be  (Cic.)  ; 
where  some  think  quod,  in  the  sense  of  quantum,  should  be  read,  instead 
of  quoad. 

NOTE  6.  Pridie  and  postridie,  though  reckoned  adverbs,  are  followed 
by  a  genitive,  depending  on  the  noun  dies  contained  in  themj  as,  Pridie 
ejus  diei,  The  day  before  that  day.  Cic.  Pridie  insidiarum.  Tac.  Pos- 
tridie ejus  diei.  Cees.  When  they  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  ante  or 
post  is  understood. 

NOTE  7.  Adverbs,  in  the  superlative  degree,  like  adjectives,  are 
followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  Optlmb  omnium,  Best  of  all.  Cic.  Minimi 
gentium,  By  no  means.  Ter. 


GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

§  213.  A  noun,  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective, 
is  put  in  the  genitive,  to  denote  the  relation  expressed  in 
English  by  of,  or  in  respect  of;  as, 

Avldus  laudis,  Desirous  of  praise.         Plena  timoris,  Full  of  fear. 
Appetens  gloria,  Desirous  of  glory.      Eg€nus  aqua,  Destitute  of  water. 
irtntis,  Mindful  of  virtue.       Doctusfandi,  Skilful  in  speaking. 


§  213.        SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  189 

So  Nescia  mens  fati,  A  mind  ignorant  of  fate.  Virg.  Impdtens  ircR, 
Unable  to  control  anger.  Liv.  Homines  expertes  veritdtis,  Men  destitute 
of  truth.  Cic.  Lactis  abundans,  Abounding  in  milk.  Virg.  Terra  ferax 
arborum,  Land  productive  of  trees.  Plin.  Tenax  proposlti  vir,  A  man 
tenacious  of  his  purpose.  Hor.  JEger  anlmi,  Sick  in  mind.  Liv.  Integer 
mice,  scelerisquc  purus,  Upright  in  life,  and  free  from  wickedness.  Hor. 

From  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  genitive  after  an 
adjective  is  sometimes  translated  by  other  words  besides  of,  or  in  respect 
of,  though  the  relation  which  it  denotes  remains  the  same. 

REMARK  1.       The  adjectives  whose   signification   is   most 

frequently  limited  by  a  genitive,  are, 

(1.)  VERBALS  in  AX;  as,  capax,  edax,ferax,fugax,pervlcax,  tenax,  &c 
(2.)  PARTICPIALS  in  NS,  and  a  few  in  TUS  ;  as,  amans,  appetens,  cuptens, 

patiens,  impatiens,  insolens,  sitiens  ; — consultus,  doctus,  expertus,  inexper- 

tus,  insaetus,  insolitus,  solutus. 

(3.)  Adjectives  denoting 

DESIRE  and  DISGUST  ;  as,  avarus,avtdus,  cupldus,  studiosus  ;  fastidiosus. 

KNOWLEDGE  and  IGNORANCE  ;  as,  calUdus,  conscius,  gnarits,  perltus, 
prudens;  rudis,  igndrus,  inscius,  imprildens,  imperitus,  <fcc. 

MEMORY  and  FORGETFULNESS  ;  as,  mcmor  ;  immemor,  &c. 

CERTAINTY  and  DOUBT;  as,  certus ;  incertus,  ambiguus,  dubius,  sus- 
pen&us,  &c. 

CARE  and  NEGLIGENCE;  as,  anxius,  solicitus,  provldus ;  improvldus, 
securus,  &c. 

FEAR  and  CONFIDENCE  ;  as,  pavldus,  tim/tdus;  trepldus,  impavidus9 
fidens,  interrltus,  &c. 

GUILT  and  INNOCENCE  ;  as,  noxius,  reustsuspectusycompertus,  manifes- 
tus  ;  innoxius,  innocens,  insons,  &c. 

PLENTY  and  WANT;  as,  plenus,  dives,  satur,  largus;  inops,  egenus, 
pauper,  parcus,  vacuus,  &c. 

Many  other  adjectives  are  in  like  manner  limited  by  a  genitive,  espe- 
cially by  arifmi,  ingenii,  mentis,  irce,  mililice,  belli,  laboris,  rerum,  cmi, 
morum,  a.ndfidei. 

REM.  2.  The  limiting  genitive,  by  a  Greek  construction,  sometimes 
denotes  a  cause  or  source,  especially  in  the  poets ;  as,  Lassus  laboris, 
Weary  of  labor.  Hor.  Fessus  vice.  Stat.  Fessus  maris.  Hor. 

REM.  3.  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  take  after  them  the  same 
case  as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  Se  amans,  Loving 
himself.  Cic.  Mare  terram  appetens.  Id. 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  denoting  of,  or  in  respect 
of,  a  different  construction  is  used  after  many  adjectives ;  as, 

(1.)  An  infinitive  or  clause ;  as,  Certus  ire,  Determined  to  go.  Ovid. 
Cantare  perlti.  Virg.  Felicior  unguere  tela.  Id.  Anxius  quid  facto  opus 
sit.  Sail. 

(2.)  An  accusative  with  a  preposition;  as,  Ad  rem  avidior.  Ter. 
Avld'us  in  direptiones.  Liv.  Jinlmus  capax  ad  prcecepta.  Ovid.  Ad 
casurn  fortunam^e  felix.  Cic.  Ad  fraudem  calUdus.  Id.  DiUgcns  ad 
custodiendum.  Id.  Negligcntior  in  patrem.  Just.  Vir  ad  discipllnam 
peritus.  Cic.  Ad  bella  rudis.  Liv.  Potens  in  res  bellicas.  Id.  Macer 
ad  maleficia.  Cic.  Inter  bellum  et  pacem  nihil  medium  est.  Id. 

(3.)  An  accusative  without  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  the  poets;  as 
\udus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os,  humerosowe  deo  simtlis 
Id.  Cetera  fulvus.  Hor.  See  $  234,  II. 


190  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  214. 

(4.)  An  ablative  with  a  preposition ;  as,  Avldus  in  pecuniis,  Eager  in 
regard  to  money.  Cic.  Anxius  de  famft.  Quinct.  Rudis  in  jure  civlli. 
Cic.  Perltus  de  agricultura.  Varr.  Prudens  in  jure  civlli.  Cic.  Reus 
de  vi.  Id.  Purus  ab  cultu  humdno.  Liv.  Certior  factus  de  re.  Cic. 
SolicUvs  de  re.  Id.  Super  scelere  suspectus.  Sail.  Inops  ab  amlcis.  Cic. 
Pauper  in  CBre.  Hor.  Modlcus  in  cultu.  Plin.  Ab  aquis  sterilis.  Apul. 
Copiosus  a  frumento.  Cic.  Ab  equitatufirmus.  Id. 

(5.)  An  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Arte  rudis,  Rude  in  art. 
Ovid.  Regni  crimine  insons.  Liv.  Compos  mente.  Virg.  Prudens 
consilio.  Just.  JEgcr  pedibus.  Sail.  PrcEstans  ingenio.  Cic.  Modlcus 
severitate.  Tac.  Nihil  insidiis  vacuum.  Cic.  Amor  et  melle  et  felle  est 
fecundisslmus.  Plaut.  Medius  Polluce  et  Castore.  Ovid. 

In  many  instances,  the  signification  of  the  accusative  and  ablative  after 
adjectives  differs,  in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  from  that  of  the  genitive. 

REM.  5.  As  many  of  the  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive, 
admit  of  other  constructions,  the  most  common  use  of  each,  with  particu- 
lar nouns,  can,  in  general,  be  determined  only  by  recourse  to  the  diction- 
ary, or  to  the  classics.  Some  have, 

(1.)  The  genitive  only ;  as,  benignus,  exsors,  impos,  impotens,  irrltus, 
liberdlis,  muniflcus,  prcdargus,  and  many  others. 

(2.)  The  genitive  more  frequently ;  as,  compos,  consors,  egenus,  exhares, 
expers,fertllis,  indlgus,  parcus,  pauper,  prodlgus,  sterilis,  prosper,  insatid- 
tus,  insatiabllis. 

(3.)  The  genitive  or  ablative  indifferently ;  as,  copiosus,  dives,  fecundus, 
ferax,  immunis,  indnis,  inops,  largus,  modlcus,  immodlcus,  nimius,  opulen- 
tus,  plenus,  potens,  purus,  refertus,  satur,  vacuus,  uler. 

(4.)  The  ablative  more  frequently;  as,  abundans,  alienus,  cassus, 
extorris,firmus,  foetus,  frequens,  gravis,  gravldus,  jejunus,  injirmus,  liber, 
locuples,  IcetiLS,  mactus,  nudus,  onustus,  orbus,  pollens,  satiatus.  tenuis, 
truncus,  viduus. 

(5.)  The  ablative  only ;  as,  bedtus,  mutllus,  turnldus,  turgldus. 

For  the  construction  of  the  ablative  after  the  preceding  adjectives 
see  §  250. 

REM.  6.  Some  adjectives  which  are  usually  limited  by  a  dative,  some- 
times take  a  genitive  instead  of  the  dative  ;  as,  simllis,  dissimttis,  &c. 
See  §  222,  REM.  2;  or  ablative  §  250. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

<§>214.  Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  are  followed  by  a 
genitive,  denoting  degree  of  estimation ;  as, 

A  me,  argentum,  quanti  est,  sunilto  ;  Take  of  me  so  much  money  as  (he) 
is  worth.  Ter.  Magni  (Bstimabat  pecumam,  He  valued  money  greatly. 
Cic.  Jjgcr  nunc  pluris  est,  quam  tuncfuit.  Id. 

REMARK  1.     This  genitive  may  be, 

(1.)  A  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  tanti,  quanti,,  pluris,  minoris, 
ma.ff-ni,  permarriri,  plurimi,  maxlmi,  minimi,  parvi,  tantldem,  quanticunque, 
quantlvis,  quantillbct,  but  not  multi  and  majoris. 

(2.)  The  nouns  assis,Jlocci,  nauci,  nihUi,  pili,  teruncii,  and  also  pensi 
and  hujus 


§  215.  SYNTAX.  -  GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  191 

REM.  2.  The  verbs  of  valuing  are  cesttmo,  existlmo,  duco,  facio,  habeo, 
pendo,  puto,  deputo,  taxo,  to  which  may  be  added  refert  and  interest. 
Thus,  Ut  quanti  quisque  se  ipse  facial,  t^ntijiat  ab  amlcis  ;  That  as  much 
as  each  one  values  himself,  so  much  he  should  be  valued  by  his  friends. 
Cic.  Sed  quia  parvi  id  duceret.  Id.  Honores  si  magni  non  putemus.  Id. 
Non  assis/acwf?  Catull.  Neque  quod  dixi,  flocci  ezistlmat.  Plaut.  Rlud 
mea  magni  interest,  That  greatly  concerns  me.  Cic.  Parvi  refert  jus 
did.  Id. 

NOTE  1.  JEqui  and  boni  are  put  in  the  genitive  after  facio  and  consulo; 
as,  Nos  sequi  bomque  faclmus.  Liv.  Boni  wnsuluit.  He  took  it  in  good 
part.  Plin. 

NOTE  2.  After  cestimo,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  nihllo, 
are  sometimes  used  ;  as,  Data  magno  cestlmas,  accepta  parvo.  Sen.  So, 
Levi  momento  cestimare.  Cees.  So  other  ablatives,  when  definite  price  is 
denoted.  Pro  nihllo,  ajso,  occurs  after  duco,  habco,  and  puto.  So  nihil 
with  astimo  and  moror. 

NOTE  3.  With  refert  and  interest,  instead  of  the  genitive,  an  adverb  or 
neuter  accusative  is  often  used  ;  as,  Multum  refert.  Mart.  Plurimum 
intererit.  Juv.  Tua  nihil  referebat.  Ter.  Quid  autem  illius  interest  1  Cic. 

NOTE  4.  The  neuter  adjectives  above  enumerated,  and  hujus,  may  be 
referred  to  a  noun  understood,  as  pretii,  ceris,  ponderis,  momenti  ;  and 
may  be  considered  as  limiting  a  preceding  noun,  also  understood,  and 
denoting  some  person  or  thing  indefinite  ;  as,  JEstlmo  te  magni,  i.  e.  horn- 
\nem  magni  pretii.  Scio  ejus  ordlnes  auctoritdtcm  semper  apud  te  magni 
fuisse,  i.  e.  rem  magni  momenti.  The  words  assis,  «fec.,  may  also  be  con- 
sidered as  depending  on  an  omitted  noun,  as  pretio,  rem,  &c. 

For  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  denoting  price,  see  §  252. 


(1.)  Miscreor,  miseresco,  and  the  impersonate 
miseret,  pwnitct,  pudet,  tadet,  and  piget,  are  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  object  in  respect  to  which  the  feeling  is 
exercised  ;  as, 

Miseremlni  sociorum,  Pity  the  allies.  Cic.  Miseresclte  regis,  Pity  the 
king.  Virg.  Tui  me  miseret,  mei  piget,  I  pity  you,  and  am  sorry  for  my- 
self. Ace.  Eos  ineptiarum  pcerittet.  Cic.  Fratris  me  pudet  pigetque.  Ter. 
Me,  civitatis  morum  piget  t&detque.  Sail.  So  the  passive  ;  Nunquam  sus- 
cepti  negotii  eum  pertcesum  est.  Nep.  Lenitudinis  eorum  pertcesa.  Tac. 
Miserltum  est  me  tuarum  fortunarum.  Ter.  Cave  te  fratrum  miseredtur. 
Cic. 

Miserescit  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  ;  as,  Nunc  te  miserescat 
mei.  Ter.  Misereo,  in  the  active  voice,  also  occurs  with  a  genitive  ;  as, 
Ipse  sui  miseret.  Lucr.  Pertcesus  ignaviam  suam  occurs  in  Suetonius. 

REMARK.  The  genitive  after  the  above  irnpersonals  seems  to  depend 
on  an  indefinite  subject  which  is  omitted.  See  §  209,  REM.  3,  (4.)  In- 
stead of  the  genitive,  an  infinitive  or  clause  is  sometimes  used  as  a  subject; 
as,  JV0/1  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pudebit.  Cic.  JYbra  paenltet  me  quantum  pro- 
fecerim.  Id.  These  verbs  have  also  sometimes  a  nominative,  especially 
a  neuter  pronoun  ;  as,  Me  quidem  hcEC  conditio  non  pcenltet.  Plaut.  JV<cm 
te  hsec  pudent  ?  Ter. 

Miseret  occurs  with  an  accusative,  instead  of  a  genitive  ;  as,  Mencdemi 
vicem  miseret  me.  Ter. 

These  verbs  also  take  an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling 
which  they  express.  See  §  229.  REM.  6 


192  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  217. 

(2.)  Satdgo  is  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  in  what  re- 
spect ;  as, 

Is  satdffit  rerum  sudrum,  He  is  busily  occupied  with  his  own  affairs. 
Ter.  This  compound  is  oilen  written  separately.  Aglto,  with  sat,  in  like 
manner,  is  followed  by  a  genitive ;  as,  JYunc  agltas  sat  tute  tudrwn,  rerum. 
Plaut, 

§  216.  Reco?*dor,  memmij  reminiscor,  and  olliviscor, 
are  followed  by  a  genitive  or  accusative  of  the  object 
remembered  or  forgotten ;  as, 

Flagitiorum  suorum  recordabitur.  Cic.  Pis.  6.  Omnes  gradus  atatis 
recordor  tua,  I  call  to  mind  all  the  periods  of  your  life.  Id.  Memlni  vivo- 
rurn,  I  am  mindful  of  the  living.  Id.  Numeros  memlni,  I  remember  the 
measure.  Virg.  Cinnam  memini,  I  remember  Cinna.  Cic.  Reminisei 
veteris  famoe.  Nep.  Reminisei  amlcos.  Ovid.  Injuriarum  obliviscitur. 
Nep.  Obliviscere  Graios.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  These  verbs  seem  sometimes  to  be  considered  as  active, 
and  sometimes  as  neuter.  As  active,  they  take  an  accusative  regularly; 
as  neuter,  tht^y  take  a  genitive,  denoting  that  in  respect  to  which  mem- 
ory, <fcc.  are  exercised.  An  infinitive  or  other  clause  sometimes  follows 
these  verbs  ;  as,  Obliti  quid  deceat.  Hor.  Memlni  te  scribere.  Cic.  Qua) 
sum  passura  recordor.  Ovid. 

REM.  2.  Recordor  and  memlni,  to  remember,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  an  ablative  with  de;  as,  Pctlmus  ut  de  suis  liberis  ....  recordcutur.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  Memlni,  signifying  to  make  mention  of,  has  a  genitive,  or  an 
ablative  with  de ;  as,  Neque  kujus  rei  meminit  poeta.  Quint.  Memwisti 
de  exsullbus.  Cic.  For  the  genitive  with  venit  in  mentem,  see  §  211, 
REM.  8,  (5.)  The  genitive  with  recordor  is  very  rare. 

<§>217.  Verbs  of  accusing,  convicting,  condemning, 
and  acquitting,  are  followed  by  a  genitive i  denoting  the 
crime  ;  as, 

Arguit  me  furti,  He  accuses  me  of  theft.  Alterum  accfisat  probri,  He 
accuses  another  of  villany.  Mcipsum  inertios  condemno.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.     To  this  rule  belong  the  verbs  of 

Accusing;  accuso,  ago,  arcesso,  arguo,  cito,  defero,  increpo,  incVso, 
insimulo,  postulo,  and  more  rarely  alllgo,  anqulro,  astringo,  capto,  increp- 
Ito,  urgeo,  interrogo. 

Convicting  ;  convinco,  coarguo,  prehendo,  teneor. 

Condemning;  damno,  condemno,  infdmo,  and  more  rarely  judlco,  noto^ 
plector. 

Acquitting  ;  absolvo,  libero,  purgo,  and  rarely  solvo 

REM.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  ablative  with  de  is  often  used  ;  as, 
rfccusarc  de  negligentia.  Cic.  De  vi  condemnati  sunt.  Id.  De  repetun- 
dis  est  postulatus.  Id.  Sometimes  with  in;  as,  In  quo  te  accuso  (Cic.)  • 
and  after  libero,  with  a  or  ab  ;  as,  A  scelere  libcrdti  sumus.  Cic. 

With  some  of  the  above  verbs,  an  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  oflen 
used  ;  as,  Liberdre  culpa.  Cic.  Crimcn  quo  argui  posset.  Nep.  Procon- 
sulem  postulaverat  repetundis.  Tac.  This  happens  especially  with  general 
words  denoting  crime  ;  as,  scelus,  molcficium,  pcccatum,  &c.  ;  as,  Me  pec- 
cato  solvo.  Li  v.  The  ablatives  crimlne  and  nomine,  without  a  preposition, 
are  often  inserted  before  the  genitive  ;  as,  Arccssere  allqucjn  crimlne  am- 
bitus. Liv.  Nomine  sceleris"  conj urationisque  damnati.  Cic.  Sometimea 
a  clause  takes  the  place  of  the  genitive  ;  as,  Eum  accusabant  quod  societa 
tern  fecisset.  Nep.  So  the  infin.  with  the  ace.  Ovid.  Met.  13,  297. 


$218,219.   SYNTAX.  -  GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  193 

REM.  3.  The  punishment  is  expressed  either  by  the  genitive,  the 
ablative,  or  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in;  as,  Damnatus  longi  laburia 
(Hor.)  ;  Quadrupli  condemndri  (Cic.)  ;  Damndre  pecunid  (Just.),  ad 
v&nam  (Traj.  in  Flin.),  in  metallum  (Plin.)  ;  —  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
oy  the  dative  j  as,  Damnatus  morti.  Lucr.  In  like  manner,  caput  is  used 
in  the  genitive  or  ablative  ;  as,  Duces  capitis  damnatos.  Nep.  JVec  capite 
damndrer.  Cic.  So  with  some  other  verbs  besides  those  of  accusing,  &c. 
Quern  ego  capitis  perdam.  Plaut.  Me  capitis  periclitdtum  memini.  Apul. 
With  plecto  and  plector,  caput  is  used  in  the  ablative  only. 

REM.  4.  ^ccusOj  incuso,  insimulo,  instead  of  the  genitive,  sometimes 
take  the  accusative,  especially  of  a  neuter  pronoun  ;  as,  Si  id  me  non 
accusas.  Plaut.  Quae  me  incusav&ras.  Ter.  Sic  me  insimuldre  falsum 
facmus.  Plaut.  See  §  231,  Rem.  5. 

REM.  5.  The  following  verbs  of  accusing,  &c.,  are  not  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  crime,  but,  as  active  verbs,  by  an  accusative  :  —  calumniory 
carpOj  corripio,  crimlnor,  culpo,  excuso,  multo,  punio,  reprehendo,  sugillo, 
taxoj  traduco,  vitupero  ;  as,  Culpdre  infecunditdtem  agrorum.  Colum. 
Excusdre  errorem  et  adolescentiam.  Liv. 

This  construction  also  occurs  with  some  of  the  verbs  before  enumerated  ; 
as,  Ejus  avaritiam  perfidiamque  accusdrat.  Nep.  Culpam  arguo.  Liv. 
With  multo,  the  punishment  is  put  in  the  ablative  only,  without  a  prepo- 
sition ;  as,  Ex&iliis,  morte  multantur.  Cic. 

<§>218.  Verbs  of  admonishing  are  followed  by  a  gen- 
itive denoting  that  in  respect  to  which  the  admonition  is 
given  ;  as, 

Milites  temporis  monet,  He  admonishes  the  soldiers  of  the  occasion. 
Tac.  Jldmonebat  alium  egestatis,  alium  cupiditatis  succ.  Sail. 

REMARK  1.  The  verbs  of  admonishing  are  moneo,  admoneo,  commoneo7 
commonefacio.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  they  sometimes  have  an  ablative 
with  de  ;  as,  De  tede  Tdluris  me  admones  (Cic.)  ;  —  sometimes  a  neuter 
accusative  of  an  adjective  pronoun  or  adjective  ;  as,  jCoshoc  moneo  (Cic.)  ; 
Illud  me  admoneo  (Id.)  ;  Multa  admonemur  (Id.)  ;  —  and  rarely  a  noun  ; 
as,  Earn  rem  nos  locus  admonuit.  Sail. 

REM.  2.  These  verbs,  instead  of  the-genitive,  are  often  followed  by  an 
infinitive  or  clause  ;  as,  Soror  monet  succurrere  Lauso  Turnum,  His  sister 
admonishes  Turnus  to  succor  Lausus.  Virg,  Monet,  ut  suspiciones  vitet. 
Cses.  Monet  rationem  frumenti  esse  habendam.  Hirt.  Immortalia  ne 
speres  monet  annus.  Hor.  See  §  §  271  —  273. 


Refert  and  interest  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of 
the  person  or  thing  whose  concern  or  interest  they  denote  ;  as, 

Humanitdtis  rcfert.  It  concerns  human  nature.  Plin.  Interest  omnium 
rcctifacere,  It  concerns  all  to  do  right.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  substantive  pro- 
nouns, the  adjective  pronouns  mea,  lua,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra, 
are  used  ;  as, 

Mea  nihil  refert,  It  does  not  concern  me.  Ter.  Tua  et  mea  maxlm& 
interest,  te  valere.  Cic.  Magis  reipublicse  interest  (juam  mea.  Id. 

Refert  rarely  occurs  with  the  genitive,  but  often  with  the  adjective 
pronouns. 

REM.  2.  In  regard  to  the  case  of  these  adjective  pronouns,  gramrna- 
17 


194  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    OF    PLACE.     <§>  220,  221. 

rians  differ.  Some  suppose  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  plural  neuter, 
agreeing  with  an  indefinite  noun  understood ;  as,  Interest  mea,  i.  e.  est 
inter  mea;  It  is  among  my  concerns.  Refert  tua,  i.  e.  refert  se  ad  tua;  It 
refers  itself  to  your  concerns.  Others  think  that  they  are  in  the  ablative 
singular  feminine,  agreeing  with  re,  causdj  &c.,  understood,  or  the  dative* 

REM.  3.  Instead  of  a  genitive,  an  accusative  with  ad  is  sometimea 
used ;  as,  Ad  honorem  meum  interest  quam  primitm  urbem  me  venire 
(Cic.)  ;  Quid  id  ad  me  out  ad  meam  rem  refert  (Plaut.)  ; — sometimes,  though 
rarely,  an  accusative  without  a  preposition;  as,  Quid  te  igltur  retulit? 
(Plaut.) ; — or  a  dative  ;  as,  Die  quid  referat  intra  naturae  fines  viventi.  Hor. 

REM.  4.  These  verbs  often  have  a  nominative,  especially  a  neuter  pro- 
noun; as,  Id  mea  minim&'rcfert.  Ter.  Hoc  vehementer  interest  reipubllca. 
Cic.  Non  qud  mea  interessct  loci  natura.  Id. 

For  the  genitives  tantij  quanti,  &c.,  after  refert  and  interest,  see  §  214. 
§  220.     Many  verbs  which  are  usually  otherwise  construed, 
are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive.     This  rule  includes 

1.  Certain  verbs  denoting  an  affection  of  the  mind;  ango,  discrucior, 
excrucio,  folio,  pendeo,  which  are  followed  by  animi ;  dccipior,  desipio, 
fallor,  fastidio,  invideo,  miror,  vereor ;   as,  Absurd^  fads  qui  angas  te 
animi.  Plaut.     Me  animi  fallit.  Lucr.     Decipltur  laborum.  Hor.     Desip- 
iebam  mentis.  Plaut.     Justitiae  ne  prius  mirer  belllne  laborum.  Virg. 

2.  The  following,  in  imitation  of  the   Greek  idiom;  abstineo  (Hor.), 
desino  (Id.),  desisto  (Virg.),  laudo  (Sil.),  levo  (Plaut),  particlpo  (Id.^pro- 
hibeo   (Sil.),  pur  go  (Hor.)  apiscor,  (Tac.)  Regnavit  populorum  Id,  Od. 
3,  30,  12.  for  which  some  manuscripts  read  regnator. 

3.  Some  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  to  abound,  to  want,  which  are  commonly 
followed  by  an  ablative.     Such  are  abundo,  careo,  compleo,  expleo,  impleo, 
egco,  indigeo,  saturo,  scateo  ;  as,  Adolescentem  suce.  temeritatis  implet,tle 
fills  the  youth  with  his  own  rashness.  Liv.    Aritmum  explesse  flammsB 
Virg.     Egeo  consilii.    Cic.    Non  tarn  artis  indigent  quam  laboris.   Id. 
See  §§249  and  250,  (2.) 

4.  Potior,   which   also   is   usually  followed  by  an  ablative;  as,   Urbis 
potlri,  To  gain  possession  of  the  city.  Sail.     Potiri  regni  (Cic.),  hostium 
(Sail.),  rerum  (Cic.)      Potio  (active)  occurs  in  Plautus;  as,  Eum  nunc 
potivit  servitutis,  He  has  made  him  partaker  of  slavery.     In  the  same 
writer,  potltus  est  hostium  signifies,  "  he  fell  into  the  hands  of  the  enemy." 
So.  Rerum  adeptus  est.  Tac. 

GENITIVE    OF    PLACE. 

$  221.  I.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declen- 
sion and  singular  number,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Habitat  Mileti.  He  lives  at  Miletus.  Ter.  Quid  Rom&faciam?  What 
can  I  do  at  Rome  ?  Juv. 

REMARK  1.  Names  of  islands  and  countries  are  sometimes  put  in  the 
genitive,  like  names  of  towns;  as,  Ithaca  vivere,  To  live  in  Ithaca.  Cic. 
Corcyrce  fulmus.  Id.  Pompeium  Cypri  visum  esse.  Cees.  Crete  jussit 
tonsldere  Apollo.  Virg.  Non  Libyce.  Id.  Romce  Numidiceque.  Sail. 

REM.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  ablative  of  names  of  towns  of  the 
first  and  second  declension  and  singular  number,  is  sometimes,  though 


§  222.          SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES.  195 

rarely,  used ;  as,  Rex  Tyro  decedit,  The  king  dies  at  Tyre.  Just.  Et 
Corintho  et  Athenis  et  Lacedamone  nuncidta  est  victoria.  Id.  Pons  quern 
tile  Abydo  fecerat.  Id.  Hujus  exemplar  Roma  nullum  habemus.  Vitruv. 
jNon  ante  Tyro.  Virg. 

REM.  3.  The  genitives  domi,  militia,  belli,  and  humi,  are 
construed  like  names  of  towns  ;  as, 

Tenuit  se  domi,  He  staid  at  home.  Cic.  Vir  domi  clarus.  Liv.  Una 
semper  militiae  et  domi  fulmus,  We  were  always  together  both  at  home 
and  abroad.  Ter.  Belli  spectata  doml^e  virtus.  Hor.  Militia  and  belli  are 
thus  used,  especially  when  opposed  to  domi.  Spargit  humijussos  denies.  Ov. 

(1.)  Domi  is  thus  used  with  the  possessives  mece,  tuce,  sues,  nostra, 
vestrte,  and  alienee;  as,  Domi  nostrae  vixit,  He  lived  at  my  house.  Cic. 
Apud  eum  sicfui  tanquam  mess  domi.  Id.  Sacrificium,  quod  alienee  domi 
fitret  invislre.  Id.  But  with  other  adjectives,  an  ablative,  with  or  without 
a  preposition,  is  used ;  as,  In  vidua  domo.  Ovid.  Paternd  do-mo.  Id. 
Sometimes  also  with  the  possessives ;  as,  Mea  in  domo.  Hor.  In  domo 
sud.  Nep.  So,  instead  of  humi,  humo  is  sometimes  used,  with  or  without 
a  preposition ;  as,  In  humo  arenosd.  Ovid.  Sedere  humo  nudd.  Id. 

(2.)  When  a  genitive  denoting  the  possessor  follows,  either  domi  or  in 
domo  is  used ;  as,  Deprehensus  domi  Ccesaris.  Cic.  In  domo  Ccesaris. 
Id.  In  domo  ejus.  Nep. 

(3.)  The  ablative  domo  for  domi  also  occurs  ;  as,  Ego  id  nunc  experior 
domo.  Plaut.  Bello  for  belli  is  found  in  Livy,  Lib.  9.  26— Domi  bclloque. 

(4.)  Terra  is  sometimes  used  like  humi  ;  as,  Sacra  terras  celavlmus.  Liv. 
Vicinia  occurs  in  Plautus — Proximo  vicinite  habitat. 

(5.)  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns,  domi,  militia,  &c.,  are  supposed 
by  some  to  depend  on  a  noun  understood ;  as,  urbe,  oppldo,  adlbus,  solo, 
loco,  tempore,  &c. 


GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

II.  Certain  adverbs  are  followed  by  the  genitive.    See  §  212,  REM.  4. 

III.  The  genitive    plural    sometimes  depends  on  the  preposition  tenus ; 
as,  Cumarum  tenus,  As  far  as  Cumae  (Ccel.) ;   Crurum  tenus  (Virg.) ;  Lat&- 
rum  tenus  (Id.)  ; — sometimes,  also,  though  rarely,  the  genitive  singular; 
as,  Corcyra  tenus.  Liv. 


DATIVE. 
DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

§  222.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective, 
is  put  in  the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  or  end  to  which 
the  quality  is  directed  ;  as, 

Uttiis  agris,  Useful  to  the  fields.  Juv.  Jucundus  amlcis,  Agreeable  to 
his  friends.  Mart.  Inimlcus  quigti,  Unfriendly  to  rest.  Id.  Charta  inutlli* 
scribendo,  Paper  not  useful  for  writing.  Plin. 

The  dative  is  commonly  translated  by  the  prepositions  to  or  for;  but 
sometimes  by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition. 


196       SYNTAX. DATIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES.    §  222. 

REMARK  1.  Adjectives  signifying  advantageous,  pleasant, 
friendly,  fit,  like,  inclined,  ready,  easy,  clear,  equal,  and  their 
opposites,  also  those  signifying  near,  many  compounded  with 
con,  and  verbals  in  bills,  are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Felix  tuis,  Propitious  to  your  friends.  Virg.  Oratio  ingrata  Gallis,  A 
speech  displeasing  to  the  Gauls.  Goes.  Aimcus  tyrannldi,  Friendly  to 
tyranny.  Nep.  Labori  inhabliis,  Urisuited  to  labor.  Colum.  Patri  similis, 
Like  his  father.  Cic.  Aptum  tempori.  Id.  Malo  pronus.  Sen.  Promp- 
tus  seditioni.  Tac.  Cuivis  facile  est.  Ter.  Mihi  cerium  est.  Cic.  Par 
fratri  tuo.  Id.  Falsa  veris  Jinittma  sunt.  Id  Oculi  concoLores  corpori 
Colum.  Multis  lords  flebttis.  Hor. 

Many  adjectives  of  other  significations  are  also  followed  by  a  dative  of 
the  end  or  object. 

After  verbals  in  bilis,  the  dative  is  usually  rendered  by  the  preposition 
by;  as,  Tibi  credibUis  sermo,  A  speech  credible  to  you,  i.  e.  worthy  to  be 
believed  by  you.  Ovid. 

The  expression  dicto  audiens,  signifying  obedient,  is  followed  by  the 
dative ;  as,  Syracusani  nobis  dicto  audientes  sunt.  Cic.  Audiens  dicto  fuit 
jussis  magistratuum.  Nep.  In  this  phrase,  dicto  is  a  dativ  9  limiting  audiens, 
and  the  words  dicto  audiens  seem  to  form  a  compound  equivalent  to  obe- 
diens,  and,  like  that,  followed  by  a  dative ;  thus,  JYec  pltbs  nobis  dicto 
audiens  atque  obediens  sit.  Liv. 

REM.  2.  The  adjectives  cequdlis,  affinis,  alisnus,  communis,  Jidus,  in- 
suetus,  par,  dispar,  proprius,  propinquus,  sacer,  simltlis,  consimllis,  dissim- 
llis,  socius,  mcinus,  superstes,  supplex,  and  some  others,  instead  of  a  dative 
of  the  object,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive  ;  as,  Similis  tui,  Like 
you.  Plaut.  Par  hujus,  Equal  to  him.  Lucan.  Cujusque  proprium.  Cic. 
But  most  of  these,  when  thus  used,  seem  rather  to  be  taken  substantively ; 
as,  JEqualis  ejus,  His  equal.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  Some  adjectives  with  the  dative  are  followed  by  another  case 
denoting  a  different  relation ;  as,  Mcns  sibi  conscia  recti,  A  mind  conscious 
to  itself  of  rectitude.  Virg.  See  §21 3. 

REM.  4.  Many  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end 
or  object,  are  often  followed  by  an  accusative  with  a  preposition. 

(1.)  Adjectives  signifying  advantageous,  fit,  and  the  opposite,  take  an 
accusative  of  the  purpose  or  end  with  ad,  but  only  a  dative  of  the  person; 
as,  Ad  nullam  rem  uttlis.  Cic.  Locus  aptus  ad  insidias.  Id. 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  take  an  accusative  with 
ad  more  frequently  than  a  dative  ;  as,  Piger  ad  poenas,  ad  praemia  velox 
(Ovid.)  ;  Ad  aliquem  morbum  proclivior  (Cic.)  ;  Ad  omne  facinus  paratus 
(Id.)  ;  Pronus  ad  fidem  (Liv.) ; — sometimes  with  in ;  as,  Celer  in  pug- 
nam.  Sil. 

(3.)  Many  adjectives,  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  sometimes 
have  an  accusative  of  the  object  with  in,  erga,  or  adversus  ;  as,  Fidetis  in 
filios.  Just.  Mater  acerba  in  suos  partus.  Ovid.  Grains  erga  me.  Cic. 
Gratum  adversus  te.  Id.  So  DissimUis  in  dominum.  Tac. 

(4.)  Adjectives  signifying  like,  equal,  common,  &c.,  when  plural,  are 
often  followed  by  the  accusative  with  inter ;  as,  Inter  se  similes,  Cic. 
Inter  eos  communis.  Id.  Inter  se  diversi.  Id. 

REM.  5.  Propior  and  proxlmus,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  sometimes 
an  accusative  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Quod  vitium  propius  virtutem 


<§>  223.  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  197 

era*.  Sail.  P.  Crassus  proxtmus  moreOceanum  hiemdrat.  CSBS.  Ager,  qui 
proxlmus  finem  Megalopolitdrum  est.  Liv. 

REM.  6.  Some  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  at  times  an  abla- 
tive with  a  preposition.  Thus,  par,  communis,  consentaneus,  discors,  with 
cum;  as,  Quern  parem  cum  libSris  focisti.  Sail.  Consentaneum  cum  its 
literis.  Cic.  Civitas  secum  dlscors.  Liv.  So  alienus  and  diversus  with 
a  or  ab;  as,  Mienus  a  me  (Ter.);  A  ratione  diversus  (Cic.)  ;  or  without  a 
preposition ;  as,  Jllienum  nostrd  amicitia.  Id. 

REM.  7.  Idem  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  chiefly  in  the  poets ; 
as,  Jupiter  omnibus  idem.  Virg.  Invltum  qui  servat  idem  facit  Occident!. 
Hor.  In  the  first  example,  omnibus  is  a  dative  of  the  object ;  in  the  second, 
the  dative  follows  idem,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  with 
avTo$,  and  is  equivalent  to  quod  facit  is,  qui  occldit.  Idem  is  generally 
followed  not  by  a  case,  but  by  qui,  ac,  atque,  ut,  or  quam;  sometimes  by 
the  preposition  cum;  as,  Eddem  mecum  patre.  Tac.  Simttis  and  par  are 
sometimes,  like  idem,  followed  by  ac  and  atque. 

NOTE.  Nouns  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  object;  as, 
Virtuttbus  hostis.  Cic.  Caput  Italics  omni.  Liv.  See  §  211,  REM.  5.  Vir 
ex  sententia  ambobus.  Sail.  Tibi  in  promptu  est,  It  is  easy  for  you. 

DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  223*  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  a  verb,  is  put 
in  the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  or  end,  to  or  for  which 
any  thing  is,  or  is  done  ;  as, 

Mea  domus  tibi  patet,  My  house  is  open  to  you.  Cic.  Parsoptdre  locum 
tecto,  A  part  choose  a  site  for  a  building.  Virg.  Tibi  sens,  tibi  metis  ;  You 
sow  for  yourself,  you  reap  for  yourself.  Plaut.  Licet  nemini  contra  patriam 
ducere  exercltum,  It  is  lawful  to  no  one  to  lead  an  army  against  his  country. 
Cic.  Hoc  tibi  promitto,  I  promise  this  to  you.  Id.  Hceret  lateri  letdlis 
arundo.  Virg.  Surdofabulam  narras.  Hor.  Mihi  responsum  dedit.  Virg. 
Sic  vos  non  vobis  fcrtls  aratra  boves.  Id  Omnibus  boriis  expedit  salvam 
esse  rempublicam.  Cic.  Aptat  habendo  ensem.  Virg. 

The  dative  is  thus  used  after  active  and  neuter  verbs,  both  personal  and 
impersonal,  and  in  both  voices. 

REMARK  1.  The  dative  after  many  verbs  is  rendered  not  by  to  or  for, 
but  by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition.  Many  neuter  verbs  are 
translated  into  English  by  an  active  verb,  and  the  dative  after  them  is 
usually  rendered  like  the  object  of  an  active  verb. 

Most  verbs  after  which  the  signs  to  and  for  are  not  used  with  the  dative, 
are  enumerated  in  this  and  the  following  sections. 

REM.  2.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  please,  trust,  and 
their  contraries,  also  to  assist,  command,  obey,  serve,  resist, 
threaten,  and  be  angry,  govern  the  dative ;  as, 

Ilia  tibifavet,  She  favors  you.  Ovid.  Mihi  placebat  Pomponius,'ini7ilm& 
disjflicebat.  Cic.  Qwf  sibi  fidit.  Hor.  Non  licet  sui  commodi  causcL  no- 
cere  alte"ri.  Cic.  Jtom  invidetur  illi  setati  sed  etfamfavetur.  Id.  Dcsperat 
saluti  suce.  Id.  Neque  mihi  vestra  dccreta  auxitiantur.  Sail.  Imperat  aut 
sercit  collecta  pccunia  cuique.  Hor.  Obcdire  et  pare  re  voluritati.  Cic. 
Quantum  factioiii  inimicorum  rcsistere  nequivZrit.  Sail.  Mihi  minabdtur 
Cic.  Irasci  inimlcis.  Caes. 
17* 


198  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  $   224. 

So  Adulor,  llandior,  commodo,  faveo,  gratificor,  grator,  gratulor  and 
its  verbt|J  graiulabundus,  ignosco,  indulgeo,  palpor,  parco,  piaudo,  studeo, 
subparasltor  ;  cemulor,  incommodo,  invideo,  noceo. — Placeo,  libet  or  lubet ; 
displiceo. — Credo,  jido,  confido;  despero,  dijfido. — Mminiculor,  auxilior, 
medeor,  medlcor,  opitulor,  patroclnor. — lmpe.ro,  mando,  moderor  (to  re- 
strain), pr&cipio,  tempero. — Jlusculto,  morigeror,  obcdiOjObsecundo^obsequor, 
obtcmpero,pareo. — Ancillor ,  famulor ,  ministro,  servio,  inservio. — Refragor, 
reluctor,  remtor,  repugno,  resisto,  and,  chiefly  in  the  poets,  bello,  certo,  luctor, 
vugno. — Minor,  commlnor,  intermlnor. — Irascor,  succenseo,  to  which  may 
be  added  convicior,  degengro,  excello,  nubo  (to  marry),  prcestolor,  prcEvarlcor^ 
recipio  (to  promise),  renuncio,  respondeo,  suadeo,  persuadeo,  dissuadeo,  sup- 
plico,  and  sometimes  lateo  and  decet. 

(1.)  Many  of  the  above  verbs,  instead  of  the  dative,  are  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  ;  as,  adulor,  ausculto,  blandior,  degenero,  despero, 
indulgeo,  lateo,  medeor,  medicor,  moderor,  proRstolor,  provideo,  &c. ;  as, 
dduldri  allquem.  Cic.  Tac.  Hanc  cave  degeneres.  Ovid.  Indulgeo  me. 
Ter.  Hujus  adventum  prcestolans.  CUBS.  Providere  .rem  frumenta- 
riam.  Id.  Sometimes  by  a  preposition  and  the  ablative. 

Others,  as  active  verbs,  have,  with  the  dative,  an  accusative,  expressed 
or  understood  ;  as,  impero,  mando,  ministro,  .minor,  commlnor,  interminor, 
pracipio,  recipio,  renuncio,  &c. ;  as,  EquTtes  impSrat  civitatibus.  Caes. 
Ministrdre  victum  alicui.  Varr.  Deflagrationem  urbi  et  Italia  toti  mina- 
batur.  Cic. 

(2.)  Many  verbs  which,  from  their  significations,  might  be  included  in 
the  above  classes,  are,  as  active  verbs,  only  followed  by  an  accusative  ;  as, 
deiectOj  juvo,  Icedo,  ojfendo,  &c.  Jubco  is  followed  by  the  accusative  with 
an  infinitive,  and  sometimes,  though  rarely,  by  the  accusative  alone,  or  the 
dative  with  an  infinitive  ;  as,  Jubeo  te  bent  sperare.  Cic.  Lex  jubet  ea 
qua  facienda  sunt.  Id.  Ubi  Britannico  jussit  exsurgere.  Tac.  Fido  and 
confido  are  often  followed  by  the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition  j 
as,  Fidlre  cursu.  Ovid. 

§  224.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  these  eleven  prepo- 
sitions, ad,  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  ob,post,  prce,pro,  sub,  and  super, 
are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

.#7im/eco3ptis,  Favor  our  undertakings.  Virg.  Romania  equitibus  liter waffe- 
runtur,  Letters  are  brought  to  the  Roman  knights.  Cic.  jJntccellere  omnibus, 
To  excel  all.  Id.  Antetiilitii&religionem.  Nep.  Jludetquevirisconcurrvre 
virgo.  Virg.  Excrcltum  exercitui,  duces  ducibus  compardre.  Liv.  Im- 
minet  his  atr.  Ovid.  Pecori  signum  impressit.  Virg.  JVoz  pra3lio  intcr- 
venit.  Liv.  Inter dixit  histrionibus  scenarn.  Suet.  Meis  commodis  off  ids 
et  obstas.  Cic.  Cum  se  hostium  telis  objecissent.  Id.  Posthabui  mea  seria 
ludo.  Virg.  Certamlni  prcesedit.  Suet.  Hibernis  Labie.num  prccposuit. 
Caes.  Vobis  profuit  ingenium.  Ovid.  Miseris  succurrfrre  disco.  Virg. 
lis  subsidia  submittebat.  Caes.  Timidis  supervenit  JEgle.  Virg.  So 

1.  Jlccido,  accresco,  accumbo,  acquiesco,  adequito,  adhareo,  adjaceo,  adno, 
adnato,   adsto,  adstipulor,  adsum,  adversor,  affulgto,  alldbor,  annuo,  ap- 
pareo,  applaudo,  appropinquo,  arrideo,  aspiro,  assentior,  assideo,  assisto, 
assuesco,  assumo ; — addo,  affero,  ajflgo,  adjicio,  adjungo,  ad/dbeo,  ad?no- 
veo,  adverto,  alllgo,  appono,  appllco,  advolvo,  aspergo. 

2.  Jlntecedo,  antecello,  anteeo,  antesto,   antevenio,  anteverto , — anteferoj 
anteliabeo,  antepono. 

3.  Cohcereo,  colludo,  contino,  congruo,  consentio,  consdno,  convlvo,  and? 
chiefly  in  the  poets,  cogo,  ceneumbo,  concurre,  contendo ; — comp&ro,  comr 
pOno,  eonfero,  conjungc 


$  225.  SYNTAX.  -  DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  199 

4.  Incldo,  incumbo,  indormio,  irtliio,  ingemisco,  inh&reo,  innascor,  innl- 
tor,  insidco,  insidior,  insto,  insisto,  insudo,  insulto,  invddo,  invig*lo,  ilia- 
crymo,  illudo,  immineo,  immorior,  immoror,  impendeo,  insum  ;  —  immisceo, 
impono,  imprlmo,  infero,  ingero,  injicio,  includo,  insero,  inspergo,  inuro. 

5.  Intercede,  intercldo,  interjaceo,  intermtcot  intersum,  intervenio  ;  —  in- 
terdlco,  interpdno. 

6.  Obambulo,  oberro,  obeqtflto,  obluctor,  obmurmuro,obrepo,  obsto,  obsisto, 
obstrepo,  obsum,  obtrecto,  obvcnio,  obversor,  occumbo,  occurro,  occurso,  offi- 
cio  ;  —  obducoj  objicio,  offlro,  offundo,  oppono. 

7.  PostferOj  posthabeo,  postpone,  postputo,  postscrlbo. 

8.  PrcBcedo,  prcecurro,  prczeo,  prcesideo,  praluceo,  prceniteo,  prasum,  prcB- 
valeoj  prcevertor  ;  —  prafero,  iirc^icio^  prcepono. 

9.  Procumbo,  prqficio,  propugno,  prosum,  prospido,  provideo. 

10.  SuccedOj  succumbo,  succurro,  sujficio,  suffragor,  subcresco,  suboleo, 
subjaceo,  subrepo,  subsum,  subvenio  ;  —  subdo,  subjugOj  submitto,  supponot 
substerno. 

11.  Super  curro,  super  sto,  super  sum,  supervenio,  supervlvo. 

REMARK  1.  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  ab,  de,  ex,  circum,  and  con- 
tra, are  occasionally  followed  by  the  dative  ;  as,  absum,  desum,  delabor, 
excldo,  circumdo,  circumfundo,  circumjaceo,  circumjicio,  contradlco,  con- 
traeo  ;  as,  Serta  c&piti'delapsa,  The  garlands  having  fallen  from  his  head. 
Virg.  Nunqui  nummi  exciderunt  tibi  ?  Plant.  ZV^murbi  circumfundttur. 
Plin. 

REM.  2.  Some  verbs  of  repelling  and  taking  away  (most  of  which  are 
compounds  of  ab,  de,  or  ex),  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  though 
more  commonly  by  the  ablative  ;  as,  abigo,  abrogo,  abscindo,  aufero,  adi- 
mo,  arcco,  dcfendo,  demo,  derogo,  detraho,  eripio,  eruo,  excutio,  exlmo,  ex- 
torqueo,  cxtraho,  exuo,  surripio.  Thus,  Nee  mihi  te  eripient,  Nor  shall  they 
take  you  from  me.  Ovid.  Solstitium  pecori  defendUe.  Virg.  Hunc  arce- 
bis  pecori.  Id.  So  rarely  abrumpo,  alieno,  furor,  and  rapio. 

REM.  3.  Some  verbs  of  differing  (compounds  of  di  or  dis)  likewise 
occur  with  the  dative,  instead  of  the  ablative  with  a  preposition  ;  as, 
dffero,  discrepo,  discordo,  dissentio,  dissideo,  disto  ;  as,  Quantum  simplex 
hilarisque  nepoti  discrcpet,  et  quantum  discordct  parcus  avaro.  Hor.  So 
likewise  misceo  ;  as,  Mista  modestiae  gravitas.  Cic. 

REM.  4.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  instead  of  the 
dative,  either  constantly  or  occasionally  take  the  case  of  the  preposition, 
which  is  sometimes  repeated.  Sometimes,  also,  one  of  similar  significa- 
tion is  used  ;  as,  Ad  primam  vocem  timidas  advertitis  awes.  Ovid. 
Nemo  eum  antecessit.  Nep.  Inferwit  omnia  in  ignem.  COBS.  Silex  in- 
cumbebat  ad  amnem.  Virg.  Conferte  hanc  pacem  cum  illo  bello.  Cic. 

REM.  5.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions,  either  take 
the  dative,  or,  acquiring  an  active  signification,  are  followed  by  the  accu- 
sative ;  as,  Hclvetii  reliquos  Gallos  virtute  pr(Bcedunt,  The  Helvetii  surpass 
the  other  Gauls  in  valor.  COBS.  Uterque  Isocratem  cetdte  prcecurrit.  Cic. 
So  prceeo,  prcesto,  pr&verto,  prcecello.  See  §  233. 


I.  Verbs  compounded  with  satis,  bene,  and  male, 
are  followed  by  the  dative  ;  as, 

Et  nature  et  leglbns  satisfecit,  He  satisfied  both  nature  and  the  laws. 
Cic.  Tibi  dii  ^enefaciant  omnes,  May  all  the  gods  bless  you,  Plaut.  Mai 
caicit  utrlque.  HOT.  So  satisdo,  benedue,  matt/acie 


200          SYNTAX. DATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.       $  227. 

These  compounds  are  often  written  separately;  and  the  dative  always 
depends  not  on  satis,  ben&,  and  mal&,  but  on  the  simple  verb. 

II.  Verbs  in  the  passive  voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  the 
agent,  chiefly  in  the  poets  ;  as,  Ncque  cerriitur  ulli,  Nor  is  he  seen  by  #ny 
one.  Virg.  Nulla  tudrum  audlta  mihi  neque  visa  sororum.  Id.  But  the 
agent  after  passives  is  usually  in  the  ablative  with  a  preposition. 
See  §  248. 

III.  The  participle  in  dus   is  followed   by  a  dative  of  the 

agent;  as, 

Undo,  omnibus  enaviganda,  The  wave  which  must  be  passed  over 
by  all.  Hor.  Adhibenda  est  nobis  diligentia,  We  must  use  diligence. 
CJic.  Vestigia  summorum  homtnum  sibi  tuenda  esse  dicit.  Id.  Dolcndum 
est  tibi  ipsi.  Hor.  Faciendum  mihi  putdvi,  ut  responderem.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  wanting  when  the  agent  is  in- 
definite ;  as,  Orandum  est)  ut  sit  mens  sana  in  corpore  sano.  Juv.  flic 
vincendum  aut  moriendum,  milltes,  est.  Liv.  In  such  examples,  tibi,  vo- 
bis,  nobis,  homhtlbus,  &c.,  may  be  supplied. 

REM.  2.  The  participle  in  dus  sometimes,  though  rarely,  has,  instead 
of  the  dative,  an  ablative  with  a  or  ab;  as,  Deus  est  venerandus  a  nobis 
Cic. 

IV.  Verbs  signifying  motion  or  tendency  are  followed  by  an 
accusative  with  ad  or  in ;  or  by  an  adverb  of  place  as, 

Ad  templum  PalJddis  ibant.  Virg.  Ad  praetorem  honiinem  traxit.  Cic. 
Vergit  ad  septemtriones.  Cses.  In  conspectum  venire.  Nep.  Hue  venit. 

So  curro,  duco,  fero,ffistlno,fugio,  incllno,  lego,  pergo,porto,  prceciplto, 
proplro,  tendo,  to'lo,  vado,  verto. 

So  likewise  verbs  of  calling,  exciting,  &c. ;  as,  Eurum  ad  se  vocat. 
Virg.  Provocdsse  ad  pugnam.  Cic.  So  animo,  hortor,  inctto,  invlto,  la- 
cesso,  stimulo,  suscito  ;  to  which  may  be  added  attineo,  conformo.  pertineo, 
and  specto. 

But  the  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  these  verbs ;  as,  Clamor  it  codo. 
Virg.  Dum  tibi  liter (B  mece  veniant.  CJc.  After  venio  both  constructions 
are  used  at  the  same  time ;  as,  Venit  mihi  in  mentem.  Cic.  Venit  mihi 
in  suspicionem.  Nep.  Eum  venisse  Germanis  in  amicitiam  cognoverat 
Cses.  Propinquo  (to  approach)  takes  the  dative  only. 

§  226.  Est  is  followed  by  a  dative  denoting  a  posses 
sor ; — the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

Est  thus  used  may  generally  be  translated  by  the^rerb  to  have  with  the 
dative  as  its  subject;  as,  Est  mihi  domi  pater,  I  have  a  father  at  home. 
Virg.  Sunt  nobis  mitia  poma,  We  have  mellow  apples.  Id.  Gratia  nobis 
opus  est  tud,  We  have  need  of  your  favor.  Cic.  Innocentise  plus  periculi 
quam  honoris  est.  Sail.  An  nescis  longas  regibus  esse  manus ?  Ovid.  The 
first  and  second  persons  of  sum  are  not  thus  construed. 

REMARK.  The  dative  is  used  with  a  similar  signification  after  fore,  sup- 
peto,  desum,  and  defit ;  as,  Pauper  enim  non  est,  cui  rerum  suppetit  usus. 
Hor.  Si  mihi  cauda  foret,  cercopithecus  eram.  Mart.  Defuit  ars  vobis. 
Ovid.  Non  defore  Arsacldis  virtutem.  Tac.  Lac  mihi  non  defit.  Virg. 

§  227.  Sum,  and  several  other  verbs,  are  followed  by 
two  datives,  one  of  which  denotes  the  object  to  which 
the  other  the  end  for  which,  any  thing  is,  or  is  done;  as, 


$  228.  SYNTAX. DATIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  201 

Mihi  maxima  est  curse,  It  is  a  very  great  care  to  me.  Cic.  Spero  nobis 
hanc  conjunctionem  voluptati  fore,  I  hope  that  this  union  will  bring  pleasure 
to  us.  Id.  Matri  puellam  dono  dedit.  Ter.  Fabio  laudi  datum  cst.  Cic. 
Vitio  id  tibi  vertunt.  Plaut.  Id  tibi  honori  hab&tur.  Cic.  Maturdvit  col- 
legse  venire  auxilio.  Liv. 

REMARK  1.  The  verbs  after  which  two  datives  occur,  are  sum,  fore, 
fio,  do,  duco,  habeo,  relinquo,  tribuo,verto;  also  curro,  eo,  mitto,projiciscort 
venio,  appono,  assigno,  cedo,  compdro,  pateo,  sujtpedlto,  emo,  and  some 
others. 

REM.  2.  The  dative  of  the  end  is  often  used  after  these  verbs,  without 
the  dative  of  the  object ;  as,  Exemplo  est  formica,  The  ant  is  (serves)  for 
an  example.  Hor.  Jlbsentium  bona  divisui  fuere.  Liv.  Rellquit  pignori 
putamlna.  Plaut. 

REM.  3.  The  verb  sum,  with  a  dative  of  the  end,  may  be  variously 
rendered ;  as  by  the  words  brings,  affords,  serves,  &c.  The  sign  for 
is  often  omitted  with  this  dative,  especially  after  sum  ;  instead  of  it,  as, 
or  some  other  particle,  may  at  times  be  used ;  as,  Ignavia  erit  tibi  mag- 
no  dedecori,  Cowardice  will  bring  great  disgrace  to  you.  Cic.  Hcec  res 
est  argumento  ,  This  thing  is  an  argument,  or  serves  as  an  argument.  Id. 
Universos  curae  kabuit.  Suet.  Una., res  erat  magno  usui, ....  was  of  great 
use.  Lucil.  Quod  tibi  magnopere  cordi  est,  mild  veliementer  displlcet ; 
What  is  a  great  pleasure,  an  object  of  peculiar  interest  to  you,  &c.  Id. 

Sometimes  the  words  jit,  able,  ready,  <fcc.,  must  be  supplied,  especially 
before  a  gerund  or  a  gerundive  ;  as,  Cum  solvendo  civitates  non  essent, .... 
not  able  to  pay.  Cic.  Dlvitcs,  qui  oneri  ferendo  essent.  Liv.  Qua  re- 
stinguendo  igrdforent.  Liv.  Radix  cjus  est  vescendo.  Plin. 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end,  a  nominative  is  sometimea 
used ;  as,^mor  est  exitium  pecori  (Virg.)  ;  or  an  accusative,  with  or  with- 
out a  preposition  ;  as,  Achilli  comitem  esse  datum  ad  bellum.  Cic.  Se  Re- 
mis  in  clientelam  dicabant.  CESS.  ;  or  an  abl.  with  or  without  pro.  Sail. 

REM.  5.  The  dative  of  the  object  after  sum,  &c.  often  seems  rather  to 
depend  upon  the  dative  of  the  end,  than  upon  the  verb ;  as  in  the  exam- 
ple Ego  omnibus  meis  exitio  fuero  (Cic.),  in  which  omnibus  meis  has  the 
same  relation  to  exitio  that  pecori  has  to  exitium  in  the  above  example 
from  Virgil.  For  the  use  of  the  dative  after  a  noun,  see  §  211,  REM.  5. 

NOTE  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  the  infinitive,  instead  of 
the  accusative,  when  a  dative  precedes,  and  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is 
omitted  ;  as,  Vobis  neccsse  est  forttlus  esse  viris.  Liv.  Maximo  tibi  et  civi 
et  duci  evadere  contigit.  Val.  Max.  See  §  §  205,  REM.  6,  and  239,  REM.  1. 

NOTE  2.  In  such  expressions  as  Est  mihi  nomen  Alexandra,  Cui  cog- 
nomen  lulo  additur,  the  proper  name  is  put  in  the  dative  in  apposition 
with  that  which  precedes,  instead  of  taking  the  case  of  nomen  or  cogno- 
men. See  §  204,  REM.  8. 


DATIVE     AFTER    PARTICLES. 

$  228.     Some  particles  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the 
end  or  object ;   as, 

1.  Some  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives;    as,  Protftmb  castris,   Very 
near  to  the  camp.  Cses.     Congruenter  nature,  Agreeably  to  nature.  Cic. 
Propius  stabulis  armenta  tenerent.  Virg.     Vitse^e  honiinum  amict  vivere. 
Id.     Bene  mihi,  bene  vobis.  Plaut.     So  obviam  ;  as,  Mihi  obviam  venisti 
Cic.     Samos  est  exadversum  Mileto.  App. 


202        SFNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.    $  229. 

2.  Certain  prepositions,  especially  in  comic  writers ;  as,  Mihi  clam  est, 
It  is  unknown  to  me.  Plaut.     Contra  nobis.  Id.     But  in  such  instances 
they  are  rather  used  like  adjectives. 

3.  Certain  interjections;  as,  Heimihi!  Ah  me!  Virg.     VCR  mild!  Wo 
is  me  !  Ter.     Vavictis!  Liv.     Vcete!  occurs  in  Plautus.  Eccetibi.  Cic. 

NOTE.  The  dative  of  the  substantive  pronouns  seems  sometimes  re- 
dundant, or  to  affect  the  meaning  but  little ;  as,  Fur  mihi  es, ....  in  my 
opinion.  Plaut.  An  ille  mihi  liber,  cui  mulier  imperat  ?  Cic.  Tongilwm 
mihi  eduzit.  Id.  Ubi  nunc  nobis  deus  ille  magister?  Virg.  Ecce  tibi 
Sebosus  J  Cic.  Hem  tibi  talentum  argenti  Philipplcum  est.  Plaut.  Sibi  is 
sometimes  subjoined  to  suus  ;  as,  Suo  sibigladio  huncjugulo.  Plaut.  Sibi 
suo  tempdre.  Cic. — This  is  sometimes  called  the  dativus  ethtcus. 


ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  229.  The  object  of  an  active  verb  is  put  in  the 
Accusative;  as, 

Legates  mittunt,  They  send  ambassadors.  Cses.  Animus  movet  corpuSj 
The  mind  moves  the  body.  Cic.  Da  veniam  hanc,  Grant  this  favor.  Ter. 
Eum  imitati  sunt,  They  imitated  him.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  An  active  verb,  with  the  accusative,  often  takes 
a  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  to  express  some  additional  rela 
tion ;  as, 

Te  convince  amentias,  I  convict  you  of  madness.  Cic.  Da  locum  meli 
oribus,  Give  place  to  your  betters.  Ter.  Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu,  Troy 
frees  herself  from  grief.  Virg.  See  those  cases  respectively. 

REM.  2.  Such  is  the  difference  of  idiom  between  the  Latin  and  English 
languages,  that  many  verbs  which  are  considered  active  in  one,  are  used 
as  neuter  in  the  other.  Hence,  in  translating  active  Latin  verbs,  a  prepo- 
eition  must  often  be  supplied  in  English ;  as,  Ut  me  caveret,  That  he 
should  beware  of  me.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs,  which  in 
Latin  are  neuter,  and  do  not  take  an  accusative,  are  rendered  into  English 
by  active  verbs. 

REM.  3.     The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted : — 

1.  To  avoid  its  repetition;  as,  Eventum  senatus,  quern  (sc.  dare)  vide- 
Ifttur,  dabit.  Liv. 

2.  Dico,  and  verbs  of  similar  meaning,  are  often  omitted ;  as,   Quid 
multa  ?  quid  ?    JVe  multa,  sc.  dicam.     Quid  (sc.  de  eo  dicam)  quod  solus 
socioruyLin  discrlmen  vocatur  ?  Cic.    So  quid ?  sc.  ais  or  censes? 

REM.  4.     The  accusative  is  often  omitted  : — 

1.  When  it  is  a  reflexive  pronoun;  as,  Nox  pr&cipltat,  sc.  se.    Virg. 
Turn  prora  avcrtit.  Id.     Eo  lavatum,  sc.  me.    Hor.     The  reflexives  are 
usually  wanting  after  certain  verbs ;    as,  aboleo,  abstineo,  augeoj  celero, 
conlinuo,  declino,  decoquo,flecto,  deflecto,  indlno,  lavo,  lazo,  moveo,  muto, 
vr&ciplt.o,  remitto,  ruo,  turbo,  verto,  deverto,  reverto  ;  and  more  rarely  after 
moveOj  converto,  and  many  others. 

2.  When  it  is  something  indefinite,  has  been  previously  expressed  in 


§230.  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  203 

any  case,  or  is  easily  supplied ;  as.  Ego,  ad  quos  scribam,  nescio,  sc.  literas. 
Cic.  De  quo  et  tecum  egi  diligenter,  et  scripsl  ad  te.  Id.  Ben&  fecit  Silius. 
Jd.  Ducit  in  hostem.  Liv. 

REM.  5.  An  infinitive,  or  one  or  more  clauses,  may  supply 
the  place  of  the  accusative ;  as, 

Da  mihi  fallere.  Hor.  Reddes  dulce  loqui,  reddes  ridere  decorum,.  Id. 
Cupio  me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Jltkenienses  statuerunt  ut  naves  conscen- 
derent.  Id.  Vereor  ne  a  doctis  reprehendar.  Id.  Sometimes  both  con- 
structions are  united  ;  as,  Di  iram  miser antur  indnem  amborum,  et  tantos 
mortalibus  esse  labores.  Virg.  Evoe,  Bacche,  sonat.  Ovid. 

In  such  constructions,  the  subject  of  the  clause  is  sometimes  put  in  the 
accusative  as  the  object  of  the  verb  ;  as,  Ndsti  Marcellum,  quam  tardus  sit, 
for  Ndsti  quam  tardus  sit  Marcellus.  Cic.  Ilium,  ut  vivat,  optant.  Ter. 
An  ablative  with  de  may  also  supply  the  place  of  the  accusative,  by  the 
ellipsis  of  some  general  word  denoting  things,  facts,  &LG.  ;  as,  De  republicd 
vcstrd  paucis  acclpe.  Sail.  So  also  of  a  subject.  See  §  209,  R.  3,  (2.) 

REM.  6.  The  impersonal  verbs  miseret,  pcemtet,  pudet,  tcedet, 
and  piget,  likewise  miserescit,  miseretur,  and  pertasnm  est,  are 
followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling;  as, 

Eorum  nos  misSret,  We  pity  them.  Cic.  See  §  215,  (1.)  Verttum  est 
also  occurs  with  such  an  accusative ;  Quos  non  est  veritum.  Cic. 

REM.  7.  Juvat,  delectat,  fallit,  fugit,  prceterit,  and  decet 
with  its  compounds  take  an  accusative  of  the  person  ;  as, 

Te  hilari  anlmo  esse  valdb  me  juvat,  That  you  are  in  good  spirits  delights 
me.  Cic.  Fugit  me  ad  te  scribere.  Cic.  lllud  alterum  qu&m  sit  difficile, 
non  te  fugit,  nee  verd  Csesarem  fefellit.  Id. 

For  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  vestra,  after  rcfert  and  interest,  see  §219,  REM.  1. 

For  the  accusative  by  attraction,  instead  of  the  nominative,  see  §  206, 
(6,)  (&.) 

<§>  230.  Verbs  signifying  to  name  or  call,  to  choose,  render 
or  constitute,  to  esteem  or  reckon,  are  followed  by  two  accusa- 
tives denoting  the  same  person  or  thing;  (§  210,  R.  3,  (3.)  as, 

Urbem  ex  Jintidchi  patris  nomine  Antiochiam  vocdvit,  He  called  the  city 
Antioch,  &c.  Just.  Me  consulem/m^w.  Cic.  Sulpicium  accusatorem 
suum  numerdbat,  non  competitorem.  Id.  Cum  vos  testes  habeam.  Nep. 

NOTE.  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  one  accusative,  Ov.  M. 
13,  299;  or  even  of  both,  Ov.  M.  5,  520  and  521. 

REMARK  1.  Ailer  verbs  signifying  to  esteem  or  reckon,  one  of  the  ac- 
cusatives is  often  the  subject,  and  the  other  the  predicate,  of  esse  expressed 
or  understood  ;  as,  JVe  me  existimdris  ad  manendmn  esse  propensiorem. 
Cic.  Eum  avarum  possumus  existimdre.  Id.  Mercurium  omnium  inven- 
torem  artium  ferunt;  hunc  vidrum  atque  itinerum  ducem  arbitrantur. 
Caes. ;  or  an  adjective  supplies  the  place  of  the  predicate  accusative. 

REM.  2.  Many  other  verbs,  besides  their  proper  accusative,  take  a 
second,  denoting  a  purpose,  time,  character,  &c. ;  as,  Tatem  se  imperatorem 
prccbuit,  He  showed  himself  such  a  commander.  Nep.  Quare  cjus  fugcR 
comitem  me  adjmigerem.  Cic.  Homlnitm  opinio  sociurn  me  ascrlbit  tuis 
laudibus.  Id.  Prcesta  te  eum  qui  mihi  es  cognltus.  Cic.  Filiam  tuam  mihi 
uxorem  posco.  Plant.  Petit  hanc  Saturnia  munus.  Ovid.  Such  con- 
structions may  often  be  referred  to  apposition,  or  to  an  ellipsis  of  esse 


204  SYNTAX.  -  ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  232. 


Verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching, 
and  celo  (to  conceal),  are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one 
of  a  person,  the  other  of  a  thing;  as, 

Rogo  te  nummos,  I  ask  you  for  money.  Mart.  Posce  deos  veniam, 
Ask  favor  of  the  gods.  Virg.  Quum  legent  quis  musicam  docuerit  Epa- 
minondam,  When  they  shall  read  who  taught  Epaminondas  music.  Nep. 
Antigbnus  iter  omnes  celat,  Antigonus  conceals  his  route  from  all.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  This  rule  includes  the  verbs  of  asking  and  demanding, 
flaglto,  efflaglto,  obsecro,  oro,  exdro,  percontor,  posco,  reposco,  postulo, 
precor,  deprecor,  rogo,  and  interrogo  ;  of  teaching,  doceo,  edoceo,  dedoceo, 
and  erudio,  which  last  has  two  accusatives  only  in  the  poets.  Cingo 
occurs  once  with  two  accusatives  ;  Arma  Tribunitium  cinge're  digna  latus. 
Mart.  ;  and  celare  with  a  dative  of  the  person.  Nep.  Alcib.  5,  2. 

REM.  2.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  a  person,  verbs  of  asking  and 
demanding  often  take  the  ablative  with  ab  or  ex  ;  as,  Non  debebam  abs  te 
has  Uterus  poscere.  Cic.  Veniam  oremus  ab  ipso.  Virg.  Istud  volebam 
ex  te  percontdri.  Plaut. 

REM.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  a  thing,  the  ablative  alone  or  with 
de  is  sometimes  used  ;  as,  Docere  aliquem  armis.  Liv.  Sic  ego  te  eisdem  de 
rebus  interrogem.  Cic.  De  itinere  hostium  sendtum  eddcet.  Sail.  I&ssus 
noster  me  de  hoc  libro  celavit.  Cic.  Sometimes  also  a  dependent  clause. 

REM.  4.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  are  jiot  fol- 
lowed by  two  accusatives  ;  as,  exigo,  peto,  qucero,  scitor,  sciscltotf*,  which 
take  an  ablative  of  the  person  with  a  preposition  ;  imbuo,  instituorinstruo, 
&c.,  which  are  sometimes  used  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  generally 
without  a  preposition,  and  are  sometimes  otherwise  construed.  * 

REM.  5.  Many  other  active  verbs  with  the  accusative  of  a 
person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  nihil,  of  the  neuter 
pronouns  hoc,  id,  quid,  &c.,  or  of  adjectives  of  quantity  ;  as, 

Fabius  ea  me  monuit,  Fabius  reminded  me  of  those  things.  Cic.  JVbw 
quo  me  aliquid  juvdre  posses.  Id.  Pauca  pro  tempore  milltes  hortdtus. 
Sail.  Id  adjuta  me.  Ter.  Ncc  te  id*  consulo.  Cic.  Consulo  and  admoneo 
are  also  found  with  a  noun  denoting  the  thing  in  the  accusative  ;  as,  Con- 
sulam  hanc  rem  amlcos.  Plaut.  Earn  rem  nos  locus  admonuit.  Sail. 

A  preposition  may  often  be  understood  before  the  above  neuter  accu- 
satives. See  §  235,  REM.  5. 

By  a  similar  construction,  genus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative, 
instead  of  the  genitive  ;  as,  Scis  me  orationes,  aut  aliquid  id  genus  scri- 
bere.  Cic.  Nullas  hoc  genus  vigilias  vigildrunt.  Gell.  So  Omnes  mulie- 
b?-c  secus.  Suet. 

<§>  232.  (1.)  Some  neuter  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accu- 
sative of  kindred  signification  to  their  own  ;  as, 

Vitam  vivtre,  To  live  a  life.  Plaut.  Fur  ere  fur  or  em.  Virg.  Istam  pug- 
nam  pugndbo.  Plaut.  Pugndre  prcelia.  Hor.  Lusum  insolentem  ludlre. 
Id.  Si  non  servitiitem  serviat.  Plaut.  Queror  hand  fatties  questus.  Stat. 
Jurdvi  verissimum  jusjurandum.  Cic.  Ignotas  jubet  ire  vias.  Val.  Flacc. 
Ut  suum  gaudium  gauderemus.  Coal,  ad  Cic.  Prqficisci  magnum  iter. 
Cic.  This  accusative  is  usually  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

(2  )  Verbs  commonly  neuter  are  sometimes  used  in  an  active 
sense,  and  are  therefore  followed  by  an  accusative.  Neuter  verbs 


$  233.     SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.       205 

are  also  sometimes  followed  by  an  accusative,  depending. on  a 
preposition  understood.  The  following  are  examples  of  both 
constructions  : — 

With  oleo  and  sapiOj  and  their  compounds,  redoleo,  resipi o; — Olet  un- 
guenta,  He  smells  of  perfumes.  Ter.  Orationes  redolentes  antiquitatem. 
Cic.  Mella  herbam  earn  sapiunt,  The  honey  tastes  of  that  herb.  Plin. 
Uva  picem  resipiens.  Id.  So  Sitio  honores.  Cic.  Nee  vox  hominem 
sonat.  Virg.  Sudare  mella.  Id.  Morientem  nomine  clamat.  Id.  Quis 
pauperiem  crepat?  Hor.  Omnes  una  manet  nox.  Id.  Ingrdti  anlmi 
crimen  horreo.  Cic.  Ego  meas  queror  fortunas.  Plaut.  Pastorein,  saltd- 
ret  uti  Cyclopa,  rogdbat.  Hor.  So  the  passive ;  Nunc  agrestem  Cyclopa 
movetur.  Id.  Num  id  lacrymat  virgo?  Does  the  maid  weep  on  that  ac- 
count ?  Ter.  Quicquid  dellrant  regesj  plectuntur  Achim.  Hor.  JVec  tu  id 
indigndri  posses.  Liv.  Quod  dubltas  ne  feceris.  Plin.  Nihil  laboro.  Cic. 
Corydon  ardebat  Alexin.  Virg.  Stygias  juravimus  undas.  Ovid.  Navl- 
gat'ssquoT.  Virg.  Currlmus  sequor.  Id.  Pascuntur  sylvas.  Id.  Multa 
ali&peccat.  Cic.  Exsequias  ite  frequenter.  Ovid.  Devene re  locos.  Virg. 

Accusatives  are  found  in  like  manner  after  ambulo,  calleo,  doleo,  equito, 
gaudeo,  gemo,  lateo,  latro,  nato,  palleo,  pereo,depereo,  procedo,  sibilo,  tremo, 
trepido.  vadoj  venio,  paveo^  sileo,  taceo,  lcetor,  glorior^  &c. 

In  the  above  and  similar  examples,  the  prepositions  ob,propter,  per,  ad, 
&c.,  may  often  be  supplied.  This  construction  of  neuter  verbs  is  most 
common  with  the  neuter  accusatives  id,  quid,  atiquid,  quicquid,  nihil,  idem, 
Mud,  tantum,  quantum,  multa,  pauca,  alia,  cetera,  and  omnia. 

§  233.  Many  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusative  depend- 
ing upon  a  preposition  with  which  they  are  compounded. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  compounded  with  trans  have  two  accusatives,  one  de- 
pending upon  the  verb,  the  other  upon  the  preposition  ;  as,  Omnem  equi- 
tdtum  pontem  transducit,  He  leads  all  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge.  Cses. 
Hellespontum  copias  trajecit.  Nep. 

So  Pontus  scopulos  super jacit  undam.  Virg.  So,  also,  adverto  and 
induco  with  ammum;  as,  Id  anlmum  advertit.  Cass.  Id  quod  animum 
induxerat  paulisper  non  tenuit.  Cic.  So,  also,  injicio  in  Plautus — Ego  te 
manum  injiciam. 

(2.)  Some  other  active  verbs  take  an  accusative  in  the  passive  voice 
depending  upon  their  prepositions ;  as,  Maglcas  accingier  artes,  To  be 
prepared  for  magic  arts.  Virg.  Classis  circumvehUur  arcem.  Liv.  Vec- 
tem  circumjectus  fuisset.  Cic.  Locum  pr&tervectus  sum.  Cic. 

But  after  most  active  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  which  take 
an  accusative,  the  preposition  is  repeated  ;  as,  Caesar  se  ad  neminem  ad~ 
junxit  (Cic.) ;  or  a  dative  is  used;  as,  Hie  dies  me  valdt  Crasso  adjunxit. 
Id.  See  §  224. 

(3.)  Many  neuter  verbs  take  an  accusative  when  compounded  with  pre- 
positions which  govern  an  accusative,  but  these  sometimes  become  active; 
as,  Gentes  quce  mare  illud  adjacent,  The  nations  which  border  upon  that 
sea.  Nep.  Obeqiutdrea.gmen.  Curt.  Jnceduntmwstos  locos.  Tac.  Tran- 
silui  flammas.  Ovid.  Succedere  tecta.  Cic.  Ludorum  diebus,  qui  cogniti- 
onem  intervenerant.  Tac.  jidlre  provinciam.  Suet.  Caveat  ne  prcelium 
inertt.  Cic.  Naves  pardtas  invenit.  Caes.  Ingredi  iter  pedlbus.  Cic. 
Epicuri  horti  quos  modo  prceteribdmus.  Id.  To  this  rule  belong  especially 
verbs  of  motion,  and  of  rest  in  a  place. 

18 


206  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  234. 

REMARK  1.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  which 
take  an  ablative  after  them,  are  at  times  followed  by  an  accusative;  as, 
Neminem  convent,  I  met  with  no  one.  Cic.  Qui  societatem  coieris.  Id. 
Aversari  honores.  Ovid.  Evaditque  celer  ripam.  Virg.  Excedere  numerum. 
Tac.  Exire  lirnen.  Ter.  Tiber  prcefluunt  aquce.  Hor. 

REM.  2.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated  after  the  verb,  or  a  different 
one  is  used  ;  as,  In  Galliam  invasit  Antonius.  Cic.  Ad  me  adlre  quosdam 
memini.  Id.  JV*e  in  senatum  accederem.  Cic.  Reglna,  ad  tempium  in- 
cessit.  Virg.  Juxta  genitorem  aslat  Lavinia.  Id.  Circum  is  not  repeated. 

NOTE.  Some  verbal  nouns  and  verbal  adjectives  in  bundus  are  followed 
by  an  accusative,  like  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived  ;  as,  Quid 
tibi  hue  receptio  ad  te  est  meum  virum?  Wherefore  do  you  receive  my  hus- 
band hither  to  you  ?  Plaut.  Quid  tibi  hanc  aditio  est  ?  Id.  Vitabundus 
castra.  Liv.  Meditabundus  helium.  Just.  Ca.Tmficemimaginabundus.  App. 

$  234.  I.  When  the  active  voice  takes  an  accusative  both 
of  a  person  and  thing,  the  passive  retains  the  latter ;  as, 

Rogatus  est  sententiam,  He  was  asked  his  opinion.  Liv.  Intcrrogdtus 
causam.  Tac.  Segetes  alimenta^we  deMta  dives  poscebdtur  humus.  Ovid 
Motus  doceri  gaude.t  lorilcos  matura  virgo.  Hor.  Omnes  belli  artes  edoctus 
Liv.  Nosne  hoc  celatos  tarn  diu  ?  Ter.  Multa  in  extis  monemur.  Cic. 

NOTE  1.  As  the  object  of  the  active  voice  becomes  the  subject  of  the 
passive,  the  passive  is  not  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  object. 

In  other  respects,  the  government  of  the  active  and  passive  voices  is,  in 
general,  the  same. 

NOTE  2.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  after  verbs  of  saying  and 
commanding  may  become  the  subject  of  the  passive  voice  ;  as,  Dico  regem 
esse  justum,  pass.  Rex  dicitur  Justus  esse.  See  §  272. 

REMARK  1.  Induo  and  exuo,  though  they  do  not-take  two  accusatives  in 
the  active  voice,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  accusative  of  the  thing  in 
the  passive  ;  as,  Indmtur  atras  vestes,  She  puts  on  sable  garments.  Ovid. 
Thoraca  indutus.  Virg.  Exiita  est  Roma  senectam.  Mart.  So  inducor  and 
cingor,  which  occurs  once  in  the  active  voice  with  two  accusatives  j  as,  fer- 
rum  cingltur.  Virg.  See  §  231,  REM.  1.  So  recingUur  anguein.  Ovid. 

REM.  2.  The  future  passive  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  with  est,  is 
sometimes,  though  rarely,  followed  by  an  accusative  ;  as,  Multa  nuvis  rebus 
quum  sit  agendum.  Lucr.  Quam  (viain)  nobis  ingrediendum  est.  Cic. 

II.  An  adjective,  verb,  and  participle,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  an  accusative  denoting  the  part  to  which  their  signification 
relates;  as, 

Nudus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os  humerosque  deo  simllis. 
Id.  Micat  auribus  et  tremit  artus.  Id.  Cetera  parce  puer  bello.  Id.  Sib~ 
ila  colla  tumentem.  Id.  Expleri  mentem  nequit.  Id.  Picti  scuta  Labici. 
Id.  Fractus  membra.  Hor.  Maxlmam  partem  lacte  vivunt.  Cass. 

This  is  a  Greek  construction,  and  is  usually  called  Synecdoche  or  the 
Greek  accusative.  It  is  used  instead  of  an  ablative  of  the  part  affected, 
(§  250,)  and  occurs  most  frequently  in  poetry. 

III.  Some  neuter  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  accusative, 
are  used  in  the  passive  voice,  the  accusative  becoming  the  sub- 
ject, according  to  the  general  rule  of  active  verbs ;  as, 

Tcrtia  vimtur  (Etas.  Ovid.  Bellum  militabltur.  Hor.  Dormltur  hicms. 
Mart.  Multa.  peccantur.  Cic.  Adltur  Gnossius  Minos.  Sen.  Ne  ab  om- 
nibus circumsisteretur.  COBS.  Hostes  invadi  posse.  Sail.  Campus  obltur 
aqud.  Ovid.  PLurcs  ineuntur  gratia.  Cic.  Ea  res  siletur.  Cir.. 


$235.  SYNTAX     -ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS.         207 


ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS. 

<§>  235.  (1.)  Twenty-six  prepositions  are  followed  by 
the  accusative. 

These  are  ad,  adversus  or  adversiim,  ante,  apud,  circa  or 
circum,  circiter,  cis  or  citra,  contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter, 
intra,juxta,  ob,  penes,  per,  pone,  post,  prater,  prope,  proptcr, 
secundum,  supra,  trans,  ultra;  as, 

Ad  templum,  To  the  temple.  Virg.  Adversus  hastes,  Against  the  enemy. 
Liv.  Cis  Rhenium,  This  side  the  Rhine.  Caes.  Intramuros.  Cic.  Penes 
reges.  Just.  Propter  aqua  rivum.  Virg.  Inter  agendum.  Id.  Ante  do- 
mandum.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  Cis  is  generally  used  with  names  of  places;  citra  also 
with  other  words;  as,  Cis  Taurum.  Cic.  CisPadum.  Liv.  Citra  Veliam. 
Cic.  Tela  hostium  citra.  Tac. 

REM.  2.  Inter,  signifying  between,  applies  to  two  accusatives  jointly, 
and  sometimes  to  a  plural  accusative  alone ;  as,  Inter  me  et  Scipionem. 
Cic.  Inter  natos  et  parentes.  Id.  Inter  nos.  Id. 

(2.)  In  and  sub,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed  by  the  accu- 
sative ;  denoting  situation,  they  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Via  ducit  in  urbem,  The  way  conducts  into  the  city.  Virg.  Noster  in 
te  amor.  Cic.  Ezerdtus  sub  jugum  missus  est,  The  army  was  sent  under 
the  yoke.  Caes.  Magna  mei  sub  terras  Hit  imago.  Virg.  Media  in  urbe, 
In  the  midst  of  the  city.  Ovid.  In  his  fait  Ariovistus.  Caes.  Bella  sub 
Iliads  moenlbus  gerere,  To  wage  war  under  the  Trojan  walls.  Ovid. 
Sub  nocte  silenti.  Virg. 

The  most  common  significations  of  in,  with  the  accusative,  are,  into, 
towards,  until,  for,  against, — with  the  ablative,  in,  upon,  among.  In  some 
instances,  iraand  sub,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed  by  the  abLitive,  and, 
denoting  situation,  by  the  accusative;  as,  In  conspectu  meo  audet  venire. 
Phaed.  Nationes  qucR  in  amicitiam  populi  Romdni,  ditionem^we  essent.  Id. 
Sub  jugo  dictator  hostes  misit.  Liv.  Hostes  sub  montem  consedisse.  Caes. 

In  and  sub,  in  diiferent  significations,  denoting  neither  tendency  nor 
situation,  are  followed  sometimes  by  the  accusative,  and  sometimes  by 
the  ablative  ;  as,  Amor  crescit  in  horas.  Ovid.  Hostllem  in  modum.  Cic. 
Quod  in  bono  servo  did  posset.  Id.  Sub  ed  conditione  Ter.  Sub  poena 
mortis.  Suet. 

In  expressions  relating  to  time,  sub,  denoting  at  or  in,  usually  takes  the 
ablative  ;  denoting  near,  about,  either  the  accusative  or  ablative  ;  as,  Sub 
tempore,  At  the  time.  Lucan.  Sub  lucem  (Virg.),  Sub  luce  (Liv.), 
About  daybreak. 

(3.)  Super  is  commonly  followed  by  the  accusative ;  but  when 
it  signifies  either  on  or  concerning,  it  takes  the  ablative ;  as, 

Super  labentem  culmina  tecti,  Gliding  over  the  top  of  the  house.  Virg. 
Super  tenero  prosternit  gramme  corpus,  He  stretches  his  body  on  the  ten- 
der grass.  Id.  Multa  super  Priamo  rogUans  sv,per  Hectore  multa, ....  con- 
cerning Priam,  <fcc.  Id.  The  compound  de super  is  found  with  the 
accusative,  and  insuper  with  the  accusative  and  ablative. 

(4.)  Subter  generally  takes  the  accusative,  but  sometimes 
the  ablative  ;  as, 

Subter  terras,  Under  the  earth.  Liv.     Suiter  densd  testudlne.  Virg 


208    SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE.  §  236. 

(5.)  Clam  is  followed  either  by  the  accusative  or  ablative  ; 
as, 

Clam  vos,  Without  your  knowledge.  Cic.  Clam  patre.  Ter.  Clam 
also  occurs  with  a  genitive — Clam  patris  (Ter.)  ;  and  even  with  a  dative 
— Mihi  clam  est.  Plaut. 

REM.  3.  The  adverbs  versus  and  usque  are  sometimes  used  with  an 
accusative,  which  depends  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Brundusium 
versus.  Cic.  Termmos  usque  Libyce.  Just.  Usque  Ennam  profecti.  Cic. 
Versus  is  always  placed  after  the  accusative. 

REM.  4.  Prepositions  are  often  used  without  a  noun  depending  upon 
them,  but  such  noun  may  usually  be  supplied  by  the  mind ;  as,  Multis 
post  annist  i.  e.  post  id  tempus.  Cic.  Circum  Concordi&j  sc.  adem. 

REM.  5.  The  accusative,  in  many  constructions,  is  supposed  to  depend 
on  a  preposition  understood.  The  preposition  cannot,  however,  always 
be  properly  expressed,  in  such  instances ;  nor  is  it  easy,  in  every  case,  to 
say  what  preposition  should  be  supplied.  For  the  accusative  without  a 
preposition  after  neuter  verbs,  see  §  232.  For  the  case  of  synecdoche,  see 
§  234,  II.  The  following  examples  may  here  be  added  : — Homo  id  cetdtis. 
Cic.  Quid  tibi  cetdtis  videor  ?  Plaut.  Profectus  est  id  temporis.  Cic. 
Illud  horce.  Suet.  Devenere  locos.  Virg.  Propior  montem.  Sail.  Prox- 
1mb  Pompeium  sedllam.  Cic.  A  te  bis  terve  summum  literas  accepi.  Id. 
Idne  estis  auctores  mihi  ?  Ter.  Vix  equldem  ausim  ajfirmare  quod  quidam 
auctores  sunt.  Liv.  In  most  of  these,  ad  may  be  understood. 


ACCUSATIVE    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE. 

§  236.  Nouns  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of 
space,  are  put,  after  other  nouns  and  verbs,  in  the  accusa- 
tive, and  sometimes  after  verbs  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Vixi  annos  triginta,  I  have  lived  thirty  years.  Decreverunt  interca- 
larium  quinque  et  quadra  ginta  dies  longum,  They  decreed  an  intercalary 
month  forty-five  days  long.  Cic.  Annos  natus  viginti  septem.  Twenty- 
seven  years  old.  Id.  Dies  totos  de  virtute  disserunt.  Id.  Duces  qui  una 
cum  Sertorio  omnes  annos  fuerant.  Cses.  Biduum  Laodicea  fui.  Cic. 
Te  jam  annum  audientem  Cratippum.  Id.  Duas  fossas  quindecim  pedes 
latas  pcrduxit,  He  extended  two  ditches  fifteen  feet  broad.  Coes.  Cum 
abessem  ab  Jlrnano  iter  unius  diei.  Cic.  Tres  pateat  cccli  spatium  non 
amplius  ulnas.  Virg.  A  portu  stadia  centum  et  viginti  processlmus.  Cic. 
Vixit  annis  viginti  novem,  imperdvit  triennio.  Suet.  JEsculapii  temptum 
quinque  rnillibus  passuum  distans.  Liv.  Ventidius  bidui  spatio  abest 
ab  eo.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  Nouns  denoting  time  or  space,  used  to  limit  other  nouns, 
are  often  put  in  the  genitive  or  ablative.  See  §  211,  REM.  6. 

REM.  2.  A  term  of  time  not  yet  completed,  may  be  expressed  by  an 
ordinal  number ;  as,  JYos  vicestmum  jam  diem  patlmur  hebescere  aciem 
horum  auctoritatis.  Cic.  Purilco  bello  duodecmium  annum  Italia  urebd- 
tur.  Liv. 

REM.  3.  The  accusative  or  ablative  of  space  is  sometimes  omitted, 
while  a  genitive  depending  on  it  remains ;  as,  Castra  qua  abtrant  bidui 
sc.  spatium  or  spatio.  Cic 


§  237,  238.   SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  ADVERBS.      209 

REM.  4.  To  denote  a  place  by  its  distance  from  another,  the  ablative  is 
commonly  used  ;  as,  Milllbus  passuum  sex  a  Ccesaris  castris  consedit.  Cses. 

For  abhinc,  with  the  accusative,  see  §  253,  REM.  2.  For  the  ablative 
denoting  difference  of  time  or  space,  see  §  256,  REM.  16. 

REM.  5.  A  preposition  is  sometimes  expressed  before  an  accusative  of 
time  or  space,  but  it  generally  modifies  the  meaning ;  as,  Quern  per  decem 
annos  alulmus,... .during  ten  years.  Cic. 

REM.  6.  M  is  sometimes  used  with  the  measure  of  distance  instead  of 
the  place  from  which  the  distance  is  reckoned ;  as,  A  milllbus  passuum 
duobus  castra  posuerunt,  Two  miles  from  the  place,  or,  Two  miles  off.  Cses. 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  237.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  the  town  in  which  the  motion  ends  is  put  in  the 
accusative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Regtilus  Carthaginem  rediit,  Regulus  returned  to  Carthage.  Cic. 
Capuam  Jlectit  iter,  He  turns  his  course  to  Capua.  Liv.  Calpurniua 
Romam  proficiscltur.  Sail.  Romam  erat  nunciatum.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  The  accusative,  in  like  manner,  is  used  after  iter  with  sum, 
habeo,  &c. ;  as,  Iter  est  mi/ii  Lanuvium.  Cic.  C&sarem  iter  habere  Capuam. 
Id.  So  with  a  verbal  noun  ;  as,  Adventus  Romam.  Liv. 

REM.  2.  The  preposition  to  be  supplied  is  in,  denoting  into,  which  is 
sometimes  expressed  ;  as,  In  EphSsum  abii.  Plaut.  Ad,  when  expressed 
before  the  name  of  a  town,  denotes  not  into,  but  to  or  near  ;  as,  C&sar  ad 
Genevan!  pervenit.  Goes.  Cum  ego  ad  Heracleam  accederem.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusative,  a  dative  is  sometimes,  though  rare- 
ly, used  ;  as,  CarthagTni  nuncios  mittam.  Hor. 

REM.  4.  Domus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular, 
are  put  in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Jte  domum,  Go  home.    Virg.     Galli  domos  abierant.   Liv.    Rus  ibo.  Ter. 

When  domus  is  limited  by  a  genitive,  or  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun, 
it  sometimes  takes  a  preposition  :  with  other  adjectives,  the  preposition  is 
generally  expressed  ;  as,  Non  introSo  in  nostram  domum.  Plaut.  Venisse  in 
domurn  Leccse.  Cic.  Ad  earn  dornum  profecti  sunt.  Id.  In  domos  supe- 
ras  scand&re  curafuit.  Ovid.  So  larern  suum,  App.,  or  ad  laremsuum.  Cic. 

Domus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative  after  a  verbal  noun;  as, 
Domum  reditionis  spe  sublatd.  Caes.  So,  Reditus  Romam.  Cic. 

REM.  5.  Before  all  other  names  of  places  in  which  the  motion  ends, 
except  those  of  towns,  and  domus  and  rus,  the  preposition  is  commonly 
used ;  as,  Ex  JlsiA  transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Te  in  Eplrum  venisse 
gaudeo.  Cic.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  hide  Sardinian!  cum  classe 
venit.  Cic.  Italiam  Lavinaque  vcnit  litora.  Virg.  Navigare  JEgyptum 
pergit.  Liv.  Rapldum  veniemus  Oaxen.  Virg.  The  names  of  nations 
are  used  in  the  same  manner ;  as,  Nocte  ad  Nervios  pervencrunt.  Caes 
JV0s  iblmus  Afros.  Virg.  So  insulas  rubri  maris  navigant.  Flin. 

ACCUSATIVE     AFTER     ADVERBS    AND     INTERJEC- 
TIONS. 

<§>  238»  1.  The  adverbs  pridie  and  postridie  are  often  followed  by 
the  accusative ;  as,  Pridie  cum  diem.  Cic.  Pridie  idus.  Id.  Postridi* 
iudos.  Id.  So  prepiiis  and  proxlmti  :  see  §  235,  REM.  5 

18* 


210  SYNTAX. VOCATIVE.  $  239,  240. 


The  accusative,  in  such  examples,  depends  on  ante  or  post  \i 
For  the  genitive  after  pridie  and  postridie,  see  §  212,  REM.  4,  ] 


understood 
,  NOTE  6. 
The  adverb  ben£  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  accusative  in  forms  of 

drinking  health ;  as,  Proplno,  bend  vos,  ben&  nos,  ben£  te,  bene  me,  bend 

nostrum  Stephanium.  Plaut.     Bene  Messalam.  Tibull. 

2.  The  interjections  en,  ecce,  O,  heu,  and  pro,  are  sometimes 
followed  by  the  accusative  ;  as, 

En  quatuor  aras  !  ecce  duas  tibi  Daphni !  Behold  four  altars  !  lo,  two 
for  thee,  Daphnis  !  Virg.  Eccum  !  eccos  !  eccillum  !  for  ecce  cum  !  ecce  cos  ! 
ecce  ilium  !  Plaut.  O  pradarum  custodem  !  Cic.  Heu  me  infeliccm  /  Ter. 
Pro  Deum  hominumque  fid  em  !  Cic. 

So  also  ah,  eheu,  and  hem;  asf.#A  me  me!  Catull.  Eheu  me  miserum  ! 
Ter.  Hem  astutias  !  Id. 

The  accusative  is  also  used  in  exclamations  without  an  interjection ; 
as,  Miseram  me  !  Ter.  Homtnem  gravem  et  civem  egregium  !  Cic. 

SUBJECT- ACCUSATIVE. 

§  239.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  put  in 
the  accusative ;  as, 

Moleste  Pompeium  id  ferre  constdbat,  that  Pompey  took  that  ill,  was 
evident.  Cic.  Eos  hoc  nomine  appelldri  fas  est.  Id.  Miror  te  ad  me 
nihil  scribere,  I  wonder  that  you  do  not  write  to  me.  Cn.  Mag.  in  Cic. 
Campos  jubet  esse  patentes.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  when  it  precedes 
in  the  genitive  or  dative  case  ;  as,  Est  adolescentis  majdres  natu  vereri,  sc. 
eum.  Cic.  Expedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  sc.  vos.  Ter. ;  or  rarely  in  the  accusa- 
tive. Sail.  C.  5],  29;  or  when  its  place  is  supplied  by  a  possessive  pronoun 
expressed  or  understood.  Sail.  Cat.  4. 

REM.  2.  A  substantive  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  omitted  before  the 
infinitive,  when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb  ;  as,  Poll'tcitus  sum 
suscepturum  (esse),  sc.  me,  I  promised  (that  I)  would  undertake.  Ter. 
Sed  reddere  posse  negdbat,  sc.  se.  Virg. 

REM.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  has  been 
previously  expressed,  or  is  a  general  indefinite  word  for  person  or  thing ;  as, 
Est  aliud  iracundum  esse,  aliud  irdtum,  sc.  hominem.  Cic.  See  §  269,  R.  1. 

The  subject-accusative,  like  the  nominative,  is  often  wanting.  See  §  209, 
Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  may  be  an  infinitive  or  a  clause. 
See  §  201,  IV. 

For  the  verbs  after  which  the  subject-accusative  with  the  infinitive  is 
used,  see  §  272.  For  the  accusative  in  the  predicate  after  infinitives  neu- 
ter and  passive,  see  §  210. 

VOCATIVE. 

§  240.  The  vocative  is  used,  either  with  or  without 
an  interjection,  in  addressing  a  person  or  thing. 

The  interjections  O,  heu,  and  pro,  also  ah,  au,  ehem,  eheu, 
eho,  ehddum,  eja,  hem,  heus,  hui,  io,  ohe,  and  vah,  are  often 
followed  by  the  vocative  ;  as, 

0  formdse  pmr  !  O  beautiful  boy !  Virg.     Heu  virgo  I  Id,     Pro  sancte 


$  242.     SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS.  211 

Jupiter!  Cic.  Ah  virgo  infelix!  Virg.  Heus  Syre!  Ter.  Ohe  libelle! 
Mart. 

The  vocative  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a  genitive  depending  upon  it 
remains;  as,  0 misera  sortis !  so.  homines.  Lucan. 

NOTE.  The  vocative  forms  no  part  of  a  proposition,  but  serves  to 
designate  the  person  to  whom  a  proposition  is  addressed. 


ABLATIVE. 
ABLATIVE   AFTER   PREPOSITIONS. 

Eleven  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  abla- 
tive. 

These  are  a,  ab,  or  abs ;  absque,  coram,  cum,  de,  e  or  exy 
palam,  prce,  pro,  sine,  tenus ;  as, 

Jib  illo  tempore,  From  that  time.  Liv.  A  scribendo,  From  writing.  Cic 
Cum  exercitu,  With  the  army.  Sail.  Certis  de  causis,  For  certain 
reasons.  Cic.  Ex  fugd,  From  flight.  Id.  Palam  papula.  Liv.  Sine 
labor  e.  Cic.  CapuLo  tenus.  Virg. 

For  in,  sub,  super,  suiter,  and  clam,  with  the  ablative,  see  §  235,  (2,)  &c. 

REMARK  1.  Tenus  is  always  placed  after  its  case.  It  sometimes  takes 
the  genitive,  chiefly  the  genitive  plural.  See  §221,  III. 

REM.  2.  The  adverbs  procul  and  simul  are  sometimes  used  with  an  ab- 
lative, which  depends  on  a  preposition  understood  ;  as,  Procul  mari,sc.a; 
Far  from  the  sea.  Liv.  Simul  nobis  habitat,  sc.  cum.  Ovid.  So  ceque.  Plaut. 

REM.  3.  Some  of  the  above  prepositions,  like  those  which  are  follow- 
ed by  the  accusative,  are  occasionally  used  without  a  noun  expressed  j  as, 
Cum  coram  sumus.  Cic.  Cum  fratre  an  sine.  Id. 

REM.  4.  The  ablative  is  often  used  without  a  preposition,  where,  in 
English,  a  preposition  must  be  supplied.  This  occurs  especially  in  poetry. 
In  some  such  cases,  a  preposition  may  properly  be  introduced  in  Latin ; 
in  others,  the  idiom  of  that  language  does  not  permit  it. 

§  242.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  a,  ab,  abs,  de,  e,  ex, 
and  super,  are  followed  by  an  ablative  depending  upon  the  prep- 
osition ;  as, 

JJbesse  urbe,  To  be  absent  from  the  city.  Cic.  Mire  sedlbus,  To  depart 
from  their  habitations.  Tac.  Ut  se  maiedictis  non  abstineant.  Cic.  De- 
trudunt  naves  scapula,  They  push  the  ships  from  the  rock.  Virg.  Nam 
egressus  est.  Nep.  Excedere  finibus.  Liv.  Ccesar  pradio  supersederc 
statuit.  Cces.  So  the  adjectives  exsul  and  extorris,  with  patrid  and  domot 
Sail.  J.  14,  and  so  the  verbal  eruptio,  Mutma  eruptio.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated,  or  a  different  one  is 
used  ;  as,  Detrahere  de  tud  famd  nunquam  cogitdvi.  Cic.  Ex  oculis  abi- 
erunt.  Liv.  Exlre  a  patrid.  Cic.  Exire  de  vitd.  Id. 

REM.  2.  These  compound  verbs  are  often  used  without  a  noun ;  but, 
in  many  cases,  it  may  be  supplied  by  the  mind  ;  as,  Equltes  degressi  ad 
pedes,  sc.  equis.  Liv.  Mire,  ad  Deos,  sc.  vitd.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  Some  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  and  ex,  instead  of  the 
ablative,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative.  See  §  224,  REM.  1  and 
2.  Some  compounds,  also,  of  neuter  verbs,  occur  with  the  accusative. 
See  §233,  REM.  1 


212    SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    A»  l'£R    CERTAIN    NOUNS,    &C. 


ABLATIVE    AFTER    CERTAIN    NOUNS,    ADJECTIVES, 
AND    VERBS. 

§  243.  Opus  and  itsus,  signifying  need,  are  usually 
limited  by  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Auctoritate  tud  nolis  opus  est,  We  need  your  authority.  Cic.  Nune 
anlmis  opus  nunc  pectore  jirmo.  Virg.  Naves,  quibus  proconsuli  usus  non 
esset;  Ships,  for  which  the  proconsul  had  no  occasion.  Cic.  ,/VMWC  virlbus 
usus,  nunc  inanibus  rapidis.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  Opus  and  usus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  of  a 
perfect  participle  ;  as,  Ita  facto  et  maturate  opus  esse,  That  there  was 
need  of  so  doing  and  of  hastening.  Liv.  Usus  facto  est  mihi.  Ter.  After 
opus,  a  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  participle ;  as,  Opus  fuit 
Hirtio  convento  (Cic.)  ;  Opus  sili  esse  domino  ejus  inverito  (Liv.)  > — or  a 
supine  is  used  ;  as,  Ita  dictu  opus  est.  Ter. 

For  the  genitive  and  accusative  after  opus  and  usus,  see  §  211,  REM.  11. 

REM.  2.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  are  only  used  with  the  verb 
sum.  Opus  is  sometimes  the  subject,  and  sometimes  the  predicate,  of  that 
verb;  usus  the  subject  only.  Opus  is  rarely  followed  by  an  ablative,  ex- 
cept when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  verb.  The  thing  needed  may,  in  gene- 
ral, be  put  either  in  the  nominative  or  the  ablative ;  as,  Dux  nobis  opus 
est  (Cic.),  or  Duce  nolns  opus  est.  The  former  construction  is  most 
common  with  neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  and  is  always  used  with 
those  which  denote  quantity,  as  tantum,  quantum,  plus,  &c. ;  as,  Quod 
no/i  opus  est,  asse  carum  est.  Cato  apud  Sen. 

For  the  ablative  of  character,  quality,  &c.,  limiting  a  noun,  see  §211, 
REM.  6. 

<§>  244.  Dignus,  indignus,  contentus,  pr&ditus,  and  fre- 
tusj  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Dignus  laude,  Worthy  of  praise.  Hof.  Vox  populi  majestate  indigna, 
A  speech  unworthy  of  the  dignity  of  the  people.  Cses.  Bestia  eo  conten- 
ts non  qucerunt  amplius.  Cic.  Homo  scelere  prceditus.  Id.  Plerlque  in- 
genio  freti.  Id.  So,  JEquum  esfme  af.que  illo.  Plaut. 

REMARK  1.  Dignb  also  takes  the  ablative,  and  dignor  the  accusative 
with  the  ablative  ;  as,  Peccat  cruce  digniiis.  Hor.  Me  dignor  honore.  Virg. 

REM.  2.  Dignus  and  indignus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  genitive; 
as,  Susclpe  cogitationem  dignisslmam  tuce,  virtutis.  Cic.  Indignus  avorum. 
Virg. ;  and  dignus,  in  Plautus,  rarely  by  the  accusative  and  by  the  dative. 

Instead  of  an  ablative,  they  often  take  an  infinitive,  or  a  subjunctive 
clause,  with  qui  or  ut  ;  as,  Erat  dignus  amari.  Virg.  Dignus  qui  imperet. 
Cic.  Non  sum  dignus,  ut  figam  palum  in  parietem.  Plaut. 

<§>  245.  I.  Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  vescor,  are 
followed  by  the  ablative  ;  as, 

His  vocibus  usa  est,  She  used  these  words.  Virg.  Frui  voluptate,  To 
enjoy  pleasure.  Cic.  Fungitur  ofRcio,  He  performs  his  duty.  Id.  Opptdo 
potlti  snnt.  Liv.  Vescitur  aura.  Virg. 

So  the  compounds  almtor,  and  rarely  deutor,  perfruor,  dcfungor,  and 
perfungor.  Utor  may  take  a  second  ablative  denoting  character ;  as,  ILle 
faclli  me  utetur  patre,  He  shall  have  in  me  an  indulgent  father.  Ter. 

REM.  1.     Utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potipr,  vescor,  &c.,  instead  of  an  ablative 


$246,247.    SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &c.  213 

sometimes  take  an  accusative  ;  as,  Quam  rem  medlci  utuntur.  Varr.  In- 
genium  frui.  Ter.  Datames  militdre  munus  fungens.  Nep.  Gentem  ati- 
quam  urbem  nostram  potituram  putem.  Cic.  Sacras  lauros  vescar.  Tibull. 
Potior  is,  also,  found  with  the  genitive.  (See  §  220,  4.)  Dignor  is  used 
both  as  active  and  passive,  and  takes  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 

II.  Lector,  gaudeo,  glorior,  jacto,  nitor,  sto,  Jido,  confido, 
muto,  misceo,  epulor,  vivo,  assuesco,  and  consto  (to  consist  of), 
are  often  followed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Lcetortud  dignitate,  I  rejoice  in  your  dignity.  Cic.  Gaude  tuo  bono.  Id. 
Sud  victoria  gtoridri.  Caes.  Jactat  supplicio  levando.  Cic.  Niti  sequitate. 
Id.  Censoris  opinione  standum  non  putdvit.  Id.  Fidere  cursu.  Ovid* 
So  assuefacio,  commuto,  Icetiftcor,  and  permisceo.  Compotio  takes  the  ace. 
of  the  person,  and,  like  compos,  the  abl.  or  gen.  of  the  thing. 

REMARK  1.  Lcetor,  gaudeo,  and  glorior,  are  sometimes  followed  by  the 
accusative.  See  §  232,  (2.)  Fido,  confido,  and  assuesco,  often  take  the 
dative.  See  §  223,  REM.  2.  So  also  misceo. 

REM.  2.  When  a  preposition  is  expressed  after  the  above  verbs,  Icetor 
and  gaudeo  usually  take  de  ;  glorior  and  jacto,  de  or  in  ;  sto,  Jido  and  con- 
fido, in;  nitor  and  assuesco,  in  or  ad;  misceo,  cum;  and  consto,  ex. 

III.  The  ablative  without  a  preposition  is  used  after  a  verb, 
especially  after  sum  and  fore,  to  denote  the  situation  or  circum- 
stances of  the  subject  of  the  verb  ;  as, 

Tamen  magno  timore  sum,  Yet  I  am  in  great  fear.  Cic.  Quanto  futrim 
dolore  meministi.  Id.  Maximo  honore  Servius  Tullius  erat.  Liv.  Turba 
atque  seditionibus  sine  curd  aluntur.  Sail.  C.  37. 

But  the  preposition  in  is  often  used  before  such  ablatives,  especially  if 
an  adjective  or  pronoun  is  not  joined  with  them;  as,  Sum  in  expectations 
omnium  rerum.  Cic.  Etsi  erdmus  in  magnd  spe.  Id. 

<§>246.  Perfect  participles  denoting  origin  are  often 
followed  by  the  ablative  of  the  source,  without  a  prepo- 
sition. 

Such  are  natus,  progndtus,  satus,  crcdtus,  cretus,  editus,  genttus,  genera- 
tus,  ortus  ;  to  which  may  be  added  orivndus. 

Thus,  Nate  dcd  !  O  son  of  a  goddess  !  Virg.  Tantalo  prognatus,  De- 
scended from  Tantalus.  Cic.  Satus  Nereide,  Sprung  from  a  Nereid.  Ovid. 
Credtits  rege.  Id.  Meaner c  creti.  Virg.  Edite  rcgibus.  Hor.  Diis  gen- 
Ite.  Virg.  ArgoUco  gcnerdlus  Alemone.  Ovid.  Ortus  nullis  majoribus. 
Hor.  Ccdesti  semine  oriundi.  Lucr. 

REMARK  1.  The  preposition  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  genero  and  nas- 
cor ;  as,  Ut  patre  certo  nascerere.  Cic.  So,  Fortes  creantur  fortibus.  Hor. 

REM.  2.  The  prepositions  a  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  are  often  expressed  after 
these  participles,  especially  in  prose. 

ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    &c. 

§  247.  Nouns  denoting  the  cause,  manner,  means, 
and  instrument,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  put  in  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 


214        SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C     $  248. 

Animus  a^er  avaritia,  A  mind  diseased  through  avarice.  Sail.  Failure 
metu,  To  be  pale  through  fear.  Ovid.  Quod  saevitia  temporis  non  capi 

yuterat.  Sail. Omnibus  modis  miser  sum,  I  am  every  way  miserable.  Ter. 

Silentio  audltus  est,  He  was  heard  in  silence.  Cic.  Lento  gradu  procedit 
Val.  Max. — — dmlcos  observantia,  rem  parsimonia  retinuit ;  He  retained 
his  friends  by  attention,  his  property  by  frugality.  Cic.  Auro  ostro</w« 
decori.  Virg.  Vi  morbi  consumptas  es.  Cic.  JEgresmt  medendo.  Virg. 

Traits  saucia  securi,  A  tree  cut  with  the  axe.  Ovid.  Caisus  est  virgin, 

Cic.  Be/ieficio  meo  fratres  sunt.  Sail.  Laniabant  dentlbus  artus.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  When  the  cause  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  is  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  preposition  ob,  propter,  or  per ;  as,  Non  est  cequum  me 
propter  vos  declpi.  Ter.  These  prepositions,  and  a  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  and 
pne,  are  also  sometimes  used  when  the  cause  is  not  a  voluntary  agent ;  as, 
Ob  adulterium  ctesi.  Virg.  JVcc  loqui  prae  mcerore  potuit.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  After  active  vfcrbs,  the  causeis  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple 
ablative,  but  either  by  a  preposition,  or  by  the  ablatives  causd,  gratia,  &c., 
with  a  genitive ;  as,  Si  hoc  honoris  mei  causa  susceperis.  Cic.  With 
causd,  &c.,  the  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly  used,  for  the  corresponding 
substantive  pronoun ;  as,  Te  abesse  me£  causa,  moleste  fero.  Cic.  Some- 
times the  ablative  with  ductus,  motus,  captus,  &c.,is  used  ;  as,  Mild  benev- 
oleritui  ductus  tribuebat  omnia.  Cic.  ;  but  these  are  sometimes  omitted. 

REM.  3.  The  manner  is  often  expressed  with  cum,  especially  when  an 
adjective  is  joined  with  it ;  as,  Quum  videret  oratores  cum  severitate 
audiri.  Cic.  Magno  cum  metu  dicere  incipio.  Id.  Sometimes  also  with 
e  or  ex  ;  as,  Ex  industria,  On  purpose.  Liv.  Ex  integro,  Anew.  Quinct. 

REM.  4.  The  means  is  often  expressed  by  per  with  an  accusative;  as, 
Quod  per  scelus  adeptus  est.  Cic.  When  it  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  can 
only  be  so  expressed,  or  by  the  ablative  operd  with  a  genitive  or  possessive 
pronoun  ;  as,  Per  praeconern  vender  e  allquid.  Cic.  Opera  eorum  cffectum 
est.  Just.  Non  inea  opera  evenit.  Ter.  Yet  persons  are  sometimes  con- 
sidered as  involuntary  agents,  and  as  such  expressed  by  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition  ;  as,  Servos,  quibus  silvas  publlcas  depopulatus  erat.  Cic. 

II KM.  5.  The  instrument  is  rarely  used  with  a  preposition.  The  poets, 
however,  sometimes  prefix  to  it  a  or  ab,  and  even  sub,  and  sometimes 
other  prepositions;  as,  Trajcctus  ab  ense.  Ovid.  Exercere  solum  sub 
vornSre.  Virg.  Cum,  with  the  instrument,  is  seldom  used  except  by  infe- 
rior writers ;  as,  Cum  voce  maxima  condamare.  Gell. 

$  248.  L  The  voluntary  agent  of  a  verb  in 
the  passive  voice  is  put  in  the  ablative  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 

(In  the  active  voice,)  Clodius  me  dill  git,  Clodius  loves  me  (Cic.);  (in 
the  passive,)  A  Clodio  dillgor,  I  am  loved  by  Clodius.  Laudatur  ab  his, 
mlpdtur  ab  illis.  Hor. 

REMARK  I.  The  general  word  for  persons,  after  verbs  in  the  passive 
voice,  is  often  understood ;  as,  Probltas  laudatur,  se.  ab  hominlbus.  Juv. 
So  after  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs;  as,  DiscurrUur.  Virg.  Toto  certd- 
turn  est  cor  pore  rc<rni.  Id. 

The  agent  is  likewise  often  understood,  when  it  is  the  same  as  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  arid  tho  expression  is  equivalent  to  the  active  voice  with 
a  reflexive  pronoun,  or  to  the  middle  voice  in  Greek;  as,  Cum  omnes  in 
omni  genere  scelcrum  vol.utcniur,  sc.  a  se.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  Neuter  verbs,  also,  are  often  followed  by  an  abla- 
tive of  the  voluntary  agent  with  a  or  ab  ;  as. 


§249,250.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C.       215 

M.  Marcellus  periit  ab  Annibale,  M.  Marcellus  was  killed  by  Hannibal. 
Plin.  Ne  vir  ab  hoste  cadat.  Ovid. 

REM.  3.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Nee  conjuge  captus. 
Ovid.  Colitur  linigera  turba.  Id.  Pereat  meis  exclsus  Arglvis.  Hor. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  the  passive  voice,  and  participles  in 
dus,  see  §  225,  II.  and  III. 

II.  The  involuntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice,  is  put 
in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition,  as  the  cause,  means,  or  instrument ; 
as  (in  the  active  voice),  Terror  conflcit  omnia  (Lucan.)  ; — (in  the  passive), 
Maximo  dolore  conjicior.  Cic.  Erangi  cupiditate.  Id. 

But  the  involuntary  agent  is  sometimes  considered  as  voluntary,  and 
takes  a  or  ab ;  as,  A  voluptatibus  destri.  Cic.  A  natara  datum  homlni 
vivendi  curriculum.  Id. 

<§>  249.  I.  A  noun  denoting  that  with  which  the 
action  of  a  verb  is  performed,  though  not  the  instrument, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 

R  EM  ARK  1.  This  construction  is  used  with  verbs  signifying 
to  fill,  to  furnish,  to  load,  to  array,  to  adorn,  to  enrich,  and 
many  others  of  various  significations  ;  as, 

Terrore  impUtur  Africa,  Africa  is  filled  with  terror.  Sil.  Instruxere 
epulis  mensas,  They  furnished  the  tables  with  food.  Ovid.  Ut  ejus  anl- 
mum  his  opiniombus  imbuas,  That  you  should^  imbue  his  mind  with  these 
sentiments.  Cic.  Naves  onerant  auro,  They  load  the  ships  with  gold. 
virg.  Cumulat  altaria  donis,  He  heaps  the  altars  with  gifts.  Id.  Terra 
se  gramme  vestit,  The  earth  clothes  itself  with  grass.  Id.  Molllbus  orna- 
bal  cornua  sertis.  Id.  Me  tanto  honore  honestas.  Plaut.  Equis  dfricam 
locupletavit.  Colum.  Studium  tuum  nulld  me  novd  voluptate  affecit.  Cic. 
Terram  nox  obruit  umbris.  Lucr. 

REM.  2.  Several  verbs,  denoting  to  fill,  instead  of  the  ablative,  some- 
times take  a  genitive.  See  §  220,  3. 

II.  A  noun  denoting  that  in  accordance  with  which   any 
thing  is,  or  is  done,  is  often  put  in  the  ablative  without  a 
preposition ;  as, 

Nostro  more,  According  to  our  custom.  Cic.  Institute  suo  CcBsar 
copias  suas  eduxit;  Caesar,  according  to  his  practice,  led  out  his  forces. 
Goes.  Idffictum  consilio  meo.  Ter.  Pacem  fecit  his  conditionTbus.  Nep. 

The  prepositions  </e,  ex,  and  pro,  are  often  expressed  with  such  nouns. 

III.  The  ablative  denoting  accompaniment,  is  usually  joined 
with  cum;  as, 

Vagamur  egentes  cum  conjugibus  et  liberis ;  Needy,  we  wander  with 
our  wives  and  children.  Cic.  Scepe  admirdri  soleo  cum  hoc  C.  Laelio. 
Cic.  Juliuin  cum  his  ad  te  literis  mm.  Id.  Ingrcssus  est  cum  gladio. 
Id.  But  cum  is  sometimes  omitted,  especially  before  words  denoting 
military  forces,  when  limited  by  an  adjective  ;  as,  Ad  castra  Ccesaris  om- 
nibus copiis  contend&runt.  Cses.  Inde  toto  exercitu  profectus.  Liv. 

$  250.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  may  be  followed 
by  the  ablative,  denoting  in  what  respect  their  signification 
is  laken  ;  as, 


216        SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  CAUSE,  &C.     $  251. 

Pietdte  flius,  consiliis  parens  ;  In  affection  a  son,  in  counsel  a  parent. 
Cic.  Reges  nomine,  magis  qudm  imperio,  Kings  in  name  rather  than  in 

authority.  Nep.     Oppldum  nomine,  Bibrax.  Cses. Jure  perltus,  Skilled 

in  law.  Cic.  Anxius  anlmo,  Anxious  in  mind.  Tac.  Pedibus  ceger,  Lame 
in  his  feet.  Sail.  Crine  ruber,  niger  ore.  Mart.  Fronte  Icetus.  Tac. 

Major  natu.  Cic.     Maxlmus  natu.  Liv. Anlmo  angi,  To  be  troubled  in 

mind.  Cic.  Contrcmisco  totci  mente  et  omnibus  artubus,  I  am  agitated  in 
my  whole  mina  and  in  every  limb.  Id.  Captvs  mente,  Affected  in  mind, 
i.  e.  deprived  of  reason.  Id.  Altero  oculo  capltur.  Liv.  Ingenii  laude 
floruit.  Cic.  Pollere  nobilitate.  Tac.  Animoque  et  corpore  torpet.  Hor. 

REMARK  1.  To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following 
rules : — 

(1.)  Adjectives  of  plenty  or  want  are  sometimes  limited  by 
the  ablative ;  as, 

Domus  plena  servis,  A  house  full  of  servants.  Juv.  Dives  agris,  Rich 
inland.  Hor.  Ferax  sceculum  bonis  artlbus.  Plin. Inops  verbis,  De- 
ficient in  words.  Cic.  Orba  fratrlbus,  Destitute  of  brothers.  Ovid.  Vid- 
uum  arborlbus  solum.  Colum.  Nudus  agris.  Hor.  See  §  213,  R.  4  and  5. 

(2.)  Verbs  signifying  to  abound,  and  to  be  destitute,  are  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Scatentem  belluis  pontum,  The  sea  abounding  in  monsters.  Hor.  Urbs 
redundat  militibus,  The  city  is  full  of  soldiers.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Villa 


tione.   Id.     Abundat  audaci&,  consilio  et  ratione  deficltur.   Id. 

To  this  rule  belong  abundo,  exubero,  redundo,  scateo,  affiuo,  circumfiuo, 
diffluo,  superfluo  ; — careo,  egco,  indigeo,  vaco,  deficior,  destituor,  &c. 

REM.  2.  The  genitive  is  often  used  to  denote  in  what  respect,  after  ad- 
jectives and  verbs;  (see  §§  213  and  220;)  sometimes,  also,  the  accusa- 
tive ;  see  §  234,  II. ;  or  the  ablative  with  a  preposition. 

REM.  3.  The  ablative  denoting  in  respect  to  or  concerning,  is  used  after 
facio  and  sum,  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Quid  hoc  homine  facidtis  ? 
What  can  you  do  with  this  man  ?  Cic.  Nescit  quid  facial  auro.  Plaut. 
Metum  ceperunt  quidnam  se  Juturum  esset.  Liv.  Quid  me  fiat  parvi  pen- 
dis.  Ter.  In  this  construction,  the  preposition  de  seems  to  be  understood, 
and  is  sometimes  expressed  ;  as,  Quid  de  Tulliold  med  fiet.  Cic. 

§251.  A  noun  denoting  that  of  which  any  thing  is 
deprived,  or  from  which  it  is  separated,  is  often  put  in  the 
ablative  without  a  preposition. 

This  construction  occurs  after  verbs  signifying  to  deprive,  to 
free,  to  debar,  to  drive  away,  to  remove,  and  others  of  similar 
meaning.  Thus, 

Jtudantur  arbdres  foliis,  The  trees  are  stripped  of  leaves.  Plin.  Hoc  me 
libera  metu,  Free  me  from  this  fear.  Ter.  Tune  earn  philosophiam 
sequere,  qucB  spoliat  nos  judicio,  privat  approbatione,  orbat  sensibus?  Cic. 
Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu.  Virg.  Te  illis  sedibus  arcebit.  Cic.  Q.  Varium 
pellere  possessiombus  conatus  est.  Id.  Quod  M.  Catdnem  tribunatu  tuo 
remooisses.  Id  Me  leves  chori  scccrnunt  populo.  Hor. 


§252,253.  SYNTAX.  —  ABLATIVE  OF  PRICE  AND  TIME.    217 

To  this  rule  belong  fraudo,  nudo,  orbo,  privo,  spolio  ;  —  arceo,  expediot 
intercludo,  laxo,  levo,  libero,  moveo,  removco,  pcllo,  pro/tibeo,  soivo,  &c. 

REMARK  1.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  more  or  less  frequently  fol- 
lowed by  a,  ab,  de,  e,  or  ex  ;  as,  Jlrcem  ab  incendio  liberdvit.  Cic.  Solvere 
belluam  ex  catenis.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Remove  te  a  suspicione.  Cic.  For 
arceo,  &c.  with  the  dat.,  see  §  224,  R.  2.  Arceo  sometimes  also  takes  the 
infinitive.  Ovid.  M.  3,  88. 

REM.  2.  The  active  verbs  induo,  exuo,  dono,impertio,  adspcrgo,  insper- 
go,  intercludo,  circumdo,  prokibeo,  instead  of  an  ablative  of  the  thing  with 
an  accusative  of  the  person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  thing 
and  a  dative  of  the  person  ;  as,  Unam  (vestem)  juveni  induit,  He  puts  one 
upon  the  youth.  Virg.  Dondre  munera  civlbus^  To  present  gifts  to  the 
citizens.  Cic. 

Interdlco  is  sometimes  used  with  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  ablative 
of  the  thing;  as,  Quibus  cum  aqna  et  igni  inter  dixissent.  Cees. 

Abdico  takes  sometimes  an  ablative,  and  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the 
thing  renounced  ;  as,  Abdicare  se  magistratu.  Cic.  Mdicare  magistra 
turn.  Sail.  In  Plautus,  circumduco,  to  cheat,  takes  the  abl.  of  the  thing. 


ABLATIVE    OF    PRICE. 

§  252.  The  price  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
except  when  expressed  by  the  adjectives  tanti,  quanti, 
pluris,  minoris  /  as, 

Cum  te  trecentis  talentis  regi  Cotto  vcndidisscs,  When  you  had  sold 
yourself  to  king  Cottus  for  three  hundred  talents.  Cic.  Vend/tdit  hie 
auro  patriam,  This  one  sold  his  country  for  gold.  Virg.  Cibus  uno  asse 
vcndlis.  Plin.  Constltit  quadringentis  millibus.  Varr.  Denis  in  diem 
asslbus  anlmam  et  corpus  (miilturti)  (Estimdri.  Tac.  Vendo  meum  non 
pluris  quam  ceteri,  fortasse  etiam  minoris.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  Tantldem,  quanticunque,  quantiquanti,  and  quantlvis,  corn- 
pounds  of  tanti  and  quanti,  are  also  put  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  Tantldem 
frumentum  emerunt  quantldem  .....  Cic.  Majoris  also  is  thus  used  in 
Phaedrus  ;  Mvltb  rnajoris  aldpa  mccum  veneunt. 

REM^^.  With  a  noun,  tantus,  quantus,  &c.,  are  commonly  put  in  the 
ablative  ;  as,  Quam  tarito  pretio  mercdtus  est.  Cic.  Cum  pretio  minore 
redimcndi  captlvos  copia  fieret.  Liv.  Pluris  pretii  coquus.  Sail.  Tantoy 
quanto,  andplure,  are  sometimes  found  without  a  noun  ;  as,  Plure  vcnit.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  The  ablative  of  price  is  often  an  adjective  without  a  noun  ; 
as,  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  paululo,tantulo,  minlmo,  plurlmo,  vili,  nimio. 
These  adjectives  refer  to  some  noun  understood,  as  pretio,  are,  and  the 
like,  which  are  sometimes  expressed  ;  as,  Parvo  pretio  ea  vendidisse.  Cic. 

REM.  4.  With  valeo  an  accusative  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Denarii 
y  quod  denos  ceris  valebant.  Varr. 


ABLATIVE    OF    TIME. 

§  253.  A  noun  denoting  the  time  at  or  within  which 
any  thing  is  said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  is  put  in  the  abla- 
tive without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Die  quinto  decessit,  He  died  on  the  fifth  day.  Nep.     Hoc  tempcre,  At 
tnia  time.  Cic.     Tcrtid  vigilia  eruptioncm  /ecenmi,  They  made  a  sally  at 
19 


218          SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  OF  PLACE.        $  254. 

the  third  watch.  Caes.  Ut  hieme  navlges,  That  you  should  sail  in  the 
winter.  Cic.  His  ipsis  diebus  hostem  persgqui.  Cic.  Proximo  triennio 
omnes  gentes  subegit.  Nep.  Vel  pace  vel  bello  clarum  Ji8ri  licet.  Sail. 
Ludis  mane  servum  quidam  eglrat,  On  the  day  of  the  games....  .Liv.  So 
Latinis,  gladiatorlbus,  comitiis,  denote  the  time  of  the  Latin  festivals,  the 
gladiatorial  shows,  &c. 

REMARK  1.  When  a  precise  time  is  marked  by  its  distance  before  or 
after  another  fixed  time,  it  may  be  expressed  by  ante  or  post  with  either 
the  accusative  or  the  ablative  ;  as,  Aliquot  ante  annos.  Suet.  Faucis  ante 
diebus.  Liv.  Paucos  post  dies.  Cic.  Multis  annis  post  Decemviros.  Id. 

Sometimes  quam  and  a  verb  are  added  to  post  and  ante  with  either  the 
accusative  or  the  ablative ;  as,  Ante  paucos  quam  perlret  menses.  Suet. 
Paucis  post  diebus  quam  Lucd  discesserat.  Cic.  Post  is  sometimes  omitted 
before  quam;  as,  Die  vigeslma  quam  credtus  erat.  Liv. 

Instead  ofpostquam,  ex  quo  or  quum,  or  a  relative  agreeing  with  the  pre- 
ceding ablative,  may  be  used  ;  as,  Octo  diebus,  quibus  has  liter  as  dabam, 
Eight  days  from  the  date  of  these  letters.  Cic.  Mors  Rosciit  quatriduo 
quo  is  occlsus  est,  Chrysogono  nuntiatur.  Id. 

REM.  2.  Precise  past  time  is  often  denoted  by  abhinc  with  the  accusa- 
tive or  ablative  ;  as,  Quastor  fuisti  abhinc  annos  quatuordecim.  Cic.  Co- 
miliis  jam  abhinc  triginta  diebus  habitis.  Id. 

REM.  3.  The  time  at  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes  expressed 
oy  the  neuter  accusative  id,  with  a  genitive  ;  as,  Venit  id  tempdris.  Cic. 
So  with  a  preposition  ;  Ad  id  diei.  Gell.  See  §  212,  REM.  3. 

REM.  4.  The  time  at  or  within  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes 
expressed  by  in  or  de,  with  the  ablative  ;  as,  In  his  diebus.  Plaut.  In  tali 
tempore.  Liv.  De  tertid  vigiM  ad  hostes  contendit.  Cees.  Surgunt  de 
nocte  latrones.  Hor.  So  with  sub  ;  Sub  ipsd  die.  Plin. 

The  time  within  which  any  thing  occurs,  is  also  sometimes  expressed 
by  intra  with  the  accusative ,  &s,Dimidiam  partem  natiomim  subegit  intra 
mginti  dies.  Plaut.  Intra  declmum  diem,  quam  Pheras  venerat ;  Within 
ten  days  after....  Liv. 

For  the  ablative  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of  space,  see  §  236. 


ABLATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

<§>  254.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  if  of  the  third  declension  or 
plural  number,  is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposi- 
tion; as, 

Alexander  Babyldne  est  mortuus,  Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  Cic. 
Thebis  nutrltus  an  Argis,  W  he  the*-  brought  up  at  Thebes  or  at  Argos. 
Hor.  Natus  Tibure  vet  Gabiis.  Id. 

REMARK  1 .  The  ablative  rure,  or  more  commonly  ruri,  is  used  to  de- 
note in  the  country ;  as,  Pater  Jilium  ruri  habit&re  jussit.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  The  preposition  in  is  sometimes  expressed  with  names  of 
towns ;  as,  In  Philippis  quidam  nuncidvit.  Suet. 

Names  of  towns  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  and  singular  num- 
ber, and  also  domus  and  humus ^  are  in  like  manner  sometimes  put  in  the 
ablative.  See  §  221. 

REM.  3.  Before  the  names  of  countries  and  of  all  other  places  in  which 
any  thing  is  said  to  be  or  to  be  done,  except  those  of  towns,  and  domus 


$255,256.  SYNTAX. — ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.  219 

and  rus,  the  preposition  in  is  commonly  used  ;  as,  Mo  hoc  jieri  in  Graecia. 
Plaut.  Lucus  in  urbe  fuit.  Virg. 

But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Mitites  statlvis  castris 
habebat.  Sail.  Magnis  in  Laudibus  fuit  totd  Graecift .  Nep.  Insidiceier^ 
marine  faetce  sunt.  Cic.  Navtta  puppe  sedens.  Ovid.  Ibam  forte  via 
sacrd.  Hor.  Urbe  totd.  Cic. 

For  names  of  countries  in  the  genitive,  see  §  221,  REM.  1. 

§  255.     After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion, 
the  name  of  a  town  whence  the  motion  proceeds,  is  put. 
in  the  ablative,  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Brundisio  profecti  sumus,  We  departed  from  Brundisium.  Cic.  Interim 
Roma  per  litteras  certior  Jit;  sc.  datas  or  missas.  Sail.  J.  82. 

REMARK  1.  The  ablatives  domo,  humo,  and  rure  or  ruriy  are 
used,  like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place  whence  motion 
proceeds ;  as, 

Domo  profectus,  Having  set  out  from  home.  Nep.  Surgit  humo  juvenis, 
The  youth  rises  from  the  ground.  Ovid.  Rure  hue  advenit.  Ter.  Si  ruri 
veniet.  Id.  Virgil  uses  domus  with  unde ;  as,  Qui  genus?  unde  domo? 
With  an  adjective,  rurej  and  not  ruri,  must  be  used. 

REM.  2.  With  names  of  towns,  and  domus,  and  humus,  ab  or  ex  is 
sometimes  used ;  as,  J2b  Alexandria  prufectus.  Cic.  Ex  dorno.  Id.  Ab 
humo.  Virg. 

REM.  3.  With  other  names  of  places  whence  motion  proceeds,  ab  or 
ex  is  commonly  expressed  ;  as,  Ex  Asia  transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Ex 
castris  proficiscuntur.  Caes. 

But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Liters  Macedonia  alldta. 
Liv.  Classis  Cypro  advenit.  Curt.  Cessissent  loco.  Liv.  Itc  eacris, 
properdte  sacris,  laurumque  c&pillisporitte.  Ovid.  Finlbus  omncs prosilv£re 
suis.  Virg.  Advolvunt  ingentes  montibus  ornos.  Id.  This  omission  of 
the  preposition  is  most  common  in  the  poets. 


ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES. 

*§>  2oo*  When  two  objects  are  compared  by  means  of  the  compar- 
ative degree,  a  conjunction,  as  quam,  atque,  &c.,  is  sometimes  expressed, 
and  sometimes  omitted. 

The  comparative  degree  is  followed  by  the  ablative, 
when  quam  is  omitted ;  as, 

Nildl  est  virtute  formosius,  Nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  virtue.  Cic. 
Quis  C.  Laelio  comior  1  Who  is  more  courteous  than  C.  Lselius  ?  Id. 

REMARK  1.  An  object  which  is  compared  with  the  subject 
of  a  proposition  by  means  of  the  comparative  degree,  is  usually 
put  in  the  ablative  without  quam  ;  as, 

Sidere  pulchrior  ille  est,  tu  Icvior  cortice.  Hor.  Quid  magis  est  durum 
saxo,  quid  mollius  unda  ?  Ovid.  Hoc  nemo  fuit  minus  ineptus.  Ter.  JO- 
bdnum,  M&cznas,  sive  Falernum  te  magis  appositis  delectat.  Hor. 

REM.  2.  An  object  compared  with  a  person  or  thing  addressed,  is  also 
put  in  the  ablative  without  quam ;  as,  Ofons  Bandusice  splendidior  vitro! 


220  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES.   §  256. 

REM.  3.  Qu&m  is  sometimes  used  when  one  of  the  objects  compared 
is  the  subject  of  a  proposition,  and  then  both  are  in  the  same  case,  either 
nominative  or  accusative  ;  as,  Oratio  quam  habitus  fuit  miser  abilior.  Cic. 
Affirmo  nullam  esse  Laudem  ampliortm  quam  earn.  Id. 

REM.  4.  If  neither  of  the  objects  compared  is  the  subject  of  a  sentence 
or  a  person  addressed,  quam  is  commonly  used,  and  the  object  which  fol- 
lows it  is  put  in  the  nominative  with  sum,  and  sometimes  in  an  oblique 
case  to  agree  with  the  other  object  ;  as,  Non  oplnor  negtiturum 
esse  te,  hoiritni  non  gratios'iori^uh.m  Cn.  Calidius  est,  argentum  reddidisse. 
tDic.  Ego  homlnem  callidiorem  vidi  nemtnem  quam  Phormionem.  Ter. 

The  following  example  illustrates  both  the  preceding  constructions  : — 
Ut  tibi  multd  majori,  quam  Africanus  fuit,  tamen  (me)  non  multd  minorem 
quam  Lailium  adjunctum  esse  patiare.  Cic. 

REM.  5.  But  when  the  former  object  of  comparison  is  in  the  accusa- 
tive, though  not  the  subject  of  the  verb,  the  latter,  if  a  relative  pronoun, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  quam  ;  as,  rfttalo,  quo  graviorem  inimlcum 
non  habuij  sororem  dedit ;  He  gave  his  sister  to  Attalus,  than  whom,  &c. 
Curt. 

This  construction  is  often  found  with  other  pronouns,  and  sometimes 
with  a  noun  j  as,  Hoc  nihil  gratius  facer  e  poles.  Cic.  Causam  enim  sus- 
cepisti  antiquiorem  memoria  tud.  Id.  Exegi  monumentum  sere  perennius. 
Hor.  Majora  viribus  audes.  Virg.  Nullam  sacrd  vite  prius  severis  arbo- 
r&m.  Hor.  Nullos  his  mallem  ludos  spectdsse.  Id.  §  178,3. 

REM.  6.  Plus,  minus,  and  amplius,  are  often  used  without 
quam,  and  yet  are  commonly  followed  by  the  same  case  as  if  it 
were  expressed ;  as, 

Hostium  plus  yuinque  millia  casi  eo  die,  More  than  five  thousand  of  the 
enemy  were  slam  that  day.  Liv.  Ferre  plus  dimidiati  mensis  cibaria. 
Cic.  JYVm  amplius  quingentos  cives  desiderdvit.  Cees.  Sedecim  non  am- 
plius  legionibus  defcnsum  imperium  est.  Liv.  Madefactum  iri  minus  tri- 
ginta  die  bus  Grcccifim  sanguine.  Cic.  The  ablatives  in  the  last  two  exam- 
ples do  not  depend  upon  the  comparatives,  but  may  be  referred  to  §  236. 

Before  the  dative  and  vocative,  qucim  must  be  expressed  after  these 
words. 

The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  these  as  with  other  comparatives ; 
as,  Dies  Lriginta  aut  plus  eo  in  navi  fui.  Ter.  Triennio  amplius.  Cic. 

RE».  7.  Qutim  is  in  like  manner  sometimes  omitted,  without  a  change 
of  case,  after  major,  minor,  and  some  other  comparatives ;  as,  Obsldes  ne 
minor es  octonnrn  denilm  annorurn  neu  majores  quiniim  quadragenum,....  of 
not  less  than  eighteen,  nor  more  than  forty-five  years  of  age.  Liv.  Ex 
urba.no  exercltu,  qui  minor  es  quinque  et  triginta  annis  erant,  in  naves  impos- 
Iti  sunt.  The  genitive  and  ablative,  in  these  and  similar  examples,are  to  be 
referred  to  §  211,  REM.  G.  Longius  ab  urbe  mille  passuum.  Liv.  Annos 
latus  magis  quadraginta.  Cic. 

REM.  8.  When  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  is  an  infinitive  or 
clause,  quam  is  always  expressed  ;  as,  Nihil  est  in  dicendo  majus  quam  «t 
raveat  oratori  auditor.  Cic. 

REM.  9.  Certain  nouns,  participles,  and  adjectives, — as  opmione,  spe} 
expcxtatione,Jide, — dicto,  soltto, — cr.quo,crediblli,a.iidj'usto, — are  used  in  the 
ablative  after  comparatives;  as,  Opinione  celeriiis  venturus  esse  dicttur... 
eooner  than  is  expected.  Cces.  Dicto  citiiis  tumlda  aquora  placat.  Virg. 
Injurias  graviiis  a:quo  habere.  Sail. 

These  ablatives  supply  the  place  of  a  clause  :    thus,  gramiis  aquo  is 


<§>  256.      SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    AFTER    COMPARATIVES.          221 

equivalent  to  gravius  quam  quod  (Rquum  est.  They  are  often  omitted ;  as, 
Liberius  vivcbat,  sc.  tequo.  Nep.  In  such  cases,  the  comparative  may  be 
translated  by  the  positive  degree,  with  too,  quite,  or  rather,  as  in  the  above 
example — "  He  lived  too  freely,"  or  "  rather  freely."  So  tristior,  sc.  solUo, 
rather  sad. 

REM.  10.  With  inferior,  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  instead  of  the 
ablative ;  as,  Vir  nulld  arte  cuiquam  inferior.  Sail.  The  ablative  is  also 
found,  but  usually  inferior  is  followed  by  quam. 

REM.  11.  Quam  pro  is  used  after  comparatives,  to  express  dispropor- 
tion ;  as,  Prcdium  atrocius  quam  pro  numero  pugnantium,  The  battle  was 
more  severe  than  was  to  be  expected,  considering  the  number  of  the  com- 
batants. Liv. 

REM.  12.  When  two  different  qualities  of  the  same  object  are  compar- 
ed, both  the  adjectives  which  express  them  are  put  in  the  positive  degree 
with  magis  quam,  or  in  the  comparative  connected  by  quam  ;  as,  Perfec- 
tam  artem  juris  civllis  habebltis,  magis  magnam  atque  uberem,  quam  diffi- 
cilem  atque  obscuram.  Cic.  Triumphus  clarior  quam  gratior,  A  triumph 
more  famous  than  acceptable.  Liv. 

REM.  13.  Magis  is  sometimes  expressed  with  a  comparative  ;  as,  Quis 
magis  qucat  csse  beatior  ?  Virg. 

So  also  the  prepositions  prce,  ante,  prceter,  and  supra,  are  sometimes  used 
with  a  comparative  ;  as,  Unus  prae  ceteris  fortior  exsurgit.  Apul.  Scelere 
ante  alios  immanior  omnes.  Virg.  They  also  occur  with  a  superlative ; 
as,  Ante  alios  carisslmus.  Nep.  Yet  these  prepositions  denote  comparison 
with  a  positive,  and  therefore  seem  redundant  in  such  examples.  See 
§127. 

REM.  14.  Alias  may  be  construed  like  comparatives,  and  is  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as,  JVeve  putcs  alium  sapiente 
bonoque  beatum.  Hor.  Alius  Lysippo.  Id. 

REM.  15.  Ac  and  atque  are  sometimes  used  after  the  comparative  de- 
gree, like  quam;  as,  Arctius  atque  hederd  procera  adstringltur  ilex.  Hor. 

REM.  16.  The  degree  of  difference  between  objects  com- 
pared is  expressed  by  the  ablative. 

(1.)  Absolute  difference  is  usually  denoted  by  nouns;  as,  Minor  uno 
mense,  Younger  by  one  month.  Hor.  Sesquipede  quam,  tu  longior.  Plaut. 
Hibernia  dimidio  minor  quam  Britannia.  Caes.  Dimidio  minoris  constdbit. 
Cic.  Quam  molestum.  est  uno  dig! to  plus  hab&re  /....to  exceed  by  a  finger, 
to  have  six  fingers.  Cic.  Superat  capite  et  cerviclbus  altis.  Virg. 

(2.)  Relative  difference  is  denoted  by  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity,  and 
pronouns,  in  the  singular  number.  Such  are  tanto,  quanta,  quo,  co,  hoc, 
multo,  parvo,  paulo,  niinio,  aliquanto,  altero  tanto  (twice  as  much) ;  as, 
Quanto  sumus  superior es,  tanto  nos  submissius  geramus ;  The  more  emi- 
nent we  are,  the  more  humbly  let  us  conduct  ourselves.  Cic.  Eo  gravior 
est  dolor,  quo  culpa  est  major.  Cic.  Quo  difficilius,  hoc  prceclarius.  Id. 
Iter  multo  facilius.  Caes.  Parvo  brevius.  Plin.  Eo  magis.  Cic.  Eo 
minus.  Id.  Via  altero  tanto  longior.  Nep.  Multo  id  maximum  fuit.  Liv. 
So,  Multo  prcestat.  Sail.  Post  paulo.  Id.  Multo  ante  lucis  adventum. 
Id.  Relative  difference  is  also  expressed  by  the  phrase  multis  parftbus  • 
as,  Numero  multis  partibus  esset  inferior.  Cses. 

NOTE.     The  accusatives  tantum,  quantum,  and  aliquantum,  are  some- 
times used  instead  of  the  corresponding  ablatives;  as,  Aliquantum  est  ad 
rem  avidior.  Ter.     So  the  adverb  longe,  ;  as,  Longb  nobilissimus.  Caes. 
19* 


SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE.  $  257. 


ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE. 

<§>  257.  A  noun  and  a  participle  are  put  in  the  abla- 
tive, called  absolute,  to  denote  the  time,  cause,  or  concom- 
itant of  an  action,  or  the  condition  on  which  it  depends ; 
as, 

PythagdraSj  Tarquinio  Superbo  regnante,  in  Italiam  venit;  Tarquinius 
Superbus  reigning,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy.  Cie.  Lupus,  stimulant© 
fame,  captat  omle  ;  Hunger  inciting,  the  wolf  seeks  the  fold.  Ovid.  Hat 
oratione  habita,  concilium  dimlsit.  Cffis.  Galli,  re  cognita,  obsidionem 
relinquunt.  Id.  Virtute  excepta,  nihil  amicitid  prcestalrilius  putetis.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  This  construction  is  an  abridged  form  of  expression, 
equivalent  to  a  dependent  clause  introduced  by  cwra,  or  some  other  con- 
junction. Thus,  for  Tarquinio  regnante,  the  expression  dum  Tarquinius 
regnabat  might  be  used ;  for  hue  oratione  habitd,  cum  hanc  orationem  ha- 
buisset,  or  cum  k&c  oratio  habita  esset, — concilium  dimlsit.  The  ablative 
absolute  may  always  be  resolved  into  a  proposition,  by  making  the  noun 
or  pronoun  the  subject,  and  the  participle  the  predicate. 

REM.  2.  This  construction  is  common  only  with  present  and  perfect 
participles.  Instances  of  its  use  with  participles  in  rus  and  dus  are  com- 
paratively rare  ;  as,  Caesare  venture,  Phosph&re,  redde  diem.  Mart.  Ir- 
rupturis  tarn  infestis  nationlbus.  Liv.  Quis  est  enim,  qui,  nullis  ojjicii 
praeceptis  tradendis,  philosophum  se  audeat  dicere.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  A  noun  is  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  only  when 
it  denotes  a  different  person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  leading 
clause. 

Yet  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  deviation  from  this  principle ;  a  substan- 
tive pronoun  being  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  though  refer- 
ring to  the  subject,  or  some  other  word  in  the  leading  clause  ;  as,  Se 
audiente,  scribit  Thucydides.  Cic.  Legio  ex  castris  Varronis,  adstante  ct 
inspectante  ipso,  signa  sustidit.  Caes.  Me  duce,  ad  hunc  votijinem,  me 
milite,  veni.  Ovid.  Lottos  fecit,  se  consule ,  fastos  Lucan. 

REM.  4.  The  ablative  absolute  serves  to  mark  the  time  of  an  action,  by 
reference  to  that  of  another  action.  If  the  present  participle  is  ased,  the 
time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  principal  verb,  is  the  same  as  that  of 
the  participle.  If  the  perfect  is  used,  it  denotes  an  action  prior  to  that 
expressed  by  the  principal  verb. 

Thus  in  the  preceding  examples — Pythagdras,  Tarquinio  Superbo  reg- 
nante, in  Italiam  venit ;  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy  during  the  reign  of 
Tarquinius  Superbus.  Galli,  re  cogmtd,  obsidionem  relinquunt;  The 
Gauls,  having  learned  the  fact,  abandon  the  siege. 

REM.  5.  The  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute  with  the  perfect 
passive  participle,  arises  frequently  from  the  want  of  a  participle  of  that 
tense  in  the  active  voice.  Thus,  for  "  Caesar,  having  sent  forward  the 
cavalry,  was  following  with  all  his  forces,"  we  find,  "  C&sar,  equitatu 
pra3misso,  subsequebdtur  omnibus  cop  Us." 

As  the  perfect  participle  in  Latin  may  be  used  for  both  the  perfect  active 
and  perfect  passive  participles  in  English,  its  meaning  can,  in  many  in- 
stances, be  determined  only  by  the  connection,  the  agent  with  a  or  ab  not 
being  expressed  after  this  participle,  as  it  usually  is  after  the  passive  voice 


§  258.  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    TENSES.  223 

Thus,  Casar,  his  dictis,  concilium  dimlsit,  might  be  rendered, "  Caesar, 
having  said  this,  or  this  having  been  said  (by  some  other  person),  dismissed 
the  assembly." 

As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs  correspond  to  perfect 
active  participles  in  English,  no  such  necessity  exists  for  the  use  of  the 
ablative  absolute  with  them ;  as,  Ccesar,  hsec  loctitus,  concilium  dimlsit. 

In  the  following  example,  both  constructions  are  united  :  Itaque agros 

Remorum  depopulati,  omnibus  vicis,  adificiisque  incensis.  Cses. 

REM.  6.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  and  some, 
also  of  active  deponents,  which  admit  of  both  an  active  and  passive  sense, 
are  used  in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Ortd  luce.  Caes.  Vel  extincto  vel 
elapso  ammo,  nullum  residere  sensum.  Cic.  Tam  multis  gloriam  ejus 
adeptis.  Plin.  Literas  ad  exercltus,  tanquam  adepto  principatu,  misit.  Tac. 

REM.  7.  As  the  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle,  two 
nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  which  might  be  the  subject 
and  predicate  of  a  dependent  clause,  are  put  in  the  ablative  ab- 
solute without  a  participle  ;  as, 

Quid,  adolescentulo  duce,  ejficere  possent ',  What  they  could  do,  a  youth 
(being)  their  leader.  Caes.  Me  suasore  atque  impulsore,  hoc  factum. 
Plaut.  Annibale  vivo.  Nep.  Invltd  Minerva.  Hor.  With  names  of  office, 
the  ablative  absolute  often  denotes  the  time  of  an  event ;  as,  Romam  venit 
Mario  consule,  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Marius.  Cic. 

REM.  8.  A  clause  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  noun ;  as,  JVbw- 
dum  comperto  quam  in  regionem  venisset  rex.  Liv.  Aualto  venisse  nun- 
cium.  Tac.  Vale  dicto.  Ovid.  Haud  cuiquam  dubio  quin  hostium  essent. 
Liv.  Juxta  periculoso  vera  an  ficta  promeret.  Tac. 

REM.  9.  The  noun  is,  in  some  instances,  wanting ;  as,  In  amnis  trans- 
gressu,  multum  certato,  Bardesanes  vicit.  Tac.  DJfficilis  mihi  ratio,  cm', 
errato,  nulla  venia,  rectk  facto,  exigua  laus  proporiitur.  Cic.  Sereno  per 
totum  diem.  Liv. ;  or  is  used  alone  ;  as,  Imperio  populi  Romani.  Caes. 

This  use  of  certato  and  errato  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  construc- 
tion of  the  passive  voice  of  neuter  verbs,  while  facto  and  sereno  may  be 
referred  to  some  general  word  understood. 

REM.  10.  This  ablative  is  sometimes  connected  to  the  preceding  clause 
by  a  conjunction  ;  as,  C&sar,  quanquam  obsidione  Massilice.  retardante, 
brevi  tamen  omnia  subegit.  Suet.  Decemviri  non  ante,  quam  perlatis  legi- 
bus,  deposituros  imperium  esse  aiebant.  Liv. 

REM.  11.  A  predicate  ablative  is  sometimes  added  to  passive  participles 
of  naming ,  choosing,  <&c.  §  210,  (3.) ;  as,  Hasdrubdle  imperatore  suffecto.  Liv. 


CONNECTION    OF   TENSES. 

§  258.  Tenses  may  be  divided,  in  regard  to  their  con- 
nection, into  two  classes.  Those  which  belong  to  the  same 
class  are  called  similar  ;  those  which  belong  to  different  classes 
are  called  dissimilar. 

Of  the  first  class  are  the  present,  the  perfect  definite,  and  the  futures, 
with  the  periphrastic  forms  in  sim  and  fuenm.  Of  the  second  class  are 
the  imperfect,  the  perfect  indefinite,  and  the  pluperfect,  with  the  periphrastic 
forms  in  essem  andfuissem. 

I.  Similar  tenses  only  can,  in  general,  be  made  to  depend  OD 


224  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    TENSES.  $  258. 

each  other,  by  means  of  those  connectives  which  are  followed 
by  the  subjunctive  mood. 

1.  In  clauses  thus  connected,  the  present,  perfect,  and  the 
periphrastic  forms  with  sim  andfuerim,  may  depend  on, 

(1.)  The  PRESENT;  as,  Non  sum  ita  hebeSj  ut  istuc  dicam.  Cic.  Quan- 
tum dolorem  accepgrim,  tu  existimdre  potes.  Id.  JYec  dubito  quin  reditus 
ejus  reipubtica  salutdris  futurus  sit.  Id. 

(2.)  The  PERFECT  DEFINITE  ;  as,  Satis  provlsum  est,  ut  ne  quid  agere 
possint.  Id.  Quis  muslcis,  quis  huic  studio  literdrum  se  dedidit,  quin  om~ 
nem  illdrum  artium  vim  comprehenderit.  Id.  Defectiones  solis  prcedictae 
aunt,  qua,  quanta,  quando  futurae  sint.  Id. 

(3.)  The  FUTURES  ;  as,  Sic  faciltimd,  quanta  oratorum  sit,  semperque 
fuerit  paucitas,  judicabit.  Id.  Ad  quos  dies  rediturus  sim,  scribam  ad  te. 
Id.  Si  scieris  aspldem  latere  uspiam,  et  velle  allquem  super  earn  assidere, 
cujus  mors  tibi  emolumentum  factura  sit,  improbt  feceris,  nisi  monueris,  ne 
assideat.  Id. 

2.  So  the  imperfect,  pluperfect,  and  periphrastic  forms  with 
essem  <mdfuissem,  may  depend  on, 

(1.)  The  IMPERFECT  ;  as,  Unum  illud  extimescebam,  ne  quid  turplter 
facerem,  vel  jam  effecissem.  Cic.  Non  enim  dubitabarn,  quin  eas  libenter 
lecturus  esses.  Id. 

(2.)  The  PERFECT  INDEFINITE  ;  as,  Veni  in  ejus  mllam  ut  libros  inde 
promerem.  Id.  Hcec  cum  essent  nuntiata,  Valeriis  classem  extemplo  ad 
ostium  fiumlnis  duxit.  Liv.  Ne  Clodius  quidem  de  insidiis  cogitavit, 
siqutdem  exiturus  ad  ccedem  e  villd  non  fuisset.  Cic. 

(3.)  The  PLUPERFECT  ;  as,  Pavor  ceperat  milites,  ne  mortiferum  esset 
rulnus.  Liv.  Ego  ex  ipso  audieram,  quam  a  te  liberaUter  esset  tractatus. 
Cic.  Non  satis  miki  constiterat,  cum  aliqudne  animi  mei  molestid,  an 
potius  libenter  te  Mhenis  visurus  essem.  Id.  The  perfect  sometimes  follows 
the  pluperfect  in  clauses  with  ut  containing  a  conclusion.  Cses.  B.  G.  1, 11. 

REMARK  1.  When  the  present  is  used  in  narration  for  the  perfect  in- 
definite, it  may,  like  the  latter,  be  followed  by  the  imperfect;  as,  Legdtos 
mittunt,  ut  pacem  impetrarent.  Cees. 

HEM.  2.  The  perfect  definite  is  often  followed  by  the  imperfect,  even 
when  a  present  action  or  state  is  spoken  of,  if  it  is  not  confined  to  the 
present ;  as,  Sunt  philosophi  et  fuerunt,  qui  ommno  nullam  habere  cense- 
rent  humandrum  rerum  procurationem  Deos.  Cic. 

REM.  3.  The  perfect  indefinite  is  not  regularly  followed  by  the  perfect 
subjunctive,  as  the  latter  is  not,  in  general,  used  in  reference  to  past  action 
indefinite.  See  §  260,  I.  REM.  1. 

These  tenses  are,  however,  sometimes  used  in  connection,  in  the  narra- 
tive of  a  past  event,  especially  in  Livy  and  Cornelius  Nepos ;  as,  In 
JEquis  vari&  bellatum  est,  adeo  ut  in  incerto  fuerit,  vicissent,  victlne  essent. 
Liv.  Factum  est,  ut  plus  quam  colleger  Miltiddes  valuerit.  Nep. 

The  imperfect  and  perfect  are  even  found  together  after  the  perfect  in- 
definite, when  one  action  is  represented  as  permanent  or  repeated,  and 
the  other  simply  as  a  fact ;  as,  Adeo  nihil  miser! ti  sunt,  ut  incur siones  fa- 
cerent  et  Veios  in  antmo  habuerint  oppugndre.  Liv. 

REM.  4.  As  present  infinitives  and  present  participles  depend  for  their 
time  upon  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected,  thev  are  followed  by 
suth  tenses  as  those  verbs  may  require  ;  as,  Apelles  pictores  quoque  eos 
peccare  dicebat,  qui  non  sentlrent,  quid  esset  satis.  Cic.  Ad  te,  scripsi,  te 
IcTiter  accusans  in  eo,  quod  de  me  cito  credidisses.  Id. 


§  259.  SYNTAX. INDICATIVE    MOOD.  225 

REM.  5.  The  perfect  infinitive  follows  the  general  rule,  and  takes 
after  it  a  tense  of  present  or  past  time,  according  as  it  is  used  in  a  definite 
or  indefinite  sense  j  as,  jQrbitrdmur  nos  ea  prsestitisse,  qua  ratio  et  doctrlna 
praescripse'rit.  Cic.  Est  quod  gaudeas  te  in  ista  loca  venisse,  ubi  aliquid 
sap  ere  viderere.  Id. 

But  it  may  sometimes  take  a  diiferent  tense,  according  to  REM.  2;  as, 
Ita  mild  videor  et  esse  Deos,  et  quotes  essent  satis  ostendisse.  Cic. 

II.  Dissimilar  tenses  may  be  made  dependent  on  each  other, 
in  order  to  express  actions  whose  time  is  different. 

Hence,  the  present  may  be  followed  by  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect,  to 
express  a  contingency  dependent  upon  some  condition  not  actually  exist- 
ing ;  as,  Nemo  dubitdre  debet,  quin  multos,  si  fieri  posset,  Ccesar  ab  inflris 
excitaret.  Cic.  So  the  perfect  indefinite  may  be  followed  by  the  present, 
to  express  the  present  result  of  a  past  event ;  as,  Tanti  sortitus  fuerunt,  ut 
ego  brevior  sim,  qudd  eos  usque  istinc  exaudltos  putem.  Cic. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

§  259.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  independent  and 
absolute  assertions.  It  is  often  employed,  also,  in  conditional 
and  dependent  clauses,  to  denote  that  which  is  supposed  or  ad- 
mitted ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic.  It  may  likewise  be  used 
in  interrogations  ;  as,  Quid  agis,  ecquid  commode  vales?  PI  in. 

REMARK  1.  The  several  tenses  have  already  been  defined,  and  their 
usual  significations  have  been  given  in  the  paradigms.  They  are,  how- 
ever, sometimes  otherwise  rendered,  one  tense  being  used  with  the  mean- 
ing of  another,  either  in  the  same  or  in  a  different  mood.  Thus, 

(1.)  The  present  is  sometimes  used  for  the  future  ;  as,  Quam  mox  nav- 
igo  Ephesum  ?  How  soon  do  I  sail  for  Ephesus  ?  Plaut. 

(2.)  The  perfect  for  the  pluperfect ;  as,  Sed  postquam  aspexi,  iWico  cog- 
novi,  But  after  I  (had)  looked  at  it,  I  recognized  it  immediately.  Ter. 

This  is  the  usual  construction  after  postquam,  ubi,  ut,  ut  primum, 
ut  semel,  quum  primum,  simul  ac,  and  simul  atque,  in  the  sense  of  when, 
as  soon  as,  in  direct  narration.  So  prius  quam,  Sail.  Cat.  51. 

(3.)  The  pluperfect  for  the  perfect ;  as,  Dixerat,  et  spissis  noctis  se  con- 
didit  umbris,  She  (had)  said,  and  hid  herself  in  the  thick  shades  of  night. 
Virg. ;  so  for  the  imperfect,  to  denote  what  had  been  and  still  was. 

(4.)  The  future  for  the  imperative  mood;  as,  Valebis,  Farewell.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  future  perfect  for  the  future  ;  as,  Jllio  loco  de  oratorum  ariimo 
tt  injuriis  vidfiro,  I  shall  see  (have  seen)....  Cic.  This  use  seems  to  result 
from  viewing  a  future  action  as  if  already  completed. 

REM.  2.  When  a  future  action  is  spoken  of  either  in  the  future,  or  in 
the  imperative,  or  the  subjunctive  used  imperatively,  and  another  future 
action  is  connected  with  it,  the  latter  is  expressed  by  the  future  tense,  if 
the  actions  relate  to  the  same  time,  but  by  the  future  perfect,  if  the  one 
must  be  completed  before  the  other  is  performed.  This  verb  in  English 
is  usually  put  in  the  present  tense ;  as,  Faciam  si  potero;  I  will  do  it,  if  I 
can,  i.  e.  if  I  shall  be  able.  So,  Ut  sementem  feceris,  ita  metes.  Cic. 

REM.  3.     In  expressions  denoting  the  propriety,  practicability  or  ad- 


226  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  <§>  260. 

vantage  of  an  action  not  performed,  the  indicative  is  used,  while  in 
English  the  potential,  in  such  cases,  is  more  common  ;  as,  Possum  persl- 
qui  multa  ollectamenta  rerum  rusticdrum,  sed  &c.,  I  might  speak  of  the 
numerous  pleasures  of  husbandry,  but  &c.  Cic.  ^Elquius  huic  Turnum 
fuerat  se  opponere  morti.  Virg.  This  construction  occurs  with  debeo, 
possum,  decet,  licet,  oportet,  necesse  est ;  aquum,  consentaneum,  longum, 
melius,  optimum,  par,  satis,  satius — est,  erat,  &.c. ;  and  in  the  periphrastic 
conjugation  with  participles  in  dus. 

REM.  4.  The  past  tenses  of  the  indicative  are  often  used  for  the  im- 
perfect or  pluperfect  subjunctive,  in  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  clause  ; 
as,  Si  non  alium  long&  jactdrct  odorem,  laurus  erat,.. ..it  would  have  been  a 
laurel.  Virg.  JVec  veni,  nisi  fata  locum  sedemque  dedissent.  Id.  Pans 
sublicius  iter  pane  hosftbus  dedit,  ni  unus  virfuisset  Horatius  Codes.  Liv. 
Si  mens  non  lava  fuisset,  impulSrat.  Virg.  So  the  present  ind.  for  the 
present  subj. ;  as,  Multa  me  dehortantur,  &c.  Sail.  J.  31.  Sometimes  also  in 
the  condition  ;  as,  At  fuerat  melius,  si  te  pucr  iste  tenebat.  Ovid.  See  §  261. 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

<§>  260.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind. 

It  takes  its  name  from  its  being  commonly  used  in  subjoined  or  depend- 
ent clauses.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  is  found  in  independent  clauses, 
or  at  least  in  such  as  have  no  obvious  dependence. 

I.  The  subjunctive  often  implies  the  existence  of  an  action 
or  state,  without  directly  asserting  it.     When  this  is  the  case, 
its  tenses  are  commonly  to  be  translated  in  the  same  manner  as 
the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative  ;  as, 

Cum  esset  Ccesar  in  Gallid,  When  Caesar  was  in  Gaul,  not  might  be. 
Cces.  Rogas  me  quid  tristis  ego  sim....why  1  am  sad.  Tac. 

REMARK  1.  In  this  sense,  its  tenses  have,  in  general,  the  same  limita- 
tion in  respect  to  time  as  those  of  the  indicative,  but  the  imperfect  is  com- 
monly used  rather  than  the  perfect,  to  denote  indefinite  past  action  ;  as, 
Quo  factum  est,  ut  brevi  tempore  illustraretur ;  By  which  it  happened  that, 
in  a  short  time,  he  became  famous.  Nep.  A 

REM.  2.  The  subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  depends  upon  the  particles 
and  other  words  to  which  it  is  subjoined,  and  its  meaning  must  be  care- 
fully distinguished  from  that  which  is  stated  in  the  following  rule. 

II.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  what  is  contingent  or 
hypothetical,  including  possibility,  power,  liberty,  will,  duty, 
arid  desire.     In  this  use,  it  does  not  imply  the  existence  of  the 
action  or  state  which  the  verb  expresses. 

REMARK  1.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  thus  used,  have  the  signifi- 
cations which  have  been  given  in  the  paradigms,  and  are,  in  general,  not 
limited,  in  regard  to  time,  like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative. 
Thus, 

(1.)  The  present,  in  this  sense,  may  refer  either  to  present  or  future 
time  ;  as,  Mediocrlbus  et  quis  ignoscas  vitiis  teneor  ;  1  am  subject  to  mode- 
rate faults,  and. such  as  you  may  excuse.  Hor.  Orat  a  Ccesare  ut  det  sibi 
veniam,  He  begs  of  Caesar  that  he  would  give  him  leave.  Caes. 

(2.)  The  imperfect  mav  relate  either  to  past,  present,  or  future  time ;  as, 


<§>  260.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  227 

Sifatafuissent  ut  caderem,  If  it  had  been  my  fate  that  I  should  fall.  Virg. 
Si  possem,  sanior  essem ;  If  I  could,  I  would  be  wiser.  Ovid.  Ceterog 
rapereni  et  prosternSrem,  The  rest  I  would  seize  and  prostrate.  Ter. 

(3.)  The  perfect  relates  either  to  past  or  future  time  ;  as,  Errs  rim  for- 
tasse,  Perhaps  I  may  have  erred.  Flin.  Videor  sperdre  posse,  si  te  viderim, 
eafacllb  (me)  transiturum....  if  I  can  see  you....  Cic. 

(4/)  The  pluperfect  relates  to  past  time,  expressing  a  contingency, 
whicn  is  usually  future  with  respect  to  some  past  time  mentioned  in  con- 
nection with  it ;  as,  Id  responderunt  se  facturos  esse,  cum  ille  vento  jiqui- 
lone  venisset  Lemnum....  when  he  should  have  come....  Nep. 

REM.  2.  The  imperfect  subjunctive,  in  Latin,  is  sometimes  employed, 
where,  in  English,  the  pluperfect  would  be  used ;  as,  Quod  si  quis  deus  di- 
ceret,  nunquam  putarem  me  in  academid  tanquam  philosophum  disputatu- 
rum,  If  any  god  had  said.. ..I  never  should  have  supposed....  Cic. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  pluperfect  in  Latin  is  sometimes  used,  where  the 
imperfect  is  commonly  employed  in  English ;  as,  Promlsit  se  scripturum, 
quumprimum  nuntium  accepisset....  as  soon  as  he  (should  have)  received 
the  news. 

REM.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  may  denote  a  supposition 
or  concession  ;  as,  Vendat  cedes  vir  bonus,  Suppose  an  honest  man  is  sell- 
ing a  house.  Cic.  Dixerit  Epicurus,  Grant  that  Epicurus  could  have  said.  Id. 

REM.  4.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  used  to 
soften  an  assertion  ;  as,  Nemo  istud  tibi  concedat,  or  concesserit ;  No  one 
would  grant  you  that.  Volo  and  its  compounds  are  often  so  used  in  the 
present ;  as,  Velim  obvias  mihi  literas  crebrd  mittas,  I  could  wish  that  you 
would  frequently  send,  &c.  Cic.  The  perfect,  used  in  this  sense,  has 
often  the  force  of  the  present ;  as,  Quis  enim  hoc  tibi  concessgrit  ?  Cic. 

REM.  5.  The  present  and  perfect  tenses  are  also  used  in  questions 
which  imply  a  doubt  respecting  the  probability  or  propriety  of  an  action  ; 
as,  Quis  dubitet  quin  in  virtute  divitice  sintf  Who  can  doubt  that  riches 
consist  in  virtue  ?  Cic.  Quisquam  numen  Junonis  adoret  prceterea?  Will 
any  one  henceforth  adore  the  divinity  of  Juno  ?  Virg.  Quidni,  inquit, 
meminerim?  Cic.  So,  also,  the  imperfect.  Ovid.  Her.  12, 146. 

REM.  6.  The  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a 
wish,  an  exhortation,  a  request,  a  command,  or  a  permission  ; 
as, 

JVe  sim  salvus,  May  I  perish  Cic.  In  media  arma  ruamus,  Let  us  rush.... 
Virg.  JYe  me  attingas,  sceleste ;  Do  not  touch  me....  Ter.  Faciat  quod 
lubet,  Let  him  do  what  he  pleases.  Id.  The  perfect  is  often  so  used,  and 
sometimes  the  pluperfect ;  as,  Ipse  viderit,  Let  him  see  to  it  himself.  Cic. 
Fuissetj  Be  it  so,  or  It  might  have  been  so.  Virg.  Viderint  sapientes. 
Cic. 

JVe  is  commonly  employed  as  a  negative,  rather  than  non,  in  this  use 
of  the  subjunctive. 

REM.  7.  In  the  regular  paradigms  of  the  verb,  no  future  subjunctive 
was  exhibited  either  in  the  active  or  passive  voice. 

(1.)  When  the  expression  of  futurity  is  contained  in  another  part  of  the 
sentence,  the  future  of  the  subjunctive  is  supplied  by  some  other  tense  of 
that  mood ;  as,  Tantum  moneo  hoc  tempus  si  amiseris,  te  esse  nullum  un- 
quam  magis  idoneum  reperturum ;  I  only  warn  you,  that,  if  you  should 
lose  this  opportunity,  you  will  never  find  one  more  convenient.  Cic. 


228         SYNTAX. PROTASIS  AND  APODOSIS. 

(2.)  If  r.o  other  future  is  contained  in  the  sentence,  the  place  of  the 
future  subjunctive  active  is  supplied  by  the  participle  in  rus,  with  sim  or 
fuerim,  essem  or  fuissem  ;  as,  Non  dubltat  quin  brevl  Troja  sit  peritura,  He 
does  not  doubt  that  Troy  would  soon  be  destroyed.  Cic.  See  Periphrastic 
Conjugations,  §  162,  14. 

(3.)  The  future  subjunctive  passive  is  supplied,  not  by  the  participle  in 
dus,  but  by  futurum  sit  or  esset,  with  ut  and  the  present  or  imperfect  of 
the  subjunctive  ;  as,  Non  dubUo  quin  futurum  sit,  ut  laudetur  ;  1  do  not 
doubt  that  he  will  be  praised. 

REM.  8.  The  imperfect,  when  relating  to  past  or  present 
time,  and  also  the  pluperfect,  both  when  they  stand  alone,  and 
in  conditional  clauses  with  st,  &c.,  as  also  after  utmam  and 
O!  si,  imply  the  non-existence  of  the  action  or  state  denoted 
by  the  verb;  the  present  and  perfect  do  not  decide  in  regard  to 
its  existence ;  as, 

Nollem  datum  esse,  I  could  wish  it  had  not  been  paid.  Ter.  Nolim 
datum  esse,  I  hope  it  has  not  been  paid.  Utinam  jam  adesset,  I  wish  he 
were  now  present.  Cic.  Utinam  ea  res  ei  voluptdti  sit,  I  hope  that  thing 
is  a  pleasure  to  him.  Id. 


PROTASIS    AND    APODOSIS. 

<§>  261.  In  a  sentence  containing  a  condition  and  a  con- 
clusion, the  former  is  called  the  protasis,  the  latter  the  apodosis. 

1.  In  the  protasis  of  conditional  clauses  with  si  and  its  com- 
pounds, the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  imply  the  non- 
existence  of  the  action  or  state  supposed.     In  the  apodosis  the 
same  tenses  denote  what  the  result  would  be,  or  would  have 
been,  had  the  supposition  in  the  protasis  been  a  valid  one ;  as, 

JVm  te  satis  incitdtum  esse  confiderem,  scriberem  plura ;  Did  1  not 
believe  that  you  had  been  sufficiently  incited,  I  would  write  more  (Cic.)  ; 
which  implies  that  he  does  believe,  and  therefore  will  not  write:  Ea  si  de 
me  uno  cogitasset,  nunquam  illius  lacrfimis  ac  precious  restitissem.  Id. 

2.  The   present  and   perfect   subjunctive    are  used    in   the 
protasis,  when  the  action  or  state  supposed  may,  or  may  not 
exist,  or  have  existed  ;  as, 

Omnia  brevia  tolernbilia  esse  dcbent,  etiamsi  maxima  sint, although 

they  may  be  very  great.  Cic.     Etsi  id  fugerit  Isocrates,  at  non  Thuc.ydl- 
des  ;  Although  Isocrates  may  have  avoided  that Id. 

REMARK  1.  The  tenses  of  the  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  the 
protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  with  si,  &c. ;  as,  Si  vales,  bene  est.  Cic. 
Si  quis  anted  mirabatur  quid  esset,  ex  hoc  tempdre  miretur  potius....  Id. 

REM.  2.  The  subjunctive  after  si,  &c.,  implies  a  greater  degree  of  con- 
tingency than  the  indicative.  When  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is 
required  to  denote  a  past  action,  the  indicative  must  be  used,  if  its  exist 


§  262.     SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  229 

ence  is  uncertain,  as  those  tenses  in  the  subjunctive  would  imply  its  non- 
existence. 

REM.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes  used,  both 
in  the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  the 
jmperfect  and  pluperfect ;  as,  Tuj  si  h\c  sis,  allter  sentias ;  If  you  were 
here,  you  would  think  otherwise.  Ter.  Quos,  ni  mea  cura  resistat,  jam 
fiammcB  tulerint.  Virg. 

REM.  4.  The  protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  is  frequently  not 
expressed,  but  implied ;  as,  Magno  mercentur  Atrlda,  i.  e.  si  possint. 
Virg. ;  or  is  contained  in  an  abl.  absolute.  Hor.  Od.  4,  8, 5. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

§  262.  A  clause  denoting  the  purpose,  object,  or 
result  of  a  preceding  proposition,  takes  the  subjunctive 
after  ut,  ne,  quo,  quin,  and  quominus ;  as, 

Ea  non,  ut  te  instituerem,  scripsi ;  I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to 
instruct  you.  Cic.  Irritant  ad  pugnandum,  quo  fiant  acriores ;  They 
stimulate  them  to  fight,  that  they  may  become  fiercer.  Varr. 

REMARK  1.  Ut,  denoting  a  result,  often  relates  to  sic,  it  a, 
adeo, tarn, tails, tantus, is ,ejusmddi,  &c.,  in  the  preceding  clause; 
as, 

Id  mihi  sic  erit  gratum,  ut  gratius  esse  nihil  possit ;  That  will  be  so 
agreeable  to  me,  that  nothing  can  be  more  so.  Cic.  Non  sum  ita  hebes, 
ut  istuc  dicam.  Id.  Neque  tarn  erdmus  amentes,  ut  explordta  nobis  essct 
victoria.  Id.  Tantum  indulsit  dolori,  ut  cum  pietas  vinceret.  Nep.  Ita 
and  tarn  are  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Epaminondas  fuit  disertits,  ut  nemo 
ei  par  esset.  Id. 

REM.  2.  Ut,  signifying  although,  takes  the  subjunctive ; 
as, 

Ut  desint  vires,  tamen  est  laudanda  voluntas ;  Though  strength  be 
wanting,  yet  the  will  is  to  be  praised.  Ovid.  ' 

REM.  3.  Ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  is  used  with  impersonal 
verhs  signifying  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows,  &/c.  ;  as, 

Qui  fit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  ?  How  does  it  happen  that  no  one  lives 
contented  ?  Hor.  Hide  contigit,  ut  patriam  ex  servitute  in  libertdtem  vin- 
dicaret.  Nep.  Sequltur  igltur,  ut  etiam  vitia  sint  parca.  Cic.  Reliquum 
est,  ut  egdinet  mihi  consulam.  Nep.  Restat  igltur,  ut  motus  astrorum  sit 
voivn.tarius.  Cic.  Extreinum  illud  est,  ut  te  orem  et  obsecrem.  Id. 

To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following  verbs  and  phrases  :— • 
jit,  fieri  non  potest,  accldit,  iucidit,  occurrit,  contingit,  evenit,  usu  venit, 
rarum  est,  scquitur,futurum  cst,  reliquum  est,  retmquilur,  restat,  superest, 
caput  est,  extrgmum  est,  opus  est,  est,  ccquum  est,  optimum  est,  csio,  be  it 
that.  But  see  §  269,  R.  2. 

Fgr  other  uses  of  ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  see  §  273. 

REM.  4.      Ut  is  often  omitted  before  the  subjunctive,  after 
verbs  denoting  willingness,  unwillingness,  or  permission ;  also 
after  verbs  of  asking,  advising,  reminding,  &c.,  and  the  im- 
peratives die  and  fac ;  as, 
20 


230  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.    §  263. 

Quid  msfaciam  1  What  do  you  wish  (that)  I  should  do  ?  Ter.  Insdnt 
feriant  sine  litora  fluctus.  Virg.  Tcntes  dissimuldre  rogat.  Ovid.  Id 
sinas  oro.  Id.  Se  suadere,  dixit,  Pharnabdzo  id  negotii  daret.  Nep. 
Accedat  oportet  actio  varia.  Cic.  Fac  cogltes.  Sail. 

Verbs  of  willingness,  &c.,  are  volo,  nolo,  malo,  permitto,  patior,  sino, 
licet,  veto,  &c. ;  those  of  asking,  &c.,  are  rogo,  oro,  moneo,  jubeo,  man- 
do,  peto,  precor,  censeo,  suadeo,  oportet,  necesseest,postulo,  hortor,  curo,&c. 

REM.  5.     Ne  (lest)  expresses  a  purpose  negatively  ;  as, 
Cur  a  ne  quid  ei  desit,  Take  care  that  nothing  be  wanting  to  him.  Cic. 
Ut  ne  are  frequently  used  for  ne  ;  as,  Opera  detur,  uijudicia  ne  funt.  Id. 

REM.  6.     Ne  is  often  omitted  after  cave  ;  as, 

Cave  putes,  Take  care  that  you  do  not  suppose.  Cic. 

REM.  7.  After  mctuo,  timco,  vereor,  and  other  expressions 
denoting  fear,  or  caution  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or  lest,  and 
ut  by  that  not ;  as, 

Milo  metuebat,  ne  a  servis  indicaretur,  Milo  feared  that  he  should  be  be- 
trayed by  his  servants.  Cic.  Pavor  erat,  ne  castra  hostis  aggrederetur. 
Liv.  Ilia  duo  vereor,  ut  tibi  possirn  concedere,  1  fear  that  I  cannot  grant.... 
Cic.  Me  miserum  !  ne  prona  cadas. 

REM.  8.  The  proposition  on  which  the  subjunctive  with  ut  and  ne  de- 
pends, is  sometimes  omitted  ;  as,  Ut  ita  dicam.  Cic.  JVe  singulos  nomlncm. 
Liv. 

REM.,  9.  Quo  (that,  in  order  that),  especially  with  a  compar- 
ative ;  non  quo,  or  non  quod  (not  that,  not  as  if),  followed  by 
sed;  and  quommus  (that  not),  after  clauses  denoting  hindrance, 
take  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Adjuta  me,  quo  id  fiat  facilius ;  Aid  me,  that  that  maybe  done  more 
easily .  Ter.  Non  quo  republlcd  sit  mild  quicquam  carms,  sed  desperdtis 
etiam  Hippocrates  vetat  adhibere  mediclnam.  Cic.  Non  quod  sola  ornent, 
sed  quod  excellant.  Id.  Neque  recusdvit,  quo  minus  legis  poKnam  sublret. 
Nep. 

~     REM.  10.      Quin,  after  negative  propositions  and  questions 
implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive.      Quin  is  used, 

1.  For  a  relative   with  non,   after  nemo,  nullus,  nihil....est,  rcperltur, 
invcnltur,&,c. ;  vix  est,  agrb  reperltur,  &c. ;  as,  Messanam  nemovenit,  quin 
viderit,  i.  e.  qui  non  viderit ;  -No  one  came  to  Messana  who  did  not  see. 
Cic.     Nego  ullam  picturarn  /z^',sse..,.quin  conquisierit,  i.  e.  quam  non9  &c. 
Id.     Nihil  est,  quin  malt,  narrando  possit  depravdri.  Ter. 

2.  For  ut  non,  after  non  dublto,  non  est  dubium,  Jacere  non  possum,  Jieri 
non  potest ;  ni'iil,  haud  multum,  kaud  procul,  or  minimum... ab est ;  nihil 
prcBtermitto,  non  recuso,  temper  are  mifd  non  possum,  vix,  cegre,  &c. ;  as, 

Facere  non  possum  qiiin  ad  te  mittam,  i.  e.  ut  non,  &c  Cic.  Ego  nihil 
prcEtermlsi,  quin  Pompeium  a  Casaris  conjunctione  avocarem.  Id.  Pror- 
sus  nihil  abest  quin  sim  miserrlmus.  Id.  Quis  igltur  dubltet  quin  in  vir~ 
tute  divitice  positse  sint  ?  Id.  Ego  vix  teneor  quin  accurram.  Id. 

$  263.  1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  particles  of  wish- 
ing, as  utinaw,  uti,  O!  and  O!  si;  as, 

Utlnam  miniis  vita  cupldi  fuissemu3 !  O  that  we  had  been  less  attached 


§  263.      SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.          231 

to  life  !  Cic.     0  si  sotita  quicquam  virtutis  adesset !  Virg.     The  tense  is 
determined  by  §  260,  II.  REM.  8. 

2.  Quamvis,  however ;  licet,  although ;  tanquam,  quasi,  ac 
si,  ut  si,  velut  si,  veluti,  sicuti,  and  ceu,  as  if;  modo,  dum,  and 
dummodo,  provided, — take  the  subjunctive;  as, 

Quamvis  ille  felix  sit,  However  happy  he  may  be.  Cic.  Verttas  licet 
nullum  defensdrem  obtineat,  Though  truth  should  obtain  no  defender.  Id. 
Me  omnibus  rebus,  juxta  ac  si  meus  frater  esset,  sustentdvit ;  He  supported 
me  in  every  thing,  just  as  though  he  were  my  brother.  Id.  Omnia honcsta 
negiigunt  dummodo  potentiam  consequantur ;  They  disregard  every  hon- 
orable principle,  provided  they  can  obtain  power.  Id.  Duin  mihi  aril- 
mum  reddas.  Hor. 

Quamvis  (although)  has  commonly  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Quamvis  non 
fueris  suasor,  approbator  certe  fuisti.  Cic.  Sometimes  also  the  indicative  ; 
as,  Fellcem  Nioben,  quarnvis  tot  funera  vidit.  Ovid. 

Quamquam  (although),  denoting  possibility,  takes  the  subjunctive;  as, 
Vi  regere  patriamquamquampossis.  Sail.  J.  3.  Hor.  Od.  4,  6,  7. 

3.  After  antequam  and  priusquam,  the  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect tenses  are  usually  in  the  subjunctive  ;  the  present  and  per- 
fect may  be  either  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive  ;  but  when 
one  thing  is  declared  to  be  necessary  or  proper  to  precede  an- 
other, the  subjunctive  is  used  ;  as, 

Ea  causa  ante  mortua  est,  quam  tu  natus  esses,  That  cause  was  dead  be- 
fore you  were  born.  Cic.  Avertit  equos,  priusquam  pabula  gustassent  Trojce, 
Xanthumque  bibissent.  Virg.  Priusquam  incipias,  consuito  opus  est ;  Be- 
fore you  begin,  there  is  need  of  counsel.  Sail.  ^ 

4.  Dum,  donee,  and  quoad,  signifying  until,  are  followed  by 
the  subjunctive,  if  they  refer  to  the  attainment  of  an  object;  as, 

Dum  hie  venlret,  locum  relinquere  noluit ;  He  was  unwilling  to  leave 
the  place  until  he  (Milo)  should  come.  Cic.  Nihil  puto  tibi  esse  utilius 
quam  operlri  quoad  scire  possis,  quid  tibi  agendum  sit.  Id. 

5.  Quum  or  cum,  when  it  signifies    a  relation  of  time, 
takes    the  indicative ;  when   it    denotes    a   connection  of 
thought,  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Cum  est  allatum  ad  nos,  gravlter  commotus  sum  ;  IVJien  it  was  reported 
to  us,  I  was  greatly  moved.  Cic.  Cum  tot  sustineas  et  tanta  negotia,  pec- 
cem,  si  morer  tua  tempdra,  Ccesar  ;  Since  you  are  burdened  with  so  many 
and  so  important  affairs,  I  should  do  wrong,  if  I  should  occupy  your  time, 
Ceesar.  Hor. 

REMARK  1.  Cum,  relating  to  time,  is  commonly  translated  when,  or 
after  ;  referring  to  a  train  of  thought,  it  signifies  since,  though  or  although, 
because  ;  but  may  often  be  translated  when;  as,  Quum  in  circutum  venisset, 
When  he  had  come  into  an  assembly. 

REM.  2.  In  narration,  cum  is  usually  joined  with  the  imper- 
fect and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  even  when  it  relates  to  time , 
as, 

Gracchus,  cum  rem  illam  in  religionem  populo  venisse  sentlret,  ad  send 
turn  retulit.  Cic.  Alexander,  cum  interemisset  Clitum,  viz  manus  a  se 
abstinuit.  Id. 


232        SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  Q.UI. 

In  most  instances  of  this  construction,  the  event  denoted  by  the  sub- 
junctive seems  to  relate  to  that  expressed  in  the  clause  on  which  the 
subjunctive  depends,  not  only  in  regard  to  time,  but  also  as,  in  some 
sense,  a  cause.  In  general,  when  the  attention  is  directed  chiefly  to  the 
time  at  which  an  action  occurred,  the  indicative  in  any  tense  may  be  used; 
when  to  the  action  itself,  the  subjunctive ;  as,  HCEC  cum  scribebam  jam  turn 
existimdbam  ad  te  orationem  esse  perldtam.  Cic.  Cum  sciret  Clodius  Her 
necessarium  Milord  esse  Lanuvium,  Roma  sublto  ipse  profectus  est.  Id. 

For  the  subjunctive  after  si  and  its  compounds,  see   §  261. 


SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    Q  UI. 

§  264.  1.  When  the  relative  qui  follows  tarn,  adeo, 
tantus,  talis, — or  is,  Hie,  iste,  or  hie,  in  the  sense  of  tails, 
— and  is  equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun,  it  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quis  est  tarn  Lynceus  qui  in  tantis  tenebris  nihil  offendat  ?  i.  e.  ut  in  tan- 
tis....;  Who  is  so  quick-sighted,  that  he  would  not  stumble  in  such  dark- 
ness. Cic.  Talem  te  esse  oportet,  qui  ab  impiorum  civium  societdte  sejun- 
gas.  Id.  At  eafuit  legatio  Octavii,  in  qua  periculi  suspicio  non  subesset, 
i.  e.  ut  in  ed.  Id.  JVcc  tamen  ego  sum  ille  f emeus,  qui  fratris  carisslmi 
mcerore  non  movear,  i.  e.  ut  ego  non  movear.  Id. 

Sometimes  the  demonstrative  word  is  only  implied ;  as, 

Res  parva  dictu,  sed  quse  studiis  in  magnum  certamen  excesserit,  i.  e. 
talis  ut....of  such  a  kind  that  It  issued  in  a  violent  contest.  Cic.  So  qui& 
sum,  for  num  talis  sum  ;  as,  Quis  sum,  cujus  aures  l&di  nefas  sit  ?  Sen. 

2.  When  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  quanquam  is,  etsi 
is,  or  dummodo  is,  it  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Laco,consilii  quamvis  egregii,  quod  non  ipse  afferret,  inimlcus  ;  Laco,an 
opponent  of  any  measure,  however  excellent,  provided  he  did  not  himself 
propose  it.  Tac.  Tu  aquam  a  pumice  postulas,  qui  ipsus  sitiat.  Plaut. 
Nihil  molestum  quod  non  desidgres,  i.  e.  dammbdo  id.  Cic. 

3.  Quod,  in  restrictive  clauses,  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 
Quod  sine  molestid  tud  fiat,  So  far  as  it  can  be  done  without  troubling 

you.  Cic.     Sestius  non  venlrat  quod  sciam....so  far  as  I  know.  Id. 

4.  The  relative,  after  the  comparative  followed  by  qudm, 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Major  sum,  quam  cui  possit  fortuna  nocere,  i.e.  quam  ut  mihi,  &c. ;  I 
am  too  great  for  fortune  to  be  able  to  injure  me.  Ovid.  Audlta  voce  prte- 
conis  maius  gaudium  fuit,  quam  quod  universum  homines  caperent ;  Upon 
the  herald's  voice  being  heard,  the  joy  was  too  great  for  the  people  to 
contain.  Liv. 

5.  A  relative  clause  expressing  a  purpose,  motive,  or 
result,  and  equivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  a  demon- 
strative pronoun,  takes  the  subjunctive  ;   as, 

Lacedtemonii  legatos  Atlitnas  miserunt,  qui  eum  absentem  accugarent 


<§>  264.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    Q,UI.  233 

The  Lacedaemonians  sent  ambassadors  to  Athens  to  accuse  him  in  his  ab- 
sence. Nep.  Ccesar  equitdtum  omnem  pr&mittit,  qui  videant,  quas  in  par- 
tes  iter  faciant.  Caes.  Jlssidub  repetimt,  quas  perdant,  Belldes  undas.  Ov. 
So  with  relative  adverbs;  as,  Lampsdcum  ei  (Themistocli)  rex  donarat, 
unde  vinum  sumeret,  i.  e.  ex  qud  or  ut  inde,  &c.  Nep. 

6.  A  relative  clause  after  certain  indefinite  general  ex- 
pressions, takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Fuerunt  ed  tempestdte,  qui  dicerent ;  There  were  some  at  that  time  who 
said.  Sail.  Erant,  quibus  appetentior  fames,  videretur ;  There  were  those  to 
whom  he  appeared  too  desirous  of  fame.  Tac.  Erunt,  qui  existimdri  velint. 
Cic.  Si  quis  erit,  qui  perpetuam  orationem  desidgret,  alter  d  actione  audiet. 
Id.  Venient  legiones,  qua?  neque  me  inultum,  neque  te  impunltum  patian- 
tur.  Tac.  So  after  est,  in  the  sense  of  "  there  is  reason  why  ; "  as,  Est 

?uod  gaudeas,  You  have  cause  to  rejoice.  Plaut.  Est  quod  visam  domum. 
d.  Si  est  quod  desit,  ne  bedtus  quidem  est.  Cic. 

The  expressions  included  in  the  rule  are  est,  sunt,  adest,  prcesto  sunt, 
existunt,  exoriuntur,  inveniuntur,  reperiuntur,  si  quis  est,  tcmpus  fuit,  tem~ 
pus  vcniet,  &c. 

The  same  construction  occurs  with  relative  particles  used  indefinitely ; 
as,  Est  unde  h&c  fiant,  There  are  resources  whence  this  may  be  done. 
Ter.  Est  ubi  id  isto  modo  valeat.  Cic. 

The  above  and  similar  expressions  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive  only 
when  they  are  indefinite.  Hence,  after  sunt  quidam,  sunt  nonnulli,  sunt 
multi,  &.G.,  when  referring  to  definite  persons,  the  relative  takes  the  in- 
dicative ;  as,  Sunt  orationes  qucedam,  quas  Menocrito  dabo.  Cic. 

The  indicative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  after  sunt  qui,  even 
wfyeri  taken  indefinitely,  especially  in  the  poets  ;  as,  Sunt,  quos  juvat.  Hor. 

7.  A  relative  clause  after  a  general  negative,  or  an  in- 
terrogative expression  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  sub- 
junctive ;  as, 

Nemo  est,  qui  hand  intelligat ;  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  understand. 
Cic.  Nulla  res  est,  quae  p erf  err e  possit  continuum  laborem  ;  There  is  nothing 
which  can  endure  perpetual  labor.  Quinct.  Nulla  pars  est  corporis,  quae 
non  sit  minor.  la.  Nihil  est,  quod  non  alicubi  esse  cogatur.  Id.  In  foro 
vix  declmus  quisque  est,  qui  ipsus  sese  noscat.  Plaut.  Quis  est,  qui  utilia 
ftigiat  ?  Who  is  tuyere  that  shuns  what  is  useful  ?  Cic.  An  est  quisquam, 
qui  hoc  ignoret  ?  Is  there  any  one  who  is  ignorant  of  this  ?  Id.  Numquid 
est  mali,  quod  non  dixeris  ?  Ter. 

General  negatives  are  nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  unus  non,  alius  non,  non 
quisquam,  vix  ullus,  nee  ullus,  &c.,  with  est ;  vix  with  an  ordinal  and 
quisque  ;  nego  esse  quenquam,  &c.  Interrogative  expressions  implying  a 
negative,  are  quis,  quantus,  utcr,  ecquis,  numquis,  an  quisquam,  an  allquis, 
quotus  quisque,  quotus,  &c.,  with  est ;  quot,  quam  multi,  &c.,  with  sunt. 
1.  The  same  construction  is  used  after  non  est,  nihil  est,  quid  est.  numquid 
est,  &c.,  followed  by  quod,  cur,  or  quare,  and  denoting  "  there  is  no  reason 
why,"  "  what  cause  ?  "  "  is  there  any  reason  ?  "  as,  Quod  timeas,  non  est ; 
There  is  no  reason  why  you  should  fear.  Ovid.  Nihil  est,  quod  adventum 
nostrum  pertimescas.  Cic.  Quid  est,  quod  de  ejus  civitdte  dubites  ?  Id. 
Quid  est,  cur  virtus  ipsa  per  se  non  efficiat  bedtos  ?  Id. 

So  after  non  habeo,  or  nihil  habeo ;  us,  Non  habeo,  quod  te  accusem.  Cic. 
Nihil  habeo,  quod  scribam.  Id. 

NOTE.    The  relative  clause  takes  the  subjunctive  after  the  expressions 
20* 


234  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    QUI.  <§>  264. 

included  in  this  and  the  last  rule,  only  when  it  expresses  what  is  intended 
to  be  affirmed  of  the  subject  of  the  antecedent  clause ;  as,  Nemo  eat,  qui 
nesciat ;  There  is  no  one  who  is  ignorant,  i.  e.  no  one  is  ignorant.  Cic. 
So  Sunt}  qui  hoccarpant;  There  are  some  who  blame  this,  i.  e.  some  blame 
this.  Veil. 

If  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  construed  as  a  part  of  the  logical  subject,  it 
does  not  require  the  subjunctive  ;  as,  Mhil  stabile  est}  quod  infidum  est; 
Nothing  which  is  faithless  is  firm.  Cic. 

8.  A  relative  clause  expressing  the  reason  of  what  goes 
before,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Peccavisse  mihi  videor,  qui  a  te  discessgrim ;  I  think  I  have  erred  in 
having  left  you.  Cic.  Inertiam  accusas  adolescentium,  qui  istam  artem 
non  ediscant ;  You  blame  the  idleness  of  the  young  men,  because  they  do 
not  learn  that  art  thoroughly.  Id.  0  fortunate  adolescens,  qui  tuce  virtutis 
Homerum  prceconem  inveneris  !  Id. 

Sometimes,  instead  of  qui  alone,  ut}  quippey  or  utpote — qui, 
is  used,  generally  with  the  subjunctive;  as, 

Convivia  cum  patre  non  iriibat,  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppldum  quidem  nisi 
rard  venisset.  Cic.  Neque  Antonius  procul  aberat,  utpote  qui  magno 
exercltu  sequeretur.  Sail.  Quippe  qui  omnia  vicerat,  Sail. 

9.  After  dignus,  indignus,  aptus,  and  idoneus,  a  relative 
clause  takes  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

ViiUtur^  qui  aliquando  imperet,  dignus  esse  ;  He  seems  to  be  worthy  at 
some  time  to  command.  Cic.  Pompeius  idoneus  non  est,  qui  impetret.  Id. 
Et  rem  idoneam,  de  qua  queeratur,  et  homines  dignos,  quibusctm  disseratur, 
putant.  Id. 

NOTE.  If  the  relative  clause  does  not  express  that  of  which  the  person 
or  thing  denoted  by  the  antecedent  is  worthy,  its  construction  is  not 
influenced  by  this  rule.  Thus,  Quis  servus  libertate  dignus  fuit,  cui 
nostra  salus  cara  non  esset  9  The  subjunctive  is  here  used  according  to 
No.  7  of  this  section. 

10.  A  relative  clause,  after  unus  and  solus,  restricting 
the  affirmation  to  a  particular  subject,  takes  the  subjunc- 
tive ;  as, 

Htzc  est  una  contentio,  quae  adhuc  permanserit ;  This  is  the  only  dispute 
which  has  remained  till  this  time.  Cic.  Voluptas  est  sola,  quae  nos  vocet 
ad  se,  et  alliceat  sudpte  naturd  ;  Pleasure  is  the  only  thing  that,  by  its  own 
nature,  invites  and  allures  us  to  itself.  Id. 

11.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a  dependent  clause,  it  often 
takes  the  subjunctive.     See  §  266. 

12.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in 
narration  after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  when  a  repeated 
action  is  spoken  of;  as, 

Semper  hablti  sunt  fortissimi,  qui  summam  imperil  potirentur ;  Those 
have  always  been  considered  the  bravest,  who  obtained  the  supreme  do- 
minion. Nep.  Ut  quisquc  mazlm&  laboraret  locus,  aut  ipse  occurrebatj  aut 
allquos  mj.ttebat.  So  after  si  quis  or  qui  ;  as,  Si  qui  rem  malitiosius  gessis- 
Bet.  dedecus  existimabant.  Cic. 


266.  SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES.    235 


SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

§  265.  Dependent  clauses,  containing  an  indirect 
question,  take  the  subjunctive. 

A  question  is  indirect  when  its  substance  is  stated  without  the  inter- 
rogative form ;  as, 

Qualis  sit  animus,  ipse  animus  nescit;  The  mind  itself  knows  not  what 
the  mind  is.  Cic.  Crediblle  non  est,  quantum  scribam ;  It  is  incredible  how 
much  J  write.  Id.  Quis  ego  sim,  me  rogUas?  Do  you  ask  me  who  I  am  ? 
Plaut.  Nee  quid  scribam,  habeo;  Nor  have  I  any  thing  to  write.  Id. 
Doce  me,  ubi  sint  dii;  Inform  me  where  the  gods  are.  Id.  Qukm  pridem 
sibi  hereditas  venisset,  docet.  Id.  Nunc  acclpe,  quare  desipiant  omnes.  Hor. 
Id  utrum  illi  sentiant,  an  vero  simulent,  tu  intelUges.  Cic.  Qu&ro,  num  tu 
senatui  causam  tuam  permittas.  Id.  Vides,  ut  altd  stet  nive  candidum 
Soracte.  Hor.  Nescit,  vitdne  fruatur,  an  sit  apud  manes.  Ovid. 

All  interrogatives  may  be  thus  used  in  indirect  questions  ;  as, 

Quantus,  qualis,  quot,  quotus,  quotuplex,  utcr  ;quis,  qui,  cujas;  ubi,quo, 
unde,  qua,  quorsum,  quamdiu,  quamdudum,  quamprldem,  quoties,  cur,  quare, 
quamobrem,  quemadmodum,  quomodo,  ut,  quam,  quantoplre,  an,  ne,  num, 
utrum,  anne,  annon. 

REMARK  1.  The  indicative  is  sometimes  used  in  such  constructions ; 
as,  Vide,  avaritia  quid  facit.  Ter.  So  Virg.  Eel.  5,  7. 

REM.  2.  In  double  questions,  the  first  may  be  introduced  byutrhm,  num, 
or  the  enclitic  ne;  and,  in  such  case,  the  second  is  usually  introduced  by 
an;  as,  Multum  interest,  utrum  laus  imminuatur,  an  salus  deseratur.  Cic. 
The  first  question  is  sometimes  without  any  interrogative  particle,  and  the 
second  is  then  introduced  by  an  or  ne, ;  as,  Nunc  habeam./iZiwra,  necne, 
incertum  est.  Ter. 

REM.  3.  Dublto  an,  haud  scio  an,  nescio  an,  though  implying  some 
doubt,  have  generally  a  sense  almost  affirmative  ;  as,  Dubito,  an  huncpri' 
mum  omnium  ponam  ;  I  am  inclined  to  place  him  first  of  all.  Nep. 

REM.  4.  Nescio  quis,  used  nearly  in  the  sense  ofaltquis,  does  not  influ- 
ence the  mood  of  the  following  verb  ;  as,  Lucus,  nescio  quo  casu,  nocturne 
tempos  mcensus  est.  Nep. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES. 

^  266.  1.  When  a  proposition  containing  either  an 
accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  a  verb  in  the  subjunc- 
tive, has  a  clause  connected  with  it,  as  an  essential  part, 
either  by  a  relative,  a  relative  adverb,  or  a  conjunction,  the 
verb  of  the  latter  clause  is  put  in  the  subjunctive  ;  as, 

Quid  enim  potest  esse  tam  perspicuum,  quam  esse  aliquod  numen,  quo 
hac  regantur  ?  For  what  can  be  so  clear  as  that  there  is  some  divinity  by 
whom  these  things  are  governed  ?  Cic.  Illud  sic  fere  definiri  solct,  deco- 
rum id  esse,  quod  consentaneum  sit  homlnis  excellentice.  Id.  Jludiam  quid 
sit,  quod  Epicurum  non  probes ;  I  shall  hear  why  it  is  that  you  do  not 
approve  of  Epicurus.  Id.  Jussit  ut,  qua  venissent,  naves  Eubczam  peter ^.nt. 
Liv. 


236    SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INTERMEDIATE    CLAUSES. 

A  clause,  thus  connected  to  a  preceding  dependent  proposition,  is  some- 
times called  an  intermediate  clause. 

To  this  rule  belongs  the  construction  of  the  oratio  obllqua,  or  indirect 
discourse,  that  is,  the  relating  the  words  or  sentiments  of  another,  not  in 
the  exact  form  in  which  they  were  expressed  or  conceived,  but  in  that  of 
narration.  Thus,  Caesar  said,  "  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered,"  is  direct, — 
Caesar  said,  that  he  came,  saw,  and  conquered,  is  indirect  discourse. 

2.  In  the  oratio  obllqua,  the  main  proposition  is  ex- 
pressed by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  and  depend- 
ent clauses  connected  with  it  by  relatives  and  particles, 
take  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  Cicero  and  Quinctilian,  in  quoting  the  language  of  Marcus  An- 
tonius,  make  use,  the  former  of  the  oratio  directa,  the  latter  of  the  oratio 
obllqua  / — Antonius  mquit, li  Ars  earum  rerum  est,  quaa  sciuntur ;  "  Antoni- 
us  says,  "  Art  belongs  to  those  things  which  are  known."  Cic.  Antonius 
inquit,  artem  edrum  rerum  esse,  quse  sciantur;  Antonius  says,  that  art 
belongs  to  those  things  which  are  known.  Quinct. 

So,  Socrates  dicere  solebat,  omnes,  in  co  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eloquentes; 
Socrates  was  accustomed  to  say,  that  all  are  sufficiently  eloquent  in  that 
which  they  understand.  Cic.  Cato  mirdri  se  aiebat,  qudd  non  rideret 
aruspex,  arusplcem  cum  vidisset.  Id.  Negat  jvs  esse,  qui  miles  non  sit, 
pugndre  cum  hoste.  Id.  Indignabimtur  ibi  esse  imperium,  ubi  non  esset 
libertas.  Liv.  Itaque  AthenienseSj  quod  honestum  non  esset,  id  ne  uftle  qui' 
dem  (esse)  putaverunt.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  When  the  subjunctive  would  be  necessary  in  the  oratio 
directa,  to  denote  liberty,  power,  &c.,  the  same  remains  in  the  oratio  obh- 
qua,  and  is  not  changed  into  the  infinitive  with  an  accusative  ;  as,  Ad,  HCEC 
Ariovistus  respondit,  quum  vellet,  congrederetur ;  To  this  Ariovistus  replied, 
that  he  might  meet  him  when  he  pleased.  Caes.  In  the  oratio  directa,  this 
would  be  congredidris.  The  imperative  in  the  oratio  directa  is,  in  the 
oratio  obllqua,  changed  into  the  subjunctive.  Id.  See  §  273,  3. 
;  HEM.  2.  A  writer  may  state  his  own  past  words  or  thoughts  in  oratio 
obllqua,  either  preserving  the  first  person,  or  adopting  the  third. 

REM.  3.  When  the  words  or  sentiments  of  a  third  person  are  stated  in 
oratio  obllqua,  sui  and  suus  are  commonly  used  in  references  made  to  him. 
See  §  208,  (1.) 

REM.  4.  The  tenses  to  be  used  in  changing  the  oratio  directa  into  the 
obllqua,  depend  on  the  tense  of  the  verb  which  introduces  the  quotation, 
according  to  the  rule,  §  258.  But  when  the  future  perfect  would  be  used 
in  the  direct,  the  pluperfect  is  necessary  in  the  oblique  form  ;  but  the  per- 
fect is  used  after  the  present,  perfect  definite,  or  future. 

.REM.  5.  When  the  connected  clause  contains  merely  a  descriptive 
circumstance,  or  expresses  what  is  independent  of  the  sentiment  of  the 
preceding  clause,  it  takes  the  indicative ;  as,  Imperdvit  Alexander  Lysippo, 
ut  edrum  equUvm,  qui  apud  Granlcum  ceciderant,/acere£  statuas ;  Alexan- 
der ordered  Lysippus  to  make  statues  of  those  horsemen  who  had  fallen 
at  the  Granicus.  Sometimes,  in  other  cases,  when  it  is  evident  from  the 
sense,  that  the  connected  clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  proposition,  the 
indicative  is  used,  to  avoid  giving  the  appearance  of  contingency  to  the 
sentence. 

3.  A  clause  connected  to  another  by  a  relative  or  causal 
conjunction,  takes  the  subjunctive,  (whatever  be  the  mood 


$  267,  268.      SYNTAX — IMPERATIVE  MOOD.  237 

of  the  preceding  verb,)  when  it  contains  not  the  senti- 
ment or  allegation  of  the  writer,  but  that  of  some  other 
person  alluded  to  ;  as, 

Socrates  accusdtus  estj  quod  corrumperet  juvcntutem  ;  Socrates  was  ac- 
cused, because  (as  was  alleged)  he  corrupted  the  youth.  Deum  invocd- 
bant,  cujus  ad  solenne  venissent ;  They  invoked  the  god,  to  whose  solem- 
nities they  had  come.  Liv.  Here  the  charge  of  corrupting  the  youth  is 
not  made  by  the  writer,  but  by  the  accusers  of  Socrates.  So,  in  the  second 
example,  the  worshippers  allege  that  they  have  come  to  attend  upon  the 
solemnities  of  the  god.  The  indicative,  in  such  cases,  would  render  the 
writer  responsible  for  the  truth  of  the  allegation. 

In  the  preceding  cases,  it  is  not  directly  said  that  the  sentiments  are 
those  of  another  than  the  writer.  In  Cicero,  however,  the  words  dico, 
puto,  arbitror,  and  the  like,  are  often  construed  in  a  similar  manner ;  as, 
Quum  enim,  Hannibalis  permissu,  exisset  de  castris,  rediit  paulo  post,  quod 

se  oblitum  nescio  quod  diceret, because  (as)  he  said,  he  had  forgotten 

something.  Cic. 

IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

•§>  26T.  The  imperative  mood  is  used,  in  the  second  person, 
to  express  a  command,  an  exhortation,  or  an  entreaty  ;  as, 

Nosce  te,  Know  thyself.  Cic.  JEquam  memento  servdre  mentem,  Re- 
member to  preserve  an  unruffled  mind.  Hor.  Hue  ades,  Come  hither. 
Virg.  Pasce  capellas,  et  potum  pastas  age,  et  inter  agendum  occursdre 
capro  caveto.  Id. 

The  plural  form  in  tote  is  rare  ;  as,  Fadtote.  Ovid.  Petitdte.  Id. 

The  third  person  expresses  only  a  command,  and  is  chiefly 
used  in  enacting  laws ;  as, 

Virglnes  vestdles  in  urbe  custodiunto  ignem  foci  publla  sempiternum. 
Cic. 

REMARK  1.  With  the  imperative,  not  is  expressed  by  ne, 
and  nor  by  neve ;  as, 

Ne  tanta  arilmis  assuescite  bella.  Virg.  Ne  crede  colori.  Id.  Hom/tnem 
mortuum  in  urbe  ne  sepellto,  neve  unto.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  instead  of 
the  imperative,  to  express  a  command  in  a  milder  form,  an  exhortation,  or 
an  entreaty.  See  §  260,  II.,  REM.  6.  Sometimes  also  the  future  indica- 
tive. See  §  259,  REM.  1,  (4.) 

REM.  3.  Sometimes,  for  the  simple  imperative,  far,  with  the  subjunc- 
tive is  used  ;  as,  Fac  erudias,  Instruct,  or  Take  care  to  instruct.  Cic.  So 
noli  with  the  infinitive,  and  cave  with  the  subjunctive,  with  or  without 
ne  ;  as,  Noli  putdre,  Do  not  suppose.  Cic.  Cave  exisfimes^  Do  not  think. 
Id. — Non  and  neque  occur,  though  rarely,  with  the  imperative. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

OF    THE    TENSES    OF    THE    INFINITIVE. 
<§>  268.     The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  respectively  an 
action  as  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to  the  time  ol 
the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected ;  as. 


238  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  268. 

Hoc  facere  possum,  I  am  able  to  do  this.  Cic.  Vidi  nostros  inimicos 
cupere  bellum,  I  saw  that  our  enemies  were  desiring  war.  Id.  Nee  gern- 
€re  agrid  cessabit  turtur  ab  ulmo.  Nor  shall  the  turtle  dove  cease  to  coo 
from  the  lofty  elm.  Virg. Victor  em  victce  succubuisse  queror,  I  com- 
plain that  the  victor  has  yielded  to  the  vanquished.  Ovid.  Se  a  senlbus 
audisse  dicebant,  They  said  that  they  had  heard  (it)  from  the  old  men.  Cic. 
Audiet  cives  acmsseferrumjuventus,  The  youth  will  hear  that  the  citizens 

have  whetted  the  sword.   Hor. Negat  sese  verbum  esse  facturum,  He 

declares  that  he  is  not  about  to  speak.  Cic.  Postquam  audierat  non  datum 
injilio  uxorem  suo,  After  he  had  heard  that  a  wife  would  not  be  given  to 
his  son.  Ter.  Semper  existimabitis  nihil  horum  rcos  visuros  fore,  You  will 
always  suppose  that  you  are  to  see  none  of  these  things.  Cic. 

REMARK  1.  The  present  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  a  com- 
pleted action.  This  is  the  usual  construction  with  memlni ;  but  the 
expression  denotes  rather  a  recollection  of  the  progress  than  of  the  com- 
pletion of  the  action ;  as,  Hoc  me  memlni  dicere,  I  remember  my  saying 
this.  Cic.  Teucrum  memlni  Sidona  venire,  I  remember  Teucer's  coming 
to  Sidon.  Virg.  So  with  memorid  teneo.  Cic.  Phil.  8,  JO. 

So,  also,  with  recorder  ; — Recorder  longb  omnibus  unum  anteferre  De- 
mosthenem.  Cic.  So  M.  Maximum  acceplmus  facile  celare.  Id. 

When  the  action  is  spoken  of  simply  as  a  fact,  the  perfect  infinitive  is 
used  with  memlni  ;  as,  Meministi  me  ita  distribuisse  causam.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  To  express  the  result  of  an  action,  the  perfect  infinitive  is 
sometimes  used  instead  of  the  present,  especially  after  satis  habeo,  &c.,  or 
volo ;  as,  quum  illam  nemo  velit  attigisse.  Plin.  The  poets  use  the  infini- 
tive perfect  when  we  should  expect  a  present ;  as,  Tendentes  Pelion  im-poc- 
uisse  Olympo.  Hor. 

REM.  3.  The  present  is  also  sometimes  used  for  the  future,  especially 
when  the  verb  has  no  future ;  as,  Deslne  fata  deum  flecti  sperdre,  Cease 
to  hope  that  the  fates  of  the  gods  will  be  changed.  Virg.  Progeniem 
Trojdno  a  sanguine  duci  audierat.  Id.  Cras  mihi  argentum  dare  dixit,  i.e. 
se  daturum  esse.  Ter.  Cato  affirmat  se  vivo  ilium  non  triumphare.  Cic. 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  future  infinitive,  in  both  voice s,futurum  esse  or 
fore,  followed  by  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  often  used ;  the  present  and 
imperfect  subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  denoting  an  unfinished,  the  perfect 
and  pluperfect  a  finished,  future  action ;  as,  Nunquam  putavi  fore,  ut  sup- 
flex  ad,  te  venlrem  ;  I  never  supposed  (that  it  would  happen)  that  I  should 
come  a  suppliant  to  you.  Cic.  Susplcor  fore,  ut  infringatur  homlnum 
improbltas.  Id.  Credebam  fore,  ut  epistolam  scripsisses. 

This  construction  is  necessarily  used,  when  the  verb  has  either  no  future 
active  participle,  or  no  supine  ;  as,  in  such  case,  the  regular  future  infini- 
tive cannot  be  formed  ;  as,  Spero  fore  ut  sapias. 

The  perfect  participle  with  fore  is  also  used  to  denote  a  future  action  in 
the  passive  voice ;  as,  Quod  videret  nomine  pads  helium  involutum  fere 
Cic.  Quos  spero  brevi  tempore  tecum  copulates  fore.  Id. 

REM.  5.  The  periphrastic  infinitive  formed  by  the  future  active  parti- 
ciple with  fuisse,  denotes  a  future  action  contingent  upon  a  condition 
which  was  not  fulfilled ;  and,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence, 
corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  ;  as,  Jin  censes  me  tantos  labor es 
suscepturum  fuisse,  si  iisdcm  jinlbus  gloriam  meam  quibus  vitam  essem 
terminal ftrus  ?  Do  you  think  thatl  should  have  undertaken  so  great  labors 
if,  &c.  Cic.  Utperspicuum  sit  omnibus,  nisi  tanta  acerbltas  injuries  fuisset, 
nunquam  illos  in  eum  locum  progressuros  fuisse,.... that  they  never  would 
have  come  into  that  place.  Id. 

Futurum  fuisse,  also,  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  used  in  this  sense  * 


<§>  269,  270.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  239 

a&,Nisinuncii  essent  alldti,  existimdbant  plen que  futurum  fuisse,  ut  oppl- 

dum  caperetur, that  the  town  would  have  been  taken.  Caes.    This  form 

is  necessary  in  the  passive  voice. 

REM.  6.  The  perfect  infinitive,  like  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative, 
sometimes  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  in  the  apodosis  of  a 
conditional  clause  ;  as,  (Dixit)  sibi  vitam  filicc  sud  cariorem  fuisse,  si  libercR 
ac  pudlccn  vivere  licltum  fuisset ;  (He  said)  that  the  life  of  his  daughter 
had  been  dearer  to  him  than  his  own,  if  it  had  been  permitted....  Liv. 

This  use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is  necessary  when  the  verb  has  no 
future  participle ;  as,  Si  tenuisset  StesichQrus  modum,  videtur  proxlmus 
(Bmulari  Homerum  potuisse;  He  seems  to  have  been  able,  i.  e.  it  seems 
that  he  would  have  been  able,  to  rival  Homer,  if,  &c.  Quint. 

<§>  ~G5J.  The  infinitive  mood,  in  Latin,  is  often  used,  not  indefinite- 
ly, but  with  a  subject  of  its  own  in  the  accusative  case.  See  §  239. 

The  infinitive  passive  of  a  neuter  verb,  like  the  third  person  singular  of 
that  voice,  is  sometimes  used  without  a  subject;  as,  Vides  toto  properari 

litore.  You  see  that  haste  is  made V-irg.  See  §  §  209,  REM.  3,  (2),  and 

239,  REM.  3. 

The  present  infinitive  has  sometimes,  in  narration,  a  subject  in  the 
nominative.  See  §  209,  REM.  5. 

THE    INFINITIVE    AS    THE    SUBJECT    OF    A    VERB. 

The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject-accusa- 
tive, may  be  the  subject  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Ad  rempubticam  pertlnet  me  conservari,  It  concerns  the  state  that  I 
should  be  preserved.  Cic.  Nunquam  est  utlle  peccare,  To  do  wrong  is 
never  useful.  Id.  JEquum  est.  pcccatis  veniam  poscentem  reddere  rursus. 
Hor.  See  §  201,  IV. 

REMARK  1.  In  such  constructions,  when  no  subject  is  ex- 
pressed before  the  infinitive,  an  indefinite  word  for  person  or 
thing,  or  a  reflexive  pronoun,  is  commonly  implied. 

Thus,  in  the  last  two  examples,  as  the  propositions  are  true  in  their 
widest  application  to  moral  beings,  allquem  may  be  understood  before 
peccare  and  reddere. 

REM.  2.  The  infinitive  is  often  the  subject  of  a  proposition  when  the 
substantive  verb  with  an  adjective  forms  the  predicate,  and  also  when  the 
verb  in  the  sentence  is  impersonal,  or  is  used  impersonally,  either  in 
the  active  or  passive  voice  ;  as,  Cui  verba  dare  difficile  est.  Ter.  Menda- 
cem  mcmorein  esse  oportet.  Quint.  Neque  est  te  fallere  cuiquam,  sc.  pote. 
Virg.  Non  enim  me  hoc  jam  dicgre  jntdebit.  Cic.  See  §  209,  REM.  3,  (5.) 

REM.  3.  The  infinitive  may  itself  be  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  j  as, 
Audio  non  licere  cuiquam  in  nave  capillos  deponere.  Ter. 

THE     INFINITIVE    AS    THE    OBJECT    OF    A    VERB. 

<§>  270.  The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  sub- 
ject accusative,  may  be  the  object  of  a  verb  ;  as, 

HCEC  vitare  cuplmus,  We  desire  to  avoid  this.  Cic.  Pottas  omnino  non 
conor  attingere,  I  do  not  attempt  to  read  the  poets  at  all.  Id.  Scntcnti&m 
valere  cupi&runt,  They  desired  that  the  opinion  should  prevail.  Id.  Spero 
tc  valere,  I  hope  that  you  are  well.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  The  infinitive  alone  may  also  depend  upon  an 
adjective,  and  sometimes  upon  a  noun ;  as, 


240  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  271. 

Dignus  amari,  Worthy  to  be  loved.  Virg.  Audax  omnia  perpSti,  Res- 
olute to  endure  every  thing.  Hor.  Sellers  ornare,  Skilful  to  adorn.  Ovid. 
Segnes  solvere  nodum.  Hor.  Indocilis  pauperiem  pati.  Id.  Lenis  reclu- 
dere.  Id.  See  §  213,  REM.  4,  (1.)  Tempus  est  hujus  libri  facere  finem, 
It  is  time  to  finish  this  book.  Nep.  Iniit  consilia  reges  toll^re,  He  devised 
a  plan  to  destroy  the  kings.  Id. 

REM.  2.  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  sometimes  stands  uncon- 
nected, especially  in  vehement  interrogations  or  exclamations,  where 
crediblle  est  ?  or  verumne  est  ?  may  be  supplied  ;  as,  Mene  incepto  desistfire 
victam  ?  That  I,  vanquished,  should  desist  from  my  undertaking  ?  Virg. 
Me  miserum!  te  in  tantas  cerumnas  propter  me  incidisse  !  Cic. 

So,  in  the  oratio  obliqua,  the  words  signifying  said,  saying,  &c.,  are 
often  omitted,  or  implied  in  a  preceding  verb  or  phrase  ;  as,  Idfacilb  efflci 
posse,  sc.  dixit.  Nep.  Quern  signum  daturum  fugicntlbus  f  Curt. 

REM.  3.  The  infinitive  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied  ;  and  esse  and  fuisse 
with  a  predicate  adjective,  and  also  in  the  compound  forms  of  the  infinitive, 
are  commonly  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  knowing, 
and  perceiving  ;  as,  Voscognovi  fortes.  Sail.  Quern  pulsum  memoravi.  Tac 

THE    INFINITIVE    WITHOUT    A    SUBJECT- 
ACCUSATIVE. 

$  2*71.  The  infinitive,  without  a  subject-accusative,  is  used  after 
verbs  denoting  desire,  ability,  intention  or  endeavor ;  after  verbs  signifying 
to  begin,  continue,  cease,  or  abstain,  to  dare,  fear  or  hesitate,  to  be  wont;  and 
after  the  passive  of  verbs  of  saying,  believing,  reckoning,  &c. ;  as, 

Cupio,  opto,  volo,  nolo,  malo,  studeo  ;  possum,  queo,  ticqueo,  valco,  scio, 
nescio ;  euro,  coglto,  decerno,  statuo,  constituo,  instituo,  conjuro,  paro ; 
conor,  nitor,  tendo,  contendo,  tento,  maturo,  aggrcdior,  persev&ro  ; — co2pit 
incipio,  per  go,  desino,  desisto,  intermitto,  pr<ztermitto,  parco,  recuso  ;  soleo, 
assaesco,  consuesco,  insuesco  ;  audeo,  vereor,  metuo,  reformido,  timeo,  pa- 
veo,  dublto;  so  disco,  debeo  ; — audior,  crcdor,  existlmor,feror,  negor,  nuntior, 
perhibeor,  putor,  trador,  jubeor,  videor,  and  cogor. 

The  poets,  in  imitation  of  the  Greeks,  use  the  infinitive  after  fuge,aufer, 
cave,  parce,  memento  ;  horreo,  refugio,  obliviscor,  qucero,  urgeo,  laboro,  amo, 
gaudeo,  furo,  calleo,  sumo,  mitto,  remitto,  patior,  juro,  pugno,  7iatus,  and 
some  other  verbs,  especially  to  denote  a  wish  or  purpose.  In  this  con 
struction,  the  poets  are  sometimes  imitated  by  the  later  prose  writers ;  as, 
Introiit  videre.  Ter.  Non  te  frangere  persequor.  Hor.  Non  populare 
penates  verdmus.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  Many  of  the  verbs  above  enumerated,  instead  of  the  infin- 
itive, may  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  with  a  conjunction ;  and  with 
some  of  them,  this  is  the  regular  construction;  as,  Sententiam  ne  diceret, 
rccusdvit.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  The  passives  in  the  above  list  may  either  be  used  personally, 
with  the  infinitive  alone,  or  impersonally,  followed  by  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive.  The  former  construction  is  more  common,  especially  with 
videor.  Thus  we  may  say,  Mater  Pausanice  co  iempore  vixisse  dicitur,  or 
Dicltur  co  temporc  matron  Pausanice  vixisse  ;  The  mother  of  Pausanias  is 

said  to  have  been  living or,  It  is  said  that  the  mother  of  Pausanias  was 

living Nep. 

REM.  3.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  is  used  after  a  verb,  only  when 
it  denotes  an  action  or  state  of  the  subject  of  that  verb. 

Sometimes,  when  the  subject  remains  the  same,  the  infinitive  takes  a 
reflexive  pronoun  as  its  subject,  especially  after  cupio,  volo,  nolo,  malo, 
conor,  and  studeo ;  as,  Cupio  me  esse  clementem.  Cic.  Oinnis  homines^ 
qui  sese  student  prtestare  ccteris  atdmalibus.  Sail. 


§  272,  273.          SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  241 

THE    INFINITIVE  WITH  A  SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE.. 

<§>  272.  The  infinitive  with  a  subject-accusative  follows 
verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  knowing,  perceiving,  and  the  like ;  as, 

Videbat,  id  non  posse  fieri  ;  He  saw  that  that  could  not  be  done.  Nep. 
Credunt  se  negllgi,  They  believe  themselves  to  be  neglected.  Ter.  Me  in 
cjus  potestate  dixi  fore.  Id.  Affirmant  miHtum  jacere  artlmos.  Liv.  Scepe 
venit  ad  aures  meas,  te  istud  nimis  crebrd  dicere.  Cic.  Earn  pugnam  ad 
Perusiam  pvgnatam  (esse),  quidam  auctores  sunt.  Liv. 

NOTE.  This  rule  includes  alj,  such  verbs  and  phrases  as  denote  the 
exercise  of  the  external  senses  and  intellectual  faculties,  x>r  the  communi- 
cation of  thought  to  others ;  but  with  most  of  these  a  different  construc- 
tion often  occurs.  See  §  273. 

REMARK  1.  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  subject  and  the 
object  of  the  verb  being  both  in  the  accusative,  the  passive  infinitive  is 
substituted  for  the  active,  by  which  means  the  subject  is  put  in  the  abla- 
tive, or  in  the  accusative  with  per  ;  as,  JVe  fando  quidem  audltum  est,  cro- 
codllum  violdtum  esse  ab  JSgyptio ;  instead  of  ^Cgyptium  crocodllum  vio- 
Idsse.  Cic. 

HEM.  2.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  &c.,  the  conjunction  that  is 
omitted  in  translating  from  English  into  Latin,  and  the  subject  following 
that  is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  verb  in  the  infinitive. 

REM.  3.  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  is  sometimes 
translated  by  a  similar  form  in  English,  but  usually  either  by 
the  indicative  or  potential,  according  to  its  connection;  as, 

Te  tad  virtute  frui  cuplmus ;  We  wish  you  to  enjoy,  or  that  you  may 
enjoy....  Cic.  Miror  te  ad  menihil  scribere....  that  you  do  not  write....  Id. 
JZudierat  non  datum  iri  filio  uxorem  suo....  that  she  would  not  be  given.... 
Ter. 

REM.  4.  A  present  infinitive  corresponds  to  the  imperfect  indicative, 
when  with  an  accusative  it  follows  a  past  tense  ;  as,  Dixit  Ccesarem  facere, 
He  said  that  Ccesar  was  doing.  Cses.  In  like  manner  the  perfect  infini- 
tive with  an  accusative  after  a  past  tense  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  in- 
dicative ;  as,  Dixit  Ccesdrem  fecisse,  He  said  that  Ceesar  had  done.  See 
§  268. 

REM.  5.  The  present  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  sense,  is  often 
equivalent  to  the  present  participle ;  as, 

Surgere  videt  lunam,  He  sees  the  moon  (to  rise)  rising.  Virg.  Arma, 
rutilare  vident.  Id.  Fidebis  collucere  faces.  Id.  JVcc  Zephyros  audis 
spirare  ?  Do  you  not  hear  the  zephyrs  blowing  ?  Id.  Scepe  hoc  majores 
natu  dice're  audivi.  Cic.  The  two  constructions  are  sometimes  united ; 
as,  Medium  video  discedSre  cfelum,  palantes^we  polo  Stellas.  Virg. 

INFINITIVE    AND    SUBJUNCTIVE    CLAUSES. 

<§>  273.  When  the  particle  that,  in  English,  introduces  a 
clause  denoting  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
subjunctive  in  Latin,  and  is  to  be  expressed  by  ut,  &c.  (see 
§262)  ;  but  otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign  of  the  accusative 
with  the  infinitive. 
21 


242  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  $273. 

1.  (a.)     Verbs  of  endeavoring  and  resolving  take  after  them  either  the 
infinitive  or  the   subjunctive,  when  the  subject  remains  the  same  ;   but 
when  the  subject  is  changed,  they  take  the  subjunctive  only. 

Such  are  statuo,  constituo,  decerno,  tento,  laboro,  paro,  medltor,  euro, 
nitor,  contendo,  consilium  capio,  ariimum  or  in  animum  induco.  After 
operam  do,  id,  hoc  or  illud  ago,  nihil  antiquius  habeo  quam,  and  video  for 
euro,  the  subjunctive  is  almost  exclusively  used. 

(b.)  Verbs  of  effecting  are  construed  with  ut  and  the  subjunctive. 

Such  are  facio,  efficio,  perficio,  evinco,  pervinco,  impetro,  assequor,  con- 
sequor,  committo,  &c. 

Facio  with  ut  is  also  used  as  a  periphrasis  for  the  indicative  ;  as,  Invl- 
tus  quidem  feci,  ut  L.  Flaminium  e  senatu  ejicerem,  for  invltus  ejeci.  Cic. 
— Fac,  "suppose"  or  "granting,"  and  efficere,  " to  prove,"  take  the  in- 
finitive ;  but  the  passive  efficitur,  "it  follows,"  takes  also  the  subjunctive. 
— Facere,  "to  introduce"  or  "represent,"  is  joined  with  a  present  or 
perfect  participle  ;  as,  Lcelium  et  Scijnonem  facimus  admirantes.  Cic.  In 
the  passive  the  infinitive  also  is  found. 

2.  Verbs  signifying  to  request,  to  demand,  to  admonish,  to  advise,  to  en- 
courage, to  command,  and  the  Kike,  to  express  the  purpose  of  the  request, 
&c.,  take  after  them  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  ne. 

Such  are  Togo,  oro,  precor,  peto,  moneo,  admoneo,  commoneo,  hortor, 
exhortor,  suadeo,  persuadeo,  instituo,  impello,  mando,  prcEscrlbo,  edlco, 
decerno,  legem  do,  censeo,  perpello,  exclto,  inclto,  irnpero,  &c.  ;  as,  Te  non 
hortor  solum,  sed  etiam  oro,  ut  tota  mente  in  rempublicam  incumbas.  Cic. 

Nuntio,  scribo,  mitto,  and  even  dico,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive, 
when  they  imply  an  injunction  or  intention  that  something  should  be 
done  ;  as,  Hc&c  ut  facias,  scribo.  Cic. 

Jubeo  and  veto  commonly  take  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  but 
sometimes  the  subjunctive  with  or  rarely  without  ut.  Sometimes,  with 
the  infinitive,  the  person  to  whom  the  command  is  given  is  omitted. 

Moneo  and  admoneo,  u  I  remind,"  and  persuadeo ,  ll  I  convince,"  take 
the  infinitive  with  the  accusative. 

3.  In  the  oratio  obllqua,  the  construction  of  the  accusative  with  the 
infinitive,  is  exchanged  for  that  of  the  subjunctive,  to  denote  possibility, 
liberty,  duty,  &c.  ;  as, 

Virginius  unum  Ap.  daudium  legum  expertem  esse  aielat :  respicerent 
tribunal  homines  castellum  omnium  scelerum.  Liv. 

On  the  contrary,  when  the  subjunctive  has  been  used,  after  a  verb  of 
requesting,  commanding,  &c.,  the  construction  often  passes  into  that  of  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  ;  the  verb  of  saying  being  considered  as  im- 
plied in  the  verb  of  requesting,  &c. ;  as,  Orabat  ne  se  ut  parricldam  iiberum 
aversarentur  :  sibi  v\ta.mJili(B  sit  A  cariorem  fuisse  si ....  Liv.  See  §266,2,  R.I. 

4.  Verbs  which  denote  willingness,  unwillingness,  permission,  and  ne- 
cessity, commonly  take  the  accusative  and  infinitive,  but  sometimes  the 
subjunctive. 

Such  are  volo,  nolo,  malo,  opto,  per  mitto,  patior,  sino,  concede,  licet,  pro- 
hibeo,  oportct,  and  necesse  est ;  as,  Optavit  ut  in  currum  patris  tolleretur. 
Cic.  Quis  Antonio  perrnlsit,  ut  partes  faceret  ?  Id. 

An  infinitive  passive  without  a  subject  is  sometimes  used  with  oportet ; 
as,  JWm  oportuit  relictas,  sc.  esse  anciilas.  Ter.  Ut  ut  crat,  mansurn  tamen 
opnrtvit,  sc.  esse.  Id.  Non  putabant  de  tali  viro  su,spiciortibus  oportere 
judicari.  Nep. 

Some  other  verbs  which  regularly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive 
after  them,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 


§274.  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  243 

5.  After  verbs  denoting  joy  or  grief,  surprise  or  wonder, 
either  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  quod  with  the  in- 
dicative or  subjunctive,  may  follow. 

Such  are  gaudeo,  detector,  gratum  est  mihi,  doleo,  angor,  indignor,miror  ; 
as,  Angor  anlmo  non  armis  egere  rempublicam.  Cic.  Gaudeo  tibi  jucun 
das  meas  esse  literas.  Id.  Gaudeo  quod  te  interpellavi.  Id. 

After  doleo,  gaudeo,  and  other  neuter  verbs,  the  clause  containing  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  not  the  object  of  the  verb,  but  of  some 
preposition  understood,  as,  propter,  &c.  See  §  232,  (2.) 

6.  By  the  infinitive,  with  or  without  an  accusative,  a  proposition  is  ex- 
pressed as  a  thought ;  by  quod,  with  the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive,  it  is 
simply  represented  as  a  fact.  To  the  latter  is  frequently  joined  hoc,  id, 
illud,  istud,  or  hue,  &c. ',  as,  Illud  quoque  nobis  accedit  incommodum,  quod 
M.  Junius  abest.  Cic.  Hue  accedebat,  qu6d,  &c.  Sail.  Quod  generally 
refers  to  past  time. 

Quod,  with  the  indicative,  in  the  sense  of  as  to,  or  with  regard  to,  is 
used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  especially  in  letters,  in  repeating  an 
expression  of  a  person  for  the  purpose  of  answering  it.  See  §  206,  (14.) 

NOTE.  The  construction  of  the  infinitive  resembles  that  of 
a  noun  in  the  singular  number  and  neuter  gender. 

Thus,  like  a  noun,  it  may  have  an  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing  with 
it ;  as,  Totum  hoc  philosophari  dispUcet.  Cic.  See  §  205,  REM.  8. 

It  may  be  followed  by  a  limiting  genitive  ;  as,  Cujus  non  dimicare  fuit 
vincSre.  Val.  Max. 

It  may  be  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  See  §  §  209,  REM.  3, 
(5,)  and  229,  REM.  5.  It  may  also  be  used  after  neuter  verbs,  like  an  ac- 
cusative, depending  on  a  preposition  understood ;  as,  Te  accepisse  meat 
literas  gaudeo.  Ter.  See  §  §  232,  (2,)  and  273,  5. 

It  is  also  used  like  a  predicate-nominative ;  as,  VidSre  est  perspicere 
aliquid.  Cic.  See  §  210. 

It  may,  like  a  genitive,  limit  the  signification  of  an  adjective  or  noun. 
See  §  270,  REM.  1. 

It  may,  like  an  accusative,  depend  on  a  preposition ;  as  Prceter  plorcLre. 
HOT.  See  §235. 

It  is  used  also  like  an  ablative ;  as.  Audlto  regem  in  Siciliam  tendgre.  Sail. 

Sometimes,  also,  especially  in  the  poets,  it  denotes  a  purpose,  like  a 
participle  in  dus ;  as,  Lorlcam  donat  habere  viro.  Virg. 


PARTICIPLES. 

<§>  274.  1 .  Participles  are  followed  by  the  same  cases 
as  their  verbs  ;  as, 

Quidam,  poeta  nomindtus ;  A  certain  one,  called  a  poet.  Cic.  Catulo- 
rum  obllta  leccna,  The  lioness  forgetful  of  her  whelps.  Virg.  Faventes 
rebus  Carthaginiensium,  Favoring  the  interests  of  the  Carthaginians.  Liv. 
Tendens  ad  sidera  palmas.  Virg.  Accusatus  rei  capitalis.  Cic.  Omlna 
doctus.  Stat.  Casus  abies  visura  marinus.  Id.  Carituri  arbore  montes. 
Ovid.  Parcendum  est  teneris.  Juv.  Utcndum  est  oetate.  Ovid. 

2.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  active  participles,  denote 
respectively  an  action  which  is  present,  past,  or  future,  in  refer 


244  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  <§>  274. 

ence  to  the  time  of  the  verb  with  which  they  are  connected 
as, 

Simul  hoc  dicens  attollit  se.  Virg.  Turn  ad  Thraseam  in  hortis  agentem 
missus  est.  Tac.  Turnum  fugientem  IXEC  terra  videbit.  Virg.  Qui  missus 
ab  Argis  Itala  consederat  urbe.  Id.  Lamia  munere  cedilitatis  perfunctus, 
petit  prceturam.  Cic.  Jussus  cum  fide  pcenas  luam.  Hor.  Juvenis  medios 
moriturus  in  hostes  irruit.  Virg.  Periturus  injecit  sese  in  agmen.  Id.  Ilia 
tibi  ventura  bella  expediet.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  The  present  participle  sometimes  denotes  that  which  is 
about  to  be  done  ;  as,  Inter  clusit  hiems,  ct  terruit  Auster  euntes, ....  as  they 
were  on  the  point  of  going.  Virg. 

HEM.  2.  The  present  participle,  also,  sometimes  denotes  a  purpose  ;  as, 
Ibant,  orantes  veniam,  ....  to  sue  for  favor....  Id. 

REM.  3.  The  perfect  participle  passive  often  denotes  the  result  of  a 
past  action,  and  thus  supplies  the  place  of  a  present  participle  passive  ;  as, 
Notus  evolat  piced  tectus  caligine  ....  covered  with  pitchy  darkness.  Ovid. 

REM.  4.  Habeo,  with  perfect  participles  denoting  knowledge  and  deter- 
mination, forms  a  periphrasis,  instead  of  the  verb  of  the  participle ;  as, 
Clodii  anlmum  perspectum  habeo,  cogmtum,  judicaturn  ;  for  perspexi.  Do, 
reddo,  euro,  and  facio,  are  sometimes  so  construed  with  participles ;  as, 
Missam  iram  faciet,  for  mittet.  Ter.  Hostes  victos  dare,  for  vincere.  Sail. 

REM.  5.  The  passive  participles  may  supply  the  place  of  a  verbal  noun 
in  io  or  us  ;  as,  Ante  Romam  conditam,  Before  the  building  of  Rome.  Cic. 
Consilia  urbis  delendae,  Plans  for  the  destruction  of  the  city.  Id.  See 
§  275,  II.  The  oblique  cases  only  of  participles  in  dus  are  thus  used,  and 
even  the  perfect  participle  is  not  thus  used  in  the  nominative  by  Cicero 

REM.  6.  In  the  silver  age,  the  participle  in  rus,  especially  with  verbs 
of  motion,  often  denotes  intention  or  purpose ;  as, 

Ad  Jovem  Hammdnem  per  git  consulturus  de  origlne  sua ;  He  goes  to 
Jupiter  Ammon,  to  consult  him  about  his  origin.  Just. 

REM.  7.  The  participle  in  dus,  also,  denotes  a  purpose,  when 
joined  with  verbs  signifying  to  give,  to  deliver ,  to  agree  for,  to 
have,  to  receive,  to  undertake,  &,c. 

Such  are  do,  trado,  tribuo,  attribuo,  mando,  mitto,  condilco,  loco,  habeo, 
accipio,  suscipiOj  relinquo,  euro,  deposco,  rogo  ;  as,  Testamentum  tibi  tradit 
legendum,  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  read.  Hor.  Attribuit  nos  truci- 
dandos  Cethego.  Cic.  Quod  utendum  acceperis,  reddtto.  Id. 

REM.  8.  The  participle  in  dus,  when  agreeing  with  the  sub- 
ject of  a  sentence,  has  the  signification  of  necessity  or  propri- 
ety ;  sometimes,  though  rarely,  except  in  later  writers,  that  of 
possibility  ;  as, 

'Is  venerandus  a  nobis  et  colendus  est,  He  should  be  worshipped  and 
honored  by  us.  Cic.  Delenda  est  Car/Jtago,  Carthage  must  be  destroyed. 
Cato.  Hoc  speranda  fuirunt.  Virg.  So  with  est  used  impersonally  ;  as, 
Utrum  pace  nobis  an  bello  esset  utendum.  Cic. 

Sometimes,  also,  when  not  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it 
has  this  signification ;  as,  Facta  narrabas  dissimulanda  tibi,  You  were 
relating  facts  which  you  should  have  concealed.  Ovid.  A.  L,  Bruto  yrinr 
elpe  hujus  maxlme  conservandi  generis  ct  nomlnis.  Cic. 


§  275.  SYNTAX. GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES.  245 

REM.  9.  The  participle  in  dus,  in  its  oblique  cases,  supplies  the  place 
of  a  present  participle  of  the  passive  voice,  to  denote  a  continued  or  in- 
complete action.  See  §  275,  II. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  participles  in  dus,  see  §  225,. III. 

3.  Participles  are  often  employed  instead  of  conditional,  ex- 
planatory, adversative,  and  other  dependent  clauses  ;  as, 

Curio,  ad  focum  sedenti  (as  he  was  sitting)  inagnum  auri  pondus  Sam- 
nltes  attulerunt.  Cic.  Tridui  viam  progressi,  rursus  revertSrunt,  for,  cum 
progressi  essent.  Cses.  Plura  locuturos  ablre  nos  jussit, ....  when  we  were 
going  to  say  more. 

If  the  participle  refers  to  a  noun  not  contained  in  the  leading  proposi- 
tion, it  is  put  with  that  noun  in  the  ablative  absolute.  See  §  257. 

NOTE.  In  many  cases,  for  want  of  a  perfect  participle  active,  and  a 
present  participle  passive,  this  construction  cannot  be  used.  Thus,  quum 
amavisset  cannot  be  exchanged  for  a  participle  corresponding  with  the 
English  having  loved.  As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs,  how- 
ever, have  an  active  signification,  they  admit  of  the  participial  construc- 
tion. The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  may  also  be  supplied  by  the 
perfect  passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute.  See  §  257,  REM.  5. 


GERUNDS   AND   GERUNDIVES. 

$  275.  I.  Gerunds  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  as 
their  verbs  ;  as, 

Mctus  parendi  sibi,  Fear  of  obeying  him.  Sail.  Parcendo  victis,  By 
sparing  the  vanquished.  Liv.  Efferor  studio  patres  vestros  videndi,  I  am 
transported  with  a  desire  of  seeing  your  fathers.  Cic.  Petendi  consulatum 
gratia.  Sail.  Venit  ad  recipiendum  pecunias.  Varr. 

REMARK  1.  The  gerund  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the 
neuter  singular  of  participles  in  dus,  but  it  has  the  meaning  of  the  activo 
voice.  It  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  present  participle  with  a  prepo- 
sition, and  sometimes  by  an  infinitive  active  ;  as,  Consilium  Lacedcemdnem 
occupandi;  A  design  of  occupying,  or  to  occupy,  Lacedaemon.  Liv. 

REM.  2.  The  gerund  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  in  a  passive 
sense  ;  as,  Spes  restituendi  nulla  erat, ....  of  being  restored.  Nep.  Athtnas 
erudiendi  gratia  missus, ....  for  the  purpose  of  being  instructed.  Just. 
Ante  dornandum.  Virg. 

REM.  3.  As  the  infinitive  is  used  as  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb,  so 
the  gerund  supplies  the  genitive,  dative,  ablative,  and,  after  a  prepo**' 
tion,  the  accusative,  of  a  verbal  noun  of  similar  meaning. 

II.  Instead  of  the  gerund  of  an  active  verb  with  its  ob- 
ject in  the  accusative,  the  participle  in  dus  is  often  used, 
the  object  taking  the  case  in  which  the  gerund  would  have 
been,  and  the  participle  agreeing  with  it ;  as, 

Consilia  urbis  delenda?  (Cic.),  for  urbem  delendi,  Plans  for  destroying 
the  city.  Reparandarum  classium  causa  (Suet.),  for  reparandi  classe," 
Perpetiendo  labori  idoneus.  Colum.  Jid  defendendam  Romam  ab  oppug- 
naridfi  Capua  duces  Romanos  abstrahgre.  Liv. 


246  SYNTAX.— GERUNDS    AND    GERUNDIVES.  §275. 

REMARK  1.  The  same  construction  is  used  with  the  future  passive 
participles  of  utor,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  and  rarely  of  mcdeor,  as  these 
verbs  were  originally  followed  by  the  accusative  ;  as,  JEtas  ad  hcec  utenda 
idonea.  Ter.  Justifies  fruendae  causd.  Cic.  In  munere  fungendo.  Id. 

REM.  2.  When  a  participle  is  thus  used  for  a  gerund,  it  is  called  a 
gerundive,  and  is  usually  translated  like  a  gerund.  The  gerundive  cannot 
be  substituted  for  the  gerund,  where  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  gen- 
der not  being  distinguishable.  It  should  not  be  used  when  the  object  of 
the  gerund  is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective ;  as,  Aliquid  faciendi  ratio 
(Cic.),  not  alicujus.  Artem  et  vera  et  falsa  dijudicandi  (Id  ),  not  verorum 
dijudicandorum.  * 

III.  Examples  of  the  construction  of  gerunds,  in  each  of  their  cases, 
have  been  already  given,  amongother  nouns,  under  the  heads  Genitive,  Da- 
tive, Accusative,  and  Ablative.  The  following  remarks  specify  in  what  con- 
nections they  are  used  : — 

REMARK  1.  The  genitive  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  may 
follow  either  nouns  or  adjectives ;  as, 

Amor  habendi.  Cic.  Patriam  spes  videndi.  Virg.  Nam  habet  natura, 
ut  aliarum  omnium  rerum,  sic  vivendi  modum.  Cic.  Barbara  consuetudo 

homlnum  immolandorum.  Id. Venandi  studiosi.  Cic.  Certus  eundi. 

Virg.  Insuetus  navigandi.  Cses.  Peritus  civitatis  regenda.  Nep. 

(1.)  The  nouns  after  which  these  genitives  most  frequently  occur  are, 
amor,  ars,  causa,  consilium,  consuetudo,  cupidltas,  facultas,  gratia,  locus, 
licentia,  modus,  occasio,  otium,  potestas,  spes,  studium,  tempus,  venia,  vis, 
voluntas,  copia,  libido,  spatium. 

(2.)  The  adjectives  which  most  frequently  take  after  them  these  geni- 
tives, are  such  as  denote  desire,  knowledge,  remembrance,  and  their  contra- 
ries ;  as,  cupidus,  studiosus,  perltus,  imperltus,  insuetus,  certus,  rudis,  &c. 
.  See  §  213,  REM.  1,  (3.) 

(3.)  The  genitive  plural  sometimes  depends  upon  a  gerund  in  di,  instead 
of  being  joined  with  the  gerundive  ;  as,  Facultas  agrorum  condonandi.  Cic. 
Nominandi  istorum  erit  copia.  Plaut.  In  castra  venerunt  sui  purgandi 
causa.  Cses.  This  construction  is  most  common  with  pronouns. 

(4.)  The  gerund  in  di,  for  the  gerundive,  is  sometimes  found  also  with 
pronouns  of  the  singular  number  and  feminine  gender ;  as,  Quoniam  tui 
videndi  est  copia.  Plaut.  Ego  ejus  videndi  cupidus  recta  consequor.  Ter, 
In  these  examples,  tui  and  ejus  are  feminine. 

(5.)  The  gerund  and  gerundive,  after  the  verb  sum,  are  sometimes 
found  in  the  genitive  denoting  a  tendency  or  purpose,  with  no  noun  or 
adjective  on  which  they  can  depend  ;  as,  Regium  imperium  initio  conser- 
vandse  libertatis  fulrat .  Sail.  Causa  or  gratia  may  sometimes  be  supplied. 
In  some  other  cases,  the  word  on  which  the  gerund  in  di  depends  is  not 
expressed;  as  Maneat  provinciaUlus  potentiam  suam  tali  modo  ostentandi, 
KG.  facultas.  Tac.  Cum  habcrem  in  animo  navigandi,  sc.  proposltum.  Cic. 

REM.  2.  The  dative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  is  used 
especially  after  adjectives  signifying  usefulness  or  Jitness,  and 
also  after  verbs,  to  denote  a  purpose ;  as, 

Charta  emporeftca  est  inutllis  scribendo.  Plin.  Capessendse  reipulUcce 
habllis.  Tac.  Ut  nee  triumviri  accipiundo,wec  scriba  referundo  sufficient 
Liv.  Locum  oppldo  condendo  capere.  Id. 

Cl.>  The  verbs  and  phrases  upon  which  this  dative  most  frequently  de- 


§  276.  SYNTAX. SUPINES.  247 

pends  are,  studeo ;  intcntus  sum;  impendo,  consume  or  insumo  tempus ; 
operam  do,  desum,  sum  (signifying  to  serve  for,  to  be  adequate  to),  facto, 
and  sufficio  ;  and,  in  later  writers,  on  verbs  of  motion. 

The  dative  after  sum  is  usually  supposed  to  depend  on  an  adjective  un- 
derstood ;  but  see  §  227,  REM.  3. 

(2.)  The  dative  of  the  gerundive,  denoting  a  purpose,  is  also  used  after 
names  of  office ;  as,  Dec.emvlri  leglbus  scribendis.  Liv.  So,  Comitia  cre- 
andis  decemviris.  Id. 

(3.)  A  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed  by  ad  and  the  accusative, 
than  by  the  dative  ;  as,  Pecus  ad  vescendum  homiriibus  apta.  Cic. 

(4.)  Instead  of  the  gerund  or  gerundive  after  adjectives,  the  poets  some- 
times use  the  infinitive,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  ;  as,  Jludax 
omnia  perpeti,  i.  e.  ad  omnia  perpetienda.  Hor.  See  §  270,  REM.  1. 

REM.  3.  The  accusative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows 
the  prepositions  adt  to,  or  inter,  during  or  amid,  and  sometimes 
ante,  circa,  or  ob ;  as, 

Ad  posnitendum  properat,  qui  citd  judlcat.  Pub.  Syr.  Inter  bibendum. 
While  drinking.  Just.  Ad  castra  facicnda.  Cic.  Ob  absolvendum.  Id. 

REM.  4.  The  ablative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows 
the  prepositions  a,  (ah),  de,  e,  (ex),  or  in;  or  it  is  used  without 
a  preposition,  as  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  or  means ; 
as, 

Jlristotelem  non  deterruit  a  scribendo.  Cic.  Ex  assentando.  Ter.  Non 
videor  a  defendendis  homimbus  discedZre.  Cic.  Crescit  eundo.  Virg. 
Rem  qu&runt  mercaturis  faciendis.  Cic.  Orationem  Latlnam  legendis 
nostris  efficies  pleniorem.  Id. 

This  ablative  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  after  pro  and  cum ;  as,  Pro 
va'pulando.  Plaut.  Cum  loquendo.  Quint. 


SUPINES. 

§276.  I.  Supines  in  urn  are  followed  by  the  same 
cases  as  their  verbs ;  as, 

JVcm  Graiis  servltum  matribus   ibo,   I  shall  not  go  to  serve  Grecian 
matrons.  Virg.     Eurypfumscitdtum  oracula  Phabi  mittimus,    We  sen 
Eurypylus  to°consult  the  oracle  of  Apollo.  Id. 

II.  Supines  in  urn  follow  verbs  of  motion,  and  serve 
to  denote  the  purpose  of  the  motion  ;  as, 

Te  id  admomtum  venio.  Plaut.  Cubitum  discesslmus.  Cic.  ircdejec- 
tum  monumenta  regis.  Hor.  So  after  participles ;  as,  Patnam  defensum 
revocatus.  Nep.  Spectatum  admissi.  Hor. 

REMARK  1.  Supines  in  urn  sometimes  follow  verbs  which  do  not  ex- 
press motion  ;  as,  Dojiliam  nuptum.  Ter.  Vos  ultum  injunas  hortor.  ball. 

REM  °  The  supine  in  urn  with  eo  often  forms  a  periphrasis  equiva- 
lent to'  the  same  mood  and  tense  of  the  verb  from  which  the  supine  1$ 
formed  ;  as,  JVe  bonos  omnes  perditum  eant  (Sail.),  for  perdant.  Ereptum 
mnt  (Id.),  for  eripiunt.  Ultum  ivit  (Tac.),  for  ultus  est. 


248  SYNTAX. SUPINES.  §    276. 

REM.  3.  The  supine  in  um  most  frequently  occurs  with  the  infinitive 
iri,  with  which  it  forms  the  future  infinitive  passive ;  as,  Brutum  visuin 
iri  a  me  puto.  Cic.  Jn  this  construction  the  accusative  properly  depends 
upon  the  supine,  and  iri  is  used  impersonally;  thus,  "  I  suppose  (that  it 
is  going  by  me),  i.  e.  that  1  am  going  to  see  Brutus." 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  supine  in  um  after  a  verb  of  motion,  a  gerund 
or  gerundive  in  the  accusative  with  ad,  or  in  the  genitive  with  causa  or 
gratia,  also  the  subjunctive  with  ut  or  qui,  and  a  present  or  future  partici- 
ple active,  may  be  used  to  express  a  purpose.  For  the  gerund  and  gerun- 
dive, see  §  275 ;  for  the  subjunctive  with  utj  §  262, — with  qui,  §  264  ;  and 
for  participles,  §  274. 

The  infinitive,  also,  is  sometimes  used  by  the  poets,  instead  of  the 
supine,  to  express  a  purpose.  See  §  271. 

III.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of 
adjectives  signifying  wonderful,  agreeable,  easy  or  difficult, 
worthy  or  unworthy,  honorable  or  base,  and  a  few  others ; 
as, 

Mirafrile  dictu  !  Wonderful  to  tell,  or  to  be  told  !  Virg.  Jucundum  cog- 
nltu  atque  audltu,  Pleasant  to  be  known  and  heard.  Cic.  Resfactufacllis, 
A  thing  easy  to  be  done.  Ter.  Faciliainventu.  Gell.  Incredibile  wiem- 
ordtu.  Sail.  Turpia  dictu.  Cic.  Optimum  factu.  Id. 

REMARK  1.  The  principal  adjectives  after  which  the  supine  in  u  occurs, 
are  affabllis,  arduus,  asj)er,  bonus,  dignus,indignus,facllis,  difficllis,fa!dus, 
grams,  honestus,  horrendus,  incrcdibllis,jucunduSj  injucundus,  memorabllis, 
pulcher,  rarus7  turpis,  and  utllis. 

REM.  2.     The  supine  in  u  is  used  also  after  the  nouns  fas, 

nefas,  and  opus  ;  as, 

Hoc  fas  est  dictu.  Cic.     Nefas  dictu.  Ovid.     Dictu  opus  est.  Ter. 

REM.  3.  As  the  supine  in  u  is  commonly  translated  by  a  passive  form, 
it  is  placed  under  the  passive  voice.  In  many  cases,  however,  it  may 
with  equal  or  greater  propriety  be  translated  actively.  It  seems  not  to 
differ  in  its  nature  from  other  verbal  nouns  in  us,  of  the  fourth  declension. 
In  the  expressions,  Obsonatu  redeo  (Plaut.),  Cultitu  surgat  (Cato),  ob- 
sonatu  and  cubltu,  though  following  verbs,  are  by  some  considered  as 
supines,  by  others  as  nouns  depending  on  a  preposition  understood. 

The  supine  in  ?/.,  even  when  it  follows  adjectives,  might,  as  a  verbal 
noun,  be  referred  to  §  250. 

REM.  4.  Instead  of  the  supine  in  u,  an  infinitive,  a  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive with  ad,  or  a  verbal  noun  in  the  ablative,  and  sometimes  in  the 
dative  or  accusative,  may  be  used;  as,  JUrdua  imitatu,  ceteriim  cognosci 
utilia.  Val.  Max.  Rlud  autem  facile  ad  credendum  est.  Cic.  Opus  pro- 
scriptione  dignum.  Plin.  Aqua,  potui  jucunda.  Id.  Facilior  ad  intellec- 
tum  atque  imitationem.  Quint. 

The  construction  with  ad  and  the  gerund,  or  with  sum  and  the  infini- 
tive, is  used  by  the  best  writers  after  facllis,  difficllis,a.ndjucundus.  The 
most  common  construction  of  dignus  is  with  qui  and  the  subjunctive, 
See  §  264,  9. 


277.  SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  249 


ADVERBS. 

§  277.     Adverbs  modify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  verbs, 
adjectives,  and  sometimes  of  other  adverbs  ;  as, 


mones,  You  advise  well.  Ter.  FortissUmb  urgentes.  Most  vigor- 
ously pressing  on.  Plin.  Mate  narrando.  Ter.  Longb  dissimllis.  Cic. 
Volte  bent.  Id. 

REMARK  1.     Adverbs  sometimes,  also,  modify  nouns;  as, 

HomSrus  plant  orator.  Cic.  Jldmodum  puella.  Liv.  Nihil  admodum. 
Cic.  Lat&  rex.  Virg.  Lat&  tyrannus.  Hor. 

REM.  2.  Adverbs  may  also  modify  adjective  pronouns,  and 
prepositions  ;  as, 

Plank,  noster.  Cic.     Paulo  ultra  eum  locum.  Cros. 
REM.  3.     A  negative  adverb,  modifying   another   negative 
word,  destroys  the  negation;  as, 

Nonparere  noluit,  He  was  not  unwilling  to  obey.  Nep.  Haud  igndra 
mali,  Not  ignorant  of  evil.  Virg.  Haud  nihil  est,  It  is  something.  Ter. 
So,  nonnulli,  some;  nonnunquam,  sometimes.  Non,  before  a  negative 
word,  commonly  heightens  the  affirmative  sense  ;  as,  Homo  non  indoctus3 
i.  e.  homo  sane  doctus.  Non  semel,  i.  e.  s&pius. 

REM.  4.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  proposition 
are  both  modified  by  negative  words,  and  also  when  the  predi- 
cate contains  two  negatives,  the  proposition  is  affirmative  ;  as, 

Nemo  non  videt,  Every  one  sees.  Cic.  60,  if  both  the  antecedent  and 
the  predicate  of  a  relative  clause  are  negative,  the  proposition  is  affirma- 
tive ;  as,  Nemo  est,  qui  nesciat  ;  Every  body  knows.  Cic. 

REM.  5.  Two  negatives,  however,  though  connected  as  above  speci- 
fied, sometimes  strengthen  the  negation  ;  as,  Neque  ille  haud  objicict  mihi. 
Plaut.  Jura  te  non  nociturum  Jtomlni  nemini.  Id.  Especially  are  ncqiw, 
nee,  and  sometimes  non,  thus  used  after  a  negative,  instead  01  aut  or  oel  ; 
as,  Non  me  carminlbus  vincet,  nee  Orpheus^  nee  Linus.  Virg.  Neminem, 
non  re,  non  verbo,  nonvultu  denlque  ojfendi.  Cic.  Nullius  rei  neque  prces, 
rieque  manceps  factus  est.  Nep. 

REM.  6.  Non  is  sometimes  omitted  after  non  modb  or  non 
solum,  when  followed,  in  a  subsequent  clause,  by  ne  quidem;  as, 

Mihi  non  modd  irasci,  sed  ne  doUre  quidem  impune  licet,  ....  not  only  not 
to  be  angry,  but....  Cic.  Cum  senatui  non  solinn  juodre  rempubUcam,  sed 
ne  lugere  quidem  liceret.  Id. 

Non  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  non  modd  when  followed  by  sed  or  veritm 
with  etiam  ;  as,  Qui  non  modo  eafutura  timet,  veritm  etiamjert,  sustinetque 
pr(Bsentia;  Who  not  only  does  not  fear....  Cic. 

REM.  7.  Facllb,  in  the  sense  of  undoubtedly,  clearly,  is  joined  to  super- 
latives, and  words  of  similar  import  ;  as,  Vir  unus  totius  Gratia  facile 
doctisslrnus.  Cic.  Homo  regionis  illius  virtute  facile  princeps.  Id. 

REM.  8.  Adverbs  are  sometimes  equivalent  to  phrases  con- 
taining an  antecedent  and  a  relative,  both  of  which  would  be 
in  an  oblique  case. 


250  SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS.  $  278. 

When  thus  resolved,  the  antecedent  will  be  found  to  modify  some  word 
Sn  its  own  clause,  and  the  relative  to  serve  both  as  a  connective  for  a  sub- 
sequent clause,  and  a  modifier  of  some  word  contained  in  it.  Hence, 
such  adverb  serves  the  threefold  purpose  of  a  connective  and  a  double 
modifier;  as, 

Ed  postquarn  Casar  pervenit,  obsldes  poposcit ;  After  Caesar  came  thither, 
he  demanded  hostages  (Cass.)  ;  i.  e.  Obsldes  poposcit  pest  id  tempus,  in  quo 
ed  pervenit;  He  demanded  hostages  after  the  time  at  which  lie  came  thither; 
where  post  id  tempus  modifies  poposcit,  and  in  quo  serves  as  a  connective, 
and  also  modifies  pervenit. 

Frequently,  for  greater  precision,  an  additional  adverb  is  introduced, 
which,  in  the  resolution  of  the  phrase,  stands  in,  and  sometimes  supplies, 
the  antecedent  clause  ;  as,  Ed  postquam  pervenit,  turn  obsides  poposcit, .... 
then  he  demanded  hostages;  i.  e.  Obsldes  poposcit  tempore,post  id  tempus 
in  quo  ed  pervenit;  He  demanded  hostages  at  a  time  subsequent  to  the  time 
at  which  he  came  thither.  So,  Cum  venit  calamltas,  turn  detrimentum  accip- 
Itur  (Cic.),  i.  e.  Detrimentum  eo  tempore  accipltur,  in  quo  venit  calamltas. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

$  278.  Copulative  and  disjunctive  conjunctions,  and 
some  others,  connect  words  which  are  in  the  same  con- 
struction. 

Words  are  in  the  same  construction,  when  they  stand  in  the  same  rela- 
tion to  some  other  word  or  words  in  the  sentence.  Hence  conjunctions 
connect  the  same  cases  of  nouns,  adjectives,  and  pronouns,  the  same  moods 
of  verbs,  and  adverbs  and  prepositions  relating  to  the  same  word ;  as, 

Pulvis  et  umbra  sumus,  We  are  dust  and  shade.  Hor.  Si  tu  et  Tullia 
valetis,  ego  et  Cic£ro  valemus.  Cic.  AggSre  jacto  turribus^we  constitutis. 
Cffis.  Clarus  et  honoratus  vir,  An  illustrious  and  honorable  man.  Id. 
CtBsar  Rcmos  cohortatus,  liberaliterque  oratione  prosecutus.  Cses.  Pater 
tuus,  quern  colui  et  dilexi.  Cic.  Cum  triumphum  egeris,  censorqve  iueris, 
et  obifiris  Itgatus.  Id.  Cum  ad  oppldum  accessisset,  castrdque  ibi  poneret. 
Cses.  Ades  anlmo,  et  omitte  timorem.  Cic.  Ea  videre  ac  perspicere 
potestis.  Id.  Graviter  et  copidse  dixisse  dicltur.  Id.  Cum  fratre  an  sine. 
Id.  Cui  carmina  cordi,  numerosque  intendgre  nervis.  Virg. 

REMARK  1.  This  rule  includes  the  copulative  conjunctions  ac,  atque^ 
ct,  etiam,  que,  ncc,  neque,  the  disjunctives  aut,  seu,  sive,  ve,  vel,  neve,  neu, 
and  also  <juam,  pr&terquam,  nisi,  an,  nempe,  quamvis,  nedum,  sed,  autem, 
veriim,  and,  in  general,  such  as,  when  used  to  connect  clauses,  do  not  im- 
ply a  dependence  of  the  following  upon  the  preceding  clause.  To  these 
may  be  added  the  adverbs  of  likeness,  ceu,  tanquam,  qunsi,  ut,  &c. ;  as, 
JYec  census,  nee  clarum  nomen  avorum,  sed  probltas  magnos  ingeniumque 
facit.  Ovid.  Philosophi  negant  quenquam  virum  bonum  essc,  nisi  sapien- 
tem.  Cic.  Gloria  virtutem  tanquam  umbra  sequitur.  Id. 

REM.  2.  Words  thus  connected  are  sometimes  in  different  cases,  though 
in  the  same  construction  ;  as,  Mea  ci  reipublicce  interest.  Cic.  (See  §  210.) 
Sive  es  Romae,  sive  in  Eplro.  Id.  (See  §  §  221  and  254.)  In  MetLii  de- 
scendat  judicis  aures,  et  patris  ct  nostras.  Hor.  See  §  211,  REM.  3.  In 
like  manner,  Hannibal  non  allter  vinci  potuit,  quam  morfi. 

REM.  3.     The  above  conjunctions  connect  not  only  single  \ 
words,  but  clauses  whose  construction  is  the  same ;  that  is, 


§  279.  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.       |  251 

whose  subjects  are  in  the  same  case,  arid  their  verbs  in  the 
same  mood  ;  as, 

Concldunt  vcnti,  fugiuntque  nubes  ;  The  winds  subside,  and  the  clouds 
disperse.  Hor.  Locum,  quern  et  non  coquit  sol,  et  tangit  ros.  Varr.  Ludi 
decem  per  dies  facti  sunt,  neque  res  uiia  prcctermissa  est.  Cic.  Vides,  ut 
alto,  stet  nive  candidum  Soracte,  nee  jam  sustineant  onus  silvce  laborantcs, 
gduque  flumlna  constiterint  acuto.  Hor.  Intelligltis  et  anlmum  ei  pr&sto 
fuisse,  nee  consilium  defuisse.  Cic. 

REM.  4.  As  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  for  the  imperative,  they  may 
be  connected  by  the  above  conjunctions  ;  as,  Disce  nee  invideas.  Pers. 

REM.  5.  The  indicative  and  subjunctive  may  also  be  thus  connected,  if 
the  clause  of  the  latter  is  not  dependent;  as,  JVec  satis  scio,  nee,  si  sciam, 
diccre  aushn.  Liv. 

REM.  6.  The  conjunction  is  often  omitted ;  as,  Cui  Romce,  domus^uxor, 
tiberi^  procurator  esset.  Cic.  Qua  vitia  sunt  non  sencctutis,  sed  inertis, 
igiLdva,  somniculosa  scnectiitis.  Id.  Abiit,  exccssit,  cvdsit,  erupit.  Id. 

REM.  7  Copulative  and  disjunctive  conjunctions  are  oflen  used,  before 
each  of  two  or  more  connected  words  or  clauses,  in  order  to  mark  the 
connection  more  forcibly  ;  as,  Et  pecuniapersuddct,  et  gratia,  et  auctorltas 
diccntis,  et  dignltas,  et  postremo  asf.ectus.  Quinct.  Hoc  et  turpe,  nee 
tatfien  tutum.  Cic.  Neque  nata  est,  et  teterna  est.  Id.  Et  tibi  et  mihi 
voluptati  fore.  Id.  Res  ipsa  aut  invitdbit  aut  dchortabitur.  Id. 

In  like  manner  nunc....nunc,  simul....simul,  partim....partijn,  qua....qud,t 

turn turn,  cum. ...turn,  are  used  before  words  or  clauses.  Turn.. ..turn  not 

only  signify  both and,  but  also  at  one  time at  another  time.  Cum 

turn  generally  give  a  greater  emphasis  to  the  latter  word  or  clause,  which 
is  often  increased  by  the  addition  of  vero,  ccrtd,  pr&cipue,  imprimis, 
maximt,  <fcc. ;  as,  Luxuria,  cum  omni  cetdti  turpis,  turn  rnaxirne  senectuti 
fwdissima  est.  Cic. 

REM.  8.  To  connect  different  names  of  the  same  person  or  thing,  sive 
or  seu,  rather  than  aut  or  vel,  is  employed  ;  as,  Mars  sive  Mavors. 

REM.  9.  Ac  and  atque  signify  as  and  than  after  adjectives  and  adverbs 

denoting  similarity  or  dissimilarity;  as,  Similiter/aasac  si  me  roges, as 

if  you  should  ask  me.  Cic.  Me  colit  Eeque  atque  patronmn  suum,....as  much 
as....  Id.  Si  aliter  scribo  ac  sentio,  If  I  write  otherwise  than  1  think.  Id. 
lili  sunt  alio  ingcnio  atque  tu.  Plaut. 


ARRANGEMENT. 
I.    OF    WORDS. 

§  27 9.  1.  In  English,  after  connectives,  are  placed,  first,  the  subject, 
and  the  words  which  modify  or  limit  it ;  next,  the  verb  and  its  modifiers  ; 
then  the  object  of  the  verb ;  and  last,  prepositions,  and  the  words  depend- 
ing upon  them.  This  is  called  the  logical  or  natural  order. 

2.  In  a  Latin  sentence,  after  connectives,  are  placed, 
first,  the  subject  and  its  modifiers  ;  then  the  oblique  cases, 
and  other  words  which  depend  upon  or  modify  the  verb ; 
and  last  of  all,  the  verb. 


252  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  §  279, 

This  arrangement,  however,  though  common,  is  by  no  means  invariable, 
since  it  is  a  general  rule,  that  the  most  emphatic  word  in  a  sentence  is  to  be 
placedfirst. 

3.  Connectives  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  a  clause. 

The  following  connectives  may  stand  either  in  the  first  or  second  place, 
and  sometimes  in  the  third : — equldem,  ergo,  etenim,  etiam,  ideo,  igltur,  ita- 
que,  licet,  namque,  quia,  quamquam,  quippe,  quoniam,  saltern,  sed,  tamcn, 
utj  utpdte,  and  some  others. 

Autem,  enim,  and  verb  (but),  commonly  occupy  the  second  place,  some- 
times the  third ;  as,  Ille  enim  revocdtus  resisttre  co2pit.  Cces.  Ego  ver6 
vellem,  affuisses.  Cic.  The  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve,  are  usually  subjoined  to 
the  first  wopji  in  a  clause. 

Quidem  and  quoque  are  subjoined  to  the  emphatic  word  in  a  clause ;  as, 
Verbo  ille  reus  erat,  re  quidem  verd  Oppiawtcus.  Cic.  Me  scilicet  maxkmd, 
sedproxlmb  ilium  quoque  fefellissem.  Id. 

In  negative  sentences,  ne  precedes,  and  quidem  follows,  the  emphatic 
word  ;  as,  Ne  ad  Catonem  quidem  provocdbo.  Cic. 

4.  When  a  word  is  repeated  in  the  same  clause,  so  that  one  is  opposed 
to,  or  distinguished  from,  the  other,  they  must  stand  together ;  as,  Hom- 
ines hominibus  maxlm&  utlles  esse  possunt.  Cic.     Equates  alii  alio  dilapsi 
sunt.  Liv. 

5.  Words  used  antithetically  are  also  placed  near  each  other ;  as,  Dum 
tacent,  clamant.  Cic.     Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  movet.  Id. 

6.  Inquam  and  usually  aio,  introducing  a  quotation,  follow  one  or  more  of 
the  words  quoted ;  as,  "  Nan  ndsli  quid  pater,"  inquit,  "  Chrysippus  dicat." 
Hor.     "  Quid,"  aio,  "  tua  crimtna  prodis  ?  "  Ovid. 

7.  Adjectives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  nouns,  especially  when  any 
tiling  is  dependent  on  them.     When  a  noun  is  limited  by  another  noun, 
as  well  as  by  an  adjective,  the  adjective  usually  precedes  both;  as,  Vila 
officii  prcecepta.  Cic.     Tuum  erga  dignitatem  meam  studium.  Id. 

Demonstratives,  and  the  adjectives  primus,  medius,  &c.  (see  §  205, 
REM.  17),  usually  precede  their  nouns ;  as,  Ea,  res.  Cses.  His  ipsis  ver- 
lis.  Cic.  Media  nox.  Caes.  Reliqua  JEgyptus.  Cic. 

8.  Monosyllables  are  usually  prefixed  to  longer  words  with  which  they 
are  connected  ;  as,  Vir  clarisslmus.  Cic.     Vis  tempestdtis.  Caes. 

9.  When  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  the  one  which  explains  or  defines 
the  other  is  generally  put  last ;  as,  Marcus  Tullius  consul.  Sail.     Opes 
irritamenta  malorum.  Ovid. 

In  the  arrangement  of  names  of  persons,  the  prcenomen  stands  first, 
next  the  nornen,  third  the  cognomen,  and  last  the  agnomen  ;  as,  Publius 
Cornelius  Scipio  jtfricdnus.  The  prronomen  is  usually  denoted  by  a 
letter. 

10.  Oblique  cases  precede  the  words  upon  which  they  de- 
pend, but  they  follow  prepositions  ;  as, 

Populi  Romdni  laus  est.  Cic.  Laudis  atfidi,  pecuniro  liberdles.  Sail. 
Cunctis  esto  benignus,  nulli  blandus,  paucis  familidris,  omnibus  aquus. 

Sen.  Monumentum  sere  perennius.  Hor.  Hanc  tibi  dono  do.  Ter. Ad 

'meridiem  spectans.  Cic.  Extra  periculum.  Id. 

Genitives  depending  upon  neuter  adjectives  are  commonly  placed  last; 
as,  Incerta  fortuncB.  Liv.  JVcc  tibi  plus  cordis,  sed  minus  oris  inest.  Ovid. 

When  a  noun  which  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  is  modified  by  other 
words  which  precede  it,  the  preposition  usually  stands  before  the  words  by 


§  279.  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDb.  253 

which  the  noun  is  modified  ;  as,  A  primd  luce  ad  sextam  horam.  Liv.  J$d 
privdtum  dolorcmfuit  luctuosum.  Cic.  Ad  anlmi  mei  lattitiam.  Id. 

Sometimes,  however,  the  preposition  comes  between  its  noun  and  an 
adjective,  or  a  genitive  by  which  the  noun  is  modified;  as,  NuLld  in  re. 
Cic.  Justis  de  causis.  Id.  Suos  inter  cequdles.  Id. 

Per,  in  adjurations,  is  often  separated  by  other  words  ;  as,  Per  ego  te  deos 
oro.  Ter. 

Tenus  and  versus  follow  their  cases,  and  sometimes  other  prepositions, 
especially  when  joined  with  qui  or  hie. 

11.  Infinitives  precede  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend  ;  as, 

Jugurtha,  ubi  eos  Africa  decessisse  ratus  est,  neque  propter  loci  naturam 
Cirtain  armis  expugnare  possit,  m&nia  circumdat.  Sail.  Servire  magis 
qudm  imperare  parati  estis.  Id. 

12.  A  word  which  has  the  same  relation  to  several  words,  either  pre- 
cedes or  follows  them  all ;  as,  Vir  grams  ct  sapiens.  Cic.     Clarus  et  hono- 
rdtus  vir.  Id. 

13.  Relatives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  antecedents, 
and  as  near  to  them  as  possible ;  as, 

Qui  sim,  ex  eo,  quern  ad  te  ram,  cognosces.  Sail.  Literas  ad  te  misi,per 
quas  gratias  tibi  egi.  Cic. 

14.  Quisque  is  generally  placed  after  se7  suus,  qui,  ordinals  and  superla- 
tives ;  as,  Suos  quisque  debet  tueri.  Cic.     Satis  superque  est  sibi  su.drum 
cuique  rerum  cura.  Id.     Severltas  animadversionis  infimo  cuique  gratis- 
slma.  Id.     Quisque  very  rarely  begins  a  proposition. 

15.  An  adverb  is  usually  placed  immediately  before  the  word  which  it 
qualifies ;  but  if  the  same  word  is  modified  by  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun, 
the  latter  commonly  follows  the  adverb  ;  as,  Male  parta  male  dilabuntur. 
Cic.     Nihil  tarn  asperum  neque  tarn  difficile  esse,  quod  non  cupidissime, 

facturi  essent.  Sail. Imperium  facile  iis  arttbus  retinetur,  quibus  initio 

partuin  est.  Id.     Sed  max! me  adolescentium  familiar itdtcs  appetebat.  Id. 
JVon  tarn  in  bellis  et  in  pr&liis,  quam  in  promissis  etjide  firmiorem.  Cic. 

In  some  phrases,  custom  has  established  a  certain  order,  which  must  be 
observed  anfJ  jrnitated  ;  as,  JVe  quid  resjmbtica  detriments  capiat.  Cic. 

16.  Exceptions  to  the  foregoing  principles  are  very  numerous.     These 
may  arise  from  a  regard  to  the  harmony  of  the  sentence,  from  poetic 
license,  or  from  the  following  rule,  which  sometimes  modifies  nearly  all 
the  preceding  : — 

The  emphatic  word  is  placed  before  the  word  or  words  con- 
nected with  it  which  are  not  emphatic. 

17.  A  sentence  should  not  close  like  a  hexameter  verse,  with  a  dactyl 
and  spondee ;  as,  Esse  videtur  ;  nor,  in  general,  with  a  monosyllable. 

18.  Hiatus  should  be  avoided ;  that  is,  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel 
should  not  follow  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel. 

19.  A  concurrence  of  long  words  or  long  measures, — of  short  words  or 
short  measures, — of  words  beginning  alike  or  ending  alike, — should  be 
avoided. 

22 


254  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  $  280,  281. 


II.    OF    CLAUSES. 

$  280.  A  compound  sentence,  in  which  the  leading  clause  is 
divided  by  the  insertion  of  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses,  is  called  a 
period. 

1.  In  a  regular  period,  the  leading  verb  is  placed  at  the  end, 
and  the  subordinate  clauses  between  the  parts  of  the  leading 
clause  ;  as, 

Pausanias,  cum  semiartlmis  de  templo  elatus  esset,  confestim  animam 
efflavit ;  Pausanias,  when  he  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple  but  just 
alive,  immediately  expired.  Nep.  Ego,  si  ab  improbis  et  perdltis  civlbus 
rempubticam  teneri  viderem,  sicut  et  meis  temporfbus  scimus,  et  nonnullis 
aliis  accidisse  acceplmus,  non  modo  praemiis,  qua  apud  me  minimum  valent, 
sed  ne  periculis  quidem  compulsus  ullis,  quibus  tamen  moventur  etiamfor- 
tissimi  virij  ad  eorum  causam  me  adjungerem.  Cic. 

2.  If  the  verbs  of  the  leading  and  dependent  clauses  have  the  same  sub- 
ject, or  the  same  word  depending  on  them,  they  are  commonly  formed 
into  a  period;    as,  Antigonus,  quum  adversus  Seleucum  Lysimachumque 
dimicaret,  in  proelio  ocolsus  est.  Nep. 

So,  also,  when  the  word  which  depends  on  the  verb  of  the  leading 
clause  isjlie  subject  of  the  dependent  clause ;  as,  Manlio,  quum  dictator 
fuisset,  Marcus  Pomponius  tribunus  plebis  diem  dixit.  Cic. 

3.  When  obscurity  would  arise  from  separating  the  leading  subject  and 
verb  by  dependent  words  or  clauses,  they  are  often  placed  together  at  the 
beginning  or  end  of  the  sentence  ;  as,  Latae  (sunt)  deinde  leges,  non  soliim 
qucB  regni  suspicions,  consulem  absolverent,  scd  quce,  adeo  in  contrarium 
verterent,  ut  popularem  ctiam  facer  ent.  Liv. 

The  position  of  the  leading  verb  is  also  often  otherwise  varied,  from 
regard  to  emphasis,  to  avoid  monotony,  or  to  prevent  its  meeting  with  the 
verb  of  the  last  dependent  clause. 

4.  When  one  clause  is  interrupted  by  the  introduction  of  another,  the 
latter  should  be  finished  before  the  first  is  resumed. 

5.  Clauses  expressing  a  cause,  a  condition,  a  time,  or  a  comparison,  usu- 
ally precede  the  clauses  to  which  they  relate. 

6.  A  short  clause  usually  stands  before,  rather  than  after  a  long  one. 


ANALYSIS. 

<§>  281.  The  analysis  of  a  proposition,  or  of  a  compound 
sentence,  consists  in  dividing  it  into  the  several  parts  of  which 
it  is  composed,  and  pointing  out  their  mutual  relations. 

In  analyzing  a  proposition,  it  is  first  to  be  divided  into  its  logical  subject 
and  predicate.  See  §  §  200,  201,  202. 

If  the  logical  subject  consists  of  more  than  one  word,  its  grammatical 
subject  should  be  pointed  out,  and  distinguished  as  simple  or  compound. 
See  §201,1.11. 

When  the  grammatical  subject  is  determined,  the  words  which  modify 
or  limit  it  should  next  be  specified,  and  then  the  words  which  modify 
them  and  so  on,  until  the  logical  subject  is  exhausted.  See  §  201,  III. 


<§>  281.  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  255 

In  analyzing  the  logical  predicate,  the  grammatical  predicate  should 
first  be  mentioned,  then  the  words  which  modify  or  limit  it,  and  their 
modifiers,  until  the  logical  predicate  is  exhausted.  See  §  202. 

In  analyzing  a  proposition,  the  rules  for  the  agreement  and  dependence 
of  words  should  be  given,  and  likewise  their  various  inflections. 

The  analysis  of  a  compound  sentence  requires,  first,  its  resolution  into  its 
several  component  propositions;  and,  secondly,  their  analysis  in  the  man- 
ner before  mentioned.  See  §  203. 

In  resolving  a  sentence  into  its  component  clauses,  the  participial  con- 
structions equivalent  to  clauses  should  be  mentioned,  and  ellipses  supplied. 
See  §  203,  5. 

When  the  compound  sentence  is  resolved,  the  connection  of  the  clauses 
should  be  pointed  out,  and  their  dependence  or  independence.  See 
§  203,  2.  In  either  case,  the  connective  words,  if  any,  should  be 
mentioned,  and  the  connection,  if  any  exists,  with  the  preceding  sentence. 
See  §  203,  4.  When  clauses  are  dependent,  the  relation  in  which  they 
stand  should  be  explained,  the  character  of  the  connectives  stated,  and  the 
rules  for  the  moods  of  the  verbs  given.  See  §  §  262—266  and  272,  273. 

The  following  are  examples  of  the  analysis  of  simple  and  compound 
sentences  : — 

1.  Saviiis  ventis  agitdtur  ingens  pinus,  The  great  pine  is 
more  violently  shaken  by  the  winds.  Hor. 

Ingens  pinus  is  the  logical  subject ;  sceviits  ventis  agitdtur  is  the  logical 
predicate. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  pinus :  this  is  modified  by  ingens.0' 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  agitdtur  :  this  is  modified  by  s&mhs*  and 
ventis. e 

Pinus  is  a  common  noun,rf  of  the  second  and  fourth  declension,"  femi- 
nine gender/  and  nominative  case.*' 

Ingens  is  an  adjective,  of  the  third  declension,  and  of  one  termination,* 
in  the  nominative  case,  feminine  gender,  agreeing  with  pinus.1 

Agitdtur  is  an  active  *  frequentative  l  verb,  of  the  first  conj.  from  agito, 
derived  from  ago  [Name  its  principal  parts],  formed  from  the  1st  root, 
[Give  the  formations  of  that  root.]  It  is  in  the  passive  voice,  indicative 
mood,  present  tense,  singular  number,  third  person,  agreeing  with  pinus.m 

Scevius  is  an  adverb,  in  the  comparative  degree,  from  scev&  or  samlter* 
derived  from  the  adjective  scevus,0  modifying  8ie  verb  agitdtur. p 

Ventis  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  second  declension,'  masculine  gen- 
der,r  in  the  plural  number,  ablative  case.* 

2.  Mithridates  y  dudrum  et  viginti  gentium  rex,  tot  idem  lin- 
guis  jura  dixit ;  Mithridates,  king  of  twenty-two  nations,  pro- 
nounced judicial  decisions  in  as  many  languages.  Plin. 

The  logical  subject  is  Mithridates  dudrum  et  viginti  gentium  rex. 

The  logical  predicate  is  totldcm  linguis  jura  dixit. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  Mithridates  :  this  is  modified  by  rex.1  Rex 
is  limited  by  gentium"  which  is  itself  limited  by  dudrum  and  viginti.0 
Et.  connects  dudrum  and  vi<rinti.w 


a 

S201, 

III. 

3. 

f( 

\  29,  2. 

l  \ 

>187, 

II.  1. 

§38. 

»$  201,  III.  3 

1 

202, 

ITT. 

3. 

e 

^201,  IV.  3. 

m 

^209. 

§46. 

&  RiLM.  1 

c 

202, 

III. 

2. 

k  { 

(ill. 

n 

1  194. 

$247. 

»  $  278. 

d 

S26. 

i 

205. 

o 

S192, 

II. 

6201, 

III.  1. 

« 

$99. 

k 

I  141,  1. 

P 

j>277. 

§201, 

III.  2 

256  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  $  281. 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  dixit,  which  is  limited  by  jura  •  and  lin- 
guis*  and  the  latter  by  totldtm. 

Mithriddtcs  is  a  proper  noun,*  of  the  third  declension,*  masculine  gen- 
der,** and  nominative  case. 

Rex  is  a  common  noun,  3d  dec.,*  masc.  gen.,d  in  apposition  with  Mithri- 
dates.S 

Gentium  is  a  com.  noun.,  3d  dec.,*  fern.  gen.,A  in  the  genitive  plural,1 
limiting  rex.* 

Duarum  is  a  numeral  adj.,  of  the  cardinal*  kind,  in  the  genitive  case, 
fern,  gen.,  agreeing  with  gentium.™ 

Et  is  a  copulative  conjunction.* 

Viginti  is  a  cardinal  numeral  adjective  indeclinable,1  limiting  gentium.1* 

Dixit  is  an  active  verb,0  of  the  third  conjugation,**  from  dico  [Give  the 
principal  parts],9  formed  from  the  second  root  [Give  the  formations  of  that 
root],  in  the  act.  voice.,  ind.  mood,  perf.  indefinite  tense,1"  sing,  num.,  3d 
pers.,  agreeing  with  Mithriddtes.' 

Jura,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec.,'  neut.  gen.,"  plur.  num.,  ace.  case,  the  ob- 
ject of  dixit.9 

Linguis,  a  com.  noun,  1st  dec.,  fern.  gen.,*°  plural  num.,  ablative  case.* 

Tottdem,  an  adj.,  indeclinable  ,y  in  the  plural  number,  limiting  linguis 

3.  Romana  pubes,  seddto  tandem  pavdre,  postquam  ex  tarn 
turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit,  ubi  vacuam  sedem 
regiam  vidit,  etsi  satis  credebatpatribus,  qui  proximi  steterant, 
subllmem  raptum  procelld ;  tamen,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta, 
moesturn  aliquamdiu  silentium  obtinuit.  Liv. 

The  preceding  compound  sentence  constitutes  a  period,*  and  it  may  be 
resolved  into  the  following  clauses  : — 

1.  Romana  pubes  tamen,  velut  orbitatis  metu  icta,  mcestum  aliquamdiu 
vilentium  obtinuit, —which  is  the  leading  clause.00 

2.  seddto  tandem  pavore, 

3.  postquam  ex  tarn  turbido  die  serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit, 

4.  ubi  vidti, 

5.  vacuam  (esse)  sedem  regiam, 

6.  etsi  satis  credebat  patrlbus, 

7.  qui  proximi  stetSrant, 

8.  subllmem  raptum  jjrocelld. 

In  the  preceding  clauses,  the  predicates  are  printed  in  Italics. 

The  grammatical  subject  of  the  leading  clause  is  pubes,  which  is  limited 
by  Romana  and  icta.  Icta  is  modified  by  velut  and  metu,  which  last  is  limit- 
ed by  orbitatis.  The  grammatical  predicate  of  that  clause  is  obtinuit  •  this 
is  limited  by  aliquamdiu  and  silentium,  which  is  itself  limited  by  moBstum. 

Pubes,  a  collective  noun,66  3ddec.,cc  fern.  gen.,dd  sing,  num.,  nom.  case. 

Romana,  a  patrial"  adj.,  of  the  1st  and  2d  dec.//  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num., 
om.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes. ge 

Tamen,  an  adversative  conjunction,7^  relating  to  etsi  in  the  6th  clause, 


J  202,  III.  2. 

5  26. 

>73. 

1 28. 

;78. 

204. 


117.  118. 


205. 


&76.  y  §  115,  3.  dd§62. 

S  66.  *  $  280.  ««  $  104. 

i  gag.  aa,  §  203,  3.  //  $  105. 

§38,41.  »  $26.  rtftSOft, 

^247  ««  $  73.  ^^  &  198  -j 


<§>  281.  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  257 

and  denoting  that  the  predicate  of  this  clause  is  true,  notwithstanding  the 
concession  made  in  that  clause. 

Velut,  an  adverb,  modifying  icta.a 

Icta,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  active  verb  ico,  3d  conj.4  [Principal  parts 
in  both  voices],  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubcs.* 

Metu,  an  abstract  noun,d  4th  dec.,'  masc.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case./ 

OrlitdtiSj  an  abstract d  noun,  derived  from  orbuSj  3d  dec.,*  fern,    en.* 


gen., 
sing,  num.,'  gen.  case,  limiting  metu.* 

Obtinuit,  an  active  verb  of  the  2d  conj.,*  from  obtineo,  compounded  of 
prep,  ob  and  teneo l  [Give  the  principal  parts,  and  the  formations  of  the 
second  root],"*  in  the  active  voice,  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing, 
num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  pubes.n 

Miquamdiu,  an  adverb,  compounded  of  allquis  and  diu,°  and  limiting 
obtinuit.p 

Silentium,  a  com.  noun,  2d  dec.,  neut.  gen.,?  sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  the 
object  ofobtinuit.r 

Masstum,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  dec.,  neut.  gen.,  sing  num.,  ace.  case, 
agreeing  with  silentium.8 

The  2d  is  a  participial  clause,  equivalent  to  quum  pavor  tandem  seddtus 
esset.* 

Pavore,  an  abstract d  verbal"  noun,  from  paveo,  3d  dec.,*  masc.  gen.,w 
sing,  num.,  abl.  case,"  absolute  with  seddto* 

Seddto,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  act.  verb  sedo,  of  the  1st  conj.,y 
[Principal  parts  in  both  voices],  rnasc.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,*  agree- 
ing with  pavore.aa 

Tandem,  an  adverb  of  time,  modifying  seddto, bb 

Postquam,  an  adverb  of  time,  compounded  of  post  and  quam,  modifying 
obtirmit  and  rediit,  and  serving  to  connect  the  first  arid  third  clauses. cc 

The  grammatical  subject  of  the  3d  clause  is  lux,  which  is  limited  by 
senna  and  tranquilla.  The  grammatical  predicate  is  rediit,  which  is  modi- 
fied by  postquam  and  die.  Die  is  modified  by  turbldo,  which  is  itself  modi- 
fied by  tarn. 

Lux,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec.,dd  fern.  gen.,ee  sing,  num.,  nom.  case. 

Serena,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  dec.,  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agree- 
ing with  lux.c 

Et,  a  copulative  conjunction,  connecting  screna  and  tranquilla. // 

Tranquilla,  like  serena. 

Rediit,  a  neuter  verb,  from  redeo,  compounded  of  insep.  prep,  red  gg  and 
eohh  [Prin.  parts],  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person, 
agreeing  with  lux.il 

Die,  a  com.  noun,  5th  dec.,**  masc.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case  after 
prep,  ex.11 

Turbldo,  an  adj.  agreeing  with  die.  Tarn,  an  adverb,  modifying  Var- 
bldo.*b 

Ubi,  an  adverb  of  time,  and,  like  postquam,  a  connective,  and  a  double 
modifier.  It  connects  the  fourth  clause  to  the  first,  and  limits  the 
predicates  vidit  and  obtinuit.cc 

*  $211.  r$229.  »$105.  to  §  182."~ 

)  158.  *  §  149.  «  $  205.  «» $  205.  «  $  209. 

\  205.  l  §  139, 2.  t  $257,  REM.  1.       »  $277.  **  $90. 

&  26.  «  $  157.  «  $  102,  1.  <*  $  277.  REM.  8.       «  $  241. 

5  87.  "$209.  *$70.  ^$78. 

'$193,6.  »§58.  «J62. 

P  J  277.  *  $  257.  ff  $  278. 

9  $46.  y$H9.  «r$  196, 14. 

22* 


258  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  $  281. 

The  subject  of  the  4th  clause  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  first,  with  which 
it  is  connected  ;  it  is  therefore  omitted.0 

The  grammatical  predicate  of  the  4th  clause  is  vidit :  this  is  limited  by 
its  object,  which  is  the  5th  clause. * 

Vidit,  an  act.  verb,  2d  conj.  [Principal  parts  and  formation],  act.  voice, 
ind.  mood,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  pubes 
understood.6 

The  5th  clause  has  no  connective.  Its  grammatical  subject  is  sedem, 
which  is  limited  by  regiam.  Its  grammatical  predicate  is  (esse)  vacuam, 
the  former  being  understood. d 

Sedem,  a  com.  noun,  3d.  dec.,  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  ace.  case.* 

Regiam,  a  possessive  adj.,  derived  from  rex,  agreeing  with  sedem. 

Vacuam,  an  adj.,  agreeing  with  sedem. 

The  6th  clause  is  connected  to  the  leading  clause  by  the  concessive  / 
conjunction  etsi,  to  which  the  adversative  *  tamen  corresponds  in  the  first 
clause. 

Its  subject  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  leading  clause. 

Its  grammatical  predicate  is  credebat,  which  is  limited  by  satis  and 
patrlbus. 

Credebat,  a  neut.  verb,*  3d  conj.  [Principal  parts,  and  formations  of  1st 
root],  act.  voice,  ind.  mood,  imperf.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing 
with  pubcs  understood. 

Sat  is,  an  adverb  of  degree  *  modifying  credebat.* 

Patrlbus,  a  com.  noun,  3d  dec.,*  masc.  gen.,m  plur.  num.,  dat.  case, 
depending  upon  credebat"  and  modified  by  the  relative  clause  following.0 

The  7th  clause,  which  is  connected  by  quip  to  the  preceding  one,  is  in- 
troduced to  show  the  situation  of  those  senators  at  the  time  of  the  removal 
of  Romulus. 

Qui  is  its  grammatical  subject,  and  is  a  relative  pronoun,9  masc.  gen., 
plur.  num.,  agreeing  with  patrlbus  understood/ 

Steterant,  a  neut.  verb,*  1st  conj.,  irregular  in  its  2d  root'  [Principal 
parts,  and  formations  of  2d  root],  act.  voice,  ind.  mood, plup.  tense,  3d  pers. 
plur.,  agreeing  with  qui.c 

Proximi,  an  adj.  of  the  superlative  degree*  [Compare  it],  1st  and  2d  dec., 
masc.  gen.,  plur.  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  qui,  and  also  modifying 
steterant." 

The  8th  clause  has  no  connective.  It  depends  on  the  verb  credebat. 
Its  subject  is  eum,  i.  e.  Romulum  understood.  Its  grammatical  predicate 
is  raptum  (esse)  which  is  modified  by  subllmem  and  procelld. 

Ravtum  (esse),  an  act.  verb,  3d  conj.*  [Principal  parts  in  both  voices, 
and  formations  of  3d  root  in  the  passive],  pass,  voice,  infin.  mood,  perf. 
tense  with  the  meaning  of  plup.,  depending  on  crcdebat." 

Subllmem,  an  adj.  of  3d  dec.  and  two  terminations,*  masc.  gen.,  sing, 
num.,  ace.  case,  agreeing  with  Romulum  understood,y  and  also  modifying 
raptum  esse.u 

Procelld,  a  com.  noun,  1st  dec.,*  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case.0* 


a  i 

S209, 

REM. 

2,  (1.) 

e  ( 

\  198.  4. 

m  ( 

^28. 

^^206. 

to  ( 

J272. 

I  ( 

S229, 

REM. 

,5. 

h  { 

\142. 

n  ^ 

f223. 

«  U65. 

X   { 

109. 

C    ( 

209. 

i  I 

191,  REM.  5. 

0    (j 

s201r 

III.' 

1.  1  $  126,  1. 

V  ( 

205. 

d  ( 

270, 

REM. 

3. 

*  ; 

^277. 

P{ 

«» 

4. 

«§  205,  REM.  15. 

z  \ 

41. 

*  \ 

5  239. 

I  ( 

^71. 

U36. 

t>  ^  159. 

aa  i 

^247 

f  ( 

&198 

3. 

283.   PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;  GENERAL  RULES.      259 


PROSODY. 

Prosody  treats  of  the  quantity  of  syllables, 
and  the  laws  of  versification. 

QUANTITY. 

1.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occu- 
pied in  pronouncing  it. 

2.  A  syllable  is  either  long,  short,  or  common. 

A  long  syllable  requires  double  the  time  occupied  in  pro- 
nouncing a  short  one ;  as,  amdre. 

A  common  syllable  is  one  which,  in  poetry,  may  be  made 
either  long  or  short ;  as  the  middle  syllable  of  ienebra. 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural  or  accidental ; 
— natural,  when  it  depends  on  the  nature  of  its  vowel ;  acci- 
dental, when  it  depends  on  its  position. 

Thus  the  e  in  resisto  is  short  by  nature ;  while  in  resflti  it  is  long  by 
accident,  being  followed  by  two  consonants.* 

4.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  by  certain  es- 
tablished rules,  or,  in  cases  not  included  in  tfye  rules,  by  the 
authority  of  the  poets. 

5.  The  rules  of  quantity  are  either  general  or  special.     The 
former  apply  alike  to  all  the  syllables  of  a  word,  the  latter  to 
particular  syllables. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

§  283.  I.  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diph- 
thong, is  short ;  as,  meus,  patna.  Thus, 

Conscla  mens  recti  famse  mendacia  ridet.  Ovid. 
Ipse  etiam  eximlcs  laudis  succensus  amore.   Virg. 

So  also  when  h  comes  between  the  vowels,  since  n  is  ac- 
counted only  a  breathing ;  as,  rnhil.  See  §  2.  Thus, 

De  ril/ttlo  ritkilj  in  rilhUum  nil  posse  reverti.  Pers. 
Exc.  1.     Flo  has  the  i  long,  when  not  followed  by  er ;  as 
fiunt,fiebam.     Thus, 

Omnia  i&mfienttflgri  quae  posse  negabam.  Ovid. 
It  is  sometimes  found  long  even  before  er;  as,  fi£ret  (Ter.), 
(Plaut.) 


260    PROSODY. — QUANTITY;  GENERAL  RULES.  §  283. 

Exc.  2.  JEJ  is  long  before  i  in  the  termination  of  the  geni- 
tive and  dative  of  the  fifth  declension  ;  &s,faciei.  Thus, 

Non  radii  solis,  neque  lucida  tela  diei.  Lucr. 
But  it  is  short  in  spei,  and  both  long  and  short  in  rei  zndjidei. 

Exc.  3.  A  is  long  in  the  penult  of  old  genitives  in  di  of 
the  first  declension ;  as,  auldi,  pictai. 

So  also  are  a  and  e  in  proper  names  in  alus  or  etus;  as,  Calus,  Pom- 
peius.  Thus, 

^thereum  sensum,  atque  aur&t  simplicis  ignem.   Virg. 
Accipe,  Pompel,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo.  Ovid. 

Exc.  4.  /  is  common  in  genitives  in  ius  ;  as,  urfius,  illius. 
Thus, 

nVlus  et  riitido  stillent  ungueiita  capillo.  Tibull. 

Illius  puro  destillent  tempora  nardo.  Id. 
But  in  allus  it  is  always  long. 

Exc.  5.  The  first  vowel  of  eJieu  is  long  ;  that  of  Diana,  70, 
and  ohe,  is  common. 

Exc.  6.  In  many  Greek  words,  a  vowel  is  long,  though  im- 
mediately followed  by  another  ;  as, 

d€r,  Achala,  AchdoUs,  dia,  eos,  Laertes,  and  words  compounded  with 
laos.  See  §  293,  3.  So  Greek  verbs  having  long  e  oro  (17  or  u>.) 

(1.)  Words  which,  in  Greek,  are  written  with  ei  before  a  vowel,  and  in 
Latin  with  e  or  i,  have  the  e  or  i  long ;  as,  JEntas,  Alexandria,  Cassiopea, 
Clio,  Darius,  elegla,  Galatea,  Medea,  Mausoleum,  Penelopea,  Thalia. 

Hence,  most  adjectives  in  eus,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  have 
the  e  long ;  as,  Cythereus,  Pelopeus. 

Exc.  Jlcademia,  chorea,  Malea,  platea,  and  some  patronymics  and 
patrials  in  els,  have  the  penult  common ;  as,  Nereis. 

(2.)  Greek  genitives  in  eos,  and  accusatives  in  ea,  from  nominatives  in 
eus,  generally  shorten  the  e;  as,  Orpheos,  Orphea ; — but  the  e  is  some- 
times lengthened  by  the  Ionic  dialect ;  as,  Cepheos,  Ilionea. 

(3.)  Greek  words  in  ais,  ois,  aius,  eius,  oius,  aon,  and  ion,  generally 
lengthen  the  first  vowel;  as,  Ndis,  Minois,  Gralus,  Nerelus,  Minolus, 
Machdon,  Ixlon.  But  Thebais,  Simois,  Phaon,  Deucalion,  Pygmalion,  and 
many  others,  shorten  the  former  vowel. 

NOTE  1.  Greek  words  in  aon  and  ion,  with  o  short  in  the  genitive, 
have  the  penult  long ;  but  with  o  long  in  the  genitive,  they  have  it  short , 
as,  Amythaon,  -donis  ;  Deucalion,  -onis. 

NOTE  2.  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (gen.  eos),  as  Orpheus,  always 
have  the  eu  a  diphthong  in  the  original,  and,  with  very  few  exceptions,  in 
the  Latin  poets. 

II.  A  diphthong  is  long;  as,  aiirum,  fcenus,  Eubaza, 
Thus, 

Thcsauros  ignotum  argenti  pondus  et  auri.  Virg. 
Infermque  lacus,  JE&aqut  insula  Circae.  Id. 


$  283.   PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;  GENERAL  RULES.      261 

* 

Exc.  1.  Pr&,  in  composition,  is  short  before  a  vowel ;  as, 
pr&ustus,  praacutus.  Thus, 

Nee  tota  tamen  ille  prior  pr&euntt  caring.  Virg. 
In  Statius,  and  Sidonius  Apollinaris,  it  is  found  long. 
Exc.  2.    A  diphthong,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  when  the  next  word  begins 
with  a  vowel,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

InsulcB  lonio  in  magno,  quas  dira  Celseno.   Virg. 

REMARK.  U,  followed  by  another  vowel,  is,  in  prosody,  not  considered 
as  a  diphthong ;  as,  quatio,  qu$ror,  cequorj  lingua,  sanguts. 

III.  A  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long ;  as, 

allus  for  aliius  ;  cogo  for  coago  ;  nil  for  nihil;  junior  forjuvSnior.    Thus, 
Tityre  edge  pecus,  tu  post  carecta  latebas.   Virg. 

IV.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  two  consonants,  a 
double  consonant,  or  the  letter  j,  is  long  by  position ;  as, 
arma,  bellum,  axis,  gaza,  major.     Thus, 

PdscZre  oportet  oves  deductum  dicere  carmen.  Virg. 

JV*ec  myrtus  vincet  corylos  ;  nee  laurea  Phcebi.  Id. 

At  nobis,  Pax  alma,  veni,  spicamque  teneto.  Tibull. 

Rara  juvant :  primis  sic  major  gratia  pomis.  Mart.          *2%& 

Exc.  1.  The  compounds  ofjugum  have  i  short  before  j ;  as, 
bijugus,  quadrijugus.  Thus, 

Interea  Vtjugis  infert  se    Lucagus  albis.  Virg. 

REMARK.  The  vowel  is  long  by  position  when  either  one  or 
both  of  the  consonants  is  in  the  same  word  with  it ;  but  when 
both  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  following  word,  the  vowel  is 
either  long  or  short ;  as, 

Tolle  moras;  semper  nocult  difFerre  paratis.  Lucan. 
Ferte  citi  ferrum ;  date  teld ;  scandlte  muros.   Virg. 
Ne  tamen  ignoret,  quae  sit  sententid  scripto.  Ovid. 
A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  a  double  consonant  or  j9  is 
not  lengthened. 

Exc.  2.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  a  mute  followed  by 
a  liquid,  is  common ;  as,  agris,  pharetray  volucris,  poplites, 
cochlear.  Thus, 

Et  primo  similis  volucri,  mox  vera  volucris.  Ovid. 
Natum  ante  ora  patris,  pdtrem  qui  obtruncat  ad  aras.  Id. 
Nox  tenebras  profert,  Phoebus  fugat  inde  tenebras.  Id. 
REM.  1.    If  the  vowel  is  naturally  long,  it  continues  so;  as,  salubrisj 
ambulacrum. 

REM.  2.  A  mute  and  liquid  render  the  preceding  short  vowel  common 
only  when  they  are  such  as  may  begin  a  Latin  word,  or  a  word  derived 
from  the  Greek.  In  compound  words,  of  which  the  former  part  ends  with 
a  mute,  and  the  latter  begins  with  a  liquid,  a  short  vowel  before  the  mute 
is  made  long  by  position  ;  as,  dbluo,  obruo,  siiblevo,  quamobrem. 

REM.  3.  A  mute  and  liquid  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  seldom  lengthen 
the  short  vowel  of  the  preceding  word. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;     SPECIAL    RULES.        $  284. 

REM.  4.  In  Latin  words,  a  short  vowel  is  rendered  common  only  be- 
fore a  mute  with  I  or  r;  but,  in  words  of  Greek  origin,  also  before  a  mute 
with  mom;  as  in  Atlas,  Tecmessa,  Procne,  Cycnus. 


SPECIAL  RULES. 

FIRST   AND   MIDDLE   SYLLABLES. 
I.  DERIVATIVE  WORDS. 

§  284.  Derivative  words  retain  the  quantity  of  their 
primitives;  as, 

animal,  anlmdtus,  from  anlma ;  gemelundus,  from  gZmtre;  fdmtlia, 
from  famulus  ;  mdternus,  from  mater  ;  propinquus,  fromprope. 

REM.  1.  Derivatives  from  increasing  nouns  of  the  second 
and  third  declension  agree  in  quantity  with  the  increment  of 
their  primitives  ;  as, 

funebris,  fromfuneris;  virglneus,from  mrginis  ;  saluber,  from  salutis. 

REM.  2.  In  verbs,  the  derived  tenses  agree  in  quantity 
with  the  special  root  from  which  they  are  formed  ;  as, 

mdvSbam,  mdvebo,  mdveam,  moverem,  move,  movere,  mdvens,  movendus, 
from  m&v,  the  root  of  the  present,  with  6  short ; — mover  am,  moverim, 
movissem,  mdve"ro,  movisse,  from  mov,  the  root  of  the  perfect,  with  6  long; 
moturus  and  motus,  from  mot,  the  root  of  the  supine,  with  6  also  long. 

Sdlutum  and  volutum  have  the  first  syllable  short,  as  if  from  soluo,  volus. 
So  glnui,  gZrtitum,,  as  if  from  geno;  and  potui,  from  potis  sum  (possum). 

jQratrum,  simulacrum,  have  their  penult  long,  as  derived  from  the  supines 
aratum  and  simulatum  ;  monlmentum  and  inltium  have  their  antepenult 
short,  as  derived  from  the  supines  monUum  and  iriitum. 

Exc.  1.  Perfects  and  supines  of  two  syllables  have  the 
first  syllable  long,  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short ; 
as, 

veni,  vldi,  fed,  from  vSnio,  video,  facio  ;  casum,  motum,  visum,  from  cado, 
mtiveo,  video.  But, 

(1.)  These  seven  perfects  have  the  first  syllable  short : — bibi, 
dedi,fidi  (fromjindo),  scidi,  steti,  stiti,  tuli.  So  perculi. 

The  first  syllable  is  also  short  before  a  vowel  (§  283)  ;  as,  rui. 

(2.)  These  ten  supines  have  the  first  syllable  short : — citum 
(from  cieo),  datum,  itum,  litum,  quitum,  ratum,  rutum,  sdtum, 
situm,  and  stdtum. 

So  also  the  obsolete  futum,  from/iio,  whence  comes  futurus. 

Exc.  2.  Reduplicated  polysyllabic  perfects  have  the  first  two 
syllables  short ;  as, 

cSclni,  tKfigi,  dldlci,  from  cano,  tango,  disco.  But  the  second  syllable  is 
sometimes  made  long  by  position ;  as,  momordi,  tStendi 


§  285.     PROSOI>Y. QUANTITY  ;     COMPOUND    WORDS.  263 

Clcldi  (from  cado)  and  pgpedi  also  have  the  second  syllable  long. 

Exc.  3.     The  o  in  pdsui  and  pdsitum,  is  short,  though  long  in  pono. 

Exc.  4.  The  a  in  da,  imperative  of  do,  is  long,  though  short  in  the 
other  parts  of  the  verb. 

Exc.  5.  Desiderative  verbs  in  urio  have  the  u  short,  though,  in  the 
third  special  root  from  which  they  are  formed,  it  is  long ;  as,  ccznaturio 
from  ccendtu,  the  third  root  of  cceno.  So  parturio,  esurio,  nupturio. 

Exc.  6.  Frequentative  verbs,  formed  from  the  third  special  root  of  the 
first  conjugation,  have  the  i  short;  as,  clamlto,  vollto.  See  §  187,  II.  1. 

Exc.  7.  Many  other  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity 
of  their  primitives. 

1.  Some  have  a  long  vowel  from  a  short  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Deni,  from  decem.  Lex  (l£gis),from  Iggo.  Semen,  from  s&ro. 

Fomes  and  >  from  Mobilis,/r0m  moveo.  Stlpendium,/r0m  stips 

Fornentum,  )  &veo.  Regula,         )  from,  (stipis). 

Humanus,/r0m  homo.  Rex  (regis),  )  rego.  Tegula,/r0m  t6go. 

Laterna,/row  lateo.  Secius,/rom  secus. 

Macero,/row  maceo.  S^des,  from  sedeo. 

2.  Some  have  a  short  vowel  from  a  long  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Dicax,/r0ra  dlco.  Molestus,/row  moles.        Sagax,/r0w  sagio. 

Disertus,/7-om  dlssero.     Nato,/r/?m  natu.  Sopor,  from  sopio. 

Dux(dQcis),/romduco.     Noto,/r0w  notu.  Vadum,/rom  vado. 

Fides,  from  f  ido.  Quasillus,/rom  qualus.      Voco,/rom  vox  (vocis.) 

Fragor,    )  from 
Fragllis,  )  frango. 

Some  other  words  might,  perhaps,  with  propriety  be  added  to  these  lists  ; 
but,  in  regard  to  the  derivation  of  most  of  them,  grammarians  are  not  en- 
tirely agreed. 

REMARK.  Some  of  these  irregularities  have,  perhaps,  arisen  from  the 
influence  of  syncope  and  crasis.  Thus  mobllis  may  have  been  movlbllis ; 
motum,  movltum,  &c. 

Sometimes  the  vowel  in  the  derived  word  becomes  short  by  dropping 
one  of  the  consonants  which,  in  the  primitive,  made  it  long  by  position ; 
as,  dlsertus,  from  dlssero.  So,  when  the  vowel  of  the  primitive  is  short 
before  another  vowel,  it  is  sometimes  made  long  by  the  insertion  of  a  con- 
sonant ;  as,  hibernus,  from  Itiems. 

The  first  syllable  in  liqitidus  is  supposed  to  be  common,  as  coming  from 
Iquor  or  Uqueo  ;  as, 

Crassaque  conveniunt  llqu^dis^  et  liqvftda  crassis.  Lucr. 


II.  COMPOUND  WORDS. 

§  285.     Compound  words  retain  the  quantity  of  the 
wordb  which  compose  them  ;  as, 

aefero,  of  de  and  f&ro  ;  adoro,  of  ad  and  oro.     So  dbdrior,  amdvSo,  cir- 
ctomto,  c6mldo,  enltor,  produco,  suborno. 


264  PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;     COMPOUND    WORDS.     §  285. 

The  change  of  a  vowel  or  diphthong  in  forming  the  com- 
pound, does  not  alter  its  quantity  ;  as, 

concldo,fromcddo;  coneldo,  from  c&do  ;  erlgo,  from  rSgo;  recludo,  from 
claudo;  inlquus,  from  aquus. 

Exc.  1.  A  long  syllable  in  the  simple  word  becomes  short  in  the  follow- 
ing compounds  : — affnttus  and  cognltus,  from  notus;  dejero  and  pejero,  from 
juro t  hbdie,  from  hoodie;  nihltum  and  nihll,  from  hllum ;  semisdpltus, 
from  sopio  ;  causidlcus,  and  other  compounds  ending  in  dlcus,  from  dlco. 

Exc.  2.  Imbedllus,  from  badllum,  has  the  second  syllable  long.  The 
participle  ambitus  has  the  penult  long  from  Itum,  but  the  nouns  ambitus 
and  ambltio  follow  the  rule. 

Exc.  3.  Innuba,  pronuba,  and  subnuba,  from  nubo,  have  u  short;  but  in 
connubium,  it  is  common. 

Exc,  4.  O  final,  in  the  compounds  of  do  and  sto,  is  common,  though 
long  in  the  simple  verbs. 

NOTE.  It  may  be  observed,  that  prepositions  of  one  syllable,  which  end 
in  a  vowel,  are  long  (§  §  294,  295,  and  297)  ;  those  which  end  in  a  single 
consonant  are  short  (§§  299  and  301). 

Exc.  5.  Pro,  in  the  following  compounds,  is  short : — procclla,pr6cul,  prd- 
fdnus,  profari,  prdfecto,  profestus,  prqficiscor,  profiteer,  profugio,  pro/ugus^ 
pro/undo,  profundus,  pronepos,  proneptis,  propero,  and  protervus.  It  is 
common  in  procure,  profundo,  propago^  propello,  proplno,  and  propulso. 

REM.  1.  The  Greek  preposition  pro  (before)  is  short  j  as,  propketa. 
In  prologus  it  is  long. 

REM.  2.     The  inseparable  prepositions  di  and  se  are  long;  as, 

dlduco,  sepdro.     But  di  is  short  in  dlsertus. 

REM.  3.     The  inseparable  preposition  re  or  red  is  short :  as, 

remiito,  refero,  rgdamo.  But  in  the  impersonal  verb  refert^  re  is  long, 
as  coming  from  res. 

REM.  4.  Except  in  prepositions,  a,  ending  the  former  part 
of  a  compound  word,  is  long ;  e,  iy  o,  u,  and  y,  are  short ;  as, 

maZ0,  quapropter,  trddo  (trans  do} ;  nefas,  valedico,  hujuscemddi  ;  bleeps, 
omnlpotens,  signiflco  ;  hodie,  quandoquldem,  phildsophus ,  ducenti^  locuplcs, 
Trojugena;  Poiyddrus,  Eurypylus,  Thrasybulus,  trldens. 

Exc.  1.  A.  In  quasi,  eadem,  when  not  an  ablative,  and  in  some  Greek 
compounds,  a  is  short ;  as,  catapulta,  hexameter. 

Exc.  2.  E.  The  e  is  long  in  credo,  nemo,  nequam,  nequando,  nequd- 
quam,  nequidquam,  nequis,  nequitia ;  memet,  me  cum,  tecum,  secum,  sese, 
vecors,  vesanus,  veneflcus,  and  videlicet,  (see  §  295 ;) — also  in  words  com- 
pounded with  se  for  sex  or  semi  ;  as,  sedtcim,  semestris,  semodius;  but  in 
selibra  it  is  found  short  in  Martial. 

NOTE.  The  e  in  videlicet,  as  in  vide,  is  sometimes  made  short.  See 
§  295,  Exc.  3. 

E  is  common  in  some  verbs  compounded  wiihfacio;  as,  liquefacio,  pate* 
facio,  rarefacio,  tab ef ado,  tepefacio. 

Exc.  3.  I.  (1.)  The  i  is  long  in  those  compounds  in  which  the  first 
part  is  declined,  (§  296 ;)  as,  quldam,  qulvis,  quillbet,  quantlvis,  quantl- 
cunque,  tantldcm,  unlculque,  eldem,  relpubllccB,  qualicunque,  utrlque. 

(2.)  /  is  also  long  in  those  compounds  which  may  be  separated  without 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;     INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS.       265 

altering  the  sense,  (§  296 ;)  as,  ludlmagister,  lucnfacio,  slquis,  agrl- 
cultura. 

(3.)  /,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  sometimes  made 
long  by  contraction ;  as,  tiblcen  for  tilVtcen,  from  tibia  and  cano.  See 
§  283,  III. 

(4.)  /  is  long  in  blgce,  quadriga,  iticet,  sclftcet. 

(5.)  In  idertij  when  masculine,  i  is  long ;  but  when  neuter,  it  is  short. 
The  i  of  ublque  and  utroblque,  the  second  in  ibidem,  and  the  first  in  nlrnl- 
rurn,,  are  long.  In  ubicumque,  ubinam  and  ubivis,  as  in  ubi,  i  is  common. 

(6.)  Compounds  of  dies  have  the  final  i  of  the  former  part  long ;  as, 
biduum,  trlduum,  merldies,  quotldie,  quotldidnus,  pridie,  postrldie. 

NOTE.  In  Greek  words,  i,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound,  is 
short,  unless  it  comes  from  the  diphthong  ei,  or  is  made  long  or  common 
by  position  ;  as,  CaLUmachus. 

Exc.  4.  O.  (1.)  In  compounds,  the  final  o  of  contro,  intro,  retro,  and 
quando  (except  quandoqutdem,)  is  long ;  as,  controversia,  introduco,  retro- 
cedo,  quandoque.  0  is  long  also  in  alioquin,  ceteroquin,  utroque,  utroblque. 

(2.)  O  is  long  in  the  compounds  of  quo  and  eo  ;  as,  quomodo,  quocunque, 
quominuS)  quocirca,  quovis,  quoque  ;  eodem,  eone  ;  but  in  the  conjunction 
quoque,  it  is  short. 

(3.)  Greek  words  which  are  written  with  an  omega  have  the  o  long ; 
as,  geometra,  Minotanrus,  lagopus. 

Exc.  5.  U.  The  u  is  long  in  Jupiter  and  judlco.  The  final  u  in  the 
former  part  of  usucapio  and  usuvenio  is  regularly  long.  See  §  298. 


III.    INCREMENT   OF  NOUNS. 

§  286.  1.  A  noun  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its 
cases,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular  ;  as, 
pax,  pads ;  sermo,  sermonis. 

The  number  of  increments  in  any  case  of  a  noun  is  equal  to 
that  of  its  additional  syllables. 

2.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increment  in  the  singular. 
But  iter,  supellex,  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  and  sometimes 

jecur,  have  two ;  as, 

12.  i.    2 

iter,  i-tin-e-ns  ;  anceps,  an-cip-l-tis  ; 

\    2  12. 

supellex,  su-pel-lec-fl-lis  ;  jecur,  je-cin-6-ris. 

The  double  increase  of  iter,  &c.,  in  the  singular  number  arises  from  their 
coming  from  obsolete  nominatives,  containing  a  syllable  more  than  those 
now  in  use ;  as,  itlner,  &c. 

3.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declension 
have  one  increment  more  than  the  genitive  singular  ;  as, 

rex,  Gen.  re-gis,  D.  and  Ab.  reg-l-bus. 

sermo,        ser-mo-nis,         ser-mon-l-bus. 

iter,  i-tin-e-ris,          it-i-ner-l-bus. 

4.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  never  considered  as  the  in- 

23 


266        PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;      INCREMENT    OF    NOUNS. 

crement.  If  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ; 
if  two,  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the 
second  ;  and  if  three,  the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is  called 
the  first,  the  antepenult  the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third 
increment. 

5.  In  the  third  declension,  the  quantity  of  the  first  increment 
in  all  the  other  cases  is  the  same  as  in  the  genitive  singular;  as, 

sermonis,  serjnoni,  sermonem,  sermone,  sermones,  scrmonum,  sermoriilus. 
Bolus,  or  lulus,  from  bos,  bovis,  is  lengthened  by  contraction  from  bdvlbus. 

NOTE.  As  adjectives  and  participles  are  declined  like  nouns,  the  same 
rules  of  increment  apply  to  all  of  them;  and  so  also  to  pronouns. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    SINGULAR    NUMBER. 

OF    THE    FIRST,    FOURTH,    AND    FIFTH    DECLENSIONS. 

$  287.  1.  When  nouns  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions 
increase  in  the  singular  number,  the  increment  consists  of  a  vowel  before 
the  final  vowel,  and  its  quantity  is  determined  by  the  first  general  rule 
with  its  exceptions.  See  §  283. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  SECOND  DECLENSION. 

2.  The  increments  of  the  second  declension  are  short ; 
as, 

gener,  generi  ;  satur,  saturi;  tener,  teneri;  vir,  xiri.    Thus, 
O  pu&ri  !  ne  tanta  antmis  assuescite  bella.   Virg. 
Monstra  sinunt :  generos  externis  affore  ab  oris.  Id. 
Exc.    The  increment  of  Her  and  Celtlber  is  long.    For  that  of  genitives 
in  ius,  see  §  283,  Exc.  4. 

INCREMENTS    OF    THE    THIRD    DECLENSION. 

3.  The  increments  of  the  third  declension  in  a  and  o 
are  long ;  those  in  e,  i,  u,  and  y,  are  short;  as, 

animal,  animdlis  ;  audax,  auddcis ;  sermo,  sermOnis  ;  ferox,  ferGcis ; 
opus,  optris  ;  celer,  celeris  ;  miles,  milltis ;  supplex,  suppVlcis ;  murmur^ 
murmuris  ;  cicur,  cicuris.  Thus, 

Pronaque  cum  spectent  animdlia  cetera  terram.  Ovid. 

Hsec  turn  multiply ci  populos  sermone  replebat.   Virg. 

Incumbent  gen&ris  lapsi  sarclre  rulnas.  Id. 

Qualem  virgineo  demessum  polllce  florem.  Id. 

Aspice,  ventosi  ceciderunt  murmuris  aurro.  Id. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

1.  Masculines  in  al  and  err  (except  Car  and  Nar)  increase 
short ;  as,  Annibal,  Anmbdlis. 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;  INCREMENT  OF  NOUNS.   267 

Par  and  its  compounds,  and  the  following — anas,  mas,  vas  (vddis) 
baccar,  hepar,  jubar,  Lar,  nectar,  and  sal — also  increase  short. 

2.  A,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  be- 
fore it,  is  short ;  as,  Arabs,  Ardbis. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  (adis,  dnis  or  dtis)  increase  short ; 
as,  poema,  poemdtis ;   lampas,  lampddis ;  Melas,  Meldnis. 

4.  The  following  in  ax  increase  short  :—abax,  anthrax,  Atax,  Atrax, 
climax,   colax,  corax,  dropax,  fax,  harpax,  panax,  phylax,  smilax,   and 
styrax. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  O. 

1.  O,  in  the  increment  of  neuter  nouns,  is  short ;  as, 
marmor,  marmdris  ;  corpus,  corpdris  ;  ebur,  eboris.     But  os  (the  mouth), 

and  the  neuter  of  comparatives,  like  their  masculine  and  feminine,  in- 
crease long.     The  increment  of  ador  is  common. 

2.  O  is  short  in  the  increment  of  Greek  nouns  in  o  or  on, 
which,  in  the  oblique  cases,  have  omicron ;  as, 

Aedon,    Aedonis  ;    Agamemnon,    Agamemndnis.      Sidon,    Orion,    and 
JEgaon,  have  the  increment  common. 

3.  In  the  increment  of  gentile  nouns  in  o  or  on,  o  is  gene- 
rally short ;   as, 

Macedo,  Macedonis.     So,  Sendnes,  Teutdnes,  &c. 

But  the  following  have  o  long: — Eburdnes,  LacGnes,  Isnes,  Nasamdnes, 
SuessOnes  (or  -iones),  Vettones,  Burgundiones.    Britones  has  the  o  common 

4.  Greek  nouns  in  or  increase  short ;  as,  Hector,  Hectoris , 
rhetor,  rhetoris  ;  Agenor,  Agenoris. 

5.  Compounds  of  pus  (TCOVS),  as  tripus,  polypus,  and  also  arbor,  memor, 
bos,  compos,  impos,  and  lepus,  increase  short. 

6.  O,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before 
it,  is  short ;   as, 

scrobs,  scrobis ;  inops,  inopis.      But  it  is  long  in  the  increment  01 
cercops,  Cyclops,  and   hydrops. 

7.  The  increment  ofMlobrox,  Cappadox,  and  pracox,  is  also  short. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  Nouns  in  en,  enis  (except  Hymen),  lengthen  their  incre- 
ment ;  as,  Siren,  Sirenis.  So,  Anienis,  Nerienis,  from  Anio,  &ic. 

2.  Hares,  locuples,  mansues,  merces,  and  quies — also  Iber,  ver,  lex,  rex, 
and  vervex — plebs,  seps,  and  halec — increase  long. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  (except  air  and  csther)  increase 
long  ;  as,  magnes,  magnetis ;  crater,  crateris. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  Verbals  in  trix,  and  adjectives  in  ix,  increase  long;  as, 
victrix,  victrlcis  ;  felix,felicis. 


268   PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;  INCREMENT  OF  VERBS. 

2.  The   following   nouns   in  ix    also   increase   long : — cervix,  cicatrix, 
comix,  coturnix,  lodix,  matrix,  perdix,  phoenix,  radix,  and  spadix.  So  also 
vibex  (vibicis). 

3.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  is  in  inis,  increase  long  ;  as, 
delpJiin,  delphinis ;  Saldmis,  Salamlnis. 

4.  The  following  nouns  in  is  increase  long  :— dis,glis,  Us,  vis  Jfosis, 
Quiris,  and  Samnis.    The  increment  of  Psophis  is  common. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

1.  Genitives  in  udis,  uris,  and  utis,  from  nominatives  in  ws, 
have  the  penult  long ;  as, 

palus,  paludis  ;  tellus,  telluris  ;  virtus,  virtutis.  But  intcrcus,  Ligus 
and  pecus,  increase  short. 

2.  Fur,frux  (obs.),  lux,  and  Pollux,  increase  long. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  Y. 

1.  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  is  in  ynis,  increase  long  ;  as, 
Phorcyn,  Phorcynis;  Trachys,  Trachynis. 

2.  The  increment  of  coccyx,  lombyx,  Ceyx,  mormyr,,  and  gryps,  is 
long ;  that  of  Beoryx  and  sandyx  is  common. 

INCREMENTS    OF    THE    PLURAL    NUMBER. 

§  288.  A  noun  in  the  plural  number  is  said  to  increase, 
when,  in  any  case,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  ablative  sin- 
gular. 

When  a  noun  increases  in  the  plural  number,  its  penult  is 
called  the  plural  increment ;  as,  sa  in  musdrum,  no  in  domino- 
rum,  pi  in  rupium  and  rupibus. 

In  plural  increments,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long,  i  and  u 
are  short ;  as, 

bondrum,  animdbus,  rSrum,  rebus,  generorum,  ambobus ;  sermorilbitSj 
lactibus.  (But  vis  makes  vires,)  Thus, 

Appia,  longarum,  teritur,  reglna  viarum.  Stat. 
Sunt  lacrymee  rerum,  et  mentem  mortalia  tangunt.  Virg. 
Atque  alii,  quorum,  comoedia  prisca  virorum  est.  Hor. 
Portubus  egredior,  ventisque  ferenftbus  usus.  Ovid. 


IV.     INCREMENT  OF   VERBS. 

§  289.  1.  A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its 
parts,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  second  person  singular 
of  the  present  indicative  active;  as,  das,  dd-tis;  doces,  do- 
ce-mus 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ,  INCREMENT  OF  VERBS.     269 

2.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  part  of  a  verb  is  equal 
to  that  of  its  additional  syllables.     In  verbs,  as  in  nouns,  the 
last  syllable  is  never  considered  the  increment.      If  a  verb  has 
but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  and  this  first  increment, 
through  all  the  variations  of  the  verb,  except  in  reduplicated 
tenses,  continues  equally  distant  from  the  first  syllable.     The  re- 
maining increments  are  numbered  successively  from  the  first;  as, 

a-mas,  mo-nes,  au-dis, 
i                                         i  i     . 

a-ma-mus,  mo-ne-tur,  au-dl-tis, 

12  12  12 

am-a-ba-mus,  mon-e-re-tur,  au-di-e-bas, 

123  1.23  1234. 

am-a-ve-ra-mus.  mon-e-bim-i-ni.  au-di-e-bam-i-ni. 

A  verb  in  the  active  voice  may  have  three  increments ;  in  the  passive, 
it  may  have  four. 

3.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,    an 
active  voice  may  be  supposed,  formed  regularly  from  the  same 
root. 

1  12 

Thus  the  increments  of  la-td-tur,  l&t-a-la-tur ,  &c.,  are  reckoned  from 
the  supposed  verb  l&to,  l&tas. 

<§>  290.     In  the  increments  of  verbs,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long ; 
i  and  u  are  short ;  as, 

a/ware,  monere,facUote,  volumus,  regebdmtni.     Thus, 
Et  cantare  pares,  et  respondere  parati.   Virg. 
Sic  equidem  ducebam  ammo,  rebarque  futurum.  Id. 
Cumque  loqui  poterit,  matrem  facltote  salutet.  Ovid. 
Scindltur  interea  studia  in  contraria  vulgus.   Virg. 
Nos  num^ros  sumus,  et  fruges  consumgre  nati.  Id. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

The  first  increment  of  do   is   short ;    as,  damns,  dabdmus, 
circumdare,  circumddbdmus. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  E  before  r  is  short  in  the  Jirst  increment  of  all  the  pres- 
ent and  imperfect  tenses  of  the  third   conjugation,  and  in  the 
second  increment  in  beris  and  bere ;  as, 

reglre  (infin.  and  imperat.),  reveris  or  regZrc  (pres.  ind.  pass.),  reg£rem 
and  reg&rer  (imp.  subj.)  ;  amaotns,  amabert, ;  mvnebZri,/} moncbgre. 

NOTE.     Vdim,  veils,  &xi.,  from  volo,  have  the  e  short,  according  to  §  284. 

2.  E  is  short  before  ram,  rim,  ro,  and  the  persons  formed 
from  them ;  as, 

iii  amav&rat,  ama'oZrim,  monuSrimus,  rexSro,  audivZritis. 

•  otherwise, 


stettrunt, 
eee  Systole,  §  307. 


270         PROSODY. QUANTITY  J  PENULTS.      $  291. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  I  before  v,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  second  root,  is  long ; 
as,  petivi,  audivi,  qu&sivit,  audwimus,  audiveram. 

2.  /  is  long  in  the  penult  of  polysyllabic  supines  from  verbs 
whose  perfects  end  in  wi ;  as,  petitum,  qucBsitum.     See  §  284, 
REM.  2.     So  also  recensltus,  oblitus. 

3.  The  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  except  in 
imus  of  the  perfect  indicative,  is  long ;  as, 

audlre,  audlrem,  venlmuSj  but  in  the  perfect  veriimus.  So  in  the 
ancient  forms  in  ibam,  ibo,  of  the  fourth  conjugation ;  as,  nutrlbaty 
lembunt;  and  also  in  ibam  and  ibo,  from  eo.  > 

When  a  vowel  follows,  the  i  is  short,  by  §  283;  as,  audiuni,  audUbam. 

4.  /is  long  in  simus,  sltis,  vellmus,  velitis,  and  their  compounds;  as, 
posslmus.  adsimus,  mallmus,  nollmus,  and  nollto,  nollte,  nolitote. 

5.  /  in  rimus  and  ritis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect 
subjunctive,  is  common ;  as, 

viderltis  (Ovid),  dixerltis  (Id.),fecerimus  (Catull.),  contigentis  (Ovid)  ; 
egerlmus  (Virg.). 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

U  is  long  in  the  increment  of  supines,  and  of  participles 
formed  from  the  third  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 

seculus,  solutus,  secuturus,  solttturus. 

RULES  FOR  THE  QUANTITY  OF  THE  PENULTIMATE  AND 
ANTEPENULTIMATE  SYLLABLES  OF  WORDS  OF  CER- 
TAIN TERMINATIONS. 

I.  PENULTS. 

§  291.  1.  Words  ending  in  acus,  icus,  and  icum,  shorten 
the  penult ;  as, 

amaracus,  JEgyptiacus,  academlcus,  rusttcus,  trittcum,  viaticum. 

Except  merdcus,  opacus ;  amicus,  apricus,  antlcus,  ficus,  lumbricus, 
mendicus,  postlcus,  pudicus,  umbilicus,  vicus,  picus,  spicus,  Dacus. 

2.  Words  ending  in  abrum,  ubrum,  acrum,  ucrum,  and  atrumy 
lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

candelabrum,  delubrumj  la'cacrum,  involucrum,  veratrum,  lucrum. 

3.  Nouns  in,  ca  lengthen  the  penult ;    as, 
cloaca,  apotheca,  lorica,  phdca,  lactuca. 

Except  allca,  brasslca,  dlca,  futtca,  rnanilca,  pedica,  perftca,  scutlca, 
phalarlca,  sulllca,  tunica,  vomlca ;  and  also  some  nouns  in  ica,  derived 
from  adjectives  in  Icus  ;  as,  fabrlca,  grammatica,  &c.  So  marilccB. 

4.  Patronymics  in  ades  and  ides  shorten  the  penult ;    as, 
Atlantiades,  Priamides. 

Except  those  in  ides  which  are  formed  from  nouns  in  eus  or  es ;  as, 
Strides,  from  Atreus  ;  Ncoclides,  from  Neocles ;  except,  also,  Amphiaraldes* 
Belldes,  tfmyclldes,  Lycurgldes. 


$291.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY;    PENULTS.  271 

5.  Patronymics  and  similar  words  in  ais,  eis,  and  ois,  lengthen 
the  penult ;  as, 

jQchdis,  Chryseis,  Minois.  Except  Phocdis  and  Thebdis.  The  penult  of 
Nereis  is  common. 

6.  Words  in  do  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

vddo,  cedo,formldo,  rodo,  testudo,  altitude.    Except  solldo,  modo. 
unedo,  cddo,  divldo,  edo  (to  eat),  spado,  trepldo.     Rudo  is  common. 

7.  Words  in  idus  shorten  the  penult ;  those  in  udus  lengthen 
it ;  as,  callidus,  perfidus ;  ludus,  nudus. 

Except  Idus,  fldus,  infldus,  nidus,  sldus. 

8.  Nouns  in  ga  and  go  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

collega,  saga,  ruga,  imago,  caligo,  cerugo.  Except  callga,  toga,  hat  - 
pdgo,  llgo,ptdga,  (a  region),  fuga,  stega,  ecloga,  ego. 

9.  Words  in  le,  les,  and  Us,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
crindle,  mantele,  anclle;  ales,  miles,  proles ;  anndlis,  crudelis,  civllis, 

curulis. — Except  verbals  in  His;  as,  agllis,  amabllis ; — adjectives  matilis, 
as,  aquatilis,  umbratilis  ; — so  also,  periscelis,  dapsUis,  dacttjlis,  gracllis, 
humilis,  parllis,  simllis,  sterilis,  indoles,  soboles,  mugilis,  stngilis,  metrop- 
olis, oxalis,  parddlis,  male. 

10.  Words  in  elus,  ela,  elum,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  pha- 
selus,  querela,  prelum.     Except  getus,  gelum,  scelus. 

11.  Diminutives  in  olus,  ola,  olum,  ulus,  ula,  ulum,  also  words 
in  ilus,  and  those  in  ulus,  ula,  and  ulum,  of  more  than  two  syl- 
lables, shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

urceolus,  filiola,  tuguriolum,  lectulus,  ratiuncula,  corculum ;  Tutllus, 
garrulus,  fabula.  Exc.  asllus. 

12.  Words  in  ma  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

fdrna,  poema,  rlma,  axioma,  pluma.  Exc.  anlma,  coma,  lacrgma,  vic- 
tima,  argema,  hama,  propoma,  thema. 

13.  A  vowel  before  final  men  or  mentum  is  long;  as, 

levamen,  gramen,  crlmen,flumen,jumentum,  atramentum. 
Except  tdmen,  columen,  Hymen,  elementum,  and  certain  verbal  nouns 
of  the  second  and  third  conjugations ;  as,  documentum,  regimen,  teglmen,  &c. 

14.  Words  ending  in  imus  or  ymus  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
animus,  finitimus,f of tisstmus,  maxlmus,  thymus. 

Except  blmus,  limits,  mlmus,  oplmus,  quadrimus,  slmus,  trlmus,  patrl- 
mus,  matrlmus,  and  two  superlatives,  imus  and  primus. 

NOTE.  When  an  adjective  ends  in  umus  for  imus,  the  quantity  remains 
the  same  ;  as,  decumus,  optumus,  maxumus,  for  declmus,  &c. 

15.  A,  e,  o,  and  u,  before  final  mus  and  mum,  are  long;  as, 
rdmu.s,  remus,  extremus,  promus,  dumus,  pomum,  volemum. 

Except  atomus,  balsdmum,  cinndmum,  domus,  glomus,  humus,  postumus, 
thaldmus,  tomus,  calamus,  nemus,  monogdmus. 

16.  Words  in  na,  ne,  ni,  and  nis,  lengthen  the  penult ;   as, 
Idna,  arena,  carlna,  matrona,  luna,  mane,  anemone,  septeni,  octoni,  ind 

nis,  finis,  immunis.     Exc    advena,  cottdna,  ptisdna,  destlna,  mince,  bene* 


272       PROSODY. — QUANTITY;  PENULTS. 

gena,  sine,  cam's,  clnis,juv£nis  ;  and  the  following  in  Ina, — bucclna,  dom\na} 
fiscina ,  femina,  fusclna,  lamina,  macklna,  paglna,  patina,  sarclna,  trutlna. 
So  compounds  of  geno  ;  as,  indigena,  Majugena. 

17.  Adjectives  in  inus,  derived  from  names  of  trees,  plants, 
and  stones,  and  from  adverbs  of  time,  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

cedrlnus,  faglnus,  croclnus,  hyacinthinus,  adumantlnus,  crystalllnus  ', 
crastlnus,  diutlnus  ;  also  annotlnus,  bombyclnus,  and  elephantlnus. 

Other  adjectives  and  words  in  inus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
canlnus,  binus,  festlnus,  peregrlnus,  marlnus,  clandestlnus,  suplnus. 
Except  acinus,  asinus,  cophlnus,  domlnus,  earlnus,  J 'acinus ,  frazftnus, 
pampinus,  sinus,  terminus,  gemlnus,  circinus,  lusclnus,  'minus. 

18.  A,  e,  o,  and  u,  before  final  nus  and  num,  are  long  \  as, 

nrbanus,  serenus,  pronus,  munus.  Exc.  limigenus,  penus,  abrotonum, 
peuceddnum,  galbanus,  manus,  oceanus,  platanus,  tympanum  ;  ebenus,  genus, 
tenus,  Venus  ;  bonus,  onus,  sonus,  tonus,  thronus,  anus,  laganum,  popanum. 

19.  Words  ending  in  pa  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

alapa,  nepa,  crlpa*    Exc.  stupa,  rapa,  rlpa,  cepa,  scopa,  cupa,  pupa. 

20.  Words  in  aris  and  are  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 
afdris,  altdre.     Except  hilaris,  cantharis,  cappdris,  and  mare. 

21.  Before  final  ro  or  ror,  e  is  short;  i,  o,  and  u,  are  long;  as, 
tempero,  celero,  quZror  ;  splro,  oro,figuro,  miror. 

Except  spero,  foro,  moror,  voro,  furo,  saturo  ;  and  derivatives  from 
genitives  increasing  short;  as,  decoro,  murmuro,  &c. ;  also pero,  soror. 

22.  Before  final  rus,  ra,  rum,  e  is  short ;  the  other  vowels  are 
long  ;   as, 

merus,  hedera,  ccterum;  cdrus,  mirus,  morus,  murus  ;  hdra,  spira,  ora, 
natura,  lor  urn. 

Except,  1.  austerus,  galerus,  plerus,  serus,  severus,  verus,  pera,  cera, 
panthera,  statera,  procerus,  sincerus. 

Exc.  2.  barbdrus,  cammdrus,  camurus,  canthdrus,  chorus,  forus,  hellebo- 
rus,  lamyrus,  Idrus,  nurus,  phosphorus,  plrus,  porus  (a  passage),  saturus, 
scdrus,  spdrus,  tartdrus,  torus,  zcphyrus  ;  amphora,  anchora,  cindra,  citndra, 
lyra,  mora,  purpura,  philijra,  pyra,  satlra  ;  forum,  gdrum,  pdrum,  sac- 
cndrum,  suppdrum. 

23.  Adjectives  in  osus  lengthen  the  penult;  &$,fumosm,per- 
niciosus. 

24.  Nouns  in  etas  and  itas  shorten  the  penult;   as,  pietas, 
civitas. 

25.  Adverbs  in  tim  lengthen  the  penult,  those  in  iter  shorten 
it;  as, 

oppiddtim,  viritim,  tributim;  acrlter.     Except  stdtim,  affatim,  perpetim. 

26.  Words  in  ates,  itis,  otis,  and  eta,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
'cdtes,  pendtes,  vltis,  mltis,   caryotis,   Icariotis,  meta,  poeta.     Except 

sttis,  potis,  drapeta. 

27.  Nouns  in  atum,  etum,  itum,  utum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
lupdtum,  arboretum,  aconltum,  verutum. 

Except  f return,  defrutum,  pulpltum,  petorltum,  lutum  (mud),  compltum 


§  292,  293.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY  ;  ANTEPENULTS.   273 

28.  Words  ending  in  tus  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
barbdtus,    grains,   boletus,  facttus,   crinltus,   perltus,   (Rgrotus,  totus, 

argutus,  hirsutus. 

Exc.  catus,  Idtus  (-£m),  impetus,  metus,  vegetus,  vetus  ;  anhelltus^ 
digttus,  gratultus,  halltus,  hospitus,  servltus,  spiritus  ;  antidotus,  notus, 
quotus,  totus  (so  great);  arbutus,  putus  ;  indijtus  ;  adverbs  in  itus,  and 
derivatives  from  supines  with  a  short  penult ;  as,  habitus. 

29.  A  penultimate  vowel  before  v  is  long ;  as, 

cldva,  oliva,  dives,  ndvis,  civis,  papaver,  pavo,  privo,  ovum,  prdvus, 

(BStlVUSj  fllgitlVUS. 

Except  av is,  brevis,  gravis,  Uvis,  bvis ;  cdvo,  gravo,  juvot  Idoo,  Ifroo, 
Svo;  avus,  cavus^favus,  ndvus,  favor,  pavor,  ndvem. 

30.  Words  ending  in  dex,  diz,  mez,  nix,  lex,  rex,  lengthen 
the  penult ;  as, 

codex,  judex;  lodix,  radix;  cimex,  pumex;  junix;  ilex;  carex, 
murex.  Except  culex,  sllex,  rumez. 

II.    ANTEPENULTS. 

<§>  292.  1.  Adjectives  in  aceus  and  aneus  lengthen  the 
antepenult ;  as, 

cretaceus,  testaceus,  momentdneus,  subitdneus. 

2.  Numerals  in  ginti,  ginta,  gies>  and  eslmus,  lengthen  the 
antepenult ;  as, 

vlginti,  quadrdginta,  quinqudgies,  trig&slmus. 

3.  O  and  u  before  final  lentus  are  short ;  as, 
vindlentus,  fraudulentus. 

4.  A  vowel  before  final  nea,  mo,  nia,  nio,  nius,  nium,  is  long  j 
as, 

ardnea,  llnea,  cdneo,  munia,  punio,  Favdnius,  patrimOnium. 

Exc.  castdnea,  tinea,  cuneo,  mdneo,  rritneo,  mdneo,  seneo,  teneo,  igno- 
rrilnia,  lusclnia,  mania,  venia,  lanio,  llnio,  v&nio,  inggnium,  genius,  senius  ; 
and  words  in  cinium,  as,  lenocinium. 

5.  Words  ending  in  areo,  arius,  arium,  erium,  orius,  lengthen 
the  antepenult;  as, 

dreo,  cibdrius,  plantdrium,  dicterium,  censorius.  Except  cdreo,  vdrius, 
desiderium,  imperium,  magisteriujn,  ministerium. 

6.  Adjectives  in  aticus,  atilis,  lengthen  the  antepenult ;  as, 
aqudflcus,  pluvidtilis.     Except  some   Greek  words  in  mattcus ;  as, 

grammdtlcus. 

7.  /before  final  tudo  is  short;  as,  altitudo,  longitudo. 

III.  PENULT  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

§  293.  1.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
found  in  the  poets  with  the  following  terminations,  shorten 
the  penult  • — 


274 


PROSODY. QUANTITY  ;     PENULTS. 


$293. 


ba, 


ca,1 

ena 
be, 
ce,4 


che, 
de, 


a, 

on,7 

0,8 


les, 

anes, 

enes, 


dus," 


re, 
al, 


mas, 
ras, 


aris, 


mus,17 


yns, 

os,n 

bus, 

cus,12 

chus,13 

ges, 

Exceptions. 

1.  Marlca,  NasTca,  Ustlca. 

2.  Eriphyla,  Messala,  Philomela. 

3.  Alcmena,  Amphisibena,  Athe- 

nae,  Ccesena,  Camena,   Myce 


arus, 

erus,19 

yrus, 

asus, 

osus, 


itus,21 
otus,22 
eus,23  (monosyl.) 


Stratonlcus,  Trivlcus,  Numl- 

13.  Ophiuchus.  [cus. 

14.  Abydus,  Androdus. 

15.  Cethegus. 

nae,  Picence,  Sophenae,  Murena.     16.  Names   in    -dus,  -olus   (except 

4.  Berenice,  Elyce. 

5.  Eriphyle,  Neobule,  Perimele. 
6    Europe,  Sinope. 

7.  Alemon,  Cytheron,  Chalcedon, 

Damaslton,  lason,  Philemon, 
Sarpedon,  Thermodon,  Poly- 
glton,  Polyphemon ,  Anthedon. 

8.  Carthago,  Cupavo,  Theano. 

9.  Melea^er. 

10.  Bessahs,    Eumelis,    Juvenalis, 

Martialis,  Phaselis,  Stympha- 
lis. 

11.  Cercyros,   Cot^tos,  Pharsalos, 

Serlphos,  Peparethos. 

12.  Benacus,  Caucus,  Granicus, 

Mossynfici,       Olympionlcus, 


Naubolus)  -bulus  (ex- 
cept Bibulus),  Orbelus,  Eu- 
melus,  Gaetulus,  lulus,  Phar- 
salus,  Sardanapalus,  Stym- 
phalus. 

17.  Some  in  demus  and  phemus  ;  as, 

Academus,  Charidemus,  Eu- 
phemus,  Menedemus,  Philo- 
demus,  Polyphemus. 

18.  Seryphus. 

19.  Homerus,  Iberus. 

20.  Aratus,  Caeratus,  Torquatus. 

21.  Heraclltus,  Hermaphrodltus. 

22.  Buthrotus.  [Caphareus. 

23.  Enlpeus,  Mengceus,  Olleus, 
24  Amasis. 


2.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables,  found  in  the 
poets  with  the  following  terminations;  lengthen  the  penult : — 


ana,1 
ina,2 
ona,3 


sa, 
ta,« 


num,7 
turn, 


tas, 
des,» 

*~~  in 


ene,8          nas,  tis,1' 


nus,12 

irus,14 
orus,15 


urus, 
esus,16 
isus, 
ysus, 


etus/7 
utus; 
ytus,18 
vus. 


1.  Sequana. 

2.  Asina,      Muttna,     Proserptna, 

Rasma,  RuspTna,  Sarslna. 

3.  Ax8na,  MatrQna. 

4.  Dalmata,  Massaggta,  Prochyta, 

Sarmata,  Sostrata. 

5.  Galatoe,     Jaxame'taB,    Lapithss, 

Macgtsa,  SauromateB. 

6.  Clymgne,  Helgne,  Melpomgne, 

iSiyctimgne 

7.  Ariminum,  Drepanum,  Peuce- 

danum. 

8.  Numltor. 

9.  Miltiades,     Pylades,     SotSdes, 

Thucydides;  patronymics  in 
des,  (§  291,  4,)  and  plurals  in 
ades. 


Exceptions. 

10.  Antiphates,    Amodytes,    Ceri- 

tes,  Charftes,  Eteretes,  Eu- 
rybates,  Ichnobates,  Euerge- 
tes,  Anaxaretes,  Massagetes, 
and  all  names  in  -crates. 

11.  Dercetis. 

12.  Aponus,    Apidanus,     Caranus, 

Chrysoganus,  Ciminus,  Cliba- 
nus,  Clymenus,  Coeranust 
ConcSnus,  Dardanus,  Diadu- 
mgnus,  Duranus,  Earinus, 
Eridanus,  Fucinus,  Helenas, 
Libanus,  Morini,  Mycorms, 
Myrsinus,  Nebrophonus,  Ole- 
nus,  Periclymenus,  Rhoda- 
nus,  Santonus,Sequani,  Steph- 
anus,  Telegonus,  Terminus, 


$  294.   PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES.          275 

and    names  in    -gonus    and  Carpophorus,   Mastigophorus, 

'Xenus.  Phosphorus,  Stesichorus. 

13.  CEdipus.  16.  EphSsus,  Vogesus,  Volesus. 

14.  Lamirus.  *  17.  lapetus,  Taygetus,  Venetus. 

15.  Pacorus,   and  those  in   chorus     18.  JCpytus,   AnjKus,    Eurjftus. 

and  phorus;    as,    Bosphorus,  Hippoljrtus. 

3.  The  penultimate  vowel  of  the  following  proper  names, 
and  adjectives  derived  from  proper  names,  though  followed 
by  a  vowel,  is  long.  See  §  283,  Exc.  6. 

Alexandria,  Alpheus,  Achelous,  Achilleus,  Achillea,  AmphiarSus,  Am- 
phlon,  tineas,  Arion,  Alcyoneus,  Aloeus,  Anchiseus,  Atlanteus,  iEthlon, 
Amineus,  Amphigenla,  Amythaon,  Antiochla,  Bioneus,  Cymodocea, 
Calliopea,  Cassiopea,  Cydoneus,  Caesarea,  Calaurfius,  Chremetaon,  Cle- 
antheas,  Cytherea,  Deidamla,  Didymaon,  Dolicaon,  Darius,  Elei,  Eriyo, 
Eous,  Echlon,  Eleus,  Endymioneus,  Erebeus,  Erectheus,  Hyperion,  Gala- 
tea, Giganteus,  Heraclea,  Hippodamia,  Hypetaon,  lolaus,  Iphigenla, 
Ixlon,  llithyla,  Imaon,  Laodamia,  Lycaon,  Latous,  Lesbous,  Machaon, 
Mausoleum,  Medea,  Menelaus,  Mathion,  Methlon,  Myrtoas,  Orion, 
Orithyia,  Orpheus,  Ophyon,  Pallanteum,  Peneus,  Penthesilea,  Phosbeus, 
Pandlon,  Protesilaus,  Pyreneus,  Sardous,  Paphagea,  Poppea,  Thalia. 

NOTE.  Eus,  in  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  is  commonly 
a  diphthong ;  as,  Briareus,  Ceneus,  Enlpcus,  Idomeneus,  Macareus,  Mene- 
ceus,  Mctereus,  Orpheus,  PenthesUeus,  Perseus^  Theseus,  Typhoeus.  §  283, 
Exc.  6,  NOTE  2.  But  in  those  which  in  Greek  are  written  siog  (eios),  eus 
forms  two  sy  llables ;  as,  Mphtus.  So  also  in  adjectives  in  eus,  whether  of 
Greek  or  Latin  origin  j  as,  Ereltus,  Erectheus,  Orpheus. 


QUANTITY  OF   FINAL   SYLLABLES. 

A  final. 

§  294.     1.  A  final,  in  words  declined,  is  short;  as, 

musa,  templa,  capita,  Tydca.     Thus, 

Musd  mihi  causas  memora;  quo  numine  Iseso Virg. 

Exc      A  final  is  long  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension, 
and  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  as  and  es;  as, 
Musd,fundd;  O  JEnta,  0  Palla,  0  Anchlsa. 

2.  A  final,  in  words  not  declined,  is  long;  as,  ama, 
frustrd,  anted,  ergd,  intrd.  Thus, 

Extra  fortunam  est  quidquid  donatur  amlcis.  Mart. 

Exc.  A  final  is  short  in  cjti,  itd,quid,  and  in  puta,  when  used  adverbi- 
ally. It  is  sometimes  short  in  the  preposition  contra,  and  in  numerals 
ending  in  ginta  ;  as,  triginta,  &c.  In  posted,  it  is  common. 

A  final  is  also  short  in  the  names  of  Greek  letters;  as,  alphd* 
letd  &c. 


276          PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABIZES. 

E  final. 

$  295.  E  final  is  short ;  as,  nate,  patrey  ipse,  curre, 
regere,  nempe,  ante.  Thus, 

Inctpt,  parve1  puer,  risu  cognosctrl  matrem.  Virg. 

Exc.  1.  E  final  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  first  and  fifth  de- 
clensions ;  as, 

Callidpe,  Tydlde,  fide.  So  also  re  and  die,  with  their  compounds 
quart,  hodie,  pridie,  postridie,  quotidie.  In  like  manner  Greek  vocatives 
in  ef  from  nouns  in  es,  of  the  third  declension ;  as,  Achilla,  nippom&nS. 
The  e  is  also  long  in  the  ablative/am^,  originally  of  the  fifth  declension. 

Exc.  2.  E  final  is  long  in  Greek  neuters  plural  3  as,  cete,  mele,  pelage, 
Tempt. 

Exc.  3.     In  the  second  conjugation,  e  final  is  long  in  the 
second    person   singular  of  the   imperative   active;    as,  doce, 
mone  ; — but  it  is  sometimes  short  in  cave,  vale,  and  vide. 
Exc.  4.     In  monosyllables,  e  final  is  long;  as, 
€,  me,  te,  se,  ne  (lest  or  not) ;  but  the  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve,  ce,  &c.,  as 
they  are  not  used  alone,  have  e  short,  according  to  the  rule ;  as,  ucqut, 
hujuscZ,  suaptg. 

Exc.  5.  E  final  is  long  in  adverbs  formed  from  adjectives 
of  the  first  and  second  declensions ;  as, 

placlde,  pule/ire,  valde  for  valtde,  maxlme  ;  but  it  is  short  in  bent, male, 
infernS,  and  supem^. 

Exc.  6.     Fere,ferme,  and  ohe,  have  the  final  e  long. 

I  final. 

§  296.  /  final  is  long ;  as,  dommi,  fill,  dassi,  doceri, 
*i.  Thus, 

Quid  domtnl  facie nt,  audent  cum  talia  fures.  Virg. 

Exc.  1.     /  final  is  common  in  mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  and  ubi. 

In  nisi,  quasi,  and  cui,  when  a  dissyllable,  it  is  also  common,  but  usually 
short.  In  utlnam  and  utlque,  it  is  short,  and  rarely  in  utL 

Exc.  2.  /  final  is  short  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  of  the 
third  declension,  which  increase  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Pallddl,  Minoldl, 
Tethyl. 

Exc.  3.  /  final  is  short  in  Greek  vocatives  singular  of  the  third  de- 
clension; as,  Alcxl;  Daphnl,  Parl.  But  it  is  long  in  vocatives  from 
Greek  nouns  in  is,  -entos  ;  as,  Simol. 

Exc.  4.  /  final  is  short  in  Greek  datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  rit 
or,  before  a  vowel,  -sin;  as,  Drydsl,  herolsl,  Troasln. 

O  final. 

§  297.  O  final  is  common  ;  as,  virgo,  amo,  quando. 
Thus, 

Erg6  rnetu  caplti  Scylla  est  inimlca  paterno.  Virg. 
Ergd  sollicitoi  tu  causa,  pecunia,  vitae  es  !  Prop 


$  299.    PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES.         277 

Exc.  1.     Monosyllables  in  o  are  long  ;  as,  6,  dd,  pro. 

Exc.  2.  O  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular ; 
as,  dommdy  regno,  bond,  sud,  illo,  eo. 

It  is  also  long  in  ablatives  used  as  adverbs ;  as,  ccrto,  falso,  mcrlto,  eG, 
quo  ;  to  which  may  be  added  ergo  (for  the  sake  of). 

REM.  1.  The  gerund  in  do,  in  the  later  poets,  has  sometimes  o 
short ;  as,  vigilandd.  Juv. 

REM.  2.  The  final  o  in  cito  is  short :  in  modo,  it  is  common,  but  short 
in  its  compounds ;  as,  dummodd,  postmddd,  &c.  It  is  also  common  in 
adeo,  idea,  postremo,  J$ero,  and  vero.  In  iWico,  profecto,  and  sublto,  it  is 
found  short. 

Exc.  3.  O  final  is  short  in  immo,  and  common  in  idcirco,  porro,  and 
retro. 

Exc.  4.  O  final,  in  Greek  nouns  written  with  an  omSga,  is  long ;  as, 
Clio,  Dido;  Atho  and  Androged  (gen). 

NOTE.  The  final  o  of  verbs  is  almost  always  long  in  poets  of  or  near 
the  Augustan  age ;  they,  however,  shorten  it  in  scio,  nescio,  ancl  spondco. 
Later  poets  make  the  o  short  in  many  other  verbs. 

U  final. 

§298.  1.  U  final  is  long;  as,  vultu,  cornft,  Panthu, 
dictu.  Thus, 

Vultu  quo  co3lam  tempestatesque  sergnat.  Virg 

Exc.  Indu  and  nenu,  ancient  forms  of  in  and  non,  have  u  short.  Uis 
also  short  in  terminations  in  us  short,  when  s  is  removed  by  elision ;  as, 
contentu',  for  contentfis.  See  §  305,  2. 

Y  final 
2.    Y  final  is  short ;  as,  Moly,  Tiphy.     Thus, 

Moly  vocant  supgri :  nigr£  radlce  tenetar.  Ovid. 
Y,  in  the  dative  Tethy,  being  formed  by  contraction,  is  long.    §  283,  III. 

B,  D,  L,  N^  R,  T,  final 

§  299.  1.  Final  syllables  ending  in  6,  d,  7,  n,  r,  and  t, 
are  short ;  as,  ab,  illud,  consul,  carmen,  pater,  caput.  Thus, 

Ipse  docet  quid  agam.    Fas  est  et  ab  hoste  doceri.  Ovid. 
Obstupuit  simul  ipse,  sirnul  perculsus  Achates.   Virg. 
Nomin  Arionium  Siculas  impleverdt  urbes.  Ovid. 
Dum  loqutir,  horrtir  habet ;  parsque  est  meminisse  doloris.  Id. 
Exc.  1.     L      Sal,  sol,  and  nil,  are  long. 
Exc.  2.     N.     En,  lien,  non,  quin,  and  sin,  are  long. 
Exc.  3.     In  Greek  nouns,  nominatives  in  n  (except  those  in 
on,  written  with  an  omicron),  masculine  or  feminine  accusatives 
in  an  or  en,  and  genitives  plural  in  on,  lengthen  the  final 
syllable;  as, 

24 


278          PROSODY. QUANTITY    OF    FINAL    SYLLABLES.    §  300. 

Titan,  spUn,  Saldmln,  Orion,  Phorcyn  ;  JEntan,  AnchlsSn,  Callidptn  ; 
epigrammdtdn. 

Exc.  4.  R.  Aer,  cether,  and  nouns  in  er  which  form  their 
genitive  in  eris,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

crater ,  ver.  So  also  Iber;  but  the  compound  Celtlber  has  its  last  sylla- 
ble common. 

Exc.  5.     Far,  lar,  Nar,par,  cur,  and/wr,  are  long. 

REM.  A  final  syllable  ending  in  t,  may  be  rendered  long  by  a  diph- 
thong, by  contraction,  or  by  position  :  as.  out.  obit  for  abiit.  amdnt.  See 

§  as?,  if,  in,  iv. 

M  final. 

2.  Final  m,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  almost  always  cut  off,  when  the 
next  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  See  Ecthlipsis,  §  305,  2. 

Final  syllables  ending  in  TO,  when  it  is  not  cut  off,  are  short ;  as, 
Quam  laudas,  pluma  ?  cocto  num  adest  honor  idem.  Hor. 

Hence,  the  final  syllables  of  cum  and  circum,  in  composition,  are  short ; 
as,  comedo,  circumago. 

C  final 

3.  Final  syllables  ending  in  c  are  long;  as,  ac,  illuc. 
Thus, 

Macte  nova  virtute,  puer;  sic  itur  ad  astra.   Virg. 
Exc.    JVec,  donee,  fac,  are  short,  and  sometimes  the  pronouns  hie  and 
hoc  in  the  nominative  and  accusative. 

AS,  ES,.<mrf  OS,  final. 
§  300.     Final  syllables  in  as,  es,  and  os}  are  long ;  as, 

pietds,  amds,  quies,  mones,  honos,  viros.     Thus, 

Has  autem  terras,  Italique  hanc  littoris  oram.   Virg. 
Si  modo  des  illis  cultus,  sirnilesque  paratus.   Ovid. 
Nee  TIGS  ambitio,  nee  amor  nos  tangit  habendi.  Id. 

Exc.  1.  AS.  As  is  short  in  anas,  in  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive 
ends  in  adis  or  ados,  and  in  Greek  accusatives  plural  of  the  third  declen- 
sion ;  as,  Areas,  Pallas,  hcroas,  lampadas. 

To  these  may  be  added  Latin  nouns  in  as,  ados,  formed  like  Greek 
patronymics  °,  as,  Jlppias. 

Exc.  2.  ES.  Final  es  is  short  in  nouns  and  adjectives  of 
the  third  declension  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive  ;  as, 
Jiospes,  limes,  hcbes. 

But  it  is  long  in  abies,  aries,  Ceres,  paries,  and  pes. 

Es,  in  the  present  tense  of  sum,  and  in  the  preposition  penes,  is  short. 

Es  is  short  in  Greek  neuters,  and  in  Greek  nominatives  and  vocatives 
plural  from  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  which  increase  in  the  genitive 
otherwise  than  in  cos  ;  as,  cacoethfs,  Arcades,  Trots,  Amazftnes. 

Exc.  3.     OS.     05  is  short  in  compos,  impos,  and  os  (ossis}. 

In  Greek  nouns,  05  is  short  in  words  of  the  second  declension  (except 
those  whose  genitive  is  in  o),  in  neuters,  and  in  genitives  singular;  as, 
ttios  Tyrds  (but  Alhos)  ;  chads,  epos,  Pallddos,  Tcthyos. 


<§>  301,  302.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    FEET.  279 

IS,  US,  and  YS,  final. 

§  301.     Final  syllables  in  is,  us,  and  ys,  are  short;  as, 

turrls,  milltts,  amabls ;  pectus,  bonus,  amdmfts ;  Capijs,  Tethijs. 
Thus, 

Non  apis  inde  tulit  collectos  sedula  flores.  Ovid. 
Serins  aut  citius  sedem  properamus  ad  unam.  Id. 
At  Capys,  et  quorum  melior  sententia  menti.  Virg, 

Exc.  1.     IS.     Is  is  long  in  plural  cases  ;  as, 
musls,  noils  ;  omnls,  urbls,  for  omnes,  urbes ;  quls,  for  queis  or  quibus. 
Is  is  long  in  nouns  whose  genitives  end  in  itis,  inis,  or  entis ;    as, 
SamnlSj  Salamls,  Simols. 

Is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indica- 
tive active  of  the  fourth  conjugation  ;  as, 

audls,  nescls.  So  also  in  the  second  persons,  fis,  is,  sis,  vis,  veils,  and 
their  compounds  ;  as,  possls,  quamvls,  mails,  noils,  &c. 

Ris,  in  the  future  perfect  tense,  is  common  j  as,  vidSris. 

In  the  nouns  glis  and  vis,  and  the  adverbs  gratis  and/om,  is  is  long. 

Exc.  2.  US.  Monosyllables  in  us  are  long ;  as,  grus,  rus9 
plus. 

Us  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which  increase 
long,  and  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  the  nominative,  accusa- 
tive, and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension  (§§  89,  REM., 
and  283,  III.) ;  as, 

tellus,  virtus,  incus;— -fructus.  But  palus,  with  the  us  short,  occurs  in 
Horace,  Art.  Poet.  65. 

Us  is  long  in  Greek  nouns  written  in  the  original  with  the  diphthong 
ovg  (ous),  whether  in  the  nominative  or  genitive;  as,  nom.  Amathus, 
Opus,  (EdlpuSj  tripus,  Panthus  ;  gen.  Didus,  Sapphus.  But  compounds 
of  pus  (novg),  when  of  the  second  declension,  have  us  short ;  as,  polypus. 

NOTE.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse  (except  the  ana- 
paestic, and  the  Ionic  a  minorc)  may  be  either  long  or  short,  at 
the  option  of  the  poet. 

By  this  is  meant,  that,  although  the  measure  require  a  long  syllable,  a 
short  one  may  be  used  in  its  stead ;  and  a  long  syllable  may  be  used 
where  a  short  one  is  required ;  as  in  the  following  verses,  where  the  short 
syllable  ma  stands  instead  of  a  long  one,  and  the  long  syllable  cu  instead 
of  a  short  one  : — 

Sanguineaque  manu  crepitantia  concutit  arma.  Ovid. 
Non  eget  Mauri  jaculis,  nee  arcw.  Hor. 


VERSIFICATION. 
FEET. 

$  302.     A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  sylla- 
bles of  a  certain  quantity. 


280  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     M^TRE.  §  303. 

Feet  are  either  simple  or  compound.     Simple  feet  consist  of 
two  or  three  syllables ;   compound  feet  of  four. 

1.  SIMPLE    FEET. 

1.  Of  two  Syllables. 

Spondee, two.  long ;  as, .fundunt. 

Pyrrhic, two  short ;    as, Deus. 

Trochee,  or  choree,. . .  .a  long  and  a  short ;  as, drmd. 

Iambus, a  short  and  a  long ;  as, erdnt. 

2.  Of  three  Syllables. 

Dactyl, a  long  and  two  short ;    as, corpora. 

JlnapiEst, two  short  and  a  long ;  as, domlni. 

Tribrach, three  short ;  as, .fdcer$. 

Molossus, three  long ;  as, contendunt. 

Amphibrach, a  short,  a  long,  and  a  short;  as,  ...  .amort. 

dmphimdcrus,orCretic,n.  long,  a  short,  and  a  long;  as,  ...  .cdstttds. 

Bacchlus, a  short  and  two  long ;  as, Cdtdnes. 

Jlntibacchius, two  long  and  a  short ;  as, Romanus. 

II.    COMPOUND    FEET. 

Dispondee, a  double  spondee ;  as, conflixerunt. 

Proceleusmatic, a  double  Pyrrhic ;  as, hdmlnlbus 

Ditrochee, a  double  trochee  ;    as, comprdbdvU. 

Diiambus, .a  double  iambus ;  as, dmdvgrdnt. 

Greater  Ionic, a  spondee  and  a  Pyrrhic;  as, cdrretflmtis. 

Smaller  Ionic, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  spondee ;  as, properdbdnt. 

Choriambus, a  choree  and  an  iambus ;  as, terrif  leant. 

Antispastj an  iambus  and  a  choree  ;  as, adhcesissZ. 

First  epitrit, an  iambus  and  a  spondee ;  as, dmdverunt. 

Second  epitrit, a  trochee  and  a  spondee  ;  as, condltores. 

Third  epitrit, a  spondee  and  an  iambus ;  as, dlscordlds. 

Fourth  epitrit, a  spondee  and  a  trochee ;  as, ddduxistls. 

First  pcBon, a  trochee  and  a  Pyrrhic ;  as, temporibfts. 

Second  paon, an  iambus  and  a  Pyrrhic  ;  as, potenftd. 

Tldrd  pceon, a  Pyrrhic  and  a  trochee  ;  as, arilmdtus. 

Fourth  pcEon, a  Pyrrhic  and  an  iambus ;  as, celerltds. 

Those  feet  are  calfed  isochronous,  which  consist  of  equal  times ;  as  the 
spondee,  the  dactyl,  the  anapaest,  and  the  proceleusmatic,  one  long  time 
being  considered  equal  to  two  short. 


METRE. 

§  303.     Metre  is  an  arrangement  of  syllables  and  feet 
according  to  certain  rules. 

In  this  general  sense,  it  comprehends  either  an  entire  verse,  a  part 
of  a  verse,  or  any  number  of  verses. 


§  304         PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;    VERSES.  281 

Metre  is  divided  into  dactylic ,  anapcBstic,  iambic,  trochaic, 
choriambic,  and  Ionic.  These  names  are  derived  from  the 
original  or  fundamental  foot  employed  in  each. 

A  metre,  or  measure,  in  a  specific  sense,  is  either  a  single  foot, 
or  a  combination  of  two  feet.  In  dactylic,  choriambic,  and 
Ionic  metre,  a  measure  consists  of  one  foot;  in  the  remainder, 
of  two  feet. 

VERSES. 

§  304.  A  verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged 
in  a  regular  order,  and  constituting  a  line  of  poetry. 

1.  Two  verses  are  called  a  distich;  a  half  verse,  a  hemistich. 

2.  Verses  are  of  different  kinds,  denominated  sometimes,  like 
the  different  species  of  metre,  from  the  foot  which  chiefly  pre- 
dominates in  them  ;  as,  dactylic,  iambic,  &c.  ; — sometimes  from 
the  number  of  feet  or  metres  which  they  contain ;  as,  senarius, 
consisting  of  six  feet ;    octonarius,  of  eight  feet ;  manometer, 
consisting  of  one  measure ;  dimeter,  of  two ;  trimeter,  tetram- 
eter, pentameter,    hexameter; — sometimes  from    a    celebrated 
author  who  used  a  particular  species  ;  as,  Sapphic,  Anacreontic, 
Alcaic,  Asclepiadic,  &,c. ; — and  sometimes  from  other  circum- 
stances. 

3.  A  verse,  with  respect  to  the  metres  which  it  contains,  may 
be  complete,  deficient,  or  redundant. 

A  verse  which  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic. 

A  verse  which  is  deficient,  if  it  wants  one  syllable  at  the  end, 
is  called  catalectic ;  if  it  wants  a  whole  foot  or  half  a  metre,  it 
is  called  brachy  catalectic. 

A  verse  which  wants  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  is  called 
acephalous. 

A  verse  which  has  a  redundant  syllable  or  foot,  is  called 
hyper  catalectic  or  hypermeter. 

4.  Hence,  the  complete  name  of  every  verse  consists  of  three 
terms — the  first  referring  to  the  species,  the  second  to  the  num- 
ber of  metres,  and  the  third  to  the  ending ;  as,  the  dactylic 
trimeter  catalectic. 

5.  A  verse  or  portion  of  a  verse  (measured  from  the  begin- 
ning of  a  line)  which  contains  three  half  feet,  or  a  foot  and  a 
half,  is  called  the  triemimeris ;  if  it  contains  five  half  feet,  or 
two  feet  and  a  half,  it  is  called  the  penthemimeris ;  if  seven  half 
feet,  or  three  feet  and  a  half,  the  hepthemimeris ;  if  nine  half 
feet,  or  four  feet  and  a  half,  the  ennehemimeris. 

24* 


282  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;  FIGURES.       $  305. 

6.  SCANNING  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which 
it  is  composed. 

In  order  to  scan  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  quantity  of  each 
syllable,  and  also  to  understand  the  following  poetic  usages,  which  are 
sometimes  called 

FIGURES   OF   PROSODY. 
SYNALCEPHA. 

§  305.  1.  A  final  vowel  or  diphthong  is  cut  off  in  scan- 
ning, when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel.  This  is 
called  synalcepha. 

Thus,  terra  antlqua  is  read  terr'  antlqua  ;  Dardaritda  infensi,  Dardanid" 
infensi;  vento  hue,  venf  uc.  So, 

Quidve  moror  ?  si  omnes  uno  ordine  habetis  Achlvos,....  Virg. 

which  is  scanned  thus — 

Quidve  moror  ?  s'  omnes  un'  ordin'  habetis  Achlvos. 

The  interjections  O,  heu,  ah,  proh,  va,  vah,  are  not  elided ; 
as, 

O  et  de  Latia,  O  et  de  gente  Sablna.  Ovid. 
But  Of  when  not  elided,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

Te  Cory  don  &  Alexi ;  trahit  sua  quemque  voluptas.  Virg. 
Other  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  sometimes  remain  unelided,  in  which 
case  they  are  commonly  made  short ;  as, 

Victor  apud  rapidum  Simoenta  sub  Ilio  alto.  Virg. 
Anni  tempore  eo  qul  Etesice  esse  feruntur.  Lucr. 
Ter  sunt  conatl  imponere  Pelid  Ossam.     Virg. 
Eflauco  et  Panopetb,  et  Inoo  Melicertae.  Id. 
Rarely  a  short  vowel,  also,  remains  without  elision  ;  as, 

Et  vera  incessu  patuit  ded.     Ille  ubi  matrem....  Virg. 
For  synaicepha  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 

ECTHLIPSIS. 

2.  Final  m,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  cut  off  when  the  fol- 
lowing word  begins  with  a  vowel.  This  is  called  ecthlipsis. 
Thus, 

O  curas  hominum,  O  quantum  est  in  rebus  inane  !  Pers. 
which  is  thus  scanned, 

O  curas  homin'  O  quant'  est  in  rebus  inane. 

Monstram  horrendwm,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  ademptum.  Virg. 
This  elision  was  sometimes  omitted  by  the  early  poets ;  as, 

Corpdrum  officium  est  quoniam  premSre  omnia  deorsum.  Lucr. 

See  §  299,  2 

Final  5,  also,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  sometimes  elided  by  the 
early  poets  before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  s  alone  before  a  consonant  •  as, 
content1  atque  (Enn.),  for  contentus  atque  ;  omrilbu'  rebus.  (Lucr.)  So, 

Turn  lateral?  dolor,  certisslmu*  nunciu*  mortis.  Lucil. 
For  ecthlipsis  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 


§  307.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION ;    FIGURES.  283 

SYNJ3RESIS. 

§  306*  1.  Two  vowels  which  are  usually  separated,  are 
sometimes  contracted  into  one  syllable.  This  is  called  synar- 
esis. 

Thus,  in  such  case, 

Phaethon  is  pronounced  Phcethon  ;  alveo,  alvo;  Orphea,  Orpha.    So, 
Jlured  percussum  virga,  versumque  venenis.   Virg. 
Eosdem  habuit  secum,  quibus  est  elata,  capillos.  Prop. 

(1.)  Synseresis  is  frequent  in  ii,  iidem,  iisdemj  diit  diis,  dein,  deinceps, 
delude,  deest,  deSrat,  de&ro,  de£rit,  deesse;  as, 

Prsecipitatur  aquis,  et  aquis  nox  surgit  ab  isdem.  Omd. 
Sint  Maecenates  ;  non  deerunt,  Flacce,  Marones.  Mart. 

Cui  and  huic  are  usually  monosyllables. 

(2.)  When  two  vowels  in  compound  words  are  read  as  one  syllable,  the 
former  may  rather  be  considered  as  elided  than  as  united  with  the  latter ; 
as,  e  in  anteambulo,  antelre,  ant&kac,  dehinc,  inehercule,  &c.,  and  a  in  con- 
trairt. 

(3.)  The  syllable  formed  by  the  union  of  two  vowels  often  retains  the 
quantity  of  the  latter  vowel,  whether  long  or  short ;  as,  abiete,  ariete, 
abiegjia,  vindemidtor,  omnia ;  genua,  tcnuis,  pitulta,  fluviorum,  &c.  In 
such  examples,  the  i  and  u  are  pronounced  like  initial  y  and  ID  ;  as,  aby&tey 
omn-ya,  tenwis,pitwlta,  &c.;  and,  like  consonants,  they  have,  with  another 
consonant,  the  power  of  lengthening  a  preceding  short  vowel,  as  in  the 
above  examples. 

In  Statius,  the  word  tenuiore  occurs,  in  which  three  vowels  are  united 
in  pronunciation ;  thus,  ten-wio-re. 

(4.)  Sometimes,  after  a  synaloepha  or  echthlipsis,  two  vowels  suffer 
synseresis  ;  as,  stellio  et,  pronounced  stell-yet :  consilium  et, — consil-yet. 

(5.)  If  only  one  of  the  vowels  is  written,  the  contraction  is  called 
crasis  ;  as,  di,  consili,  for  dii,  consilii. 

DIAERESIS. 

2.  A  syllable  is  often  divided  into  two  syllables.  This  is 
called  diaresis.  Thus, 

aulal,  Trtila,  silua,  sftttdent ;  for  aulce,  Trola  or  Troja,  silva,  suadent. 
So, 

^thereum  sensum,  atque  aural  simplicis  ignem.   Virg. 
Et  claro  siluas  cernes  Aquilone  moveri.  Id. 
Grammatici  certant ;  et  adhuc  sub  iudlce  lis  est.  HOT. 
So  in  Greek  words  originally  written  with  a  diphthong ;  as,  elcgeta,  for 
elegla. 

SYSTOLE. 

§  307.  1.  A  syllable  which  is  long  by  nature  or  by  posi- 
tion, is  sometimes  shortened.  This  is  called  systole  ;  as, 

•oid&n,  for  videsne,  in  which  e  is  naturally  long ;  saft'n,  for  satisne,  in 
which  i  is  long  by  position; — hodie,for  hoc  die;  multi modis,  for  multls 
modis.  So, 

Ducere  mulftmddis  voces,  et  flectSre  cantus.  Lucr. 

(1.)  By  the  omission  of  j  after  ab,  ad,  ob,  sub,  and  re,  in  compound 


284    PROSODY.  —  VERSIFICATION;  ARSIS  AND  THESIS. 

words,  those  prepositions  retain  their  short  quantity,  which  would  other- 
wise be  made  long  by  position  ;  as,  ablci,  ddlcit,  &ltlcis,  &c.     Thus, 
Si  quid  nostra  tuis  adlcit  vexatio  rebus.  Mart. 

In  like  manner,  by  rejecting  the  consonant  of  the  preposition,  aperio, 
Sperio,  dmitto,  &c.,  are  formed  by  systole. 

(2.)  The  third  person  plural  of  certain  perfects  is  said  by  some  to  be 
shortened  by  systole  ;  as,  stctlrunt,  tulerunt,  <fcc.  ;  but  others  believe  that 
these  irregularities  have  arisen  from  the  errors  of  transcribers,  or  the 
carelessness  of  writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2.  A  syllable  naturally  short,  is  sometimes  lengthened.    This 
is  called  diastole. 

It  occurs  most  frequently  in  proper  names  and  in  compounds  of  re;  as, 
Prlanildes,  religio,  &c.  Thus, 

Hanc  tibi  Prlumldes  mitto,  Ledssa,  salutem.   Ovid. 

Religione  patrum  multos  servata  per  annos.   Virg. 
Some  editors  double  the  consonant  after  re. 
Diastole  is  sometimes  called  ectdsis. 

SYNAPHEIA. 

3.  Verses  are  sometimes  connected  together  so  that  the  first 
syllable  of  a  verse  has  an  influence  on  the  final  syllable  of  that 
which  precedes,   either  by  position,  synaloepha,  or  ecthlipsis. 
See  §§  283  and  305.     This  is  called  synapheia. 

This  figure  was  most  frequent  in  anapaestic  verse,  and  in  the  Ionic  a 
minor  e. 

The  following  lines  will  illustrate  its  effect  :  — 

Prceceps  silvas  moniesc^uej^uglt 
Citus  Actaeon.  Sen. 

The  i  in  the  final  syllable  of  fugitj  which  is  naturally  short,  is  made 
long  by  position  before  the  following  consonants. 

Omnia  Mercurio  similis  vocemque  colorem^wc 
Et  crines  flavos  .....  Virg. 

Dissldens  plebi  numero  beatorwm 
Eximit  virtus.  Hor. 

In  the  former   of  these   examples,  synapheia  and   synalcepha  are  com- 
bined ;  in  the  latter,  synapheia  and  ecthlipsis. 

By  synapheia,  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  were  sometimes  divided 
between  two  verses  ;  as, 

.......  si  non  offende'ret  unum- 

Quemque  poetarum  limsB  labor  et  mora....  Hor. 

REM.     The  poets,  also,  often  make  use  of  some  other  figures,  which, 
however,  are  not  peculiar  to  them.     Such  are  prosth&sis,  aph&resisy  syncdpe, 
S)  apocope,  paragoge,  tmesis,  antithesis,  and    metathesis.     See 


ARSIS  AND  THESIS. 

§  308.     In   pronouncing  the  syllables  of  verse,  the  voice 
rises  and  falls  alternately  at  regular  intervals.     This  regular 


§  309.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    CAESURA.  285 

alternate  elevation  and  depression  of  the  voice  is  called  rhythm. 
The  elevation  of  the  voice  is  called  arsis,  its  depression  thesis. 
These  terms  sometimes,  also,  designate  the  parts  of  a  foot  on 
which  the  elevation  or  depression  falls. 

1.  The  natural  arsis  is  on  the  long  syllable  of  a  foot :  con- 
sequently, in  a  foot  composed  wholly  of  long,  or  of  short  sylla- 
bles, considered  in  itself,  the  place  of  the  arsis  is  undetermined. 
But  when  another  foot  is  substituted  for  the  fundamental  foot 
of  a  metre,  the  arsis  of  the  former  is  determined  by  that  of  the 
latter. 

Hence,  a  spondee,  in  trochaic  or  dactylic  metre,  has  the  arsis  on  the  first 
syllable ;  but  in  iambic  or  anapaestic  metre,  it  has  it  on  the  last. 

2.  The  arsis  is  either  equal  in  duration  to  the  thesis,  or  twice 
as  long. 

Thus,  in  the  dactyl,  —  w  w,  and  anapaest,  w  ^  — ,  they  are  equal ;  in 
the  trochee,  —  w ,  and  iambus,  w  — ,  they  are  unequal.  This  difference  in 
the  duration  of  the  arsis  and  thesis  constitutes  the  difference  of  rhythm. 

3.  The  stress  of  voice  which  falls  upon  the  arsis  of  a  foot,  is 
called  the  ictus.     When  a  long  syllable  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is 
resolved  into  two  short  ones,  the  ictus  falls  upon  the  former. 

NOTE  1.  Some  suppose  that  the  terms  arsis  and  thesis,  as  used  by  the 
ancients,  denoted  respectively  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  hand  in  beat- 
ing time,  and  that  the  place  of  the  thesis  was  the  syllable  which  received 
the  ictus. 

NOTE  2.  As  the  ancient  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  not  now  understood, 
writers  differ  in  regard  to  the  mode  of  reading  verse.  According  to  some, 
the  accent  of  each  word  should  always  be  preserved ;  while  others  direct 
that  the  stress  of  voice  should  be  laid  on  the  arsis  of  the  foot,  and  that  no 
regard  should  be  paid  to  the  accent. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  final  letters  elided  by  synaloepha  and 
ecthlipsis,  though  omitted  in  scanning,  were  pronounced  in  reading  verse. 


CMSURA. 

§  309.  Caesura  is  the  separation,  by  the  ending  of  a 
word,  of  syllables  rhythmically  or  metrically  connected. 

Caesura  is  of  three  kinds : — 1,  of  the  foot;  %>  of  the  rhythm  ; 
and  3,  of  the  verse. 

1.  Caesura  of  the  foot  occurs  when  a  word  ends  before  a  foot 
is  completed ;  as, 

Silves- 1  trem  tenu- 1  i  Mu- 1  sam  medi- 1  taris  a- 1  vena.  Virg. 

2.  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  the  separation  of  the  arsis  from 
the  thesis  by  the  ending  of  a  word,  as  in  the  second,  third,  and 
fourth  feet  of  the  preceding  line. 


286       PKOSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    DACTYLIC    METRE. 

Caesura  of  the  rhythm  allows  a  final  syllable  naturally  short,  to 
stand  instead  of  a  long  one,  it  being  lengthened  by  the  ictus  ; 
as, 

Pectorl- 1  bus  inhi- 1  ans  spi- 1  rantia  |  consulit  |  exta.   Virg. 

This  occurs  chiefly  in  hexameter  verse. 

Ccesura  of  the  foot  and  of  the  verse  do  not  of  themselves  lengthen  a 
short  syllable,  but  they  often  coincide  with  that  of  the  rhythm. 

3.  Caesura  of  the  verse  is  such  a  division  of  a  line  into  two 
parts,  as  affords  to  the  voice  a  convenient  pause  or  rest,  without 
injury  to  the  sense  or  harmony. 

The  caesura  of  the  verse  is  often  called  the  c&sural  pause. 
In  several  kinds  of  verse,  its  place  is  fixed  ;  in  others,  it  may  fall 
in  more  than  one  place,  and  the  choice  is  left  to  the  poet.  Of 
the  former  kind  is  the  pentameter,  of  the  latter  the  hexameter. 

The  proper  place  of  the  csesural  pause  will  be  treated  of,  so  far  as  shall 
be  necessary,  under  each  species  of  verse. 

REMARK.  The  effect  of  the  caesura  is  to  connect  the  different  words 
harmoniously  together,  and  thus  to  give  smoothness,  grace,  and  sweetness, 
to  the  verse. 


DIFFERENT  KINDS    OF  METRE. 
DACTYLIC   METRE. 

§  310.  LA  hexameter,  or  heroic  verse,  consists  of  six 
feet.  Of  these  the  fifth  is  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee, 
and  each  of  the  other  four  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee  ; 

as, 

At  tuba  |  terribi- 1  lem  s6nT- 1  turn  prSciil  |  rerg  ca- 1  noro.   Virg. 
Inton-  j  si  cri- 1  nes  Ion- 1  ga  cer- 1  vlcg  flu- 1  ebant.   Jibuti. 
LodSrS  |  quce  vel- 1  iem  cala- 1  mo  per- 1  mlsit  a- 1  gresti.   Virg. 

1.  The  fifth  foot  is  sometimes  a  spondee,  and  the  verse  in 
such  case  is  called  spondaic ;  as, 

Cara  de- 1  um  sobo- 1  les  mag-  j  num  Jovis  |  mere- 1  mentum.   Virg. 
In  such  verses,  the  fourth  foot  is  commonly  a  dactyl,  and  the  fifth  should 
not  close  with  the  end  of  a  word.     Spondaic  lines  are  thought  to  be  espe- 
cially adapted  to  the  expression  of  grave  and  solemn  subjects. 

2.  A  light  and  rapid  movement  is  produced  by  the  frequent 
recurrence  of  dactyls ;  a  slow  and  heavy  one  by  that  of  spon- 
dees ;  as, 

Quadrupe- 1  dante  pu- 1  trem  soni- 1  tu  quatit  |  ungula  |  campum.  Virg. 

Illi  in- 1  ter  se- 1  se  mag-  |  na  vi  |  brachia  |  tollunt.  Id. 

Variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls  and  spondees  in  successive  lines,  has  an 
agreeable  effect.  Hexameter  v«rse  commonly  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or 
three  syllables. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  J    DACTYLIC    METRE. 

3.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend  much  on  due 
attention  to  the  c&sura.     (See  §  309.)     A  line  in  which  it  is  neglected  is 
destitute  of  poetic  beauty,  and  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  prose ;  as? 

RomaB  |  moenia  |  terruit  |  impiger  |  Hannibal  |  arrnis.  Enn. 

4.  The    caesural  pause  most    approved    in  heroic   poetry  is 
that  which  occurs  after  the  arsis  in  the  third  foot.     This  is  par- 
ticularly distinguished  as  the  heroic  casura.     Thus, 

At  domus  |  inten- 1  or  1 1  re- 1  gali  |  splendida  |  luxu.   Virg. 

5.  Instead  of  the  preceding,  a  caesura  in  the  thesis  of  the 
third  foot,  or  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth,  was  also  approved  as 
heroic  ;  as, 

Infan- 1  dum  re- 1  gina  1 1  ju- 1  bes  reno- 1  vare  do- 1  lorem.   Virg. 
Inde  to-  j  ro  pater  |  ^Ene  |  as  ||  sic  |  orsus  ab  |  alto.  Id. 
When  the  csesural  pause  occurs,  as  in  the  latter  example,  after  the  arsia 
of  the  fourth  foot,  another  but  slighter  one  is  often  found  in  the  second 
foot ;  as, 
Prima  te- 1  net,  j  |  plan- 1  sQque  vo-  (  lat  1 1  fremi- 1  tuque  se- 1  cundo.   Virg. 

6.  The  caesura  after  the  third  foot  was  least  approved  ;  as, 
Cui  non  |  dictus  Hy- 1  las  puer  1 1  et  La- 1  tonia  |  Delos.   Virg. 

The  csesural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  feet  is  termed  the 
bucolic  caesura. 

NOTE  1.  The  caesura  after  the  arsis  is  sometimes  called  the  masculine 
eassura  ;  that  in  the  thesis,  the  feminine  or  trochaic,  as  a  trochee  immedi- 
ately precedes. 

NOTE  2.  In  the  principal  caesura  of  the  verse,  poets  frequently  intro- 
duce a  pause  in  the  sense,  which  must  be  attended  to,  in  order  to  deter- 
mine the  place  of  the  caesural  pause.  For  in  the  common  place  for  the 
caesura  in  the  third  foot,  there  is  often  a  coesura  of  the  foot;  while,  in  the 
fourth  foot,  a  still  more  marked  division  occurs.  In  this  case,  the  latter  is 
to  be  considered  as  the  principal  caesura,  and  distinguished  accordingly ; 
as, 

Belli  j  ferra- 1  tos  pos- 1  tes,  1 1  por- 1  tasque  re- 1  fregit.  Hor. 

II.  The  Priapean  is  usually  accounted  a  species  of  hexam- 
eter. It  is  so  constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of 
three  feet  each,  having  generally  a  trochee  in  the  first  and 
fourth  foot,  and  an  amphimacer  in  the  third ;  as, 

O  co-  I  loniS.  |  quaB  ciipls  1 1  ponte  |  luderg  |  longo.  Catull. 


It  is,  however,  more  properly  considered  as  choriambic  metre,  consisting 
of  alternate  Glyconics  and  Fherecratics.     See  §  316,  IV.  V. 

NOTE.     A  regular  hexameter  verse  is  termed  Priapean,  when  it  is  so 
constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each ;  as, 
Tertia  |  pars  pa- 1  tri  data  |  pars  data  |  tertia  |  patri.  Catull. 

See  above,  6. 

§  311.     III.  A  pentameter  verse  consists  of  five  feet. 
It  is  generally,  however,  divided,  in  scanning,  into  two  hemis- 
tichs,  the  first  consisting  of  two  feet,  either  dactyls  or  spondees, 


288       PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;    ANAP^STIC    METRE. 

followed  by  a  long  syllable;  the  last  of  two  dactyls,  also  follow- 
ed by  a  long  syllable  ;  as, 

NatQ- 1  re  sgqui- 1  tar  ||  s6mina  |  quisquS  su- 1  ®.  Prop. 

Carmini- 1  bus  vl- 1  ves  1 1  tempiia  in  |  omng  me1- 1  Is.  Ovid. 

1.  According  to  the   more   ancient  and   correct  mode  of 
scanning  pentameter  verse,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  of  which 
the  first  and  second  may  each  be  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ;  the 
third  is  always  a  spondee ;  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  are  ana- 
paests; as, 

Nata- 1  ree  sSqui- 1  tur  1 1  sem- 1  in£  quls- 1  quS  su®. 
Carmini- 1  bus  vl- 1  ves  1 1  tern- 1  pus  In  om- 1  n6  mSIs. 

2.  The  caesura,  in  pentameter  verse,  always  occurs  after  the 
penthemimeris,  i.  e.  at  the  close  of  the  first  hemistich.     It  very 
rarely  lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

3.  The  pentameter  rarely  ends  with  a  word  of  three  syllables.     In 
Ovid,  it  usually  ends  with  a  dissyllable. 

This  species  of  verse  is  seldom  used,  except  in  connection  with  hexam- 
eter, a  line  of  each  recurring  alternately.  This  combination  is  called 
elegiac  verse.  Thus, 

Flebllis  indignos,  ElegeTfa,  solve  capillos. 

Ah  nimis  ex  vero  nunc  tibi  nomen  erit !  Ovid. 

§312.  IV.  The  tetrameter  a  prior  e,  or  Alcmanian  dac- 
tylic tetrameter,  consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  hexameter, 
of  which  the  fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Garrula  |  per  ra- 1  mos  avis  |  obstrepit.  Sen. 

V.  The  tetrameter  a  posteriore,  or  spondaic  tetrameter,  con- 
sists of  the  last  four  feet  of  a  hexameter  ;  as, 

Ibimus,  |  O  s5ci-|  I,  comi-|  tgsque.  Hor. 

VI.  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  a 
hexameter;  as, 

Grato  |  Pyrrha   sub  |  antro.  Hor. 

But  this  kind  of  verse  is  more  properly  included  in  choriambic  metre. 
See  §  316,  V. 

VII.  The  trimeter  catalectic,  or  ArchilocMan  penthemimeris, 
consists  of  the  first  five  half  feet  of  a  hexameter,  but  the  first 
two  feet  are  commoi^y  dactyls  ;  as, 

Pulvis  et  |  umbra  su- 1  mus.  Hor. 

VIII.  The  dactylic  dimeter,  or  Adonic,  consists  of  two  feet, 
a  dactyl  and  a  spondee  ;  as, 

Rlsit  A- 1  polio.  Hor. 

ANAPAESTIC  METRE. 

§  313.  I.  The  anapcBstic  monometer  consists  of  two  ana- 
psests;  as, 

Ultilas- 1  sg  canes.  Sen. 


<§>314.    PROSODY. VERSIFICATION,    IAMBIC    METRE.  289 

II.  The  anapcBstic  dimeter  consists  of  two  measures,  or  four 
anapaests;  as, 

Phargtrffi- 1  qug  graves  |  datg  s»- 1  v*  fero Sen. 

The  first  foot  in  each  measure  of  anapaestic  metre  was  very  often 
changed  to  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  and  the  second  foot  often  to  a  spondee, 
and,  in  a  few  instances,  to  a  dactyl. 

Anapaestic  verses  are  generally  so  constructed  that  each  measure  end* 
with  a  word,  so  that  they  may  be  written  and  read  in  lines  of  one,  two, 
or  more  measures. 

IAMBIC  METRE. 

§  314.  I.  The  iambic  trimeter,  or  senarius,  consists  of 
three  iambic  measures,  or  six  iambic  feet ;  as, 

Phase- 1  lus  II- 1  16,  ||  quern  |  vide- 1  tis,  hos- 1  pites Catull. 

The  caesura  commonly  occurs  after  the  fifth  semi-foot. 

The  pure  iambic  measure  was  seldom  used.    To  give  to  this 
metre  greater  slowness  and  dignity,  spondees  were  introduced 
into  the  first,  third,  and  fifth  places ;  and  in  every  foot  except 
the  last,  which  was  always  an  iambic,  a  long  syllable  was  often 
changed   into  two  short  ones,  so  that  an  anapaest  or  a  dactyl 
was  used  for  a  spondee,  and  a  tribrach  for  an  iambus ;  as, 
Quo,  quo  |  sceles-j  tl  rui- 1  tis?  aut  |  cur  dex- 1  tens....  Hor. 
Aliti- 1  bus  at- 1  quS  cam- 1  bus  horn!- 1  cida  Hec- 1  torem Id. 

Sometimes,  also,  a  proceleusmatic  was  used  in  the  first  place  for  a 
spondee.  The  writers  of  comedy,  satire,  and  fable,  admitted  the  spondee 
and  its  equivalents  (the  dactyl  and  anapaest)  into  the  second  and  fourth 
places,  as  well  as  the  first,  third,  and  fifth. 

II.  The  scazon,  or  choliambus  (lame  iambic),  is  the  iambic 
trimeter,  with  a  spondee  in  the  sixth  foot,  and  generally  an 
iambus  in  the  fifth  ;  as, 

Cur  in  |  thea- 1  tram,  Cat5,  |  sev6-  |  r«  ve- 1  nlstl  ? 
An  Ids- 1  o  tan-  [  turn  ven- 1  eras  |  ut  ex- 1  ires  ?  Mart. 
This  species  of  verse  is  also  called  Hipjionactic  trimeter. 

III.  The    iambic    tetrameter,    or    octonarius,    called    also 
quadratus,  a  measure  used  by  the  comic  poets,  consists  of  four 
iambic  measures,  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic 
trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

Nunc  hie  |  dies  |  allam  |  vitam  af-  |  fert,  all- 1  os  mo- 1  res  pos- 1  tQlat.  Ter. 

IV.  The  iambic  tetrameter  catalectic,  or  Hipponactic,  is  the 
iambic  tetrameter,  wanting  the  last  syllable,  and  naving  always 
an  iambus  in  the  seventh  place,  but  admitting  in  the  other  places 
the  same  variations  as  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter  ;  as, 

Depren- 1  sa  na- 1  via  In  |  marl  |  vesa- 1  men- 1  t6  ren- 1  to.  CatuU. 

25 


290     PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;  TROCHAIC  METRE. 

V.  The  iambic   trimeter  catalectic,  or  Archilocliian,  is  the 
iambic  trimeter  (I.),  wanting  the  final  syllable.     Like  the  com- 
mon iambic  trimeter,  it  admits  a  spondee  into  the  first  and 
third  places,  but  not  into  the  fifth ;  as, 

Voca- 1  tus  at- 1  qu6  non  j  voca-  |  tus  aa- 1  dit.  Hor. 
TrahQnt- 1  que  sic- 1  cas  mach-  j  in®  |  carl- 1  nas.  Id 

VI.  The  iambic  dimeter  consists  of  two   iambic  measures, 
with  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic  trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

FortI  |  sgque-  |  mur  pec- 1  tore.  Hor. 
Canidi- 1  a  trac- 1  tavlt  |  dapes.  Id. 
Vide- 1  r£  propg- I  rantes  |  domum.  Id. 
The  iambic  dimeter  is  also  called  the  Archilochian  dimeter. 

VII.  The  iambic  dimeter  hypermetcr,  called  also  Archilo- 
cliian,  is  the  iambic  dimeter,  with  an  additional  syllable  at  the 
end;  as, 

Rede- 1  git  ad  |  veros  |  timo- 1  res.  Hor. 
Horace  always  makes  the  third  foot  a  spondee. 

VIII.  The  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  is  the  iambic  dimeter, 
wanting  the  first  syllable  ;  as, 

Non  |  ebur  [  nSque  au-|  reum Hor. 

This  kind  of  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  catalectic  trochaic  dimeter. 
See  §  315,  IV. 

IX.  The  iambic  dimeter  catalectic,  or  Anacreontic ,  is  the 
iambic  dimeter,  wanting  the  final  syllable,  and  having  always 
an  iambus  in  the  third  foot ;  as, 

Ut  tl- !  gris  or- 1  ba  gna- 1  tls.  Sen. 

X.  The  Galliambus  consists  of  two  iambic  dimeters  catalec- 
tic, the  last  of  which  wants  the  final  syllable. 

The  first  foot  is  generally  a  spondee  or  an  anapaest ;  the  catalectic  syl- 
lable at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter  is  long,  and  the  second  foot  of  the 
second  dimeter  is  commonly  a  tribrach ;  as, 

Super  al- 1  ta  vec- )  tus  A- 1  tys  ||  celgrl  |  rate*  mS-  j  ria.  Catull. 

The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter. 

TROCHAIC  METRE. 

V  *** •**•  Trochaic  verses  bear  a  near  affinity  to  iambics.  The  addi- 
tion or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  beginning  of  a  pure  iambic  verse, 
renders  it  pure  trochaic,  and  the  addition  or  retrenchment  oi  a  syllable  at 
the  beginning  of  a  pure  trochaic  line,  renders  it  pure  iambic,  with  the 
deficiency  or  redundancy  of  a  syllable  in  each  case  at  the  ena  of  the 
verse. 

I.  The  trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic  is  the  most  common 
trochaic  metre.  It  consists  of  seven  feet,  followed  by  a  cata 
lectic  syllable.  In  the  odd  places,  it  admits  a  tribrach,  but  in 
the  seventh  a  trochee  only.  In  the  even  places,  besides  the 


PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;  CHORIAMBIC  METRE.  291 

tribrach,  it  admits  also  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  an  anapaest,  and 
sometimes  a  proceleusmatic  ;  as^ 

Jussus  I  est  in- 1  ermis  |  Ire  :  1 1  purus  |  ire  |  jussiis  |  est.  Catull. 

Rornu-|  teas  |  Ipsa  |  fecit  ||  cum  Sa- 1  blms  |  nupti- 1  as.  Id. 

DanSi- 1  des,  co- 1  Ite ;  |  vestras  ||  hie  dl-  \  es  quae- 1  rlt  mi- 1  nus.  Sen. 

The  pure  trochaic  verse  was  rarely  used.  The  caesura)  pause  uniformly 
occurs  after  the  fourth  foot.  The  comic  writers  introduced  the  spondee 
and  its  equivalent  feet  into  the  odd  places. 

The  complete  trochaic  tetrameter  properly  consists  of  eight  feet,  all 
trochees,  subject,  however,  to  the  same  variations  as  the  catalectic 
tetrameter;  as, 

Ipse  |  summls  J  saxls  |  f  Ixiis  |  aspe"- 1  rls,  e- 1  vlsce- 1  ratus.  Enn. 

II.  The  Sapphic  verse,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  con- 
sists of  five  feet — the  first  a  trochee,  the  second  a  spondee,  the 
third  a  dactyl,  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  trochees  ;  as, 

IntS- 1  ger  vl- 1  tee,  1 1  scelS- 1  rlsquS  |  purus.  Hor. 

S.appho,  and,  after  her  example,  Catullus,  sometimes  made  the  second 
foot  a  trochee. 

Those  Sapphics  are  most  harmonious  which  have  the  caesura  after  the 
fifth  semi-foot. 

NOTE.  In  the  composition  of  the  Sapphic  stanza,  a  word  is  sometimes 
divided  between  the  end  of  the  third  Sapphic,  and  the  beginning  of  the 
Adonic  which  follows ;  as, 

Labi- 1  tur  rl- 1  pa  Jovg  |  non  pr6- 1  bante  ux- 

drius  j  amnis.  Hor. 

This  occurs  only  in  Catullus  and  Horace ;  and  it  has  been  thought  by 
some  that  such  lines  should  be  considered  as  one  verse  of  seven  feet,  the 
fifth  foot  being  either  a  spondee  or  a  trochee. 

III.  The  Plial&cian  verse  consists  of  five  feet — the  first  a 
spondee,  the  second  a  dactyl,  and  the  three  others  trochees ;  as, 

Non  est  |  vlvSre,  |  sed  va- 1  lerfi  |  vita.  Mart. 

Instead  of  a  spondee  as  the  firstfoot,  Catullus  sometimes  uses  a  trochee 
or  an  iambus.  This  writer  also  sometimes  uses  a  spondee  in  the  second 
place. 

The  PltalcBcian  verse  is  sometimes  called  hendecasyllaMc,  as  consisting 
of  eleven  syllables;  but  that  name  does  not  exclusively  belong  to  it, 

IV.  The  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  consists  of  three  feet, 
properly  all  trochees,  but  admitting  in  the  second  place  a  spon- 
dee or  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Non  e- 1  bur  ne-  j  que  aure-  |  um.  Hor. 

NOTE.  This  measure  is  the  same  as  the  acephalous  iambic  dimeter 
(see  §314,  VIII.),  and  it  is  not  important  whether  it  be  regarded  as 
iambic  or  trochaic. 

CHORIAMBIC   METRL. 

$316.  I.  The  choriambic  pentameter  consists  of  a  spon- 
dee, three  choriambi,  and  an  iambus  ;  as, 

To  ne  |  quaesle'ris,  |  sclrg  neTas  |  quern  mihT,  quern  |  tibl....  Hor 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     IONIC    METRE.    §  317. 

II.  The  choriambic  tetrameter  consists  of  three  choriambi,  or 
feet  of  equal  length,  and  a  Bacchius;  as, 

Omnfi  ngmas  |  cum  fluvils,  |  omne  canat  |  profundum.  Claud. 
In  this  verse  Horace  substituted  a  spondee  for  the  iambus 
contained  in  the  first  choriambus ;   as, 

Te  de"6s  6- 1  ro,  S^barln  |  cur  prepares  |  amando....  Hor. 

III.  The  Asclepiadic  tetrameter  (invented  by  the  poet  Ascle- 
piades)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an   iambus ; 
as, 

Maece- 1  nas,  Stavls  ||  editg  reg- 1  ibus.  Hor. 

This  form  is  invariably  observed  by  Horace ;  but  other  poets  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  make  the  first  foot  a  dactyl. 

The  csesural  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  choriambus. 
This  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dactylic  pentameter 
catalectic.     See  §  311,  III.     Thus, 

Mtece-|  nas,  ata-|  vis  ||  editg  j  regibus. 

IV.  The  choriambic  trimeter,  or  Gly conic  (invented  by  the 
poet  Glyco),  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  an  iam- 
bus; as, 

Sic  te  |  diva  pStens  |  Cyprl....  Hor. 
The  first  foot  is  sometimes  an  iambus  or  a  trochee. 
When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  the  other  feet  are  sometimes 
scanned  as  dactyls.     Thus, 

Sic  te  |  diva  p6-  |  tens  C^pri. 

V.  The  choriambic   trimeter  catalectic ,   or  Pherecratic   (so 
called  from  the  poet  Pherecrates),  is  the  Gly  conic  deprived  of 
its  final  syllable,  and  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and 
a  catalectic  syllable ;  as, 

Grato  j  Pyrrha  sub  an- 1  tro.  Hor. 

The  first  foot  was  sometimes  a  trochee  or  an  iambus. 

When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  this  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as 
a  dactylic  trimeter.  See  §  31  a,  VI. 

The  Pherecratic  subjoined  to  the  Glyconic  produces  the  Priapean  verse. 
See  §31 0,11. 

VI.  The  choriambic  dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus  and  a 
Bacchius ;  as, 

Lydla  die  |  p6r  omnes.  Hor. 

IONIC    METRE. 

§  317.  I.  The  Ionic  a  majore,  or  Sotadic  (from  the  poet 
Sotades),  consists  of  three  greater  Ionics  and  a  spondee. 

The  Ionic  feet,  however,  are  often  changed  into  ditrochees,  and  a  long 
syllable  into  two  short  ones ;  as, 

Has,  cum  gemi- 1  na  compgdg,  |  dedicat  c5- 1  tenas, 
Saturne,  tl- 1  bi  Zoilus,  |  annulos  pri-|  Ores.    Mart. 


PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     COMPOUND    METRES.     293 

II.  The  Ionic  a  minorc  consists  generally  of  three  or  four 
feet,  which  are  all  smaller  Ionics  as, 

PuSr  ales,  |  tibi  teias,  |  Spgrosse- 1  qug  Mm6rvs§....  Hor. 

COMPOUND   METRES. 

§  318.     Compound  metre  is  the  union  of  two  species  of 
metre  in  the  same  verse. 

I.  The  dactylico-iambic  metre  consists  of  a  dactylic  trimeter 
catalectic  (§312,  VII.)  and  an  iambic  dimeter  (§314,  VI.); 
as, 

Scribere  |  versictt- 1  los  ||  amo- 1  re  per-  |  calsum  |  grSvT....  Hor. 

II.  The  iambico-dactylic  metre  consists  of  the  same  mem- 
bers as  the  preceding,  but  in  a  reversed  order  ;  as, 

Nives- 1  qug  de-  j  ducunt  |  Jovem :  ||  nQnc  marS,  |  mine  silu- 1  83.  Hor. 
NOTE.     The    members  composing  this  and  the  preceding  species  of 
verse  are  often  written  in  separate  verses. 

III.  The  greater  Alcaic  consists  of  two  iambic  feet,  and  a 
long  catalectic  syllable  followed  by  a  choriambus,  and  an  iam- 
bus ;  as, 

Vides  |  iit  al- 1  ta  ||  stet  nive  can- 1  dldum.  Hor. 
The  first  foot  is  often  a  spondee. 

The  cresura  uniformly  occurs  after  the  catalectic  syllable. 
This  verse  is  sometimes  so  scanned  as  to  make  the  last  two  feet  dactyls. 

IV.  The  dactylico-trochaic,  or  Archilochian  heptameter,  con- 
sists of  the  dactylic  tetrameter  a  pridre  (§  312),  followed  by 
three  trochees  ;  as, 

Solvliiir  )  acris  hi- 1  ems  gra- 1  ta  vicg  ||  veris  |  et  Fa- 1  voni.  Hor. 
The  caesura  occurs  between  the  two  members. 

V.  The  dactylico-trochaic  tetrameter,  or  lesser  Alcaic,  con- 
sists of  two  dactyls,  followed  by  two  trochees  ;  as, 

Levia  |  personG- 1  erg  |  saxa.  Hor. 


COMBINATION  OF  VERSES  IN  POEMS. 

<§>  319.     A  poem  may  consist  of  one  or  more  kinds  of  verse. 

A  poem  in  which  only  one  kind  of  verse  is  employed,  is 
called  carmen  monocdlon ;  that  which  has  two  kinds,  dicolon ; 
that  which  has  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

When  the  poem  returns,  after  the  second  line,  to  the  same 
verse  with  which  it  began,  it  is  called  distrophon;  when  after 
the  third  line,  tristrophon  ;  and  when  after  the  fourth,  tctrastro- 
phon. 

The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  poem  returns  to 
25* 


294     PROSODY. VERSIFICATION  ;     HORATIAN    METRES. 

the  kind  of  verse  with  which  it  began,  constitute  a  stanza  or 
strophe. 

A  poem  consisting  of  two  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  two 
verses,  is  called  dicolon  distrdphon,  (see  §  320,  Syn.  3 ;)  when  it  contains 
three,  dicolon  tristrdphon,  (Auson.  Profess.  21 ;)  when  four,  dicolon  tetras- 
trdphon,  (Syn.  2;)  and  when  five,  dicolon  pentastrophon. 

A  poem  consisting  of  three  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains 
three  verses,  is  called  tricolon  tristrdphon,  (Syn.  15 ;)  when  four,  tricolor 
tetrastropkon,  (Syn.  1.) 

HORATIAN   METRES. 

§  320.  The  different  species  of  metre  used  by  Horace  in 
his  lyric  compositions  are  twenty.  The  various  forms  in  which 
he  has  employed  them,  either  separate  or  in  conjunction,  are 
nineteen,  arranged,  according  to  the  order  of  preference  given 
to  them  by  the  poet,  in  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Two  greater  Alcaics  (§318,  III.),  one  Archilochian  iam- 
bic dimeter  hypermeter  (§  314,  VII.),  and  one  lesser  Alcaic 
(§318,V.);  as, 

Vides,  ut  alta  stet  mve  candidum 
Soracte,  nee  jam  sustineant  onus 
Silvce  laborantes,  geluqug 

Flu  mini  const!  terint  acuto.  (Lib.  1,  9.) 

This  is  called  the  Horatian  stanza,  because  it  seems  to  have  been  a 
favorite  with  Horace,  being  used  in  thirty-seven  of  his  odes. 

2.  Three   Sapphics  (§315,   II.)   and    one    Adonic   (§312, 
VIII.) ;  as, 

Jam  satis  terns  mvis  atquS  dlrse 
Grandinis  mlslt  pater,  et,  rubentS 
Dextera  sacras  jacttlatCis  aices, 

Terruit  urbem.  (Lib.  1,  2.) 

3.  One  Glyconic  (§316,  IV.)  and  one  Asclepiadic  (§316, 
III.);  as, 

Sic  te  DivS  potens  Cypri, 

Sic  fratres  Helen®,  lucid*  sldera....      (Lib.  1,  3.) 

4.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§314,  I.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter 

(§314,  VI.);  as, 

Ibis  Liburnis  Intfir  alt&  navmm, 

AmicS,  propugnacula.  (Epod.  1.) 

5.  Three  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  III.)  and  one  Glyconic  (§  316, 

IV.);  as, 

Sen  bens  Vario  fortis,  6t  hostium 

Victor,  MlOomi  carmtnls  aliti, 

Quam  rem  curnqufi  f£rox  na  vibus  Sut  Squis 

Miles,  te  duc6,  gessgrit.  (Lib.  1,  6.x 


PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;  HORATIAN  METRES.     295 

6.  Two  Asclepiadics  (§316,  III.),  one  Pherecratic  (§316, 
V.),  and  one  Glyconic  (§316,  IV.) ;  as, 

Dianam,  tSngrde,  dicitS  virgmes  : 
Intonsum,  ptieri,  dlcitS  Cynthium, 
Latonamqug  supremo 

Dllectam  pgmtus  JSvi.  (Lib.  1,  21.) 

7.  The  Asclepiadic  (§316,  III.)  alone;  as, 

M®cenas  Stavis  edite  rfigibus.  (Lib.  1, 1.) 

8.  One   dactylic  hexameter    (§  310,   I.)  and  one  dactylic 
tetrameter  a  posteridre  (§  312,  V.) ;  as, 

Laudabant  alii  claram  RhSdon,  out  Mitylenen, 

Aut  Ephesum,  bimarlsvg  Cortnthi....  (Lib.  1,  7.) 

9.  The  choriambic  pentameter  (§  316,  I.)  alone  ;  as, 

TQ  ne  qucesierls,  scirg  neTas,  quern  mi  hi,  quern  tibi....    (Lib.  1, 11.) 

10.  One   dactylic   hexameter  (§  310,   I.)    and   one   iambic 
dimeter  (§314,  VI.);  as, 

Nox  erat,  et  coelo  fulgebat  lani  sgreno 
Inter  minors  sldgra.  (Epod.  15.) 

11.  The  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  I.)  alone;  as, 

Jam,  jam  efficacl  do  maims  scientiae.  (Epod.  17.) 

12.  One  choriambic  dimeter  (§316,  VI.)  and  one  choriambic 
tetrameter  (§316,  II.)  with  a  variation;  as, 

Lydia,  die,  pe"r  omnes 

Te  Deos  oro,  Sybarln  cur  properas  amando....  (Lib.  1,  8.) 

13.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.)  and  one  iambic  trim- 
eter (§314,  I.);  as, 

AltSri  jam  tgritur  bellls  clvllibus  ®tas  ; 

Suls  et  Ipsa  Roma  vlribus  ruit.  (Epod.  16.) 

14.  One  dactylic   hexameter  (§310,  I.)  and  one   dactylic 
trimeter  catalectic  (§  312,  VII.) ;  as, 

Dlffugerg  nives  :  redSunt  jam  grammS  campls, 

ArboribusquS  comse.  (Lib.  4.  7.) 

15.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§314,  I.),  one  dactylic  trimeter 
catalectic  (§312,  VII.),  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§314,    VI.) ; 
as, 

Petti,  nihll  me,  slcut  antga,  juvat 
Scrlberg  versiculos, 

Amorg  perculsum  gravi.  (Epod.  11.) 

NOTE.     The  second  and  third  lines  are  often  written  as  one  verse. 
See  §  318, 1. 

16.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  I.),  one  iambic  dimeter 
(§  314,  VI.),  and  one  dactylic  trimeter  catalectic  (§  312,  VII.)  ; 
as, 

Horrida  tempestas  ccelum  contraxit ;  et  imbres 
NlvesquS  dedacunt  J6vem  : 
Nunc  marfi,  nQnc  silueB....  (Epod.  13.) 


296    PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;    HORATIAN  METRES. 

NOTE.     The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  stanza,  also,  are  often  written 
as  one  verse.     See  §  318,  II. 

17.  One   Archilochian   heptameter    (§  318,   IV.)    and   one 
iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  V.) ;  as, 

Solvitur  acris  hiems  grata  vice  veris  et  Favonf, 

Trahuntque  slccas  machinal  carlnas.  (Lib.  1,  4.) 

18.  One  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  (§314,  VIII.)  and  one 
iambic  trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  V.) ;  as, 

Non  Sbur  neque  aureum 
Mea  rgnldet  In  domo  lacunar.  (Lib.  2,  18.) 

19.  The  Ionic  a  minore  (§317,  II.)  alone;  as, 
Miserarum  est  ngque  amorl  darg  ludum,  nequg  dalcl....  (Lib.  3, 12.) 


§321.    A  METRICAL  KEY  TO  THE   ODES  OF  HORACE, 

Containing,  in  alphabetic  order,  the  Jlrst  words  of  each,  with  a 
reference  to  the  numbers  in  the  preceding  Synopsis,  where  the 
metre  is  explained. 


jEli,  vetusto No.  1 

^Equam  memento 1 

Albi,  ne  doleas 5 

Altera  jam  terltur 13 

Angustam,  amlci 1 

At,  O  deorum 4 

Audivere,  Lyce G 

Bacchum  in  remotis 1 

Beatus  ille 4 

Coelo  supinas 1 

Coelo  tonantem 1 

Cum  tu,  Lydia 3 

Cur  me  querelis 1 

Delicta  majorum 1 

Descende  ccslo t 

Dianam,  tenera3 6 

Diffugere  nives 14 

Dive,  quern  proles 2 

Divis  orte  bonis 5 

Donarem  pateras 7 

Donee  gratus  eram 3 

Eheu  !  i'ugaces 1 

Est  mihi  nonum 2 

Et  thure  et  fidlbus 3 

Exegi  monumentum 7 

Extremum  Tanaim 5 

Faune,  nympharum 2 

Festo  quid  potius  die 3 

Herculis  ritu 2 

Horrlda  tempestas 16 

Ibis  Liburnis 4 


Icci,  beatis No.  1 

Ille  et  nefasto 1 

Impios  parrae 2 

Inclasam  Danagn 5 

Intactis  opulentior 3 

Integer  vita? 2 

Intermissa,  Venus,  diu 3 

Jam  jam  efficaci 11 

Jam  pauca  aratro 1 

Jam  satis  terris 2 

Jam  veris  comites 5 

Justum  et  tenacem 1 

Laudabunt  alii 8 

Lupis  et  agnis 4 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 12 

Ma3cenas  atavis 7 

Mala  soluta 4 

Martiis  cjelebs 2 

Mater  sa?va  Cupidinum 3 

Mercuri,  facunde 2 

Mercuri,  nam  te 2 

Miserarum  est 19 

Mollis  inertia 10 

Montium  custos 2 

Motum  ex  Metello 1 

Musis  amicus 1 

Natis  in  usum 1 

Ne  forte  credas 1 

Ne  sit  ancillse 2 

Nolis  longa  ferae 5 

Nondum  subacta I 


PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION;  HORATIAN  METRES.    297 


Non  ebur  neque  aureum  . . .  No.  18 

Non  semper  imbres 1 

Non  usitata . .   1 

Non  vides,  quanto 2 

Nox  erat 10 

Nullam,  Vare,  sacra 9 

Nullus  argento 2 

Nunc  est  bibendum 1 

O  crudelis  adhuc 9 

O  diva,  gratum 1 

O  fons  fiandusiae 6 

O  matre  pulchra   1 

O  nata  mecum   1 

O  navis,  referent 6 

O  ssepe  mecum 1 

O  Venus,  reglna 2 

Odi  profanum 1 

Otium  Divos 2 

Parcius  junctas 2 

Parcus  Deorum 1 

Parentis  olim 4 

Pastor  quum  traheret 5 

Percicos  odi,  puer 2 

Petti,  nihil  me 15 

Phoebe,  silvarumque 2 

Phoebus  volentem 1 

Pindarum  quisquis 2 

Poscimur  :  siquid 2 

Qiue  cura  patrum 1 

Qualern  mmistrum 1 


Quando  repostum No.  4 

Quantum  distet  ab  Inacho 3 

Quern  tu,  Melpomgne 3 

Quern  virum  aut  heroa 2 

Quid  bellicosus 1 

Quid  dedicatum 1 

Quid  fles,  Asterie 6 

Quid  immerentes 4 

Quid  obseratis 11 

Quid  tibi  vis 8 

Quis  desiderio 5 

Quis  multa  gracilis 6 

Quo  me,  Bacche 3 

Quo,  quo,  scelesti  ruitis 4 

Rectius  vives 2 

Rogare  longo 4 

Scriberis  Vario 5 

Septimi,  Gades 2 

Sic  te  Diva  potens 3 

Solvitur  acris  hiems 17 

Te  maris  et  terras 8 

Tu  ne  qusesieris 9 

Tyrrhena  regum 1 

Ulla  si  juris 2 

Uxor  paupgris  Ibyci 3 

Velox  amcenum 1 

Vides,  ut  alta 1 

Vile  potabis 2 

Vitas  hinnuleo 6 

Vixi  puellis 1 


The  following  are  the  single  metres  used  by  Horace  in  his 
lyric  compositions,  viz. : — 


1.  Dactylic  Hexameter. 

2.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  posteriori. 

3.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

4.  Adonic. 

5.  Trimeter  Iambic. 

6.  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

7.  Iambic  Dimeter. 

8.  Archilocbian  Iambic  Dimeter  Hy- 

permeter. 

9.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acephalous. 

10.  Sapphic. 


11.  Chqriambic  Pentameter. 

12.  Choriambic  Tetrameter. 

13.  Asclepiadic  Tetrameter. 

14.  Glyconic. 

15.  Pherecratic. 

16.  Choriambic  Dimeter. 

17.  Ionic  a  minore. 

1 8.  Greater  Alcaic. 

19.  Archilochian  Heptameter. 

20.  Lesser  Alcaic. 


298  APPENDIX. GRAMMATICAL    FIGURES.  $  323. 


APPENDIX. 


GRAMMATICAL    FIGURES. 

§  322.  Certain  deviations  from  the  regular  form  and 
construction  of  words,  are  called  grammatical  figures.  These 
may  relate  either  to  Orthography  and  Etymology,  or  to  Syntax. 

I.    FIGURES    OF    ORTHOGRAPHY    AND   ETYMOLOGY. 

These  are  distinguished  by  the  general  name  of  melaplasm. 

1.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  a  word  ;  as,  gna- 
tuSj  for  natus ;  tct&li,  for  tuli.     Yet  these  were  anciently  the  customary 
forms,  from  which  those  now  in  use  were  formed  by  aphseresis. 

2.  JJph&rgsis  is  the  taking  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  beginning  of 
a  word ;  as,  'st,  for  est ;  rhabonem,  for  arrhabonem. 

3.  EpenthZsis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a 
word ;  as,  alituum,  for  alltum. 

4.  Syncdpe  is  the  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word, 
as,  deilm,  for  deorum ;  meum  factum,  for  meorum  factorum ;  sada,  for 
scBcula  ;  fiesti,  foiflevisti  ;  repostus,  for  reposltus  ;  aspris,  for  aspiris. 

5.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  into  one ;  as,  cogo,  for  codgo  ; 
nil,  for  nildl. 

6.  Paragdge  is  the  addition  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word ; 
as,  med,  for  me  ;  dandier,  for  daudi. 

7.  rfpocdpe  is  the  omission  of  the  final  letter  or  syllable  of  a  word  ;  as, 
men\  for  mene  ;  Jintoni,  for  Antonii. 

8.  Antithesis  is  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another ;  as,  o/Zi,  for 
illi  ;  optumus,  for  optlmus  ;  ajjicio,  for  adjicio.     O  is  often  thus  used  for  u, 
especially  after  v  ;  as,  voltus,  for  vultus ;  scrvom,  for  servum.     So  after 
qu  ;  as,  cefjuom,  for  aquum. 

9.  Metathesis  is  the  changing  of  the  order  of  letters  in  a  word ;  as, 
pistris,  for  pristis. 

II.    FIGURES    OF    SYNTAX. 

§  323.  The  figures  of  Syntax  are  ellipsis,  pleonasm, 
enalldge,  and  liyperbaton. 

1.  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  in  a  sen- 
tence ;  as, 

Aiunt,  sc.  homines.  Darius  Hystaspis,  sc.filius.  Cano,  sc.  ego.  Quid 
multa?  sc.  dicam.  Ex  quo,  sc.  tempore.  Ferlna,  sc.  caro. 

Ellipsis  includes  asyndeton,  zeugma,  syllepsis,  prolepsis* 
and  synecdoche 


§  323.  APPENDIX. FIGURES    OF    SYNTAX.  299 

(1.)  Asyndeton  is  the  omission  of  a  conjunction ;  as,  abiit,  czcessit, 
evdsit,  erupit,  sc.  et.  Cic. 

(2.)  Zeugma  is  the  uniting  of  two  nouns,  or  two  infinitives,  to  a  verb, 
which  is  applicable  only  to  one  of  them ;  as,  Pacem  an  bellum  gerens 
(Sail.),  where  gerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only.  Semperne  in  sanguine, 
ferro,  fugd  versablmur  1  (Id.)  where  the  verb  does  not  properly  apply  to 
ferro. 

Nego  is  often  thus  used  with  two  propositions,  one  of  which  is  affirma- 
tive ;  as,  Negant  Casarem  mansurum,  postulataque  interposlta  esse,  for 
dicuntque  postuldta....  Cic. 

When  an  adjective  or  verb,  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns,  agrees  with 
one,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest,  the  construction  is  also  sometimes 
called  zeugma ;  as,  Et  genus,  et  virtus,  nisi  cum  re,  vilior  algd  est.  Hor. 
Caper  tibi  salvus  et  hcedi.  Virg.  Quamvis  ille  niger,  quamvis  tu  Candida 
esses.  Id. 

(3.)  Syllepsis  is  when  an  adjective  or  verb,  belonging  to  two  or  more 
nouns  of  different  genders,  persons,  or  numbers,  agrees  with  one  rather 
than  another ;  as,  Attoniti  novitdte  pavent  Baucis,  timidusque  Philemon. 
Ovid  Procumbit  uterque  pronus  humi,  i.  e.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha.  Id. — 
Sustulimus  manus  et  ego  et  Balbus.  Cic.  So,  Ipse  cum  fratre  adesse  jussi 
sumus.  Id. — Projectisque  amiculo  et  literis.  Curt.  See  §  8  205,  REM.  2. 
and  209,  REM.  12,  (3,)  and  (7.) 

Zeugma,  in  the  latter  sense  above  mentioned,  is  by  some  included  under 
syllepsis. 

(4.)  Prolepsis  is  when  the  parts,  differing  in  number  or  person  from  the 
whole,  are  placed  after  it,  the  verb  or  adjective  not  being  repeated ;  as, 
Princlpes  utrinquc  pugnam  ciebant,ab  Sablnis  Mettius  Curtius,  ab  Romdnis 
Hostus  Hostilius.  Liv.  Boni  quoniam  convenlmus  ambo,  tu  caldmos  infldre, 
ego  dicere  versus.  Virg. 

(5.)  Synecdoche  is  the  use  of  an  accusative  of  the  part  affected,  instead 
of  an  ablative  ;  as,  Expleri  mentem  nequit.  Virg.  See  §  234,  II. 

2.  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  ne- 
cessary to  express  the  meaning  ;  as, 

Sic  ore  locuta  est.  Virg.  Qui  magis  verb  vincere  quam  diu  imperdre 
malit.  Liv.  Nemo  unus.  Cic.  Forte  fortuna.  Id.  Prudens  sciens.  Ter. 

Under  pleonasm  are  included  parelcon,  polysyndeton,  hendi- 
ddys,  and  periphrasis. 

(1.)  Parelcon  is  the  addition  of  an  unnecessary  syllable  or  particle  to 
pronouns,  verbs,  or  adverbs ;  as,  egomet,  ag&dum,  fortassean.  Such  addi- 
tions, however,  usually  modify  the  meaning  in  some  degree. 

(2.)  Polysyndeton  is  a  redundancy  of  conjunctions ;  as,  Una  Eurusque 
Notusque  ruunt  creberque  procellis  Africus.  Virg. 

(3.)  Hendiddys  is  the  expression  of  an  idea  by  two  nouns  connected  by 
et,-que,oratque,  instead  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  adjective  or  genitive  ;  as, 
Pateris  libdmus  et  auro,  for  aureis  pat&ris.  Virg.  Libro  et  silvestri  subere 
clausam,  for  libro  suberis.  Id.  Cristis  et  auro.  Ovid.  Met.  Ill,  32. 

(4.)  Periphrasis  is  a  circuitous  mode  of  expression ;  as,  TenSri  foetus 
ovium,  i.  e.  agni.  Virg. 

3.  Enallage  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  one 
gender,  number,  case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice  of  the  same 
word  for  another. 


300  AIPENDIX. FIGURES    OF    SYNTAX.  <§>   323. 

Enallage  includes  antimeria,  heterosis,  a?itiptosis)  synesis, 
and  anacoluthon. 

(1.)  rfntimcria  is  the  use  of  one  part  of  speech  for  another;  as,  Nostrum 
istud  vivere  triste,  for  nostra  vita.  Pers.  jiliud  eras.  Id.  Conjugiurn 
vidtbit?  forconjugem.  Virg.  PlacUam  pad  nutntor  ollvam,  for  nutrlto.  Id. 

(2.)  Heterosis  is  the  use  of  one  form  of  a  noun,  pronoun,  verb,  &c.,  for 
another ;  as,  Ego  quoquc  una  perco,  quod  mihi  est  carius,  for  qui  mihi  sum 
carior.  Ter.  Romanus  prcdio  victor,  for  Romdni  victor es.  Liv.  Many 
words  are  used  by  the  poets  in  the  plural  instead  of  the  singular ;  as,  collat 
corda,  ora,  &c.  See  §  98.  Me  truncus  illapsus  cerebro  sustulerat,  for  sus- 
tulisset.  Hor. 

(3.)  Antiptosis  is  the  use  of  one  case  for  another ;  as,  Cui  nunc  cogno- 
men lulo,  for  lulus.  Virg.  Uxor  invicti  Jovis  esse  nescis,  for  te  esse  uxo- 
rcm.  Hor. 

(4.)  Syngsis,  or  synthesis,  is  adapting  the  construction  to  the  sense  of  a 
word,  rather  than  to  its  gender  or  number ;  as,  Subeunt  Tegcea  juventus 
auxilio  tardi.  Stat.  Concursus  populi  mirantium  quid  rei  est.  Liv.  Pars 
in  cruccm  acti.  Sail.  Ubi  illic  est  scelus,  qui  me  perdtdit  ?  Ter.  Id  meii 
minlme  refert,  qui  sum  natu  maxlmus.  Id.  See  also  §  206,  (12.) 

(5.)  Anacoluthon  is  when  the  latter  part  of  a  sentence  does  not  agree 
in  construction  with  the  former ;  as,  Nam  nos  omnes,  quibus  est  alicunde 
allquis  objectus  labos,  omne  quod  est  interea  tempus,  priusquam  id  rescltum 
est,  lucro  est.  Ter.  In  this  example,  the  writer  began  as  if  he  intended  to 
say  lucro  habcmus,  and  ended  as  if  he  had  said  nobis  omnibus. 

4.  Hyperbdton  is  a  transgression  of  the  usual  order  of  words 
or  clauses. 

Hyperbaton  includes  anastrophe,  hysteron  proteron,  hypal- 
lage,  synchysiS)  tmesis,  and  parenthesis. 

(1.)  Anastrftphe  is  an  inversion  of  the  order  of  two  words ;  as,  Trans- 
tra  per  et  remos,  for  per  transtra.  Virg.  Cotlo  dare  brachia  circum,  for  cir- 
cumddre.  Id.  Nox  erit  una  super ,  for  super erit.  Ovid.  Et  fa  tit  arc,  for 
arefacit.  Lucr. 

(2.)  Hysteron  protlron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense ;  as, 
Moridmur,  et  in  media  arma  ruamus.  Virg.  Valet  atque  vivit.  Ter. 

(3.)  Hypalldge  is  an  interchange  of  constructions ;  as,  In  novafcrt  ani- 
mus mutatas  dicere  formas  corpora,  for  corpora  mutdta  in  novas  formas. 
Ovid.  Dare  classlbus  Austros,  for  dare  classes  Austris.  Virg. 

(4.)  Synchysis,  is  a  confused  position  of  words  j  as,  Saxa  vacant  Itali, 
mediis  qua  in  fluctlbuSj  aras,  for  qua  saxa  in  mediis  jluctibus,  Itali  vocant 
aras.  Virg. 

(5.)  Tmesis  is  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  a  compound  word ;  as, 
Septcm  subjecta  trioni  gens,  for  septentrioni.  Virg.  Quce  me  cunque  vocant 
tcrrce.  Id.  Per  mihi,  per,  inquam,  gratumfeceris.  Cic. 

(6.)  Parenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  word  or  words  in  a  sentence 
which  interrupt  the  natural  connection ;  as,  Tityre  dum  redeo,  (brevis  est 
via,)  pasce  capdlas.  Virg. 

REMARK.  To  the  above  may  be  added  archaism  and  Hel- 
lenism, which  belong  both  to  the  figures  of  etymology  and  to 
those  of  syntax. 

(1.)  Archaism  is  the  use  of  ancient  forms  or  constructions;  as,  auldi 


APPENDIX. TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF    RHETORIC.    301 

for  aula  ;  senati,  for  senates  ;  fuat,  for  sit ;  prohibesso,  for  prohibuero  ;  im- 
petrassere,  for  impetraturum  esse  ;  farter,  forfari;  nenu,  for  non  ;  endo,  for 

in  ; Operam  abutltur,  for  opera.  Ter.     Quid  tibi  hanc  curatio  est  rem  ? 

Plaut. 

(2.)  Hellenism  is  the  use  of  Greek  forms  or  constructions ;  as,  HcUne, 
for  HelSna;  Antlphon,  for  Antlpho ;  auras  (gen.),  for  aura;  Pallados, 
Pallada,  for  Palladis,  Pallddem ;  Tro&sin,  Troadas,  for  Troadlbus,  Trod- 
des  ; Abstin&to  irarum.  Hor.  Tempos  desistere  pugna.  Virg. 

§  324.  To  the  grammatical  figures  may  not  improperly  be  sub- 
joined certain  others,  which  are  often  referred  to  in  philological  works,  and 
which  are  called 


TROPES   AND    FIGURES    OF  RHETORIC. 

A  rhetorical  figure  is  a  mode  of  expression  different  from  the  direct  and 
simple  way  of  expressing  the  same  sense.  The  turning  of  a  word  from 
its  original  and  customary  meaning,  is  called  a  trope. 

1.  A  metaphor  is  the  transferring  of  a  word  from  the  object  to  which  it 
properly  belongs,  and  applying  it  to  another,  to  which  that  object  has  some 
analogy  ;  as,  Ridet  agcr,  The  field  smiles.  Virg.    JEtas  aurea,  The  golden 
age.  Ovid. 

Catachresis  is  a  bold  or  harsh  metaphor ;  as,  Vir  gregis  ipse  caper.  Virg. 
Eurus  per  Siculas  equitavit  undas.  Hor. 

2.  Metonymy  is  substituting  the  name  of  an  object  for  that  of  another 
to  which  it  has  a  Certain  relation  j  as  the  cause  for  the  effect,  the  container 
cor  what  is  contained,  the  property  for  the  substance,  the  sign  for  the  thing 
signified,  and  their  contraries ;  the  parts  of  the  body  for  certain  affections, 
&c. ;  as,  Amor  duri  Martis,  i.  e.  belli.  Virg.     Pallida  mors.  Hor.     Hausit 
pateram,  i.  e.  vinum.   Virg.     Vina  coronant,  i.  e.  pateram.    Id.     Necte 
tcrnos  colores,  i.  e.  tria  fila  diversi  coloris.  Id.     Cedant  arma  togas,  i.  e. 
bellum  pad.  Cic.     Saecula  mitcscent,  i.  e.  homines  in  sceculis.  Virg.     Vivat 
Pacuvius  vel  Nestora  totum.  Juv. 

3.  Synecdoche  is  putting  a  genus  for  a  species,  a  whole  for  a  part,  a  sin- 
gular for  a  plural,  and  their  contraries ;  also  the  material  for  the  thing 
made  of  it ;  as,  Mortdles,  for  homines.  Virg.     Fontem  fertbant.  Id.     Tec- 
tum,  for  domus.  Id.    Armato  milite  comptentj  for  armdtis  miliftbus.  Id. 
Fcrrum,  for  gladius. 

4.  Irony  is  the  intentional  use  of  words  which  express  a  sense  contrary 
to  that  which  the  writer  or  speaker  means  to  convey  ;  as,  Salve,  bone  mrt 
curdsti  probe.  Ter.     Egregiam  verd  laudem,  et  spolia  ampla  refertis,  tuque, 
puerque  tuus.  Virg. 

5.  Hyperbole  is  the  magnifying  or  diminishing  of  a  thing  beyond  the 
truth  j  as,  Ipse  arduus,  altaque  pulsat  sidera.  Virg.     Odor  Euro.  Id. 

6.  Metalepsis  is  the  including  of  several  tropes  in  one  word ;  as,  Post 
aliquot  aristas.  Virg.     Here  aristas  is  put  for  messes,  this  for  (estates,  and 
this  for  annos. 

7.  Allegory  is  a  consistent  series  of  metaphors,  designed  to  illustrate  one 
subject  by  another ;  as,  Claudlte  jam  rivos,  pueri :  sat  prata  biberunt.  Virg. 
0  navis,  referent  in  mare  te  novifuctus.  Hor. 

An  obscure  allegory  or  riddle  is  called  an  (Enigma. 

8.  Antonomasia  is  using  a  proper  noun  for  a  common  one,  and  the  con- 
trary;  as,  Irus  et  est  sublto,  qui  modd  Croesus  erat,  for  pauper  and  dives ^ 
Ovid.     So,  by  periphrasis,  potor  Rhodani,  for  Callus.  Hor. 


302 


APPENDIX. TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF    RHETORIC. 


9.  Litdtes  is  a  mode  of  expressing  something  by  denying  the  contrary  ; 
as,  Won  laudo,  I  blame.  Ter.    JYVm  innoxia  verba.  Virg. 

10.  Antiphrdsis  is  using  a  word  in  a  sense  opposite  to  its  proper  meaning; 
as,  Auri  sacra  fames.  Virg. 

11.  Euphemism  is  the  use  of  softened  language  to  express  what  is  offen- 
sive or  distressing ;  as,  Si  quid  accidisset  C&sdri,  i.  e.  si  mortuus  esset.  Veil. 

12.  Antanacldsis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  in  different  senses ;  as, 
Quis  neget  JEnea  natum  de  stirpe  Neronem  1  Sustulit  hie  matrem,  sustulit 
ille  patrem.  Epigr.   Amari  jucundum  est,  si  curetur  ne  quid  insit  amari.  Cic. 

13.  Anaphora^  or  epanaphora,  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  begin- 
ning of  successive  clauses ;  as,  Nihilwe  te  nocturnum  presidium  palatii, 
niiiil  urbis  vigilice,  nihil  timor  populi,  &c.  Cic.     Te,  dulcis  conjux,  te,  solo 
in  iitore  securrij  te,  veniente  die,  te,  decedente,  canebat.  Virg. 

14.  Epistrophe  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  end   of  successive 
clauses ;  as,  Pcenos  populus  Romdnus  justitid  vicit,  armis  vicit,  libcralitdte 
vicit.  Cic. 

15.  Symploce  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning,  and  of  an- 
other at  the  end,  of  successive  clauses ;  as,  Quis  legem   tulit  1  Rullus : 
Quis  majorcm  populi  partem  suffragiis  privdvit  ?  Rullus  :  Quis  comitiis 
prcefuit  1  Idem  Rullus.  Cic. 

16.  Epanalepsis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  or  sentence  afler  a 
parenthesis.  Virg.  Geor.  II.  4 — 7. 

17.  Anadiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  at  the  end  of  one  clause, 
and  the  beginning  of  another;    as,  Hie  tamen  vivit :  Vivit?    into  vcrd, 
etiam  in  scndtum  venit.  Cic.     This  is  sometimes  called  epanastrdphe . 

18.  Epanadiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  both  at  the  beginning 
and  end  of  a  sentence ;  as,  Crescit  amor  nwnmi,  quantum  ipsa  pecunia 
crescit.  Juv. 

19.  Epanddos  is  the  repetition  of  the  same  words  in  an  inverted  order ; 
as,  Crndllis  mater  magis,  an  puer  improbus  ille  ?  Improbus  ille  puer,  cru- 
delis  tu  quoque}  mater.  Virg. 

20.  Epizeuxis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  ; 
as,  Excitate,  excitate  eum  ah  infSris.  Cic.     Ah  Corydon,  Corydon,  qua  te 
dementia  cepit  ?  Virg.     Iblmus,  ibimus.  Hor. 

21 .  Climax  is  when  each  successive  clause  of  a  sentence  begins  with 
the  conclusion  of  the  preceding,  the  sense  being  thus  gradually  amplified ; 
as,  Qua  rellqua  spes  manet  libertdtis,  si  illis  ct  quod  libet,  licet ;  et  quod  licet, 
possunt;  et  quod  possunt,  audent ;  et  quud  audent,vobis  molestum  non  est? 
Cic. 

22.  Incrementum  is  an  amplification  without  a  strict  climax ;  as,  Factnus 
est,  vmclri  ctvcm  Romdnum  ;  scelus,  vcrbcrdri  ;  prope  parricidium,  necdri; 
quid  dicam  in  crucem  tolli?  Cic,     When  the  sense  is  gradually  heighten- 
ed, it  is  called  anabasis,  and  when  it  falls  or  decreases,  catabdsis. 

23.  Polyptoton  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  in  different  cases,  gen- 
ders, numbers,  &c. ;  as,  Jam  clypcuj  clypeis,  urnbone  repellltur  umbo  ;  ense 
minax  ensis,  ptde  pes,  et  cusplde  cuspis.  Stat. 

24.  Parrgmenon  is  the  use  of  several  words  of  the  same  origin,  in  one 
sentence ;  as,  Abesse  non  potest,  quin  cjusdem  homlnis  sit,  qui  irnprobos 
probet,  probos  improbare.  Cic. 

25.  Paronomasia  is  the  use  of  words  which  resemble  each  other  in 
sound  ;  as,  Amor  et  melle  ct  felle  est  f&cundissfynus.  Plaut.     Civem  bond- 
rum  artium,  bondrum  partium.  Cic.     Amantes  sunt  amentes.  Ter.     This 
figure  is  some  times  called  agnominatio. 


APPENDIX. TROPES    AND    FIGURES    OF    RHETORIC.    303 

26.  Homaopropheron,  or  alliteration,  is  when  several  words  beginning 
with  the  same  letter  occur  in  a  sentence  ;  as,  0  Tite,  tide,  Tati,  tibi  tanta, 
tyranne,  tulisti.  Enn.     Neu  patrics  valldas  in  viscera  vertite  vires.  Virg. 

27.  Antithesis  is  the  placing  of  different  or  opposite  words  or  sentiments 
in  contrast;  as,  Hujus  orationis  difficilius  est  exitum  quam  principium 
invcnlre.  Cic.     Csesar  beneficiisac  munificentia  magnus  habebatur;  integ- 
ritate  vitae  Cato.  Sail. 

28.  Oxymoron  unites  words  of  contrary  significations,  thus  producing 
a  seeming  contradiction ;  as,   Concordia  discors.  Hor.     Cum  tacent,  cla- 
mant. Cic. 

29.  Synonymia  is  the  use  of  different  words  or  expressions  having  the 
same  import ;  as,  Non  feram,  non  patiar,  non  sinam.  Cic.     Promitto,  re- 
cipioj  spondeo.  Id. 

30.  Parabdla,  or  simile,  is  the  comparison  of  one  thing  with  another ; 
as,  Repent£  te,  tanquam  serpens  e  latibulis,  oculis  eminentwus}  inflate  collo9 
tumtdis  cervidbus,  intulisti.  Cic. 

31.  Erotesis  is  an  earnest  question,  and  often  implies  a  strong  affirma- 
tion of  the  contrary ;   as,  Creditis  avectos  hostes  1  Virg.     Heu !  quce  me 
aquora  possunt  accipere  1  Id. 

32.  Epanorthosis  is  the  recalling  of  a  word,  in  order  to  place  a  stronger 
or  more  significant  one  in  its  stead ;  as,  Filium  urilcum  adolescentulum 
habeo :  ah !  quid  dixi  1  me  habere  ?  Imd  habui.  Ter. 

33.  JJposiopesis  is  leaving  a  sentence  unfinished  in  consequence  of  some 
emotion  of  the  mind ;  as,  Quos  ego — sed  motos  prastat  componSre  Jluctus. 
Virg. 

34.  Prosopopoeia,  or  personification,  represents  inanimate  things  as  act- 
ing or  speaking,  and  persons  dead  or  absent  as  alive  and  present ;  as,  Qua 
(patria)  tecum  Catillna  sic  agit.  Cic.     Virtus  sumit  aut  ponit  secures.  Hor. 

35.  Apostrophe  is  a  turning  off  from  the  regular  course  of  the  subject,  to 
address  some  person  or  thing ;  as,  Vi  potltur :  quid  non  mortalia  pectdra 
cogis,  auri  sacra  fames  !  Virg. 

<§>  3£o.     To  the  figures  of  rhetoric  may  be  subjoined  the  following 
terms,  used  to  designate  defects  or  blemishes  in  style  : — 

1.  Barbarism  is  either  the  use  of  a  foreign  word,  or  a  violation  of  the 
rules  of  orthography,  etymology,  or  prosody  ;  as,  rigorosus,  for  rigldus  or 
scverus  ;  dommlnus,  for  dominus  ;  davi,  for  dedi;  alterlus,  for  alterlus. 

2.  Solecism  is  a  violation  of  the  rules  of  syntax ;  as,  Venus  pulcher  /  vos 
invidemus. 

3.  Neoterism  is  the  use  of  words  or  phrases  introduced  by  authors  living 
subsequently  to  the  best  ages  of  Latinity;  as,  murdrum,  a  murder  j  con- 
stabularius,  a  constable. 

4.  Tautology  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  meaning  in  different  words;  as, 
Jam  vos  aciem,  et  pnelia,  et  hostem  poscltis.  Sil. 

5.  Amphibolia  is  the  use  of  equivocal  words  or  constructions ;  as,  Gallus, 
a  Gaul,  or  a  cock.    Mo  te,  JEaclda,  Rornanos  vinclre  posse.  Quinct. 

6.  Idiotism  is  a  construction  peculiar  to  one  or  more  languages  :  thus, 
the  ablative  after  comparatives  is  a  Latinism.     When  a  peculiarity  of  one 
language  is  imitated  in  another,  this  is  also  called  idiotism.     Thus,  Mitte 
mihiverbum,  instead  of  Fac  me  certiorem,  is  an  Anglicism. 


304  APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING  ;  TIME. 

ROMAN    MODE    OF   RECKONING. 
I.    OF   TIME. 

<§>  326*  1.  The  calendar  of  the  Romans  agreed  with  our 
own  in  the  number  of  months,  and  of  the  days  in  each ;  but, 
instead  of  reckoning  in  an  uninterrupted  series  from  the  first 
to  the  last  day  of  a  month,  they  had  three  points  from  which 
their  days  were  counted — the  calends,  the  nones,  and  the  ides. 
The  calends  were  always  the  first  day  of  the  month.  The 
nones  were  the  fifth,  and  the  ides  the  thirteenth;  except  in 
March,  May,  July,  and  October,  in  which  the  nones  occurred 
on  the  seventh  day,  and  the  ides  on  the  fifteenth. 

2.  They  always  counted  forwards,  from  the  day  whose  date 
was  to  be  determined  to  the  next  calends,  nones,  or  ides,  and 
designated  the  day  by  its  distance  from  such  point.     After  the 
first  day  of  the  month,  therefore,  they  began  to  reckon  so  many 
days  before  the  nones  ;  after  the  nones,  so  many  days  before  the 
ides ;  after  the  ides,  so  many  before  the  calends,  of  the  next 
month. 

Thus,  the  second  of  January  was  denoted  by  quarto  nonas  Januarias, 
or  Januarii,  sc.  die  ante ;  the  third,  tertio  nonas ;  the  fourth, pridie  nonas; 
and  the  fifth,  nonis.  The  sixth  was  denoted  by  octavo  idus;  the  seventh, 
septtmo  idus ;  and  so  on  to  the  thirteenth,  on  which  the  ides  fell.  The 
fourteenth  was  denoted  by  undevigeslmo  calendas  Felruarias,  or  Felru- 
arii ;  and  so  on  to  the  end:  of  the  month. 

3.  The  day  preceding  the  calends,  nones,  and  ides,  was  term- 
ed pridie  calendas,  &/c.,  sc.  ante:  in  designating  the  other  days, 
both  the  day  of  the  calends,  &c.,  and  that  whose  date  was  to 
be  determined,  were  reckoned  ;  hence  the  second  day  before  the 
calends,  &/c.,  was  called  tertio,  the  third  quarto,  &/c. 

4.  To  reduce  the  Roman  calendar  to  our  own,  therefore,  it 
is  necessary  to  take  one  from  the  number  denoting  the  day,  and 
to  subtract  the  remainder  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which 
the  nones  or  ides  fell. 

Thus,  to  determine  the  day  equivalent  to  IV.  n^nas  Januarias,  we  take 

>nd  ol 

13,  which  leaves  8  :  the  expression,  therefore,  denotes  the  8th  of  April. 

In  reckoning  the  days  before  the  calends,  as  they  are  not  the 
last  day  of  the  current  month,  but  the  first  of  the  following,  it 
is  necessary  to  add  one  to  the  number  of  days  in  the  month. 

Thus,  XV.  cat.  Quintiles  is  (30-f  1)  31—14=17,  or  the  17th  of  June. 


APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING  ;  TIME.  305 


To  reduce  our  calendar  to  the  Roman,  the  same  method  is 
to  be  pursued. 

Thus,  the  22d  of  December  is  (31-j-l)  32—21=11,  i.  e.  XL  cat.  Jan. 

5.  In  leap-year,  both  the  24th  and  25th  of  February  were 
denoted  by  sexto  calendas  Martias  or  Martii.     The  latter  of 
these  was  called  dies  bisscxtus,  and  the  year  itself  annus  bis- 
sextus. 

The  day  after  the  calends,  &c.,  was  sometimes  called  postridie  calendas, 
&c. 

The  names  of  the  months  are  properly  adjectives,  though  often  used 
as  nouns,  mensis  being  understood.  Before  the  times  of  the  emperors, 
July  was  called  Quintilis,  and  August,  Sextllis.  The  names  Julius  and 
Augustus  were  given  in  honor  of  the  Caesars. 

6.  The  correspondence  of  our  calendar  with   that  of  the 
Romans  is  exhibited  in  the  following 

TABLE. 


Days  of 
our  'months. 

MAR.    MAI. 
JUL.      OCT. 

JAN.      AUG. 
DEC. 

APR.     JUN. 
SEPT.   Nov. 

FEBR. 

1 

Calendce. 

Calendse. 

Calendar 

Calendas. 

2 

VI.      nonas. 

IV.     nonas. 

IV.     nonas. 

IV.    nonas. 

3 

V.           " 

III.         « 

III.         « 

III.       « 

4 

IV.         " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie   " 

5 

III.      « 

Nonse. 

Nonee. 

Non89. 

6 

Pridie     " 

VIII.    idus. 

VIII.    idus. 

VIII.  idus. 

7 

Nonae. 

VII.        " 

VII.       " 

VII.      « 

8 

VIII.    idus. 

VI.         « 

VI.         « 

VI.        « 

9 

VII. 

V.           " 

V.           « 

V.         « 

10 

VI.         « 

•IV.         « 

IV.         " 

IV.       « 

11 

V.           " 

III.         «    ' 

III.         « 

III.       " 

32 

IV.         " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie     " 

Pridie  « 

13 

III.      « 

Idus. 

Idus. 

Idus. 

14 

Pridie     " 

XIX.     cal. 

XVIII.  cal. 

XVI.   cal. 

]5 

Idus. 

XVIII.  " 

XVII.     « 

XV.      « 

16 

XVII.  cal. 

XVII.    « 

XVI.      « 

XIV.    " 

17 

XVI.      « 

XVI.      « 

XV.        « 

XIII.    « 

18 

XV.        « 

XV.       « 

XIV.       « 

XII.      " 

19 

XIV.      " 

XIV.      " 

XIII.       « 

XI.       « 

20 

XIII.      " 

XIII.      " 

XII.         < 

X.         « 

21 

XII.       " 

XII.       « 

XI.          * 

IX.       « 

22 

XI.         " 

XI.         " 

X.            « 

VIII.    « 

23 

X.          « 

X.           « 

IX.          < 

Vll.      « 

24 

IX.         " 

IX.         " 

VIII.       4 

VI.        « 

25 

VIII.      " 

VIII.      « 

VII.        < 

V.         « 

26 

VII.        « 

VII.        « 

VI.          * 

IV.        " 

27 

VI.         « 

VI.         « 

V.            « 

111.     « 

28 

V.           " 

V.           « 

IV.          < 

Pridie  "Mar 

29 

IV.         " 

IV.         « 

III.          ' 

30 

III.      " 

111.      « 

Pridie      « 

31 

Pridie     « 

Pridie     « 

26* 

306  APPENDIX.  —ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING  J  MONEY. 

7.  The  Latins  not  only  said  tertio,  pridie,  &c.,  calendas, 
&/c.,  but  also  ante  diem  tertium,  &c.,  calendas,  &,c. ;  and  the 
latter  form  in  Cicero  and  Livy  is  far  more  common  than  the 
former,  and  is  usually  written  thus,  a.  d.  III.  caL,  &c. 

The  expression  ante  diem  was  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun, 
and  is  joined  with  in  and  ex  ;  as, 

Consul  Latinos  ferias  in  ante  diem  tertium  idus  Sextllis  edixit,  The  con 
sul  appointed  the  Latin  festival  for  the  third  day  before  the  ides  of  August. 
Liv.  Suppiicatio  indicia  est  ex  ante  diem  quintum  idus  Octobres.  Id.  So, 
Ad  pridie  nonas  Maias.  Cic. 

II.    OF    MONEY. 

§  327.  1.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  copper  money  by 
asses,  their  silver  money  by  sestertii,  and  their  gold  money  by 
Attic  talents. 

2.  The  as  was  originally  a  pound  of  copper,  but  its  weight 
was  gradually  diminished  in  succeeding  ages,  until,  in  the  later 
days  of  the  republic,  it  amounted  to  only  ^  of  a  pound.     It  is 
divided  into  twelve  parts,  called  uncicB. 

The  names  of  the  several  parts  are,  uncia,  -^ ;  sextans,  -£% ;  qvad- 
rans,  y^T  ;  tricns,  -£% ',  quincunx,  -f% ;  semis,  or  semissis,  -f^ ;  septunx,  -f^ ', 
bes,  or  lessis,  -f^ ',  dodrans,  -f% ;  dcxtans,  -j-J ;  deunx,  ^-J. 

3.  The  denarius  was  a  silver  coin,  originally  equal  in  value 
to  ten  asses,  whence  its  name ;  but,  after  the  weight  of  the  as 
was  reduced,  the  denarius  was  equal  to  sixteen  asses.     Its  value 
is  usually  estimated  at  about  14£  cents  of  our  money. 

The  sestertius,  or  sesterce,  was  one  fourth  of  the  denarius, 
or  two  asses  and  a  half  (semistertius) ,  and  was  hence  denoted 
by  IIS,  or  HS.  When  the  denarius  was  worth  16  asses,  the 
sestertius  was  worth  4.  The  sestertius  was  called  emphatically 
nummus,  as  in  it  all  large  sums  were  reckoned  after  the  coining 
of  silver  money. 

Half  a  denarius  was  a  quinarius  ;  one  tenth  of  a  denarius,  a  libella. 

The  aureus  (a  gold  coin),  in  the  time  of  the  emperors,  was 
equal  to  25  denarii,  or  100  sesterces. 

The  talent  is  variously  estimated,  from  $860  to  $1020. 

4.  In  reckoning  money,  the  Romans  called  any  sum  under 
2000  sesterces  so  many  sestertii ;  as,  dccem  sestertii,  ten  ses- 
terces ;   centum  sestertii,  a  hundred  sesterces. 

5.  Sums  from  2000  sesterces  (inclusive)  to  1,000,000,  they 
denoted  either  by  mille,  millia,  with  sestertium  (gen.  plur.),  or  by 
the  plural   of  the  neuter  noun  sestertium,  which  itself  signified 
a  thousand  sesterces.       Thus   they   said   quadraginta  millia 


<§>  328. 


APPENDIX.— ABBREVIATIONS. 


307 


sestertium,  or  quadraginta  sestertia,  to  denote  40,000  sesterces. 
With  the  genitive  sestertium,  millia  was  sometimes  omitted ;  as, 
sestertium  centum,  sc.  millia,  100,000  sesterces. 

6  To  denote  a  million,  or  more,  they  used  a  combination  ; 
thus,  decies  centena  millia  sestertium,  1,000,000  sesterces.  The 
words  centena  millia,  however,  were  generally  omitted  ;  thus, 
decies  sestertium,  and  sometimes  merely  decies.  See  §  118,  5. 
So,  centies,  10  millions ;  millies,  100  millions. 

Some  suppose  that  sestertium,  when  thus  joined  with  the  numeral  ad- 
verbs, is  always  the  neuter  noun  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  singular. 
The  genitive  and  ablative  of  that  noun  are  thus  used  ;  as,  Decies  sestertii 
dote,  With  a  dowry  of  1,000,000  sesterces.  Tac.  Quinqua.gies  sestertiot 
5,000,000  sesterces.  Id.  But  this  usage  does  not  occur  in  Cicero. 

The  different  combinations  were  thus  distinguished  : — HS.  X.  denoted 
decem  sestertii;  HS.  X,  decent  sestertia;  HS.  X,  decies  sestertium.  But 
this  distinction  was  not  always  observed. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

§  328.     The  following  are  the  most  common  abbreviations 
of  Latin  words  : — 


A.,  Aulus. 
C.,  Caius. 
Cn.,  Cneus. 
D.,  Dccimus. 
L.,  Lucius. 
M.,  Mnvcus. 

A.  d.,  ante  diem. 

A.   U.    C.,  anno  urbis 

conduce. 

Cal.,  or  kal.,  calcndce. 
Cos.,  Consul.  9 
Coss.,  Consules. 
D.,  Divus. 
D.  D.,  dono  dedit. 
D.D.D,,dat,  dicat,  de- 

dicat,  or  dono  dicat, 

dedlcat. 

Des.,  designatus. 
D.  M.,  diis  mantbus. 
Eq.  Rom.,  eques  Romd- 


M.  T.  C.,  Marcus  Tul-      Q.,  or  Qu.,  Quintus. 


lius  Cicero. 
M'.,  Manius. 
Mam.,  Mamercus. 
N.,  Numerius. 
P.,  Publius. 


F.,   Filius;  as,  M.  F., 

Marcijilius. 
Ictus,  jurisconsultus. 
Id.,  idus. 
Imp.,  imperator. 
J.  O.  M.,  Joviy  opttmo 

maximo. 
N.,  nepos. 
Non.,  nonce. 
P.      C.,     patres     con- 

scripti. 


Pop.,  populus. 
P.  R.,  populus  Roma- 
nus. 


Ser.,  Servius. 

S.,  or  Sex.,  Sextus. 

Sp.,  Spurius. 

T.,  Titus. 

Ti.,  or  Tib.,  Tiberius 

Pont.  Max.,  ponttfex 
maxlmus. 

Pr.,  prcstor. 

Proc.,  proconsul. 

Resp.,  respubllca. 

S.,  salutem,  sacrum,  or 
sendtus. 

S.  D.  P.,  salutem  dieit 
plurimam. 

S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Senates 
populusque  Rornd- 
nus. 

S.  C.,  sendtus  consul- 
turn. 

Tr.,  tribunus. 


To  these  may  be  added  terms  of  reference  ;  as,  c.,  caput,  chapter;  c/T, 
confer,  compare  ;  1.  c.,  loco  citato  ;  I.  L,  loco  laudato,  in  the  place  quoted 5 
v.,  versus,  verse. 


308    APPENDIX. DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 


DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 

$  329.  1.  Of  the  Roman  literature  for  the  first  five  cen- 
turies after  the  foundation  of  the  city,  hardly  a  vestige  remains. 
The  writers  of  the  succeeding  centuries  have  been  arranged 
in  four  ages,  in  reference  to  the  purity  of  the  language  in  the 
period  in  which  they  flourished.  These  are  called  the  golden, 
silver,  brazen,  and  iron  ages. 

2.  The  golden  age  is  generally  reckoned  from  about  tne 
year  514  of  the  city  to  the  death  of  Augustus,  A.  D.  14,  a 
period  of  a  little  more  than  250  years.     The  writers  of  the  early 
part  of  this  age  are  valued  rather  on  account  of  their  antiquity, 
than  as  models  of  style.     It  was  not  till  the  age  of  Cicero,  that 
Roman    literature    reached    its    highest   elevation.      The   era 
comprehending  the  generation  immediately  preceding,  and  that 
immediately  succeeding,  that  of  Cicero,  as  well  as  his  own,  is 
the  period  in  which  the   most  distinguished  writers  of  Rome 
flourished ;   and  their  works  are  the  standard  of  purity  in  the 
Latin  language. 

3.  The  silver  age  extended  from  the  death  of  Augustus  to  the 
death  of  Trajan,  A.  D.  118,  a  period  of  104  years.     The  wri- 
ters of  this  age  were  inferior  to  those  who  had  preceded  them  ; 
yet  several  of  them  are  worthy  of  commendation. 

4.  The  brazen  age  comprised  the  interval  from  the  death  of 
Trajan  to  the  time  when  Rome  was  taken  by  the  Goths,  A.  D. 
410.     From  the  latter  epoch  commenced  the  iron  age,  during 
which  the  Latin  language  was  much  adulterated  with  foreign 
words,  and  its  style  and  spirit  essentially  injured. 

LATIN   WRITERS   IN   THE   DIFFERENT  AGES. 
(From  the  Lexicon  of  Facciolatus.) 

WRITERS    OF    THE    GOLDEN    AGE. 

Livius  Andronlcus.  C.  Decius  Laberius.  Atta. 

Laevius.  M.  Verrius  Flaccus.  Cassius  Hemlna. 

C  Nfevius.  Varro  Attaclnus.  Fenestella. 

Statius  Cfficilius.  Titinius.  Claud.  Quadrigari- 

Q.  Ennius.  L.  Pomponius.  us. 

M.  Pacuvius.  A.  Serenus.  Ocellus,  or  Cselius. 

L.  Accius.  C.  Sempronius  Asellio.  Fabius  Pictor. 

C.  Lucilius.  C.  Sempronius     Grac-  Cn.  Gellius. 

Sex.  Turpilius.  chus.  L.  Piso. 

L.  Afranius.  Santra.  Valerius  Antias. 

L.  Cornelius  Sisenna.  Cn.  Matius.  Tiro    Tullius,    and 

P.  Nigidius  Figulus.  Q.  Novius.  others. 

Of  the  works  of  the  preceding  writers,  only  a  few  fragments  remain. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


309 


M.  Porcius  Cato. 
M.  Accius  Plautus. 
M.  Terentius  Afer. 
T.  Lucretius  Carus. 
C.  Valerius  Catullus. 
P.  Syrus. 
C.  Julius  CaBsar. 

Cornelius  Nepos. 
M.  Tullius  Cicero. 


Sex.  Aurelius  Proper- 

tius. 

C.  Sallustius  Crispus. 
M.  Terentius  Varro. 

Albius  Tibullus. 
P.  Virgilius  Maro. 
T.  Livius. 
M.  Manilius. 
M.  Vitruvius. 


P.  Ovidius  Naso. 
Q.  Horatius  Flaccus. 
C.  Pedo  Albinovanus. 

Gratius  Faliscus. 

Phaedrus. 
C.  Cornificius. 
A.  Hirtius,  or  Oppius. 
P.  Cornelius  Severus. 


To  these  may  be  added  the  following  names  of  lawyers,  whose 
opinions  are  found  in  the  digests : — 

Q.  Mutius  Scaevdla.         M.  Antistius  Labeo.        Masurius  Sablnus. 
Alfenus  Varus. 

Of  the  writers  of  the  golden  age,  the  most  distinguished  are 
Terence,  Catullus,  Caesar,  Nepos,  Cicero,  Virgil,  Horace,  Ovid,  T. 
Livy,  and  Sallust 

WRITERS    OF    THE    SILVER    AGE. 


A.  Cornelius  Celsus. 
P.  Velleius  Paterculus. 
L.   Junius    Moderatus 

Columella. 
Pomporiius  Mela. 
A.  Persius  Flaccus. 
Q.  Asconius  Pedianus. 
M.  Annseus  Seneca. 
L.  AnnaBus  SenSca. 


M.  Annaeus  Lucanus. 
T.  Petronius  Arbiter. 
C.  Plinius  Secundus. 
C.  Silius  Italicus. 
C.  Valerius  Flaccus. 

C.  Julius  Solinus. 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis. 
P.  Papinius  Statius. 
M.  Valerius  Martialis. 


M.  Fabius  Quintilia- 
nus. 

Sex.  Julius  Frontinus. 

C.  Cornelius  Tacitus. 

C.  Plinius  Caecilius  Se- 
cundus. 

L.  AnneBUs  Florus. 

C.  Suetonius  Tranquil 
lus 


The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  should  be  assigned  is  some- 
what uncertain : — 

Q.  Curtius  Rufus.  Scribonius  Largus.  L.  Fenestella. 

Valer.  Probus.  Sulpitia.  Atteius  Captto. 

Of  the  -writers  of  the  silver  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Celsus, 
Velleius,  Columella,  the  Senecas,  the  Plinies,  Juvenal,  Quintilian, 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  Curtius. 

WRITERS    OF    THE    BRAZEN    AGE. 


A.  Gellius. 

L.  Apuleius. 

Q.  Septiinius  Tertullianus. 

Q.  Serenus  Saminonicus. 

Censormus. 

Thascius  Caecilius  Cyprianus. 
T.  Julius  Calpurnius. 
M.  Aurelius  Nemesianus. 

JElius  Spartianus. 

Julius  Capitollnus. 

^Elius  Lampridius. 

Vulcatius  Gallicanus. 

Trebellius  Pollio. 

Flavius  Vopiscus. 

Ccelius  Aurelianus. 

Flavius  Eutropius. 

Rhemnius  Fannius. 

Arnobius  Afer. 


L.  Coelius  Lacta-ntius. 
^Elius  Donatus. 

C.  Vettus  Juvencus. 
Julius  Firmlcus. 

Fab.  Marius  Victorlnus. 

Sex.  Rufus,  or  Rufus  Festus. 

Ammianus  Marcellinus. 

Vegetius  Renatus. 
Aurel.  Theodorus  Macrobius. 
Q.  Aurelius  Symmachus. 

D.  Magnus  Ausonius. 
Paullnus  Nolanus. 

Sex.  Aurelius  Victor. 
Aurel.  Prudentius  Clemens. 
Cl.  Claudianus. 

Marcellus  Empiricus. 

Falconia  Proba. 


310 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


Of  an  Jlge  not  entirely  certain. 


Valerius  Maxfmus. 
Justlnus. 
Terentianus  Maurus. 


Minutius  Felix, 
-oeipater  Charisius. 


Fl.  Avienus,  or   Avia- 
nus. 


The  opinions  of  the  following  lawyers  are  found  in  the  digests : — 
Licinius  Proculus.  Salvius  Julianas.  Sex.  Pomponius. 

Caius. 
Callistratus. 
/Kmilius  Papinianus. 
Julius  Paulus. 


Venuleius  Saturnlnus. 
.rfElius  Marcianus. 
^Elius    Gallus,    and 
others. 


Neratius  Prisons. 
P.  Juventius  Celsus. 
Priscus  Jabolenus. 
Domitius  Ulpianus. 
Herennius  Modestlnus. 

Of  the  writers  of  the  brazen  age,  Justin,  Terentianus,  Victor,  Lac- 
tantius,  and  Claudian,  are  most  distinguished. 

The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  belong  is  uncertain.    The 
style  of  some  of  them  would  entitle  them  to  be  ranked  with  the  writ- 
ers of  the  preceding  ages,  while  that  of  others  would  place  them  even 
below  those  of  the  iron  age. 
Palladius  RutiliusTau-     Catalecta    Virgilii    et 


rus  /L 
^Rmilius  Macer. 
Messala  Corvlnus. 
Vibius  Sequester. 
Julius  Obsequens. 
L.  Ampelius. 
Apicius  Ccelius. 
Sex.  Pompeius  Festus. 
Probus   (auctor    Nota- 

rum.J 

Fulgentius  Planciades. 
Hyginus. 

C.  Cajsar  Germanicus. 
P.  Victor. 
P.  Vegetius. 
Auctores  Priapei6rum. 


Ovidii. 

Auctor  orationis  Sal- 
lustii  in  Cic.  et  Ci- 
ceronis  in  Sail. ; 
item  illius  Anil' 
quam  iret  in  exsi- 
lium. 

Auctor  EpistolsB  ad  Oc- 
taviura. 

Auctor  Panegyric!  ad 
Pisonera. 

Declamationes  quae 
tribuuntur  Quintili- 
ano,  Porcio  Latro- 
ni,  Calpurnio  Flac- 
co. 


Interpres  Daretis  Phry- 

gii,  et  Dictyos  Cre- 

tensis. 

Scholiastae  VetSres. 
Grammatici  Antlqui. 
Rhetores  AntTqui. 
Medici  Antlqui. 
Catalecta  Petroniana. 
Pervigilium  Veneris. 
Poematia  et  Epigram- 

mata    vetSra  a   Pi- 

thfleo  collecta. 
Monumentura     Ancy- 

ranum. 

Fasti  Consulares. 
Inscriptions  Veteres. 


WRITERS    OF    THE    IRON    AGE. 


Cl.  Rutilius   Numatia- 

nus. 

Servius  Honoratus. 
D.  Hieronymus. 
D.  Augustinus. 
Sulpicius  Severus. 
Paulus  Orosius. 
Coelius  Sedulius. 
Codex  Theodosianus. 
Martianus  Capella. 
Claudianus  Mamertus. 
Sidonius  Apollinaris. 


Latinus  Pacatus. 
Claudius  Mamertlnus, 

et  alii,  quorum  sunt 

Panegyrlci  veteres. 
Alclrnus  Avltus. 
Manl.  Severinus  Boe"- 

thius. 
Priscianus. 
Nonius  Marcellus. 
Justiniani  Institutiones 

et  Codex. 


Arator. 

M.    Aurelius   Cassido- 

rus. 
Fl.   Cresconius  Corip- 

pus. 

Venantius  Fortunatus. 
Isidorus  Hispalensis. 
Anonymus  Ravennas 
Aldhelmus   or  Althel- 

rnus. 
Paulus  Diaconus. 


INDEX. 


The  figures  in  the  following  Index  designate  the  sections,  and  their  divisions :  m.  stands 
for  remark^  N.  for  note,  and  E.  for  exception. 


A,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  of  3d 
dec.,  gender  of,  66  ;  genitive  of,  68— 
increment  in,  3d  dec.,  287,3;  plural, 
288 ;  of  verbs,  290— final,  quantity  of, 
294. 

A,  ab,  abs,  how  used,  195,  R.  2. 

Abbreviations,  328. 

Abdico,  construction  of,  251,  R.  2. 

Ablative,  37— sing.,  3d  dec.,  82 ;  of  ad- 
jectives, 3d  dec.,  113  and  114 — plur., 
1st  dec.,  43;  3d  dec.,  84;  4th  dec., 
89,  5— used  adverbially,  192, 1.,  II.— 
of  character,  quality,  &c.,  211,  R.  6 — 
after  prepositions,  241 — of  situation, 
&c.,  after  sum,  245,  III. — after  partici- 
ples denoting  origin,  246— of  cause, 
&c.,  247 — of  agent,  248— of  a  noun, 
with  which,  &c.,  249 ;  in  accordance 
with  which,  249,  II. — of  accompani- 
ment, 249,  III. — denoting  in  what  re- 
spect,  250 — after  adjectives  of  plenty 
or  want,  250 — after  verb*  of  abound- 
ing, &,c.,250 — with/aczo  and  sum,  250, 


251 


3 — after  verbs  of  depriving,  &c., 
if  price,  252— of  time,  253— of 


place,  where,  254 ;  whence,  255 — after 
comparatives,  256 — after  alius,  256, 
R.  14 — of  degree  of  difference,  256, 
R.  16 — absolute,  257;  do.,  without  a 
participle,  257,  R.  7;  do.,  with  a 
clause  instead  of  a  noun,  257,  R.  8. 

Abounding  and  wanting,  verbs  of,  with 
abl.,  250— with  gen.,  220,  (3.) 

Abstract  nouns,  z6 — formation  of,  101 
and  102. 

Abus,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  in,  43, 

Ac  si  with  subj.,  263,  2. 

Acatalectic  verse,  304. 

Accents,  5. 

Accentuation,  14. 

Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  249,  III. 

Accordance,  abl.  of,  249,  II. 


Accusative,  37  —  sing.,  3d  dec.,  79  ;  of 
Greek  nouns,  80—  plur.,  3d  dec.,  85  — 
neuter,  used  adverbially,  192,  TL,  4, 
and  205,  R.  10—  after  verbs,  229-234 
—omitted,  229,  R.  4—  infinitive  instead 
of,  2*29,  R.  5  —  of  a  person,  after  mis$- 
ret,  &,c.,  229,  R.  6  ;  after  juvat,  &c., 
229,  R.  7—  after  neuter  verbs,  232  — 
after  compound  verbs,  233—  after  ver- 
bal  nouns,  233,  N.—  of  part  affected, 
234,  H.—  after  prepositions,  235—  of 
time  and  space,  236  —  of  place,  237  — 
after  adverbs  and  interjections,  238— 
as  subject,  239. 

Accusatives,  two,  after  what  verbs,  230 
—  latter  of,  after  passive  voice,  234. 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verbs  of,  with 
gen.,  217. 

Acephalous  verse,  304. 

Active  voice,  141. 

"  verb,  141—  object  of,  229  —  two 

cases  after,  229,  R.  1  —  omitted,  229, 
R.  3. 

Adjectives,  104-131  —  classes  of,  104  — 
declension  of,  105—  gen.  sing,  of,  112, 
114  —  abl.  sing,  of,  113,  114—  nom.  ana 

fen.  plur.  of,  113,  114—  irregular,  115, 
16  —  derivation  of,  128—  verbal,  129 
—participial,  13CV—  adverbial,  130  — 
repositional,  130  —  composition  of, 
31—  how  modified,  201,  III.,  R.  2— 
agreement  of,  205—  either  modifiers 
or  predicates,  205,  N.  1  —  with  two  or 
more  nouns,  205,  R.  2—  with  a  collec- 
tive noun,  205,  R.  3  —  sing,  with  a  plur. 
noun,  205,  R.  4  —  dat.  of,  for  ace.,  205, 
R.  6  —  without  a  noun,  205,  R.  7  —  with 
infinitives,  clauses,  &c.,  205,  R.  8— 
with  gen.  instead  of  their  own  case, 
205,  R.  9,  and  212,  R.  3  —  used  parti- 
tively,  gender  of,  205,  R.  12  —  instead 
of  adverbs,  205,  R.  15  —  primus,  medi- 


p 
1 


312 


INDEX. 


us,  &c.,  signification  of,  205,  R.  17— 
agreeing  with  relative  instead  of  ante- 
cedent, 206,  (7,)— gen.  after,  213— 
gen.  or  abl.  after,  213,  R.  5— dat.  after, 
222— gen.  or  dat.  after,  213,  R.  6,  and 
222,  R.  2— of  plenty  or  want,  with  abl., 
250— followed  by  infin.,  270,  B.  1— 
place  of,  279,  7. 

Adjective  pronouns,  134-139 — classes 
of,  134— agreement  of,  205. 

Admonishing,  verbs  of,  with  gen.,  218. 

Adorning  and  arraying,  verbs  of.  with 

abi.,  m. 

Adonic  verse,  312. 

Adverbial  adjectives,  130. 

Adverbs,  190-194 numeral,  119 of 

place,  mutual  relation  of,  191,  R.  1 — 
derivation  of,  192 — composition  of, 
193— comparison  of,  194— how  modi- 
fied, 201,  III.  R.  4 — used  as  adjectives, 
205,  R.  11— with  gen.,  212,  R.  4— with 
dat.,  228,  (1 ,)— with  ace.,  238— use  of, 
277 — two  negatives,  force  of,  277,  R. 
3-5— equivalent  to  phrases,  277,  R. 
8 — of  likeness,  as  connectives,  278.  R. 
l_place  of,  279, 15. 

^Enigma,  324,  7. 

Affection  of  the  mind,  verbs  denoting, 
with  gen.,  220. 

Agent,  dative  of,  225,  II.,  III. — when 
wanting,  225,  III.,  R.  1— abl.  of;  248. 

Ages  of  Roman  literature,  329. 

Agnominatio,  324,  25. 

Agreement,  defined,  203,  6— of  adjec- 
tives, adjective  pronouns,  and  partici- 
ples, 205— of  relatives,  206. 

At,  genitive  in,  43 — quantity  of  the  a  in, 
283,  E.  3. 

Aio,  183,  4— its  place  in  a  sentence, 
279,  6. 

Al,  nouns  in,  abl.  of,  82 — increment  of, 
287,  E.  (A.)  1. 

Alcaic— greater,  318,  HI.— lesser,  318, 

Alcmanian  dactylic  tetrameter,  312. 

Alls,  aris,  atili*,  adj.  in,  128,  2. 

Aliquis,  declined,  138— how  used,  207, 
R.  30. 

Alius,  how  declined,  107 — how  used,  207, 
R.  32— with  abl.,  256,  R.  14. 

Allegory,  324,  7. 

Alliteration,  324,  26. 

Alter,  how  declined,  1 07— how  used,  207, 
R.  32,  and  212,  R.  2,  N.  1. 

Ambo,  how  declined,  118. 

Amphibolia,  325,  5. 

Amplificatives,  nouns,  100,  4— adjec- 
tives, 104,  and  128,  4. 

Anabasis,  324,  22. 

Anacoluthon,  323,  3,  (5.) 

Anacreontic  iambic  dimSter,  314,  IX. 


Anadiplosis,  324,  17. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  281. 

Anapaestic,  metre.313,303 — monometer, 
313— dimeter,  313. 

Anaph6ra,  324, 13. 

Anastr6phe,  323,  4,  (1.) 

Ante,  diem  col.,  &c.,  326, 7. 

Antanaclasis,  324, 12. 

Antecedent,  136 — understood,  206,  (3,) 
(4,) — its  place  supplied  by  a  demon- 
strative, 206,  (3,)— in  the  case  of  the 
relative,  206,  (6.) 

Antepenult,  13—quantity  of,  292. 

Ant&quam,  by  what  mood  followed, 
263,  3. 

Antimeria.  323,  3,  (1.) 

Antiphrasis,  324,  10. 

Antiptosis,  323,  3,  (3.) 

Antithesis,  322,  and  324,  27. 

Antonomasia,  324,  8. 

Ap&ge,  183,  10. 

Aphaeresis,  322. 

ApocSpe,  322. 

Apod6sis,  261. 

Aposiopesis,  324,  33. 

Apostr6phe,  324,  35. 

Appendix,  322-329. 

Apposition,  204— to  two  or  more  nouns, 
204,  R.  5 — to  nouns  connected  by  cum, 
204,  R.  5 — to  proper  names  of  differ- 
ent genders,  204,  R.  5 — gen.  instead 
of,  204,  R.  6— abl.  with  gen.,  204,  R. 
7— of  parts  with  a  whole,  204,  R.  10, 
and  212,  R.  2,  N.  5 — nouns  in,  place 
of,  279,  9. 

Aptotes,  94. 

Ar,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66, 67 — gen.  of, 
70,  71— abl.  of,  82— increment  of,  287, 
E.  (A.)  1. 

Archaism,  323,  R.  (1.) 

Archilochia*,  penthemimeris,  312 — iam- 
bic trimeter,  314,  V.— do.  dimeter, 
314,  VII.— heptameter,  318,  IV. 

Arium,  nouns  in,  100,  8. 

Arius,  adj.  in,  128,  3. 

Arrangement,  of  words,  279— of  clauses, 
280. 

Arsis  and  thesis,  308. 

As,  genitives  in,  43— nouns  in,  of  3d  dec., 
gender  of,  62 ;  gen.  of,  72 — and  anus, 
adj.  in,  128,  6— final,  quantity  of,  300. 

As,  Roman,  value  of,  327 — how  divided, 
327. 

Asclepiadic  tetrameter,  316,  III. 

Asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  verbs 
of,  two  ace,  after,  231. 

Assuesco,  with  abl.,  245,  II. — with  dat., 
245,  II.,  R.  1. 

Asyndeton,  323,  1,  (1.) 

Attraction,  206,  (6.) 

Audeo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2* 


INDEX. 


313 


Audiens,  construction  of,  222,  R.  1. 

Aureus,  value  of,  327,  3. 

Ausim,  183,  R.  1. 

Authority,     quantity    determined     by, 

282,  4. 
AD  and  atu,  in  the  2d  and  3d  roots  of 

verbs,  164. 
Am,  183,  8. 
Ax,  adj.  in,  129, 6— verbals  in,  with  gen., 

213,  R.  1. 


B. 

B  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Barbarism,  325. 1. 

Belli,  construction  of,  221,  R.  3. 

Bilis,  adjectives  in,  129,  3- — with  dative, 

222. 

Bos,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  84,  and  286, 5, 
Brachycatalectic  verse,  304. 
Brazen  age,  329,  4. 
Bucolic  caesura,  310,  6. 
Bundus,  adjectives  in,  129, 1 — with  ace., 

233,  w. 


0. 

C,  sound  of,  10— nouns  in,  gender  of, 
66  j  gen.  of,  70— final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Caesura,  309— different  kinds  of,  309— 
in  hexameter  verse,  310,  3-6 — in  pen- 
tameter verse,  311,  2 — in  iambic  verse, 
314,  I.  andX. — in  trochaic  verse,  315, 
I.— in  choriambic  verse,  316,  III. 

Caesural  pause,  309,  3. 

Calends.  326. 

Cardinal  numbers,  117  and  118. 

Cases  of  nouns,  36  and  37. 

Catabasis,  324,  22. 

Catachresis,  324. 1. 

Catalectic  verse,  304. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  247 — ace.  of  with  prepo- 
sitions, 247,  R.  1. 

Ce  and  cine,  enclitic,  134,  R.  4. 

Cedo,  183,  11. 

Celo,  with  two  accusatives,  231. 

Ceu,  with  subjunctive,  263,  2. 

Ch,  sound  of,  10. 

Character  or  quality,  gen.  of,  211,  R.  6. 

Choliambus,  314,  II. 

Choriambic,  metre,  316  and  303 — pen- 
tameter, 316, 1.— tetrameter,  316,  II.— 
trimeter,  316,  IV. — trimeter  catalectic, 
316,  V.— dimeter,  316,  VI. 

Clam,  government  of,  235,  (5.) 

Clause,  as  a  logical  subject,  201,  IV. 

Clauses,  203— -how  connected,  203,  4, 
and  278,  R.  3 — arrangement  of,  280- 

Climax,  324, 21. 

27 


Ccepi,  183,  2. 

Collective  nouns,  26 — number  of  their 
verbs,  209,  R.I  1. 

Common,  nouns,  26— gender,  30 — sylla 
ble,  282,  2. 

Comparative  degree,  123 — formation  of, 
124. 

Comparatives,  declined,  110 — with  gen., 
212,  R.  2— denoting  one  of  two,  212, 
R.  2,  N.  1— with  abl.  256. 

Comparison,  of  adjectives,  122-127 — 
terminational,  124— of  adverbs,  194— 

irregular,  125 defective,   126— by 

magis  and  majnme,  127. 

Composition,  of  nouns,  103 — of  adj.,  131 
— of  verbs,  188— of  adverbs,  193. 

Compound,  subject,  201 — predicate,  202, 
II. — sentence,  203 — metres,  318. 

Compound  words,  how  divided,  23— 
quantity  of,  285. 

Con,  adjectives  compounded  with,  with 
dat.,  222— verbs  do.,  with  dat.,  224. 

Concretes,  101,  2. 

Condemning  and  convicting,  verbs  of, 
with  gen.,  217. 

Confido,  with  abl.,  245,  II. — with  dat., 
245,  R.  1. 

Confit,  183,  12,  and  180,  N. 

Conjugation,  149— first,  155  and  156 — 
second,  157— third,  158  and  159— 
fourth,  160— of  deponent  verbs,  161— 
periphrastic,  162 — general  rules  of, 
163 — third,  list  of  verbs  in,  172— of 
irregular  verbs,  178-182 — of  defective 
verbs,  183 — of  impersonal  verbs,  184. 

Conjugations,  how  characterized,  149— 
remarks  on,  162. 

Conjunctions,  198 — classes  of,  198— en- 
clitic, 198,  R.  2—copulative  and  dis- 
junctive, their  use,  278  3  may  connect 
different  moods,  278,  R.  4  and  5  j  re- 
peated, 278,  R.  7. 

Connection,  of  tenses,  258 — of  words  by 
conjunctions,  278 — of  clauses  by  do., 
278,  R.  3. 

Connecting  vowel,  150,  5— omitted  in 
2d  root,  163,  2. 

Connectives,  place  of,  279,  3. 

Consonants,  sounds  of,  10 — 12. 

Consto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Contentus,  with  abl.,  244. 

Contracted  syllables,  quantity  of,  283, 

Contractions  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162,  7. 

Copula,  140. 

Crasis,  306,  (5,)  and  322. 

Crime,  gen.  of,  after  verbs,  217. 

Cujas,  how  declined,  139. 

Cujtis,  how  declined,  137,  R.  5. 

Cum  annexed  to  abl.,  133,  R.  4,  and  136, 

R.  1. 


314 


INDEX 


Cum,  by  what  mood  followed,  263,  5. 
CunduSj  adjectives  in,  129,  1. 
Cunque,  its  force,  191,  R.  4. 

D. 

V  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Dactylic,  metre,  310  and  303 — trimeter, 
312— dimeter,  312. 

Dactylico-iambic  metre,  318,  L 

Dactylico-trochaic,  heptameter,  318,  IV. 
—tetrameter,  318,  V. 

Dative,  37 — sing.,  3d  dec.,  79 — plural, 
1st  dec.,  43;  3d  dec.,  84;  4th  dec., 
89,  5— used  for  gen.,  211,  R.  5 — after 
adjectives,  222— different  constructions 
instead  of,  222,  R.  4  and  6— after 
idem,  222,  R.  7— after  verbs,  223-227 
— after  verbs  compounded,  with  ad, 
ante,  &c.,  224 ;  wuh  ab,  de,  and  ex, 
224,  R.  1  and  2 ;  with  satis,  bent,  and 
male,  225— of  the  agent,  225,  II.  III. 
—of  the  possessor  after  esl,  226 — af- 
ter particles,  228. 

Datives,  two,  after  sum,  <fcc.,  227. 

Declension,  of  nouns,  38-^0 — rules  of, 
40 — first,  41^15  ;  exc.  in,  43 — second, 
46-54 ;  cxc.  in,  52— third,  55-86 ;  exc. 
in,  68-85— fourth,  87-89  ;  exc.  in,  89 ; 
formed  by  contraction,  89 — fifth,  90  ; 
exc.  in,  §0— of  adjectives,  first  and 
second,  105-107;  third,  108-111. 

Declensions,  tabular  view  of,  39. 

Degrees  of  comparison,  123. 

Defective,  nouns,  94-96- — adjectives,  115 
— verbs,  183. 

7)^,183,13,  and  180,  N. 

Dem,  enclitic,  134,  R.  6. 

Demonstrative  pronouns,  134 — construc- 
tion of,  207— in  apposition  with  a 
clause,  207,  R.  22,  and  206,  ( 13,)— used 
for  reflexives,  208,  (6,) — place  of,  279, 

Denarius,  its  value,  327 — divisions  of, 

327. 

Denominatives,  adj.,  128 — verbs,  187,  I. 
Dependence  defined,  203,  8. 
Dependent  clauses,  203. 
Deponent  verbs,  142,  R.  4— conjugated. 

161— participles  of,   162,  17— lists  of, 

1st  conj.,  166 ;  2d  conj.,  170 ;  3d  conj., 

174:    4th    coni.,    177— increment  of, 

289,  3. 

Depriving,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  251. 
Derivation,  of  nouns,  100— of  adjectives, 

128— -of  verbs,  187— of  adverbs,  192. 
Derivative  words,  quantity  of,  284. 
Desiderative  verbs,  187,  II.  3,  and  176, 

N.— quantity  of  the  u  in,  284,  K  5. 
Deus  declined,  53. 


Diaeresis,  306,  2 — mark  of.  5. 

Diastole,  307,1 

Die,  imperative.  162,  4. 

Dicolon,  319. 

Dicto  audiens,  with  dat.,  222,  R.  1. 

Difference,  degree  of,  how  expressed. 

256,  R.  16. 

Digne,  with  abl.,  244. 
Dignor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Dignus,  indignus,  &c.,  with  abl.?  244—- 

with  gen.,  244,  R.  &-*whh  relative  and 

subjunctive,  264,  9. 
Diminutive,  nouns,  100,  3 adjectives, 

104,  and  128,  5— verbs,  187,  II.  4. 
Diphthongs,  4— sounds  of,  9— quantity 

of,  283,  II. 
Diptotes,  94. 
Distich,  304. 

Distributive  numbers,  119  and  120. 
Distrdphon,  319. 

Do,  increment  of,  290,  E.,  and  284,  E.  4. 
Domus,  declined,   89 — construction  of, 

gen.,  221,  R.  3;  ace.,  237,  R.  4  j  abl., 

255,  R.  1. 

Donee,  with  subjunctive,  263,  4. 
Double  letters,  3. 
Doubtful  gender,  30. 
Due,  imperative,  162,  4. 
Dum,    with    subjunctive,   263,   4— and 

dummodo  with  do.,  263,  2. 
Duo  declined,  118. 
Dus,  participle  in,  with  dat.,  225,  III. — 

with  ace.,  234,  R.  2 — its  signification, 

274,  2,  R.  8— used  for  a  gerund,  275, 


E. 

E,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  of  3d 
dec.,  gender  of,  66 ;  gen.  of,  68 ;  abl. 
of,  82— adverbs  in,  192,  II. — and  ex, 
how  used,  195,  R.  2 — increment  in, 
3d  dec.,  287,  3 ;  plur.,  288 ;  of  verbs, 
290— final,  quantity  of,  295. 

Eapse,  &c.,  135,  R.  3. 

Eccum,  eccillum,  &c.,  134,  R.  2,  and 
238,2. 

Ecquis,  how  declined,  137,  R.  3. 

Ecthlipsis,  305,  2. 

Edo  and  etas,  abstracts  in,  101. 

Edo  (to  eat)  conjugated,  181. 

Ego,  declined,  133. 

Ela,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Elegiac  verse,  311,  3. 

Ellipsis,  323.     See  Omission. 

Emphatic  word,  place  of,  in  a  sentence, 
279,  2,  and  16. 

EnaMage,  323,  3. 

Enclitics,  in  accentuation,  16— conjunc- 
tions, 198,  R.  2. 


INDEX. 


315 


Ennehemimeris,  304,  5. 

Ensis,  adjectives  in,  128,  6. 

Eo,  conjugated,  182 — compounds  of, 
182,  R.  3 — with  supine  in  urn,  276,  II., 
R.  2. 

Epanadiplosis,  321,  18. 

Epanados,  324,  19. 

Epanalepsis,  324, 16. 

Epanaphora,  324,  13. 

Epanastr6phe,  324, 17. 

Epanorthosis,  324,  32. 

Epenlhesis,  322. 

Epistrophe,  324,  14. 

Epizeuxis,  324,  20. 

Epulor,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Equality,  how  denoted,  122. 

Er,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec.,  gender  of,  58 
and  60  j  gen.  of,  70  and  71 — adjec- 
tives in,  superlative  of,  125 — annexed 
to  pres.  infin.  pass.,  162,  6. 

Erotesis,  324,  31. 

Es,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec.,  increasing  in 
gen.,  gender  of,  58  and  61}  gen.  of, 
73  5  not  increasing  in  gen.,  gender  of, 
62 ;  gen.  of,  73— final,  sound  of,  8,  E. 
2 ;  quantity  of,  300. 

Est,  with  dat.  of  a  possessor,  216. 

Etum,  nouns  in,  100,  7. 

Etymology,  24-199. 

Ev  and  etu,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
167. 

Euphemism,  324,  11. 

Eus,  adjectives  in,  128,  1 — Greek  prop- 
er names  in,  283,  N.  2. 


F. 

Fac,  162,  4— with  subj.  for  imperat., 
267,  R.  3. 

Fatite,  with  superlatives,  &c.,  277,  R.7. 

Facio,  (and  compounds,)  passive  of,  180 
— with  abl.,  250,  R.  3 — with  ut  and 
the  subj.,  273, 1— with  participle,  273, 

Fari,  183,  6. 

Faxo  andfaxim,  162,  9,  and  183,  R.  1. 

Feet,  302 — isochronous,  302. 

Feminine  nouns,  of  3d  dec..  62:  exc.  in, 
62-65. 

Fer,  imperative,  162,  4. 

Fero,  conjugated,  179. 

Fido,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2 — with 
abl.,  245,  II.— with  dat.,  245,  II.  R.  1. 

Figures,  of  prosody,  305-307— of  or- 
thography and  etymology,  322— of 
syntax,  323— of  rhetoric,  324. 

Filling,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  249— with 
gen.,  220,  (3.) 

Fio,  conjugated,  180— quantity  of  its  i, 
283,  E  1 


Follow,  in  what  sense  used,  203,  9. 

Forem,fore,  154,  3. 

Frequentative  verbs,  187,  II.— quantity 

ot  the  i  in,  284,  E.  6. 
Frttus,  with  abl.,  244. 
Fruor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Fungor,  with  abl.,  245. 
Future  tense,  145,  III. 
Future  perfect  tense,  145,  VI. 


G. 

G,  sound  of,  10. 
Galliambus,  314,  X. 
Gaudeo,  how   conjugated,  142,  R.  2— 
with  abl.,  245,  II.— with  ace.,  245,  II., 

R.  1. 

Gender,  general  rules  of,  27-34 — natural 
and  grammatical,  27 — masc.  from  sig- 
nification, 28— fern,  from  do.,  29— 
common  and  doubtful,  30 — epicene, 
33— neuter,  34 — of  1st  dec.,  41 ;  exc, 
in,  42— of  2d  dec.,  46 ;  exc.  in,  49— 
of  3d  dec.,  58,  62,  and  66  ;  exc.  in,  59 
-67 — of  4th  dec.,  87  j  exc.  in,  88— of 
5th  dec.,  90 ;  exc.  in,  90. 

Genitive,  37 — sing.,  1st  dec.,  exc.  in,  43  ; 
of  adjectives,  3d  dec.,  112 — plur.,  1st 
dec.,  contracted,  43 ;  2d  dec.,  do.,  53  j 
3d  dec.,  83 ;  of  adjectives,  3d  dec., 
113  and  114 — after  nouns,  211 — what 
relations  it  denotes,  211,  R.  1 — sub- 
jective and  objective,  211,  R.  2 — of 
substantive  pronouns,  211,  R.  3 — pos- 
sessive adjective  used  for,  211,  R.  4 
—dative  used  for,  211,  R.  5 — -of 
character  or  quality,  211,  R.  6 — noun 
limited  by,  omitted,  211,  R.  7  j  want- 
ing, in  the  predicate  after  sum,  211,  R. 
8;  in  other  cases, 211,  R.8,(4, )-(6,)- 
omitted7211,R.9 — how  translated, 211, 
R.  12— after  partitives,  212— after  a 
neuter  adjective  or  adj.  pronoun,  212, 
R.  3— after  adverbs,  212,  R.  4 — after 
adjectives, 213  5  different  constructions 
instead  of,  213,  R.  4 — after  dignus  and 
indignus,  244,  R.  2— after  verbs,  214- 
220 — after  sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing, 
214-— of  crime,  217— after  verbs  of  ad- 
monishing, 218— after  verbs  denoting 
an  affection  of  the  mind,  220— of  place, 
221^after  particles,  221,  II.,  III.— . 
plur.  depending  on  a  gerund,  275,  R. 
1,  (3,)— place  of,  after  neuter  adjec- 
tives, 279,  10. 

Genitives,  two,  limiting  the  same  noun, 
211,  R.  10. 

Gerundives,  how  used,  275,  II. 

Gerunds,  148,  2— by  what  cases  follow- 
ed, 274— -and  gerundives,  gen.  of, 


316 


INDEX. 


275,  R.  1 ;  dat.  of,  275,  R.  2;  ace.  of, 

275,  R.  3  j  abl.  of,  275,  R.  4 :  infin.  for, 

after  adj.,  275,  R.  2,  (4.) 
Glorior,  with  abl.,  245,  III. 
Glyconic  verse,  316,  IV. 
Golden  age,  329,  2. 
Government  defined,  203,  7. 
Grammatical,  subject,   201 ;    cases    of, 

201,  IV.,  3— predicate,  202— -figures, 

322. 
Greek  nouns,    gender  of,  34,  R.— 1st 

dec.,  44 — 2d  dec.,  54 — ace.  of,  in  3d 

dec.,  80 — declension  of,  in  do.,  86. 


H. 

H,  its  nature,  2 — in  prosody,  283. 
Habeo,  &c.,  with  perfect  participles,  274, 

2,  R.  4. 

Hellenism,  323,  R.  (2.) 
Hemistich,  304. 
Hendiadys,323,2,  (3.) 
Hepthemimeris,  304,  5. 
Heroic  caesura,  310,  4  and  5. 
Heteroclite  nouns,  93. 
Heterogeneous  nouns,  92. 
Heterosis,  323,  3,  (2.) 
Hexameter  verse,  310— Priapean,  310, 

Hiatus,  279, 18. 

Hie,  declined,  134~-and  Me  distinguish- 
ed, 207,  R.  23. 

Hipponactic,  trimeter.  314,11.— tetrame'- 
ter,  314,  IV. 

Homo  and  homines  omitted,  209,  R.  2. 

Homceopropheron,  324,  26. 

Horace,  key  to  the  odes  of,  321. 

Horatian  metres,  320. 

Humij  construction  of,  221,  R.  3. 

Hypallage,  323,  4,  (3.) 

Hyperbaton,  323,  4. 

Hyperbole,  324,  5. 

Hypercatalectic,  or  hyperme'ter  verse, 
204. 

Hysteron  proteron,  323,  4,  (2.) 


I. 

/,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  66  5  gen.  of,  68 — increment  in,  3d 
dec.,  287,3  ;  plur.,  288 ;  of  verbs,  290 
— final,  quantity  of,  296. 

Iambic,  metre,  314  and  303 — trimeter, 
314,  I.  ;  catalectic,  314,  V.— tetrame- 
ter, 314,  III. ;  catalectic,  314,  IV.— 
dimeter,  314,  VI.  j  hypermeter,  314, 
VII.  j  acephalous,  314,  VIII. :  cata- 
lectic, 314,  IX. 

lambico-dactylic  metre,  318,  II. 


Ibam,  ibar,  ibo,  ibor,  162,  2. 

Icius,  icus,  His,  and  ius,  adjectives  in. 
128  j  2. 

Icius  or  itius,  verbal  adjectives  in,  129, 5, 

Ictus,  308,  3. 

Idem,  declined,  134,  R.  6 — how  used, 
207,  R.  27— with  dative,  222,  R.  7— 
how  otherwise  construed,  222,  R.  7. 

Ides,  326. 

Idiotism,  325,  6. 

Idus,  adjectives  in,  129,  2. 

Ies,f  adverbs  in,  192,  II.,  3. 

lij  in  gen.,  contracted,  52. 

lie,  nouns  in,  100,  9. 

His,  adjectives  in,  129,  4. 

llle,  declined,  134-4iow  used,  207,  R.  24 
—with  hie,  207,  R.  23. 

Illic,  how  declined,  134,  R.  3. 

Im,  in  pres.  subj.,  162,  1— adverbs  in. 
192, 1.  and  II. 

Imonium,  nouns  in,  100,  6— and  imonia, 
verbals  in,  102,3. 

Imperative,  143,  3 — its  time,  145.  R.  3— • 
how  used,  267. 

Imperfect  tense,  145,  II. 

Impersonal  verbs,  184— list  of  in  2d  conj., 
169 — their  construction,  209,  R.  3. 

In,  government  of,  235,  (2.) 

Inceptive  verbs,  187,  II.,  2— list  of,  173. 

Increment,  of  nouns,  286  j  sing,  num., 
287  ;  plur.  num,  288 — of  verbs,  289. 

Incrementum,  324,  22. 

Indeclinable,  nouns,  94— adjectives,  115, 
3. 

Indefinite,  adjectives,  104— -pronouns, 
138— adverbs,  191,  R.  4. 

Independent  clauses,  203. 

Indicative  mood,  143,  I—its  tenses,  145 
•—how  used,  259— its  tenses  used  one 
for  another,  259. 

Indirect  questions,  subj.  in,  265. 

Induo  and  exuo,  construction  of,  in  pass.. 
234;  in  act.,  251,  R.  2. 

Inferiority,  how  denoted,  122. 

Infinitive,  143,  4— its  tenses,  145,  R.  4 
—as  a  logical  subject,  201,  IV.—- how 
modified,  202,  III. — with  subject-nom., 
209,  R.  5 — for  gen.,  213,  R.  4— its  sub- 
ject, 239 — construction  and  meaning 
of  its  tenses,  268 — subject  of  a  verb, 
269^— depending  on  a  verb,  270 ;  on 
an  adjective  or  noun,  270,  R.  1 — omit- 
ted, 270,  R.  3 — without  a  subject,  after 
what  verbs  used,  271 — with  a  subject, 
after  what  verbs  used,  272  and  273 — 
how  translated,  272,  R.  3— used  like  a 
noun,  273,  N.— its  place,  279, 11. 

Infit,  183,  14,  and  180,  N. 

Inflection,  25. 

Inquam,  183,  5— its  place  in  a  sentence, 
279,6 


INDEX. 


317 


Instrument,  abl.  of,  247. 

Intensive,    pronouns,   135— verbs,   187, 

II.  5. 

Interdico,  construction  of,  251,  R.  2. 
Interest.     See  Refert. 
Interjections,   199 — with  nom.,  209,  R. 

13— with  dat.,228,  (3,)— with  acc.,238, 

2 — with  voc.,  240 — O.  heu,  &c.,  not 

elided,  305. 

Intermediate  clauses,  subj.  in.  266. 
Interrogative,  adjectives,  104  and  121— 

pronouns,  137  5  when  indefinite,  137,  N. 
Inus,  adjectives  in,  128,  1,  2,  and  6. 
lo,  verbals  in,  102,  7. 
Ionic,  metre,  317  and  303 — a  majore,  317, 

I.— «a  mindre,  317,  II. 
Ipse,  declined,  135— how  used,  207,  R. 

28— used  reflexively,  208,  (4,)— with 

inter,  208,  (5.) 

Iri,  with  supine  in  urn,  276,  II.,  R.  3. 
Iron  age,  329,  4. 
Irony,  324,  4. 
Irregular,  nouns,  92 — adjectives,  115— 

verbs,  178-182. 
Is,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62  and  63;  gen. 

of,  74-— final,  quantity  of,  301. 
Is,  declined,  134r— how  used,  207,  R.  26. 
Iste,  how  declined,  134— how  used,  207, 

R.  25. 

Istic  and  illic  declined,  134,  R.  3. 
Itas,  ia,  itia,  ities,  imonia,  itudo,  itus, 

and  tus,  abstracts  in,  101. 
Iter,  declined,  57 — with  ace.  of  place, 

237,  R.  I—increments  of,  286,  2. 
Iter  and  er,  adverbs  in,  192,  II.  and  IV. 
Itus,  adverbs  in,  192,  I.  and  II. 
lum,  verbals  in,  102,  2. 
•         or  itinm,  nouns  in,  100,  5. 
lus,  genitives  in,  how  pronounced,  15— 

in  what  adjectives  found,  107— quan- 
tity of  i  in,  283,  I.,  E.  4. 
Iv    and   itu,   in    2d   and   3d   roots    of 

verbs,  175. 


J. 

Jacto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Jubc.o,  construction  of,  223,  R.  2,  (2,)  and 

273;  2. 
Ju^tm,  quantity  of  its  compounds,  233, 

Jupiter  declined,  85. 
Jusjurandum  declined,  91. 
Juvat,  &c.,  ace.  after,  229,  R.  7. 


K. 

K,  when  used,  2. 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace.  321. 

27* 


L. 

L,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66  ;  gen.  of,  70 

— final,  quantity  of,  299. 
Lcetor,  gaudeo,  &c.,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 
Latin  grammar,  its  divisions,  1. 
Leading  clause,  subject  and  verb,  203, 3. 
Lentus,  adjectives  in,  128,  4. 
Letters,  2— division    of,  3 — sounds  of, 

7— numeral,  118,  7. 
Licet,  with  subjunctive,  263,  2. 
Liquids,  3. 
Lit6tes,  324,  9. 

Loading,  verbs  of,  with  abl.,  249. 
Logical,  subject,  201 — predicate,  202. 
Long  syllable,  282,  2. 


M. 

M  final,  quantity  of,  299,  2— elided,  305, 

Malo  conjugated,  178,  3. 

Manner,  adverbs  of,  191,  III. — abl.  of, 

247  j  with  prep.  247,  R.  3. 
Masculine,  nouns  of  3d  dec.,  58  5  exc. 

in,  59-61— caesura,  310,  N.  1. 
Materfamilias  declined,  91. 
Means,  abl.  of,  247 — ace.  of,  with  prep., 

247,  R.  4. 

Measure  or  metre,  a,  303. 
Memini,  183,  3— with  gen.  or  ace.  216. 
Men  or  mentum,  verbals  in,  102,  4. 
Met,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2. 
Metalepsis,  324,  6. 

Metaphor.  324,  1. — Metaplasm,  322,1. 
Metathesis,  322. 
Metonymy,  324,  2. 
Metre,  303— how  divided,  303— different 

kinds  of,  310-317. 

Metres,  compound,  318 — Horatian,  320. 
Meus,  how  declined,  139. 
Militice,  construction  of,  221,  R.  2. 
Mille,  its  use,  118,  6. 
Mino  and  minor,  in  obsolete  imperatives. 

162,  5. 

Misceo,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 
Misereor,  miseresco,  &c.,  with  gen.,  215. 
MisZret,  with  gen.,  215 — with  ace.,  229, 

R.  6. 

Modi,  annexed  to  pronouns,  134,  R.  5. 
Modified,  subject,  201,  III. ;  itself  modi- 

fied,  201,  III.,  R.  6— predicate,  202, 

Modify  or  limit,  in  what  sense  used,  201, 

II.,  R. 

Modb,  with  subjunctive,  263, 2. 

Money,  mode  of  reckoning,  327. 

Monocolon,  319. 

Monoptotes,  94. 

Monosyllables,  in  e,  quantity  of,  295,  E. 


318 


INDEX. 


4— in  a.  do.  297.  E.  1— their  place, 
279.  8. 

Moods,  143. 

Motion  or  tendency,  verbs  of,  their  con- 
struction, 225,  4,  and  237,  R.  3. 

Mutes,  3 — and  liquids  in  prosody,  283, 
IV.,  E.  2. 

Muto,  with  abl.,  2^5,  II. 

N. 

N,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66  ;  gen.  of,  70 
and  71— final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Names  of  persons,  order  of,  279,  9. 

Nascor,  with  abl.,  246,  R.  1. 

Natus,  «fec.,  with  abl.,  246. 

Ne,  with  subj.,  262 — omitted  after  cave, 
262,  R.  6— after  metuo,  &c.,  262,  R. 7»— • 
with  subj.,  denoting  a  command,  &c., 
260,  R.  6— with  imperat.,  267,  R.  1— 
followed  by  quidem,  279,  3. 

Negatives,  two,  their  force,  277,  R.  3-5. 

Nemo,  for  nullus,  207,  R.  31. 

Neoterism,  325,  3. 

Nequeo,  how  conjugated,  182,  R.  3. 

Nequis,  how  declined,  J38,  2. 

Neuter,  nouns,  34;  of  3d  dec.,  66;  exc. 
in,  66  and  67 — adjectives  and  adj.  pro- 
nouns, with  gen.,  212,  R.  3;  ace.  of, 
with  another  ace.  after  active  verbs, 
231,  R.  5 — verbs,  with  ace.,  232;  with 
abl.  of  agent,  248,  R.  2 — passive  verbs, 
142,  R.  2;  participles  of,  162,  18. 

Neuter,  how  declined,  107 — use  of,  with 
gen.,  212,  R.  2,  N.  1. 

Neutral  passive  verbs,  142,  R.  3. 

Nitor,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Nolo  conjugated,  178,  2. 

Nominative,  37 — construction  of,  209  and 
210— after  interjections,  209,  R.  13 — 
plural;  3d  dec.,  83;  of  adjectives,  3d 
dec.,  113.  See  Subject-nominative  and 
Predicate-nominative. 

Non, omitted  after/ion  raocto,&.c., 277,  R. 6. 

Nones.  326. 

Nostras,  how  declined,  139. 

Nostr&m  after  partitives,  212,  R.  2,  N.  2. 

Nouns,  26-103— proper,  common,  ab- 
stract, and  collective,  26 — gender  of, 
27-34—  number  of,  35— cases  of,  36 
and  37— declension  of,  38-40— of  3d 
dec.,  mode  of  declining,  55 — com- 
pound, 91 — irregular,  92 — variable,  92 
—defective,  in  case,  94 ;  in  number,  95 
and  96 — differing  in  meaning  in  dif- 
ferent numbers,  97 — redundant,  99 — 
verbal,  102— derivation  of,  100-102— 
composition  of,  103 — how  modified, 
201 ,111.,  R.  1 — used  as  adjectives,  205, 

R.  11. 


Ns,  participials  and  participles  in,  con 
struction  of,  213,  R.  1  and  3. 

Number,  of  nouns,  35 — of  verbs,  146. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  117  and  118 — ordi- 
nal, 119  and  12O— distributive,  119 
and  120. 

Numerals — adjectives,  104;  classes  of 
117  ;  with  gen.,  212,  R.  2— letters,  118, 
7 — adverbs,  119 — multiplicative,  121 
—proportional,  121— temporal,  121— 
interrogative,  121. 

Nunquis,  how  declined,  137,  R.  3. 

O. 

O,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  58  and  59 ;  gen.  of,  69— adverbs 
in,  192 — increment  in,  3d  dec.,  287, 3; 
plur.,  288 ;  of  verbs,  290 — final,  quan- 
tity of,  297. 

O !  si,  with  subjunctive,  263. 

Oblique  cases,  what,  37 — their  place, 
279,  10  and  2. 

Obliviscor,  with  gen.  or  ace.,  216. 

Object  of  an  active  verb,  229. 

Objective  genitive,  211,  R.  2— dative 
used  instead  of,  211,  R.  5. 

Octonarius,  iambic,  314,  III. 

Odi,  183,  1. 

OUi,  forz7/z,134,  R.  1. 

Omission,  of  ar  in  gen.  plur.,  1st  dec., 
43 — of  i  in  gen.  sing.,  2d  dec.,  52— of 
e  in  voc.  sing.,  2d  dec.,  52 — of  or  in 
gen.  plur.,  2a  dec.,  53— of  e,  in  gen. 
of  nouns  in  ter  and  ber,  71— of  con- 
necting vowel,  150,  5 — of  w,  &c.,  is, 
iss,  and  sis,  in  second  root,  162,  7 — of 
reduplication  in  compound  verbs,  163, 
4,  E.  1 — of  pronoun  in  case  of  appo- 
sition, 204,  R.  4 — of  a  noun  to  which 
an  adj.  belongs,  205,  R.  7,  and  252,  R. 
3— of  the  antecedent,  206,  (3)  and  (4) 
— of  meus>  &c.,  used  reflexively,  207, 
R.  38— of  nominative,  209,  R.  2  and  3 
—of  verb,  209,  R.  4,  and  229,  R.  3- 
of  a  noun  limited  by  gen.,  211,  R  8— 
of  gen.,  211,  R.  9 — of  a  partitive,  212, 
R.  1,  N.  3 — of  subject  ace.,  239  and 
269,  R.  1— of  ace.  after  an  active  verb, 
229,  R.  4— of  prep.  232,  (2,)  235,  R.5, 
241,  R.  4,  and  248,  R.  3— of  voc.,  240 
— of  quam,  256— of  participle  in  abl. 
absolute,  257,  R.  7— of  ut  with  subj., 
262,  R.  4 — of  ne  after  cave,  262,  R.  6 
— of  non  after  nan  modd,  &c.,  277,  R. 
6 — of  conjunctions,  278,  R.  6 — of  J  in 
composition,  307. 

Opus  and  usus,  with  gen.  and  ace.,  211, 
R.  11— with  abl.,  243— how  used,  243, 

R.2. 


INDEX. 


319 


Or,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  58  and  61  ; 

genitive  of,  70  and  71—  verbals   in, 

102,  1. 
Oratio  obliqua,  266,  1  and  2,  and  273,  3 

—tenses  of,  266,  2,  R.  4. 
Order,  adverbs  of,  191,  I. 
Ordinal  numbers,  119  and  120. 
Oriutn,  verbals  in,  102,  8. 
Orthoepy,  6-23. 
Orthography,  2-^5. 
Os,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec.,  gender  of,  58 

and  61  ;  gen.  of,  75  —  final,  sound  of, 

8,  E.  3;  quantity  of,  300. 
Osus,  adjectives  in,  128,  4. 
Ovat,  183,  15, 
Oxymoron,  324,  28 


P. 

ParabSla,  324,  30. 

Paradigms,  of  nouns,  1st  dec.,  41  ;  2d 
dec.,  46j  3d  dec.,  57;  4th  dec.,  87; 
5th  dec.,  90—  of  adjectives,  1st  and2d 
dec.,  105-107;  3d  dec.,  108-111—  of 
verbs,  sum,  153;  1st  con).,  155  and 
156  ;  2d  conj.,  157;  3d  couj.,  158  and 
159;  4th  conj.,  160;  deponent,  161; 
periphrastic  conj.,  162;  defective,  183; 
impersonal,  184. 

Paragoge,  322. 

Paregmenon,  324,  24. 

Parelcon,  323,  2,  (1.) 

Parenthesis,  323,  4,  (6.) 

Paronomasia,  324,  25. 

Participial  adjectives,  130. 

Participles,  148,  1—  in  us,  how  declined, 
105  —  in  ns,  do.,  Ill—  of  neuter  verbs, 
162,  16—  of  deponent  verbs,  162,  17— 
of  neuter  passive  verbs,  162,  18—  -in 
rus,  gen.  plur.  of,  162,  19—  compound- 
ed with  in,  162,  21  —  when  they  be- 
come adjectives,  162,  22  —  how  modi- 
fied, 201,  III.,  R.3—  agreement  of,  205  ; 
with  predicate-nom.,  instead  of  sub- 
ject, 205,  R.  5  —  perfect,  denoting  ori- 
gin, with  abl.,  246  —  their  government, 
274  —  their  time,  how  determined,  274, 
2  —  their  various  significations,  274,  2 
and  3  —  perfect,  with  habeo,  &c.,  274, 
2,  R.  4—  for  a  verbal  noun,  274,  2,  R. 
5r—  for  clauses,  274,  3. 

Particles,  190. 

Partitive  adjectives,  104. 

Partitives,  with  plural  verbs,  209,  R.  11 
—gen.  after,  212  —  omitted,  212,  R.  2, 
N.  3  —  ace.  or  abl.  after,  212,  R.  2,  N. 
4. 

Parts  of  speech,  24. 

Passive  voice,  141  —  with  latter  of  two 
ace.,  234—  -construction  of,  234. 


Patrial,  nouns,  100, 2 — adjectives,  1 
pronouns,  139. 

Patronymics,  100— quantity  of  their  pe- 
nult, 291,  4  and  5. 

Pentameter  verse,  311. 

Pentaptotes,  94. 

Penthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Penult,  13 — quantity  of,  291 ;  of  proper 
names,  293. 

Perfect  tense,  145,  IV. 

Perfects  of  two  syllables,  quantity  of, 
284,  E.  1. 

Period  defined,  280. 

Periphrasis,  323,  2,  (4.) 

Periphrastic  conjugations,  162, 14  and  15. 

Personal  terminations  of  verbs,  147,  3. 

Personification,  324,  34. 

Persons  of  verbs,  147— with  nominatives 
of  different  persons,  209,  R.  12,  (7.) 

Phalaecian  verse,  315,  IIT. 

Pherecratic  verse,  316,  V. 

Piget,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace.,  229,  R. 
6. 

Place,  adverbs  of,  191,  I.— gen.  of,  221 
— ace.  of,  237;  dat.  for,  237,  R.  3 — 
where,  abl.  of,  254— whence,  abl.  of, 
255. 

Plenty  or  want,  adj.  of,  with  abl.,  250. 

Pleonasm,  323,  2. 

Pluperfect  tense,  145,  V. 

Plural  nouns  used  for  singulars,  98. 

Plus  declined,  110. 

Pcenitet,  with  gen.,  215 — with  ace.,  229, 
R.  6. 

Polyptoton,  324,  23. 

Polysyndeton,  323,  2,  (2.) 

Position  in  prosody,  283,  IV. 

Positive  degree,  123. 

Possessive,  adjectives,  104— pronouns, 
139;  how  used,  207,  R.  36;  when 
reflexive,  omission  of,  207,  R.  36; 
used  for  subjective  and  possessive 
gen.,  211,  R.  3;  mea,tua,  &c.,  after 
refert  and  interest,  219,  R.  1. 

Possum  conjugated,  154,  6. 

Post,  how  pronounced,  8,  E.  4. 

Potior,  with  abl.,  245— with  gen.,  220, 
(4.) 

Prce  in  composition,  its  quantity,  283, 

II.,  E.  1. 

Prceditus,  with  abl.,  244. 

Predicate  of  a  proposition,  200  and  202. 

Predicate-nominative,  210 — differing  in 
number  from  the  subject-nominative, 
210,  R.  2 — after  what  verbs,  210,  R.  3 
and  4. 

Predicate-accusative,  210 — dative,  210. 

Prepositional  adjectives,  130. 

Prepositions,  19.5-197 — in  composition, 
196  ;  force  of,  197;  change  of,  103,  5 
—inseparable,  197 — with  an  ace.,  195 


320 


INDEX. 


and  235— with  an  abl.,  195  and  241— 
with  an  ace.  and  abl.,  195,  and  235, 
(2H5)— how  modified,  201,  III.,  R. 
5 — verbs  compounded  with,  with  da- 
tive, 224;  with  ace.,  233;  with  abl., 
242— omitted,  232,  (2,)  235,  R.  5,  and 
241,  R.  4 — their  place,  279,  10— quan- 
tity ofdi,  se,  and  red,  285;  R.  2  and  3. 

Present  tense,  145,  I. 

Preteritive  verbs,  183,  1. 

Priapean  verse,  310,  II. 

Price,  ablative  of,  252— expressed  by 
tantij  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  252. 

Primus,  medius,  &,c.,  signification  of, 
205,  R.  17— their  place,  279,  7. 

Priusquam,  by  what  mood  followed,  263, 
3. 

Pro,  in  composition,  quantity  of,  285; 
E.  5. 

P  roc  id,  with  abl.,  241,  R.  2. 

Prolepsis,  323,  1,  (4.) 

Pnmouns,  132-139— simple,  132— neuter 
with  gen.,  212,  R.  3;  N.  1. 

Proper  nouns,  26. 

Propior  and  proxlmus,  with  accv  222, 
R.  5. 

Proposition,  200— analysis  of,  281. 

Prosody,  1,  and  282-321— figures  of, 
30,5-307. 

Prosopopoeia,  324,  34. 

Prosthesis,  322. 

Prosum,  154,  5. 

Protusis  and  apodosis,  261. 

Pte,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2,  and  139. 

Pudet,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace.,  229, 
R.  6. 

Punctuation,  5. 

Punishment,  words  denoting,  construc- 
tion of,  217,  R.  3. 

Purpose  denoted,  by  ut  with  subj.,  262 
—by  participles,  274,  2,  R.  2,  6  and  7 
—by  mfin.,  271— by  gerund,  275,  R. 
2— tur  supine  in  um,  276,  II. 


Q. 

QUORSO,  183,  7. 

Quality,  adverbs  of,  191,  III. 

Quam,  with  the  superlative,  127— omit- 
ted after  plus,  minus,  amplius,  &c., 
256,  R.  6  and  7. 

Quamvis,  with  the  subj.,  263,  2. 

Quantity,  adjectives  of,  with  gen.,  212, 
R.  3,  N.  1 ;  after  sum  and  verbs  of 
valuing,  214 — adverbs  of,  with  gen., 
212,  R.  4. 

Quantity,  marks  of,  5 — in  orthoepy,  13 — 
in  prosody,  282,  1 — general  rules  of, 
283 — special  rules  of,  284 — of  penults, 
291— of  antepenults,  292— of  penults 


of  proper  names,  293 — of  final  sylla- 
bles, 294. 

Quasi,  with  subj.,  263,  2. 
Queo,  how  conjugated,  182,  R.  3. 
Qui,  declined,   136 — interrogative,  137 

— person  of,  209,  R.  6— with  subjunc- 
tive, 264. 
Quicunque,  how  declined,  136,  R.  2— 

how  used,  207,  R.  29. 
Quidam,    how  declined,    133,  5 — how 

used,  207,  R.  33. 
Quidem,  place  of,  279,  3. 
QuUibet,  how  declined,   133,    5— how 

used,  207,  R.  34. 

Quin,  with  subj.,  262  and  ib.,  R.  10. 
Quis,  declined,  137 — and  qui,  for  aliquis, 

&c.,  137,  R.  (c.) 

Quisnam,  quinam,  how  declined,  137,  2. 
Quispiam,  how  declined,  138,  3 — how 

used,  207,  R.  30. 
Quisquam,  how  declined,  138,  3 — how 

used,  207,  R.  31. 
Quisque,   how  declined,   138,    3 — how 

used,  207,  R.  35— its  place,  279,  14. 
Quisquis  declined,  136,  R.  2. 
Quivis,  how  declined,  133, 5 — how  used 

207,  R.  34. 
Quo  and  quominus,  with  subjunctive,  262 

and  ib.,  R.  9. 

Quoad,  with  subj.,  263,  4. 
Quod  referring  to  a  preceding  statement. 

206,  (14.) 
Quoque,  place  of,  279, 3. 


R. 

R  final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Reapse,  135,  R.  3. 

Recorder  and  reminiscor,  with  gen.  or 
ace.,  216. 

Reckoning,  Roman  mode  of,  326  and 
327. 

Redundant,  nouns,  99— adjectives,  116 
— verbs,  185. 

Reduplication,  163,  R. — quantity  of,  284, 
E.  2. 

Refert  and  interest,  with  gen.,  214  and 
219 — with  the  adj.  pronouns  mea,  &c., 
219,  R.  1. 

Reflexive  pronouns,  139,  R.  2 — how 
used,  208 — for  demonstratives,  208, 
(6,)— omitted,  229,  R.  3— in  oratio  ob- 
liqua,  266,  R.  3. 

Relative  pronouns,  136. 

Relatives,  agreement  of,  206 — omitted, 
206,  (5,)— in  the  case  of  the  antece- 
dent, 206,  (6,) — referring-,  to  nouns  of 
different  genders,  206,  (9  ;)  to  a  prop- 
osition;  206,  (13,) — agreeing  with  a 
noun  implied,  206,  (11,) — adjectives, 


INDEX. 


321 


construction  of,  206,  (16,)— with  sub- 
junctive, 264 — their  place,  279,  13. 

Responsives,  case  of,  204,  R.  11. 

Respublica  declined,  91. 

Rhetoric,  figures  of,  324. 

Rhythm,  308. 

Rimus  and  ritis,  quantity  of,  290,  E. 
(I.)  4. 

Root  of  words  inflected,  40,  10. 

Roots  of  verbs,  150,  1— special,  150,  2 
—second  and  third,  how  formed, 
150,  3 — first,  its  derivatives,  151,  1; 
second,  do.,  151,  2;  third,  do.,  151,  3 
— second  and  third,  formation  of,  1st 
conj.,  164-166;  2d  conj.,  167-170;  3d 
couj.,  171-174;  4th  conj.,  175-177— 
second  and  third  irregular,  1st  conj., 
165;  2d  conj.,  168;  4th  conj.,  176. 

RUB,  how  construed,  in  ace.,  237,  R.  4— 
in  at/..,  254  and  255. 

Rus,  participle  in,  its  signification.  162, 
14,  and  274,  2,  R.  6. 


S. 

8,  sound  of,  11— preceded  by  a  conso- 
nant, nouns  in,  gender  of,  62  and  64 ; 
gen.  of,  77— final,  elided,  305,  2. 

Salve,  183,  9. 

Sapphic  verse,  315,  II. 

Satago,  with  gen.,  215,  (2. ) 

Satis,  bene,  and  male,  verbs  compound- 
ed with,  with  dat.,  225. 

Scanning,  304,  6. 

Scazon,  314,  II. 

Se  with  inter,  208,  (5.) 

Senarius,  iambic,  314. 

Sentences,  203 — analysis  of,  281. 

Sentiments  of  another  in  dependent 
clauses,  by  what  mood  expressed, 
266,  3. 

Separating,  verbs  of,  with  abl.  251. 

Sere,  future  infin.  in,  162,  10. 

Sestertius,  its  value,  327 — how  denoted, 
3°27 — mode  of  reckoning,  327. 

Short  syllable,  282,  2. 

Silver  age,  329,  3. 

Simile,  324,  30. 

Simple,  subject,  201,  II.— predicate, 
202,  II.— sentences,  203. 

Simul,  with  abl.,  241,  R.  2. 

Siquis,  how  declined,  138,  2. 

Sis,  for  si  vis,  183,  R.  3. 

So  and  sim,  ancient  forms  of  tenses  in, 
162,  8, 

Sodes,  for  si  audes,  183,  R.  3. 

Solecism,  325,  2. 

Soleo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2. 

Solus,  how  declined,  107— with  relative 
andsubj.,264,  10 


Sotadic  verse,  317, 1. 

Space,  ace.  of,  236. 

Spondaic,  verse,  310 — tetrameter,  312. 

Stanza,  319. 

Sto,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Strophe,  319. 

Sub,  in  composition,  force  of,  122 — gov- 
ernment of,  235,  (2.) 

Subject,  of  a  verb,  140U- of  a  proposition, 
200  and  201;  modified,  201,  III. ;  its 
place  in  a  sentence,  279,  2. 

Subject-nominative,  209 — when  omitted, 
209,  R.  1  and  2— when  wanting,  209, 
R.  3— with  infinitive,  209,  R.  5— two 
or  more  with  plural  verb,  209,  R.  12; 
with  sing,  verb,  209,  R.  12. 

Subject-accusative,  239— when  omitted, 
239. 

Subjective  genitive,  211,  R.  2 — posses- 
sive pronoun  used  for,  211,  R.  3. 

Subjunctive,  143,  2— its  tenses,  145,  R. 
2— how  used,  259— its  tenses,  various 
uses  of,  259 — for  imperative,  260,  R. 
6 — in  conditional  clauses,  261 — after 
particles,  262  and  26S— after  qui,  264 
—in  indirect  questions,  265 — in  inter- 
mediate clauses,  266 — in  oratio  obli- 
qua,  266,  1  and  2— sifter  what  verbs 
used,  273. 

Substantive  pronouns,  132, 133 — as  sub- 
ject-nom.,  omitted,  209,  R.  1— dative 
of,  redundant,  228,  N. 

Subter,  government  of,  235,  (4.) 

Sui,  declined,  133— use  of,  208. 

Suliis,  for  si  vultis,  183,  R.  3. 

Sum,  conjugated,  1 53-— compounds  of, 
do.,  154, 5  and  6 — with  a  gen.  in  ex- 
pressions denoting  part,  property,  du- 
ty, &c.,  211,  R.  8,  (3,)  and  275,  R.  1, 
(5,)— denoting  degree  of  estimation, 
214—- with  two  datives,  227 — with  abl. 
of  situation,  245,  III.— with  abl.  deno- 
ting in  respect  to,  250,  R.  3. 

Super,  government  of,  235,  (3.) 

Superiority,  how  denoted,  123. 

Superlative  degree,  123— formation  of, 
124 — with  quisque,  207,  R.  35 — with 
gen.,  212,  R.  2,  and  R.  4,  N.  7. 

Supines,  148,  3 — few  in  number,  162, 11 
—in  um,  by  what  cases  followed,  276  , 
on  what  verbs  they  depend,  276,  II.  j 
with  eo,  276,  II.,  R.  2  and  3— in  u, 
with  what  adjectives  used,  276,  III. ; 
after  fas,  nefas,  and  opus, ^.16, 11I.,R. 
2— of  two  syllables,  quantity  of,  284, 

E.  1. 

Suus,  use  of,  208 — referring  to  a  word 
in  the  predicate,  208,  (7,)— for  hujus, 
when  a  noun  is  omitted,  208,  (7,V— 
denoting  fit,  &.c.,  208. 

Syllabication,  17-23. 


322 


INDEX. 


Syhables,  quantity  of  first  and  middle, 
284;  of  penult,  291;  of  antepenult. 
292;  of  final,  294. 

Syllepsis,  323,  1,  (3.) 

Sympldce,  324,  15. 

Synaeresis,  306. 

Synaloepha,  305. 

Synapheia,  307,  2. 

Synchysis,  323,  4,  (4.) 

Sync6pe,  322. 

Synecdoche,  234,  II.,  323,  1,  (5,)  and 
324,  3* 

Synesis,  or  synthesis,  323,  3,  (4. ) 

Synonymia,  324,  29. 

Synopsis  of  Horatian  metres,  320. 

Syntax,  1,  and  200-281. 

Systdle,  307. 


T. 

T,  sound  of,  12— nouns  in,  render  of,  66 ; 
gen.  of,  78 — final,  quantity  of,  299. 

Tcedet,  with  gen.,  215— with  ace.,  229, 
R.  6. 

Talent,  value  of,  327. 

Tanquam,  with  subj..  263?  2. 

Tanti,  quanti,  &c.,  denoting  price,  252. 

Tantum,  with  een.  plur.  and  plural  verb. 
209,  R.  11. 

Tautology,  325,  4. 

Te,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2. 

Tenses,  144— connection  of,  258 — simi- 
lar and  dissimilar,  258, 1.  and  II.— of 
indicative  mood,  used  one  for  another. 
259  ;  future  for  imperative,  259 ;  used 
for  subj.  in  apodosU,  259,  R.  4— of 
subi.  mood,  their  use,  260,  I.,  R.  1, 
andfll.,  R.  1 — in  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis,  261— of  infin.  mood,  use  of,  268. 

Tenus,  with  gen.,  221,  III.— with  abl., 
241,  R.I— place  of,  279,  10. 

Tenninations,  of  words  inflected,  40— 
of  nouns,  1st  dec.,  41 ;  2d  dec.,  46  ;  3d 
dec.,  55;  4th  dec.,  87;  5th  dec.,  90— 
personal,  of  verbs,  147, 3 — verbal,  150 
—table  of  verbal,  152. 

Tetrameter,  a  priore,  312— a  posteriore, 
312. 

Tetraptotes,  94. 

TetrastrOphon,  319. 

That,  sign  of  what  moods,  273. 

Thesis,  308. 

Time,  adverbs  of,  191,  II. — ace.  of,  236 
—abl.  of,  253— expressed  by  id,  with 
a  gen.,  253,  R.  3— mode  of  reckoning, 
326;  table  of,  326,  6. 

Tmesis,  323,  4,  (5.) 

Tor  and  trix,  verbals  in,  10%  6. 

Towns,  names  of,  construction  of;  see 
Place. 


Tricolon,  319. 

Triemim£ris,  304,  5. 

Trimeter  catalectic,  312,  VII. 

Triptotes,  94. 

Tristrophon,  319. 

Trochaic  or  feminine  caesura,  310,  w.  1. 

Trochaic, metre,315  and  303— tetrameter 

catalectic,    315 dimeter  catalectic, 

315,  IV. 
Tropes,  324. 
Tu  declined,  133. 
Tus,  adjectives  in,  128,  7. 


U. 

U,  sound  of,  7  and  8 — in  gen.  and  voc. 
of  Greek  nouns,  54 — dative  in,  89— 
increment  in,  3d  dec.,  287,  3;  plur., 
288;  of  verbs,  290— final,  quantity  of, 
298. 

{/and  itufm  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs,  167. 

Ubus,  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  89,  5. 

Ullus,  how  declined,  107 — how  used, 
207,  R.  31. 

Ulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Urn,  adverbs  in,  192,  II. 

Undus,  participles  in,  162,  20. 

Units,  declined,  107 — et  alter,  with  verbs 
singular,  209,  R.  12 — with  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  10. 

Unusquisque,  how  declined,  133,  4. 

Ur,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66  and  67 ;  gen. 
of,  70  and  71. 

Ura,  verbals  in,  102,  7. 

Us,  nouns  in,  of  3d  dec.,  gender  of,  66 
and  67;  gen.  of,  76 — verbals  in,  102, 7 
— final  quantity  of,  301. 

Usque,  with  ace.,  235,  R.  3. 

Usus ;  see  Opus. 

Ut,  with  subjunctive,  262— its  correla- 
tives, 262,  R.  1— omitted,  262,  R.  4— 
after  metuo,  &c.,  its  meaning,  262, 
R.  7. 

Ut  si,  with  subj.,  263,  2. 

Uter,  how  declined,  107— use  of  with 
gen.,  212,  R.  2,  N.  1. 

Utlnam  and  uti,  with  subj.,  263. 

Utor,fruor,  &c.,  with  abl.,  245— with 
ace.,  245,  I.,  R.  1. 


V. 

V  changed  to  u,  163,2. 

Valeo,  with  ace.,  252,  R.  4. 

Valuing,  verbs  of,  with  gen.,  214. 

Vap&lo,  142,  R.3. 

Variable  nouns,  92. 

Velut  si,  and  veluti,  with  subj.,  263,  2. 

Veneo,  142.  R.  3. 


INDEX. 


323 


Verbals,  nouns,  102  j  with  ace.,  233,  y. 
— adjectives,  129. 

Verbs,  140-189— subject  of,  140— -active, 
141 — neuter,  142— neiUer  passive,  142, 
R.  2 — neutral  passive,  142,  R.  3 — de- 
ponent, 142,  R.  4 — transitive  and  in- 
transitive, 142,  N. — principal  parts  of, 
151 ,  4— neuter,  participles  of,  162,16 
— inceptive,  173— desiderative,  187, 
II.,  3,  and  176,  N.— irregular,  178-182 
— defective.  183 — redundant,  185  and 
186— derivation  of,  187— composition 
of,  188— changes  of,  in  composition, 
189— compounds  from  simples  not  in 
use,  189,  N.  4 — agreement  of,  209 — 
omitted,  209,  R.  4 — with  quif  person 
of,  209,  R.6 — agreeing  with  predicate- 
nom.,  209,  R.  9 — with  collective  nouns, 
209,  R.  11 — plural,  after  two  or  more 
nominatives,  209,  R.  12  j  after  a  nom- 
inative, with  cum  and  abl.,  209,  R.  12  ; 
after  nominatives  connected  by  aut, 
209,  R.  12 — their  place  in  a  sentence, 
279,  2 ;  in  a  period,  280. 

Verses,  304— combinations  of,  in  poems, 
319. 

Versification,  302. 

Versus,  with  ace.,  235,  R.  3 — place  of. 
279,  10. 

Vescor,  with  abl.,  245. 

Vestr&m,  after  partitives,  212,  R.  2;  N.  2. 

Vir,  how  declined,  48. 

Vis  declined,  85. 

Vivo,  with  abl.,  245,  II. 

Vocative,  37— of  proper  names  in  ius, 
how  pronounced,  14  j  how  formed,  52 
— sing.  3d  dec.,  81— construction  of, 
240. 


Voices,  14i. 

Volo  conjugated,  178. 

Vowel,  before  a  mute  and  liquid,  its 
Quantity,  13,  and  283,  IV.,  E.  2 — be- 
fore another  vowel,  quantity  of,  283, 
I. ;  in  Greek  words,  283,  E.  6— before 
two  consonants,  283,  IV.— ending  first 
part  of  a  compound,  quantity  of,  285, 
R.  4. 

Vowels,  sounds  of,  7  and  8. 


W. 

Words,  division  of,  17-23 — arrangement 

of,  279 
Writers  in  different  ages,  329. 


X. 

X,  sound  of,  12 — nouns  in,  gender  of, 
62  and  65  5  gen.  of,  78. 


Y. 

Y,  sound  of,  7,  R.  2 — nouns  in,  gender 
of,  62  j  gen.  of,  77— increment  in,  3d 
dec.,  287,  3— final,  quantity  of,  298. 

Ys  final,  quantity  of,  3101. 


Z. 

Zeugma,  323,  1,  (2.) 


THE  END. 


